Skip to main content

Full text of "A new, easy, and complete grammar of the Spanish language, commercial and military; with a copious vocabulary, dialogues, a correspondence, fables, and prose and poetical extracts from the best authors"

See other formats 


^mi 


•«% 


A 

NEW,  EASY,  AND  COMPLETE 
GRAMM4|R^ 

OF    THE 

SPANISH  LANGUAGE. 


1 


if^ 


Printed  i</  Richard  Taylor  and  Co.,  Shot  Lane,  London. 


NEW,  EASY,  AND  COMPLETE 

GRAMMAR 


OF   THE 


SPANISH  LANGUAGE 

COMMERCIAL  and  MILITARY; 


Copious  Vocabulary,  Dialogues,  A  Corre« 

SPONDENCE,  Fables,  and  Pboss  and 

Poetical  Extracts  from 

THE  BEST  Authors. 


BY  JOHN  EMM.  MORDENTE, 

TSACHER   or  THR  SPANISH   LANOUAGK. 


A  NEW  EDITION, 


Konbon : 

l^ISTED    FOR    tACKIVGTON,   AI-LBS,   AND    C0.>    FINSBURY    giiVARE 
J.  RICHARDSON,   ROYAL  EXCHANGE;    LONGMAN,    HURST, 
REES,  ORME,  AND  BROWN,    PATERNOSTER  ROW  ; 
AND  T.  BOOSEY,   OLD  BROAD  SIBEET. 

1810. 


/^ 


PCmo^ 


ADVEPaiSEMENT  .  ^  /. 

TO  THE  SECOND  EDITION. 


The  rapid  circulation  of  this  Grammar  is  some 
proof  of  its  superiority  over  contemporary  publica* 
tions;  and  while  the  Author  acknowledges  with 
gratitude  its  adoption  by  several  eminent  Teachers 
in  this  country,  he  is  no  less  under  obligations  to 
those  Merchants  and  Traders  who  have  increased  its 
circulation  by  the  export  of  large  numbers  to  the 
Caraccas,  as  well  as  to  the  Peninsula;  where  the 
Author  has  the  satisfaction  of  knowing  that  his 
Grammar  has  not  only  proved  an  advantageous 
speculation  to  them,  but  has  also  been  found  highly 
acceptable  and  useful  to  the  classes  of  Learners, 
namely  the  Commercial  and  Military,  for  whom  it 
is  more  particularly  adapted.  # 

The  honourable  and  rapidly  increasing  connexion 
between  the  British  and  Spanish  Nations  will,  it  is 
presumed,  render  its  mility  permanent:  and  with  a 
view  to  the  increase  of  that  utility,  as  well  as  to 
manifest  his  sense  of  public  favour,  the  Author  has 
diligently  revised  his  work  throughout,  and  made 
such  correcticms  and  improvements  therein  as  he 
deemed  it  capable  of  receiving. 

London,  ^ 

Oct.  1,   1810. 

a  3 


117 


In  a  few  Days  ivill  he  piiUished,  hj  the 
same  Author y 

1.  SPANISH  EXERaSES,  adapted  to  this  GRAM- 
MAR. 

2.  A  complete  VOCABULARY  of  the  SPANISEI,  EN- 
GLISH, FRENCH,  and  ITALIAN  LANGUAGES. 


The  same  Boohellers  have  recently  puUished  New  and 
Improved  Editions  of  the  following  Spanish  Works  : 

1.  NEUMAN'S  SPANISH  and  ENGLrSH  and  EN- 
GLISH and  SPANISH  DICTIONARY.  2  vols.  8vo. 
1  /.  4^. 

2.'  The  same  Work  abridged.  12^. 

3.  ELEMENTS  of  the  SPANISH  GRAMMAR,  by 

John  Vigier.     4s. 

4.  DON  QUIXOTE,  m  Spanish,  revised  and  corrected 
by  Fernandez,  with  a  Lite  of  Cervantes,  &c.  .4  vols, 
1/.  Is. 

5.  GIL  BLAS,  in  Spanish,  revised  and  corrected  by  the 
same,  4  vols.     l6s. 

6.  GIL  BLAS,  in  Portuguese,  revised  and  corrected  by 
the  same.  4  vols.     14-?. 

7.  DA  COSTA'S  PilSTORY  of  PORTUGAL:  in 
Portuguese.     3  vols.     15s. 

8.  PAUL  and  VIRGINIA,  in  Spanish.     4*. 

9.  SELECTIONS  in  Portuguese,  from  various  Authors, 
with  English  Translations,     5s.  (5d. 

10.  FLORIAN'S  GONZALVA  de  CORDOVA,    in 

Spanish.  6s. 

» 

11.  FLORIAN'S  Smaller  Novels,  in  Spanish.     3s.  6d. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


Abbreviations  made  use  of  ly  Spaniards  in  their 
writing       . .      ....      . .      ......      . .      xiii 

PJRT  I. 

OF  PRONUNCIATION  AND  ORTHOGRAPHY. 

PAGE. 

Chapter  I.     Of  pronunciation 1 

Of  ihe  Spanish  alphabet ib. 

Of  the  vowels ib. 

.  Of  the  diphthongs       2 

Of  the  consonants,  and  their  pronunciation        . .  3 

Observations  on  the  lettersG,  J,  LL,  N,  X         . .  ib. 

Of  accents  . .      ." 6 

Chapter  IF.     Of  orthography ib. 

Of  punctuation ib. 

Of  capital  letters        . .      7 

An  easy  method   of   learning   Spanish  feminine 

words  ending  in  ad,  and  in  English  in  y        . .  8 

P^RT  IL 


OF  THE  PARTS  OF  SPEECH       ..      ..  n 

Chapter  I.     Of  the  article        ib. 

Chapter  H.     Of  substantives 12 

Of  the  declensions  oj  nouns       13 

Of  the  declensions  of  adjectives         . .      . .      . .  15 


Vlll  CONTENTS. 

PAGE. 

How  to  distinguish  a  noun  feminine  from  a  mas- 
culine     .,      .. 15 

Observation  10 

Of  augmentatives        1/ 

Of  diminutives ib. 

Chapter  Til.     Of  adjectives       IS 

Observation I9 

Of  comparatives  and  superlatives       20 

Comparatives  and  superlatives  irregularly  formed  21 

Of  the  cardinal  numbers ib. 

.    Observations  vpon  the  cardinal  numbers     . .      . .  24 

Of  the  ordinal  numbers       25 

Chapter  IV.     Of  pronouns    ' 2Q 

Of  personal  pronouns         ib. 

Declension  of  personal  pronouns ..  2/ 

Declension  of  the  reciprocal  pronouns         ....  30 

Of  compound  pronouns       .. ib. 

Of  possessive  pronouns        . .      . .      ib. 

Of  demonstrative  pronouns         '    . .  33 

Of  cuyo  and  cuya       35 

Of  pronouns  relative  and  interrogative       , .      . ,  36 

Chapter  V.     Of  verbs        ..  38 

Definition  of  verbs     . .      . .      ib. 

Of  the  moods  and  tenses  of  verbs        40 

Conjugation  of  the  auxiliary  vei'b  haber,  to  have  41 
Conjugation  of  the  irregular  verb  tener,  to  have 

or  to  hold         46 

Conjugation  of  the  auxiliary  verbs  ser  or  estak, 

to  be       ' 51 

Observation  upon  the  verbs  SER  and  EST kR       ..  56 

Of  the  regular  conjugations        ib. 

An  alphabetical  list  of  regular  verbs  in  ar  . .      , .  60 

The  second  conjugation  ofregulnY  verbs  in  er      . ,  63 

A  set  of  regular  verbs  of  the  second  conjugation  QQ 


CONTENTS.  IX 

PAGE. 

The  third  regular  conjugation  in'w 6/ 

An  alphabetical  list  of  regular  verbs  in  ir    .'.      , .  yo 

Conjugation  of  a  regular  and  reflective  verb  in  ar  yi 

Conjugation  of  a  regular  and  reflective  verb  in  er  74 

Conjugation  of  a  regular  and  reflective  verb  in  ir  77 
Conjugation  of  irregular  verbs,  in  an  alphabetical 

order        »^      81 

Observation  cm  the  irregularities  of  verbs    . .      . .  82 

A  collection  of  verbs  whose  infinitives  end  in  cer  118 

Several  ways  of  conjugating  a  verb 119 

Of  impersonal  verbs 120 

Chapter  VI.     Of  adverbs 122 

Different  sorts  of  adverbs ib* 

Of  prepositions 126 

jin  alphabetical  list  of  prepositions    , .      • .     • ,  ib. 

Of  conjunctions  • . 1 45 

Of  interjections .,  14/ 

PJRT  III. 

OF  SYNTAX.      148 

Chapter  I.     The  use  of  Spanish  articles     ..     ••  ib. 

Articles  used  in  Spanish  and  in  English     . .      . .  149 

Articles  used  in  Spanish  and  not  in  English       . ,  ib. 

Of  the  partitive  article       151 

Jf'^here  no  articles  are  used  in  either  language      . ,  153 

Of  the  preposition  de , .  154 

The  transposition  of  words         . .      . .      . ,      , .  155 

Cases  in  which  no  article  is  used         ib. 

Chapter  II.     Syntax  of  substantives           ..      ..  156 

Two  substantives  in  the  same  case     .....      , .  ib. 
The  latter  of  two  substantives  is  put  in  the  genitive 

ex             ..      157 

A  noun  collective  general ib. 

A  noun  cQllective  partitive ib. 


X  CONTENTS. 


PAGE. 


Chapter  III.     Syntax  of  adjectives 158 

Concord  and  position  of  adjec  ives       ib. 

Government  of  adjectives l6l 

Adjectives  of  dimerision       162 

Of  comparatiues  and  superlatives       ...     . .      . .  l63 

Chapter  IV.     Of  personal  pronouns  .,      ..  166 

IVAen  they  are  co?ij /motive  or  disjufictive    . .      . .  167 

Of  the  impersonal  pronouns  it,  they,  them         . .  l6c) 

Of  the  right  placing  of  pronouns        . .'     • .      . .  173 

Observations        174 

Table  of  pronouns  conjunctive 176 

IVIien  the  personal  pronouns  are  to  be  repeated  . .  177 

Distinction  betweenitXy  qW^,  and  %i     ,.      ,.      ..  178 

Chapter  V.    Of  possessive  pronouns         ,,      , .    179 

Chapter  VI.     Of  demonstrative  pronouns         ..    181 

Chapter  VII.    Of  relative  pronouns  ..      ..    183 

Chapter  VIII,    Of  interrogative  pronouns       •.    185 

Chaptkr  IX.  Of  the  different  sorts  of  interrogation  180 

Chjipter  X.    Of^the  different  sorts  of  ^«e         ..   188 

Chapter  XI,    Of  indeterminate  pronouns        ..   19O 
Of  todo,  and  its  various  constructions     ...      • .    I94 

Chapter  XII.    Several  modes  of  negation        ..    198 

SYNTAX  OF  VERBS        201 

Chapter  XIII.     Of  the  government  of  verbs    ..  ib. 

Chapter  XIV.     Of  the  infinitive  mood     ..      ..  207 

Of  the  infnitive  present      203 

Observations  on  the  prepositions  para  and  por     , .  212 

Of  the  gerund     .. 213, 

Of  the  participle         ,.      ..      ».      ..      ..      ..  214 


CONTENTS.  XI 

PAGE. 

Concord  of  the  v&rh  with  its  nomi7iative     ..      ..    2l6 
X)hservations        ..217 

Chapter  XV.     Of  the  indicative  mood     ..      ..    218 

Chapter  XVI.  Of  the  subjunctive  mood    ..      ..   221 

JVords  which  govern  the  subjunctive 222 

Words  which  govern  sometimes  the  subjunctive  and 

sometimes  the  indicative , .    224 

Which  tense  of  the  subjunctive  must  be  used        • .   225 

Chapter  XVII.     Of  irregular  verbs 227 

Chapter  XVIil.     Of  impersonal  verbs      229 

Chapter  XIX.     Syntax  of  adverbs     , 233 

Chapter  XX.     Syntax  of  prepositions       ,.      ..   234 

Of  conjunctiojts  and  interjections        236 

Chapter  XXI.     Of  Spanish  idioms 237 

Chapter  XXII.     Of  the  different  significations  of 

andar 240- 

DiJJhent  significations  of  the  verb  dar      . .      . .  242 

DifJWent  signif  cations  of  the  verb  estar  . .      . ,  246 

DijU'trent  significations  of  the  verb  H\Bi.hK       ,.  247 

Difj'erent  significations  of  the  verb  hacer  . .  248 

Different  significations  of  the  verb  IR         . .      . .  251 

Dijfer-ent  signif  cations  of  the  verb  venir  . .      , .  252 


PJRT  IF. 

A  vocabulary  of  words  necessary  to  be  known        , .    254 

Familiar  dialogues . .      , .    287 

Commercial  letters  ..311 

Bill  of  lading  331 

Invoice ji 333 


xu 


CONTENTS. 


PAGE. 

Bills  of  exchange 335 

Extracts . .      . .  336 

Some  recreative  falles  in  verse        34/ 

Don  Quixote's  testament         ..      .. 352 

The  Lord's  Prayer 356 

The  Creed       ib. 


SPANISH  ABBREVIATIONS. 


A.  C. 

j4no  de  Crisio 

In  the  year  of  Christ 

a.  a«. 

arroba  o  arrohas 

25  pounds  weight 

A.  A. 

autdres 

authors 

Adai°'-. 

adrninistraddr 

administrator 

Agt-. 

j^gosto 

August     - 

Ant«». 

Antonio 

Anthony 

Ap^o.  sp*^*. 

apostolico,  "ca 

apostolical 

Art. 

articulo 

article 

Vrzhp*^. 

arzolispo 

archbishop 

B. 

ledto 

blessed 

b.  {in  quoting) 

vuelta 

turn  over 

B.  L.  M. 

leso  las  manos  6  hesal  kiss  the  hands 

B.L.P. 

Icso  los  pies 

I  kiss  the  feet 

J^mo  pe 

leatisimo  Padre 

most  blessed  Father 

C.  M.  B. 

cuyas  manos  leso 

whose  hand  I  kiss 

C.  P.  B. 

cuyos  pits  heso 

whose  feet  I  kiss 

Cam^. 

cdmara 

chamber 

Cap. 

capitulo 

chapter 

Cap". 

capitdn 

captain 

Capp°. 

capelldn 

chaplain 

Col. 

columna 

column 

Comis°. 

cojuiiorio 

commissary 

Comp'^.  c"i^. 

CO  nip  nil  ia 

company 

i:ons<>. 

consejo 

council 

Cor^^ 

corriente 

current,  instant 

D".  0  D^ 

don  or  dona 

don,  donna 

D.D. 

doctor es 

doctors 

D^  D°^ 

doctor 

doctor 

D». 

Dios 

God 

Dho.  dha. 

dicho,  dicha 

said 

Dro. 

dcrecho 

duty  or  right 

b 

'     - 

XIV 

ABBREVIATIONS. 

En«. 

En^ro 

January 

Ex'"^.  ex'"^. 

excelentUimo ,  -ma 

most  excellent 

Exc^. 

excel encia 

excellency- 

Fha.  fho. 

fecha,  fecho 

date 

Feb°. 

Fehrero 

February 

Fol. 

folio 

folio 

Fr. 

fray 

brother 

Franco. 

Francisco 

Francis 

Frnz. 

Fernandex 

Fernandez 

Gue.  gde. 

guarde 

save 

Gra. 

gracia 

grace 

Geni. 

generdl 

general 

Igla. 

iglesia 

church 

Ills 

ilustre 

illustrious 

Ill=»°.  ill"^a. 

ilustrisimo,  'tna 

most  illustrious 

Inq«'. 

inquisiddr 

inquisitor 

Jhs. 

Jesus 

Jesus 

Jph. 

Josef 

Joseph 

J'. 

Juan 

John 

Lib. 

libro 

book 

Lib«». 

libras 

pounds 

Lin. 

linea 

line 

M.  P.  S. 

mid  poderoso  senor 

most  powerful  lord 

M«. 

madre 

mother 

M'-. 

monsiur 

master 

M«.  A«. 

muchos  anas 

many  years 

Mag<*. 

m  fig  est  ad 

majesty 

Migi. 

Miguel 

Michael 

Mnro. 

ministro 

minister 

Mrd. 

me'rced 

favour 

Mrn. 

,    Martin 

Martin 

Mrnz. 

Martinez 

Martinez 

^^'ro. 

maestro 

master 

Mrs. 

maravedis 

maravedis 

M,  S. 

manuscrito 

manuscript 

M.  S.  S. 

manuscritos 

manuscripts 

ABBKEVIATIONS. 

XV 

s. 

nuestro  Senor 

our  Lord 

s^ 

nuestra  Senora 

our  Lady 

.  n". 

nuestro,  nuestra 

our 

-•.9- 

N'lviembre 

November 

.po. 

obispo 

bishop 

:L'^  S""'. 

Octubre 

October 

on^ 

onza  u  onxas 

ounce,  onnces 

;  \  ordV  orns. 

,  orden,  or denes 

order,  orders 

D. 

posdata 

postscript 

^ 

para 

for 

, 

padre 

father      . 

>. 

Pedro 

Peter 

r^ 

por 

for  or  by 

pits 

feet 

. 

plain 

raoney,  silver,  plate 

parte 

part 

puerto 

port 

J,-. 

patina 

page 

PubK 

publico 

public 

^^Vr'. 

real,  redles 

royal,  royals 

. 

reverendisimo 

most  reverend 

l'"'. 

recili 

I  received 

).q^ 

que 

that 

(juando 

when 

, 

auhn? 

who  ? 

f/ nan  to 

how  much 

san  0  sanlo 

saint 

-.  M. 

su  wages  tad 

his  majesty 

S^  S°'-.  S"^. 

sehor,  senora 

sir,  lady 

Septe.  7bre, 

Septieth  bre 

September 

Ser'"°.  Ser™». 

serenisinio,  -ma 

most  serene 

SS"°. 

escrJbano 

notary 

Sup<^». 

suplica 

entreats 

Sup*^^ 

suplicanie 

petitioner 

Ten^«. 

ieniente 

lieutenant 

'i  om. 

tovio 

volume 

XVI 

ABBREVIATIONS. 

Tpo. 

tiempo 

time 

V.  V«. 

venerable 

venerable 

V.  A. 

vuestra  alteza 

your  highness 

V.  E. 

vuecelencia 

your  excellency 

V.  G. 

verbi  gratia 

for  exaniple 

V.  M. 

vuestra  m erced.  or  usled  you 

V.  P. 

vuestra  paterniddd 

your  paternity 

V.  S. 

vuestra  sehoria,  usiayour  lordship 

V.  S.  I. 

vuesenoria  ilustri- 
sima 

your  grace 

V«n. 

vellun 

bullion 

Vol. 

voLumen 

volume 

XmO^ 

diezmo 

tenth 

Xp^«. 

Chrlsto 

Christ 

Xpf^^. 

Christidno 

Christian. 

PART  I, 


OF 

PRONUNCIATION  and  ORTHOGRAPHY. 


Chapter  I. 
PRONUNCIATION. 


X  KONUNCiATioN  is  the  right  expression  of  the  sounds 
of  the  words  of  a  language. 

Words  are  composed  of  syllables,  and  syllables  of  let- 
ters.    The  letters  of  the  Spanish  language  are  as  follow  j 


Pron. 


A         B 

c 

CH         D 

E        V 

ah         lay 

thay 

cliuy          day 

a         ayft 

G        H 

I 

J            h 

LL         M 

hfiny      achey 

ee 

hhota      ayle 

ellyc          erne 

N        N 

o 

V      a 

R        S 

me         eiiye 

o 

pay         coo 

ay  re      aysst 

T        U 

V        X        Y        Z. 

Iny           00 

t 

;«y        equis   eegnega    thata. 

As  the  English  vowels  differ  in  sound  from  those  of  all 
other  nations,  the  first  care  of  a  learner  ought  to  be  to  ap- 
ply himself  to  the  true  pronunciation  of  the  Spanish  vowels, 
A      E      I      O      U 

Pron.         nh         a        €e         o         oo. 

A  is  pronovinced  as  the  English  pronounce  a  in  the  words 
thaty  ask,  are  }  as  a?7;a  a  nurse,  amaca  a  hammock. 

E  is  pronounced  like  e  in  the  following  words,  benefactor, 
henejicial, 

I  is  pronounced  like  ee  in  the  word  steel,  sleep,  steep; 
as  bigamo,  a  bigamist. 

O  is  pronounced  as  in  English,  except  in  the  following 


-£,  PiJONUNClATlON. 

cases.  1st,  in  all  monosyllables  when  not  followed  by 
another  vowel,  as  /o,  no,  it  is  close.  2d,  it  is  brogd  when 
there  is  over  it  an  acute  accent,  as  amo  he  loved,  (to 
distinguish  it  from«wo  1  love,)  temio  be  feared,  suhio 
he  went  up.  3d,  it  is  long  in  doy  I  give,  hoy  to-day  ; 
in  all  other  cases  it  is  pronounced  as  in  English. 
U  is  pronounced  like  oo  in  the  words  goody  cooky  cool. 
Y  has  no  other  sound  but  that  of  ee.     See  I. 

When  two  vowels  meet  together  in  Spanish  words, 
they  must  be  pronounced  distinctly,  as  acaecer  to  happen, 
cacr  to  fall,  amais  you  love,  cantdis  you  sing,  &c.  The 
same  rule  ought  to  be  observed  wlien  ee  meet  together  in 
the  same  word,  as  creer  to  believe,  her  to  read.  This 
must  be  considered  as  a  general  rule. 

Of  Diphthongs. 
A  diphthong  is  the  meeting  of  two  or  more  vowels  In 
the  same  syllable.     They  are  found  in  Spanish  as  follow : 

1.  ia,  as  dia  A  day,  didcono  a  Aq^cow,  diamante  a  dia- 

mond. 

2.  iavi,  as  carnejiawhre  cold  meat. 

3.  iaut  as ^a«:5a  security,  jfacJor  he  who  gives  security 

for  another. 

4.  iar,  as  Liar  to  tie,  estudiar  to  study. 

5.  ie,  as  liebre  a  hare,  rniel  honey. 

6.  ien,  as  hien  well,  lienzo  cloth. 

7.  ioj  as  navio  a  large  ship,  piorno  Spanish  broom. 

8.  ion,  as  porcion  a  portion,  sion  water  parsnip. 

Observe,  that  all  diphthongs  cease  to  be  so  every 
time  tlie  i  is  thus  accented  (z),  as  aviarla  I  should 
love,  daria  I  would  give,  filosojia.  philosophy,  &c, 
p.  iia,  as  ([uarertta  forty,  ^uadro  a  frame. 

10.  uan,  as  tjuando  when  ?  quanta  how  much  ? 

11.  ucy  as  Z>z^ewo  good,  fweya  a  den, 

12.  uen,  as  cwe/2/a  a  reckoning,  cincucnta  fi{ly. 
Observe,  that  u  after  c  or  q  takes  the  sound  of  a  w. 


VROMUNClATiON.  * 

and  when  thus  accented  (ii)  it  sounds  like  ©o>  and 

makes  a  syllable  by  itseli'. 
13.  u«s,  as  pues  but  j  u  sounds  like  oa. 
J  4.  ui,  asguitarra  a  gaitar,  guisado  a  ragmU  >  here  the 

u  is  lost  in  })ronunciation. 
15.  uin,  as  ^uindas  cherries,  guindar  to  lift  up. 

Of  Consonants. 

B  is  pronounced  in  Spanish,  as  in  English  in  the  word 
benefice  beneficio. 

C  before  e  and  i  sounds  like  s,  as  Cecilia  Cecily  a  wo- 
man's name  3  bat  be  fore,  a,  hr,  I,  0,  r,  and  u,  it  sounds 
like  kf  as  Carolina  Caroline,  cahallo  a  horse»  Christ^ 
Christ,  Claudina  Claudia,  creacion  the  creation,  criado 
a  man  servant,  cronologia  chronology,  crucifero  a  cross- 
bearer,  Cuba  a  cask  for  wine. 

C  followed  by  h  in  the  middle  or  at  the  end  of  words  of 
two  or  three  syllables,  sounds  as  if  there  was  a  /  before 
it,  as  in  the  words  mucho  much,  muchachada  a  boyish 
trick,  muchacha  a  little  girl,  muchacho  sl  boy. 

D  is  pronounced  as  in  English. 

F  is  pronounced  as  in  English.  The  Spaniards  never 
double  that  letter  in  their  writing. 

Observations. 
G,  J,  LL,  N,  X,  being  peculiar  to  the  Spanish  language, 
'  I  will  endeavour  to  give  a  true  definition  of  their  sounds 
and  uses  J   but  this  must  not  hinder  the  pupil  from  pro- 
viding himself  with  a  good  master,  in  order  to  acquire 
their  true  pnjnnnciation. 
G  is  only  gaitural  before  e  and  i,  as  in  generacion  genera- 
tion, gigantico  gigantic. 
G  before  a,  o,  u,  is  not  aspirated  or  guttural,  but  is  pro- 
nounced as  in  other  languages ;  as  oaban  a  great  coat, 
gordo  fat,  gusano  a    worm  ;  in    which  instances  it  is 
easy  t<»  pRrceive  that  trie  sounds  ga,  go,  gu,  answer  t^ 
the  English  pronunciation. 
B2 


4  FKvlNUNCIATiON. 

H  is  so  lightly  aspirated,  that  in  many  words  it  can  hard- 
ly be  perceived  3  as  in  ha' lar  to  speak,  Aam /-re  hun- 
ger, &c. 

L  and  LL. — The  single  L  is  pronounced  as  in  English  ; 
the  LL,  like  the  French  liquid  in  the  v^ordsJUle  a 
daughter,  famille  a  family  j  or  like  the  gUo  of  the  Ita- 
lian, mjiglio  a  son  ;  or  the  Ih  of  the  Portuguese  in  the 
word  Jilho  a  son,. yZ/Aa  a  daughter;  &c. :  3S  llamar  to 
call,  llaneza  equality.  Have  a  key,  llegar.  to  arrive, 
llcvar  to  carry  away.  Hover  to  rain,  lluvia  rain: — read 
llamar^  lianexa,  liavej  liegar,  Uevar,  Hover,  liuvia,  &c. 
LL  is  never  found  at  the  end  of  words. 

M  and  N  ?.re  pronounced  as  in  English. 

N.  This  letter  is  quite  peculiar  to  the  Spanish  language, 
and  has  been  adopted  by  them  for  the  French  gne,  and 
they  call  it  n  conlilde :  its  greatest  use  is  found  in  the 
words  seiior  sir,  mafia  dexterity,  manana  tomorrow., — 
read  segnor,  magna,  magnana,  &c. 

The  pronunciation  of  this  letter  should  be  heard 
from  a  master's  mouth. 

P,  Q,  R,  are  pronounced  as  in  English. 

5  is  pronounced  in  Spanish  words  as  if  there  w^ere  ss, 
even  between  two  vowels,  as  in  the  verb  poder  lo  be 
able,  preterite  subjunctive  que  pudiese  he  might  be 
able,  (jue  pudiescn  they  might  be  able. 

T  is  pronounced  as  in  English.  '    ^ 

X  is  guttural,  and  sounds  almost  like  J.-  these  two  letters 
are  so  much  alike  in  pronunciation,  that  the  one  is 
often  used  for  the  other,  except  when  x  is  directly  at 
the  end  of  words,  as  relax  a  clock  or  watch  ;  but  in 
the  middle,  as  lejos  or  lexos  afar  ofl',  they  are  indiffe- 
rently written  by  the  Spaniards :  nevertheless,  to  write 
correctly  one  must  be  attentive  to  the  etymology. 

Z  is  pronounced  as  in  English. 

When  the  scholar  has  read  attentively  these  rules,  he 

may  take  every  consonant  separately  and  join  it  to  each 


PRONUNCIATION.  f 

vowel,  in  order  to  make  syllables,  and  thus  learn  how  to 
read. 

Bahud^jt,  labear,  leler,  bigarro,  hoho,  luhilla,  hralanfe, 
Iraceage,  Iragillas,  Irear,  Bretana,  hrillo,  brnchado. 

Caballo,  cebolla,  cibcra,  coartar,  cubazo,  chachara,  cha- 
ckarero,  chema,  chichkveo,  chocado,  chufeta,  daustro, 
clemente,  cliente,  clocar,  clueco,  crasitud,  crecido,  criador, 
cronografo,  cruceras. 

Dable,  dehaxo,  dignidad,  dobladillo,  duena,  duhura. 

Fabrica,  Fehrero,forrage,fuerte,  Jlagicio,  Jlechar ,  fli- 
bote,  fiacadura,  fiuctuadoTiy  fracasary  fregacion,  frlgS" 
rativo,  Jrialdad,  Jrogar,  Jroniero,  fructuosamente. 

Gabela,  generadon,  girasol^  golpe,  gorgear,  gladiator, 
gleba,  globo,  glutinoso,  gnomomca,  goberjiador,  gobernalle, 
gracejar,  graduadon,  grajado,  greguesquilLos ,  gricta,  gru 
tador,  groseza,  grua,  grueras,  grueso,  grumille,  grunidor, 
gruta,  guacamayoy  guedeja,  guedcjudo,  guia,  guitio,  gur- 
rumina. 

Hadenda,  hechizo,  hidalgo,  hofuela,  huesped. 

Jabalif  Jesu  Christo,  jocQ^amente,  Jordan,  Juegos. 

Labor,  lecdon,  librar,  libro,  lobariillo,  lucema. 

Llamamiento,  llevadUy  lloradera,  iloraduebsj  lluvia, 

Macarron,  mecha,  mljero,  moeeton,  muneco. 

Nausea,  negrear,  niebla,  nodvo,  nutridon. 

Palellon,  pecadilio,  piadoso,  pobladan,  piibertad,  pla- 
ceme,  plegador,  pliego,  plomero,  plumaxo,  praticaj  pre* 
ambulo,  primado,  probar,  prueba. 

Quadema,  quedar,  (juemar,  quipos,  f/nocienU. 
'  Rabear,  rejilla,  riguroso,  rogador,  ruginow. 

Sabandija.  secadillQS,  siervo,  sohnno,  subdupio. 

Tablillas,  iemeraso,  tibieza,  Uxston,,  iwnuUo,  iralajo, 
trebejo,  trigesimo,  irofeo,  trujumoM. 

Vadeable,  velador,  viduno,  uolvible,  vulpeja. 

Xabalconar,  xefe,  xeque,  aibion,  xorgolin,  xugoso. 

Yacija,  T/ema,  ycrro,  yoguir,  yugo,  yusion. 

Zaborda,  %eloso,  zilorgano,  zompo,  zurrador, 
b3 


»  dRtHOGRAPHY. 

Of  Accents. 
The  Spanish  language  has  but  two  accentSj  the  acute 
(')  and  the  circumflex  (*).  The  acute  serves  for  the  pro- 
longation of  a  svllable,  as  vdya  I  may  go,  veo  I  see,  veia 
I  did  see,  v6y  1  go,  d6y  I  give,  junto  together.  This 
accent  is  likewise  put  upon  the  live  vowels  a,  e,  i,  6,  u. 
The  circumflex  serves  to  denote  that  the  preceding  letter^ 
if  it  is  ch,  sounds  like  k  ;  or  if  it  is  x  it  sounds  like  kc; 
as  ch^mia  chemistry,  exdminar  to  try. 


Chapter  1L 
ORTHOGRAPHY. 

Of  Punctuation. 

Punctuation  is  used  in  writing  ^nd  printing  to  de- 
note the  place  where  the  readier  ought  to  stop  to  take 
breath  j  or  to  distinguisli  more  easily  the  diflferent  parts 
of  a  sentence. 

The  stops  are  of  six  sorts,  of  which  the  names  and 
shapes  are  as  follow : 

(  ,  )  Virgula  u  Coma A  Comma. 

( J  )  Pun  to  y  coma .A  Semicolon; 

(- :  )  Dos  puntos^ A  Colon. 

(  .  )  Punto A  Full  Stop. 

( ?  )  Nota  de  ^nterrogacion. .  A  Note  of  Interrogation. 

(  !  )  Nota  de  Admiracion  ...  A  Note  of  Admiration. 
These  stops  are  necessary  to  avoid  obscurity,  to  pre- 
vent misconstruction,  and  for  the  better  understanding 
of  what  we  read  or  write.  Here  follows  the  Use  which- 
good  authors  make  of  them,  and  which  is  grounded  upon 
reason:  A  comma  is  used,  1st,  in  an  enuneration  to  di- 
stinguish the  fhings  enumerated,  as  Las  partes  de  La  ora' 
don  son  el suhtantiuo,  el  adjectivOj  el  pronomlre,  elverho^ 


ORTHOGKAPHY.  7 

elpartidpio,  el  adverhio,  ^c : — 2d,  to  distinguish  the  dif- 
ferent parts  of  a  sentence,  and  to  give  the  reader  a  proper 
time  for  breathing,  as  Hermana  viia,  gran  consueLo  meliA 
preparado  Dios  c/uarjdo  lien  lo  necesitaha,  en  dos  cartas 
luyas,  una  de  18  y  otra  de  20  de  Mayo  que  recihi  a  un 
mUnio  iiempo,  ksfc.  We  do  not  use  a  comma  between  the 
different  parts  of  a  short  sentence  which  can  be  express- 
ed at  one  breath,  as  Tengo  negocios  urgentes,  1  have 
earnest  business. 

A  semicolon  is  used  to  distinguish  the  two  parts  of 
a  sentence  of  some  length,  when  the  first  has  a  complete 
sense  of  itself,  as  Muckos  repulan  como  rudeza  i  imper- 
feccion  la  sencilltz  de  la  nntigua  viuska ;  pero  nasoiros 
sentimos  que  esta  viisma  ddle  la  acredita. 

A  colon  is  used  after  a  sentence  wliich  could  subsist 
alone,  because  it  makes  a  complete  sense  of  itself,  but 
which,  however,  is  followed  by  another,  which  explains 
or  extends  it,  as  La  virtud  y  el  vicio  producen  difeientes 
efectos :  esta  causa  la  miseria  de  los  homLrtrs,  y  esa  haceles 
/dices. 

N.  B.  A  semicolon  or  a  colon  can  be,  and  often  is, 
indifferently  used  for  each  other. 

A  full  stop  is.  used  when  the  sentence  is  complete,  ay 
La  caridad  e^^  la  prim  era  de  las  virludes  Christianas,  Cha- 
rity is  the  first  of  all  christian  virtues. 

A  note  of  interrogation  in  used  at  the  beginning  and 
at  the  end  of  a  sentence  which  expresses  a  question,  a» 
^Esid  su  paare  en  casaP  Is  his  father  at  home  ? 

A  note  of  adraiiation  is  put  at  the  beginning  and  at  the 
end  of  a  sentence  which  expresses  admiration  and  surprise, 
as  i  Que  sohreiimana  Juerza  es  esta!  j  Que  palacio  f 
I  Que  quartos  !     /  Que  gaierins  ! 

Of  Capital  Letters. 
Capital  or  great  letters  are  used, 
1st,  la  the  beginning  of  every  sentence  in  prose*  They 


8 


VOCABULARY. 


are  besides  used  at  the  beginning  of  every  line  in  poetry, 
as  La  virtud  es  amablc,  Virtue  is  amiable.  El  vicio  es^ 
ttlominablef  Vice  is  odious. 

Fabruava  un palacio  el  pcnsarnienio, 

Encima  de  la  pr&funda  memoria  ; 

Pensando  hacer  la  camera  de  gloria. 

Ha  hecho  sala  de  un  grave  tormento. 
2d,  All  christian  and  proper  names  of  persons,  king- 
doms, provinces,  towns,  places,  rivers,  ships,  mountains, 
dignities,  and  professions ;  also  the  names  of  heathen 
gods  and  goddesses,  are  all  written  with  a  capital  letter. 
3d,  The  nann^^  of  arts  and  sciences  begin  with  a  ca- 
pital letter,  as  La  Musica  y  la  P'mtura  son  agradables. 
Music  and  Painting  are  agreeable. 


.^n  tnsy  fn^thod  of  learning  many  Spanish  feminine  Words 

ending  in  ad,  and  in  English  in  ty  ory,  in  an  alphale- 

deal  order. 

City 
Civility 
Community 
Concavity 
.  Credulity 
Perversity 
Cruelty 
Curiosity 

D 
Debility 
Divinity 
Dignity 
Disparity 

E 
Efficacy 
Iniirmity 
Equity 

{Capacfty 
Extension 
Sterility 
Eternity 
Extremity 


Spaniih. 

English. 

Cittdad 

A 

A 

Gvihdad 

Actividad 

Activity 

Comunidad 

Anttrioridad 

Aiateriority 

Coiuamdad 

Ajiligimlad 

Antiquity  ' 

Credulidad 

Aulenlicidud 

Autlif-nticiry 

Crintinalidad 

Autondad 

Autho'ity 

Or  Lie!  dad 

B 

B' 

Curiostd.ad 

Bddad 

Beauty 

D 

Beni;:/iia'ad 

Benignity 

Simn'icity 

Delilidad 

tiobedad 

Dt'idad 

Brevedad 

Brevity 

Disnidad 

Brut  alidad 

Brutality 

Disp  alidad 

C 

C 

'     E 

Calamidad 

Calar-nty 

Eficaddad 

Calidad 

Quality 

Efifermedad 

Canlidad 

Qunntity 

Etjuidad 

Capacidad 
Caridad 

Capacity 
Charity 

Espaciosidad 

Carnosidad 

Carnosity 

Eslerilidad 

Casualidad 

Casualty 

Ettrnidad 

Cerlinidad 

Certainty 

Extretnidad 

V6CABULAUY. 


F 
Facility 
Faculty 
Faiiihility 
Familiarity 
Fatality 
Fecundity 
Felicity 
Ferocity 
Fertility 
Festivity 
Fidelity 
Debility 
Formality 
Fragility' 
FVugality 

G 
Gentility 
Gravitv 
li 
Ability 
Honesty 
Hospitality 
Hostility 
Humatiity 
Humility 

Identity 

Equality 

Illegality 

Imbecility 

Impartiality 

Impossibility 

Impr<  priety 

Impunity 

Impurity 

Incapacity 

Uncerainty 

— Incommodity 

Incompuli'-tlicladlnrompsiiibmtY 
hicrediHlidad     Incredibility 
hicrediilidad       Ir.  credulity 
indcmnuhd         Indemnity 
ihdiKiiulud  liidignity 

Indivuinalidad    Individuality 
Indorilidad         Indocility 
Jnejabilidad        Ineir^bility 
hu'>timaHL:d'td  Inestimabiiity 
hifeniTidi<-nd       Infecundity 
h{fdicidad         Inlclicitv 


I  Iiiferii,ridad 
I  l>-jldrlidad 
I  It'Jiitidud 
\  hifx)Ytnulttd 
i  hipcniutirtnd 
i  luhdiilidad 
'   Inhospitnlidad 
j    hihumuiudud 

Jnmnisidad 
I  Jnvtobilidad 
'\  iHViurtalzdad 
:  Itimuta/ilidad 
i  Insensililidad 
!  Jnlegiidad 

Jnterivi  idad 

Intinvdtid 

Jnuibanidnd 

Inulilidud 

Irreeularidad 

Irrevocahilidad 
J 

Jovialid.id 
L 

Lafividad 
)  Lealdf!d 

Legfiltdad 

Leu  idad 

Liheralidad 

Li  viand  ad 

Localidad 

Lofiganimidad 

M 
Ma^eslad 
Map!  a  mm  idad 
Mnhpiidnd 
Matisedad 
MateriuLulad 
Malmudad 
Mfdiwridnd 
.yendicidad 
M  or  alidad 
Mofiulidud 
Movilidnd 
Mulhplicidad 
Mutahlidad 

N 
Nat.ividiitl 
Xaturnlidad 
S<icendad 


Inferiority 

li;fidelity 

Iniinity 

laformi^ty 

Subtility 

Ii);ibility 

Iiihospitality^ 

Inhumanity 

Immensity 

Iiimiobility 

Immortality 

Immutability 

Insensibility 

Integrity 

Inferiority 

Intimacy 

Incivility 

Inutility 

Irregularity 

Irrevocability 

J 

Joviality 
I. 
Latiniry 
Loyalty 
Legality 
Lenity 
Liberality 
Levity 
Locality 
Longanimity 

M 
Majesty 
Magnanimity 
Malignity 
Benignity 
Materiality 
Maternity 
Mediocrity 
Mendicity 
Morality 
Mortali  y 
Mob'lity 
Multiplicity 
Mutability 

N 
Nativity 
Naturaiity 
Necessity' 


10 

Neutialidad 
Navcdud 

O 
Ohliqkidud 
Obscuridad 
Opdcidud 

P 
Parcialidud 
Pariiadaridad 
Pafcrnidad 
Penalidad 
Perennidad 
Perplexid&d 
Persona  UdaU 
Ptrversidad 
Piedud 
Piuraiidad 
Pi^bredad 
Pofjuedad 
Porosidad 
Posteridad 
Prodigalidad 
ProUxidad 
Proaimidad 
Pubertod 
PubLicidad 
Pusilaidmidad 

^       Q 

Qiianiidad 
Quietud 
R 
Rapacidr.d 
Raridad 
Pealidad 
Rtishiidad 

S 
Sagacidad 
Salvhridad 
Se^nridad 
Sensivilidad 
SeniuuHdnd 
Strenidad 
Seriedad 


VOCABULAiiY. 

Neutrality 

Scvriidad 

Severity 

Novelty 

Siinpiicfdad 

Simplicity 

b 

S6bried„d 

Sobriety 

0])liciuity 

Sociedad 

Society 

Obscurity 

Suoiidad 

Suavity 

Opacity 

SuHimidad 

Sublimity 

P 

Stuicdad 

Fjlthiness 

Partiality 

Sumidad 

Summiiy 

Particularity 

Supei/lindad 

Superfluity 

Paternity 

Sutiiidad 

Subtilitv 

Penalty 

T 

T 

Perpeniiiy 

Temnidad 

Temerity 

Perplexity 

Teniudad 

Tenuity 

Personali  y 

Ttrribilidad 

Severity 

Perversity 

Tortedad 

Obliquity 

Piety 

TolaUdad 

Totality 

Plurality 

TraiKjuilidad 

Tranquillity 

Poverty 

Trinidad  ■ 

Trinity 
Trivia  ity 

Paucity 

Triviuiidad 

Porosity 

U 

U 

Posterity 
Prodigality 

UUimidad 

Extremity 

Unanimidad 

Unanimity 

Prolixity 

Unidad 

Unity 

Proximity 

UnifoTmidad 

Uniformity 

Puberty 

(//lirersolidad 

Universality 

Publicity 

Univrrxidud 

University 

Pusillanimity 

Urbanidad 

Urbanity 

Q 

Uiiii'Jad 

Utility 

Quantity- 

V 

V 

Tranquillity 

Faded  ad 

Vacuity 

R 

Faguedad 

Variety 

Rapacity 

Vamdad 

Vanity 

Rarity 

Fariedad 

Diversity 

Reality 

Felocidad 

Velocity 

Rusticity 

Fcriibiiidad 

Vcrsali'litT 

S 

Firiiidad 

Virility    ' 

Sagacity 

Firtualidad 

Virtuality 

Salubrity 

Fisio^:dad 

Viscosity 

Security 

Fitalulad 

Vitality 

Sensibility 

I  ivaadad 

Vivacity 

Sensualify 

Falnlilvlad 

VclatilitT 

Serenity 

FoiuHhdad 

Volubility 

Gravity 

Fnrncidad 

Voracity 

Falgaridad 

Vulgarity. 

N.B.  The  perfect  knowledge  of  the  alove  jwuns  wait 
spars  a  great  deal,  of  time  and  trouble  to  the  begir.ner,  y 
he  will  take  upon  him  to  learn  them  by  heart. 


11 


PART  n. 

OP 

THE  PARTS  OF  SPEECH, 


J  HERE  are  in  Spanish,  as  in  other  languages,  ten  parts 
of  speech  j  viz.  the  article,  the  substantive,  the  adjective, 
the  pronoun,  the  verb,  the  participle,  the  adverb,  the 
preposition,  the  conjunction,  and  the  interjection.  The 
six  first  are  declinable,  and  the  four  others  indeclinable. 


Chapter  I. 

OF  THE  ARTICLE. 

The  article  is  a  little  word  placed  before  a  substantive 
to  specify  the  extent  of  the  signification  in  which  it  is 
taken  :  the  Spanish  language  has  three  articles,  the  defi- 
nite, the  indefinite,  and  the  partitive. 

1.  Def.     el  ra.     la  f.     lo  n.  [  los  m.  pi.  las  f.  ph. ..the. 
2   ]ndt?f,  a  cJe  (  yvo  una        .a,  an. 

3.  Part,  unos  or  algunns  m.  p).  unas  or  a/gunasf.  pi. .some? 

The  article  has  great  advantages  in  languages  in  which 
it  is  used  j  it  gives  to  the  speech  much  softness  and  pre- 
cision :  it  lias  its  proper  use  and  rules,  as  we  shall  see  in 
ths  Syntax. 


12^  OF  SUBSTANTIVES. 

Qh AFTER  ir. 

OF  SUBSTANTIVES. 

This  Chapter  is  divided  into  four  sections  j  the  first 
explains  the  nature  and  different  species  of  substantives  ; 
the  second  speaks  of  their  case  and  declension  j  the  third 
treats  of  their  gender,  and  shows  how  to  distinguish  the 
masculine  fnmi  the  feminine  :  and  the  fourth  has  for  its 
object  the  plural  of  nouns  and  its  formation  from  the 
singular  number. 


Of  the  nalure  and  speciea  of  Sulstantives. 

A  substantive  is  a  word  which  expresses  the  name  of  a 
person  or  thing,  material,  spiritual,  or  ideal ;  as  hmilre 
a  man,  muger  a  woman,  caballo  a  horse,  casa  a  house, 
virtud  virtue. 

There  are  ♦•hree  sorts  of  substantives  j  which  are  called 
proper,  common,  and  collective. 

The  substantive  proper  expresses  some  individual  per- 
son or  thing  which  cannot  be  divided  into  species  :  such 
are  Pedro  Peter,  Londres  London,  Fernando  Ferdinand, 
Adorfo  Adorf,  &c. 

The  substantive  common  can  be  said  of  all  objects  of 
the  same  kind  :  such  are  reyno  kingdom,  rio  river,  sol- 
dado  soldier. 

The  substantive  collective  is  a  word  singular  which  pre- 
sents to  the  mind  several  persons  or  things  :  the  collective 
nouns  are  general  or  partitive. 

A  collective  general  represents  the  whole  object :  such 
are  la  nacion  the  nation,  el  extrcito  the  army,  lajlota  the 
fleet,  el  parlamento  the  parliament. 


OF  SUB&TANTlVJiS.  13 

'•       A  noun  collective  partitive  represents  only  a  part  of  the 
'    whole  object  j  such  are  una  cantidad  a  quantity,  una  CU' 
ierva  a  crowd,  el  mayor  numero  the  most  part. 

N.B.  8ee  the  use  of  substantives,  rule  Ip  and  follow- 
ing, in  the  Syntax. 

r  SECTION  II. 

Of  the  declension  of  nouns, — cases ,  Is^c. 

Although  the  Spanish  nouns  do  not  change  their  termi- 
nation in  the  same  number,  they  have,  however,  cases  as 
L^  well  as  the  Latin,  as  the  following  declensions  will  show. 

F  Declensions. 

i  Declension  of  a  noun  masculine  with  the  definite 

V-  article  ei. 

Sing.     Nom.  el  rey,     the  king. 

Gren.  del  rey,     of  the  king. 

Dat.  al  rey,     to  the  king. 

Dat.  para  el  rey,    for  the  king. 

Ace.  el  rey,     the  king. 

Voc.  0  rey,     o  king. 

Abl.  del  rey,    from  the  king. 

Plur.     Nom.  los  reyes,     the  kings. 

tyen.  de  los  reyes,     of  the  kings. 

Dat,  a  los  reyes,     to  the  kings. 

Dat.  para  los  reyes,    for  the  kings. 

Ace.  los  reyes,     the  kings. 

Voc.  0  reyes,  o  kings. 

Abl.  de  los  reyes,     from  the  kings. 

Declension  of  a  noun  feminine  with  the  article  la. 

Sing,     Nora,  la  muger,    the  woman. 

Gen.    de  la  muger,    of  the  woman. 
c 


14  or  iUBSTANTIVLS. 

Dat.  a  La  mvger,     to  the  woman. 

I)at.  para  la  mugcr,     for  the  woman. 

Ace.  la  muger,     the  woman, 

Voc.  0  muger,     o  woman. 

Abl.  de  la  muger,     from  the  woman. 

Plur.     Norn,  las  muger es,     the  women. 

Gen.  de  las  mugeres,     of  the  women. 

Dat.  d  las  mugeres,     to  the  women. 

Dat.  para  las  mugeres,     for  the  women. 

Ace.  las  mugeres,     the  women. 

Voc.  0  mugeres,    o  women. 

Abl,  de  las  mugeres,  from  the  women. 

Declension  of  a  noun  feminine  with  the  article  c\. 

Sing.     Nom.  el  alma,     the  soul. 

Gen.  del  alma,     of  the  soul. 

Dat.  a  el  alma,     to  the  soul. 

Dat.  para  el  alma,     for  the  souU 

Ace.  el  alma,     the  soul. 
Voc.         (caret.) 

Abl.  par  el  alma,     by  the  soul. 

Plur.     Nom.  las  almas,     the  souls. 

Gen.  de  las  almas,     of  the  souls. 

Dat.  d  las  almas,     to  the  souls. 

Dat.  para  las  ahnas,     for  the  souls. 

Ace.  las  alma':,     the  souls. 
Voc.  (caret.) 

Abl.  par  las  almas,     by  the  souls. 

Observe,  that  all  nouns  which  begin  with  a  vowel  or  h 
mute  do  not  admit  of  any  elision  as  other  languages  5  but 
the  article  or  preposition  is  written  at  large,  as  you  may 
see  in  the  above  and  following  example.  This  is  a  general 
rule. 


OF  SUBSTANTIVES.  16 

Declension  of  a  noun  feminine  beginning  with  an  h. 

Sing.  Norn,  la  hermaridad,     the  fraternity. 

Gen.  de  la  Iwrmandady     of  the  fraternity. 

Dat.  a  la  hermandad,     to  the  fraternity. 

Pat.  para  la  hermandad,     for  the  fraternity. 

Ace.  la  hermandad,     the  fraternity. 
Voc.         (caret.) 

Abl.  par  la  hermandad,     by  the  fraternity. 

(It  has  no  plural.) 

Declension  of  an  adjective  used  sulstantivelyj  ly  putting 
the  article  lo  lefore  it, 

S,  Nom.  lo  hermo'^o,     that  which  is  handsome. 

Gen.  de  lo  hermoso,     of  that  which  is  handsome. 

Dat.  para  lo  hermoso,     for  that  which  is  handsome. 

Dat.  a  lf>  hermoso,     to  that  which  is  handsome. 

Ace.  lo  hermoso,     that  which  is  handsome, 
Voc.         (caret) 

Abl.  por  lo  hermoso,    by  that  which  is  handsome. 

(It  has  no  plural  ) 

Observe,  that  all  adjectives  in  the  Spanish  language 
become  substantives  by  adding  to  them  the  article  lo. 
This  is  also  a  general  rule. 

Observe,  again,  that  all  proper  names  of  men  and  wo- 
me»  are  never  declined  with  the  foregoing  articles. 

SECTION  III. 

How  to  distinguish  wiien  a  noun  is  masculine  or  feminine. 

The  d'stinction  of  substantives  into  two  genders  comis 
from  the  distinction  of  fcexes:  by  Imitation  the  masculine 
or  feminine  gender  has   been  given  to  all  substantives, 
c  2 


l6  OF  SUBSTANTIVES. 

though  they  have  no  reference  to  any  sex  :  thus  for  iii* 
stance  pa?i  bread,  cuchillo  knife,  grano  grain,  &c.,  are 
masculine  :  cucharaa.  spoon,  mesa  a  table,  vela  a  candle, 
&C.J  are  feminine. 

General  rule. 

The  nouns  u'hich  haVe  reference  to  males  are  of  the 
masculine  gender  ;  and  those  which  have  reference  to  fe- 
males are  feminine.  Thus  hombrea  man,  cahallo  a  horse, 
are  masculine  ;  muger  a  woman,  yegua  a  mare,  are  fe- 
minine. 

All  nouns  ending  in  e,  o,  n,  or  r,  are  masculine :  as  lum- 
Ire  fire,  larcote  a  kind  of  boat,  llanquero  a  tanner,  lode- 
gon  a  cook's  shop,  lordador  an  embroiderer,  lahrador  a  la- 
bourer J  except  la  madre  the  rrvother,  la  fnano  the  hand, 
which  are  feminine, 

Oheruation. 

We  have  observed,  page  8,  that  all  nouns  endiog  in 
ad,  and  in  English  in  /j/  or  y,  are  of  the  fenainine  gendet*  J 
we  must  further  observe,  that  all  nouns  ending  in  a  are 
feminine,  except  dia  a  day,  diadema  a  diadem,  diafragmu 
diaphragm,  and  some  others  coming  from  the  Greek, 
.which  are  masculine. 

All  nouns  ending  in  cion,  and  in  English  in  tion  or  cHo?i, 
are  feminine,  as  diccioii  diction,  edicwii  edition,  partici' 
pacien  participation,  &c. 

All  nouns  ending  in  ud  and  e%  are  feminine,  though 
they  end  in  English  in  ve,  de,  or  ness,  as  virtud  virtue, 
prontilud  promptness,  pulidez  neatness.  Sec. 

All  nouns  ending  in  a  form  their  plural  by  the  addition 
of  an  5  :  those  ending  in  cion  or  ud,  by  adding  es  to  the 
singular  3  as  virlud  virtue,  virludes  virtues  :  those  ending 
in  e%  make  their  plural  by  changing  %  into  cfs  asfem 
ha^py, /dices  happy,  &c. 


OF  SOBSTANTlVfiS,  17 

These  rules  extend  themselves  to  the  adjectives  as  well 
as  to  the  substantives. 


Of  Augmentatu'es. 

Augmentatives  are  very  few  in  the  Spanish  language. 
They  are  used  to  express  something  extraordinary  in  the 
size  as  well  as  the  extent  of  things  spoken  of,  and  add  to 
the  positive  the  signification  of  hig,  large,  tally  and  stout>, 
and  are  formed  by  adding  to  the  nouns  the  syllables  on  or 
ozo  for  the  masculine^  and  ona  or  uxa  for  the  feminine. 
Example:  homhre  a  man,  kombron  a  tall  big  man,  muger 
a  woman,  mugcrona  a  tall  and  stout  woman  3  perro  a 
flog,  perrazo  a  large  dog. 

Of  DlminiUive^, 

There  are  two  sorts  of  diminutives.  1st,  One  to  express 
tenderness,  or  the  genteel  carriage  of  any  object  whatever} 
but  little  or  short,  and  their  terminations,  are  ito,  ico,  masc. 
iia,  icdy  fern,  added  to  the  nouns  either  substantives  or 
.jdjectives  without  any  alleration,  when  terminating  by  a 
consonant,  and  suppressing  the  vowel  if  there  is  one  at 
the  enrl  of  the  word.  Example;  pdxaroa.  bird',  paxarito  a 
pretty  little  bird}  casa  2i  house,  cas'da  a  pretty  little  house. 
"We  must  excepi  from  this  rule  hueno,  luena,  whose  di- 
minutive is  lonito,  honita,  which  very  often  has  no  other 
meaning  than  pretty. 

2d'.  The  other  denotes  either  contempt  or  pity,  with- 
out giving  the  idea  of  pretty,  and  terminates  in  i//o,  ac- 
cording to  the  above  rules:  as  perro  a  dog,  perrillon  little 
ugly  do<<  J  rnuger  a  woman,  mugercilla  a  little  ugly  wo- 
man 3  homhre  a  man^  homlrecillo  a  little  ugly  man. 


g3 


18  ^  OF  ADJECTIVES, 

Chapter  III. 
OF  ADJECTIVES. 

As  the  substantive  is  the  name  of  a  person  or  thing,  the 
adjective,  on  the  contrary,  expresses  the  qualities  of  a  per- 
son or  things  as  La  virtud  esamahle,  el  vicio  es  odioso  ; 
Virtue  is  amiable,  vice  is  abominable  j  virtud  and  vicio 
are  both  substantives,  mnahle  and  odioso  are  adjectives. 

The  word  which  makes  good  sense  with  the  words  per- 
son or  thing  is  an  adjective :  the  word  which  cannot  make 
any  sense  with  them  is  a  substantive. 

This  is  an  infallible  rule  to  distinguish  them  from  one 
another  :  for  instance,  the  word  good  is  an  adjective,  be- 
cause we  may  say,  a  good  person,  a  good  thing,  un 
buen  sujetOy  vna  buena  cosa;  but  the  word  man  is  a  sub- 
stantive, because  we  cannot  say,  a  man  person,  a  man 
thing. 

As  there  are  two  sorts  of  substantives,  masculine  and 
feminine,  there  must  be  of  course  two  sorts  of  adjectives 
to  qualify  both  genders  j  as,  a  good  horse  w«  buen  caballo, 
a  M'icktd  girl  u?ia  mala  Jiiuchachu.  You  see  plainly  by 
these  examples,  that  buen  qualifies  the  goodness  of  the 
horse,  cn\<\mala  the  wickedness  of  the  girl. 

Many  beginners  are  at  a  loss  how  to  turn  a  masculine 
adjective  into  a  feminine  one,  because  when  they  look 
for  it  in  a  dictionary  they  find  it  terminated  in  o ;  therefore 
they  must  observe,  that  if  they  change  the  o  into  a  chey 
make  it  feminine  ;  as,  bucno  masc.  buena  fern.  good.  If 
the  substantive  is  in  the  plural,  they  must  add  an  s  to  it : 
Los  homlres  son  buenos,  Men  are  good  -,  Las  mugeres  son 
luenas.  Women  are  good. 

They  must  also  observe,  that  several  substantives  end- 
ing in  er  or  ey  make  their  plural  by  the  addition  of  es  j 


OF  ADJECTIVES.  19 

Others  ending  with  a  consonant  want  only  an  s  to  (ovva, 

their  [)lural. 


Ohewation. 

The  following  adjectives, 

Uno one,       yilguno some^ 

Primero first,       Ninguno no, 

Tercero. third,       Bueno good, 

Posirero last,       Mnlo. wicked, 

lose  the  last  letter  when  they  precede  a  substantive  mas- 
culine. Sxampie  :  un  hombre  &  w.c\n,  el  primer  humhre 
the  first  man,  algun  homhre  some  man,  ningun  homlre 
no  man,  &c. 

Tercero  does  not  always  lose  the  last  letter  j  for  the 
third  day  may  be  expressed  by  el  terccr  dia,  or  el  tercero 
dia,  both  which  expressions  are  sanctioned  by  the  Spa- 
nish Academy. 

Cienta,  when  immediately  preceding  a  substantive, 
loses  tb.e  last  syllable.  Example  :  den  hoinbres  a  hundred 
raen,  cien  almas  a  hundred  souls  j  but  if  a  copulative 
divides  it,  the  said  syllable  is  retained.  Exanople:  cienlo 
y  diex  one  hundred  and  ten,  Sec. 

Grande,  when  conveying  an  idea  of  greatness,  in  refe- 
rence, to  merits,  useful  qualities,  &:c.,  and  preceding  a 
substantive  beginning  by  a  consonant,  loses  Its  last  syl- 
lable. Example  ;  un  gran  cahallo  a  great  or  famous 
horse,  una  gran  casa  a  fine  house.  But  if  it  merely  de- 
note an  idea  of  size,  extent.  &c.,  it  retains  the  said  syl- 
lable. Example  :  un  grande  calalio  a  large  horse,  una. 
grande  casa  a  vast  house. 

Santo  loses  the  last  syllable  before  prq>er  names.    Ex- 
ample: san  Pedro  saint  Peter,  san  Juan  saint  John,  &c. 
Except  santo  Domingo,  santo  Torilio,  santo  Tomas  if 
santo  Tome. 


20  OF  ADJFXTIVE5. 

We  must  further  observe,  that  the  Spanish  adjectives 
ending  in  the  singular  in  al,  el,  il,  form  their  plural  by 
the  addition  of  es,  as  cow/ w^gZ  conjugal,  plur.  conjugales  y 
^fiel  faithful,  feles  faithful  j  geniil  genteel,  gentiles  gen- 
teel. 

Those  ending  in  e,  as  amalle  amiable,  prudente  prudent, 
make  their  pki.al  by  the  addition  of  an  s  j  and  are  of  both 
genders. 

Those  ending  in  a  are  feminine,  and  make  their  plural 
by  the  addition  of  an  s  j  as  corva  crooked,  corvas  crooked. 

Those  ending  in  o  are  generally  masculine  -,  they  make 
their  feminine  by  changing  o  into  a,  and  m.Vri:e  in  both 
genders  their  plural  by  the  addition  of  an  s\  as  malicioso 
masc.  malicmsn  fem,  malicious  3  '^\v\x.  mal'mosos,  mali^ 
ciosas,  malicious. 

Those  ending  in  z,  as  feliz  hnppy,  make  their  plural 
by  taking  away  the  a,  and  putting  cei,  and- are  of  botifc 
genders. 


SECTioir  r. 

Of  comparatives  and  superlatives^ 

A  comparative  is  nothing  else  than  a  comparison  of  lwo> 
or  more  objects,  in  order  to  know  what  proportion  they 
bear  to  one  another.  Now  as  two  objects  can  either  be 
equal,  superior,  or  inferior,  to  one  another,  there  are 
three  sorts  of  comparatives,  called'^ — of  equality,  superi- 
ority, and  inferiority. 

The  comparative  of  equality  is  formed  by  prefixing- one 
of  these  words,  como,  tavibien,  tan;  as  El es  tan  fuerte 
corno  us  ted,  He  is  as  strong  as  you. 

The  comparative  of  superiority  is  formed  by  prefixing 
the  word  mas  to  the  adjective,  as  Soy  mas  alio  que  mi 
herma?io,  I  am  taller  than  my  brother. 


OP  ADJECTIVES. 


21 


The  comparative  of  inferiority  is  fortned  by  putting 
a  negative  before  the  verb  and  tan  before  the  adjective, 
or  by  prefixing  only  the  word  menos  to  an  adjective ; 
No  es  tan  rico  como  usted,  he  is  not  so  rich  as  you  3  No 
soy  ta?i  dic/ioso  como  v.  m.,  1  am  not  so  fortunate  as 
you. 

The  superlatives  increase  or  diminish  to  the  utmost 
degree  the  signification  of  adjectives.  They  are  of  two 
sorts  ;  the  one  relative,  and  the  otlier  absolute. 

The  first  is  formed  by  prefixing  the  article  la  or  el  to 
the  word  mas,  as  He  visto  la  mas  hermosa  seuora  de  In* 
glaterra,  I  have  seen  the  handsomest  lady  in  England ; 
La  calumnim  es  la  culpa  mas  alominable,  Calumny  is  the 
most  abominable  crime. 

The  second  is  formed  by  prefixing  the  adverb  muy  to 
the  adjective,  as  Soy  muy  poire,  I  am  very  \>qox. 

Comparatives  and  superlatives  irregularly  formed. 

These  three  adjectives,  lueno,  rnalu,  per^ueno,  deviate 
frpiii  Others  in  the  fornjatioii  of  their  comi-uratives  and 
superlatives,  which  are  as  follow  : 

Positive.  Comparative.  Superlative. 

lueno  good,       777 e/or  better,     /o  tw^/id r,  ^owwi/wo  the  best. 
malo  bad,  peor  worse,       pesimo  the  worst. 

pequeno  little,  menor  less,        lo  minimo  the  least. 
h'len  well,  mejor  better,     lo  mejor  the  best. 

poco  little,         menos  less,         lo  menos  the  least. 


SECTION  ir. 

Of  the  cardinal  numlers. 

The  cardinal  numbers  denote  the  quantity  of  persons 
pr  things,  apd  ariswer  to  the  question.  How  much?  How 


22 


OF  ADJECTIVES. 


many  ?  They   are  called  cardinal  because  they  are  tht; 


root  of  all  the  other 
1 
2 
3 


uno  m.  una  f. 
df>s 


4 

5  ' 
6 

7 
8 

9 
10 
11 
12 
13 
14 
15 
16 

17 
18 

19 
20 
21 
22 
23 
24 
25 
26 

V 
28 

29 
30 
31 
32 
33 
34 
35 
36 
37 
38 


ires 

quatro 

cinco 

self 

siete 

ocho 

nueve 

diex 

once 

doce 

irece 

catorce 

{juince 

diez  y  sSif 

diez  y  siete 

diez  y  ocho 

diez  y  nueve 

veinte 

veints  y  uno 

veinte  y  dos 

veinte  y  tres 

veinte  y  quatro 

veinte  y  cinco 

veinte  y  seis 

veinte  y  siete 

veinte  y  ocho 

veinte  y  nueve 

treinta 

trevita  y  uno 

treinta  y  dos 

treinta  y  tres 

treinta  y  quatro 

treinta  y  cinco 

treinta  y  seis 

treinta  y  siete 

treinta  y  ocho 

treinta  y  nueve 


they  are  as  ioiiow 

one 

two 

three 

four 

five 

six 

seven 

eight 

nine 

ten 

eleven 

twelve 

thirteen 

fourteen 

fifteen 

sixteen 

seventeen 

eighteen 

nineteen 

twenty 

twenty-one 

twenty- two 

twenty- three 

twenty-four 

twenty- five 

twenty,  six 

twenty -seven 

twenty-eight 

twenty-nine 

thirty 

lhirty-o!)e 

thirty- two 

thirty. three 

thirty- four 

thii^y-fuc 

thirty- six 

thirty-seven 

thirty-eight 

tUir^-nihe 


I 

II 

III 

IV 
V 

TI 

vri 

VIII 

IX 

X 

XI 

XII 

XIII 

XIV 

XV 

XVI 

XVII 

xvm 

XTX 
XX 

XXI 

XXII 

XXIII 

XXIV 

XXV 

XXVI 

XXVIl 

XXVllI 

XXIX 

XXX 

XXXI 

XXXII 

XXXIIl 

XXXIV 

XXXV 

xxxvr 

xxxvii 

xxxvrii 

XXX.I>w 


OP  ADJECTIVE; 


23 


quarcnta  fortjr 

(juart'Titay  U7fo       forty-one 
(juarenta  y  dos        forty-two 
quarenta  y  tres       forty- three 
quarenta  y  quatro  forty-four 
quarenta  y  cinco     forty-live 
quarenta  y  ieis        forty-six 
quarenta  y  siete      forty -seven 
quarenta  y  ocho      forty-eight 
quarenta  y  nueve    forty-nine 
dncuenta  lifiy 

cincuenta  y  uno      fifty  one 
cincuenta  y  dos        fifty-two 
cincuenta  y  tres      fiftv-three 
cincuenta  y  quatro  fifty-four 
cincuenta  y  cinco     fifty -fi\ie 
cinciienta  y  seis 
elm  iienta  y  siete 
dncilenla  y  ocho 
cimiientny  nueve 
sesenta 
sescnta  y  uno 
sesenta  y  dos 
sesenta  y  tres 
sesenta  y  quatro 
sesenta  y  cinco 


sesenta  y  scis 
sesenta  y  siete 
sesi  nla  y.  ocho 
sesenla  y  nueve 
setenta 
setenta  y  uno 
setenta  y  dos 
setenta  y  tres 
setenta  y  quatro 
setenta  y  cinco 
setenta  y  seis 
seienta  y  siete 
setenta  y  ocho 
setenta  y  nueve 
ochenta 


fifty-six 

fifty-seven 

fifty-eight 

fifty-nine 

sixty 

sixty-one 

Mxty-two 

sixty  three 

sixty- four 

sixty-five 

sixty-six         / 

sixty- seven 

sixty  eight 

sixty-nine 

seventy 

seventy-one 

seventy- two 

seventy-three 

seventy-four 

seventy-five 

seventy-six 

seventy-seven 

seventy-eight 

seventy-nine 

eighty 


XL 

XLI 

XLII 

XLIII 

XLIV 

XLV 

XLVI 

XLVII 

XLVIII 

XLIX 

L 
LI 

LII 

LIII 

LIV 

LV 

LVI 

LVH 

LVIIC 

LIX 

LX 

LXI 

LXII 

LXIII 

LXIV 

LXV 

LXVII 

LXVIH 

LXIX 

I^XX 

LXXI 

LXXll 

LXXI  II 

LXXIV 

LXXV 

LXXVI 

LXXVII 

LXXVIII 

LXXIX 

LXXX 


!4 

or  ADJECTIVES. 

81 

ochenta  y  uno 

eighty-one 

LXXXI 

82 

ochenta  y  dos 

eighty- two 

LXXXII 

83 

ochentu  y  ires 

eiffhty-three 

LXXXIII 

84 

ochenta  y  (juatro  eighty-four 

LXXXIV 

85 

ochenta  y  cinco 

eighty-live 

LXXXV 

86 

ochenta  y  seis 

eighty-six 

LXhxvr 

87 

ochenta  y  slete 

eighty-seven 

LXXXVII 

88 

ocheucay  ucho 

eighty-eight 

LXXXVIIi 

89 

ochenta  y  nueve 

eighty- nine 

LXXXIX 

90 

novenla 

ninety 

xc 

91 

noventa  y  uno  . 

ninety-one 

XCI 

9^ 

noventa  y  dos 

ninety-two 

xcir 

93 

noventa  y  tres 

ninety- three 

XCIII 

94 

noventa  y  quatn 

9  ninety-four 

XCIV 

95 

noventa  y  cinco 

ninety-iive 

xcv 

90 

noventa  y  sfis 

ninety-six 

XCVI 

97 

noventa  y  siete 

ninety-seven 

XCVII 

98 

noventa  y  ocho 

ninety -eight 

XCVI  1 1 

99 

novenla  y  nueve 

ninety-nine 

XCIX 

100 

ciento 

one  hundred 

c 

101 

cientQ  y  uno 

one  hundred  & 

one  CI 

102 

ciento  y  dos 

one  hundred  & 

two  cu 

200 

dodenws  m.  <75f.  two  hundred 

cc 

300 

tr  crier,  'os 

three  hundred 

ccc 

400 

//'m^ccientos 

four  hundred 

cccc 

500 

quinicntos 

five  hundred 

D 

600 

seisclenttts 

six  hundred 

DC 

700 

setecicntos 

seven  hundred 

DCC 

800 

cfchocientos 

eight  hundred 

DCCC 

900 

novecientos 

nine  hundred 

DCCCC 

[000 

mil 

a  thousand 

M. 

Ohservaiions  uppn  the  cardinal  numbers. 

Although  the  above  examples  would  suffice  withoui 
further  illustrations,  yet  you  are  to  observe,  that  wher 
two  or  more  numbers  are  joined  together,  the  greates 
goes  first  in  the  Spanish  language  :  thus  they  say,  veinti 
y  cinco  J  veinte  y  ocho,  twenty-five,  twenty-eight ;  putting 
the  copulative  conjunction  y  immediately  after  the  great- 


OF  ADJECTIVES. 


25 


est,  and  act  In  that  respect  quite  contrary  to  some  English 
people  who  say,  Five  and  twenty,  eight  and  twenty,  &c, 
N.  B.  This  must  be  considered  as  a  general  rule. 


SECTION 

III. 

Of  the  ordinal 

numbers. 

Ordinal  numbers  denote   the 

order  and  disp 

things ',  they  are 

as  follow: 

primero 

first 

segundo 

second 

ttrcero 

third 

(fiarto 

fourth 

qulnio 

fifth 

sexto 

sixth 

feptif/io 

seventh 

octavo 

eighth 

710710  or  novcno* 

ninth 

dccimo  or  dcceno 

tenth 

\     undecimo  or  unceno 

eleventh 

duodecimo  or  docd.io 

twelfth 

dtcimo  itrcio  or  treceno 

thirteenth 

decirno  quarto  or  catorct'no 

fourteenth 

dtcimo  fj'uinto  or  quinceno 

fifteenth 

decirno  sexto 

sixteenth 

decimo  septimo 

seventeenth 

dtcimo  octavo 

eighteenth 

decimo  nono 

nineteenth 

vigesimo  or  venteno 

twentieth 

trigesimo  or  treinteno 

thirtieth 

quadragtsimo  or  quarenteno 

fortieth 

quinquagesimo  or  cincUenleno 

fiftieth 

sexagemno  or  sesenteno 

sixtieth 

septuagesimo  or  setenteno 

seventieth 

octogesimo  or  ochenteno 

eightieth 

nonagesimo  or  noventeno 

ninetieth 

D 

2& 


or  PRONOUNS. 


centesimo  or  ceJileno  hundredth 

docentesimo  or  docentho  two  hnndredili 

treceniesimo  or  trace?itino  three  hundredth 

quadra^ntesimo  QY  qualrocenteno  four  hundredth 
quingenledmo  or  quinlenttno  five  hundredth 
irjlcsimo  thousandth. 

There  are  agahi  two  other  sorts  of  numbers,  called. 
Collective  and  Distributive  :  the  Collective  denotes  acer-' 
taiUj  quantity  of  things  joined  together,  as  una  docena  a: 
dozen,  una  cincuentena  fifty.  The  Distributive  expresses 
a  part  of  the  wholes  as  la  mitad  the  half,  ei  Lercio  tlie 
third  part,  el  decimo  the  tenth  part  3  &c. 


Chapter  iV. 

OF   PRONOUNS. 

Pronouns  are  words  used  instead  of  nouns,  to  avoid 
the  repetition  of  a  substantive,  which  would  be  \Gry 
tedious  without  their  bd{). 

There  are  six  sorts  of  pronouns j  called  personal,  posses- 
sive, demonstrative,  relative,  interrogative,  and  indefinite. 

Of  personal  pronouns. 

The  personal  pronouns  denote  the  persons ;  there  are 
three  persons  j  the  frst  is  that  who  speaks,  the  second  is 
that  to  whom  one  speaks,  and  the  third  is  the  person  of 
whom  one  speaks.  The  pronouns  of  the  first  person  are 
yo  I,  mi  me,  nosotros  we  ;  and  those  of  the  second  are 
tu  thou,  vos  or  vosotros  you,  said  only  of  persons  or  per- 
sonified objects  J  but  those  of  the  third  el  he,  ellos  they, 
ella  she,  ellos  they,  are  said  of  persons,  animals,  and 
things. 


OF    PRONOUNS.  27 

As  the  same  pronoun  is  expressed  one  way  when  it  is 
<:oj)junctive,  that  is  to  say,  joined  to  a  verb,  ^nd  another 
when  disjunctive,  a  strict  attention  must  be  given  to  the 
following  declension,  in  which  they  are  carefully  distin- 
guished. 

Declension  of  coujunciiue  personal  pronouns. 
First  person— Masculine  and  feminine. 

Sing.     Nom.  yo,     I. 

Gen.  de  mi,     of  me. 

Dat.  para  mi,     for  me. 

Dat.  a  mi,  me,     to  me. 

Ace.  d  mi,  me,     me. 

Abl.  por  mi,     by  me. 

Abl,  conmigo,     with  me. 

Plur.    Nom.  nos,     we. 

Gen.       de  nos,     of  us. 
Dat.        para  nos,     for  us. 
Dat.        d  nos,  nos,     to  us. 
Ace.        a  nos,  nos,     us. 
Abl.        por  nos,     by  us. 
Abl.  (caret) 

First  person  plural. 

Masc.    Nom.  nosolros,     we. 

Gen.  de  nosotros,     of  us. 

Dat.  para  nosotros,     for  us. 

Dat.  a  nosotros,     to  us. 

Ace.  a  nosotros,     us. 

Abl.  por  nosotros,     by  us. 

Fem.    Nom.  nosolras,     we. 

Gen.  de  nosotros,     of  us. 

Dat.  para  nosotros,     for  us. 

Daf.  a  nosotros,     to  us. 

Ace.  d  nosotros,     us. 

Abl.  por  nosotros,  by  us. 
l>2 


28  OF  PilONOUNS, 


Second  person — Masculine  and  feminine. 
Sing. 


Plur. 


Nora. 

tu,     thou. 

Gen. 

de  li,     of  thee. 

Dat. 

para  ti,     for  thee. 

Dat. 

te,  a  ti,  to  thee. 

Ace. 

d  ti,     thee. 

Abl. 

por  ti,     by  thee. 

Abl. 

contigo,     with  thee. 

Nom. 

vos,     you. 

Gen. 

de  vosy     of  you. 

Dat. 

para  vos,     for  you. 

Dat. 

a  vos,  OS,     to  you,  you, 

Ace. 

duos,  OS,    -you. 

Abl. 

por  vos,     by  you. 

Abl. 

con  vos,     with  you. 

Second  person  plurak 
Masc.  Nom.   vosotros,     you. 

Gen.      de  vosotros,     of  you. 
Dat.      para  vosotros,     for  you. 
Dat.      d  vosotros,     to  you. 
Ace.     d  vosotros,    you. 
Abl.      por  vosotros,     by  you. 
Abl.      con  vosotros,     with  you. 

Fern.     Nom.  vosotras,     you. 

Gen.  de  vosotras,     of  you, 

Dat.  pa?a  vosolras,     for  you. 

Dat.  a  vosotras,     to  you. 

Ace.  d  vosotras,     you. 

Abl.  pox:  vosotras,     by  you. 

Abl.  con  vosotras,     with  you. 

Third  person  singular, 

Masc.     Nom.     eL     he  or  it. 

Gen.      de  cL  of  him  or  it. 


OF  FRONOUWS.  2$ 

Dat.    para  M,    for  him  or  it. 
Dat.  '  d  d,  Icy     to  him  or  it. 
Ace.    a  el,  le,     him  or  it. 
Abl.    por  el,     by  him  or  it. 
Abl.     cow  elf  with  him  or  iV 

Fern.    Nom.  ella,  she  or  it. 

Gen.  de  ella,     of  her  or  it, 

Dat.  para  ella,  for  her  or  it, 

Dat.  a  ella,     to  her  or  it. 

Ace.  d  ella,  le,  la,     her  or  it. 

Abl.  por  ella,     by  her  or  it. 

Abl.  con  ella,     with  her  or  it. 

Neuter.       ' 

Sing.     Nom.    e//o,  /o,     it. 

Gen.  de  tllo,  de  la,     of  it, 

Dat.  para  ello,  para  lo,     for  it. 

Dat.  a  ello,  d  lo,     it. 

Ace.  fl'  tf//o,  lo,  d  lo,    it. 

Abl.  por  ello,  por  lo,     by  it. 
(The  neuter  has  no  plural.) 

Plural 

Ma«c.    Nom,    ellos,  they. 

Gen.  de  tl/os,     of  them. 

Dat.  para  ellos,     for  them. 

Dat.  a  ellos,     to  them. 

Ace.  d  ellos,  les,  los,     them. 

Abl,  por  ellos,    by  them. 

Abl.  con  ellos,     with  them. 

Fem.    Nom.  ellos,     they. 

Gen.  de  ellos,    of  them. 

Dat  para  ellos,     for  them* 

Dat.  a  ellos,  totl^em. 

D3 


28  OF  PHONO  UN'S. 


Second  person — Masculine  and  feminine. 
Sing. 


Plur. 


Nora. 

tUy     thou. 

Gen. 

de  ti,     of  thee. 

Dat. 

para  ti,     for  thee. 

Dat. 

tCy  d  ii,  to  thee. 

Ace. 

a  ti,     thee. 

Abl. 

por  ti,     by  thee. 

Abl. 

contigo,     with  thee. 

Nom. 

vos,     you. 

Gen. 

de  vos,     of  you. 

Dat. 

para  vos,     for  you. 

Dat. 

d  vos,  OS,     to  you,  you, 

Ace. 

duos,  OS,     you. 

Abl. 

por  VOS,     by  you. 

Abl. 

con  vos,     with  you. 

Second  person  plural-, 
Masc.   Nom.   vosotros,     you. 

Gen.      de  vosotros,     of  you. 
Dat.      para  vosotros,     for  yoa. 
Dat.      d  vosotros,     to  you. 
Ace.     d  vosotros,     you. 
Abl.      por  vosotros,     by  you. 
Abl.      con  vosotros,     with  you. 

Fern.     Nom.  vosotras,     you. 

Gen.  de  vosotras,     of  you. 

Dat.  para  vosotras,     for  you. 

Dat.  a  vosotras,     to  yoa. 

Ace.  d  vosotras,     you. 

Abl.  por  vosotras,     by  you, 

Abl.  co7i  vosotras,     with  you. 

Third  person  singular, 

Masc.     Nom.     ^/,     he  or  it. 

Gen.      gV  t'/,  of  him  or  it. 


OF  PRONOUNS.  2$ 

Dat.  para  61,    for  him  or  it. 

Dat.  d  el,  le,     to  him  or  it. 

Ace.  a  el,  le,     him  or  it. 

AbL  por  el,     by  him  or  it. 

Abl.  con  el,  with  him  or  iV 

Fem.    Nom.  ella,  she  or  it. 

Gen.  de  ella,     of  her  or  it. 

Dat.  para  ella,  for  her  or  it. 

Dat.  o  tf/Za,     to  her  or  it. 

Ace.  a  f//a,  Ze,  /a,     her  or  it. 

Abl.  por  c//a,     by  her  or  it. 

Abl.  con  ella,     with  her  or  it. 

Neuter.       ' 

Sing.     Nom.    ello,  lo,     it. 

Gen.  </e  tllo,  de  lo,     of  it. 

Dat.  para  ello,  para  lo,     for  it. 

Dat.  a  ello,  d  lo,     it. 

Ace.  d  ello,  lo,  d  lo,     it. 

Abl.  por  ello,  por  lo,     by  it. 
(The  neuter  has  no  plural.) 

Plural, 

Mate.    Nom.    ellos,  they. 

Gen.  de  tllos,     of  them. 

Dat.  para  ellos,     for  them. 

Dat.  d  ellos,     to  them. 

Ace.  d  ellos,  les,  los,     them. 

Abl.  por  ellos,     by  them. 

Abl.  con  ellos,     with  them. 

Fem.     Nom.   ellos,     they. 

Gen.      de  ellos,    of  them. 
Dat.      para  ellos,     for  them. 
•     Dat.      deltas,  totjjem. 
d3 


so  6F  PJl6NOt/N3. 

Acc.     d  ellas,  las,     them. 
Abl.      por  ellas,     by  them. 
Abl.      coti  ellas,     with  them. 

The  reciprocal  pronoun  of  the  third  person  of  all  genders 
and  numbers. 

Gen.  de  si,     of  him,  her,  it,  them. 
Dat.    para  si,     for  him,  her,  it,  them. 
Dat.    a  si,  se,     to  him,  her,  it,  them. 
Acc.    a  si,  se,     him,  her,  it,  them. 
Abl.   por  si,     by  him,  her,  it,  them. 
Abl.    conslgo,     with  him,  her,  it,  them. 

The  compound  pronouns, 
Yo  misvio  myself,  tu  inismo  thyself,  el  mismo  himself, 
ella  misma  herself,  nosotros  mismos,  nosotras  jnismas  our- 
selves, vosotros  mismos,  vosrtras  jnismas  yourselves,  ellos 
mismos,  ellas  mismas  themselves,  take  the  preposition  £^p 
in  the  genitive  and  a  in  the  dative. 

Of  possessive  pronouns. 

The  possessive  pronouns  denote  possesion  :  they  are 
called  conjunctive  when  they  are  joined  to  a  noun,  and 
disjunctive  when  they  are  used  with  reference  to  a  noun 
antecedent.     They  are  thus  arranged. 

Decleimon  of  conjunctive  possessive  pronouns. 
Sing. — Masculine  and  feminine. 

Nom.   Acc.    mi,     my. 

Gen.    de  mi,     of  my. 
Dat.    d  mi,     to  my. 

Plur. — Masculine  and  feminine. 

Nom.  Acc.    mis,  my. 

Gen.  de  mis,     of  my. 
Dat.   dmis,    to  my. 


OP  ?RONOUHf.  31 

Sing. — Masculine  and  feminine, 
Nom.  Ace.     tu,     thy. 

Gen.     de  tit,     of  thy. 
Dat.      a  tu,     to  thy. 

Pliir. — Masculine  and  feminine, 
Nom.  Ace.     tusj     thy. 

Gen.     de  tus,     of  thy. 
Dat.      d  tus,     to  thy. 

Sing. — Masculine  and  feminine. 
Nom.  Ace.     su,     his,  her. 

Gen.     de  su,     of  his,  of  her. 
Dat.      d  su,     to  his,  to  her. 

Plur. — Alasculine  and  feminine. 
Nom.  Ace.     sus,    his,  her. 

Gen.     desus,    of  his,  of  her. 
Dat.      d  sus,     to  his,  to  her. 

Sing. — Masculine  and  feminine. 
Nom.  Ace.      nuestro,  nuestra,     our. 

Gen.     de  naestro,  de  nuestra,     of  our. 
Dat.     d  nuestro,  a  nuestra,     to  our. 

Plur. — Masculine  and  feminine. 
Nom.  Ace.     neustros,  nucstras,     our. 

Gen.     de  nuesiros,  de  nuestras,     of  our. 
Dat.      d  neustros,  a  nuestras,     to  our. 

Sing. — MtLiCuline  and  feminine. 
Nora.   Ace.     vuestro,  vuestra,     your. 

Gen.     de  vuestro,  de  vuestra,     of  your. 
Dat.     a  vuestro,  a  vuestra,     to  your. 

Vlur.-^  Masculine  and  feminine. 
Nom.  Ace.     vuesiros,  vuestras,     your. 

Gen.     de  vuestros,  de  vuestras,     of  your. 
Dat.    d  vuesiros,  a  vuestras,    to  youi. 


34  OP  PRONOUNS. 

Pronouns  used  before  a  sulstfiniive. 

(lIB&T.) 

Sing. — Masculine,  femininey  and  neuter. 
Nora.     este>  esla,  esio,     this  or  that. 
Gen.       de  esie,  de  esta,  de  esto,     of  this  or  that. 
Dat,       d  esie,  a  esta,  a  esto,     to  this  or  that. 
-Ace.       este,  esta,  esto,     this  or  that. 
Abl.       de  este,  de  esta,  de  esto,     from  this  or  that. 

N.  B.  These  pronouns,  as  well  as  their  plural,  show 
the  person  or  thing  present  or  near  at  hand. 

Plur. — Masculine  arid  feminine,     (No  neuter.) 

Nom.  estos,  estas,     these. 

Gen.  de  estos,  de  estas,     of  these. 

pat.  a  estos,  a  estas,     to  these. 

Ace.  estos,  esias,     these. 

Abl.  da  estos,  de  estas,     from  these. 

(second.) 

^ing.-^ Masculine,  feminine,  and  neuter, 

Nom,  ese,  esa,  eso,     that. 

Gen,  de  ese,  de  esa,  deeso,    of  that. 

Dat.  a  ese,  d  esa,  d  eso,     to  that. 

Ace.  ese,  esa,  eso,     that, 

Abl,  de  ese,  de  esa,  de  eso,     from  that. 

Plur. — Masculine  and  feminine.     (No  neuter.) 

Nom,  esos,  csas,     those. 

Gea.  de  esos,  de  esas,     of  those. 

pat.  a  esos,  a  esas,     to  those. 

Ace.  esos,  esas,     those. 

Abl.  de  esos,  de  esas,     from  those. 

This  second  sort  of  pronouns  expresses  an  object  distant 


OF  PR0N0UX3.  .    35 

roll)  the  person  who  speaks,  and  near  to  the  person  to 
.vhoni  one  speaks. 

(third.) 
Sing. — Masculine,  femtJiine,  and  neuter. 
Koni.     Qf/ue/,  aquella,  aguelio,     that. 
Gen,       de  aquel,  de  aquella,  de  aquello,     of  that. 
Dat.        a  Qfjuel,  a  aquelh,  a  aquello,     to  that. 
Ace.       aquel,  aquella,  aquello,     that. 
Abl.        de  aquel,  de  aquella,  de  aquello,     from  that. 

Phir. — Masculine  and  feminine.     (No  neuter.) 

Nom.     aqvellos,  aquellas,     those. 

Gen.       de  aqvellos,  de  aquellas,     of  those. 

Dat.       daquellus,  d  aquellas,     toihose. 

Ace.       aqucllos,  aque/las,     those. 

Abl.        dd  aquellos,  de  aquellas,     from  those. 

This  third  sort  of  pronouns  expresses  an  object  very. 
kiistant  from  the  person  wlio  speaks,  as  well  as  from  the 
})crson  to  wliom  the  speech  is  directed. 

The  adjective  ctro,  otra  another,  is  often  joined  with 

esle  and  ese,  taking  away  the  e,  as  esiotro,  estotra -,  csotro, 

sotra,  other.     Example  :  Estotra  hombre  this  other  man, 

tstotra  njuger  this  other  woman,  esolro  hombre  that  other 

man,  esotra  muger  that  other  woman. 

Relative  and  interrogative  pronouns. 
Of  cuyo,  cuya;  cuyos,  cuyas,  whose. 

This  pronoun  cuyo  whose,  of  whom,  of  which,  is  re- 
lative and  interrogative  5  observing  that  it  ought  to  agree 
with  the  thing  possessed,  and  not  with  the  possessor,  as 
in  English.  Example  :  Cuyo  es  este  libro?  Whose  book 
is  this  ?  Es  elmio.  It  is  mine.  Cuyas  son  estas  plumas  9 
Whose  pens  are  these  ?  Son  suyas,  They  are  his.  Es  una 
'Senora  cuyas  prendas  son  cortocvdns,  She  is  a  lady  whose 
ijualities  are  known. 

33 _  ..  


36  OF  PRONOUNS. 

Pro7ioufis  relative  and  interrogative.  • 

Qwewhat,  is  interrogative^  has  no  plural,  and  is  com- 
mon to  both  genders. 

(^uien  who,  is  also  interrogative,  and  makes  quienes  in 
the  plural. 

Example : — Es  a  Dios  a  quien  es  preciso  acudir,  It  is  to 
God  to  whom  we  must  have  recour-,e.  De  nos  otros  mis- 
mos  es  de  quienes  se  ha  de  tener  miedo.  It  is  of  ourselvc 
that  we  ought  to  be  afraid. 

The  following  pronouns  are  declined  with  the  definite 
ariicle. 

Sing. — Masculine,  feminine,  and  neuter. 
Nom.  elr/ual,  la  qual,  lo  qunl,     which  or  who. 
Gen.     de  el  qtjal,  de  la  qnal,  de  lo  qual,     of  which. 
Dat.      d  el  qual,  d  la  qual,  d  lo  qual,     to  which. 
Ace.      el  qual  la  qual,  lo  qual,     which. 
Abl.      de  el  qual,  de  la  qual,  de  lo  qual,     from  which. 

Plur. — Masculine  and  feminine      (No  neater.) 

Nom.  los  quales,  las  quales,     which. 

Gen.  de  los  quales,  de  las  quales,     of  which. 

Dat.  ^  los  quales,  d  las  qualts,     to  which. 

Ace.  los  quales,  las  quales,     which.  ■  j 

Abl.  de  los  quales,  de  las  quales,     from  which.  I 

Indefinite  pronouns.  ^ 

These  pronouns  are  so  called,  because  they  express  r 
vague  and  indeterminate  object.  They  are  as  lollov< 
without  plural. 

Nddie,  ninguno,     none,  no  man, 

Ninguno,  ninguna,     not  one. 

Ni  uno,  ni  una,     not  one. 

Nluhoniotro,  ni  una  ni  otra,         *»      .. 

Jfi  UTios  ni  otros,  ni  unas  ni  otros,    J 


OF  PKONOUNS.  jy 

Uno  y  otro,  una  y  otra,         \  k  f  h 

Unos  y  otros,  unas  y  otras,     S 

Cada,     each. 

Cada  uno,  cada  una,     every  one,  every  body. 

Un  olro,  una  otra,  }  ,, 

'  one  another. 


J 


Unos  otros,  unas  otras 

e  0  ro,  e  oras  \  ^f  ^^j^g^g^  ^^  others,  or  other  people. 
A  olro,  a  otras ,    J 

But  when  this  word  others  is  governed  by  a  substan- 
tive, then  it  is  rendered  in  Spanish  by  ageno,agena,agenos, 
ogenas,  nccording  to  the  gcnd<;r  and  number  ot  the  iioun 
to  which  it  refers. 

Example.—  Porque  nadie  puede  disponer  de  lo  ageno, 
Because  nobody  can  dispose  of  another's  property. 

Alguno,  alguna  ;  algunos,  algunas,    some,  somebody. 

Mucho,  mucha-j  muchos,  muckas,    many. 

The  following  govern  the  subjunctive. 

QuaIquier/2,  plur.  qualesquiera,    whatever. 

Quien,  el  que,  aquel  que,    whoever,  whosoever. 

Qualquiera ;  que,  por  mas  que,  whatever  it  be, 
whatever  may  be  done. 

Qualquiera  cosa  que,  por  mas  que,  whatever  thing 
it  may  be,  whatever  thing  may  be  done. 

Cada,  algo,  nadie,  fulanu,  fulana,  such  a  man  or  wo- 
man J  and  zutano,  such  and  such  a  one — have  no  plural  ; 
but  the  others  naake  their  plural  by  the  addition  of  aa  s 
or  es. 


"S$  OF  VERBS. 

V  Chapter  V, 

OF    VERBS 


This  chapter  i-j  divided  into  eight  sections  : — The  Jirst 
speaks  of  the  nature  and  species  of  verbs  ;  the  second 
treats  of  their  different  moods,  tenses,  numbers,  and 
persons  ;  the  third  gives  the  conjugations  of  the  auxi- 
liaries, hahr  and  tener  to  have,  ser  and  estar  to  be,  and 
contains  a  list  of  those  conjugated  with  to  have  in 
Enghsh,  and  vviih  ser  or  estar  in  Spanish  j  the  fourth 
comprehends  the  three  regular  conjugations  j  the  Jijth 
explains  how  to  conjugate  the  reflected  verbs  ;  the  sixth 
gives  a  method  of  conjugating  verbs  with  negations  and 
interrogations,  with  and  without  pronouns  j  the  seventh 
has  for  its  object  the  irregular  conjugations  j  and  the 
eighth  treats  of  the  impersonal  verbs  in  the  three  con- 
jugalions. 

SECTION    I. 

Dtjifiition  of  verts. 

A  verb,  according  to  the  Latin  etymology  verrum, 
signifies  word,  to  denote  tliat  the  verb  is  the  word  by 
excellence,  and  the  principal  part  of  speech. 

A  verb  expresses  an  action  done  or  received,  and  de- 
notes only  the  state  of  its  nominative  case  :  from  thence 
arise  three  distinct  sorts  of  verbs,  which  are  called 

1.  Jctivo,  Active.  2.  Pasivo,  Passive.  Z.NeutrOt  Neuter. 

The  active  verb  expresses  the  action  of  its  nominative 
upon  some  person  or  thing j  as,  Dios  castigara  d  los 
malos,  God  will  punish  the  wicked. 


OF  VERJS.  S9- 

The  pas3ive  verb  expresses  the  action  received  by  the 
nominanvecase  ;  as  Los  huenos  serdn  recompen^ados,  Thfi 
just  will  be  rewarded. 

The  neuter  verb  expresses  merely  the  state  of  its  no- 
minative J  a^,  me  duermo,  I  am  quite  sleepy  :  descaexco, 
]  languish,  or,  I  urn  languishing  :  it  also  expresses  an 
action,  which  remains  in  the  subject  which  provinces  it  ; 
as  cay<^Oy  1  fall  ;  paseo,  I  walk  j  hago,  I  do  or  act,  &c. 

Veibsare  again  subdivided  into  six  classes,  viz. 

1.  JuxUinr^  Auxiliary.         4.  Impersonal,  Impersonal. 

2.  Befleiiuo,  Reflective.       5.  Regular,  llcgnlar. 

3.  Personal,  Personal.  (5.  Irregular,  Irregular. 

1.  TlieauxiVary  verbs  are  of  two  sorts  in  the  Spanish 
langunge,  viz.  h(,ber,  to  have  3  and  ser,  to  be.  Tliey 
are  called  Auxiliaries  because  \.\\cy  help  to  conjugate  all 
other  Verbs  in  iheir  compound  teni^rs. 

2.  The  reflective  verbs  arc  those  which  have  for  sub- 
ject and  oi;iect  the  same  person  or  thing  j  as  yo  me  levantOt 
I  riee  }  .v^  wearrepunto,   ^  repent,  5:c» 

3.  The  personal  verbs  are  those  which  are  conjugated 
wiih  three  persons  in  tlie  s-ngulrr  number  and  three  in 
the  plural,  in  all  tenses  of  the  indicative  and  subjai.c- 
tive  moo.d  ;  as  lidblo,  luiblas,  hdbla  y  hcilldmos,  habldls, 
Jidl'Ian,  I  speak,  thou  speakest,  S:c. 

4.  The  impersonal  verbs  are  all  those  which  are  used 
only  in  the  th.rd  person  lingular  of  each  tense  ;  as  llueie, 
it  rains;  hi'ele,  it  smells;  gusta,  it  pleases. 

5.  The  regular  verbs  are  those  which  are  conjugated 
in  all  their  tenses  and  persons,  as  the  verb  of  the  same 
final  in  the  intinitive,  which  Is  given  for  example  in  re- 
gular copjuga:ions ;  thus  for  instance  tantar  to  sing, 
c.yii'htr  to  help,  are  regular  of  ilie  tirst  conjugat on, 
because  they  r.re  coi.j  (gated  like  huLlar  to  speak,  in 
all  their  tenses  and  persons. 

E  2 


40  Ot   VEHBS. 

6.  The  irregular  verbs  are  those  which  deviate  in  some 
tenses  and  persons  from  the  regu^ar  verbs  of  the  same 
conjugation  which  is  given  for  example;  thus  dar  to 
give,  is  irregular,  because  it  is  not  conjugated  like  hahlar, 
though  it  has  the  same  final  in  the  innnitive  mood. 


SECTION    11. 

Of  mood'!,  tenses,  numherSf  a?id  persons  of  verbs. 

Verbs  are  necessarily  subject — 1st.  To  moods,  whereby 
they  express  in  what  manner  a  thing  comes  to  pass:  2d. 
lb  tenses,  by  the  help  of  which  they  represent  the  thing 
spoken  of,  as  present,  past,  and  future  :  3d.To  numler 
and  persons,  that  they  may  agree  u  ith  their  nominative 
case.  This  assemblage  U  termed  conjugation,  and  is 
tiothing  else  than  tlie  art  of  varying  the  diifi^rent  moods, 
tenses,  and  persons  o/a  verb, 

3.  Of  moods,  ^ 

Moods  are  the  difiVrent  manners  of  using  a  verb. 
There  are  four  moods  in  a  verb  ',  the  Infinitive,  the  In- 
ticatlve,  the  Subjunctive,  and  the  Imperative. 

The  infinitive  mood,  which  is  the  root  of  a  verb,  and 
by  which  the  conjugations  are  distinguished  from  each 
other,  expresses  an  action,  but  in  an  indetermined  sense, 
without  specifying  any  particular  agent,  as  hablar  to 
speak,  caw^ar  to  sing,  /zacertodo,  &:c. 

The  indicative  mood  shows  directly  and  positively  the 
different  tenses  of  a  verb:  it  forms  a  sense  of  itself  inde- 
pendently of  what  precedes  or  follows  j  as  quiero  I  am 
v-il  i  g,  veo  I  see,  hablo  I  speak. 

The  subjunctive  mood  denotes  also  different  tenses, 
but  dependently  on  the  verb  or  conjunction  antecedent; 
as  Quaiquier  mirito  que  tengamos  es  menester  que  seamos 
mcdestos.  Whatever  merit  we  may  have  we  must  be  mo- 


OF  vr:EEs.  41 

dest.     If  yon  take  oxxt  ts  memster  que,  die  rest,  seavios 
■luodcsioSy  has  not  a  complete  sense. 

The  imperative  mood  expresses  the  action  of  drisiring, 
c'-mmanding,  exhorting,  &c.  as  reffjondaine  answer  me, 
Larese  las  marws,  la  Loca,  y  la  carOj  Waah  your  liands, 
your  mouth,  your  face,  kc. 

2.  Of  tenses, 

Ten«es  are  different  terminations,  which  show  if  what 
is  expressed  by  a  verb  has  any  reference  to  the  present, 
past,  or  future  time.  Their  names  are  fc  und  in  the  fol- 
lowing conjugations,  and  their  use  is  fully  explained  iu; 
the  Syntax,  chap.  15,  l6,  and  17. 

3 .  Ofnumlerss a nd  persons. 

There  are  two  numbers  in  a  verb,  which  are  the  singu- 
lar and  the  plural.  The  singular  is  used  when  we  speak 
of  one  J  as  Su  licrmano  murid,  His  broiher  is  dead  3  and 
the  plural  when  we  speak  of  more  than  one  j  as  .Sus 
hrvianas  son  jriuy  hermosas.  His  sisters  are  very  hand- 
some. 

There  are  three  persons  in  each  number:  the  fiist 
when  we  speak  of  ourselves  ;  as  hadlo  i  speak,  hab/a* 
vius  we  speak  :  the  second  when  we  speak  to  another  ; 
as  huilas  thou  speakest  ;  and  the  third  in  speaking  of 
another  y  as  hub  la  he  si^eaks. 

SECTION  III. 

Conjugation  of  the  auxiliary  verb  haber  to  have. 

Infinitive  mood. 

Present  tense>       haher,     to  hn\-e. 
Gerund,  haliendo,     having. 

Participle,-  habidoy     had.. 

E  3 


42  OF  VERBS. 

Comp.  of  the  present,     haler  halido,     to  have  had. 
Corap.  of  the  gerund,     hahiendo  habido,     having  had. 

Indicative  mood. 
Present  tense. 

Sing.     I,  yoke,     I  have, 

2.  tu  has,     thou  hast. 

3.  el  hd,     he  has. 

Plur.     1.  nosotroshemos,  or  halemos J  we  have. 

2.  vosotros  habeis,  you  have. 

3.  ellos  hdn,     they  have. 

Imperfect  tense. 

Sing.     1 .  yo  habia,     I  had. 

2.  tu  habias,     thon  hadst. 

3.  el  habia f     he  had. 

PJur.      1.  nosotros  habiamos,  we  had. 

2.  vosotros  habiaiSy     you  had. 

3.  e//oi'  habian,     they  had. 

Preterite  tense. 

Sing.'   1.  yo  hube,  I  had. 

2.  /M  hubiste,     thou  hadst. 

3.  eZ  /iM^o,     he  had. 

Plur.     1.  nosotros  hubim OS,     we  had. 

2.  vosotros  hubisteis,     you  had. 

3.  e//o5  hubieron,     they  had. 

Future  tense. 

Sing.     1.  yo  habr^,     I  shall  have. 

2.  tu  halrds,     thou  shalt  have. 

3.  elhahrd,    be  shall  have. 


OF  YESBS.  43 

Plur.     1 .  nosolros  habremos,     we  shall  have. 

2.  vosotros  haMis.     you  shall  have. 

3.  ellos  hahrdiiy     they  shall  have. 

Compound  of  the  present. 

Sing.     I.  he  habiJo,     I  have  had. 

2.  has  hn'ido,     thou  hast  had. 

3.  hd  habi  io,     he  has  had. 

Plur.     1.  hem  OS  hah  tdo  J     we  have  had. 

2.  haheis  habilo,     yon  have  had. 

3.  hdn  habido,  they  have  had. 

Compound  of  the  imperfect. 

Sing.     1.  habia  habido,     I  had  had. 

2.  ho  bias  habido,     thou  hadst  had. 

3.  halia  habido,     he  had  had. 

Plur.     1.  habiamos  habido,     we  had  had. 

2.  hal'ia'is  habido,     you  had  had. 

3.  hid'ian  habido,     they  had  had. 

Compound  of  the  preterite. 

Sing.     1 .  hube  habido,     I  had  had. 

2.  hubiste  habido,     thou  hadst  had. 

3.  Aa^o  habido,     he  had  had. 

Plur,  1.  huMmos  habido,  we  had  had. 
2-  hubisteis  habido,  you  had  had. 
3.  hubihon  habido,     they  had  had. 

Compound  of  the  future. 

Sing.     1 .  habre  habido,     I  shall  have  had. 

2.  halrds  habido,    thou  shalt  have  had. 

3.  Aa^ra  habido ,    he  shall  have  had. 


44  OF  VERBS. 

PiUr.     1.  hnhr4mos  hapidoy     we  shall  have  hnd, 

2.  h^hdls  halidoy     you  shall  have  had. 

3.  ha  Iran  habidoy     they  shall  have  had. 

Suljtmdtive  mood,, 

Present  ieme. 

f^ing.     ] .  q7ie  hdyoy     I  may  have. 

2.  que  hdijasy     thou  nwyst  have* 

3.  que  hdija,     he  may  have. 

Plur.      1.  que  haydmosy     we  may  have.. 

2.  que  hnydis,     you  may  have, 

3.  que  hdyan,     they  may  have* 

Imperfeci  tense. 

Sing.     I'^yo  hahriay     I  should  have. 

2.  tu  halrlasy     thou  shouldst  have. 

3 .  el  hakria,     he  should  have. 

Plur.     1.  nosotros  hahriamos,     we  should  have; 

2.  vosolros  hahrlaisy     you  should  have. 

3.  ellos  halriauy     they  should  have. 

Preterite  suljunctivet 

Sing.     1.  hubi&se  or  huMera,     I  might  have. 

2.  huhieses  or  hubieraSy     thou  mightst  have. 

3.  hubiise  or  hubie'ray     he  might  have, 

Plur.     1:.  kubUs(;mos  or  hulieramos^     we  might  have. 

2.  kuliies.eis  or  hubierais,^    you  might  have. 

3.  hubihen  or  hubieran,     they  might  havxj. 

Future  subjunctive. 

Sing.     1 .  qiiando  hiibi^rCy     when  L shall  have. 

2.  quando  hubieres,     when  thou  shalt  have. 

3.  quando  kubUrc,    when  he  shsU  have,. 


OF  V£BBS.  45 

.r.     1.  quando  huhUremos,    when  we  shall  have, 

2.  quando  hubicrei^,     when  you  shall  have. 

3.  quando  huhitretif     when  diey  shall  have. 

Compound  of  the  present* 

Sing.     I .  hnya  halido,     I  may  have  had. 

2.  hayas  hahido,     thou  mayst  have  had. 

3.  haya  habidOf    he  may  have  had.    . 

riur.     1.  hayamos  halido^     we  may  have  had. 

2.  hdyais  halido,     you  may  have  had. 

3.  hdyan  habido,     they  may  have  had. 

Compound  of  the  imperfect. 

Sing.     J .  Juihrla  halido,    I  should  have  had. 

2.  hahias  halulo^     thou  jihouldst,  &c, 

3.  liabria  habido,    he  should,  &cc. 

?h\r.     I,  kabriamos  habido,    wo  should  have  had, 
3.  habriais  habido,    you  should  have  had, 
3,  habrian  habido,    they  should  have  had. 

Compound  of  the  preterite. 

Sing.  1.  huhi4se  or  hubi^a  habido,     I  might  have  had. 

2.  huhieses  or  hul-ieras.  habidoj  thou  mightsi,  &c. 

3.  hubiese  or  hubiera  habido,     he  might,  &c. 

Plur.  1 .  hubicsemos  or  hubieramos  habido,  we  might  have 

had. 

2.  hubie'ieis  or  hubiin  is  hahido,     you  might,  &c. 

3.  hubiesen  or  kulietan  habido,     they  might,  &c. 

Compound  of  the  future. 

Sing.   1.  quando  hubiere  habido,     when  I  shall  have  had. 

2.  quando  hubwres  halido,     when  thou  shalt,  &c. 

3.  quando  hubiere  habido,     when  he  shall,  &c. 


4(5  OF  VERBS. 

Plur.     1.   quando  hubieremos  habido,  when  v/Gshail],  kc, 

2.  quando  hub'iereis  habido,     when  you,  ike. 

3.  quando  hubitren  habido,     when  they,  &o. 

Observation  upon  the  future  subjunctive. 

The  learner  must  be  very  attentive  not  to  use  the  fu- 
ture indicative  for  the  future  subjunctive,  and  vice  versa, 
as  some  people  pretend  ;  for  tho"»e  who  write  or  speak 
grammatically  will  never  say  quando  habre  for  quando 
kubiere : —  Let  this  be  considered  as  a  general  rule  for  all 
'the  other  verbs.  We  must  further  observe,  that  this  verb 
has  no  imperative  belonging  to  it,  and  serves  only  in  the 
compound  tenses  of  other  verbs. 

Conjugation  of  the  irregular  verb  tener^  to  have 
or  to  hold, 

I^ifinU'ivs  fftmd» 

Present  tenie,  hner,    to  bav^^  w  to  bold, 
Gerund,  teniendo^    hfiving  t-'f  holding, 

Participle,         tenido,     had  or  helci. 
Comp.  of  the  present,  haber  ttnido,  to  hr.ve  had  or  held, 
Comp.  of  the  gerund,  ha biendo tenido j\\3i\i\'\Q^hzdLQr\'\^\<\, 

Indicative  mood. 

Present  tense. 

Sing.     1 .  yo  tem^o,     I  have  or  hold. 

2.  ///  tieneSf     thon  hast,  ^c. 

3.  el  tiine,     he  has,  &c, 

Plur.     1 .  tenemos,    we  h:ive  or  hold, 

2.  tenes,  yo    have,  he. 

3.  tier,  en,  they  hav.",  tvc. 


OP  VERBS.  47 

Imperfect  tense. 

.   Sing.     1.  tenia,     J  had. 

2.  teidcL',     thou  hadst. 
3    tehia,     he  had, 

Plur.     1.  teniamoSj     we  had. 

2.  teniais,     you  had. 

3.  tmiaUi     they  had. 

Preterite  tense. 

Sing.     1.  ^i/z-e,     I  had, 

2.  tuviste,     thou  hadst. 
3    /zii-o,     he  had. 

Plur.     1.  tuvinws,     we  had. 

2.  tuvisteis,     you  had. 

3.  tuvieron,    they  had. 

Future  tense. 

Sing.     1.  tendrc,     I  shall  have. 

2.  tendras,     thou  shalt  have. 

3.  /t'?2G?m',    he  shall  have, 

Plur,     \.  tendremosy    we  shall  have. 

2.  tendrcisy    you  shall  have. 

3.  tend)  dr.,     they  shall  have. 

Compound  of  the  present. 

Sing.     1 .  he  tenido,     I  have  had. 

2.  /i(/5  tenido,    thou  hast  had. 

3.  hd  tenido,     he  has  had. 
Plur.     1 .  hemos  tenido,     we  have  had. 

2.  AaZ'ei^  /e«i<fo,    you  have  had. 

3.  hdn  tenido,     they  have  had. 


48  or  VERBS. 


Compound  of  the  hnperfect. 

Sing.     I.  halia  tenido,     I  had  had. 

2.  halias  tenido,     thou  hadst  had* 

3.  halia  tenido,     he  had  had. 

Plur.     1.  habiamos  tenidoj     we  had  had. 

2.  haliais  tenido,     you  had  had. 

3.  huiian  ttnido,     they  had  had. 

Compound  of  the  preteiite. 

Sing.     1 .  hule  tenido,     I  had  had. 

2.  hiihiste  tenido,     thou  hadst  had. 

3.  hubottmido,     he  had  had. 

Plur.     1.  hulimos  tenido,  we  had  had. 

2.  hubisteis  tenido,  you  h^d  had. 

3.  hubieron  tenido,     they  had  had. 

Compound  of  the  future. 

Sing.     1.  halrc  tenido,     I  shall  have  had. 

2.  habrds  tenido,    thou  shalt  have  had. 

3.  habrd  tenido,     he  shall  have  had. 

Plur.     1 .  habrSmos  tenido,     we  shall  have  had. 

2.  habrcis  tenido,     you  shall  have  had. 

3.  habrdn  ttnido,     they  shall  have  had. 

Subjunctive  mood. 

Sing.     1.  que  ten gn,    I  may  have. 

2.  que  teiigas,     thou  mayst  have. 

3.  que  ienga,     he  may  have. 

Plur.     1.  que  tengamos,     we  may  have. 

2.  que  tengaiSf    you  may  have. 

3.  que  tengan,    they  may  have. 


OF  VERBS. 

Imperfect  tense. 

Sing.    1.  tendria,    I  should  have. 

2.  tendrias,     thou  shouldst  have. 

3.  tendria,     he  should  have. 

Plur.     1 .  tendriamos,     we  should  have. 

2.  tendriais,    you  should  have. 

3.  tendrian,    they  should  have. 

Preterite  tense. 

Sing,    1 .  tuviese  or  tuviera,     I  might  have. 

2.  tuvieses  or  tuvieras,     thou  mightst  have. 

3.  tuviese  or  tuviera,     he  might  have, 

Plur.     1 .  tuviesemos  or  tuviiramoSy    we  might  have. 

2.  tuvieseis  or  tuvierais,     you  might  have. 

3.  tuviesen  or  tuviiran,     they  might  have. 

Future  tense. 

Sing.     1 .  quando  tuviere,     when  I  shall  have. 

2.  quando  tuvieres,    when  thou  shalt  have. 

3.  quando  tuviire,     when  he  shall  have. 

Plur.     1.  quando  tuvieremos,    when  we  shall  have, 

2.  quando  tuviereis,     when  you  shall  have. 

3.  quando  tuvi^en,    when  they  shall  have. 

Compound  of  the  present. 

Sing.     1.  haya  tenido,     I  may  have  had. 

2.  Aa^oj  tenido,    thou  mayst  have  had. 

3.  haya  tenido,     he  may  have  had. 

Plur.     1 .  haydmos  tenido,    we  may  have  had. 
2    haydis  tenido,     you  may  have  had. 
3.  Ac/yan  tenido,     they  may  have  had. 


50  OF  VERBS. 


Compound  of  the  imperfect. 

Sing.     1.  Jiahria  tenido,     I  should  have  had. 

2.  habrias  tenido,     thou  shoialdst,  &:c. 

3.  hahria  tenido ,     he  should  have  had. 

Plur.     1,  habriamos  tenido,     we  should  have  had. 

2.  habriais  tenido,     you  should  have  had. 

3.  habrian  tenido,     they  should  have  had. 

Compound  of  the  preterite. 

Sing.     1.  huhicse  or  hubiera  tenido,     I  should  have  had. 

2.  hublese-9  or  hubieras  tenido,    thou  shouldst,  &c. 

3.  hubiese or  hubiera  tenido,     he  should,  &c. 

Plur.     1.  hubiesemosox  hubieramos  tenido,  we  should,  &c. 

2.  hubieseis  or  hubierais  tenido,     you  should,  &c. 

3.  hubiisen  or  hubieran  tenido,    they  should,  &c. 

Compound  of  the  future. 

Sing.     1 .  quando  hubiere  tenido,     when  I  shall  have  had. 

2.  quando  hubieres  tenido,     when  thou  shalt,  &c. 

3.  quando  hubiere  tenido,     when  he  shall,  &c. 

Plur.     1.  quando  hubieremos  tenido,  when  we  shall,  &c. 

2.  quando  hubiereis  tenido,     when  you  shall,  Sec. 

3.  quando  hubieren  tenido,     when  they  shall,  &c. 

Imperative  mood. 

Sing.  (no  first  person.) 

2.  ^en  ^M,     have  thon. 

3.  ^en^rn  e/,     let  hira  have. 

Plur.     1 .  tehgamos,     let  us  have. 

2.  tened,     have  you. 

3.  tengan,    let  them  have. 


OF  YBRBS.  51 

Conjugation  of  the  auxiliary  verbs  ser  and  estar  to  he. 

Infinitive  mood. 

Present  tense,  ser  or  estar,     to  be. 

Gerund,  siendo  or  estando,     being. 

Participle,  side  or  esiado,     been. 

Comp.  of  the  present,  hater  sido  or  estado,   to  have  been, 

Comp,  of  the  gerund^  habiendo  sido  or  estado,  having,  &c. 

Indicative  mood. 

Present  tense. 

Sing.    1.  yo  soy  or  esfoy,    I  am. 

2.  tu  eres  or  eslds,    thou  art. 

3.  e/  ff  or  estd,    he  is. 

Plur,     I.  nosotros  somos  or  estamos,    we  are. 

2.  vosotros  sois  or  «/f/w,    you  are. 

3.  e//oj  s6n  or  «/^7?,    they  are. 

Imperfect  tense. 

Sing.     1,  yo  /ra  or  «/(iZo,     I  was. 

2.  /M  ^rai  or  estdbas,    thou  wast. 

3.  e/  rra  or  estuba,    he  was. 

Plur.     I,  nosotros  ham  OS  OY  esldbamos,  we  were. 

2.  vosotros  ^rais  or  est/dais,     you  were. 

3.  e//o5  eVa/i  or  estdban,     they  were. 

Preterite  tense. 

Sing.     1 .  yo  /mi  or  estuve,     1  was. 

2,  <w  Jww^e  or  estuviste,     thou  wast. 

3.  el  fu^  or  estuuo,     he  was. 

v2 


52  OF  VERBS. 

Plur.     1 ,  nosotros  fuimos  or  estuvimos,     we  were. 

2,  vosotros  fuisteis  or  esiuvisteis,     you  were. 

3,  ellos  fue'ron  or  estuvieron,     they  were. 

Future  tense. 

Sing.     1 .  yo  seri  or  estare^     I  shall  be. 

2.  /m  *era'5  or  estards,     thou  shalt  be. 

3.  £'/  .sfT^t  or  estardf     he  shall  be. 

Plur.     1 ,  nosotros  seremos  or  estaremos,     we  shall  be. 

2.  vosotros  sereis  or  estareis,     you  shall  be. 

3 .  c//o^  5erow  or  estardn,     they  shall  be. 

Compound  of  the  present. 

Sing.     1.  Ae  y/t;?o  or  estado,     I  have  been. 

2.  Aas  s'ldo  or  estado,     thou  hast  been. 

3.  Afl  Mf/o  or  estado,     he  has  been. 

Plur.     1.  hemos  sido  or  estado,     we  have  been. 

2.  AaZ'ijii  sido  or  estado,     you  have  been. 

3.  kalian  sido  or  estado,     they  have  been. 

Compound  of  the  imperfect. 

Sing.     1.  haliasido  or  estado,     I  had  been. 

2.  halias  sido  or  estado,     thou  hadst  been. 

3.  Aa^/a  j'iWo  or  estado,     he  had  been. 

Plur.     1.  hahiamos  sido  or  estado,     we  had  been. 

2.  habiais  sido  or  estado,     you  had  been. 

3 .  kalian  sido  or  estado,     they  had  been. 

Compound  of  the  preterite* 

Sing.     1 .  ^M^-e  iiofo  or  estado,     I  had  been. 

2.  huhiste  sido  or  estado,     thou  hadst  been. 

3.  M^'o  .yif/o  or  estado,     he  had  been. 

*  The  preterite  tense,  as  well  as  its  compound,  is  seldom  used 
in  the  Spanish  language. 


OF  VERBS.  53 

Plur.     1.  hulimos  sido  or  estado,     we  had  been. 

2.  hul'isteis  sido  or  estado,     you  had- been. 

3.  huhieron  sido  or  estado,     they  had  been. 

Compound  of  the  future. 

Sing.     1.  halre  sido  ox  estado  J     I  shall  have  been. 

2.  hahras  sido  or  estado,     thou  shalt  have  been. 

3.  habru  sido  or  estado,     he  shall  have  been. 

Plur.     1.  hair huos  sido  or  estado,     we  shall  have  been. 

2.  hahras  sido  or  estado,     you  shall  have  been. 

3.  halrun  sido  or  estado^     they  shall  have  been. 

Subjunctive  mood. 

Present  tense. 

Sing.     ] .  que  st'a  or  est',     that  I  may  be. 

2.  (/we  5t'a5  or  es/eV,     that  thou  mayst  be. 

3.  que  sea  or  este,  that  he  may  be. 

Plur.     1 .  que  siamos  or  estcmos,     that  we  may  be. 

2.  que  s^ais  or  este'is,     that  you  may  be. 

3.  yi/e  5t'a/z  or  esten,     that  they  may  be. 

^  Imperfect  tense. 

Sing.     1.  serla  or  cstaria,     I  should  be. 

2.  5ma5  or  estarlas,     thou  shouldst  be. 

3.  seria  or  estaria,     he  should  be. 

Plur.     1 .  serlamos  or  estariantos,     we  should  be. 

2.  seriais  or  estariais,     you  should  be. 

3.  serian  or- estan'an,     they  should  be^. 

Preterite  tense. 

Sing,     l.fuiseoxfucra,  ?  j  j^ight  be 

estuvLse  or  estuvicra,  5     "^'^"^  ^' 
f3 


54 


OF  VERBS. 


2.  fueses  or  fueras,  }  ^,  •  w  *  u 
\..*,.  ; '   y        /   • '         >  thou  mientst  be. 

estuvieses  or  estuvieras,   }  ^ 

3.  fuSse  or  fuera,    ^  ^le  micrht  be 

estuviese  or  estuviera,      5  *^ 

Plur.     I,  fuesemosox  fueramos,  >  •  wu^ 

'^   .    ;'  .     •'  >  we  might  be. 

estumesemos  or  estuvieramos,^  * 

2.  fueseis  or  fuerais,  >  •  1 1  h 

estuvieseis  or  estuvUrais^  5  ^°^  "^'^  ^     ^' 

estuviesm  or  estuvieran,  S      ^     ^ 

Future  tense. 

Sing.    1.  quando  fuere  or  estuviere,     when  I  «hall  be. 

2.  quando  fueres  or  estuvieres,     when  thou,  &c. 

3.  quando  fuere  or  estuviere,     when  he,  &c. 

Plur.     1 .  quando  fueremos  or  estuvieremos,  when  we,  &c. 

2.  quando  fuereis  or  estuviereis,     when  you,  &:c. 

3.  quando  fuer en,  or  estuvieren,     when  they,  &c. 

Compound  of  the  present. 

Sing.     1 .  Ac(ya  5zVo  or  estado,    I  may  have  been. 

2.  Aa^/a^  5zafo  or  estado,     thou  mayst,  &c. 

3.  Aa3/a  ^iflfo  or  estado,     he  may,  &c. 

Plur.     1.  haydmos  sido  or  estado,   we  may  have  been. 

2.  haydis  sido  or  estado,     you  may,  &c. 

3.  ^a2/a72  5ic?o  or  estado,     they  may,  &c. 

Compound  of  the  iinperfect. 

Sing.     1.  hahria  sido  or  estado,     I  should  have  been. 

2.  hahrias  sido  or  estado,  thou  shouldst  have  been. 

3.  halria  sido  or  estado,    he  should  have  been. 

Plur.     1.  hahriaviossido  or  estado,  we  should  have  been. 

2.  halriau  sido  or  estado,  you  should  have  been. 

3.  hahrian  sido  or  estado,   they  should  have  been. 


OF  VERBS.  35 

Compound  of  the  preterite. 

Sing.     I.  huliera,  or  hiil'iese,)  t     •  u.  i.       u 

side  or  estado,   '  ^  I  might  have  been. 

2.  huhuras,  ox  hulieses,  >  ^,  •  u.  .u       i 

sido  or  estado.        \  th«"ra'ghtsthavebeen. 

3.  hubiera,  or  hubiese,)  ,        •  i  ^  i        , 

«rfoor««,rfo,     |f'ei»>ghthavebeen. 

Plur.     1.  hubieramos,  or  hubiesemos.)  .  ,,    „ 

sido  or  estado,  '  ^  we  might,  &c. 

2.  hubierais,  or  hubieseis,  )  •  i       « 

.i^oore.Wo,       'J  you  might,  &c. 

3.  hubieran,  or  fill bitsen.)  ,,  •  i       „ 

ii^o  or  «/ac/o,  J  ^^^y  '"'S^t'  ^^^ 

Compound  of  the  future. 

Sing.     1.  quando  hubiere    }     ,       r   i   „, 

5irfo  or  .5/arfo,  \  ^^^"  ^  ^^^11  ^^^^  been. 

2.  (jiiando  hubieres  }      ,         ,         ,    ,    , 

5zWo  or  e5/aio,  \  ^^^^  ^^°"  ^^^^^  ^^^e  been. 

3.  quando  hubiere    }      ,       .       ,    „  , 

sido  or  e-^Wo,  ^  ^^'^"  ^^  ^^^^  ^^^e  been. 

Plur.     1.  quando  hubieremos  )      , 

sido  or  w^a^o,     J  ^b^"  ^'^  ^^^ll  have  been. 

2.  quando  hubiereis)     ,  ,   „, 

^f^o  or  e^^arfo,  \  ^^®°  >'«"  ^^^^  ^^ve  been. 

3.  quando  hubihen)     ,       .,        ,   „, 

.frfo  or  estado,  \  ^^^'^  ^^^X  ^^^^  ^^ve  been. 

Imperative  mood. 
Sing.  (no  first  person.) 

2.  se  or  e^/a  /«,     be  thou. 

3.  sea  or  e^/e  el,     let  him  be. 

Plur.     1 .  seamos  or  estemos,     let  us  be. 

2.  5erf  or  estdd,     be  you. 

3.  sean  or  w/t«,    let  them  be. 


5^.  OF  VERBS. 

Observations  upon  the  verbs  ser  and  estar   (in  English) 
to  be. 

The  difference  between  these  two  verbs  is  so  consider- 
able that  the  beginner  cannot  be  too  well  acquainted  with 
them,  in  order  to  make  a  right  use  of  them  either  in 
composition  or  in  speaking,  since  both  have  only  one 
single  signification  in  English,  which  is— ^o  he.  The  verb 
ser  in  Spanish  is  used  for  the  natural  qualities  of  men, 
women,  or  things,  either  good  or  bad  j  as  ser  hombre  to 
be  a  man,  ser  alto  to  be  tall,  ser  pequeao  to  be  little  or 
short,  ser  mdlo  to  be  naturally  wicked,  ser  bueno  to  be 
good  or  honest ;  as  Este  homhre  es  caritativo.  This  man 
i.s  charitable  ;  Esta  mvger  es  piadosa,  This  woman  is  de- 
vout. Whereas  estar  serves  only  for  accidental  things, 
or  denoting  some  place,  or  other  adjunct  quality  ;  as  esidr 
en  Paris,  to  be  in  Paris ;  estoy  lejos  de  Madrid,  I  am 
far  from  Madrid  : — should  I  say,  Soij  lejos  de  Madiid,  I 
should  give  to  understand  that  I  am  myself  the  space  of 
ground  from  Madrid  to  this  place,  which  would  be  com- 
plete nonsense  :  Mi  casa  es  butnay  pero  esta  mal  distri- 
buida,  My  house  is  good,  yet  it  is  ill  contrived.  By 
these  examples  you  see  the  essential  being  of  the  house 
exprefised  by  the  verb  ser,  and  the  accidental  by  the  verb 
estar. 

SECTION    IV. 

Of  the  regular  conjugations. 

The  respective  conjugations  are  formed  by  the  differ- 
ent terminations  of  verbs,  in  their  tenses  and  persons, 
and  particularly  in  the  infinitive  mood.  Now  the  infini- 
tive mood  of  all  the  Spanish  verbs  ends  in  one  of  the 
three  follov/ing  terminations,  viz. — 

1.  ar;  as  habldr,     to  speak. 


OP  VERBS.  57 

2.  er;  as  lehir,     to  drink. 

3.  irj  assufrir,     to  suffer. 

First  conjugation — Hablar  to  speak. 

Irifinitive  mood. 

Present  tense,  hablar,     to  speak. 

Gerund,  haOlando,     speaking. 

Participle,         hahlddo,     spoken. 
Comp.  of  the  present,  haber  hablddo,     to  have  spoken, 
Comp.  of  the  gerund,  liabimdo  hablddo,    having  spoken. 

Indicative  mood. 

Present  tense. 

Sing,     1.  hdblo,    I  speak. 

2.  /idblas,     thou  speakest. 

3.  hdbla,    he  speaks. 

Plur.     1 .  habldmos,     we  speak.  "* 

2.  hab/dis,    yor.  speak. 

3.  hdblan,     they  speak. 

N.  B.  I  have  omitted  tlie  personal  pronouns,  because 
the  Spaniards  make  use  of  them  in  interrogative  sen- 
tences only,  each  person  being  sufficiently  distinguished 
from  one  another. 

Imperfect  tense. 

Sing.     1.  habldba,     I  did  speak. 

2.  habldbas,     thou  didst  speak. 

3.  habldba,    he  did  speak. 

Plur.     1.  habldbamosy     we  did  speak. 

2.  habldbais,    you  did  speak. 

3,  halldban,    they  did  speak.  j 


58 


OF  VERBS. 


Preterite  tense. 
Sing.     1.  hahle,     I  spoke. 

2.  habldste,     thou  spokest. 

3.  hallo,     bespoke. 

Plur.     1 ,  habldmosy     we  spoke. 

2.  habldsteisy     you  spoke. 

3.  habidron,     they  spoke. 

Future  tense. 

Sing,    \.  hahlari,    I  shall  speak. 

2.  haliards,    thou  shalt  speak. 

3,  hablard,    he  will  speak. 

Plur.    1,  hablar^mos,    we  shall  speak. 

2.  hablar^is,    you  will  speak. 

3.  hablardn,    they  will  speak. 

Compound  tenses, 

Comp.  of  the  pres.      Ae  kablddo,    I  have  spoken. 
Comp.of  the  imperf.  Aa/;^a  hablddo,     I  had  spoken. 
Comp.  of  the  pret,      hube  hahlddot    I  had  spoken, 
Comp.  of  the  fut.        hab r 4  hablddo 1 1  shall  have  spoken, 

N.B.  Though  I  have  only  put  the  first  person  of  ever> 
compound  tetise,  the  scholar  must  not  neglect  to  learn 
the  remaining  persons,  and  the  whole  by  heart,  as  he  did 
in  the  auxiliary  verbs. 

Subjunctive  mood. 

Present  tense. 

Sing,     1.  que  hable,     I  may  speak. 

2.  que  hdbles,     thou  mayst  speak, 

3.  que  hdbkj     he  may  speak. 


OF  VERBS.  5g 

lur.     I.  que  hallJmos,     we  may  speak. 

2.  que  kableiSf     you  may  speak. 

3.  que  hablen,     they  may  speak. 

Imperfect  tense. 

Sing.     1.  hallaria,     I  should  speak. 

2.  habJariaSy     thou  shouldst  speak. 

3.  hah  I  aria  y     he  should  speak. 

nr.     1.  hablarimnos,     we  should  speak. 

2.  hallariaisy     you  should  speak. , 

3.  hahlarian,     tliey  should  speak. 

Preterite  tense. 

.     1 .  hahldse  or  habldra,     I  might  speak, 

2.  hahldses  or  habhiras,     thou  mightst  speak. 

3.  ha  blase  or  hablura,     he  might  speak. 

,     1.  hahlasemos  or  habluramos,     we  might  speak. 

2.  hahldseis  or  habldrais,     you  might  speak. 

3.  habldsen  or  habldran,     they  might  speak. 

Future  tense. 

.     1.  quaiido  Iiablare,     when  I  shall  speak. 

2.  quando  habldres,     when  thou  shalt  speak. 

3.  quando  habldre,     when  he  shall  speak. 

.     1 .  quando  habldremos,     when  we  shall  speak, 

2.  quando  hablureis,     when  you  shall  speak. 

3.  quando  habldren,     when  they  shall  speak. 

Compound  tenses. 

p.  of  the  pres.  hdi/a  hablddo,  I  may  have  spoken. 
p.  of  the  imperf.  habria  hablddo,  I  would  have,  &c. 
tp.  of  thepret.     hub eis e  or  hub i*!  ,     .  ,  ^ ,  . 

erahahUdo.    >  I  m.ght  have.  &c. 

ip.  of  the  fut.      hubiire  hablddo,  I  shall  have,  &o. 


60 


OF  VERBS. 


Imperative  mood. 

Sing.         (no  first  person.) 

2,  hdhla  tu,     speak  thou. 

3.  hahle  el,     let  him  speak. 

Piur.     1 .  hallemos,     let  us  speak. 

2.  hah  Lad,     speak  you. 

3.  hdhlen,    let  them  speafc. 


An  Alphaletical  List  of  regular  verbs  in  ar  conjugated 
like  hablar. 


Spanish. 

English. 

A 

Ahorddr 

to  board 

^celdr 

to  iinish 

Acomoddr 

to  adjust 

Acusdr 

to  a(  cuse 

Adelantdr 

to  forward 

^frentdr 

to  affront 

ALabdr 

to  praise 

Alejdr 

<  to  set  at  a  di- 
l     stance 

Allandr 

to  smooth 

Alquildr 

to  let  on  hire 

Alwnhrdr 

to  light 

Ahdr 

to  take  up 

Amansdr 

to  tame 

Amdr 

to  love 

uirnedranidr 

to  put  in  fear 

Ammazdr 

to  threaten 

Ampardr 

to  protect 

Animdr 

to  encourage 

Aparejdr 

to  make  ready- 

Apedr 

to  alight 

Aprovechdr 

to  make  progress 

Arrancdr 

to  tear  up 

Arrehatdr 

to  snatch 

Atdr 

to  tie 

Aventurdr 

to  venture 

Aynddr 

to  help 

Azotdr 

to  whip 

B 

Bamloledr 

to  totter 

Burajdr 

to  shuflie  cards 

Buvldr 

to  fiance 

Besdr 

to  kiss 

Borrdr 

to  blot  out 

c 

Caldr 

to  dig 

Calldr  ^ 

to  be  silent 

Camindr 

to  walk 

Cansdr 

to  tire 

Canldr 

to  sing 

Casdr 

to  marry 

Cazdf 

to  hunt 

Cendr 

to  sup 

Comprdr 

to  buy- 

Condendr 

to  condemn 

Covformdr 

to  conform 

Contestdr    ■''■ 

'  tb  contest 

Cortdr 

to  cut 

Cridr 

to  breed 

Curdr 

to  cure 

D 

Danzdr 

to  dance 

Desafidr 

to  challenge 

Desarraigdr 

to  root  up 

Desampardr 

to  forsake 

Desprecidr 

to  despise 

De.muddr 

to  strip 

DesengaJidr 

to  undeceive 

OF  VEEB3. 

Ot 

Despavildr  la 

1   fto  snuff  the 
J  \  caudle 

Gastdr 

to  spend 

vela 

Gloriurxe 

to  praise  one's  self 

Despavilur 

S.  to  awake 

Goberndr 

to  govern 

los  6jos 

Guarddr 

to  keep 

Despojdr 

to  strip 

H 

Dexdr 

to  leave 

Halldr 

to  find 

Disfamdr 

to  defame 

Hartdr 

to  satiate 

Dispardr 

to  discharge 

Hereddr 

to  inherit 

Dumdr 
E 

to  tame 

Herrdr 

fto  garnish 
\  with  iron 

Eckdr 

to  put  out 

Hincdr 

to  trust  in 

Empendr 
Envidr 

to  engage 
to  send 

Holgdr 

<  to  rest  from 
\  labour 

Eucantdr 

to  enchant 

Honrdr 

to  honour 

Enojdr 

to  anger 

Hurtdr 

to  steal 

Ensanchur 

to  widen 

I 

Entrdr 

to  come  ill 

Tgnordr 

to  be  ignorant 

Escaramuzdr 

to  skirmish 

Igualdr 

to  equalize 

Espantdr 

to  frighten 

Importundr 

to  importune 

Estemuddr 

to  sneeze 

lynprimdr 

to  prime 

Estimdr 

to  esteem 

Impiobdr 

to  disapprove 

F 

Incitdr 

to  incite 

Fahricdr 

to  manufacture 

Injuridr 

to  revile 

Facilitdr 

to  facilitate 

Incli/utr 

to  bend 

FaUifimr 

to  falsify 

Ificrepdr 

to  reprehend 

Fechdr 

to  date  a  letter 

Inciilcdr 

to  inculcate 

Fecundiir 

to  make  fertile     | 

Indagdr 

to  search 

FfHtiidr 

to  congratulate    i 

Indicdr 

to  indicate 

Fidr 

to  trii8t                   ' 

hidigndr 

to  irritate 

Fillrdr 

to  filter                  , 

InduUdr 

to  forgive 

FLanqup.dr 

to  flank  or  fortify 

Infmttdr 

to  defame 

Plechdr 

to  dart                  ! 

hgeiiidr 

to  contrive 

Fletdr 

to  freight  a  ship  ; 

In  molar 

to  sacrifice 

Floredr 

^  r  to  adora  with 
'  [  flowers 

Inoculdr 

to  inoculate 

Insinuur 

to  insinuata 

Flotdr 

to  rub  gently 

Ifispndr 

to  inspire 

Fomidr 

to  form                 1 

Inlentdt 

to  try 

Fracasdr 

to  break  to  pieces 

InvenUir 

to  invent 

Fraiiquedr 

to  free 

Irritdr 

to  irritate 

Frendr 

to  restrain 

hdr 

to  hoi&t 

Frisdr 

to  frizzle 

L 

Frogdr 

to  make  a  wall 

Labrdr 

to  labour 

Fructificdr 

to  fructify 

Lacerdr 

to  tear  to  pieces 

Fumdr 

to  smoke  tobacco 

Lacfdr 

to  injure 

Fu7iddr 

/to   found,    to 
"1^  establish 

Logrimdr 

to  shed  tears 

Lamentdr 

to  lament 

G 

Lanzdr 

to  dart 

Gafdr 

to  hook 

Largdr 

to  loosen 

Galanledr 
Ganir 

to  court 
to  gain 

Lastdr 

5  to  pay  for  aa- 
}  other 

m 


OF   VERBS. 


Lastrdr 

to  ballast  a  ship   i 

Mejvrdr 

to  recover 

Latinizdr 

to  latinize             j 

Me.ntdr 

to  mention 

Lavdr 

to  wash                 j 

Menosprecidr 

to  undervalue 

Legal  izdr 

to  make  lawful 

Mirdr 

to  look 

Leirdr 

to  depute 

Mihgdr 

to  mitigate 

Legiiimdr 

to  leg;itimate 

Modcrnr 

to  moderate 

I  evanldr 

to  lift  up 

Mnfdr 

to  mock 

Lrvdr 

to  carry 

Mnjdr 

to  wet 

Lilrdr 

to  free 

MuUficdr 

to  mollify 

Li,e:dr 

to  tie 

Mostidr 

to  show 

Limdr 

to  file 

Muddr 

[  to  move,  to 
\  change 

Limit  ur 

to  linut 

Limpidr 

to  clean 

.   ^ 

Liquidnr 

to  melt 

Nadur 

to  swim 

Litigdr 

to  litigate 

Narrdr 

to  relate 

Lixdr 

to  polish 

Naturalizdr 

to  naturalize 

Lifigdr 

to  hurt 

Naregdr 

to  navigate 

LI  a  mar 

to  call 

Negocidr 

to  negotiate 

Llcgdr 

to  arrive 

Nomhrdr 

to  name 

Lit/idr 

to  iill  up 

Noticidr 

to  notice 

Llevdr 

<  to  carry<  to 
( transport 

Numerdv 

to  number 

O 

Llorar 

to  weep 

Ohservdr 

to  observe 

Lodr 
Lpgrar 

to  praise 

Ocultdr 

to  conceal 

to  gain 

0<  updr 

to  cccupy 

Lt'gredr 

{ to  borrow 
(  upon  interest 

Ojedr 
Oividdr 

to  ogle 
to  forget 

Luchdr 

to  struggle 

Opitdr 

to  obstruct 

Lucuhrr.r 

to  study  by  night 

Opindr 

to  argue 

M 

Ofjidr 

to  elect 

JMachacdr 

to  poundor  break 

Opugndr 

j  to  attack,  to 
(  resist 

Macizdr 

ta  stop  a  hv.le 

M.'Kuldr 

to  spot,  to  slain 

Oidendr 

to  put  in  order 

Magnijicdr 

to  extol 

Orxir 

tolufF 

MaLalaratdr 

to  lavish 

Ostentdr 

to  demonstrate 

Maleficidx 

to  adulterate 

Obirgdr 

to  condescend 

Malicidr 

^  til  give  a  bad 
I  meaning 

P 

Pa^dr 

to  pay 

Malogrdr 

to  disappoint 

Palpdr 

to  feel,  to  touch 

Mtthindr 

to  inform  Against 

Paramentdr 

to  adorn 

MallraUlr 

to  use  ill 

Puragnndr 

to  compare 

jManddr 

to  command 

Partdr 

to  chatter 

Mar  car 

t|)  mark 

Participdr 

to  share 

Margindr 

to  annote 

Pasenr 

to  walk 

Marindr 

to  man  a  ship 

Pdedr 

to  fight 

Martiltdr 

to  hammer 

Penetrdr 

to  penetrate 

Mascdr 

to  chew 

Perdondr 

to  forgive 

Matdr 

t<.  kill 

Perturtdr 

to  interrupt 

Mec  idr 

to  meditate 

Pinidr 

to  paint 

Medrdr 

to  improve 

Porfdr 

to  contend 

OF    VERDi. 

Pnrtcdr 

to  carry- 

S 

\      PuKirUitdr 

to  make  easy 

Sacdr 

to  remove 

Pustdr 

to  bet 

S'lcidr 

to  SHtisfy 

Precidr 

to  value 

Sacri/icdr 

to  sacrifice 

Piedomindr 

J  to  predomi- 
(  naie 

Saltcdr 
Sahuldr 

to  assault 
to  salute 

Preginitdr 

to  question 

Snlvdr 

to  save 

■  Premidr 

to  reward              i 

'  Sa/idr 

to  cure 

Prestdr 

to  lend 

SegdT 

to  reap 

Prwdr 

to  deprive             '  i 

6'ein.edr 

to  plunder 

Prnhdr 

to  try 

Siiidr 

to  besiejrc 

Prnlov^dr 

to  prolong 

Sf)b  exalldr 

to  surprise 

Promnlg'lr 

t'>  publish 

Sut/dr 

to  sweat 

Provocdr 

to  provoke 

Sujeldr 

to  subdue 

PuL'licdr 

to  publish 

Sustenidr 

to  sustain 

Q 

T 

Quelrantdr 

to  break 

Tafldr 

to  cut 

Qiii'ddr 

to  stay 

Tapdr 

to  cover 

Quemdr 

to  burn 

Ttirtamudedr 

to  stammer 

Quitdr 

to  take  away 

Ttntdr 

to  try 

R 

1  Te>tldr 

to  bequeath 

Rijdr 

to  split 

Tmir 

to  dart 

Roledr 

to  make  thin 

Tocdr 

to  touch 

Rfilldr 

to  grra'e 

Trubajdr 

to  work 

Rert'/dr 

to  draw  back 

Trincdr 

to  chop 

Jichu.dr 

to  refuse 

Trompdr 

to  deceive 

Rftirdr 

to  retire 

1           U  V 

Reyudr 

to  reign 

I  Ihdr 

to  use 

Robdr 

J  to  rob,  to 
';  plunder 

1  Usurpdr 
\  Vacidr 

fo  usurp 
to  empty 

•    Rvindr 

to  ruin 

1  Vncildr 

to  sta.c:j[jer 

Rumidr 

to  ruminate 

1  rexdr 

to  molest. 

m 


The  second  regular  conjugation  in  er. 


Injinitlve  mood. 


Present  tense, 
Gerund, 
Participle, 
Comp.  of  the  present, 
Comp.  of  the  gerund, 


lel^r,     to  drink. 
heliendo,     drinking. 
leido,     drunk. 
ha  her  helidoy     to  have  drunk. 
hahiendo  belido,     having  drunk, 
g2 


64 


«P    VERBS. 


Indicative  mood. 

Present  tense. 

Sing.     1.  lebo,     I  drink. 

2.  bUes,     thou  drinkest, 

3.  bebe,     he  drinks. 

Plur,     1.  bebemos,     we  drink. 

2.  hebeis,     you  drink. 

3.  b^ben,     they  drink. 

Imperfect  tense, 

Sin^.     1,  bebla,     I  did  drink. 

2.  bebiasy     then  didst  drink. 

3.  bebia,     he  did  drink, 

Plur.     1.  bebinmos,     we  did  drink. 

2.  bebiais,    you  did  drink. 

3.  lebian,    they  did  drink. 

Preterite  tense, 

Sing.     1.  ^;^^7,     I  drank. 

2.  leliste,     thou  drnnkest. 

3.  i-eiid,     he  drank. 

Plur.     1.  beliinos,     we  drank."" 

2.  bebisteis,     you  drank. 

3.  bebieroji,     they  drank. 

Future  tense. 

Sing,     1.  belere,     1  shall  drink. 

2.  beh era's,     thou  shalt  drink. 

3.  beberd,     he  shall  drink. 


OF  VERBS. 


60 


plur.     1.  lelerimos,     we  will  drink, 

2.  l-eberfis,  you  will  drink. 

3.  leberdn,     they  will  drink. 

•     •  Cowponnd  tenses. 

Comp.  of  the  present,  he  hebidoy     I  have  drunk. 
Comp.  of  the  imperf.   habia  bebido,     I  had  drunk. 
Conap.  of  the  pret.        kube  bebido,     I  had  drunk. 
Comp.  of  the  fut.         habre  i-ebido,     1  shall  have  drunk. 

Subjunctive  mood,    . 

Present  tense. 

Sing.     1.  quebtba,     that  I  may  drink. 

2.  que  bebas,     that  thou  mayst  drink. 

3.  que  beba,     that  he  may  drink. 

Plur.     1 .  que  bebdmos,     that  we  may  drink. 

2.  que  bebdisy     that  you  may  drink. 

3.  que  beban^     that  they  may  drink. 

Imperfect  tense. 

Sing.     I.  bt'beriay     I  should  drink. 

%  beberiaSy     thou  shouldst  drink. 
3.  beberitty    he  should  drink. 

Plar.     1 .  beberiamosy    we  should  drink. 

2.  beberioisy    you  should  drink. 

3.  beberlan,     they  should  drink. 

Preterite  tense. 

Siog..    1.  que  bebiese  or  bebUra,  that  I  might  drink. 

2-  que  bfbieses  or  bebieraSy      that  thou   mightst 

drink. 
3,  que  bebiese  or  bebidra^     that  he- might  driuk«- 
g3 


66  OF  VERBS. 

Plur.     I.  que  lehUsemos  or  behieramos,      that  we  might 

drink. 

2.  que  lehiese'is  ox  lelierais,     that  ye  might,  &c« 

3.  que  hebiesen  or  bebieran,     that  they,  &c. 

Future  tense. 
Sing.      1.  quando  bebiere,     when  I  shall  drink. 

2.  quando  bebLres,     when  ihoii  shall  drink. 

3.  quando  bebiere,     when  he  shall  drink. 
Plur.     1 .  quando  bebieremos,    when  we  shall  drink. 

2.  quando  bebiereis,     when  you  shall  drink. 

3.  quando  bebiereUj     when  they -shall  drink. 

Compound  tenses. 

Comp.  of  thepres.     hay  a  bdido,  I  may  have  drunk. 
Comp.  of  the  imperf.  habria  bebido,  I  should  have  drunk. 
Comp.  of  the  pret.     hubiese  or  hubiera  bebido,    I  might 

have  drunk. 
Comp.  of  the  fut.       kuli&re  bebido,  I  shall  have  drunk. 

Imperative  mood. 

Sing.  (no  first  person.) 

2.  bebe  lu,     drink  thou. 

3.  beba  tl,    let  him  drink. 

Plur.     \.  hebdmoSi     let  us  drink. 

2.  behed,     drink  you. 

3.  beban,     Jet  them  drink. 


An  alphabetical  list  vf  regular  verbs  in  er,    conjugated 
like  beber. 


Spanish.  Engliih. 

A 

Accgir  to  protect 

jicometcT  to  attack 

Aatectdtr  to  precede 

ApreheiidcT  to  apprehend 


Arrcmettr         to  assail  suddenly 

B 
Barn'r  to  sweep 


I  Comer 
I'  Conceder 


to  eat 
Conceder  to  grant 


OF  VERBS. 


67 


Cometer   .  to  commit 

Correspondtr  to  correspond 

Correr  to  run  . 

E 

Emprender  to  undertake 

Ksconder  to  hide 

M 

Meter  to  put 

O 

Ofender  to  offend 


P 

Prometcr  to  promise 

R 
Reprekendtr        to  reprove 
Respavder  to  answer 

T 
Tem/r  to  fear 

V 
render  to  sfiU. 


rAir^f  conjugation. — Of  the  regular  verb  subir,  ^o  go  up. 

Injimtwe  mooi. 

Present  tense,  sulir,     to  go  np. 

Gerund,  suLiendo,     gouig  up. 

Participle,  sui-ido,     gone  up, 

Conip.  of  the  present,  hder  subidoj     to  have  gone  up. 

Conop.  of  the  gerund,  hdliendo  sulidoy  liaving  gone  up. 


Indicative  mood. 


Present  tense. 


Sing.     1.  sulo,     I  go  up. 

2.  siihesy     thou  goest  up. 

3.  suhe,     he  goes  up. 

Plur.     1.  subimos,     we  go  up. 

2.  suhis,    you  go  up. 

3.  suten,     they  go  up. 

Imperfect  tense. 

Sing.     1.  sulia,     I  did  go  up. 

2.  subias,     thou  didst  go  up. 

3.  itt^ia,     he  did  go  up. 


6s  OF  VERBS. 

Plur.     1 .  suMavws,     we  did  go  up. 

2.  suUais,     you  did  go  up. 

3.  sulian,     they  did  go  up. 

Preterite  tense. 

Sing.     1 .  suU,     I  did  go  up. 

2.  suhiste,     thou  didst  go  up. 

3.  siili6,     he  did  go  up, 

Plur.     ] .  siibimos,     we  did  go  up. 
2    suhisteisy     you  did  go  np; 
3.  suhieron,     they  did  go  up. 

Future  tense. 

Sing.     1.  suHre,     I  shall  go  up. 

2.  suhirds,     thou  shalt  go  up, 

3.  subirct,     he  shall  go  up. 

Plur.     I.  snbiremos,     we  shall  go  up. 
2.  subirdsy     you  shall  go  up. 
3-  subirdn,     they  shall  go  up. 

Compound  tenses. 

Comp.  of  the  pres.     he  subido,  I  have  gone  up. 
Comp.  otihe  iinperf  habia  suhidoy  I  had  gone  up. 
Comp  of  the  pret.      hube  subido,  I  had  gone  up. 
Comp.  of  the  fat.        habr4  subido,  I  shall  have  gone  up. 

*    Subjunctive  mood'. 

Present  tense. 

Sing.      I .  que  sicba,     that  I  may  go  up. 

2.  c/Ne  subas,     that  thou  mayst  go  up=K 

3.  que  siiba,     that  he  may  go  up.. 


OF    VEABS.  ^ 

Plur.     1.  que  suhumos,     that  we  may  go  up. 

2.  quesuhuis,     that  you  may  go  up. 

3.  que  suban,     that  they  may  go  up. 

Imperfect  tense. 

Sing.     1.  suliria,     I  shoulJgo  up. 

2.  suliHasy     thou  shcjuldst  go  up. 

3.  suiiria,     he  should  go  up. 

Plur.     1.  suliriamos,     we  should  go  up. 

2.  subiriaist     you  should  go  up. 

3.  subiriaii,     they  should  go  up. 

Preterite  tense. 

Sing.     1.  que  sulitse  or  sulk'ra,     that  I  might  go  up. 

2.  que  suhiises  or  subliras,  that  thou  ui  p  )  tst,  &c. 

3.  que  subl4se  or  subUra,    that  he  might  go  up. 

Plur.     1.  que  subiesemos  or  subi^ramos,    that  we  might 

go  up. 

2.  que  suhiiseis  or  subi'rais,  that  you  might,  &c. 

3.  ywe  subiisen  or  subieran,  that  they  might,  &c. 

Future  tense. 

Sing.     1.  quando  subicre,     when  I  shall  go  up. 

2.  quando  subidres,     when  thou  shalt  go  up. 

3.  quando  subi^re,     when  he  shall  go  up. 

Plur.     1 .  quando  subieremos,     when  we  shall  go  up. 

2.  quando  subureis,     when  you  shall  go  up. 

3.  quando  subiiren^     when  they  shall  g«  up. 

Compound  tenses, 

Comp.  of  the  pres,      haya  subido,  I  may  have  gone  up, 
Comp,  of  the  imperf.  habria  subido,  I  should  have,  6cc. 


70 


OF    VEHBS. 


Comp.  of  the  pret.   huliese  or  huhiira  suHdo,     I   migh 

have  gone  up. 
Comp.  of  the  fut.     hubiere  subido,  I  shall  have  gone  up 


5ing. 


Plur. 


Imperative  mood. 
(no  first  person.) 

2.  sule,     go  thou  up. 

3.  suba,     let  him  go  up. 

1.  subumos,     let  us  go  up. 

2.  sub  id y     go  you  up. 

3.  suban,     let  them  go  up. 


J  list  of  regular  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation. 


Spanish. 
A 
Alatir 

AhiniiT 
/tTmdir 
AtuTiLir 

B 
Battr 
BuUir 

C 
Corrhotir 
Coinpiimir 
Cotirurrir 
Coiifiniiir 
Ciwfutidir 
ConatriiW 
Cutihiir 
Cuhi  tr 

D 

De^trvir 
JJisnirrtr 
J)ii,miniiir 
E 

Flidir 
y.hidir 

Emtr 
Escah'llir 
y.sml'tr 
Escurrir 


English,. 

Eyctriwif 

to  fence 

hxhtbtr 

to  exhibit 

to  abate 

Exist  tr 

to  exist 

to  open 

Exprinur 

to  express 

to  molest 

Extingutr 

to  extinguish 

to  add 

•  F 

to  stua 

to  beat 
to  boil 

Fingtr 
Fro/Ktr 

to  fei^ 
to  wrmkle 

hund'tr 

to  melt 

G 

to  fight 

Gun'ir 

to  yelp 

to  compress 

H 

to  concur 

Uiiir 

to  fly 

to  consume 

IJuvdir 

to  sink 

to  confound 

I 

to  construe 

Imprim'r 

luclii'ir 

Infvndh 

to  contribute 
to  cover 

to  print 
to  include 
to  pour  in 

, 

Instriitr 

to  instruct 

to  rum 

to  discourse 

M 

to  dimmish 

Mcdir 

N 

to  measure 

to  weaken 

Xuliir 

to  nourish 

to  elude 

O 

to  impose  on 

Ohtrurr 

to  obstruct 

to  erect 

P 

to  slip  away 

Parir 

to  bring  forth 

to  wtite 

Part'rr 

to  depart 

to  drip 

Permit'tr 

to  permit 

OP  VERBS. 


71 


Prohibir 
PuUt 

R 

nhir 

S 
cril'iT 
istir 


to  prohibit 
to  smootli 


to  check 
to  restrain 

to  subscribe 
to  subsist 


S.frir  ^ 
Supiimir 

T 
Tuiidir 

U 
Unir 
Urdir 

Z 
Zurcir 


to  suffer 
to  suppress 

to  shear  cloth 

to  unite 
to  warp 

to  darn. 


I 


Conjugation  of  a  regular  and  reflective  verb  in  ar. 
Levantarse,  to  rise. — Lat.  surgere, 

Injinitive  mood. 

Present  tense,  levantarse,     to  rise. 
Gerund,  Itvantandose,     rising. 

Participle,         levantddo,     risen. 

Indicative  mood. 

Present  tense. 

Sing.     1.  me  levSnto,     I  rise. 

2.  te  ievantas,  thou  rises.t. 

3.  se  lei'dnta,     he  rises. 

Plur.     1 .  7205  levantdmos,     we  rise. 

2.  OS  levantdis,     you  rise. 

3.  se  levdntan,     they  rise. 


Imperfect  tense. 

Sing.     1 .  me  levantdla,     I  did  rise. 

2.  te  levantdbas,     thou  didst  rise, 

3.  se  levantdba,    he  did  rise. 


7^  OF    VESB8. 

Plur.     I.  nos  levantalamosy     we  did  rise. 

2.  OS  levaitdbaiSy     you  did  rise. 

3.  se  levantdban,     they  did  rise. 

Preterite  tense. 

Sing.     I.  me  levavte,     I  rose. 

2.  te  levantaste,     thou  rosest. 

3,  se  Levanto,     he  rose. 

Plur.     1.  7205  levantdmoSf     we  rose. 

2.  OS  levantasteiSf     you  rose. 

3.  se  levantdron,  ^  they  rose. 

Future  tense. 

Sing.     1 .  me  levantare,     I  will  rise. 

2.  te  le  van  tar  as,     thou  wilt  rise. 

3.  se  levantard,     he  will  rise. 

Plur.     1.  nos  levantarimosy  we  will  rise. 

2.  OS  levari  tar  eis,     you  will  rise. 

3.  se  levantardn,     they  will  rise. 

Compound  tenses. 

Comp.  of  the  pres.     me  he  levantddo,     I  have  risen. 
Comp.  of  the  imperf.me  habia  levantddo,     I  had  risen. 
Comp.  of  the  pret.     me  hube  levantddo,     I  had  risen. 
Corap.  of  the  fut.      me  hahre  levantddo,  I  shall  have.  Sec. 

Subjunctive  mood. 
Present  tense. 

Sing.     1 .  me  levdnte,     I  niay  rise. 

2.  te  levdnies,     thou  rw-yst  rise. 

3.  se  lev  ante,     he  may  rise. 


OF  VERBS.  75 

Piur..    1 .  nos  levanthnos,     we  m?y  rise. 

2.  OS  levaiiteis,    you  may  rise. 

3.  S€  levdnten,     they  may  rise. 

Imperfect  tense. 

Sing.     I,  we  levantarla,     I  should  rise. 

2.  <e  levantarlaSj     thou  shouldsl  rise. 

3.  se  levaniaria,     he  should  rise. 

Plur.     1 .  nos  levantariamos,     we  should  rise, 

2.  05  levanlariais y     you  should  rise. 

3.  $e  leuanlariarij     they  should  ris?. 

Preterite  tense. 

Sing.     1.  vie  levanicise,  ot  levantara,     I  might  rise^ 

2.  /e  levantdstSj  or  levantdras,  thou  mightst  rise. 

3.  se  levantdse,  or  levantar a,     he  might  rise. 

Plur.     I.  110s  levant dsevios J  or  lev'antdramnsy     we  might 

rise. 

2.  OS  levantdseis,  or  levantdrtis,    you  might  rise. 

3.  se  Itvantdsen,  or  levantdraUj    they  might  rise. 

Future  tense. 

Sing.     1 .  quando  me  levantdre,     when  I  shall  rise. 

2.  quando  le  levantdres,     when  thou  shall  rise. 

3.  quando  se  levantdre,     when  he  shall  rise. 

Plur.     1 .  quando  nos  levantdremos,    when  we  shall  rise. 

2.  quando  os  levantareis,     when  you  shall  rise. 

3.  quando  se  levanidren,     when  they  shall  rise. 

Compoufid  tenses. 

Comp.  of  the  pres.     me  hay  a  levantddo,  I  may  have  ris«n. 
Comp.  of  the  imperf.we  habria  levantudoy    1  should  have 

risen. 


•  1  OV^'FIRms. 

Comp.  of  the  pret.  me  hub'wse  or  hul'wra  lawntddo,    I 

might  have  risen. 
Comp.  of  the  fut.     me  hulitreJcv(intddo,     1  shall,  &c. 

Impaative  mood. 

Sing.  (no  first  person.) 

2,  levantate,     rise  thou, 

3.  Icvanteseel,     let  him  ris'e. 

Plar.      1 .  levnntemonos,     let  ns  rise. 

2.  levantdos,     rise  you. 

3.  levante)ise  elJos,     let  them  rise. 


Co?}j ligation  of  a  reflective  verb  of  the  second  covjugatio^ 
in  er. 

JRecogerse,  -to  slieltea-  oqe's  self. 

Infinitive  mood. 

Present  tense,  rero^fersc,     to  shelter  one's  self. 
Gernnd,  rerog/endo^e,     sheltering  one's  self. 

Pariiciple^  reco^ido,  sheltered. 

Indicative  mood. 
Present  ten'ie. 

Sing.     1.  me  rectjo,     1  shelter  myself. 

2.  te  recoges,     thou  shelterest  thyse]/. 

3.  se  recoge,     he  shelters  him5e>f. 

Plnr.     1.  nos  rccogemos,     we  shelter  ourselves. 

2.  OS  recogeis,     you  shelter  yourselves. 

3.  se  recdoeUf     they  shelter  themselves. 


VER8S.  75 


imperfect  tense, 

Sfiftg.     1 .  ^Td  reco^ia,     I  ckd  shelter  myself, 

2.  t(^  fico^ias,     thou  didst  shelter  th3'self. 

3.  se  recQota,     he  did  sli«lter  himself.      • 

Plur.     1 .  no.^  re'cogfafiiof,     we  did  shtjlter  ourselves. 

2,  osrec(Tgi(iis,     you  did  shelter  yourselves. 

3.  se  recoofti/if     thej«  did  sftelter  themselves. 

Preterite  tense. 

Sing.     1.  me  recogt,     I  sheltered  myself. 

2.  te  recogiste,     thou  shelteredst  thyself. 

3.  se  recogld,     he  sheltered  himself.  ' 

Plur,     ].  nos  reiogimos,     we  sheltered  ourselves. 

2.  0/  feeogtsteis,     you  sheltered  yourselvesv 

3.  se  recogit'ro?i,     they  sheltered  themselves. 

Future  terfse. 

Sing.     1.  me  recngere,     I  will  shelter  myself. 

2.  te  reccgerus,     thou  wilt  shelter  thyself. 

3.  sereiogeray     he  will  shelter  himself. 

Plur.     J.  TIGS  recogeremos,     we  will  shelter  ourselves. 

2.  OS  recogereis,     yon  will  shelter  yourselves. 

3.  serecvgcrday     they  will  shelter  themselves.. 

Compound  lenses. 

Comp.  of  thepres.       me  he  recogido,     I  have   sheltered 

myself. 
Comp.  of  the  impe-rf.  ?nc  halm  recogido,     I  had,  &c. 
Comp.  of  the  pret.      vie  huh-  tecogidn,    J  Had,  &c. 
Comp.  of  the  fut.        me  hahre  recngid&,  I* shall  have,  &:c., 
H  2 


Subjunciioe  mood. 

Present  tense. 
Sing.     1.  me  recoja,     I  may  shelter  myself. 

2.  te  recojas,     thou  mayst  slielter  thyself. 
•  3.  ^e  recoja,     he  may  shelter  himself. 
Plur*     1.  nosrecnjdmos,     we  may^shelterourselvc-5. 

2.  OS  recojais,     you  may  shcher  yourselves. 

3.  se  reajjan^     they  may  shelter  themselves. 

Imperfect  tense. 
Sing.     \.  merecogcria,     I  should  shelter  myself. 

2.  te  reCugcrittSt    thou  shouldst  shelter  thyself. 

3.  se  reco^eriai    he  should  ilielter  himsuli'. 
Flur.     1.  nos  ncogeriamos,  we  should  shelter  ourselves. 

2.  OS  recogeriais,    you  should  shelter  yourselves. 

3.  se  r^coger{a}i,   they  should  shelter  themaelves. 

Pretmte  tense. 
Sing.    1,  merecogi^se,  or  recogi^ra,    I  might  shelter 

myself, 

2.  ierecogi^seSf  or  recogi^ras,    thou  mightst  shel- 

ter thyself. 

3.  se  recoglese,  or  recogiera,     he   might  shelter 

hmiself. 
Plur,     t.  nos  recogie'semos,  or  recogk'ramos,     we  might 

shelter  ourselves, 

2.  05  recogieseis,  or  recogiirais,  you  might  shelter 

yourselves. 

3.  ie  recogieseriy  or  reco^eran,     they  might  shel' 

ter  themselves. 
Future  tense. 
Sing.     1.  merecog'ere,     I  sball  shelter  myself. 

2.  /e  recngieres,     thou  shalt  shelter  thyself. 

3.  ^e  recoglerCf     he  shall  shelter  himself. 


OF  VERBS.  7/ 

Plur.     1,  nos  recog'teremos,     we  shall  shelter  ourselves. 
'2.  OS  recogicreisy     ycu  shall  shelter  yourselves. 
3.  se  recogit-ren,     they  shall  shelter  themselves. 


Compound  tenses.  * 

Gomp.  of  the  pres.  me  hay  a  recogtdo,    I  may  have  shel- 
tered myself. 
Comp.  of  the  imperf.  me  halrta  recogido,    1  should  have 

sheltered  myself. 

Gomp.  of  the  preter.  me  huhiese  or  huliera  recogido,     I 

might  have  sheltered  myself. 

Comp,  of  the  future,  7ne  hubiere  recogilo,     I   shall  have 

sheltered  mysdf. 

Imperative  moad.. 

iSiiig.         (no  first  person.)' 

2.  recogete  tu,     shelter  (h)  self. 

3.  recojdseel,     let  him  .theher  himself. 

Flur.     1.  reiQJdvtonos,     le^  us  shelter  ourselves. 

2.  recojdos,     ^lelter  yourselves. 

3,  recojan^e  vlhs,   let  tlieiu, shelter  themselves. 


Cqnjugalion  of  a  nJleeliveiKrh  of  the   third,  conjugation, 
in  u. 

Irse,  to  go  away. — Lat.  abire. 

hifinitrve  mood. 

Present  tense,  irse,     to  go  away. 
Gerund,  yendose,     going  away., 

Paiticiple,         ido,     gone  away. 
h3 


78  OF  VERBS. 

Indicative  mood. 
PreserU  tense. 

Sing.     1.  me  v6if,     I  go  away. 

2.  te  vciSy     thou  goest  away. 

3.  se  vd,     he  goes  away. 

Plur.     1 .  nos  vdmos,    we  go  away. 

2.  OS  vdis,    you  go  away. 

3.  se  vdn,     they  go  away. 

Imperfect  tense. 

Sing.     1 .  77?e  iba,     I  did  go  away. 

2.  /e  zYflj,     thou  didst  go  away. 

3.  sc  iba,     he  did  go  away. 

Plur.     I.  Tios  ibamos,     we  did  go  away. 

2.  OS  ibais,     you  did  go  away. 

3.  se  iban,     they  did  go  away. 

Preterite  tense. 

Sing.     1 .  mefui,     I  went  away. 

2.  tefuiste,  thou  wentest  away. 

3.  5t?/«^,     he  went  away. 

Plur.     1,  nosfulmos,     we  went  away. 

2.  osfuisteis,    you  went  away. 

3.  sefti^on,     they  went  away. 

Future  tense. 

Sing.     1 .  TMe  ire,     I  shall  go  away. 

2.  t€  iids,     thou  shalt  go  away. 

3.  se  ird,     he  shall  go  away> 

Plur.     1 .  nos  iremos,     we  shall  go  away< 

2.  OS  ireiSf     you  shall  go  away. 

3.  se  irdri,    they  shall  go  away. 


OP  VERBS.  79 

Compound  tenses. 

Comp.  of  the  present,  7«e  lie  Uo,     I  have  gone  away.    - 
Comp.  of  the  imperf.    me  halia  ido,     I  had  gone  away. 
Comp.  of  the  preter.     me  huleido,     I  had  gone  away. 
Comp.  of  the  future^    me  halre  ido,     I  shall  have,  &Ci 

Suljunctive  mood. 

Present  tense. 

Sing.     1.  mevdya,     I  may  go  away. 

2.  te  vayast     thou  mayst  go  away. 

3.  se  vdya,     he  may  go  away. 

Plur.     I .  vos  vaydmos,     we  may  go  away. 
3.  osvaydis,     you  may  go  away. 
3.  se  vuyan,     they  may  go  away. 

Imperfect  tense. 

Sing.     1.  meiria,     I  should  go  away, 

2.  te  irias,     thou  shouldst  go  away. 

3.  se  iria,     he  should  go  away. 

Plur.     1 .  nos  iriamos,     we  should  go  away. 

2.  OS  iriais,     you  should  go  away. 

3.  4e  irian,     they  should  go  away. 

^   ^  Preterite  tense. 

Sing,     l.mefueseoxfuera,     I  might  go  away. 

2.  tefutses  oxfueras,     thou  mighist  go  away, 

3.  sefuese  or  fuer a i     he  might  go  away. 

Plur.     1.  nos  fu4semos  or  fuiramos,  we  might  go  away. 
2.  osfueseis  or  fuerais,     yon  might  go  away. 
3    sefuesenorfuera?!,     they  might  go  away. 


80  OF  VERBS. 

Future  tense. 

Sing.     1.  quandomefuere,     when  I  sbnll  go  away. 

2.  (juando  tefutres,    when  thou  shait  go  away. 

3  (juando  sefiiere,     when  he  shall  go  away. 

Plur.     1.  quando  nosfueremos,     when' we  shall,  &:c. 

2.  (juando  osfaeieis,     when  you  shall  go,  &c. 

3.  quando  sej'ueien,  when  they  shall  go  away. 

Compound  tenses. 
Crtmp.  of  the  pres.     me  kni/a  ido,  I  nisy  have  gone  away. 
Comp.of  the  imperf.  me  habria  ido,     I  should  liave,  &g* 
Conip.  ol  the  pretcr.  mc  fiubitse  or  huliera  ido,      I  might 

have,  &c. 
Comp.of  the  fat.       mehdiere  Ido,  I  shall  have,  &:c.- 

Imperat'we  mood. 
Smg.         (no- first  person.) 

2.  vetCy     go  thou  away. 

3.  vaydse  el,  let  him  go  away. 
Plur.     1.  vaydvionoSy     let  us  go  away. 

2    ido  ,     go  you  away. 

3.  vayanse  ellos,     let  them  go  away. 

gECTION.  V. 

Of  passive  verbs. 
The  passive  verbs  are  formed  by  adding  to  the  auxiliary 
$er,  the  participle  pagsive  of  the  «erb  we  iiUt3;id  t4  con- 
jugate J  as,  ser  amado,  to  be  loved. 

Indicative  mood. 
Present  tense 
Sing.     1.  soy  amddo,     I  am  loved. 

2.  cres  amxidoj     thou  art  loved. 
,3.  ^s  g^rjidilQi    Jhe  is  lovetl* 


OF  VEKBS, 


Piur.     1.  somos  amddos,     we  are  loved.  ^ 

2.  sois  amddos y     you  are  loved, 

3.  son  amddos,     they  are  loved,  &c. 
and  so  on,  for  all  the  Aioods>  tenses,  and  persons. 

Reciprocal  verbs. 

Reciprocal  verbs  are  ofter^  confounded  with  the  re- 
flective ones.  There  is,  however,  a  greai  difference  be- 
tween themr  the  latter  can  be  conjugated  in  the  singular 
number,  as  you  may  see,  page  7 1  j  whereas  the  former 
have  no  singular,  and  can  be  only  conjugated  in  the 
plural,  as  you  will  see  in  the  following  examples. 

h^inU'we  wioo^,— Amarie  ^o  Iovq  pne  anothrr, 

Nos  awdmos  unos  d  oiros  tier  nam  en  te. 
We  love  one  another  tenderly, 

Irifinitive  woorf.— Pelearse  tojtght. 

Imperfect  tense, 

Se  peUalan  valientemente,    they  diil  fight  one  another 

valiantly, 

SECTION  VI. 

Conjugation  of  a  series  of  irregular  verbs  in  an  alpha* 
betical  order, 

A 
infinitive  present.  Ahorreccr,     to  hate. 
Gerund.  aborreciendo,     hating. 

Participle.  aborrendo,     hated 

Indicat.  pres.  abor-rezco,     -reces,     "rece, 

alor-recemos,     -receis,     -recen. 
Imperfect.  abor-rena,     -reciaSy     -reda, 

abor-reciamos,     -reciais,     recloTi, 


82 


OF  VERBS. 


VreterptH.        alor-reci,     -reciste,     -redo, 

alor-rcclmos,      ieti<fteis,     -recieron. 
Future,  ubor-rccerc,     -recerds,     -recerd, 

alor-recer^moi,     -rtcuriis,     -recerdn. 
Subjunctive.     al'or-rex(a,     -tt%(as,     -retci, 

alo^-reicambs,     -rezfais,     -rexcan. 
Imperfect.         abor-receria,     -recerias,     -rci:eiia, 

abor-receriaMoS,     -recetiuis,     -recertan. 
Preterite.  abcr-redtse     -redcues     -redt'se 

or  or  or 

alor-redt^a,  -tediras,    -fedcra. 

ubor-redtsemos     -redeseis     'redcsen 
ot  or  or 

ahor-rcdiramos,    -redhais,    -rcddan^ 
Future,  aiur  redere,     rrederes,     -redde, 

abor-  rederemos,     -redereist     'redtreit. 
Imperative.       alorrece,     hate  thou. 

cborrezca,     l^tt  Llm  hate. 

ahorrexcdmoS J     let  us  hate, 

aborrccd,     hate  you. 

aborrezcan,    let  him  hate. 

Observation. 

The  irregularity  of  this  verb,  and  of  all  others  ending; 
in  acer^,  ecer^  and  ocer,  consists  in  having  a  x  placed 
before  the  c  in  the  first  person  singular  of  the  present  in- 
dicative; in  ail  the  persons  of  the  present  subjunctive  j 
and  in  the  third  person  singular,  and  first  and  third  per- 
sons plural  of  tiie  imperative. 

The  verbs  hacer  and  veneer  are  the  only  exceptions 
from  this  rule,  being  conjugated  like  the  regular  ones. 

The  compound  tenses  of  the  verb  abr'ir  to  open,  are 
irregular  only  in  the  participle,,  which  makes  ahurlQy 
opened. 

*  Tke  only  exception  to  ihis  rule  is  the  verb  hacer-,  whose  ir- 
regularity will  be  noticed  in  its  place. 


01"  VEnas. 


33 


fnfin.  present. 
Gerund. 
Participle 
Indicat.  pres. 

Imperfect. 

Preterite. 

Future. 

Subjunctive. 

Imperfect. 

Preterite. 


Future. 
Imperative. 


^hsoJvur,     to  absolve. 
ahsolviendo,     absolving. 
absuelto,     absolved. 
ah-suelvo,     -suelves,     -suelve, 
ab-soIvemoSt     rSolieis,     -suchjcn, 
ah-solvia,     -soluiq.^,     -soluia, 
ah-soltriamoSy     -^oluiais,     SQUiun. 
ah-solvi,     -soividCt     -solvid, 
ah  sofvimoSy     -sohUleis,     -solv'thron. 
ah-solvere,     -solverds,     -^olverd, 
ah-solverhnos,     -soluereir,      soluerdn. 
ab-suelva,     -suelvasy     -suelva, 
ah-snlvdmoSy     --olvdis,     -sue/ran. 
al-sol-  ■  na,     -solverias,     'Solveria., 
ab  sulveriamos,     -solveriais,     -soljerian, 
ah-solvitse       'Solvi^ses      -soh  iese 

or  or  ;  r 

ab-snlvifra,     -solvieras,     -soli/iera, 
ab-solvmemos     -solvieseis     -solvitsert 

or  or  ur 

ab-solvitramos,    -solvitrais,    -sn/vicran. 
ab-soiviere,     -solv'iLres,     -soLviere, 
ab-so!v:eremos,     -so/vitreis,     -solviSfen, 
ab-s  iAve,     absolve  tliou. 
absue/va,     let  him  absolve. 
absolvamo&f     let  us  absolve. 
absolved,     abs(  Ive  you. 
absuelvan,     let  him  absolve. 


Jhstrohcr,     to  abstract.    See  (in  the  letter  T)  Traher, 
Aca^er,     to  hiippen,  is  impersonal.     See  Abf.r.ecsr. 


Inf.n.  present.  Jcertdr,     to  hit  the  aim. 
Gerund.  acertando^     hiit.ng  the  aim. 

Participle.         acertddo,     hit  the  aim. 
Indicat.  pres,    acifrto,  aciertas^  acierta, 

aceridmos,  accrtdi,  aciertan. 


84 


OP  VEJIBS. 


Imperfect.        acertdba,  aceridbas,  acertdha, 

acertdhamos,  acertdbais,  acertdbaii.    - 
Preterite.  acerie,  acertdste,  acerto, 

acertdmoSy  ucertasteis,  acertdron. 
Future.  acertare.  acertards,  acertard, 

acerlaremos,  acertarfis,  acertardn. 
Subjunctive,     acierte,  aciertes,  acierte, 

ucertemos,  acerteis,  acierten. 
Imperfect.        acertaria,  acertarias,  acertaria, 

acertariamos,  acertariais,  acertarian. 
Preterite.  acertdse     acertdses     acertdse 

or  or  or 

acertdra,    acertdras,   acertdra, 

acertasemos      acertdseis      acertdsen 
or  or  or 

acertdramos,     acertdrais,     acertdran. 
Future.  acertdre,  aceridres,  acertdrv, 

acertdremos ,  acerldreis,  acertdren. 
Imperative,      acieria,     hit  ihou  the  aim. 

acierte,     let  him  hit  the  aim. 

acert'Jmos,     let  us  hit  the  aim. 

acertady     hit  you  the  aim. 

acierten,     let  them  hit  the  aim. 

Infinitive.         Acordar,     to  agree. 
Gerund.  acordando,     agreeing. 

Participle.         acordado,     agreed. 
Indicat.  pres.    acuerdo,  acuerdas,  acuerda,. 

acorddmos,  acordais,  acuerdan. 
Imperfect.        acorddba,  acorddbas,  acorddba, 

acorddbamos,  acorddbais,  acorddbcm. 
Preterite.  acordi,  acordaste,  acordo, 

acorddmos,  acorddsteis,  acorddron. 
Future.  acordar^,  acordards,  acordard, 

acordarimos,  acordariis,  acordardn. 
Subjunctive,     acuerde,  acuerdes,  acuerde, 

acordemos,  aeordeis,  acuerden. 


Ot  VEKES. 


Sii 


hiiperfect.  '     ncordarii,  acordarias,  crcordana, 

ncordariamosy  acordariais,  acouiartg.n. 

Preterite.  acorddse     acorddses     acorddse 

oi»  or  or 

acorddra,    acorddras,    acorddra, 
acorddsemos     acorddstis     acorda^en 

or  or  or 

atcorddramos y   acorddrais,    acorddran. 
Future,  acorddre,  acorddreSf  acorddre, 

acorddremos,  acorddreis,  acordaren. 
Imperative.      acuerday     agree  thou. 

acuerde,     let  him  agree. 

acerdemos,     let  us  agree. 

acorddd,     agree  you. 

acuerden,     let  them  agree. 

Jcorddrse,  to  remember,  is  conjugated  with  the  con- 
junctive pronouns /wc,  ICy  se ;  nos,  o?,  se. 

j4c7-ecentdr,  to  grow,  or  increase,     see  acertdr. 

■Acostdrse,  to  go  to  bed. — This  verb  is  conjugated  wlih 
the  conjunctive  pronouns  me,  te,  se  ;  Jios,  os,  se. 

Mestrdr,  to  make  oneself  lit  for  any  thing,  see  acertdr. 

Ilifinit.  pres.    Jdherir,  to  adhere  t(>. 
Gerund.  adh'mendo,  •  adhering  to. 

Participle.         adhhido,  adhered  to.     .  • 
liidicat.  prcs.    adhiero,   adhiaes,  adhit're, 

adkeri'mosy  adheris,  adhl^tn. 
imperfect.         adhcria,  adherias,  adheria, 

adkeriamos,  adheriaisy  adherirni. 
Preterite.  adhcri,  adherlste,  adhirio, 

adherimos,  adherhftis,  adhiriaron. 
Future.  adherire,  adherira^',  adherird, 

adherir^mos,  adkerireis,  adherirdn. 
Subjunc.  pres.  ad/iiera,  adkieras,  adhiera, 

adhirdmos,  adhirdis,  adhieran. 
Imperfect.        adherirlay  adkeririas,  adherirlay 

adherirlamos,  M,dherirlais,  adhiurian. 
I 


-86 


OF  yEKBS. 


Preterite. 

Future. 
Imperative. 


adhiriese     adhiriescs 

or  or 

adhiriSray   adJihidras, 

adhiricsernos       adhirit-seis 
or  or 


adhiriese 

or 
adhiriera. 

adhiricseu 

or 


adhiericramos ,   adhirierais,     adhirieran. 
adhiriere,  adiiirieres,  adhirilre, 
adhiricrenios  J    adhiricreis,    adhiriereri. 
ad  hi  ere,     adhere  thou. 
adhicra,     let  him  adhere. 
adherdmos,     let  us  adhere. 
adheridi     adhere  you. 
adlueran,     let  them  adliere. 


jhlolecer,     to  grow  sick,     see  ahorrect-r. 

•udormecer,     to  fall  asleep,     see  aborreccr* 

adveriir,     to  warn,     see  adherlr. 

agradech'j     to  acknowledge,     see  alorrecer. 

alcntur,     to  encourage,     see  acertdr. 

aleniarse,     to  take  courage,     see  acertdr. 

-abnorzarj     to  breakfast,     see  acnrddr, 

•amenecer,     to  begin  to  be  daylight   [iriipcrson.).  seealo7 

recer. 
amoldr,     to  wet.     see  acorddr. 
amorteccrse,     to  lose  courage,     see  alorrecer, 

Infinit.  pres.  ..  Atiddr,     to  go. 
Gerund.  avdando,     going. 

Participle.  andado,     gone. 

Indicat,  pres.     ando,  andas,  anda, 

anddmoSy  anddisy  aiidan. 
Imperfect.         anduha,  anddbas,  anddba, 

andubamos,  anddbais,  aiiddlan. 
Preterite.  and/we,  anduv/stey  anduvo, 

ariduvimos,  anduvUteis,  anduvieron. 
Future.  andare,  andmds,  andard, 

andxircmos,  andareis,  andardn. 


OF  VERB*?. 


67 


iS'ubjune.  pres.  ande,  andes,  ande, 

ande/nos,  andeis,  dndeii. 
Ini perfect.         andarla,  andarias,  andaria, 

ando.riamoSf  andartais,  andarian* 
Preterite.  anduvitse     anduvihes     anduviese 

or  or  or 

anduvwra,   andiailraSi    and/ivi^ra, 

anduviese  mos     anduvieseis     andiivieserii 

or  or  or 

anduvieramos,   amluvieraU,    anduvicran. 
Future.  anduviercy  anduvitrcs,  anduvivre, 

anduviiremos,  anduviereis,  anduvicreri. 
Imperative.       atida,     go  thou. 

amle,     let  hi ra  go* 

andemos,     let  us  go.^ 

at/ dad,     go  you. 

anden,    let  tiiem  go. 

u^nocheceTy     to  grow  dark,     see  ahorrecer,. 
ojitepensdr,     to  meditate,     see  acertdr. 
mdepontTy     to  prefer,     see  pon^r. 
anteviTy     to  foresee,     see  ver. 
apacentdr,     to  lead  sheep  to  grass,     see  aceridr, 
aparecSr,     to  appear,     see  aborrecer. 
apercibir,     to  perceive,     seepedir. 
apetecer,     to  wish,  to  long  for.     see  ahorr.ecer, 
apos(dr,     to  lay  a  wager,     see  acorddr. 
aprotdr,     to  approve,     see  acorddr, 
arrenddr,     to  let  ta»a  tenant,     see  acertdr 
arrepentirse,     to  repent,     see  adherir. 
asentdr,     to  register,     see  acertdr. 
aserrdr,     to  saw.     see  acertdr. 
to  consent,     see  lierijr. 

to  aim  <7r  point  at.     sceacertar, 
to  pull  down,  to  destroy.     se&  acorddr* 

to  tijrnisih  one  with  money,     see  acordai\ 

to  consider,     ^qq  entendcr, 
12. 


asenlii , 
as  star, 
asoldr, 
asolddr, 
alcndcr. 


8S 


OF  Vii£B5. 


atener,     to  walk  even  with  another,     see  fene'r. 

atcTiturj     to  feel  with  the  hand,     see  acertcir. 

atereccrse,     to  be  benumlK-d  with  cold,     see  alorrertr. 

atcrrdr,     to  throw  down,     see  acertdr. 

atestdr,     to  till  up.     see  acertdr. 

atraer,     to  draw  in.     see  It  a  fir. 

atravesdr,     to  pierce,  or  bore,     see  acertdr. 

QVi^nir,     to  arrive,     see  venir. 

averdrse,     to  agree  together,     see  vejiir. 

aventdr,     to  fan,     see  acertdr. 

avergoTizdr,     to  make  one  ashamed,     see  acordur^ 

avcT"on%drse.     to  be  ashamed,     see  acorddr. 


Infinitive. 
Gerund. 
Participle. 
Judicat.  pres. 

Imperfect. 

Preterite. 

Future. 


B. 

Bendeclr,     to  bless. 
lendiciendo,     blessing. 
ienditOj     blessed. 
lendigo,  hendices,  lendlce, 
lendecimos,  lejideciSf  lendicen, 
hendecia,  lendecias,  bendccia, 
lendeciamos,  bendeciais,  bendecian. 
hendixe,  hendixiste,  hendixo, 
bendiximos,  hendixisteis,  bendixeron. 
bendeeire,  bendecirds,  bendecird, 
bendeciremoSy  bendecireis,  bendecirdn. 

Subjunc.  pres.  bendiga,  beiidigas,  iendlga', 

lendrguinos,  bendigdls,   hendigan» 

Imperfect.         bendeciria,  hmdecirins,  bendeciria, 

bendeclriamos,  brndecirlais,  bcndccirian. 

Preterit^  bendixese      bendixeses      bendixcse 

or  or  or 

bendixera,    bendixcraSy    lendixera, 

bendixesemos    bendixcseis    bendix^sen 

or  or  or 

bendixeramos,  bendixcrais,  bendixcran. 
bejidixcrc,  bendixereS:  lendixcre, 
lendixercmoyy  lendixcreis,  bendixercr^ 


Futi^re. 


OF  VERBS. 


rroperative.       I'endice,     bless  tliou. 

IcTidiga,     let  him  bless, 

lehd'igamos,     let  us  bless^ 

lendecid,     bless  you. 

lendigan,     let  them  bless. 
C. 
Innnit.  pres.     Caler,     to  be  contained. 
Gerund.  cobhndo,     being  contained^- 

Participle.  cahido,     contained. 

Indicat.  pres.    f/ucpe,  cubes ,  cdle, 

calt-mos,  cabeis,  cab  en. 
Imperfect.         cabia,cabias,  cabla, 

cabiaviosy  cabiais,  cabian. 
Preterite.  cupe,  cupiste,  cupo, 

cupimos,  cupisleisy  cupUron. 
Future.  cabri,  cabrds^  cabni, 

cabremos,  cabrcis,  cahrdn, 
Subjunc.  pres.  qttcpa,- quepas,  f/ucpa, 

ijuepdmo^,  (fuepdis,  quepan, 
In>perfect.        cabria,  cabrias,  cabria^ 

cabrianwSy  cabrlcis,  cabrian. 

Preterite.  cupiese     cupieses     cupitse 

or  or  or 

cupitra,   cupieras,   cup'ulray. 

cupiesemos     cupitseis     cupicsen 
or  or  or 

cupieramos,   cufAtrais,   cupuran. 
Future.  cupicre,  cupieres,  cupiere, 

cupieremos,  citpitreis,  aipiererii 
Imperative.       cdbe^     be  thoU  contained. 

quepa,     let  him  be  contained. 

quepmnos,     let  us  be  contained. 

cabt'd,     be  you  contained. 

quepan,     let  them  be  cootaincd, 

Tniinit.  pres.     Caer,     to  fall. 
Gerund.  cayendo,     fallings 

i3 


90 


OP  VERBS. 


Participle.         caido,     fallen. 
Indicat.  pres.    caygo,  ccies,  cue, 

caemos,  caeis,  cden. 
Imperfect.        caia,  caias/  caia, 

caiamos,  caiais,  caian. 
Preterite,  cai,  cauie,  cayo, 

cabnoSj  caisteis,  cayeron.    - 
Future.  caere,  caerds,  eaerd, 

caeremos,  caereis,  cacran. 
Subjunc.pres.  cdyga,  cdygas,  cdyga, 

caygdmos,  caygdis,  cdygan. 
Imperfect.        caeria,  caerias,  caeria, 

caeriamos,  caeriais,  caerian. 
Preterite.  cay6se     caytses     cayt'se 

or  ( r  or 

cay6my    cayvras,    taycra, 
■  cayesemus     eayeseis     cayisen 
or  or  or 

cayiramosy  cayerais,    caydran. 
Future^  cayercy  caycres,  cayere, 

enydremos,  eayereis,  cayeren.. 
Imperative.       cde,     fall  thou. 

cayga,     Jet  him  fall. 

caygdmos,     let  us  fall. 

caed,     fall  you.  \ 

cdygan,     let  them  fall. 

Calentdr,     to  warm,     see  acertdr. 
canecer,     to  grow  gray,     see  aborrecer. 
carecer,     to  have  need,     see  aborrecer, 
cegdr,,    to  become  bhud.     see  acertdr, 
cenir,     to  girdle,     see  pedir. 
cenirse,     to  girdle  oneself,     see  pedir, 
cerner,     to  bolt  or  sift,     see  entender^. 
cimentdr,   .  to  cement,     see  acertdr. 

Irifinit.  pres.     Coc^r,     to  bake. 
Geruud.  cociendo,    baking. 


OF  VERBS. 


91 


Participle.         Qocido,     baked. 
Indicat.  pres.    cuezo^  cu^ces,  aiSce, 

cocemoSj  coceisj  cuecen. 
Imperfect.        coda,  cocias,  cocia, 

cociamos,  cociais,  cocian. 
Preterite.  coci,  cocisie,  cocio, 

cocimos,  cocisteis,  cocieron. 
Future.  cocerc,  cocerds,  cocerd, 

cocertnios,  cocert-is,  cocerun. 
Subjunc.  pres.  cueza,  cuezas,  cut-za, 

cozdrnos,  cozdis,  cuezan. 
Imperfect.        coceria,  cocerias,  coceria,- 

coceriamos,  coceriais,  cocerian. 
Preterite.  cociese       cocieses       cocicse 

or  or  or 

cocicray     cocit'ras,     cocicra, 
cocicsemos       cocicseis     cocicsen 

or  or  or 

coc'uramos,     cocicrals,    cocieran. 
Future.  cociere,  cocicres,  cock're, 

coder  emos,  coder  eis^  coder  en  ^ 

f  mperative.      cueze,     bake  thou. 

cuexa,     let  him  bake. 

cozdmos,     let  us  bake. 

coced,     bake  you. 

cuezan^     let  them  bake. 

N.  B.  This  verb   lias  the  same  iiTegularities  as  atf» 

solver ;  and  if  it  has  been   entirely  conjugated,  it  is  on 

account  of  the  %,  which  is  put  instead  of  the  c  before  a 

and  o'j  anil  in  order  to  refer  to  it  for  similar  conjugations. 

Coldr,     to  strain  a  liquor,     see  acorddr. 

colegir,     to  gather      see  pedir. — iSl.Ji.     This  verb  ex- 

Ciiar.ges  g  mioj  before  a  and  o. 
colgdr,     to  hang  up.     see  acorddr, 
comedir.     to  reflect  or  think,     see  pedir. 
comedirse,    to  become  polite,    see  pedlx. 


92 


a?  VERBS* 


eomenzctr,     to  begin,     see  acertdr. 
eompadecerse,     to  have  pity,     see  ahorrecer,. 
LompareceTt     to  appear,     see  ahorrecer. 
compelir,     to  come  in.     see  pedir. 
eomplacer,     to  please  one.     see  alorrecer. 
compuner,     to  compose,     see  poncr. 
comproldr,    to  prove,  to  confirm,     see  acorddn 
conebivy     to  conceive,     st^e  pedir. 
conccrner,     to  concern,     see  en  fender, 
concertdr,     to  concert,     see  acertdr. 
covcor/ldTy     to  conciliate,     see  acorddr. 
condescender,     to  condescend,     see  entender:. 
condoler,     to  sympathize,     see  ahsolvir^ 


In6nit.  pres.     conduciry     to  lead. 
Gerund.  conducundo,     leading. 

Participle.         conducido,     led. 
Indicat.  pres.    conduzco,  conduces,  conduce, 

cvndudmos,  conducis,  conducen. 
Imperfect.        conducia,  conducias,  conducia, 

conduciamos,  conduciais,  conducian^ 
Preterite.  conduxe,  conduxiste,  conduxo, 

condhximos,  conduxisteis,  cenduxerom 
Bui  are.  conducire,  conducirds,  tonducird, 

conduciremos,  conducirtis..  conducirdni 
Subjunct.  pres.  co?2rfi^;xca,  conduzcas,  co?iduzca, 

eonduxchnos,  condiixcdis,  conduzcan. 
Imperfecta       conduciria,  conduciriasy  conduciria, 

conduciriamos,  conduciriaisi   conducirian. 
Preterite.  eonduxcse    conduxeses      conduxese 

or  or  or 

conduxera,  cor^duxertts,    conduxira, 
cojiduxesemos     conduxeseis     conduxisen 

or  or  or 

conduxdramos,  conduxerais,  conduxdrarh. 
Suture*       ^      conduxke,  conduxeres,  conduxere, 

conduxb'eniosj  conduxereis,  conduxerm. 


OV  VERBS.  9^ 

Imperative.       conduce,     lead  thou. 

cojiduzca,     let  him  lead. 
conduzcamos,     let  us  lead. 
I         conducid,     lead  you. 

conduzcan^     let  them  lead. 

Confer iTy     to  confer,     see  adherir. 

confesdr,     to  confess,     see  acertdr. 

conmovir,     to  disturb,     see  entefidcr. 

conocer,     to  know,     see  alorrectr. 

conseguirj     to  obtain,     see  pedlr. 

coiisentiTf     to  consent,     see  adhcrlr. 

consoldVf     to  comfort,     see  acorddr^ 

consondr,     to  be  in  good  intelligence,     see  acorddr. 

constrenir,     to  constrain,     see  pedir. 

contdr,     to  cast  up,  to  reckon,     see  acorddr, 

contencr,     to  contain,     see  tericr, 

contender,     to  contest,     see  cntcndcr. 

contradeclr,  to  contradict,  see  decir. — N.B.  Thiti  last  verb 
differs  from  decir  only  in  the  second  person  singular  of 
the  imperative,  making  contradice  instead  of  contradi^ 

contrahacer,     to  counterfeit,     see  haccr, 

co?itraer,     to  contract,     see  trOi^r. 

C07itravenir,     to  act  contrary.     secve«/r. 

coiitrovertir,     to  argue,     see  adherir, 

convalecer,     to  recover  from  illness,     see  alorrecir^ 

convenir,  '  to  agree,     see  venir. 

converilr,     to  convert,     see  adherir. 

corregir,     to  correct,     see  pedir, 

costar,     to  cost,     see  acorddr, 

creccTy     to  grow,     see  aborreccr, 

culrir,     to  cover. — The  irregularity  of  this  verb  is  ia  tBe 
participle  passive,  which  makes  cu  bier  to, 

D. 

Infinit.pres.     Ddr,     to  give. 
Gerund.  dando,     giving. 

Participle.        dddo,     given. 


94 


or  VERBS. 


Indicat.  pres. 

Imperfect. 

Ereterite. 

Future. 

Subjuuc.  pres 

Imperfect. 

Preterite. 


Future. 
Imperative. 


Infinit.  pres. 

Gerund. 

Participle. 

Indicat.  pres. 
Impeiifect. 
Preterite. 
Future. 


doy,  das,  da, 
ddmos,  dais,  dun. 
ddba,  ddlas,  ddba, 
ddbamos,  ddlais,  ddban.. 
di,  distc,  did, 
dimos,  disteis,  dicron. 
dare,  dards,  dard, 
daremos;  dariis,  dardn. 
.  dt',  des,  de, 
dvmos,  dels,  den. 
daria,  darlas,  daria, 
dar tamos,  darlais,  darian. 
d'u'se     dii'ses      diese 

or  or  or 

diera,    duras,    dicra,. 
dicsemos     dlcsels     ditsen 

or  or  or 

dL'ramos,  d'u'rais,  dL'ran.. 
dicrc,  dlcrcs,  dicre, 
dieremos,  diireis,  dk'reiZh. 

dd,  give  thou. 

de,  let  him  give. 
d^mos,     let  us  give, 
dad,     give  ye. 
dtn,     let  them  give. 

declr,     to  say. 
diciendo,     saying. 
d'lcho,     said. 

digo,  dices,  dice, 
decimos,  decis,  dicen. 
decia,  dedas,  decia, 
deciamos,  deciais,  decian. 
dijce,  dixiste,  dixo, 
dlximos,  dixisteis,  dixeron, 
dire,  dirds,  dird, 
dire  flips .,  dire  is,  ddnlv.^ 


Ot  VERT3S.  9-5 

^ubjunc.  pres.  dlga,  digas,  dlga, 

digdmos,  dignis,  digan. 
)erfect.        diria,  dirias,  diria, 

dir tamos,  diriais,  dirian, 
ierite.  dixhe      dixeses      dixhe 

or  or  or 

dixira,    d'ui'ras,    dixtra, 

d'lxesemos     diieseis     dixt'sai 

or  or  or 

dixeramos,  dixt'rais,  dixtran. 
Lure.  dixcre,  dixeres,  dixere, 

direremos,  dixcreis,  dixtren. 
T'-Tperative.       d'l,     say  thou. 

digOf     let  him  say. 
digujnos,     let  us  say. 

dec  Id,     say  you.  ■ 

digan,     let  them  say. 
^ender,     to  defend,     see  en  tender, 
'rir,     to  condescend,     see  adherir, 
>icir,     to  deduct,     see  conduclr. 
■illdr,     to  behead,     see  acordiir. 
o/c'r,    to  demolish,   see  ahsolver. — Its  part,  is  regular. 
ostrdr,     to  demonstrate,     see  acorddr, 
)m'r,     to  depose  or  remove,     see  poncr, 
"gar,     to  deny,     see  acertdr. 
>sidr,     to  use  any  one  ill.     see  acorddr, 
d^rengdr,     to  sprain  the  hip.     see  accrtdr, 
denelir,     to  melt,     see  pedir. 
dei'icertdr,     to  err  or  mistake,     see  acertdr, 
cordur,     to  be  discordant,     see  acorddr, 
donnecilr,  ,  to  a\vai\e.     see  ahorrecer. 
Icntdr,     to  discourage,     see  acertdr, 
'pareccr,     to  disappear,     see  ahorrecer, 
pretdr,     to  make  loose,     see  acertdr, 
probdr,     to  disappiove.     see  acorddr. 
wsegar,     to  disquiet  or  vex.     see  acertdr, 
tender,     not  to  pay  attention,     see  en  tender. 


^6  OF  VLUBS.  * 

desatr'avesdr ,     to  disentangle,     see  acerldr. 

-desaventr,     to  be  of  a  contrary  opinion,     see  vcnir 

dcscaecer,     to  lose  one's  strength,     see  ahorreccr. 

descender,     .to  come  down,     see  enlemler. 

deceuir,     to  ungirdle.     see  pedir. 

decimentdr,     to  undermine  tire,  foundations,    see  acertar. 

desco/gdr,     to  take  down,     see  acorddr. 

descoUdr,     to  surpass,  to  be  taller,     see  acorddr. 

dcsGomedirse,     to  grow  unpolite.     see  pedir. 

-descompojwr^    to  disorder,     see  po?icr, 

dcscoTisenlir,     not  to  consent,     see  adherir. 

desconcertdr,     to  confound,     see  acertar. 

descmwccr,     to  disown,     see  alorrecer. 

descoTisoldr ,     to  afflict,     see  acordar.    - 

descontdr,     to  discount,     see  acorddr. 

descuhrir,  to  discover. — Its  irregularity  is  in  the  parti- 
ciple passive,  which  makes  descu'lierto ,  discovered. 

desdecir,  to  give  the  lie.  see  c/€6zr.— The  second  person 
singular  of  tlie  imperative  mood  of  this  verb  makes 
dcsdkc,  liest  thou. 

deseinpedrdr y     to  unpave.     see  acertar. 

desencerrdr,     to  set  at  liberty,     see  acertar. 

desengrosdr,     to  extenuate,     see  acorddr. 

desentcTiderj     not  to  be  willing  to  hear,     see  evtender. 

desenterrdr,     to  unbufy.     see  acertar. 

desenvolver,     to  unwrap,     see  alsolver. 

deservir,     to  hurt,     see  pedir. 

desfalleccr,     to  faint  away,     see  alorrecer. 

desflaqvecer,     to  languish,     see  ahorrecer. 

desflocdr,     to  ravel,     see  acorddr. 

desguarnecer,     to  unfurnish.     see  abofrectr. 

desheldr,     to  thaw,     see  aceridr. 

deshacer,     to  undo,     see  hacer. 

desherrdr,     to  take  away  the  fetters,     see  acert<ir. 

desleir,     to  dilute,     see  pedir. 

deslucir.     to  darken,     see  sulir. 


OP  VERM.  9? 

Infinit.    pres    Deslucir,     to  tarnish. 

Gerund      .      desluciendo,     taruiahbg. 

Participle.         deslucido,     tarnished. 

Indicar.  pres.    desluzco,  desluces,  desluce, 

dc'slucimos   d-'slucU^  desiucen. 

S\xhiunc.  ^res.  des/uzcdf  dfs.\r<j'a6,  dtsluzca, 

dt's/uzra>i.os,  dtduzcais,  desluzcan. 

Imperative,      deslucc,     tarnish  thou. 

dtsluzca,     let  him  tarnish. 
desluzcdmos,     let  us  tarnish. 
deslucidy     tarnish  you. 
desluzcan,     let  them  tarnish. 
The  other  tenses  are  regular,  and  conjugated  like  suhir, 
Desmeinbrdr,     to  dismember,     see  acertdr, 
desmentir,     to  contradict,     see  adherir, 
desohcdecer,     to  disobey,     see  alorrecer. 
desollar,     to  skin,     see  acorddr. 

despedir,     to  send  away,     see  pedir. 

despedirse,     to  take  leave,     see  pcdir, 

despedrdr,     to  take  away  the  stones,     see  acertdr. 

desperndr,     to  cut  off  the  legs,     see  acertdr, 

despertdr,     to  awake,     see  acertdr, 

dcsplaccT,     to  displease,     see  placer, 

desplegdr.     to  display.  *  see  acertdr. 

despoblar,     to  unpeople.     neeMcsrtlit, 

destefdr,     to  discolour,     see  f^dir. 

desttrrdry     to  banish,     see  acertdr. 

destorcer,     to  untwist,     see  coc^r. 

des trocar,     to  undo  an  exclnnge.     see  acorddr. 

desvanecerse,     to  fall  in  a  swoon,     see  abc.rrecer. 

desverggnzdrse,     to  lose  one's  shame,     see  acordar, 

detener,     to  detain,     see  ten^r. 

detraer,     to  detract,     soe  iraer. 

devolver,     to  return  or  send  back,     see  alsolver, 

dezmdr,     to  decimate  or  tithe,    see  acertdr, 

diferir,     to  delay,     see  adherir. 

K 


OF  VERBS. 


digerir,    to  digest. 
disentir,     to  dissent. 


disolveVy 
disponeVf 
dutraefy 
divertir, 


to  dissolve. 
to  dispose, 
to  distract, 
to  divert. 


doler,     to  feel  pain. 


see  adherir, 
see  adherir. 
see  ahsolver, 
see  poner. 
see  traer. 
see  adherir. 
see  a  I  solver, 
dolerse,     tofefel  for  people's  pain,     sec  alsolver. 

Their  participles  are  regular. 
Infin.  present.  Dormir,     to  sleep. 
Gerund.  durviiendo,     sleeping. 

Participle.         dormido,     slept. 
Indicat.  pres.    duermo,  duermes,  duerme^ 

dormimos,  dormis,  duermen. 
dormia,  dorm  las,  dornda, 
dormiamos,  dormiais,  dormian. 
dormi,  dormiste,  durmid, 
donrdmos,  dorinlsteis,  durmieron^ 
dorimr6y  dormirds,  dormird, 
dormiremos,  dormireis,  dormir  an. 
duerma,  duernws,  duerma, 
durmdvws,  durmdis,   duerman. 
dormiria,  dormirias,  dorniirla, 
dormiriamos ,  dormiriais,  dorm  Irian, 
durmicie     durmitses     durmiese 

or  ^      or  ^     or 

durmiera,   durmieras,  durmih-a, 
durmiesemos    durmieseis     durmiesen 

or  or  or 

durmieramo^y  durmierais,    durmiernn. 
dwrmiere,  durmieres,  durmiere, 
durmi6remos,  durmiereis ,  durmieren, 
duerme,     sleep  thou. 
duerma,     let  hira  sleep. 
durmdmos,     let  us  sleep. 
dormid,     sleep  ye. 
duerman,     let  them  sleep. 


Imperfect. 

Preterite. 

Future. 

Subjunctive. 

Imperfect. 

Preterite. 


Future. 


Imperative. 


OF  VERBS.  99 

E. 

Elcgir,  to  elect  or  choose,  see  pedlr.  This  verb 
changes  g  into  j  before  a  and  o,  in  order  to  preserve 
the  pronunciation  of  the  infinitive. 

embrauectrse,     to  become  furious,     see  abort ecir. 

emhrutecerse,     to  become  brutish,     see  aborrecer, 

emenddr,     to  rectify,     see  aceitar, 

empedrdVf  •  to  pave,     see  acertdr. 

empezdr,     to  begin,     see  acertdr. 

emplumecer,     to  begin  to  have  feathers,     see  aborrectr* 

empobrecer,     to  grow  poor,     see  aborrecer» 

emporcdr,     to  dirt,     see  acorddr. 

encabelleccrse,     to  begin  to  be  hairy,     see  aborreecr, 

encalvecer,     to  become  bald,     see  aborrecer. 

tncaneccr,    to  be  gray  haired  by  old  age.     see  aborrech, 

encarectr,     to  raise  the  price,     see  aborrecir, 

encender,     to  light  a  fire,     see  entcnd^r. 

enceiisdi-y     to  cense,     see  acertdr, 

encerrdr,     to  shut  in.     see  acertdr. 

encomenddr,     to  recommend,     see  acertdr, 

enconlrdr,     to  meet,     see  acorddr. 

encorddr,  to  put  cords  to  an  instrument,     see  acorddr, 

tncrudec6rse,     to  become  cruel,     see  aborrecir, 

encruelecir,     to  irritate,     see  aborrecer, 

enmbertdrj     to  cover  with  a  blanket,     see  acertdr, 

endenttc^ry     to  breed  teeth,     see  aborrecir, 

endiirec^,     to  grow  hard,    see  aborrecir, 

enjiaquecery     to  grow  lean,     see  aborrec4r. 

enfurecerse,     to  become  furious,     see  aborrecir, 

engrandecky     to  grow  or  enlarge,     see  aborrtcir, 

engreirse,     to  adorn  oneself,     see  pedir, 

engrosdr,     to  grow  big.     see  acorddr, 

enloqueceTy     to  become  mad.     see  aborrecir. 

enluciry     to  whiten  with  plaster,     see  desludr, 

enmocec6ry     to  grov  young  again,     ste  aborrecir. 

enmohecirse,    to  grow  mouldy,    see  ahvrrKsr^ 
&.2 


H)6 


OF  VERBh, 


enmudecSr,    to  grow  dumb  or  be  silent,     see  ahorrecer. 
ennegrecer,     to  grow  black  or  brown,     see  ahorrecer. 
ennoblecer,     to  ennoble,     see  ahorrecer. 
enrarecer,     to  become  rare,     see  ahorrecer. 
emic/uecer,     to  grow  rich,     see  ahorrecer. 
enroddr,     to  break  upon  the  wheel,     see  ocorddr. 
ensangrentdr.     to  make  bloody,     see  aceridr. 
etisoherhecerse,     to  grow  proud,  see  ahorrecer. 

Infinit.  pres.     Entender,     to  comprehend. 
Gerund.  enlendiendo,     comprehending. 

Participle.        entendido,     comprehended. 
Indicat.  pres.    enliendo,  entiendes,  eniiende, 

entendemoSj  entendc'is,  entiendcn. 
Imperfect.        cniendia,  entendias,  tntendia, 

enteiidiamos,  entendiais,  entendlan. 
Preterite.  entendi,  entendiste,  entendid, 

entendimos,  entendlsteis,  entendierorit 
Future.  entendt^re,  cntenderds,  entenderd, 

entenderhnos,  entendereis ,  entenderdn. 
Subjunctive,     entienda,  entiendas,  entienda, 

entenddmos,  enienddis,  entiendan. 
Imperfect.        eniendeda,  enienderias,  entenderiay   , 

entenderiamos,  enlenderiais,  enlenderian, 

Preterite.  entendieae      entejidieses      enienditse 

cr  or  or 

entend'i^ra,    entendieras,    entendiera, 
entendiesemos     entendieseis     eniendiesen 

or  or  or 

entendieramosy  entendierais,  entendieran. 
Future.  entendUre,  entendiereSy  entendie're, 

entcnduremos,  entendiereis,  entendieren. 
Imperative.       eniiende,     comprehend  thou. 

entienda,     let  him  comprehend. 

entenddmos,     let  us  comprehend, 

ent ended,     comprehend  you. 

mtieiidan,     let  them  comprehend. 


OP  VERBS.  l<Ji. 

Enternecer,     to  move  to  pity,     see  ahorrecvr, 
enterrdr,     to  bury,     see  acertdr, 
entumecer,     to  swell,     see  alorrecer. 
entoiitectr,     to  grow  stupid,     see  alorrecer. 
entorpecerse,     to  become  lazy,    see  ahorrecir, 
entreoir,     to  hear  imperfectly,     see  o/r. 
enfretener,     to  entertain,     see  tener. 
to  vex.     see  ahorrecir. 
to  lose  the  use  of  one's  limbs,   see  alorrech, 
to  grow  old.     see  abort ecer. 
to  paint  in  green,     see  alorrecer. 
envestir,     to  invest,     see  pedir. 
envoher,     to  wrap  up.     seevaWr, 
equwalcr.     to  be  of  equal  value,     see  valtr, 
Infin.  present.  Erguir,     to  raise. 
Gerund.  erguiendo,     raising. 

Participle,.        erguido,     raised. 
Indicat.  pres.   hiergo,  hiergues,  kiergue. 


entristeceTf 
entuliecer, 
envejectr, 
enverdectr. 


Imperfect. 

Preterite. 

Future.. 

Subjunctive. 

Imperfect.. 

Preterite, 


Future. 


ergmmos,  erguis, 


hieviruen. 


ergma,  erguiaSj  erguia, 
erguiamos,  erguiais,  erguian, 
erguiy  erguiste,  kguio, 
erguimos,  erguisteis,  irguUron. 
erguire,  erguir  as,  erguird, 
erguirtmoSi  erguircisy  erguirdn,. 
'hierga,  hiergas,  hierga, 
hirgdmos,  hirgdis,  hiergan, 
ergu'iria,  erguirias,  erguiriOi 
erguiriamos,  erguiriais,  erguir/an. 

hirguicse      hirguieses      hirguicse, 

or  or  or 

hirguUra,    hirguieras,    hirguie'ra, 
hirguiesemos      hirguiese 

or  or  or 

hirguieramoSj    hirguierais,    hirguieran 
hirguure,  hirguieres,  kirguiere, 
hirgiiUremos,  hirguUreis,  hirguiiren, 
k3 


hirguiesen 


10^  OP  VERB3. 

Imperative.  ^  hiergue,    raise  thou. 
hierga,     let  him  raisei 
hirgamos,    let  us  raise. 
erguid,     raise  you. 
hirgaiiy     let  them  raise. 

Errdr,     to  err  or  mistake,     see  acert&r. 

escalentaTy     to  warm,     see  acertdr. 

escarmentdr,     to  give  a  warning,     see  acertdr, 

escarnecer,     to  mock  one.     see  alorrecer. 

esclarecer,     to  clear  up.     see  alorrecer » 

escocery     t(3  itch  painfully,     see  coceV. 

escriHr,     to  write. — Part,  escrito,  is  its  only  irregularity. 

esforxdry     to  animate  or  encourage,     see  acorddr. 

espavorecer,     to  affright,     see  ahorrccer, 

estal'leccr,     to  establish,     see  alorrectr. 

estercoldr,     to  dung,     see  acertdr. 

estregdr,     to  scour,     see  acertdr. 

estremecerccy     to  tremble,     see  ahorrecdr, 

estreriir,     to  lie  close,     seepedir. 

expedir,     to  dispatch,     see  pedir. 

expo?ier,     to  expose,     see  poner. 

extender,     to  spread,     see  entender, 

extraer,     to  extract,     see  irair, 

F. 

Fallecer,     to  die.     see  alorrecer, 
favorecer,     to  favour,     see  alorrecir. 
fenecer,     to  termipate,     see  aborrecir. 
jortalecer,     to  fortify,     see  alorrecer^ 
Jorzdr,     to  force,     see  acorddr. 

Jregdr.,     to  rub  one  thing  against  another,     see  acertdr. 
Jreir,  to  fry. — Favt.frita:  the  rest  like  pe^/r. 

G. 

Gemir,    to  groan  or  lament,     see  pedir, 
golerndr,     to  govern^     see  acertdr. 
guarnec^r,    to  furnish,     see  aborrecer. 


OF  VERBS. 


103 


H 

Haler,  to  have.— This  verb  serves  only  in  the  compound 
tenses  of  otherverbs.    See  its  conjugation  in  theauxi* 
liary  verb  Hacer,  to  do ;  haciendoj  doing  ;  hccho,  done^ 
Indicat.  pres.    hdgo,  hdces,  hdce, 

hacemos,  haceis,  hdcen. 
Imperfect.        hacia,  hadas,  hada, 

haclamos,  hadais^  hadizn. 
Preterite.  Mce,  Jddstf,  hixn, 

hidmos,  /udsteis,  hideron. 
Future.  har^,  hards,  hard, 

haremoSy  hareis,  hardn. 
Subjunctive,     haga,  hagas,  hdga, 

hagdmos,  hngdisy  hdgan. 
Imperfect.        haria^  haricis,  han'a, 

hariaJiios,  hariau,  harian. 
Preterite.  hidtse     h'uihes     hide.se 

or  ot  or 

hidera,  hideras,  hidera, 

hid^semos    hideseis    hidcsen 
or  or  or 

hideramosy  hidirais,  hideran. 
Future.  hidere,  hidtres,  hidtre, 

hideremos,  hidereis,  hkUren. 
Imperative.      hazy     do  thou. 

hdga,    let  him  do. 

hagdmosy     let  us  do. 

hacid,     do  ye. 

hdgan,     let  them  do. 
Hed^fy     to  stink,     see  entendtr. 
heUr,     to  freeze,     {neut.  act.  impers.)     see  acertdn 
hender,     to  cleave  or  split,     see  entender. 
herir,     to  wound,     see  adherir. 
kerrdr,     to  bind  about  with  iron  work,     see  actrtdr,. 
herviTy     to  boil,     see  adherir. 
holgdr,     to  be  quiet,  to  do  nothing,     see  acorddr. 
holldry     to  trample  unc'er  feet,     see  acerddr. 
humedecir,    to  moisten.    teQ  alorredr. 


104 


01'  VERBSv 


ImpediTf     to  hinder,     see  pedlr. 
imponer,    to  impose,    saepontr. 
inadvcritr,     to  be  inattentive,     see  adherir, 
indisponer,     to  indispose  or  vex.     see  poner» 
inducir,.    to  induce,     see  conductr. 
intervenir,     to  intervene,     see  venir. 
introduckf     to  introduce,     see  conducir, 
invcrnJr,     to  winter,     see  acertdr. 
invertir,    to  transpose,     see  adherir, 
investir,     to  invest,     see  pedir*. 

Infinit.  pres.     /r,     to  go. 
Gerund.  yendo,     goings 

Participle.         ido,     gone. 
Indicat.  pres.    v6y,  vas^  vd,. 

vdmoSf  vdisy  van-.. 
Imperfect.        iba,  ibas,  iba, 

ihamos,  ibais,  ib'an.. 
Preterite.        fui,  fuistej/ud, 

fuimos,  fuisteiSf  fuiron, . 
Future.  ire,  irdsy  ira,  , 

iremos,  ireis,  irdn, 
Subjunctive,     vdya,  vdyas,  vdya, 

vaydmos,  vaydis,  vayan.. 
Imperfect,        iria,  irias,  iria, 

iriamos,  iriais,  irian. 
Preterite*        fu^se   fusses  Juke 

or  or  or 

fuera,  futras,  fuera, 

fu4semos     fueseis     fu4sen 
or  or  or 

fuiramoSy  fueraisj  fii4ran>. 
Future.  f^^re,  fueres,  fuire, 

fueremos,  fueriis,  fniren. 
Imperative,      ve,    go  thou. 

vdya,    let  him  go. 


OF  V'ERUS.  105 

rdmos^    let  us  go. 

id^     go  ye. 

vdyan,     let  them  go. 
L. 
Lucir,     to  sliine.     see  deslucir. 
LL. 
Llov^Vy     to  rain,     see  the  impersonal  verb, 

M. 
Magrescer,     to  grow  lean,     see  alorrecer 
■maldeclr,     to  curse,     see  hendecir. 
manifestdr,     to  manifest,     see  acertdr, 
viantenJr,     to  maintain,     see  tener. 
rnedir^     to  measure  in  general,    see  pedlr^ 
meiitart     to  name,     see  acertdr, 
mentir,     to  lie.    see  adlwrir. 
meredrt     to  deserve,     see  ahorrecir, 
merendar,  to  eat  between  dinner  and  supper,  see  acertatt 
molC-r    to  grind,  see  absoluer. — Its  part,  is  regular, 
mollesdr,     to  grow  soft,    see  alorrecer. 
mordtr,    to  bite,  see  ahsolvir, — Its  part,  is  regular. 
morir,     to  die. — Part,  muirto.     see  dormir, 
mostrdr,     to  show,     see  acorddr. 
mover,    to  move,     see  absolvdr. — Its  part,  is  regular. 

N. 
JSiactr^     to  be  born,     see  aborrec^. 
negdr,     to  deny  or  refuse,     see  acertar. 
nevdr,     to  snow,     see  the  impersonal  verbs  in  their  pro- 
per place. 

O. 
Obedecer,     to  obey,     see  aborrecer. 
obscurecer,     to  darken,     see  aborrecer. 
obtener,     to  obtain,     see  tencr, 
ofrecer,     to  offer,     see  aborrec&. 

Infin.  pres.        Oir,     to  hear. 
Gerund.  oijendo,     hearing. 

Participle.        otWa,    heard. 


166 


OF  VEKBS.. 


Preterite. 


Futun 


Future. 


Indicat.  pres.    oi/go,  oyes,  6ye, 
oimoSy  oiSf  6yen, 

Imperfect.        ola,  oias,  oia, 

oiamos,  dais,  oian. 
oi,  oistCf  oyOf 
olmos,  Oisteh,  oyer  on. 
oird,  oirds,  oird, 
oirdinos,  oirm,  oirdn. 

Subjunctive,     criga,  oigas,  otga, 

oigdmos,  oigdis,  oigan. 

Imperfect.        oiria,  oiriaSf  oiria, 

oiriamosj  oiriais,  oirlan,. 

Preterite.  oycse    oycses    oyese 

or  or  or 

oyeray  oyeras,    oyera, 
oyesemos    oyeseis     oyisen, 

or  5r  or 

oytramos,  oyerais,  oyhan. 

oytre,  oyires,  oyere, 

oyiremos,  oyereis,  oyeren^ 
Imperative.      6yet     hear  tliou. 

oiga,    let  him  hear. 

oigdmos,    let  us  hear. 

oid,    hear  you. 

oigaiij    let  them  hear. 
opmir,    to  oppose,    see  pon^. 

P. 
Pacer,    to  graze,     see  dborrech, 
padecir,     to  languish,     see  ahorrecir, 
parecdr,     to  appear,     see  ahorreccr. 
parecerse^     to  be  like,     see  alorreedr. 
Infin.  pres,       Pedtr,     to  ask. 
Gerund.  pidimdo,     asking. 

Participle.        pedido,     asked. 
Indicat.  pres.  pido,  pldes,  pide^ 

pedimos,  pedis,  pider^. 
Imperfect.        pedia,  pedias,  pedia, 

pediamoSf  pediais,  pedian^ 


OF  TERBS. 


107 


IVeterite. 

"Future. 

Subjunctive. 

Imperfect. 

Preterite. 


pedi,  pediste,  pidw, 
pedi'mos,  pedistcis^  piduron, 
pedire,  pedirds,  pcdird, 
pediicmts,  pedireis.  pedirdn, 
pida,  pidas,  pida, 
piddmos,  piddis,  pidan. 
pediria,  pediriaSj  pedirhy 
pediriamos,  pedirlais,  pedirhn. 
pidiese     pidieses     pidihe 

or  or  or 

pidiera,  pidieras,    pidiira, 
pidiesevios     pidieseis     pidi^sen 


pidieramos,  pidicrais,    pidieran. 
Future.  pi/iitre,  pididres,  pidiire, 

pllitremos,  pidie/eis,  piditren. 
Imperative.      pide,     ask  thou. 

pida,     let  him  ask, 
/.  piddmos,     let  us  ask. 

pcdid,     ask  ye. 
pidan,     let  them  ask. 
vensdr,     to  think,     see  acertdr. 
perJer,     to  lose,     see  en  tender, 
pereccr,    to  perish,     see  alorrecer. 
perni(/uthrdr,     to  break  the  legs,     see  acertdr. 
persequir,     to  persecute,     see  pedtr. 
pertenerer,     to  belong  to.     see  aborrecer 
pervertir,     to  pervert  or  corrupt,     see  adherir. 
placer,     to  please,  has  no  other  tenses  or  persons  than 

what  follow  : — 
Indie,  pres.     third  pers.  sing,  pldce^  he  or  it  pleases 
imperfect.       third  pers.  sing,  placia,  he  or  it  did  please. 
Preterite.         third  pers.  sing,  plugo,  he  or  it  pleased. 
Future.  third  pers.  sing,  plaierd,  he  or  it  will  please. 

Subjunctive,  third  pers.  sing,  plegue,  may  it  please, — ^is 
used  only  in  that  expression,  plague  d 
Dios,  m^y  God  be  pleased. 


108 
Preterite, 


OF  VERBS. 


third  pers.  sing,  pluguiese,  or  plugtdera,  it 
might  please. 
Future,  third  pers.  sing,  pluguiere,  when  itshall, &c. 

plegdr,     to  plait  or  fold,     see  acertdr. 
pobldr,     to  people,     see  acorddr, 
poder,     to  be  able,     see  absolver, — Its  part,  is  regular. 
Infinit.  pres.     Podrir,     to  rot, 

pudriendo,     rotting, 

podrido,     rotten. 
IndiCat.  pres.   pudro,  pi^res,  pudre, 

podrlmos,  podris,  p/idren. 
Imperfect.        podiia,  podiias,  podria, 

podriamos,  podriais,  podrian,. 
Preterite.         pudii,  pudriste,  piidrio, 

pudrhnos,  pudristeis,  pu  drier  on. 
Future.  podrire,  pcdrirds,  podrird, 

podriremos,  podrireisy  pcdrirdn. 
Subjunctive,     puura,  pudras,  pudra, 

pudrdmos,  pudrdis,  pudran. 
Imperfect.        podriria,  podririas,  podriria, 

podririamos,  fodrhiais,  podririan. 
Preterite.  pudriese     pudrieses     pudriesej 

or  or  or 

pudritra,  piidricras,    pudridra, 
pudrUsemcs      pudrieseis      pudriesen. 


Future. 


Imperative. 


Infinit.  pres. 

Gerund. 

Participle. 


pudrieramos,    pudrierais,     pudrieran. 

pudriere,  pudrieres,  pudriere, 

pudrieremoSy  pudriereisj  pudrUrcn, 

pudre,     rot  thou. 

pudra,     let  him  rot. 

pudrdmos,     let  us  rot. 

podrid,     rot  you. 

pudrarij     let  them  rot. 

Pontr,     to  put. 

poniendOj     putting. 

puestOf     put. 


OP  VERBS.  log 

Indicat.  pres.  pongo,  pones,  p6ne, 

ponemos,  poneis,  ponen. 
Imperfect.        ponia,  ponlas,  ponia 

poniamos,  ponlais,  ponia  n. 
Preterite.         pilse,  pusiste,  ptUo, 

pusimosy  pusisteis,  pusieron. 
Future.  pondre,  pondrds,  pondra, 

pondremos,  pondreis,  p)ndrdn. 
Subjunctive,     p&nga,  p6ngas,  pSnga, 

pongdmoSy  pongdis,  pSngan. 
Imperfect.        pondria,  pondrias,  pondria, 

pondri'amoSf  pondriais,  pondrian. 

Preterite.         pusiese     pusiises     pusu-se 
or  or  or 

pusieray  pusieras,     pusiera, 

pusiesemos     pusii'seis      pusiesen 
or  Qt  or 

pusieramoSy   pus'urais^    pusUran. 
Future.  pusiere,  pusitres,  pusiere, 

pusie'remos,  pusiereis,    pusieren. 
Imperative,      pan,     put  thou. 

ponga,     let  him  put. 

pongurnos,     let  us  put. 

poned,     put  you. 

pongan,     let  tbem  put. 
Pndichy     to  foretell,     see  dedr. 
preferirj     to  prefer,     see  adherir. 
prepontTy     to  prepose.     see  poner, 
prescriMr,     to  prescribe. — Part.  prescril9^is  the  only  ir- 
regularity. 
presentir^     to  foresee,    see  adherfr. 
presiipontr,     to  presuppose,     see  ponlr. 
prevalecer,     to  prevail,     see  aborrecer. 
prevenir,     to  anticipate,     see  venir. 
previr,     to  foresee,     see  ver. 
producir,     to  produce,     see  conducir. 
proferir,    to  utter,     ste  adherir. 

L 


110 


OF  VERBS. 


promover,   to  promote,  see  alsolver. — Its  part  is  regular. 
propGner,     to  propose,     see  pontr. 
proscrihir,     to  banish. — Part,  proscrito  is  the  only  irre- 
gularity. 
proseguir,     to  continue,     seepedtr. 
probdr,     to  try.     see  acorddr. 
provenir,     to  issue,     see  venir. 


Q 


see  acertdr. 


Gerund. 
Participle. 
Indicat.  pres. 

Imperfect. 

Preterite. 

Future. 


Quehrar,     to  fail,  to  be  a  bankrupt. 

Infinit.  pres      Querer,     to  love. 
f/uericndo,  loving. 
c/ueridOj     loved. 
quicro,  qincrt'Sy  quLre, 
querimos,  quereisy  quieren. 
queria,  queriaSy  queria, 
queriamos,  queriais,  querian. 
quise,  quisiste,  quiso, 
quisimos,  quisisteis,  quisk'ron, 
querre,  querrds,  querrd, 
querremos,  querreis,  querrdn. 

Subjunc.  pres.  quiera,  quieras,  quiera, 

qucramos,  querdis,  quuran. 

Imperfect.        querriay  querrias,  querria, 

querriawos,  querriais,  querrian. 

Preterite.  quisiese     quisUses     quisiese  - 

or  or  or 

qmslera,  quisitras,  quisiera, 
quisiisemos     quisles  cis     quismen 

or  or  or 

quisieramos,  quisierais,  quisieran. 
Future.  quisitre,  quisitres,  quisure, 

quisuremos,  quislereis,  quisieren. 
Imperative.       quiere,     love  thou. 

qidero,     let  him  love. 

querdmos,     let  us  love, 

quered,     love  you. 

quiiran,    let  them  love. 


OF  VERBS.  Jll 

R 

Recaer,     to  fall  again,     see  cacr. 

recoccr,     to  bake  again,     see  cocer. 

recomenddr,     to  recommend,     see  acerUlr. 

recompontr,     to  set  again  in  order,    see  poncr, 

recojwcer,     to  acknoukdge.     see  aborrectr. 

reconvalecer,     to  recover  from  an  illness,     see  alorrecer. 

recorddr,     to  remember,  to  call  to  mind,     see  acordar, 

recostdrse,     to  lie  on  one  side,     see  acordar, 

recreccKf     to  grow  again,     see  alorrecer, 

reducir,     to  reduce,     see  conducir. 

referir,  to  refer,     see  adherir. 

reflorecer,     to  blossom  again,     see  alorrecer, 

rejojxdr,     to  strengthen,     nee  acordar. 

regdr,     to  water,     sec  acertdr. 

regi.r,     to  govern,     see  pedir, 

regofddr,     to  belch,     see  acorddr, 

rehaci'r,     to  dq  again,     see /iace'r. 

reir,  or  rehse,     to  laugh  or  jest  at  one.     see  pedir, 

reluchTy     to  shine,     see  deslucir, 

remanecer,     to  appear  suddenly,    see  alorrecer, 

remenddrj     to  mend,  to  patch,     see  acertdr. 

remorder,  to  bite  repealt  dly.    see  aholvtr.   i  „i.    .       ^ 

remordtrse,  to  repent,  to  grieve,  seeaholu^r.f     "^ir  pa    . 

remover t    to  remove,  to  exchange  place,  seet  ^\ 

aholoer.  ^  ^  >    ^^S"'«- 

renacer,     to  be  born  again,     see  alorreclr. 
revdir,     to  enslave,     see  pedir. 
rendirse,     to  surrender  oneself,     see  pcdir^ 
renegdr,     to  deny  or  disown,     see  acertdr. 
renovjr,     to  renew,     see  acorddr. 
reTdr,     to  scold,  quarrel,  or  fight,     see  pedir, 
reparecer,     to  apj^ear  again,     see  alorreclr, 
repctir,     to  repeat,     see  pedir. 
reporter ,     to  put  again,     see  poner. 
reprobdr,     to  reprove,     see  acorddr, 
l3 


112  OF    VERBS. 

requebrdr,     to  cajole  or  wheedle,     see  acertdr. 

requerir,     to  require,     see  adherir. 

resentirse,     to  resent,  to  be  sensible  of.     see  adherir. 

rescontrur,     to  compensate,     see  acorddr, 

resolver,     to  resolve,     see  ahsolvcr. 

resollar,     to  breathe,     see  acorddr. 

reiondrf     to  resound,     see  acorddr, 

restalleccr,     to  repair  or  restore,    see  alorrec^. 

retemlldr,     to  tremble  continually,     see  acertdr. 

retener,     to  detain,     see  tener. 

retentar,     to  be  threatened  with  a  relapse,     see  acertdr, 

ret  entry     to  dye  again,     see  pedlr. 

retorceTi     to  twist  again,     see  coccr. 

retraerse,     to  take  refuge,     see  tratr. 

retrairt     to  withdraw,     see  iraer. 

retrotraer,     to  antedate,     see  traer. 

reventdr,     to  burst,     see  acertdr. 

reuer,     to  see  again,     see  ver. 

reverdecer,     to  paint  green  again,     see  alorrecir, 

reverter,     to  overflow,     see  entendtr. 

revestir,     to  invest,     see  pedk. 

revoldr,    to  fly  again,     see  acorddr. 

revolcdrse,     to  wallow,     see  acorddr^ 

revolver,    to  overturn  every  thing,     see  ahsolvir. 

roddr,     to  roll,     see  acorddr. 

rogdr,     to  pray,     see  acorddr. 

S 
Jnfinit.  pres.     Saltr,     to  know. 
^Gerund.  saliendo,     knowing. 

Participle.        sahido,    known. 
Indicat.  pres.    sS,  sdh^s,  sdbe, 

sahemoSy  sabt'is,  sdhen. 
Imperfect.        satia,  sahtas,  sahiat 

saliamos,  sahiais,  saltan. 
Preterite,  supe,  supiste,  supo, 

supinm^  svpUlelSi  supiaon. 


OF  VERBS.  113 

Future.  salre,  salrds,  s&hrd, 

salrcmost  salreis,  sahrdn, 
Subjunc.  pres.  sepa,  sepas,  sepa, 

sepdmos,  sepdis,  sepan. 
Imperfect.        sabria,  salrias,  salri'a, 

salrlamos,  sabriais,  sabrian. 
Preterite.  supiese    svpieses    supiese 

or  or  or 

supiera,  supieras,  supitra, 
supiesemos    supiiseis     supiesen 

or  or  or 

supiSramos,  supUrais,  supieran. 
Future.  supilre,  supieres,  supUre, 

supii'remos,  supiereis,  supieren. 
Imperative.      sdbe,     know  thou. 

sepa,    let  him  know. 

sepdmoSf     let  us  know. 

sabed,     know  you. 

sepan,    let  them  know. 
saber  bien,     to  relish,  (in  speaking  of  meat),   see  saldr. 
Tniinit.  pres.    salir,     to  go  out. 
Gerund  saliendo,     going  out. 

Participle.         salido,     gone  out. 
Indicat.  pres.   salgo,  sales,  sdle, 

sallmos,  salts,  sdlen. 
Imperfect.        salia,  sulias,  salia, 

sallamos,  saliais,  saltan. 
Preterite.  sail,  saliste,  saliu, 

salinios,  salisteis,  salieron. 
Future.  saldre,  saldrns,  saldrd, 

saldn-mos,  saldras,  saldrdn. 
Subjunc,  pres.  sdlga,  sulgas,  sdlga, 

salgdmos,  sa/gdis,  sdlgan. 
Imperfect.        saldrla,  saldrias,  satdHa, 

saldriamos,  saldrlais,  saldrian. 

Preterite.       '  saliese    salieses    salihe 
or  or  ((r 

saliera,  salieras,  saliera, 
L  3 


114  OIC  VERBS. 

Saliesemos      salk'seis     saliesen 
or  or  or 

salieravwSy    salierais,   salieran. 
Fulur*.  saliere,  salUres,  salitre, 

saUeremos,  saliereisj  salleren. 
Imperative.    '  sal,    go  thou  out. 

saiga,     let  him  go  out. 

salgdmos,     let  us  go  out. 

salidj     go  you  out. 

sdlgarij     let  them  go  out. 
SegdVy     to  reap,     see  acertdr. 

segulr,     to  follow,    see  perf/r.—N.B.  This  verb  and  its 
compounds  lose  u  before  a  and  o  ,•  consequently  we  say 
sigo,  siga,  in  lieu  of  siguo,  sigua,  &c. 
sembrdr,     to  sow.     see  acertdr. 
sen  tar se,     to  sit  down,     see  acertdr. 
sentiry     to  hear,     see  adherir, 
serrar,     to  saw.     see  acertdr, 
serviry     to  serve,     see  pedlr, 
solreponer,     to  put  above,     see  poncr. 
sobresalir,     to  excel  or  surpass,     see  salir. 
sohrevcnir,     to  come  in  unlooked-for.     see  vcnir, 
soldar,     to  solder,     see  acorddr. 

soler,     to  be  wont,     see  absolucr.     Its  part,  is  regular. 
soltdr,     to  untie,     see  acorddr. 
sondr,     to  resound,     see  acorddr. 
sondrse  {las  narices),     to  blow  one's  nose,     see  acorddr. 
sonar,     to  dream,     see  acorddr. 
sonreir,     to  smile,     see  pedir. 
sosegdr,     to  repose  or  rest,     see  acertdr, 
sosegdrse,     to  allay  one's  passion,     see  acertdr, 
soterrdr,     to  bury,     see  acertdr. 
suhstraer,  to  abridge,     see  truer, 
supcner,     to  suppose,     see  poner. 

T 

Temlddr,    to  tremble,    seeaccr/an 


11. 


tender,     to  spread  cr  stretch,     see  enlendtr. 

tentTy  to  have,  or  tq^hold.     see  the  auxiliary  verhs» 

tenir,     to  dye.     see  pedir. 

tentdrj     to  tempt,     see  aceridr» 

torccr,     to  twist,     see  cocer, 

iraduvlr,     to  translate,     see  cnnducir. 

Infinit.  pres.     Tracr,     to  brir.g. 

Gerund:  trayendo,     bringing. 

Participle.         iraidOf     brought. 

Indicat.  pres.    trai/go,  trdes,  trde, 

troernos,  tracis,  trden. 
Imperfect.        imia,  traiaSj  iraia^ 

traiamoSf  traiais,  tralan. 
Preterite.  trdxey  traxiste,  trdxo, 

traximos,  traxisteis,  traxcrorL. 
Future.  traerc,  traerds,  iraerd, 

traercmos,  traer^is,  tracrdn. 
Subjunc.  pres.  traiga,  trkigas,  traiga, 

traigdmos,  traigtiis,  traigan. 
Imperfect.        traeria,  traerias,  traeria, 

iracria?noSy  iraeriais,  traerian. 

Preterite.  traxise      traxeses      traxtse, 

or  or  or 

iraxera,    traxera^,    traxcra, 

traxesemos      traxeseis      traxi'sen 
or  or  or 

tvaxh'amos,    iraxerais,    traxeran. 
Future.  traxt're,  traxcres,  traxtre, 

iraxeremos,  traxtreis,  traxiren, 
Imperaiive.       trde,     bring  thou. 

trayga,     let  him  bring. 

traygd/nos,     let  us  bring. 

tra^dj     bring  you. 

traygan,     let  tliem  bring. 
Transcender,     to  pass,     see  entendcr, 
iran$poner,     to  transpose,     see  pondr. 


116 


OF  VEKBS. 


trascender,     to  penetrate  or  discover,     see  entendcr, 
trascoLur,     to  strain,     see  acorddr. 
trascorddrse,     to  forget,     see  acorddr. 
trasegdr,     to  put  topsy-turvy,     see  acertdr. 
trasGudr,     to  be  out  of  one's  mind,     see  acorddr. 
traspoTitr,  to  transpose  from  one  place  to  another,     see 

poner. 
trocar,    to  exchange,    see  acorddr. — This  verb  changes  c 

into  qu  before  e. 
trondr,     to  thunder,     see  the  impersonal  verbs, 
tropezdr,     to  trip  in  walking,     see  acertdr. 


Infinit  pres.     FaUr,     to  be  worth. 
Gerund.  valiendo,     being  worth. 

Participle.         valido,     been  worth. 
Indicat.  pres.    valgo,  vales,  vale, 

vaUmos,  valcis,  vdlen. 
Imperfect.        valia,  valias,  valia, 

valiamos,  valiais,  vaUan. 
Preterite.  vali,  valiste,  valid, 

valimos,  valisteis,  valieron. 
Future.  valdre,  valdrds,  valdrd, 

valdremos,  valdreis,  valdrdn, 
Subjunc,  pres.  vdlga,  vdlgas,  vdlga, 

valgdmos,  valgdis,  vdlgan. 
Imperfect.        valdria,  valdrias,  valdria, 

valdriamos,  valdriais,  valdrian. 
Preterite.  valiese      valieses     valiese 

or  or  or 

valiera,    valieras,   valiera, 
valiese  mos    vaUeseis    valiesen 

or  or  or 

valieramos,  valiarais,  valieran. 
Future.  valicre,  valieres,  valitre, 

valieremos,  valiereis,  valieren. 


OF  VEKBS, 


Imperative.       vale,     t>e  thoti  worth. 

vdlgQf     let  him  be  worth. 

valgdmos,     let  us  be  worth. 

valedj     be  yon  worth , 

vdlgan.     Jet  them  be  worth. 
Infinit.  pres.     Fentr,    to  come. 
Gerund.  viniendo,     coming. 

Participle.         ventdo,     come. 
Indicat.  pres.   vengo,  vienes,  vitne, 

venimos,  venis,  vit'nen. 
Imperfect.        venta,  venias,  venia, 

veniamos,  veniais,  vei:ian. 
Preterite.  vine,  vintste,  vino, 

v'uiimos,  vinisteisj  vmieron. 
Future.  vendre,  vendrds,  vendrd, 

vendremos,  vendr^is,  vendrdn. 
Subjunc.  pres.  vcnga,  vengas,  venga, 

vengdmos,  vengdis,  vengan. 
Imperfect.        vendria,  vendrlas,  vendrla, 

vendriamoSy  vendriais,  vendrian, 

Prelerite,         vimese     vinihes     vinihe 
or  or  or 

vinii'ra,   vinichaSf    vinJha, 

vinitsemos     viuieseis     viniese 
or  or  or 

vimhamos,    vinUrais,    vinieran* 
Future,  vinitre,  vlnt^res,  viniere, 

vini&remos,  viniereis,  vini^en. 
Imperative,      verij    come  thou. 

vevga,    let  him  come. 

vengdmos,     let  us  come. 

venid,    come  you. 

vengan,     let  them  come. 
Fenirse,     to  come,     see  venir.  ^ 

vermejecer,  or  hermejecer,  to  become  red. 
vertcr,     to  pour,     see  entendcr. 


see  alorrecer^ 


118 


OP  VERBS. 


vestir,     to  dress,     see  pedir. 

vesiirse,  to  dress  oneself,     see  pedir» 

volar,     to  fly.     see  atorddr. 

volcdr,     to  turn  all  things  upside  down,     see  acorddr. 

volvcr,     to  come  back  or  send  back,     see  alsolv'r. 

volvtrse,     to  become  either  good  or  bad.     see  alsolvtr. 


A  collection  of  verls  whose  injinitlves  end  in  cer,  making 
the  indicaiive  in  zoo,  and  the  preterite  in  ci. 


Infinitive. 

Indicative. 

Preterite. 

Adukccr,    to  grow  sick 

auo'.tito 

udoLeci 

jigra(te(6;     to  th:ink 

agradtzco 

as^radeci 

Apefeca-t    to  desire 

apdezco 

apetec: 

Compadecer,     to  pity 

ompadezco 

compadeci 

Cmtuter^     to  know 

conozco 

conuti 

Crercr^     to  grow 

creico 

crai 

DesffiUecei't    to  faint  away 

desfallezro 

desfuLleci 

Desvanect'ft     to  vanish 

desvauczio 

desvaneii 

J'Utcarev^r-f    to  grow  dettfer 

mtareset} 

tnrafHl 

I^s(fiblet4rt    to  eitublifsh 

isiabhttQ 

fstabkd 

^flH(U{vec&t    to  grow  lean 

mJiat(mzcQ 

tnjiaffueci 

EmpobreciTf    to  grow  poor 

empohretco 

empehreci 

Bnnquech\    to  grow  rich 

enriquezco 

enriqueci 

£7idurecer,    to  grow  hard 

endurezco 

endured 

EngrandeccTy     to  aggrandize 

mgrandezco 

engrandni 

Entristecer,    to  grow  sad 

entristt'zco 

entristeci 

Emiotlecer,     to  ennoble 

ennoblezco 

ennobled 

Ensoherbecir,     to  grow  proud 

ensoberbezco 

ensoberbed 

Eiimudectry    to  grow  dumb 

enmvdezco 

eyimuded 

fenecer^     to  finish 

fhiezco 

fened 

Ea'ieceTy     to  fail  or  die 

fallezce 

failed 

Florecer,     to  flourish 

Jiorezco 

Jlored 

Fortnlecery    to  strengthen 

fortalezro 

Jortaled 

Favor eccTy     to  favour 

Juvorezco 

favored 

^/erereV,     to  deserve 

merexco 

mered 

A'actfV,    to  be  born 

vazco 

nad 

Obedeciry     to  obey 

obedezco 

vbeded 

Paf/r,     to  feed 

pazcu 

pad 

PadeccTy     to  suffer 

padezro 

paded 

Parecer,     to  appear 

parezco 

parcel 

Pereccr,     to  perish 

perezco 

jtered 

OF  VERBS.  119 

SECTION    VII. 

Several  ways  of  conjugating  a  verb  with  a  negation, 

ifinit.  pres.      No  habldr,     not  to  speak, 
idicat.  pres.    no  hcHIo,     I  do  not  speak. 

no  hdblas,     thou  dost  not  speak. 

no  hdbla,     he  does  not  speak. 

no  habldmos,     we  do  not  speak,  &c. 

Compound  tenses, 
na  he  hablddo,     I  have  not  spoken,  &c.  3 — and  so  on  for 
every  tense  and  person. 

With  an  interrogation. 

Imperfect  of  the  indicative,  third  person  singular. 
Cantdba  el  en  el  concierlo  ?    Did  he  sing  at  the  concert  ? 

Compound  tenses. 
f^Ha  recibido  vm.  una  carta  de  su  padre  9 
Have  you  received  a  letter  from  your  father  ? 
"     ^Habian  el/ as  comprddo  la  cdsa  P 
Had  they  bought  the  house  ? 

fFith  a  negation  and  interrogation. 

Indicative  present. 
Vo  me  enliende  vm  ?     Do  you  not  understand  me  ? 
Vo  7105  conocemos  9     Do  we  not  know  one  another? 

Compound  tense. 
Vo  7205  hemos  conocido  9  Have  we  not  known  one  another  ? 
No  se  ha  vm.  olvidddo  de  mi  nombre  9     Have  you  not 
forgotten  my  name  ? 

With  an  interrogation  and  a  pronoun  relative. 

Indicative  future  tense. 
■Podra'  vm.  vender los  con  venidja  para  nuestra  utilidadP 
Can  you  sell  them  to  our  advantage  ? 


120  OF  VERBS. 

^  Querrd  vm.  acompanarnos  manana  al  campo  ? 
Will  you  come  to-morrow  with  us  into  the  country  ? 

SECTION   VIII. 

Of  impersonal  verls. 
Impersonal  verbs  are  thus  conjugated  : 

Indicative  mood. 

Pres  Hav    v  no  hav        i  ^^^^^  ^^*  ^"^  ^^^^^^  '^  "°^* 

J>  y  Vi       \  there  are,  and  there  are  not. 

T«,«    u^i  '„    „  <,«  i,«i.u   ("there  was,  and  there  was  not. 
Imp.  Havia.  y  no  navia.  <  ^,  r  u 

^  •'  L  there  were,  a?zd  there  were  not. 

t>^^f    zj'i  i,n        f  there  was,  awfl?  there  was  not. 

Fret.  Hubo,  y  no  huoo,     <  ^,  u\ 

^  (.there  were,  awa  there  were  not. 

r?,t.    Tj  J    I  L  J    '   ( there  shall  be,  and  there  shail/ 

'  •'  L     not  be. 

Subjunctive  mood. 

D.-^-    tr '  I, '  r  there  may  be,  and  there  may 

Pres.  Haya  y  no  huya,     |     ^^^  ^^^^-^^  -^ 

Imperf.    Hahria,    y  wo  j  there   would  be,    and    there 

halria,  I     would  not  be. 

Pret.     Hubiese  or  hub ic-  r  ,  •  i,*.   u  j   ♦! 

;    ,  •  /     1  there   might   be,    and   there 
ra,  y  no  hubic'se<  -  \  4.      4.  u 

u  T'  I      might  not  be. 

or  no  nubwra,        K,         ^ 

Fut.      Hubiere,    y    no    c  there  shall  be,  anc?  there  shall 

hubicre,  \     not  be. 

The  compound  tenses  are  formed  by  adding  habido  to 

each  tense,  as  ha  habido,  there  has  been  3 — and  so  on  for 

the  rest. 

The  impersonal  verb  ser,  to  be. 
Indicat.  pres.    Es,  y  no  eSy     it  is,  and  it  is  not. 
Imperfect.        jEra,  y  no  era,     it  was,  and  it  was  not. 
Preterite,  Fue,  y  nofue^     it  was,  and  it  was  not. 

Future.  S^ra,  y  no  sera,    it  shall  be,  and  it  shall 

not  be. 


-OV  VEEB8. 


1-21 


Subjunc.  pres.  Sea,  y  no  sta,  it  may  be,  and  it  may  not  be. 
Imperfect.        Serla,  y  no  seria,  it  would,  and  it  ^^ould 

^  not  be. 

Preterite.         Ike&e  ibf  fitera,  j  no  fuese  or  no  fuSra,  it 
might  be,  arid  it  might  not  be. 

The  impersonal  menester,  it  musL 

Indicat  pres.     Es  wenester,  y  no  es  menester, 
it  must,  and  it  mui^t  not. 
Era  menester,  y  tk)  era  menester, 
it  was  necessary,'  and  it  was  not  necessary. 
Fue  menester,  y  nofiie  menester, 
it  was  necessary,  and\t  was  not,  &c. 
Scrd  menester,  y  no  sera  menester, 
it  xvill,  ayid  it  will  not  be  necessary. 

Subjunc.  pres.  S4a  menester,  y  nosci  menester, 

it  may,  and  it  may  myt  be  necessary. 
Seria,  y  no  serla  mejwster, 
it  would,  and  it  would  not  be  necessary. 
Fuese  or  Jurra,  y  no  Jutsc  or  no  fuera, 

menfster, 
it  might,  and  it  might  not  be  necessary. 

"'■^\  ••■' 
The  other  imp^qnals  have   infinitive,  gerund,  and 

participle  J  v/Lich -shall  be  set  down  here  for  the  further 

instruction  of  the  pupil. 


Imperfect. 


■Preterite. 


Future. 


Tmperfect. 
Preterite. 


Indicative. 

Iti^::.iLivr. 

Gerund. 

•Partyriple. 

Ltiii-  e,  it  rains 

from  liun'r 

lioiiendo 

Uovido 

Hicia,  it  freezes 

^Ulr 

HeliDndo 

hem, 

•<^rm}ha,  it  hails 

-         graiiizdr 

granizarulo 

granizddo 

Ki/ca,  it  snows 

— —  rteviir 

nevando 

nevddo 

True.'Hi,  it  thunders 

-i trondr 

tronandn 

tronddo 

.  '       >-  It  h"-htcns 

rdampx- 

Tclamp.i'^ 

refcmpa- 

guedr 

gueando 

gucudo 

Hdce  {it  is)  is  used  with  an  adjective,  and  some  nouns 
xle-noting  th.e  disposition  of  the  weatlier,  as  hdce  calur,  it 
•is -hot  3  hdcejrio,  it  is  cold;  hdce  viento,  it  is  \yindy,  &c. 


122 


OF  ADVERBS. 


Indicative. 
/Icaccp,     it  happens 
Convienef     it  becomes 
Importa,     it  matters 
Parece.    it  seems 


Infinitive, 
^from  acaect'r 

•  coimenir 

imporfur 

— —  puree  tr 


•Gerund.  Participle. 

ac.aedendo  ac.aerUh> 

covviniencJo  convenUlo 

import  ando  imporfddo 

pareciendo  parecido. 


CnAPTKR  VI. 


OF  ADVERBS. 

An  adverb  is  that  part  of  speech  which  is  joined  to  a 
verb,  adjective,  or  participle,  to  express  some  circum- 
stance, quality,  degree,  or  manner  of  its  signification. 

Exawple. 

Dios  es .  infimmente  justo  :  castlgard  rigorosamentc  a  los 
impios.  God  is  infinitely  just :  he  will  rigorously 
punish  the  impious. 

N.  B.  Most  Spanish  adjectives  may  be  changed  into 
adverbs  by  adding  ?ncnle  to  the  feminine  termination  of 
such  adjectives  as  have  two  terminations  ;  or  to  the  com- 
mon termination  of  such  adjectives  as  have  oiily  -one 
termination. 

Example. 


Masc, 

hifimto, 

Fem.  injimta, 

vi/iriiia'meDte, 

Bueno, 

buena, 

buenn-mente. 

Feii%, 

feliz, 

fi'liz-mente. 

Fid, 

M. 

Jiel-menie 

Different  sorts  of  adverbs. 

Besides  the  number  of  adverbs  formed  from  adjectives, 
there  are  many  others^  which  can  be  divided  into  fourteen 


OF  Adverbs. 


123^ 


classesj,  according  to  their  signification  j  they  are  as  fol- 
low :       '   «  ,V 

Adverls  of  time. 


Al  presente 

at  present 

hasta  aqui 

hitherto' 

presfnlemenle. 

/  presently 

hasta  ah6ra 

till  now 

luck'o 

ejiidnces 

then 

ahdra 

now 

temfirdno 

early 

hoy 

to-day 

muclio  hd 

long  since 

ences 

before 

poco  hd 

lately 

ai'tri 

yet,  even 

luego 

directly 

a  menudo 

often 

mientras 

whilst 

Xfimediatammte  directly                | 

tarde 

late 

de  priesa 

quickly                | 

d  la  tarde 

in  the  evening. 

Ayer 

yesterday 

antigunmenfe 

formerly 

auUayer 

<the  day  before 
i     yesterday 

retientemcnte 

recently 

nuevamente 

newly. 

Mandna  to-morrow. 

pasd  de  mor  >  the  day  after  to- 

iidna  y      niorrow 

^r«ia  8oon 


''''?"'^/''^'' J  now  and  then 
quando         > 

de  a<fui  en  ode-  )  v^^f„,»v 


Primeramevte 
rarnmente 
de  r^pente 
rtpentiiiamente 
preslisimo 
pruntamenle, 
Uicgo  que 
?iu7ica,  jamas 
siempre 
para  siempre 
de  corU'tHUo 
entretanUt 
las  mas  veres 
u.tt(u!.mentt: 
ordina  ianienle 
comiirrhf    !e 
Jreq-ie-  Xi  e  ite 
east  i'Cwyj,  t 
casi  nutt^u 


first 

seldom 

on  a  suddea 

suddenly 

the  soonest 

quickly 

as  soon  as. 

never 

alw  lys 

fo:  ever  and  ever 

continually 

meanwhile 

most  times 

usually 

ordinarily 

commonly 

frt.^i!ently 

almost  always 

never  hardly 


presto  $ooa 

tarde  late 

dernasiddo  prestotoo  soon 
demasiddo  tarde  too  late 
^lot  yet 


au7i  no 

desfues 

oirO'Vez 

de  nueco 

dtspacio 

quando 

de  dia 

Je  niiche 

dia  y  hoc  he 

de  una  vez 

mas  que  nunca 

mas  y  vias 

opoytunamente 

diartamente 


smce 

again 

anew 

leisurely 

when 

by  day 

by  night 

day  and  night 

at  once 

more  than  ever 

more  and  more 

seasonably 

daily. 


M2 


r2^ 


OF  AD VERsrs: 


Adverbs  of  place. 


^d^ndcf  donde 

de  dimde 

de  aqni 

de  alii 

aqut 

S.ILI,  0  aki 

finna 

dilras 

aculld 

deiavie^ 

dejilio 


Prima'o  } 

^■imeramenie  ^ 
e/ijfg^undo  lugar 
iercerame-nie 
uUimamente^    > 
en  cwiclusion   5 

despuct 
de  seguido 
juntamente 


•<\'here 

from,  whence 
feom  hence 
from  thence 
in  this  place 
there 
ahoxs- 
behind 
yonder 
before 
aside 
within 


abaxo 
cerca. 
junta- 
enfrenic 
iejos 
encima 
debdxo  •■ 
fucra  ^ 
porjuera 
indircdo 
a  la  nidno 
mas  Itjfjs-' 


belcnv 

near 

adjoining^ 

facing 

far 

upon 

utiderneath 

(nit 

without 

roimd  about 

hard  by' 

further. 


Jiherh'  of  order. 
£rst,  or  firstly- 


second  ly 
thirdly 

lastly 

before 
after 
one    afier 

other 
togsther 


f  despucs  afterwards 

al  rededor  round  about 

■altertialivarnenie  SLhernatively: 
Jinalmente  finally 

ordenadamenle    orderly 
en  confusion         confusedly 
atropelladamentem  a  jumble 
tntaimeiUe  utterly 

ul  reves       '^      topsy-turvy 


Quanta- 


p&co 

un  p6co 

mucho 

no  mucho 

laatantemmte^ 

snjicienttmente. 

poco  a  poco 

casi 

cerca 

tanto 

mas 

m.enns 

ademds 

d  lo  mas 

a  lo  menns 


Adverbs  of  quantity  and  number. 

i  dearly 


( how  much 
\  how  many 

little 

a  little,  some 

much 

not  much 

*  >  enough 

little  by  little 

pretty  near 

about 

so  much 

more 

less 

moreover 

at  most 

at  least 


aL'undaiitemente  plentifully 


caramente 
tieryiam  mte 

hardtn  cheap 

muy  iardlo  Very  cheap 

iotalmente  entirely 

pur  midio  by  half 

iiifinitamente       infinitely 
completammte     quite 
extrahameate      strangely 
admirablemente  admirably 
maravillosa-     ?  ^^^aerfully 


menle 
absolutamente 
viedianumoite 
qiiantfis  veces 
una  vez 
dos  veces 
Ires  veces 
diez  veces 


absolutely 

tolerably 

how  many  timea 

once 

twice 

thrice 

ten  tin??* 


OF  A'DVEIlBSi 


125 


dmdiins  llenas  plentifully 

copiosamenle  largely 

caru  dear 

leinte  veces  twenty  times 


cinciieyita  veces^  fifty  times 

aen  veces  a  hundred  times 

mil  veces  athousand  times. 


Adverts  of  quality  and  inanner. 


Bien  well,  right 

mal  bad,  wrong 

mity  Men  very  well 

muy  mal  very  bad 

adnurablemenle  admirably  well 
medianamcnte  |  neither  well  nor 

sahiameiite       '   wisely 
■jtistamente  justly 

Undamentet       )  ., 

b.r.ttamenle      ^  P^^ttily 
prudentemente     prudently 
invariallemente  constantly 
vigorosarncnte      briskly 
^Jhcilniente  easily 

cun  neglisencia    carelessly 
anticipadamente  previously 
primer amentc      first  of  all 


stum  asm  mas, 
directamente 
enteramcnte 
derechamente 
filsamente 
de  buena  gana 
de  mala  gana 
con  intencion 


point  blank, 

bluntly 

thoroughly 

straight 

ialf^ely 

heartily 

grudgingly 

on  purpose 


Voluntariame7ite  wilfully 


fuertemente  strongly 

ahie'tamente  openly 

a  tientas  at  random 

mnecidamcnte  deservedly 

injustamente  wrongfully 

seriamf.nte  seriously 
desi  indadamente  giddily 

locamente  sillily 

lemermiaineule  rashly 

a  toda  priesa  headlong 
i7/o«i  (°>7/rfcme7iifinadvertently 

accidmtulmenle  accidentally 

ei.trechamente  narrowly 

mortalmenle  mortally 

liberal  mente  largelv 

ami/*ablement€  amicably 

en  paz  in  peace 

tranqytilamente  peaceably 

e:c(t<tamente  exactly 

TudameiUe  rudely 

vigorosamenfe  stoutly 


aceleradamente 
d  pa 
a  caballo 


in  haste 
on  foot 
on  horseback 


,,    r,      -  ,     ?  after  the  Spanish 
dlaE.pauola  ^      ^^^j^-^J 


Adverh  of  affirmation. 


Si  yes 

verdaieramente  yes,  indeed 
ciertatnente         sure,  to  be  sure 
ssguramente         assuredly 
induHtablemenfecerv,' -ily 
en  verdad  in  truth. 


realmente 
tx&rta  mente 
proHta-  icnle 
VifaiibtetHf.ite 


indeed' 
truly 
readily 
infallibly 


indubitabltmentc  undoubtedly. 


Jduerh  of  negation  and  doubt. 


No,  ni  no,  not 

de  yiingunmodo    ...t  at  all 
tampoco  neither 


d  <(iso.  7       , 

prr  Centura       \V^^^V^ 
probablemente     probably 
muy  probai/U     v«ry  liJ^ely. 
M3 


n6 


OF  ADVERBS. 


Adverbs  of  comparison ,  i^e. 


Asi 

del  viismo 
modo  que 

diestemodo 

en  parte 

ianto 

enterameute 

separadaviente 

de ladd 

vias 

menos 

peor 


Qaando  < 
porqiie  f 
quanto? 


thus 

in  the  same  man- 
ner, as 
;  after  that  man- 
l     ner 
partly 
as  much 
altogether 
separately 
aside 
mere 
less 


mejnr 

de  mrior  eii  mejo 

ni  vias  m  me-  ^ 

de  una  y  otra) 
parte  \ 

UJiivenalmente 
goieralmenle 
cortesmentc 
de  otra  mani-ra 
particvlarmenle 
al  contrdrio 


better 

betterandbetter 
neither    more 
nor  less 

on  both  sides 

universally 

generally 

genteelly 

othej-wlse 

particularly 

on  the  coutraryi 


Aduerhs  of  inier rogation. 


why  ? 
how  much  ? 


quantas  veces  ?    how  often  ? 
CO  mo?  how? 

donde  f  where  ? 


OF  PREPOSITIONS; 

Prepositions,  so  called  from  the  Latin  pr^epono,  (I 
place  before,)  are  indeclinable  words,  which,  in- the 
Spanish,  language,  always  precede  the  nonn,  pronoun, 
or  adverb  which  they  govern. 

Example, 

Los,  que  perseverardn  en  el  amor  de  Dios  hasta  Id  muerte, 
vozaran  de  la  gloria  del  cielo.  They,  who  will. persevere 
in  the  love  of  God  until  death,  will  enjoy  the  glory  of 
heaven* 

The  following  list  contains  somo  words  alphabetically 
arranged,  governing  certain  prepositions. 


Abalanz-rse  <{  ios  pelJgros 
abandonarse  a  la  suerte 
aboc;irse  fo7i  los  eu'-os 
abocborjftirse  dt  algo 


to  rush  to  dangers 
to  abandon  oneself  to  chance 
to  confer  Tri^AoneVrelaacns 
to.be  vexed  mth  any  thing 


OF  PREposrTioisrs. 


127 


abogar  por  algano 
abordar  una  nave,  a, or  cnn,  otra 
aborrecible  d  !a  ^ente 
aborrecido  de  tcdos 
ab^as^.^se  en  deseos 
abrirsea,or  con,  sus  coafidenies 

abstenerse  de  comer 
abundar  de,  or  en,  riquezas 
aburrido  de  su  mala  fortui^a 
abusar  de  la  amistad 
acabar  de  Venir 
aciiectT  (;ilgo)  a  alguno 
acaecer  (algo)  en  tal  tiempo 
acalorarse  en  la  disputa 
acceder  a  la  opinion  de  otro 

accesible  a  los  pretendientes 
acerca  de  este  as  unto 
acertar  co)i  la  casa 
acoger^e  «  alguno 
acumodarse  o,'?i  alguno 
acomodarse  aL  dictainen  de  otro 

acompail'irse  cnn  otros 
aconsej;.rse  (/r,  or  co/i,  sabios 
accntecer  d  los  incautos 
acorddrse  de  alguna  cosa 
acordarse  con  ios  contraries 
acostumbrarse  d  los  trabajos 
acreditarse  de  necio 
acreedor  d,  or  dc,  la  eonfianza 
actuarse  en  los  negocios 
acusar  d  alguno 
acusarse  de  sus  culpas 
adelantarse  d  otros 
adem  s  de  eso 
adheiirse  d  la  opinic  n  de  otro 

adolccer  de  enfcrmedad 

aferrarse  en  lu  opinion 

aficionarse  a  leer 
afirmarse  en  su  dicho 
ageno  de  verdad 
agradecido  d  los  beneficios  . 
agraviarse  d«  alguno 
agregarse  a  otros 
agrio  a/ gusto 
agudo  dc  ing^o 


to  plead  for  any  one 

to  approach  one  ship  to  another 

hateful  to  the  people 

detested  ly  all 

to  be  intlatned  wiih  desires 

to  unbosom   oneself  to  one's 

conf:*jnt3 
to  abstain  y;v>7n  eating 
to  abound  icilhy  or  in^  riches 
weary  icilh  one's  ill  fortune 
to  abase  friendship 
to  be  just  COCXXQ 

something  happening  to  anyone 
To  happen  ai  such  a  time 
to  gr.w  warm  in  a  dispute 
to  accede  ia  the  opinion  of  an- 
other 
accessible  tn  pretender* 
about  thib  bw^!i>iis 
to  find  the  hor.sc 
to  have  recourse  In  any  one 
to  settle  one^elt  witkzny  one 
to  conform  oneself  to  another's 

opinion 
to  keep  company  with  others 
to  be  advisee!  by  vi'ise  men 
to  happen  to  the  u-iwary 
to  remember  any  thing 
to  agree  iviih  ones  opponents 
toaccustom  oneself /o  misfortune 
to  prove  his  foMy 
worthy  of  confidence 
to  be  active  in  business 
to  accuse  any  one 
to  accuse  oneself  of  one's  faults 
to  advance  before  others 
besides  that 

to  adhere  to  the  opinidn  of  an- 
other 
to  complain  of  one's  own  in- 
firmity 
to  be  obstinate  in  one*sown  opi- 
nion 
to  be  fond  of  reading 
to  affirm  what  has  been  said 
foreign  to  the  truth 
grateful  /or  beneilts 
to  be  affronted  with  any  one 
to  unite  oneself  to  others 
sour  to  the  taste 
witty,  or  of  a  sharp  genius 


128 


OFPR^- 


:''ov!Jv 


uhitarse  de  man] '; res 
ahorcaiarse  c    las  e^paldas 
ahorrar  aV  raz  nes 
air'irse  con  alguno 
ajustarse  c  n  alg  no 
aju'^itarse  d  la  razor* 
alabarse  de  valionte 
alaT2;r.rse  a  h  ciudiid 
a!e<Tn:rse  de  algo 
alinrntr.se  am  p;  co 
alimontf TEC 4e  esptranzas- 
allndar  con  otra  heredad 

allan  rse  d  lo  justo 
alt  I'  de  cuerpo 
amable  tf  la  gente 
a:'anci'b;irse  ron  los  libros 
am.aite  de  algo 
amanarse  d  escribir 
ai«.^roso  con  los  suyos 
amparurse  de  alguna  cosa 
ancho  de  boca 
andiit  con  el  tiempo 

andar  en  pleytos 

and ir  por  tierra 

auhelar  a, or  por,  mayor  fortuna 

antes  de  ahora 

antic iparse  d  alguno 

aovar  eri  cl  nido 

aparar  en  la  mano 

aparecerse  a  alguno 

apai  ejarse  para  el  trabajo 

apartarse  de  la  occasion 

apa?!oaarse  a  los  libros 
apasionarse  de  alguno 
apti'L.hugar  con  alguna  cosa 
spedrejT  con  las  palabras 
apeg^.rse  a  alguna  cosa 
apeiar  de  la  sentencia 
apelar  d  otro  medio 

apercibirse  de  armas 
apetecible  al  gusto 
apiadarse  de  los  pobres 
apl'icarse  d  los  estudios 
apoderarse  del'A  hacienda  ag^ha 
apresurar«!e  en  los  negorios 
aprobarse  en  alguna  iaculttid 
aprogfi^do  pdra  el  officio 


.;.  jurfeit  oneiself  with  food 

to  ge*-  '.'p;''  ;nio;  iier's  back 

to  be  sp;-"'rig  of  o!/^''-  A'ords- 

to  grow  ,    pry  vnt'<  a.iy  one 

to  make  it  I'o  unit,  any  one 

to  yield  to  renson 

to  boast  of  bravery 

to  hasten  to  the  town 

to  be  rejoiced  at  any  thing 

to  subsist  upon  little 

to  feed  oneself  icilh  hopes 

to  be  contiguous   to    another's 

estate 
to  submit  to  what  is  just 
lo  be  of  a.  high  stature 
amiable  to  the  people 
to  be  fond  of  books 
a  lover  of  something 
to  be  clever  in  writing 
to  bv»  kind  to  one's  relations 
to  help  oneself  to  any  thing 
to  have  a  wide  mouth 
to  accommodate  oneself  to  the 

time 
to  be  litigious 
to  be  overthrown 
to  wish /or  a  better  situation 
before  now 
to  anticipate  any  one 
to  lay  eggsi«  the  nest 
to  receive  M,77/i  the  hand 
to  appear  suddenly  Z>ty«reany  one 
to  prepare  oneself  for  work 
to    separate   oneself  from   the 

occasion 
to  be  passionately  fond  o/^ books 
to  be  enamoured  with  any  one 
tounder£akeanytbingii;j//i  spirit 
to  be  foul-mouthed 
to  adhere  to  any  thing 
to  appeal  from  a  sentence 
to  have  recourse  to  other  mea- 
sures 
to  provide  oneself  with  arms 
desirable  to  the  palate 
to  have  compassion  on  the  poor 
to  apply  oneself  to  study 
to  usurp  another's  property 
to  be  quick  m  business 
to  be  approved  in  any  faculty  ' 
appropriated  for  the  office. 


OF  PREPOSITIONS. 


12^ 


ocjuictarae  en  ia  dispiita 
arder  en  amores 
arderse  eti  quimeras 
armarse  r^epaciencia 
arrecirce  <Je  frio 
arreglarse  a  las  leves 
arrepentirse  de  lo  mal  hocho 
arrimarse  a  la  pared 
arrogarse  (algo)  d  simisino 

arrojarae  al  pellgro 
arroparse  con  la  capa 
asarse  de  calor 
ascender  d  otro  empleo 

asegurarse  de  los  peHgros 
asesorarse  con  abogado 
asociafse  con  letrados 
asomarse  a,  or  por,  la  ventana 
asparse  a  gritos 
atarse  «rinconvenientes 
atemorizarse  de  lo  que  dicen 
atender  «  la  conversaciun 
aterierse-a  lo  seguro 
atestiguar  cofi  otro 
atinar  «',  or  cw,  la  casa 
atraer  (algo)  a  si 
atreverse  a  cosas  grandea 
atribuir  (algo)  a  otro 
atribularse  en  los  trabajos 
atropellarsc  en  las  acciones 
atufarse  rfe,  or^or,  pocQ 
aunarse  con  otro 
ausentarse  de  Madrid 
avenirse  co7i  otro 
aventajarse  a  otros 
avergonzarse  a  pedir 
avergonzarse  de  algf) 
averiguarse  con  alguiio 
aviarse  pdra  partir 

B 

Balancear  a  tal  parte 
balance  ar  eu  la  duda 
balar  por  dinero 
bambolear  ni  la  marotna 
banarse  en  agua 
barar  en  tierra 
barbear  con  !a  pared 
bastardear  desii  naturaleza 
bastardear  en  acciojies 


to  grow  calm  in  the  dispute 

to  burn  with  love 

to  l>e  warm  in  quarrel 

to  arm  oneself  icith  patience 

to  be  benumbed  with  cold 

to  conform  oneself  to  the  laws 

to  repent  of  a  bad  action 

to  lean  aguinst  the  wall 

to  appropriate  any  thing  to«ne- 

self 
to  run  into  danger 
to  cover  oneself  tviih  a  cloak 
to  be  scorched  with  heat 
to  be  raised  to  another  employ— 

ment 
to  shelter  oneself /rom  danger 
to  seek  advice  y'rom  a  lawyer 
to  associate  wilk  learned  men 
to  look  out  ai  the  window 
to  be  exhausted  ivtlfi  roaring 
to  be  embroiled  in  a  dilemma 
to  be  afraid  of  what  is  said 
to  attend  to  the  conversationr 
to  keep  to  the  side  o/' safety 
to  testify  with  another 
to  hit  upon  the  house 
to  attract  any  thing  to  oneself 
to  animate  oneself  to  great  thing* 
to  attribute  any  thing  to  another 
to  be  afflicted  ivith  pain* 
to  overhastcu  in  any  actioo 
to  be  affronted  at  a  trifle 
to  unite  oneself  ivith  another 
to  absent  oneself /rom  Madrid 
to  agree  witk  another 
to  gain  advantage  over  othera 
to  be  ashamed  tu  ask 
to  be  ashamed  o/any  thing 
to  agree  with  another 
to  prepare /or  a  journey. 

to  hesitate  on  such  a  thing 

to  fluctuate  in  doubts 

to  wish. /or  money 

to  dance  o7i  the  rope 

to  bathe  oneself  in  water 

to  run  aground 

to  reach  the  wall  with  one*s  chia 

to  degeneratey'/om.  one's  nature 

tu  debase  oneself  ly  one'*  actioas 


130 


Ol-  PHErOSITtONS. 


batallar  can  los  encmigos 
baxar  a  ia  cueva 
baxar  de  su  autoridiid 
baxar  hdciu  el  valle 
baxo  de  cuerpo 
bentlico  para  la  sali'id 
bianco  de  cara 
blando  de  corteza 
blasonar  de  valieate 
blasfemar  de  la  virtud 
bordar  (algo)  de  pUta 

bostezar  dc  hambre 

bostezar  de  geuealogia 

buta  de  vino 

boto  de  punta 

bratnar  de  colera 

boyinte  en  ia  fortuna 

bregar  con  otro 

breir  d  chasco 

briudar  co7i  regalos 

brindar  d  la  salud  de  otro 

bu^'no  de  comer 

bueno  para  todo 

bufar  de  ira 

huWir  povy  or  euf  todas  partes 

burlai$e  Ue  algo 


to  figlit  n'itii  the  enemies 

to  go  down  lo  a  cavern 

to  recede  /?o»i  one's  authority 

to  descend  towards  the  valley 

short  in  stature 

beneficial  lo  the  health 

having  a  white  face 

easy  to  be  deceived 

to  boast  of  bravery 

to  blaspheme  against  virtue 

to    embroider    any    thing    icith 

silver 
to  gape  through  hunger 
to  boast  of  one's  genealogy 
a  leathern  flask  ojf.  wioe. 
blunt 

to  roar  with  rsge 
to  be  fortunate 
to  quarrel  with  another 
to  jest  at  one 

to  offer  presents  to  any  one 
todiink  to  the  health  fj/" another 
good  fo  eat 
goodyor  every  tking 
to  swell  with  auger 
to  move  in  all  parts 
to  make  a  jest  of  Any  thing 


Cablr  en  la  mana 
ca^r  CH  tierra 
caer  en  error 
cacr  e)i  lo  que  se  dice 

cadr  en  tal  tiempo 
ca^r  de  lo  alto 
ca^r  a  tal  parte 
ca^r  hdcia  el  norte 
ca6r  sutre  ios  enemigos 
calent  irse  a!  fuego 
cahfic.ir  (a  alguio)  de  docto 
callar  ia  verdad  «  otro 
calumniur  (a  aiguno)  de  injusto 

cambiar  con  otro 
cambiar  algun.<  cosa  par  otra 
CHiiiinar  u  ievi!la 
caminar  por  FraiKia 
ca-.T!n  >r  por  el  monte 
c^agarse  <;an  el  trabajo 


to  be  contained  in  the  hand 

to  fall  upon  the  ground 

to  fall  into  a  mi&take 

to  understand    what  is  said  of 

any  thing 
to  fall  out  at  such  a  time 
to  fall//ow  on  high 
to  look  on  such  a  side 
to  be  northwards 
to  fall  upon  the  enemies 
to  warm  oneself  al  the  fire 
to  qualifv  one  for  a  learned  man 
to  conct-al  the  trutb//o/H  another 
to  calumniate   any   one   of  in- 
justice 
to  exchange  icith  another 
to  exchaniie  one  th'nig  fur  another 
to  tra/el  to  Seville 
to  travel  4h(ough  France 
to  walk  by  the  mountain 
to  faiigue  oneself  with  labour 


r 


OP  PREPOSITIOIICS. 


131 


«apnz  de  hacer  algo 
<■■'■[)■  iz  pdra  su  empleo 

pituiar  a'algdno  denial  hotn- 

bre 

;  ;r  una  cosa  cnn  otra. 

-cquiz.ir   (a  aiguno)    pnra  el 

dcaig-nio 

Jtivar  fa  alguno)  con  favores 

Icr  alguna  cosa  en  favur  de 

otro 
cenlrse  a  ]>  que  se  pu^de 
terca  del  palacio 
chanceirse  con  algiino 
ciiapijz^.r  aigo  en  el  agua 
'''<^c^^  dr  persona 

ocar  una  cosa  con  otra 

cumscribii-3e  a  una  cosa 

mar/jordiiicro 
ci.imore.'ir  p'»r  Un  muertos 
•c<)br;'ir  dinero  tie  los  deudorcs 
'"  ''igi'irse  con  alguao 

nbatir  contra  algano 
nhinar  unas  c'^sas  fo.'i  otras 
'I'irse  dr  envidia 
.lutar  algo  coij.  otra  cosa 

apatiblerwu  la  justicia 

iplaccrse  de  algo 
■ti placer  a  otro 
uponerse  nm  los  deudorcs 

.pr.ir  alg')  de  quie:i  lo  vende 
npi  omeLerse  en  arbitros 
nmunicur  con  alguno 
icert  ir  una  cosa  fo.7  otra 
icordar  la  copia  con  cl  origi- 
v'il 

icurrir  d  alguna  parte 
ideii.'ir  en  las  ccHtas 
idesccnder  u  los  rucgos 
idoierset/e  los  trab.:jos 
iducir  algo  d  C'diz 

labiilarse  can  los  contrarios 

tVdcrarse  con  algdno 
iferir  una  ci  sa  am  otra 

t'esar  la  culpa  nl  juez 


capable  o^ doing  something 

capable  of  h'\s  employment 

to  impeach  any  one  for  being  a 
bad  man 

to  couple  one  thing T67/A  another 

to  suborn   any    one   for  one's 
purpose 

to  overcome  any  one  with  fa- 
vours 

to  give  up  any  thing  in  anothej^s 
favour 

to  keep  within  bounds 

near  to  the  palace 

to  jest  w'ith  any  one 

to  sink  any  thing  in  the  water 

small  in  person 

to  drive  one  thing  against  an- 
other 

to  confine  oneself  to  one  thing 

to  cry  out  /'<r  money 

to  toll  a  l)ell7'>r  the  dead 

to  receive  monevyro?n  debtors 

to    make  an  alliance  liilh   an- 
other 

to  light  azninxf.  any  one 

to  combine  things  wuh  others 

to  pine  with  envy 

to  exchange  one  thing  for  an- 
other 

compatible  mvV/i  justice 

to  be  pleased  icuh  any  thing 

to  please  anotlier 

to  compound  w^th  debtors 
to  buy  any  thii!g//o;?z  the  seller 
to  oompromiric  l>j  ari>itration 
to  commune  nniti  any  one 
to  adjust  one  tiling  to  another 
to  make  the  copy  agree  irW/i  the 

orij^rinal 
to  n)cet  at  some  place 
to  condemn  in  costs 
to  condescend  /«  entreaties 
to  be  grieved  u-ith  l;ib()urs 
to  conduct  any  thing  /■/  Cadiz 
ui  converse  n-iili  ones  enemies 
to  ally  oneself  to  any  one 
to  compare  one  tliing  with  aa- 

other 
to  confess   cjie's    faults  to   the 
judge 


-232 


or  PRF.POStTJONS, 


confiar  algima  cosaa'  otro 
confiarse  dc  alguno 
confinar  alguno  a  tal  .parte 
coniirmarse  en  su  diet. (men 
conformarse  ^onel  tempo 
conforme  d  su  opinion 
confiontar  una  cc  sa  con  otra 

confundirse  de  lo  que  se  v6 

confifeuiar  con  alguno  _ 
congeturar  algo  por  senales 
congratul'ifse  cun  sus  amigos 

coijurarse  contra  algi'ino 
consi'.grarse  (i  Dios 
consentire/i  algo 
consoL;rse  ro/ilossuyos 

cmisplrnr  r^n/ra  algfino 
constar/jor  icstinunios 
cousiiltar  aigana  cCsa  <on  letri' 

dos 
contamiii'ir.'e  cod  lo^'vicios 
contaniinarse  f/fhercgia 

contcmporizar  con  alguno 
contendt^r  >so/rt'  tal  c<  sa 
conten;  rsC  en  palal >jas 
contc-.tar  d  h  pieguiita 
coH'trapesar  una  c^' sa  con  otra 

' contra poncr  s5strt  a  anuello 
c-ontravenir  d  la  Uy 
Conlribuir  <-u7/.  algo 
convalccer  de  la  enfermcd '  d 
convene*:'  rse  dt-  lo  coiUrario 
Gouversar  con  algiino 
convertirseJ  Dios 
con\id;'irse  w  los  trabajos 
coopcrar  a  alguna  c<  sa 
correspond  r  a  lus  benef.cios 

corrcsporaler  ro?;  ius  an/iyx:)s 
cT^cir  en  virtudcs 
creer  algo  pur  1';:  m  lj\it 

cre''rse  dc  aiguna  c6sa 
cucharetear  en  t»t>do 
cuidiir  de  algiHio 


to  intrust  another  with  anything 
to  rely  vpim  any -one 
to  conllne  anyone  /osuch  a  place 
to  he  Goniinned  in  one's  opinion 
to  conform  oneself  to  the  time 
conl'onnable  (o  his  opinion 
to  confrcuit  one  thing  uiih  an- 
other 
to  be  confounded  with  what  one 

sees 
to  I)e  congenial  to  any  one 
to  conjecture  any  thing  iv/ signs 
to    congratulate    oneself     with 

one's  friends 
to  conspire  against  any  one 
to  consecrate  oneself  /o  God 
to  agree  m  any  thing 
to  comfort  oneself  with  one's  re- 
lations 
to  conspire  agaimt  rwiyovhc 
to  appear  ^7/  evidence 
to  consult  something  ii77/rlearn- 

ed  men 
to  coritaniinate  oneself  «•?/,'?  vices 
to  contaminate  oneself  tvuh  he- 
resy 
to  temporize  uiih  anv  one 
to  dispute  Kfiun  such  a  subject 
tt;  h?  sparing  m  words 
to  answ<;r  tu  the  qtiestion 
to  c(,unterpoise  one  thing  with 

an.jtiur 
to  {;nt  this  orcixvj^niiist  that 
f<;  transgress  ai^avisf  the  law 
tv  contribute  with  any  tiling 
to  recover /ioi;  an  illness 
to  be  ciMiviiiced  o/" the  contrary 
to  spe:;k  :<7  7/  any  body 
to  bi>  Cv))ivertcd  to  Gc)d 
to  irake  oi>ef;elf  readv  ^>  work 
to  jL'oope*-ar«  m  any  thing 
to  be  grateful  Jhr  favours  re- 
ceived 
to  correspond  iriih  one's  friends 
to  increase  in  vir.ues 
to  -l)clieve  something  by  faith  i« 

God 
to  be  convinced  "/any  thing 
to  internvjddle  in  every  thing 
JjO  take  C2re  (j/'any  body 


ev  PllEPosiTlo^f«. 


lot 


twmphr  am  algano 
curarse  de  algunacosa 
curtirse  al  ayre 


to  settle  with  any  body 
to  be  cured  o/any  ihmg 
to  tan  ^-^  the  air 


DaT  algo  de  comer 
darse  a  estudiar 
deber  dinero  a  algfuno 
decaer  de  la  autoridad 
decir  algo  a'btro 
declararse  por  tal  partido 

dedicar  tiempo  al  estudio 
deducir  una  cosa  de  otra 
deferir  aotro  dictamen 
defraudar  algnno  de  su  autoridad 
degenerar  de  su  nacimiento 
delatarse  a'Z  juez 
deleytarse  con  la  vista 
deiiber.ir  Jo^-retal  cosa 
depend  ec  de  alguno 
deponer  a  alguno  de  su  empleo 

depositar  algo  en  alguna  parte 
derivir  de  otra  autoridad 

desabrirse  C07i  alguno 
desagradecido  al  benef  icio 
desahogarse  con  alguno 

desavenirse  unos  de  otros 
desayunarse  de  alguua  noticia 
descabezarse  en  alguna  cosa 
descans  -r  de  la  fatiga 
descantillar  de  alguna  cosa 

descargarse  de  la  culpa 
descender  de  buen  linage 
descolg'irse  de  los  montes 
descouiponerse  con  alguno 
descontar  algo  de  alguna  suma 
desdecir  de  su  caracter 
desem  barazarse  de  lo  que  eslorbft 
desenfrenarse  en  vicios 
desertar  del  regimiento 
desesperar  de  la  pretension 
desfalcar  algo  de  alguna  cosa 
desgajarse  de  los  montes 
deshacerse  d  trabajar 
deshacerse  de  algo 


to  give  something  to  eat 
to  give  oneself  to  study 
lo  be  indebted  to  any  ijody 
to  decrease 7"rom  one's  authority 
to  say  any  thing  to  another 
to  declare  oneself  for  such  a 

party 
to  employ  one's  time  in  study 
to  infer  one  thing  from  another 
to  adopt  the  advice  q/" another 
to  defraud  one  ^j/' his  authority 
to  degenerate /rom  one's  birth 
to  accuse  oneself  to  a  judge      ^ 
to  please  oneself  a)i7A  the  sighk 
to.  deliberate  upon  any  thing 
to  depend  upon  any  body 
to  depose  any  oneyr«m  his  em- 
ployment 
to  put  something  in  any  place 
to   derive  authority  from  an- 
other 
to  be  at  variance  with  any  body 
ungrateful  to  benefits 
to  communicate  one's  trouble  to 

another 
to  disagree  unth  others 
to  take  notice  o/any  thing 
to  labour  in  vain 
to  relieve  oneself yrom  fatigue 
to  break  off  the  corner  of  any 

thing 
to  free  oneself  from  the  fault 
to  comey'rom  a  good  family 
to  descend  yVom  the  mountains 
to  disagree  with  another 
to  discount  one  sum//  om  another 
to  deviate/rom  one's  character 
to  get  rid  q/'iumber 
to  abandon  oneself  to  vices 
to  desert /»om  a  regiment 
to  despair  of  one's  pretension 
to  take  away y'roTn  another  thing 
to  fall /rom  the  mountains 
to  work  with  earnestness 
to  get  rid  r^/" something 


U4 


OF  PREPOSITION: 


deshacerse  en  llanto 
dcsterrar  a  alguno  de  su  patrla 

destri^arse  de  enfado 
devolver  la  causa  al  jiiez 

dexar  de  escribir 
despedirse  de  algiino 
despertar  (/f/sutno 
desquiciar  a  alguno  de  su  poder 

destiuar  algo  para  tal  cosa 

desvergonz'irse  con  alguno 
determin^rse  d  partir 
diferir  algo  d  otro  tiempo 

dimanar  de  algunacosa 
digustarse  por  algo 
disponer  de  los  bi<?nes 
dibponerse  d  alguna  cosa 

dispute r^r/t-re  algo 
disentir  de  otro  uictamen 
distinguir  una  cosa  de  ctra 

disuadir  a  alguno  de  alguna  cosa 

distraherse  en  la  conversacion 
divertirse  en  jug'ir 
dividir  alguna  cosa  de  otra 

dolerse  de  \o  mal  hecho 
dotado  da  ciencia 
dudar  de  algo 
disrar  hasta  tal  tiempo 
duro  de  entecdimitnto 


to  cry  bitterly 

to   banish    auy  one   fiom    h.. 

country 
to  consume  oneself  %vith  anger 
to  let  the  cause  devolve  to  the 

judge 
to  leave  ©^writing 
to  take  leave  o/anyone 
to  awake /rom  sleep 
to   deprive  any  one  e/  his  au- 
thority 
to  destine  somethingyor  such  an, 

end 
to  take  liberties  with  another 
to  take  a  resolution  fj/"settingout 
to  defer  any  thing  to  another 

time 
to  originate yvoTn  something 
to  be  disgusted  u-ith  any  thing 
to  dispose  o/' goods 
to     prepare     oneself  far   any 

thing 
to  dispute  on  something 
to  dissent/;  o/n  another's  opinion 
to  disunguish   one   thing /row 

another 
to  dissuade  any  one  from  any 

thing 
to  wander  in  conversation 
to  be  diverted  with  playing 
to  divide  one  thing  from  an- 

other 
to  repent  r/a  bad  action 
endowed  uiLh  learning 
to  doubt  of  any  thing 
to  last  till  such  a  time 
difficult  cf  comprthension 


Echar  algo  por  tierra 

elevarse  a/cielo 
embobarsc  en  algo 
cmbutir  alguna  cosa  en  otra 
empap'trse  en  agua 
emparejar  con  alguno 
cmparentar  con  gente  ilustre 

em  pen  arse  en  algo 
cmpenarse  par  alguao 


to  throw    any    thing    on    the 

ground 
to  raise  oneself  to  the  skies 
to  wonder  at  any  thing 
to  inlay  any  thing  with  another 
to  be  quite  wet 

to  be  equal  with  another  ^ 

to  be  connected  with  iliustrioui   ?] 

families 
to  engage  oneself  in  any  thing 
to  soUcit/jr  any  one 


OF  PREPOSITiONS. 


135 


#Tnple'tr-ie  pii  algo 
eii^imorarse  de  algwna  dama 
encamiuarse  a  aljrCina  parte 
encaramar?e  p()r  la  parted 
encargarse  de  algun  negocio 

encasqnetirse  en  su  opinion 
encendcrse  £v<  ira- 
eiicomend  irse «/  Dios 
enconiirse  ton  algiuio 
enfermar  del  pecho 
enfrascarse  en  Jos  negocios 
cngolfarse  en  cusas  grandes 

enterarse  rfealguna  c6sa 

entrar  en  alguna  parte 
cntremeterse  en  c^  sas  de  otro 
enviar  algo  a  alguno 
equivocarse  en  algo 
escapar  de  la  prlsion 
escondtirse  en  alguna  parte 
escribir  cartas  d  aiguno 
escusarse  de  hacer  algo 

espantdrse  rfealgima  cosa 
estampar  en  pap  el 
estar  a  orden  de  otro 
estar  de  viage 
esiir  pdra  partir 
estrecharse  con  cada  uno 

exceder  en  algo  d  otro 

excluir  algdno  de  alguna  parte 

exim'.r  a  algano  de  algun  em- 

pl^o 
exonerar  a  algi'ino  de  su  emplao 
expeier  a  algnpo  de  casa 
experto  en  las  leyes 
extracr  uaa  cosa  de  otra, 

extraviarse  de  la  carrcra 


to  be  employed  in  any  thing 
to  fall  in  love  with  any  lady 
to  travel  fo  any  part 
to  ascend  by  the  wall 
to  charge  oneself  w/<A  any  busi- 
ness 
to  be  obsiinate  in  one's  opinion 
to  kindle  with  anger 
to  recommend  oneself  to  God 
to  be  enraged  at  any  one 
to  grow  infirm  in  the  breast 
to  be  entangled  in  business 
to  be  immersed  in  things  of  con- 
sequence 
to  be  well  informed   with  any 

thing 
to  enter  into  any  part 
to  meddle  ictth  another's  aS*air5 
to  send  something  to  anyone 
to  equivocate  in  any  thing 
to  escapeyrom  a  prison 
to  hide  oneself  in  any  place 
to  write  letters  to  any  body 
to  excuse  oneself/ro;n  doing  any 

thing 
to  he  terrified  at  any  thing 
to  imprint  o;»  paper 
to  be  under  another's  authority 
to  be  on  a  journey 
to  be  ready  to  set  out 
to  make  oneself  iolimate  with 
$  every  body 

to  excel  any  one  in  any  thing 
to  dismiss   any   one  from  any 

place 
to  exempt  any  one  from  his  ob- 

ligation 
to  dismiss  ortefi-om  his  place 
to  cxj>el  anyoneyJoTj  the  house 
skilled  '7/  the  laws 
to  extract  one  thing  from  an- 
other 
to  deviate/rom  one's  purpmse 


F'lcil  de  digerir 
faltar  ti  la  palabra 
faito  de  din';ro 
I'astidi'irse  de  algo 
fatigarse  en  algo 
favorable  jKiia  todj* 


easy  to  digest 

to  fail  in  one's  pro-fiise 

to  be  in  want  of  iTumev 

to  be  disgusted  with  any  things 

to  be  fatig»aed  /'y  any  thln^ 

favourable^ta  ;Ui 


Hii 


^. 


lae^ 


or  PJRLPOSITIONS. 


favorecerse  tJe  algiiien 
hkr  algo  a  alguiio 
iiel  cull  sus  am  gos 
lixar  e7i  la  pared 
flexible  d  I3  razon 
fiuctuir  c?i  la  duda 
fortificarse  en  aigima  parte 
franque  irse  d  otro 
frisar  \xi\o  con  ptro 

fiu  ra  (if  c:'isa 
fundarse  01  la  raaon 


to  be  helped  by  any  body 

to  trust  any  thii:;g  /•<;  any  one 

taithful  to  bis  friends 

to  fix  any  thing  in  the  wall 

pliant  to  reason 

to  fluctuate  in  doubt 

to  strengthen  oneself  o7z  any  side 

to  open  oneself  to  another 

to  assimilate  one  thing  voUh  aU" 

other 
out  of  the  house 
to  be  founded  in  reason 


G-irar  de  una  parte  a  otra 
girar  por  tal  parte 
gloriarse  ile  algo 
gordo  de  talle 
goziir  de  alguna  c6aa 
grange:'ir  la  vohintadde  otro 
gtiard'irse  de\o  malo 
guareccrse  de  alguna  cosa 
guarecc^rse  en  alguna  parte 
guarnecer  alguna  cosa  cun  otra 

guiarse  por  alguno 
guindarse  por  la.  pared 
guiado  de  alguno 
gustar  de  algo 

H 

Habil  en  la  ciencia 

habilitar  auno  joara  alguna  cosa 

habitar  con  alguno 
habitar  en  tal  parte 
habituarse  «' alguna  cosa 
hablar  de  alguna  cosa 
hacerse  d  todo 
hacer  de  valiente  • 

hacer  por  alguno 
hallar  algo  en  tal  parte 
hartar^e  rfe  comida 
hallarse  en  la  fiesta ' 
hallarse  en  la  ca&a 
henchir  el  cantaro  de  agua 
herlr   a    alguno    en  la   ebtima-i 

cicn 
'  heridp  de  la  injuria 
hermanar  una  con  otra 
hervir  un  pueblo  c/egente 


to  reeI//ow  one  side  to  another 
to  reel  on  such  a  side 
to  boast  of  any  thing 
fat  or  lusty 
to  enjoy  any  thing 
to  gain  the  affection  q/'another 
to  guard  oneself  yro»7i  evil 
to  take  Sili el ter /rem  any  thing 
to  take  shelter  in  any  place 
to  garnish  one  thing  with  an- 
other 
to  guide  oneself  hy  any  one 
to  descend  by  the  wall 
guided  by  any  one 
to  taste  of  any  thing 


,  able  in  knowledge 
to   enable    any  body  for  any 

thing 
to  dwell  luith  any  one 
to  dwell  in  such  a  place 
to  accustom  oneself  to  something 
to  speak  (fany  thing 
to  be  ready  /or  any  thing 
to  pretend  lo  courage 
to  do  for  any  one 
to  find  any  thing  in  such  a  place 
to  gorge  oneself  with  food 
to  be  present  at  the  feast 
to  be  ///  the  house 
to  fill  the  pitcher  ivith  water 
to  hurt  any  one  in  his  reputation 

hurt  by  injury 

to  agree  one  thmgwith  another 

to  be  very  populous 


OP  FREFOSITlOTTf- 


m 


hocicir  en  tierra 
holgarse  con  algo  * 
huir  de  alguno 
humanarse  a'alguna  c6s» 

humillarse  a  alguno 
iuindir  algo  en  el  agua 


to  stumble  a/  any  inconvenience 

to  rejoice  at  any  thing 

to  Ay  from  any  body 

to   familiarize  oneself    to  any 

thing 
to  humble  oneself  I-efnre  any  one 
to    plunge  any  thing  into  the 

water 


Idoneo  para  todo 

igual  con  otro 

igualar  una  cosa  con  otra 

imbuira  algono  en  alguna  crsa 

iiupeler  algfino  a  alguna  cosa 

jmpelido  de  la  neccsid'id 

impenetrable  a  los  mas  perspL- 

caces 
impetr.'ir  algo  de  alguno 
implic  irse  en  algo 
importunado  de  rupgos 
impriniir  algo  en  el  animo 
imputur  la  culpa  a  otro 
incansAble  en  los  trabajos 
inapeable  de  su  opinioa 
inces.inie  en  sus  tarcas 
iiicidr  en  culpa 
incitar  aotro- 
incluir  eii  el  numero 
inaimpatible  con  el  mando- 
incoiTjprchensible  d  los  honvbre* 
ii)coustantee»ralg'ji>a  c('sa 
inconsiante  en  su  proceder  • 
incorporar  una  ct  sa  con  otra 

iacreible  a  mucho* 
iiideciso  en  resolver 
indignarse  contra  algo 
indihpont  r  a  uno  con  otro 
inducir  a  uno  u  pecar 
)nd»ctlvo  deerrbr 
infecto  dehereg'^z 
jnficionado  de  viruelas 
rnflexlble  a  la  razon 
iufluir  en  alguna  cosa. 

ingrato  a  los  favores 
inhabil  julra.  el  empleo 
insensible  d  las  injurias 
inseparable  de  la  virtud 
insertar  algo  en  alguna  cosa 
insipido  al  gusto 


^tfor  aay  thing 
equal  to  another 
to  equal  one  thing  icitTi  another 
to  instruct  any  one  in  uny  thing 
to  compel  any  one  to  any  thing 
impelled  L-y  necessity 
impenetrable  to  the  most  pene- 
trating 
to  obtain  any  thing  'i/any  one 
to  intermeddle  in  any  thing 
imporcuned  vrith  entreaties 
to  imprint  anything  on  the  mind 
to  unputs  the  fauh  to  another 
unwearied  tinth  labours 
obstinare  i)i  his  opinion 
indefatigable  in  his  labours 
to  f-'.U  into  a  fault 
to  incite  any  one  to  any  thing' 
to  iHclude  in  the  numtier 
incompatible  with  the  command 
incomprehensible  to  men 
unsettle!  in  any  thing 
inconstant  in  his  proceedings 
to  incorporate  one  thing  uiMt 

another 
incredible  to  many 
undecided  i«  resolving 
lobeaui]jry  i:t  something 
to  indispose  one  with  another 
to  induce  one  to  sin 
leading  to  error 
infected  icith  heresy 
infected  uiih  the  small-pox 
inflexible  /«  reason 
to  have  an  influence  over  any 
«    thing 

ungrateful /or  favours 
unlitybr  the  employment 
insensible  to  injuries 
inseparable/)  (y-71  virtue 
to  ingraft  one  thing  on  another 
insipid  to  the  taste 


13a 


OF  PREPOSITIONS. 


in«istir  en  alguna  cosa 
iiiteresarse  en  alguna  cosa 
interpoiar  unas  cosas  con  otras 

Interponerse  con  alguno 
interveair  en  las  ccsas 
introducirse  con  los  que  mandan 

invadido  por  los  contrarios 
invertir  dlnero  en  otro  u*o 
ir  de  Madrid  hdcia  Cadiz 

ir  con/ra  alga  no 
\r  por  pan 
ir  por  el  camino 
ir  tras  de  alguno 

J 

Jactarse  de  alguna  cosa 
jugar  d  tal  jutgo 
jugar  ima  cosa  con  otra 
justificcirse  de  algitna  cosa 
juntar  una  cosa  ion  otra 
juzgar  de  alguna  cosa 


to  insist  upon  any  thing 

to  interest  oneself  in  any  thing 

to  mingle  one  thing  with  an- 
other 

to  interfere  with  any  one 

to  interpose  h&tweeii  things 

to  introduce  oneself  to  the  com- 
manders 

invaded  by  the  enemies 

to  convert  money  to  another  use 

to  go  from  Madrid  towards  Ca- 
diz 

to  go  against  any  one 

to  go  for  bread 

to  go  tn  the  way 

to  go  behind  another 


to  boast  q/any  thing 

to  play  at  such  a-game 

to  bet  one  thing  u'i//i  another 

to  justify  oneself  o/any  thing 

to  join  one  thing  to  another 

to  judge  of^ny  thing 


l.adeat  una  ccsa  d  tal  parte 
lamentarse  de  algo 
lanzar  algo  a  otra  parte 

lastimarse  de  alguno 

leer  los  pensamientos  de  otro 

lexos  de  tierra 

libertar  a  alguno  de!  peligro 

lidiar  cov  alguno 

lleg'ir  d  puerto 

llevar^lgo  d  alguna  parte 

llevarse  de  algvina  pasion 

luchar  con  alguno 

ludir  una  cosa  con  otra 

M 

Malqultarse  eon  alguno 
mancomunar&e  con  otros 
mantener  conversacion  a  alguno 

maquinar  co7itra  alguno 
maravillarse  rfealgo 
mat  arse  d  trabajar 
matizar  con  colore^ 
medikr por  alguno 


to  lay  any  tiling  on  such  a  side 

to  lament  o/" any  thing 

to  push    any  thing  to  another 

place 
to  take  pity  on  any  one 
to  read  tlie  thoughts  '{fzny  one 
iiir  from  land 

to  deliver  any  one  Jrovi  danger 
to  quarrel  wiik  another 
to  arrive  at  a  port 
to  carry  any  thing  to  any  place 
to  be  carried  away  by  passion 
to  wrestle  with  another 
to  rub  one  thing  a^«i?is/ another 


to  break  with  another 

to  herd  with  others 

to  maintain  conversation  with 

another 
to  machinate  agahisl  any  one 
to  wonder  at  any  thing 
to  kill  oneself  tvith  labour 
to  shade  with  colours 
to  mediate yor  any  one 


OF  PREPOSITIONS. 


139 


medlrse  en  las  palabras 
mejorar  la  for:una  de  alguno 

merecer  de  aiguno 
meturarse  e;i  las  acciones 
meter  dinero  eu  el  cofre 
mirar  de  lejos 
mirar  pot  alg^no 
niofiirse  de  alguno 
molerse  a  trabajar 
molestir  a  alguno  con  visitas 
morirse  de  frio 
motivar  a  alguno  con  razones 
moverse  de  una  parte  a  otra 

mudar  de  casa 


to  be  moderate  in  words 
to  increase  the  fortune  of  an- 
other 
to  merit  from  another 
to  be  cautious  in  one's  actions 
to  put  money  into  the  chest 
to  look  at  a  distance 
to  look  for  any  one 
to  make  game  of  any  one 
to  fatigue  oneself  ivith  working 
to  molest  any  one  icith  visits 
to  be  starvea  tcith  cold 
to  persuade  any  one  hy  reasons 
to  move  from  one  side  to  an- 
other 
to  remove  from  one  house  to  an- 
other 


N 
Nacer  de  alguna  parte 
nacer  con  foituna 
nacer  pcira  el  trabajo 
laadar  en.  el  rio 
navegar  a.  Indias 
negi'irse  a  la  comunicacion 
nimio  e?i  el  proceder 
niugiino  de  los  presentes 
nivelirse  a  lo  justo 
nombrar  a  alguno />ara  un  em- 

pleo 
notificar  alguna  cosii  d  alguno 


to  come  from  any  part 
to  be  born  lucky 
to  be  born  lo  labour 
to  swim  i/i  the  river 
to  sail  to  the  Indies 
to  deny  oneself  to  company 
over  nice  in  actions 
none  of  those  who  are  present- 
to  direct  oneself  by  justice 
to  nominate  one  to  an  employ- 
ment 
to  notify  any  thing  to  any  one 


Obligar  d  alguaa  cosa 
obstiiiarse  e/i  alguna  cosa 
obteut-r  alguna  gn'icia  dc  alguno 
ocultar  algo  de  alguno 

ocuparse  en  estudiar 
ofenderse  de  algo 
ofrecer  algo  a  alguno 
ofrecerse  u  los  peiigros 
oler  algo  d  otra  cosa 

olvidarse  de  lo  pasado 
opinir  sobre  alguna  cosa 
oponerse  d  una  empresa 
oprimir  a  otro  con  el  poder 
optar  a  los  empleos 
qrdenarse  de  sacerdote. 


to  oblige  any  one  to  any  thing 
to  be  obstinate  in  any  thing 
to  obtain  a  favouryr«m  any  one 
to  conceal  any  thing  from  any 

one 
to  be  occupied  in  study 
to  be  offended  at  any  thing 
to  offer  any  thing  to  any  one 
to  offer  oneself  to  danger 
to  have  the  smell  of  a  strange 

thing 
to  be  forgetful  of  what  is  past 
to  hold  an  opinion  on  any  thing 
to  oppose  to  an  undertaking 
to  oppres'^  another  by  power 
to  be  a  candidate 
to  be  ordained  into  the  priest- 
hood 


140 


OF  PREPOSITIONS. 


orillar  d  algana  parte 


to  draw  lo  any  side 


Pagar  con  palabras 
pag-ar  e?i  dizaero 
pagarse  de  buenas  razoncs 
paladear.se  co/i  alguna  cosa 

paliar  algo  coji  otra  ctsa 
pahne'tr  a  alguno 
parar  en  casa 
parar  d  !a  puerta 
pararse  con  alguno 
parco  rn  lacomida 
parecer  ct  alguna  parte 
partir  J,  or  para,  Francia 
partirse  de  Espana 
partir  cntre  los  amigos 
pasar  de  Sevilla 
pasar  a  Madrid 
pasearse  coti  otro 
pecar  de  necio 
pedir  algo  d  alguno 
pegar  contra  la  pared 
perecer  de  hambre 
pennanecer  en  alguna  parte 
pertrech:  rsc:  dt;  lo  necesario 

piar/;or  algo. 
plap:r'irse  de  gr'mos 
poblar  en  buen  puesto- 
ponerse  d  escrib^r 
portarse  con  decencia 
pose'jdo  de  tern  or 
postr  irse  ejt,  cama 
precedido-f/e  alguno 
preferir  a  otro 
preocuparse  de  algo 
prescind ir  de^\go 
presidir  oi  algua  tribunal 
presumir  de  doc  to 
prevenir  algo  a  alguno 

privar  con  alguno 
proceder  contra  alguno 
procurar  por  alguno 
proejar  contra  las  olas 
proporcionarse /^ara  algo 

prorumpir  en  lagrimas 
provenir  de  otra  fosa 


to  pay  with  words 

to  pay  ill  cash , 

to  be  satisfied  wiih  good  reasons 

to  please  one's  palate  u-ith  any 
thing 

topalliate  one  thing  2(u7/i  another 

to  shake  hands  Kith  any  body 

to  stay  at  home 

to  stop  at  the  door 

to  make  a  stay  vjith  another 

spariag  in  victuals 

to  appear  in  any  place 

to  set  oiY  f'>r  France 

to  set  ofE  from  Spain 

to  share  [•pfivcen  friends 

to  go  further  //wJi  Seville 

to  go  to  Madrid 

to  walk  ivith  another 

to  sin  through  ignorance 

to  ask  something/row  antyone 

to  beat  against  the  wall 

to  perish  with  hunger 

to  remain  in  any  place 

to  be   furnished    unih   what  i* 
necessary 

to  long/fjr  any  thing 

to  be  plagued  wilk  pimples 

to  settle  7n  a  good  situation 

to  prepare  oneself  for  writing 

to  conduct  oneself  iviih  decency 

possessed  icith  fear 

to  be  confined  to  one's  bed 

preceded  Inj  any  one 

to  prefer  to  another 

to  bepreoccupiedu;i//i  any  thing; 

to  cut  o(F  from  any  thing 

to  preside  in  any  tribunal 

to  set  up/(;r  a  learned  man 

to  prepare  something  for   any 

one 
to  be  intimate  icith  any  one 
to  proceed  against  any  one 
to  procure  for  any  one 
to  row  ai^ainst  the  waves 
to   proportion   oneself   to   any- 
thing 
to  burst  into  tears 
to  proceed  from  another  cause 


OP  PRLPOSITIONS. 


141 


proximo  a  monr 

pujar  contra  la  dificultad 

purgar  dt  sospecha 


at  the  point  of  death. 

to  strive  a^aimt  difHcuUy 

to  clear /ro»i  suspicion 


Quadrar  algiina  cosa  can  otra 

qual  de.  los  dos 

tjuebrantar  las  piernasa  alguno 

tjuebrantarse  dt  dolor 

quebrar  el  corazon  a  alguno 

ijuedar  pox  andar 

quedarse  en  casa 

quedirse  en  el  s>erm6n 

quejarse  de  alguno 

quemarse  de  alguna  palabra 

quemarse  per  alguna  cosa 

querellarse  de  alguno 

querido  de  todos 

quien  cfeellos 

quiur  algo  a  alguno 

quitar  alguna  cosa   de  alguna 

parte 
quitarse  c&quimera» 


to  fit  one  thing  to  another 

which  of  the  two 

to  break  the  legs  of  another 

to  be  worn  out  whh  grief 

to  break  the  heart  ff  any  one 

to  have  b^  walk  further 

to  stay  al  home 

to  stop  short  hi  a  discourse 

to  complain  of  any  one 

to  be  ofFeixIcd  vcilh  any  word 

to  heat  oneself  for  any  thing 

to  complain  of  any  one 

beloved  by  every  body 

which  of  them, 

to  take  any  thingy)om any  one 

to  take  any  thing// om any  place 

to  free  oneself  y)owchiinersi% 


Rablar  dt  hambre 
radlcarse  en  la  virtud 
ra^r  alguna  cosa  de  otra 
rayar  en  virtud 
razonar  con  alguno 
rebaxar  una  cantidad  de  otra 
recaer  e?*  la  enfermedad 
f  ecatarse  de  alguno 
recibir  a  alguno  en:  $u  casa 

reclinarse  ^ohrt  algo 

recluir  aalguno  e.u  algiina  parte 

recobrarse  de  la  enfermedad, 

recompensar  agravios.  can  bene- 

ficios 
reconciliarse  con  los  enemigcs 

reducir  algo  J  la  mitad 
remplazar  a  alguno  en  su  empleo 

referirse  a  alguna  cosa 
reglirse  d  lo  justo 

reirse  de.  otro 
remirarsij  en  alguQa  c6.3ji 


to  rage  with  hun^r 

to  be  rooted  in  virtue 

to  rasp  one  thing yrom  another 

to  excel  in  virtue 

to  reason  mith  any  one 

to  abate  one  sumyromanothfiO 

to  relapse  in  sickness. 

to  be  cautious  of  any  one 

to  receive   any  one  into  one'^ 
house 

to  lean  upon  any  thing 

to  shut  any  one  up  in  any  place 

to  recover  oneself  from  an  ill- 
ness 

to  reward  ingratitude  vcilh.  be^ 
nefits 

to  be  reconciled  with  the  ene- 
mies r 

to  reduce  any  thin^  to,  the  half 

to  replace  any  one  in  his  em- 
ployment 

to  nefer  oneself  to  any  thing 

to  regulate  oneself  to  what  is 
right 

to  make  a  jest  of  another 

to  examine  oneself  in  any  thing 


142 


OF  PREPOSITIONS. 


rendirse  </la  razon 
repartir  algo  entre  muchos 
resbalarse  de  las  manos 
resid;r  en  pobr  do 
resolverse  J  alguna  cCsz 
respondt  r  d  la  pregunta 
restar  una  cantidad  de  otra 

retirarse  de  alguna  parte 
restituirse  u  su  patria 
retroceder  hdda  tal  parte 
reventar  de  risa 
revestirse  de  autoridad 
revolcarse  en  los  vicios 
revolver  al  enemigo 
robar  algo  d  algdno 
rogar  alguna  cusa  a  alguno 
romper  por  alguna  parte 
rozi'irse  en  la  conversacion 
roz?;irse  una  cosa  co/i  otra 


to  yield  to  reason 
to  divide  zny  thing (•etween  marry 
to  slip  awayfrom  the  hands 
to  dwell  in  a  town 
to  resolve  tipofi  any  thing 
to  answer  (o  a  question 
to  subtract  one  sum  J) am  an- 
other 
to  retire  oneself /r«n?  any  place 
to  return  lo  one's  country 
to  recede  towa-ds  such  a  place 
to  burst  loith  laughter 
to  be  invested  with  authority 
to  walldw  in  vices 
to  return  to  the  enemy 
to  take  any  thing /row  any  one 
to  ask  any  thing  <>f  any  one 
to  break  in  any  place 
to  stammer  in  conversation 
to  rub  one  thing  willi  another 


Saber  de  memoria 
saciiralgo  de  algi'ina  parte 
sacrificar  algo  a  DlCa 
sacrificarse  ;»or  alguno 
salir  d  alguna  parte 
salir  de  algim  peligro 
saltar  del  su^lo 
salvar  a  alguno  del  peligro 
san.ir  de  la  enfem-edad 
satisfac^r  por  la  injuria 

segregar   a   alguno    de  alguna 

parte 
seguirse  una  cosa  rfeotra 
semejar  una  ccsa  a  otra 
sentarse  a  la  mesa 
sentenciar  a  1ms  galeras 
scHtirse  de  algo 
separar  una  cjsa  de  otra 

servirse  de  alguna  cwsa 
eiucerar.se  de  algo 
sitiado  rfeeneiuigos 
sjtu-irse  en  alguna  parte 
subreilcvur  los  trabajos  con  pa- 

cjencia 
sohresaiir  en  lucimienta 
sojuzgado  drenem^igo* 
soipetcrse  a  alguna 


to  know  atiy  thing  ly  heart 
to  take  any  thing/ro7?t  any  place 
to  sacrifice  any  thing  to  God 
to  sacrifice  oneself /or  any  one 
to  go  out  to  any  place 
to  escape  from  danger 
to  leap  from  the  ground 
to  save  any  one  f'orn  danger 
to  cure  0/ a  disease 
to  make  satisfaction  for  an  in- 
jury 
to  separate  any  one  from  any 

&ide 
one  thing  to  foHow/rem  another 
to  liken  one  thing  to  another 
to  sit  down  fo  table 
to  condemn  lo  the  galleys 
to  be  sensible  of  any  thing 
to  separate  one  thing  fiam  an^ 

other 
to  make  use  of  any  thing 
to  clear  oneself //v>m  any  thing 
besieged  by  enemies 
to  station  oneself  in  any  place 
to   undergo  labours   unih  pa.- 

tience  . 

to  surpass  in  splendour 
subdued  l-y  enemies 
to  subaxit  oivciclf  (I!  any  one 


OF  fRfiPOSITIONS. 


143^ 


soni\r  alguna  c<lsa  en  tal  parte 
sorprehendtT  a  algino  con  al- 
guna cosa 
sos[)ech  If  algo  de  alguno 
subir  a  alguna  parte 
subsistir  en  el  dictainen 
subsdtuir  par  alguno 
^ubitraherse  de  la  obedieucia 
^uceder  a  alguno  e.'t  su  empleo 

ifrir  los  trabajos  con  paciencia 
jujetarse  a  alguno 
sumirse  e-i  alguna  parte 
sumiao  a  la  volant  ad  de  otro 
supeditado  de  los  contrarios 
superior  en  luces 
suplic'ir  de  Id  seutencia 
surgi'r  la  nave  en  el  puerto 
surtjr  de  viveres 
5.usper.60  en  el  ayre 
suspirar  por  el  mando 

iscentarse  de  esperanzas 


to  report  anything  in  such  a  place 
to  surprise  any  one  with   any- 
thing 
to  suspect  any  one  ©/"any  thing 
to  ascend  to  any  place 
to  be  positive  in  an  opinion 
to  substitute  y^r  another 
to  withdrawyrrm/ subordination 
to  succeed  any  one  2?i  his  ein- 

pluvment 
to  suffer  troubles  with  patience 
to  subject  oneself  to  any  one 
to  sink  any  thing  in  any  place 
submissive  to  the  will  o/'another 
suppressed  by  the  enemies 
of  a  greater  talent 
to  petition  agai7isl  the  sentence 
to  come  to  anchor  iu  any  port 
to  supply  urith  victuals 
suspended  in  the  air 
to  aspire  aper  command 
to  sustain  oneself  wUu  hopes  - 


Tachar  a  alguno  rfeligero  * 
lemblar  de  frio 
temer'  so  de  la  muerte 
temible  d  los  contrarios 
templiirsc  en  comer 
tener  a  uno  p<n-  otro 
tenerse  en  pie 
tvnir  de  azi';l 
tirar  a  tal  parte 
tiritar  dt  !'r  c 
xitubear  en  alguna  cosa 
tocar  en  alguna  ccsa 
toe  do  de  lv;Co 
torn  a  r  algo  con  las  manos 
torcido  de  cuerpo 
trabajur  en  algiuia  c6sa 
trab  .r  una  cusa  con  otra 
•    ibucArse  f?tlas  palabras 
.  r  algo  de  alguna  parte 

'.■^ferlr  algo  en  alguna  per- 

■  ua 

isfigurarse  en  otra  c6sa 

isformir  una  cusa  en  otra 

isiltir/jwr  alguna  parte 


to  accuse  one  uf  lncon8tan<:y 

to  tremble  uiih  cold 

fearful  of  death 

dreadful  l<>  his  enemies 

to  be  moderate  in  eating 

to  take  one/or  the  other 

to  keep  on  foot 

to  dye  in  blue 

to  draw  on  such  a  side 

to  chill  with  cold 

to  stagger  in  any  thing 

to  touch  vpnn  any  thing 

touched  viih  madness 

to  take  any  th'mg  wilh  the  hands 

deformed  o/'  body 

to  labour  in  any  thing 

to  join  one  thing  wifK  another 

to  mistake  tn  oue's  words 

to  bring  any  thing  from  any 
place 

to  transfer  any  thing  to  any  per- 
son 

to  tranjfigure  oneself  into  an- 
other thing 

to  transform  one  thing  into  aa- 
other 

to  pass  l-y  any  place 


H4 


t)F  PREPOSITIONS. 


transpirar  pnr  tcdas  partes 
traspasar  aig'una  c6sa  d  alguno 
tratar  co7i  alguno 
tratar  de  algiuia  cc  sa 
travesear  co« alguno 

triunfiir  de  !os  enemigos 
trocar  una  cosa  con  otra 
tropezar  ewalguna  c6sa 

U 
Ultimo  entre  todos 
tiniformar  una  cosa  con  otra 

unir  una  cosa  d  otra 
uno  de  entre  muchos 
tisar  de  las  arm  as 
util  para  tal  cosa 
utilizarse  con  algiina  cosa 


to  transpire  oji  every  side 

to  transfer  something  to  anc 

to  treat  ivith  any  one 

to  treat  of  any  thing 

to  behave  improperly    touu.  < 

another 
to  triumph  over  the  enemies 
to  change  one  th'mgfor  anothi 
to  stumble  on  any  thing 


the  last  of  all 

to  make  one  thing  unifor 

another 
to  unite  one  thing  with  anoth< 
one  anvmgst  many 
to  make  use  of  arms 
useful  /or  such  a  thing 
to  make  advantage  of  any  &'- 


Vacfiir  d  los  trabajos 
vaciarse  de  alguna  ciisa 
vacilar  e/i  la  conversaciun 
vagar  par  el  mundo 
valerse  de  alguno 
valuar  algo  a  tal  prr  cio 
vanagloriarse  de  alguna  cosa 

veliir  sol-re  alguna  cosa 
vencerse  d  alguna  c-'-sa 
vengarse  de  algdno 
venir  de  alguna  parte 
venir  con  alguno 
vestirse  d  la  moda 
vestirse  rfes^da 
vigilar  sdl-fe  los  subditos 
violentarse  en  alguna  cosa 
visible  para  todos 
vivir  fy??.  alguno 
vivir  de  su  of  icio 
vivir  en  tal  pane 
volar  al  cieio 
volar  por  el  ayre 
volver  de  tal  parte 
volver  jsor  la  verdad 
votar  era  el  pleyto 

votar  por  alguno 


to  have  leisure yrom  work 
to  be  emptied /row?  any  thing 
to  r/ander  in  conversation 
to  wander  through  the  v^rorl 
to  make  use  of  any  one 
to  value  anything  al  such  a  pri( 
to  be  p«fFed  up  with  pride  / 

any  thing 
to  watch  over  any  thing 
to  subdue  oneself  in  any  thmj 
to  revenge  oneself  of  any  on< 
to  corney^wn  any  place 
to  come  uilh  another 
to  dress  oneself  after  the  fa^ 
to  be  clothed  in  silk 
to  watch  ( u'T  the  subjects 
:o  be  violent  in  any  thing 
visible  to  all 
to  live  icith  any  one 
to  live  by  one's  employment 
to  Vive  in  such  a  place 
to  fly  to  heaven 
to  fly  in  the  air 
to  returnyrom  such  a  place 
to  be  a  defender  <f  the  truth 
to  give  oue's  opinion  about  th 

process 
to  vote  for  any  one 


OF  COT^JUNCTIONS.                                    14«6 

z 

Zalnillirse  r7i  el  agua  to  plunge  info  the  water 

zafarse  de  alg^uno  ^        to  jivoid  any  one 

zanibiicarse  en  alguna  parte  to  hide  oneself  in  any  place 

zampuzarse  ett  el  agua  to  dive  into  the  water 

zapatearse  ron  algi'ino  to  make  a  noise  uitk  another 

zozobrar  en  la  tormenta  to  be  afflicted  uith  the  storm. 


OF  CONJUNCTIONS. 

Conjunctions  are  indeclinable  words  used  in  a  sentence 
to  join  together  the  different  parts  of  speech,  as 

Halla  puco  y  pimsa  bien,  si  deseas  ser  consider ddo, 
como  hombre  de  juicio. 

Speak  little  and  think  much,  if  thou  dost  wish  to  be 
looked  upon  as  a  man  of  sense. 

In  this  sentence  y,  si,  and  como  are  three  conjunctions, 
which  show  the  dependfence  of  the  words  which  com- 
pose it. 

Conjunctions  are  simple  or  compound :  the  simple 
consist  of  one  word,  as  y,  e,  6,  u,  tan,  nit  &^c.j  the 
compound  are  formed  of  two  or  more  words,  such  as 
para  rjue,  de  modo  que,  por  quanto,  Sec.  Both  simple 
and  compound  may  be  divided  into  ten  different  classes, 
called 

1 .  Copulative.    As  y,  e,  and  j  como,  as ;  de  suerte  que, 

so  that,  &c. 

2.  Disjunctive.    As  <5,  z/,  or  j  sino,  else  j  ni,  neither,  &c. 

3.  Adversative.    As  no  obstante  que,  nevertheless,  &c. 

4.  Conditional.    As  si,  if;  con  tal  que,  provided  that,  &c. 

5.  Concessive.     As  sea  o^i, granted  j  en  efecto,  really, 8cc. 

6.  Comparative.  As  como  tambien,  as  well  as,  &c. 

7.  Causal,  As  por  que,  because,  &:c. 

8.  Interrogative.  As  quando?  when?  porque?  why?  &c, 

9.  Continuative,  As  adenids,  moreover;  aunque,  yet,&c. 
10.  Concluding.   As  pues,  therefore  j  asi,  thus,  &o. 


146 


O*'  CONJUNCTIONS. 


The  above  explanation  being  loo  concise  for  many  be- 
ginners, J  will  dispose  the  conjunctions  in  three  series. 
The  ^fiist  contains  tl>e  conjunctions  which  govern  the  in- 
finitive mood  J  the  second,  those  that  govern  the  sub- 
junctive J  and  the  third  comprehends  some  others,  &:c. 


1.     Conjunctions  which  govern  the  hfmlive. 


j^fin  de 
ti  meiios  de 
antes  de 
eii  Ivgur,  de 
lejos  de 


in  order  to 
unless 
before 
instciid  of 
far  from 


pnrfaUa  de 
hasta 
antes  de 
par  tern  or  de 


for  want  of 
till 

rather  than 
for  fear  of. 


2.     Conjunctions  governing  the  suljunctive. 


/ifnique 

a  mams  que 

antes  qve 

en  cd.so  que 

lien  qxie 

por  temSr  que 

pdra  que 

siiptiesto  que 

tomoque 

hasta  que 

por  lo  que 


that 

unless 

before  that 

in  case  that 

though 

for  fear 

lest 

if 

though 

till 

as  for 


7/0  nhlantc  qtie    for  all  that 
not  that 
suppose  that 

i  provided 

though 
without  that 
whether 
snpijose  that 
i  pJcguea  Dtos  qneGod  grant  that 
porque  wliy  that. 


vn  que 
j  puesio  que 
ton  (ondicion 

que 
nvnqiie 
sin  que 
sea  que 
snpucstn  que 


3.     Conjunctions  which  govern  neither  the  infinitive  nor 
the  suhjunctive. 


Porque 
asi 

asi que 

en  verdnd^  or 
de  v6ras 

en  (fee  to 
enjin 
tiespues 
despues  que 
a  Lo  wenos 
asi,  ta^hien 
tamhien  como 
Ui/sfo  que 
adtmds 
tanto  que 


because 

thus 

as 

indeed 

and 

indeed 

in  short 

afterwards 

whereas 

at  least 

also 

as  well  as 

as  soon  as 

moreover 

as  much 


entanto  que 
porque 
por  csto 
como 
mas 

por quanta 
de  mail  era  que 
desde  que 
mas 
pue% 
segini 
si 

si  lien 

sinofuera  que 
si  no 
I  al  imtante  que 


however 

for 

therefore 

as 

besides 

whereas 

whereas 

since 

moreover 

then 

according  as 

so  that 

except  that 

else 

as  so£>n  as 


OF    INTERJECTIONS. 


147 


u;.zun  ijue 

according  as 

'  710  oLstuitte  que 

however 

ihjr  tul'j/nes 

then 

\  adeiiuis 

moreover 

p^ir  ((Uc 

why 

>  peru 

but 

no  hbsteCiite 

however 

\  sin  cmlarg:o 

without  doubt 

dtsila 

•    tlieri 

!  con  tbdo  eso 

nevertheless 

pues  (jue 

since 

\  "i 

nor 

quanda 

wiien 

1  wo  mas 

neither 

hihre  que 

whereupon 

1  J,  « 

or 

CilreLanto 

%v!i;lit 

'  mientras    . 

v/hile 

aurujue 

although 

1  no  que 

n- 1  that 

sobre  todo 

especially 

:  hasta 

till. 

tanlo  que 

as  long  as 

J 

Ot'servation. 
Ohserve,  that  many  adverbs  become  prepositions  when 
they  govern  a  tiouii,  a  pfoiioiin,  or  a  verb;  a«:  v.i'i/a 
vmd,  tUknU  (kitlvurb)  j  vUija  vmd.  dtilanid  d^  mi  (prejw 
lition).  Seme  pvepositlona  in  tbeir  turn  bee©t«^  con- 
junctions, when  they  are  used  to  join  different  partsof 
speech,  as  hace  vmd.  eso  por  vii  (preposition)}  Iq  hari 
para  tomplacer  a  vmd.  (conjunction}. 


OF  INTERJECTIONS. 

Interjections  are  indeclinable  words  used  to  express 
the  different  affectiofis  of  the  mind,  either  of  joy,  gritf, 
fear,  aversion,  derision,  surprise,  &c. 

1.  Of  joy,  as  bravo!  inuy  Lien!  very  well  !  ^c. 

2.  OJ^  grief,  as  ay  !  alas  !   (jue  lastvra  !  ha  !  &c. 

3.  Ofjear,  as  O!  ay!  ha!  ak  !  ha!   &c. 

4.  Of  aversion,  as  f^ue  ver^uenxa  /  fy  upon  you  !   &c. 


Of  derision,  as  oh  !  ho!  porqueria!  pshaw!  &c. 

Of  surprise,  as  vdigame  Dios  !  bless  me  !  &C. 

Of   encouragement,    as   alegre !    cheer  up  1    vumos  I 

come  on  !  &c. 
Of  slopping,  as  hola  !  hold  !    poco  a  poco  !  gently ! 

de^pdcio  !  softly  !  itc. 


o2 


UH 


PART  II L 


SYNTAX, 


OYNTAX  is  the  regular  construction  of  the  different  parts 
©f  speech  according  to  the  rules  of  grammar  and  the 
genius  of  a  language. 

Construction  supposes  three  things  in  every  tongue : 
the  UNION  of  words,  their  concord,  and  disfosition. 
These  objects  are  carefully  explained  in  the  following 
rules,  which  point  out  the  dliference  in  each  language 
=\vith  accuracy  and  precision, 

Syiiiax  is  here  divided  into  twenty  cbiiptev*,  somtt  of 
which  are  subdivided  into  sectiong. 


Chapter  I.* 
Use  of  the  articles. 

Rule  1.     Uno,  una,  a,  an. 

The  indefinite  article  uno,  masc.  una,  fem.  (in  English 
a  or  an),  serves,  in  both  languages,  to  express  a  substan- 
tive singular  in  an  indeterminate  manner.     Example: 

Un  homhre,  a  man;  una  muger,  a  woman ;  un  arnigo^ 
a  friend  ;  una  casa,  a  house. 

La  Inglaterra  es  un  pais fer til; — un  homhre  sdlio.    - 

England  is  a  fruitful  country  j — a  wise  man. 

*  The  learner  must  not  begin  the  second  chapter  of  syntax  ti^i 
he  undex-stand*  the  rules  of  the  first;  npr  the  third  before  he 
knows  the  second  ;  and  sp  on  for  all  the  others.  It  would  be  pro- 
per for  him  to  repeat  at  least  puce  a  \Y?ek  the  principal  rule* 
which  Iufi  has  ;iheady  learnt,  lest  he  tliuyld  forget  tUem. 


SYNTAX    OF    THE    ARTICLES.  I.49 

Rule  2.     El,  lo,  la,,  los,  las,,  the. 

The  definite  article  el,  masc.  lo,  fern,  lo,  neut.  Ics, 
riiasc.  plar.  las,  fern.  plur.  (in  English,  the,)  is  used,  in 
both  languages,  before  a  substantive  taken  in  a  particu- 
lar and  specified' sense ;  that  is,  before  a  noun  which  de- 
note:* an  individual  distinction.     Example  : 

La  cdsa  de  mi  padre,  the  house  of  my  father  j — el  lllro 
(jue  tengo,  the  book  which  I  have. 

Los  homlres  que  vmd.  ha  enviudo  a  hfdlrica  han  in* 
sultado  a  las  mugcres  (jue  estaban  trahajando. 

The  men  you  have  sent  to  the  manufactory  have  in- 
sulted the  women  that  were  working. 

Rule  3.  A  or  an,  translated,  by  el,  lo,  la,  los,  las. 
The  English  make  use  of  the  indofinite  article  a  or  an 
before  nouns  oi measure,  weight,  and  number,  when  they 
want  to  express  how  much  a  thing  is  worth  or  sold  for; 
the  Spanish,  on  the  contrary,  use  the  definite  article  el, 
lo,  la,  los,  las,  in  such  cases. 
Measure.    Este  encaxe  vale  un  escudo  la  vara. 

Tills  lace  is  worth  a  crown  a  yard. 

El  carbon  cuesta  dos  chelines  hi  fanega. 

Coals  cost  two  shillings  a  bushel. 
Weight.      La  mantcca  se  vende  d  diez  pcniques  la  libra. 

Butter  is  sold  for  ten  pence  a  pound. 
Number.     Los  hutvos  valcn  quince  peniquts  la  doccna. 

Eggs  are  worth  fifteen  pence  a  dozen. 

si:ciioN   II. 

Article  used  in  Spanish  and  not  in  English. 

Rule  4.     El,  lo,  la,  not  the. 

The  definite  article  el,  la,  lo9,  lus,  is  used  in  Spanish, 

and  not  in  English,  before  all  substantives  taken  in  the 

whole  extent  of  their  signification,.    Example  : 

o  3 


150  SYNTAX    OP   THE    ARTICLES. 

Los homhresson mor tales',  Bios alhorrece a \os pecadores.. 

Men  are  mortd  ;  God  hates  sinners. 

La  virtud  es  amdble ;  el  vicio  es  abominable. 

Virtue  is  amiable  -,  vice  is  odious. 

The  words  men^  sinners,  virtue,  and  vice,  are  taken  in 
a  general  sense  ;  because  all  men  are  mortal,  God  hates 
all  sinners,  all  virtues  are  amiable,  and  all  vices  odious. 

Rule  5.     El,  lo,  la,  los,  las,  not  the. 

The  definite  article  el,  lo,  la,  los,  las,  is  used  in  Spa- 
nish, and  not  in  English,  before  names  of  kingdoms, 
countries,  and  provinces.     Example  : 

La  Francia  y  la  Inglaterra  son  dos  reynos  poderosos, 

France  and  England  are  two  powerful  kingdoms. 

He  atravesado  la  Espdna,  la  Suixa,  y  la  Alemdn'm^ 

I  have  passed  through  Spain,  Switzerland,  and  Ger- 
ttiany. 

These  nouns  usually  take  no  article  when  they  are  in 
the  genitive  case,  or  after  the  preposition  en.   Et ample*: 

Los  rey?ios  de  Francia  y  de  Inglaterra  son  poderosos. 

The  kingdoms  of  France  and  o/' England  are  powerful. 

He  viajado  en  Espdna,  en  Italia,  en  Alemdnia,  y  en 
Riisia. 

I  have  travelled  in  Spain,  in  Italy,  in  Germany,  and  in 
Russia. 

There  are,  however,  some  names  of  kingdoms  and 
provinces  which  take  an  article  in  the  genitive  case  as 
well  as  in  other  cases  :  Such  are  el  Bengala,  el  Mexico, 
el  Japon,  &c.  which  make  in  the  genitive,  del  Bengala, 
del  Mexico,  del  Japon,  &:c. 

N.  B.  When  the  names  of  kingdoms  and  republics  are 
the  same  as  those  of  their  capital  towns,  they  are  consi- 
dered as  proper  names,  and  as  such  take  no  article :  of 

*  The  names  of  kingdoms,  provinces,  &c,  are  usually  pre- 
ceded by  Je,  whea  they  are  ia  the  geuldve  or  ablative  case. 


SYNTAX   OF   THE    ARTICLES,  151 

this  sort  are  (re«oi»a,  Ndf)oles,  Fenida.     Thus  one  must 
say,  Venecia  es  una  repuhlica,  and  not  la  Venecia,  iS*c. 

Rule  Q.     El,  loy  la,  los,  las,  without  the  in  English. 

The  definite  article  el,  lo,  la,  los,  las,  is  used  in 
Spanish  before  adjectives  substantively  used,  whether  ex- 
pressed in  English  or  not,  as 

Los  cuidadosos  son  alabddos,  y  los  perexosos  castigados. 

The  industrious  are  praised,  and  the  slothful  punished. 

El  negro  y  el  roxo  son  dos  colores  opuestos. 

Black  and  red  are  two  opposite  colours. 

Rule  7.     De,  del,  de  la,  algunos,  algunas,  unos,  unas, 
{some,)  called  the  Partitive  Article. 

The  article  partitive,  whose  use  is  to  express  a  part  of 
any  thing,  is  often  omitted  in  Spanish  : 

1  St.  Before  a  substantive  singular  taken  in  a  general  and 
indeterminate  sense,  as  Deme  vm.  pan.  Give  me  some 
bread  j   Yo  coma  came,  I  eat  some  meat. 

2d.  When  the  article  is  put  before  a  substantive  sin- 
gular taken  in  a  limited  sense,  then  it  is  expressed  by  the 
genitive  of  the  definite  article,  as  Deme  usted  dd  pan  de 
mi  hermano.  Give  me  some  of  my  brother's  loaf.  Deme 
vmd  de  la  came,  que  ticne,  Give  me  some  of  your  meat. 

3d.  When  this  article  is  ^v/br<?  a  substantive  plural  taken 
in  a  limited  sense,  the  same  article  de  is  made  use  of,  as  De- 
me  vm.  de  sus  manzanas,  Give  me  some  of  your  apples. 

4th.  On  the  contrary,  if  we  understand  by  the  article 
so7ne,  several  things  of  the  same  kind,  then  the  word  so;//e 
is  expressed  in  Spanish  by  algunos  or  unos,  masc.  plur.  al- 
gunas  or  unas^  according  to  the  gender  to  which  it  refers, 
as  Deme  vvi.  unas  (or  algunas)  cimilas.  Give  me  some 
plums.  Presteme  vm.  unqs  lihros,    Lend  me  some  books. 

He  comprddo  papel,  tinta,  y  plumas. 

1  have  bought  some  paper,  ink,  and  pens^ 


152  SYNTAX    or    THE    ARTICLES, 

Rule  8.     Where  the  articlt  is  required. 

livery,  noun,  which  is  the  nominative,  or  the  case  of  a 
vefrb,  must  have  in  Spanish  one  of  the  three  articles  3 
Ghher  deft nifet  indefinite^  or  partitive.     Ex<nnplt  : 

El  ow  y-  ]^'plala  no  pueden  hacer  d  los  homhresf dices . 

GolH  and  silver  cannot  render  men  happy. 

La  Espdna  produce  vino,  granos,  y  aceitunas. 

iSpain  produces  wine.,,  grain,  and  olives. 

N.  B.  1  do  not  comprehend  in  thisr  rule  the  proper 
names  of  persons  and  towns,  the  substantives  preceded 
by  a  pronoun,  nor  an  adjective  of  number,  neither  of 
which  have  an  article  }  as  it  will  be  seen  in  the  14th  and 
I5th>rule; 

Rull'  9.     Repetition  of  the-  artich: 

Ihe  articles  arerepeated  in  Spanish  before  every  sub- 
stantive, and  agree  with  them  in  gender  and  number  j  in 
Kngllsh,  on  the  contrary,  they  are  indeclinable.  Ex- 
ample : 

El  genio  de  h\  Icngua  Espanela  consiste  en  la  clariddd, 
hfuerza,  \:i  elcgandai  y  h  pun'za. 

The  gf  nius  of  the  Spanish  tongue  consists  in  clearness^ 
strength,  elegance,  and  purity. 

SECTION    III. 

Articles  in  English,  and  not  in  Spanish; 
Rule  10.     Ihe,  not  el,  la,  lo,  los,  las. 

The  definite  article  (the)  is  used  in  English^  and 'not 
in  Spanish,  before  the  ordinal  number,  thejirst,  the  se- 
cond, the  third,  the  fourth,  &c.  used  in  quotations.  Ex- 
ample: 

Liiro  primero,  cnpitulo  septimo,  parte  duodecima. 

Book  the  first,  chapter  the  seventh,  section  the  twelfth. 

Carlos  primero,  Felipe  segundo,  Jorge  iercdro. 

Charles  the  first,  Philip  the  second,  George  the  third. 


STTKTAX    or    THE    AUTICLES.  153 

Rule  11,     A,  not  urio,  or  una. 

Tlie  indefinite  article  {a  or  an)  is  used  in  English,  and 
not  in  Spanish,  before  nouns  which  express  flie  time,  pro- 
fession, trade,  country,  or  any  other  substantive  ante- 
cedent.    Example: 

f^No  es  su  hermaiio  viedicn  ? 
Is  not  his  brother  a  physician  ? 
f^Es  vm.  Espailol  ?    Are  you  a  Spaniard  ? 

Rule  12.     A,  not  uno,  or  una. 

The  indefinite  ailicle  (a  or  an)  is  also^used  in  English^ 
and  not  in  Spanish,  in  the  four  following  cases  : 

1 .  Before  a  substantive  used  in  opposition  to  another,  as: 
El  Tey  fue  reclHdo  en  triunfo,  honra  (juevtereda  Hen, 
I'he  king  \va»  r»jceived  in  triumph,  an  honour  be  de- 
served, 

2.  Before  a  substantive  which  explains  the  thing 
spoken  of,  as ; 

He  leido  hoy  el  Delinquent e  Honrddo,  comedia  estimdda. 
I  have  read  to-day  The  Honest  Criminal,  an  esteemed 
comedy. 

3.  In  the  title  of  a  book,  or  any  performance,  as ; 

Gramdtica  de  la  lengua  Espfinola, 
A  grammar  on  the  Spanish  language. 

4.  After  the  word  what,  used  to  express  surprise,  as ; 

l^ue  ruido  hdce  vm  I 
What  a  noise  you  make  '. 

SECTION  IV, 

No  article  in  Spanish  nor  in  English, 

Rule  13.     No  article  in  either  language. 

No  article  is  used  in  Spanish  or  in  English  before  the 
mn}?  of  God  (Dios),  nor  before  prop<?r  names  of  hea^* 


.15'4  SYNTAX    OF    THE    AKTICLKS. 

then  deities,  men,  women,  towns,  villages_,  days, or 
months.     Eramp/c  : 

Dius  estd  pTcsente  en  todns  paries. 

God  is  present  every  whore. 

Ciceron  y  Demosthenes  Jiuron  dos  gr amies  oradores*. 

Cicero  and  Demosthenes  were  two  gFeat  orators. 

Londres  y  Madrid  son  das  grandes  capitalcs. 

London  and  Madrid  are  two  capital  cities. 

Jupiter  y  P^enusfueron  dwlhidddes  pagdiias, 

Jupiter  and  Venus  were  heathen  divinities. 

Some,  but  few,  proper  names  of  persons  take  an  At* 
tick  itt  Spmfish  j  such  arc,  el  Ar'wstOi  el  Taso,  el  Ticiaw, 
kc.  Som^  mtti^i  of  kingdonw,  provlnees,  mid  tovviia 
take  sim  m\  uniele  j  m^h  im,  k  Chinas  d  Chili t  el 
Perut  las  Indias,  el  BrigOt  kG, 

Mfih  i4,    No  article  before  prmouns. 

No  article  is  used  in  Spanish  or  in  English  before  » 
/substantive  preceded  by  any  pronoun  whatever,  as  ; 
JMi  amigo  vendrd  mafidiia. 
My  friend  will  come  to-raorro-w. 
jE5/a  casa  es  nueva.    This  house  is  new. 
^Que  hora  es  ahora  ?     What  o'clock  is  it  now  ? 
N.  B.  The  defia.te  article  el,  lo,  la,  los,  las,  is  used  in 
Spanish  before  the  cardinal  numbers,  07ie,  two,  three,  &c,. 
when  they  are  substantively  used,  or  followed  by  a  rela- 
tive pronoun,  but  not  in  other  cases  :.  thus  one  may  say, 
with  an  article,   Fuclvdine,  vjn.  las  vehite  guineas  que  le 
preste  el  d'la  diez  de  Enero  ultimo.   RetiiKu  me  the  twenty 
guineas  I  lent  you  the  tenth  of  January  last» 

Uulc  15.     The  preposition  de. 
No  article,  but  the  preposition  r/e,  is  used  in  Spanish 

*  The  article  should  he  used  be  ore  proper  names,  if  they  are 
i«  the  pkind,  or  particubrized,  as  E\  Dios  de  los  Chrislianos  cs  «/«•»• 
rJp'HpUc,Th^  Qod  of  the  Christians  Lsomi|ipotent. 


SYNTAX    OF    THE    ARTICLES.  15^) 

u-T  the  words  especie,  suerte,  gcnero,  mhtura,  cr  any 
iKJier  of  the  same  signification,  as 

El  homhr€  esid  si/gcto  a  tcda  suerte  de  er/fermcdcules. 

Man  is  subject  to  all  sorts  of  infirmities. 

El  reztlo  fv  una  mixtura  de  amur  y  de  odio,  de  ternary 
de  desesperacion. 

Jealousy  is  a  mixture  of  love  and  liatred,  nf  fear  and 
despair. 

Rule  \G.     Transposition  of  words. 

No  article  but  the  preposition  de  is  used  before  the 
latter  of  two  substantives,  when  it  expresses  the  nature, 
matter^  species^  quality,  or  the  contrary,  of  the  first. 
Example  :  El  dolor  de  cabeza,  the  head-ach  ;  el  dolor  de 
muelas,  the  tooth-ach  ;  un  relox  de  oro,  a  gold  watch ; 
inedias  de  seda,  silk  stockings  ;  Idna  de  Espdna,  Spanish 
wool  ;  vitio  de  Borgiina,  Burgundy  wine. 

T4ie  English  often  make  a  transposition  of  words,  and 
place  the  genitive  case  the  first.  This  transposition  is 
not  allowed  in  Spanish,  and  the  order  must  be  reversed. 
Thus  we  say :  La  gudrdia  del  rey,  the  king's  guard  ;  una 
cridda  de  camarn,  a  chambermaid. 

La  colera  de  Diana  fue  la  causa  de  la  muerte  de  Acteon. 

Diana's  anger  was  the  cause  of  Acteon's  death. 

Rule  17.     The  preposition  de. 

No  article,  but  the  preposition  de,  is  used  in  Spanish 
after  the  following  words  :  diguo,  worthy  ;  lleno^  fuUj — 
^'ell  as  after  adjectives  governing  the  genitive  case. 
mple :  Vnid.  es  digno  de  alalanza.  You  are  praise- 
thy.  La  vida  humana  estu  llena  de  miserias.  Human 
is  full  ofmi  series. 

Rule  18-     Cases  where  no  article  is  used. 

0  article  is  used  in  either  language  before  nouns 

1  in  a  vague  and  indeterminate  sense  j  nor  before 


J56  SYN'TAX    OF    SUBSTANTIVES. 

those  which  form  but  one  idea  with  the  verb  which  pre- 
cedes them,  which  is  known  when  they  are  or  could  be 
expressed  by  one  word  in  EngHsh  j  as  in  the  following 
Examples : 

Tener  compasion  de  los  infelices. 

To  pity  the  unfortunate. 

Fisildr  d  un  amigo.    To  visit  a  friend. 

The  article  is  not  used  after  the  prepositions  sin,  >  co7i, 
or  pur,  wheh  the  following  noun  is  at  the  end  of  a  sen- 
tence, or  is  not  specified.     Examples  : 

Vmd.  hdbla  con  elegancia.     You  speak  elegantly. 

Fencer  sin  peligro,  es  triunfar  sin  gloria. 

To  conquer  without  danger,  is  to  triumph  without  glory. 

He  viajddo  por  tierra  y  por  war. 

I  have  travelled  by  land  and  by  sea. 


Chapter  IL 
SYNTAX  OF  SUBSTANTIVES. 

Rule  19.     Tivo  substantives  in  the  same  case. 

When  there  is  a  conjunction  between  two  nouns, 
they  must  be  put  in  the  same  case  j  and  if  a  substantive 
is  preceded  by  a  preposition,  that  preposition  is  usually 
repeated  in  Spanish  before  all  others  governed  by  it,  as 

Su  consejo  fue  gustoso  al  rey,  al  minisirOj  y  al  parla- 
mento. 

His  advice  pleased  the  king,  the  minister,  and  the  par- 
liament. 

Un  hombre  sin  religion  estd  en  un  estado  de  duda  y  de 
confusion,  de  temor  y  de  desconjianza, 

A  man  without  religion  is  in  a  state  o/*  doubt  and  coi;i- 
fusion,  fear  and  distmst. 


'  SYNTAX    OF    SUBSTANTIVES.  1>5/ 

RuU  20.     The  latter  of  two  sulstantzves  is  put  in  the 
genitive  cose. 
The  latter  of  two  substantives  is  generally  put  in  the 
genitive  case  in  Spanish,  though  it  be  in  the  dative  in 
English.     Example  : 

Los  impios  son  enemigos  de  la  virtud. 
Impious  men  are  enemies  to  virtue. 
Elperro  es  elamigo  del  hombre. 
The  dog  is  a  friend  to  man. 

Ride  21.    A  noun  collective  general. 

A  noun  collective  general,  that  is  to  say,  representing 
the  whole  object,  such  as  the  words  pueblo,  nacion,  exir^ 
cito,  armada,  &c.  requires  that  the  adjectives,  pronoujis, 
and  verhs  to  which  it  refers  should  always  be  in  the  sin- 
gular, as 

filexercito  grande  de  los  Franceses  fue  totalmente  «?«- 
hecho. 

The  great  Frencli  array  luas  totally  defeated. 

Toda  la  armada  esta  en  la  mar;  partio  aj/er  por  la  ma^ 
nana.  > 

The  whole  fleet  is  at  sea ;  it  set  sail  yesteiday  morning. 

Rule  22.  A  noun  collective  partitive. 
'  A  noun  collective  partitive,  that  is,  which  represents 
only  one  part  of  the  whole,  such  as  canliidd,  multifud, 
&c.  followed  by  a  genitive  plural,  governs  the  verb  and 
*  the  pronoun  in  the  singidar,  if  it  is  preceded  by  a  definite 
article  j  but  if  not,  it  governs  them  in  the  plural.  Ex- 
ample  : 

La  muliitud  de  los  extrangeros  hace  el  pan  muy  caro, 
(Sing.) 

The  multitude  of  foreigners  make  bread  veiy  dear. 

Un  gran  numero  de  los  Christianos  se  extravian  cada 
dia.     (Plur.) 

A  multitude  of  Christians  are  led  astray  every  day. 

The  reason  of  this  difference  is,  that  the  collective  is  a 


158  SYNTAX    OF    ADJECTIVES. 

substantive  when  preceded  by  el,  la,  lost  tas,  and  a  kind 
of  adjective  when  not :  in  the  first  case  the  verb  agrees 
with  the  collective,  and  in  the  secoi>d  with  the  substan,- 
tive  which  comes  after  the  collective. 

N.  B.  The  verb  is  always  pat  in  the  plural  after  the 
words  la  mayor  parte,  mucho  numero,  unless  they  are 
followed  by  a  substantive  singular.     Example  : 

La  mayor  parte  ]o  dicen,  The  greatest  portion  5?y  so. 
La  mayor  parte  del  mundo  lo  dice.  The  greatest  portion  oi 
the  world  say  so. 

Chapter  III. 

SYNTAX  OF  ADJFXTIVES. 

This  chapter,  for  the  sake  of  order  and  perspicnitv,  i* 
divided  into  four  sections.  The  first  explains  the  concorc 
and  right  placing  of  the  adjectives  ;  the  .y^cont/ treats  oi 
their  government ;  the  third  has  for  its  object  the  adjec- 
tives of  dimension  j  and  the  fourth  compreliends  wli^t 
ever  concerns  the  construction  of  comjfarativ^s  and  su 
perjatives.  ' 

SECTION    I. 

Of  the  concord  and  right  position  of  the  adjectives. 
Rule  23.     Jll  adjectives  are  dccUnahle. 

All  adjectives  are  declinable  in  Spanish,  and  agree  ii 
gender  and  number  with  the  substantive  to  which  the^ 
are  joined  or  relative.     Example: 

Un  hovil're  \)io,  una  nniger  \>\3.,  doncellas  pi-^s. 

A  pious  man,  a  pious  woman,  pious  girls. 

Este  retrato  es  caro,  ptro  es  hernrioso  *. 

This  picture  is  dear,  but  it  isfine. 

*  See  how  to  form  the  feminine  of  adjectives,  page  26,  and  thci 
pTural  formed  from  the  singular  like  substantives,  page  20. 


SYNTAX    OF    ADJECTIVES.  159'  ' 

EsA  casn  es  cam,  pero  es  herniosa. 
I'hat  house  is  dear,  but  it  kjine. 

Rule  24.     Adjeetives  agree  with  the  lasi  substantive. 

When  an  adieciive  or  a  participle  refers  to  several  snh- 
stantives  suigular,  we  generally  put  them  in  the  plural,  if 
they  are  seprated  from  tiie  substantive  by  any  verb  y 
and  in  the  siiigular  if  they  a-re  not :  as 

La  puerta  y  la  ventana  estdban  cerradcis.     (Plur.) 

The  di/or  ant!  the  w  indow  were  shut  up. 

He  halUido  la  puerta  y  la  ventana  cerrada-.     (Sing.) 

1  have  found  the  door  and  the  window  shut  up. 

The  reason  of  this  dilFerence  is,  that  in  the  first  case- 
the  adjectives  after  a  passive  voice  ought  to  agree  with 
both  substantives  j  whereas  in  the  second  it  agrees  with 
the  last  only  :  in  both  cases  they  are  placed  after  the 
SLibsir.niive. 

/?v/<r25.     Adjectives  agrc  with  the  most  zuortky  gender. 

^I'wo  or  aiore  substantives  singular  of  difierent  genders 
require  their  juljective  in  the  masculine  terminai'ion  of 
the  pluraJ  mnnber.     Example: 

Su  madre  y  su  hermdnoson  feruditos. 

His  mother  and  brother  are  learned. 

Mi  hermdno  y  mi  kermdna  son  tontos. 

My  brother  and  sister  are  foolish. 

Rule  20.     fFhere  a'ljectiues  ought  to  he  placed. 

When  two  or  more  adjectives  refer  to  the  same  sub- 
stantive, they  usually  follow  it  in  Spanish  with  a  con- 
junction before  the  last  adjective,  though  sometimes  left 
out  in  English  j  as 

Un  hombre  ingenioao  y  sensible . 

Aji  ingenious  sensible  man. 

Un  libra  largo  y  enfadoso.     A  long  ^tedious  hook. 

Uua  muger  snbia  y  virtuosa.    A  wise  virtuous  woman. 

Un  principe  joven  y  liberal.     A  young  liberal  prince. 


1(50  SYNTAX    or    ADJECTIVES. 

Rule  27.     j4djectives  placed  before  suhtantives. 

The  adjectives  hello,  finej  lueno ,  goo(i ;  grande,  great  j 
malo,  bad  J  mejor,  better  j  menos,  less  j  pef/ueno,  little; 
iflw/o,  holy ;  ij/e/o,  old ;  those  of  number,  and  all  the 
possessive,  demonstrative  J  or  iridetermined  Yironouns  (which 
some  grammarians  consider  as  mere  adjectives)  precede 
in  Spanish,  as  in  English,  the  substantive  to  which  they 
are  joined.     Example  : 

Memos  perdido  un  gran  general  en  esta  guerra. 

We  have  lost  z  great  general  in  this  war. 

Mi  qnerido  padre  estd  en  el  campo  con  mi  qnerida/)r?wfl. 

My  d^ar  father  is  in  the  country  with  my  dear  cousin. 

Sii  mala  accion  les  ha  proairado  una  mejor  situacion. 

His  hud  zciiow  has  procured  them  a  Z-e^/e/' situation. 

This  rule  is  not  absolutely  a  general  one. 

Rule  28f.     Adjectives  placed  after  the  substantives. 

The  adjectives  not  mentioned  In  the  preceding  rule 
are  usually  placed  in  Spanish  after  the  substantive  which 
tliey  qualify  j  in  English,  on  the  contrary,  they  are  al-' 
ways  placed  before.     Example : 

Las  personas  agradecidas  son  semejanies  d  las  ti^rras 
feiiiles  que  dan  mas  (juenohan  recibido. 

Orattful  people  are  like  those  fruitful  lands  which 
give  more  than  they  receive. 

El  hien  publico  es  prefcrihle  al  interes  particular. 
V     Public  good  is  preferable  io  private  interest. 

Again,  adjectives  derived  from  verbs  are  also  put  after 
the  substantive,  as 

Un  pensamiento  embrollado  es  cowo  un  diamante  CU' 
Her  to  de  cieno. 

An  embroiU'd  ihought  is  Jike  a  precious  stone  covered 
with  d'ixt, 


?ySTAX    OF    ADJECTIVES. 


tfECTION  ir. 


1^1 


Rule  29.     Adjectives  governing  tlie  dative  case. 

Adjectives  which  denote  aptness y  fitness j  inclination^ 
readiness,  or  any  hality  govern  in  Spanish  the  noun  in 
the  dative  case,  and  most  commonly  the  verb  in  the 
infinitive  preceded  by  a  or  para.     Example  : 

El  es  prdpio  para  todo.     He  is  fit  for  any  thing. 

Ha  aprendido  a  baytar  en  dos  meses  de  tievipo. 

He  has  learnt  daiciiig  in  two  months. 

Lhi  espiritu  perturbado  no  es  prdpio  para  cumplir  con 
sys  obligaciones. 

A  disturbed  mind  is  not  fit  to  discharge  its- duties. 

El  es  astuto  para  inducir  a  otros  a  creer^  y  tcner  par 
cierto  lo  que  no  es. 

He  is  cunning  Jbr  deceiving  others,  making  them  be- 
lieve for  certain  what  is  not  so. 

Rule  30      Adjectives  follozved  ly  en  or  hacia. 

Some  adjectives  are  followed  in  Spanish  by  the  prepo^- 
sition  eny  and  in  English  by  the  preposition  in  :  such  are, 
cnrioso  en,  curious  in  ;  piintual  en,  exact  in ;  habil  en, 
skilful  in ;  pacientc  en,  patient  in  ;  %eloso  en,  zealous  in 5 
and  sometimes  by  to.     Example  : 

Soy  puntudl  en  mis  ohligacionesi 
I  am  exact  in  my  obligations. 
El  es  paciente  en  sus  qfliccioncs. 
He  is  patient  ire  his  troubles. 
Es  mencster  ser  cor tsshac'ia  coda  itno. 
We  must  be  civil  to  every  body. 
Un  homhre  malo  es  ingrato  hacia  Dios,  y  con  ios  homhresi 
A.wicked  man  is  ungrateful  to  God  and  /o  every  body,  • 
p.  3- 


1(52  B^NTAX    oy    ADJECTIVES. 


SECTION  III. 

Rule  3 1 .     j4(}J€ciives  of  dimension. 
De  altura  o  alto,  high  ;  cle  profundo  o  profuRdidad,  deep. 

The  adjectives  of  dimension  are  rendered  in  Spanish  by 
an  adjective  or  by  a  substantive,  thus  :  ?ugh  can  be  ex- 
pressed by  de  alto  or  de  elevacion ;  long,  by  de  largo  5  deep, 
by  de  hondo  or  de  hondura  ,-  and  in  general  the  substan- 
tive is  more  elegantly  used  than  the  adjective. 

You  must  remember  always  to  put  the  preposition  de 
before  the  words  of  dimension  and  of  number,  if  they 
are  not  preceded  by  a  verb.     Example : 

Una  torrede  docientospies  de  alto. 

A  tower  two  hundred  feet  high. 

Una  mesa  de  seis  pies  de  largo,  de  tres  pies  dea7icko. 

A  table  six  feet  long  and  three  feet  wide. 

Un  rio  de  veinte  pies  de  hondo  y  f/uatro  pies  de  largo. 

A  river  twenty  feet  deep  and  four  wide. 

Bute  32.     Tener,  instead  of  to  be,  lefore  ike  adjectives 

of  dimension. 

To  express  tlie  height,  depth,  or  breadth  of  an  object, 
the  English  make  use  of  the  verb  to  be,  and  the  Spa- 
niards of  the  verb  teiier,  as  they  always  do  before  a  word 
of  number. 

N.  B.  The  preposition  de  is  left  out  after  the  verb 
iener,  but  it  remains  before  the  word  of  dimension. 
Example  : 

Esta  torre  tiene  docientos  pies  de  alto. 

This  tower  is  two  hundred  feet  high. 

Esta  mesa  tiene  seis  pies  de  largo. 

This  table  is  six  feet  long. 

Este  rio  tiene  veinte  pies  de  hondo.. 

This  river  is  twenty  feet  deep. 


SYXTAX    OF    ADJECTIVES.  lS3 


SECTION  IV. 

Of  comparatives  and  superlatives*. 

Ruk  33.     As,  expressed  ly  tan,  como,  no  menos  que, 
after  a  comparative. 

Tlie  word  as,  used  in  English  after  a  comparative  of 
equality  or  inferiority,  is  always  expressed  in  Spanish  by 
tan,  comOy  no  menos  que.     Example  : 

Vm.  es  tan  prudenie  como  sus  hermditas. 

You  are  as  prudent  as  your  sisters. 

No  soy  menos  rico  que  vmd.     I  am  as  rich  as  you,. 

No  tengo  menos  lil^ros  que  ellos. 

I  have  as  many  books  as  they  may  have. 

Of  inferiority. 

El  es  menos  docto  que  su  kermano. 
He  is  not  so  learned  as  his  broUier. 

Rule  34.     By,  expressed  ly  de,  of  tcr  the  comparative. 

The  word  by,  which,  when  used  with  comparatives,^ 
denotes  how  much  a  thing  exceeds  anotlter,  is  always 
expressed  by  de.     Example  .'- 

Soy  mas  cUto  que  vm.  de  ioda  la  cabeza. 

I  am  taller  than  you  by  the  whole  head. 

El  es  mas  joven  qrie  su  primo  de  cinco  anos. 

He  is  younger  than  his  cousin  hy  five  years. 


*  See,  in  page  28,  how  many  sorts  there  are  of  comparative* 
and  superlatives,  and  how  to  form  them  from  the  adjectives. 


l64  SYNTAX    OF    ADJEGXrVES. 

Hule  35:     Than,  expressed  by  que  or  de,  after  a  compa- 
raiive. 

The  word  than,  used  after  a  comparative,  is  expressed 
in  Spanish  by  que  when  it  is  followed  by  a  aoun  or  pro- 
noun.     Example: 

El  es  mas  dichoso  que  vmd- 

He  is  7nore  fortunate  than  you. 

El  todo  es  mas  grande  que  sus  partes. 

The  whole  is  greater  t//an  its  parts. 
The  word  tha?i  is  always  expressed  by  de  before  the 
cardinal  numbers,  uno,  dos,  tres,  he.  because   there    is 
then  no  comparison  cf  objects.     Example : 

l^engo  mas  de  diez  y  seis  anos. 

I  am  more  than  sixteen  years  old. 

Tiene  vmd.  mas  de  docieiitas  guineas. 

You  have  more  than  two  hundred  guineas. 

Rule  36^    Than,  expressed  Vy  que  de  or  que  no  after  a: 
comparative. 

The  word  than,  used' with  comparatives,  is  usually  ex- 
pressed by  que  de  before  an  infinitive  mood,  and  by  que 
wo,  before  a  verb  in  the  indicative,  as 

Es  mas  nolle  de  perdondr  que  de  vengarse. 

It  is  more  noble  to  forgive  than  to  revenge  one's  self. 

Las  rique%as  son  mas  daiiosas  que  no  es  la  pohrezaih- 
comoda. 

Riches  are  more  dangerous  /Aa«  poverty  is  trouWe- 
sorae-. 

Note  1.     If  the  nrst  infinitive  is  preceded  by  tlae  pre- 
position a,  then  the  word  than  is  expressed -by  cfue  a,  as 
El  es  mas  inclinado  a  dandr  que  a  oUigdr. 
He  is  more  inclined  to  hurt  than  to  oblige.. 

Note  2,    The  word  than  is  expressed  by  que  before  aii. 


SYNTAX    OP    ADJECTIVES.  l65 

indicative  mood,  if  there  Is  a  conjunction  between  the 
word  than  and  the  Verb.     Example  : 

El aprcnde  mas  presto  que  quando  estdla  enelcoUgio. 

He  learns  qnickoir  than  when  he  was  at  college. 

AH  htrmano  se  restabkce  mas  presto  que  si  estuvitra  en 
la  ciuddd. 

My  brother  recovers  sooner  than  if  he  was  in  town. 

Rule  37.     The  more,  expressed  by  quanto  mas. 

The  English  make  use  of  the  definite  article  before' 
the  comparatives  of  proportion,  and  the  Spaniards  of 
tjuanto  mas  and  tanto  mas,  when  the  word  the  more  is 
repeated  in  a  sentence,  and  the  second  being  a  conse- 
quence of  the  first.  The  less  is  expressed  by  menos ;  but 
in  the  first  case  the  adjective  precedes  the  verb.  Example: 

Quanto  mas  vin.  estudidre,  tanto  mas  dodo  sera. 

The  more  you  study,  the  more  you  will  be  learned. 

Quanto  mas  conozco  d  los  hombres,  menos  djno  la  vida. 

The  more  I  know  mankind,  the  less  I  value  life. 

Rule  38.    The  more  is  again  expressed  by  quanto  ma«f^ 
and  the  less  by  menos. 

If  a  conDparative  of  proportion  is  made  with  two  sub- 
stantives or  two  adjectives,  they  are  placed  before  the 
verb  in  Englibh,  and  in  Sppnish  the  nominative  is  placed 
the  last. 

The  words  of  this  sort  of  sentences  are  disposed  ia 
the  following  order  ;  1,  we  put  quanto  mas,  or  mas  only, 
or  menos  ;  2,  the  adjective  or  substantive ;  3,  the  verb  ; 
4,  the  nominative  of  the  verb ;  the  rest  as  in  English. 
Example  : 

C^uanto  mas  difidl  es  una  cosa,  tanto  mas  honrada  es. 

The  more  difficult  a  thing  is,  the  more  honourable. 

Menos  diru'ro  gana,  quanto  mas  gasto  hace. 

The  less  money  he  gets,  the  more  he  spends. 


].6Q  SYNTAX  01'  PERSONAL   PRONOUNS. 

Riile  39.     The  superiative  governs  the  genitiv-e. 

La  Espaua  es  uno  cle  los  mas  grandes  reynos  de  Eu- 
ropa.     (Genitive.) 

Spain  is  one  of  the  greatest  kingdoms  in  Eurape* 

Rule  40.     Of  the  superlative. 

AVhen  a  superlative  follows  immediately  a  substantive 
which  is  preceded  by  the  definite  article,  the  article  is 
not  repeated,  as 

Los  placei'cs  mas  inocentes  son  siempre  los  mas  puros. 

I'he  most  innocent  pleasures  are  always  the  most  pure. 

Note.  The  comparatives  and  superlatives  agree  in 
gender  and  number  with  the  substantive  or  pronoun  to 
which  they  refer,  -as  you  may  observe  in  the  preceding 
example. 


Chapter  IV. 

OF  PERSONxiL  PRONOUNS. 

This  chapter  is  divided  into  five  sections:  the  first 
enumerates  the  instances  in  which  the  personal  pronouns 
are  conjunctive  or  disjunctive,  and  shows  how  to  ex^^vess 
them  on  both  occasions ;  the  second  treats  of  the  imper- 
sonal pronouns  it  and  thajy  or  them^  which  are  used  in 
English  with  reference  to  animals  or  things  j  the  third 
ascribes  to  the  personal  and  impersonal  pronouns  their 
proper  place  in  a  sentence,  and  explains  the  order  in 
which  they  must  be  disposed  when  they  meet  together  j 
the  fourth  teaches  when  they  are,  or  are  not  to  be  repeated 
before  the  verb  which  ihey  govern,  or  are  governed  by  ; 
the  fifth  informs  us  when  the  pronouns  must  be  ex- 
pressed by  el,  la,  or  se,  and  shows  their  difference  witk 
a<;curacy  and  preci&ion. 


SYNTAX  OF  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS.  IG7 


SECTION  I. 

I0ien  the  personal  pronouns  are  conjunctive  or  disjunctive. 

Rule  41,     How  to  express  the  personal  pronouns  in  the 
nominative  case* 

The  personal  pronoiis,  /,  thou,  he,  she ;  toe,  you,  they, 
are  conjunctive,  and  expressed  by  yo,  tu,  el,  ra.  ella,  f. 
?iosolros,  vosotvfis,  ellos,  m.  ellas,  f  plur.  when  they  are 
the  nominative  case  of  a  verb,  provided  they  are  not 
joined  to  another  noun  or  pronoun  by  a  conjunction. 
Example :  Yo  hallo,  I  speak  ;  tu  haces,  thou  doest  j  el 
vende,  he  sells  :  ella  sirvc,  she  serves  ;  nosotros  tenemos, 
we  have  ;  vosotros  traeis,  you  bring  ;  ei'los  quicreny  they 
Jove  J  ellas  cantan,  they  sing. 

Observe  to  use  always  et  and  ellos  with  reference  to  a 
noun  masculine,  and  ella  or  ellas  with  reference  to  a  fe- 
minine. 'rhu>,  they  are  rich,  must  be  expressed  in 
Spanish  by  ellos  son  ricus,  in  speaking  of  men  :  and  ellas 
son  ricus,  in  speaking  of  women.  This  can  be  expressed 
without  pronouns,  by  saying  son  ricos,  son  ricas,  they  are 
rich. 

The  personal  pronouns  are  disjunctive,  and  expressed 
by  yo,  lu,  el,  m.  ella,,  f-;  «05,  vos,  elks,  m.  ellas,  f.j  unde|: 
the  following  circumstances  : 

1 .  When  they  con:e  before  or  after  the  words  que, 
quien,  or  solo.     Example  : 

Soy  yo  quien  lo  digo.     It  is  I  who  say  so. 

LI  es  mas  erudito  que  yo.     He  is  more  learned  than  I. 

Ellos  solos  estdlan  presenteS.  They  alone  were  present. 

2.  When  they  are  used  to  answer  to  a  question.  J&r- 
ample: 

^  Quien  hd  hecho  eso  ?  soy  yo,  es  el,  son  ellos,  or  ellas. 
Who  has  done  that  ?  it  is  1,  he,  they. 


l68  SYNTAX  OF  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 

3.  When  they  are  joined  to  a  noun  or  pronoun  by  a 
conjunction,  as 

Mi  hermano  y  yo  aprendhnos  el  Espanol, 
We  learn  Spanish,  my  brother  and  I. 

4.  When  they  come  before  a  noun   or  a  verb  used  in 
opposition  to  or  distinction  from  the  first.     Example: 

Vmd.  uolverd  d  la  ciudad,  y  yo  ire  al  campo. 

You  will  return^to  town,  and  I  will  go  into  the  country. 

Rule  42.     How  to  express  the  personal  pronoun  in  the 
genitive  case. 

When  the  personal  pronouns  are  in  the  genitive  case 
they  are  disjurtctive,  and   expressed  by  de  ml,  de  ti,  de 
el,   m.  de  ella,  f.  de  nosotros,  de  vosolrosy  de  ellos,  m. 
de  ellas,  f.     Example  : 
■"^^g^queja  de  mi.     He  complains  of  me. 

Ellos  no  hablan  de  el.     They  do  not  speak  of  him. 

They  are  sometimes,  but  seldom,  conjunctive,  and  ex- 
pressed by  de  el  or  de  ella.     Example  : 

Fmd.  dma  a  mi  prima  ;  y  habla  muchas  veces  de  ella. 

You  love  my  cousin  ;  and  speak  often  of  her. 

^Estdban  vmds.  hahlando  de  mi  ? — Si. 

Were  you  speaking  of  me  ? — Yes. 

Rule  43.     How  to  express  the  personal  pronouns  in  the 
dative  case. 

When  the  personal  pronouns  are  in  the  dative  case 
they  are  most  commonly  conjunctive,  and  expressed  by 
7ne,  te,  le,  nos,  vos,  les.     Example : 

El  me  place.     He  pleases  me. 

Yo  le  hare  sufortuna.     I  will  make  him  his  forturie. 

Yo  les  haUarc.     I  will  speak  to  them. 

They  are  disjunrtive,  and  are  expressed  by  d  mi,  d  tl, 
del,  della,  d?iosotros,  avosotros^  d  ellos,  d  ellas,  after 
the  verb  in  three  cases. 


SYNTAX  OF  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS.  l6g 

1.  When  they  come  after  a  noun  or  a  pronoun  to 
which  they  are  joined  by  a  conjunction,  as 

Hablo  a  vm.  tamhien  como  a  ellos. 
I  speak  to  you  as  well  as  to  them. 

2.  When  they  are  governed  by  a  reflective  verb^  as 
El  se  dirige  a  me.     He  directs  himself  to  me. 

Rule  44.     The  personal  pronouns  in  the  accusative  case. 

When  the  personal  pronouns  are  governed  by  a  verb 
in  the  accusative  they  are  generally  conjunctive,  and 
expressed  by  me,  te,  nos,  vos,  or  os,  le,  la,  les,  las  i 
as 

Le  conozco,  I  know  him.     La  veri,  I  will  see  her.     ^ 

Los  estimo,  I  esteem  them. 

Rule  45.     Personal  pronouns  after  a  preposition. 

When  the  personal  pronouns  are  preceded  by  a  prepo- 
sition they  are  always  disjunctive,  and  expressed  by  mi, 
tiy  el,  ellos,  &c.     Example: 

En  quanta  u  mi  pienso  asi.    As  for  me,  I  think  so. 

Vm.  hablard  despues  de  ellos.  You  will  speak  after 
tbem. 


SECTION  II. 

Of  the  pronouns  it,  they,  them. 

Rule  46.    The  pronouns  it,  they,  or  tk^m. 

The  pronouns  it,  they,  or  them,  which  are  used  in 
English  with  reference  to  animals  or  things,  are  expressed 
in  Spanish  by  el,  masc. ;  ella,  fem.  sing. ;  and  by  ellos, 
masc. ;  or  ellas,  fem.  plur.,  when  they  are  the  nomi- 
native of  a  verb.  //  or  them  are  expressed  by  el,  masc.  ; 
la  and  ella,  fem.  3  ios  and  les,  masc,  plur.,  when  they  are 


170  SYNTAX  or  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 

governed  by  a  verb  in  the  accusative.  Thus  in  speaking 
of  a  house,  one  may  say 

Mi  casa  cs  juui  agraddhle ;  no  qmero  venderla,  y  la 
conservare. 

My  house  is  very  fine  j  1  will  not  sell  ity  I  will  keep  It. 

ObseiTe,  that  those  pronouns,  though  they  are  rela- 
tive, are  used  like  the  personal  ones,  and  ought  to  agree 
in  gender  and  number  with  the  substantives  to  which  they 
refer. 


I 


B.uU  47.     De  el  or  de  ellos,  de  ella  or  de  ellas,  used  in 
the  genitive  for  of  it  or  of  them,  some  or  ajiy. 

The  pronoun  it  or  them,  used  with  reference  to  in- 
animate objects,  is  expressed  in  Spanish  by  de  el,  de  ella, 
&:c. ;  when  the  verb  governs  the  genitive  case,  whether 
they  be  preceded  in  English  by  the  preposition  of  froju, 
with,  about,  for,  upon,  or  any  other,  &:c.     Example  : 

^Que  le  parece  a  vmd.  de  la  repuhlica  de  Francia  9 
What  do  you  think  of  the  French  republic  ? 

Ah  !  por  Dios,  no  me  hable  vmd.  de  ella  ! 

Ah  !  for  God's  sake,  do  not  speak  to  me  of  it  I 

Tienevmd.  herviosas fores,  deme  algunas  de  ellas. 

You  have  line  flowers,  give  me  some  of  them. 

When  the  words  5ome  or  any,  which  are  articles  parti 
live  in  English  as  in  other  languages,  come  after  a  verb 
and  refer  to  an  antecedent  substantive,  they  are  express^ 
in  Spanish  by  unos,  unas  3  algunos,  algunas.  Example  : 

Si  le  gustan  a  vm.  estas  frutas,  le  emliare  unas. 

If  you  like  tho^e  fruits,  1  will  send  yon' some, 

Tengo  manxdnas,  ^quierevm.  unas  ? 

I  have  some  apples,  will  you  liave  any  ? 

Deme  vm.  un  par  (de  ellas). 

Give  me  a  couple  of  the?n. 

Puede  vm.  tomdr  mas  (de  ellas). 

You  may  take  some  more. 


y  FTNTAX  OF  PERSONAL  PKaNODNS.  l/t 

^Qtfe  hart  yo  de  ellas  ?  What  shall  I  do  with  them? 
Vm.  dard  unas  {or  algunas)  d  sus  hermanas. 
You  shall  give  some  to  your  sisters.  , 

Rule  48.  En  el,  le,  los,  for  ii  or  them,  in  the  dative  case. 

The  pronouns  it  or  them,  governed  by  a  verb  which 
requires  the  dative  in  Spanish,  are  expressed  by  el  or  los, 
as  the  personal  pronouns  when  they  refer  to  animals  or 
plants  ;  and  usually  by  en  el,  when  they  refer  to  other 
inanimate  objects  not  personified.     Example  : 

Tus  cabaUos  tiencn  hamhre ;  dd  les  auaia. 

Your  horses  are  hungry ;  give  them  some  oats. 

Este  arbol  es  hennoso  ;  no  le  eche  vmd.  a  perder. 

This  tree  is  fine  j  do  not  hurt  it. 

Hay  un  retrato  hermoso  ;  ponga\e.  un  quadra. 

There  is  a  fine  picture )  put  a  frame  to  it, 

^Piensa  vm,  en  mi  dinero  ? — Si^  pienso  en  el. 

Do  you  think  of  my  money  ? — Yes,  I  think  of  it. 

Rule  49.     JVhen  it  or  them  come  after  a  preposition,  they 

are  not  expressed  in  Spanish. 

When  the  pronoun  it  or  them  is  preceded  by  a  pre- 
position, it  cannot  be  expressed  by  el,  ella,  ellos,  ellas, 
which  in  this  case  are  said  only  of  persons  or  personified 
objects.;  but  they  are  usually  left  out,  and  the  preposi- 
tion used  in  English  becomes  an  adverb  when  it  conveys 
sufficiently  the  idea.     Example  : 

El  rey  estuha  por  la  giierra,  pcro  elparlamento  estuvo  en 
contra. 

The  king  was  for  the  war,  but  the  parliament  was 
against  it. 

Accrquese  vmd.  a  la  lumbre }  esloy  junto. 

Come  near  the  fire  j  I  am.  near  to  it. 

If  the  preposition  cannot  become  an  adverb,  we  must 
give  the  sentence  another  turn,  as  : 

Primerament^  la  casafue  quemcida,  y  despues  la  iglesia. 

At  first  the  house  was  burnt,  and  after  it  the  church. 
a2 


1/2       SYNTAX  OF  PRONOUNS  RELATIVE. 

Rule  50,     Use  of  the  relative  pronouns  e\,  lo,  la,  los,  las. 

The  relative  pronouns  el,  lo,  la,  los,  las,  are  always 
used  in  Spanish  before  the  verb  ser  or  estdr  in  answer 
to  a  question,  though  there  is  no  pronoun  expressed  ii> 
English. 

El  and  lo  are  indeclinable  : 

1.  When  they  have  reference  to  a  substantive  singular 
and  masculine.     Example : 

^Es  vm.  el  hermano  de  Pedro  ? — Si,  lo  soy'*. 
Are  you  Peter's  brother,? — Yes,  I  am. 

2.  With  reference  to  adjectives  of  both  genders  and 
iiunnbers,  as  : 

^Son  sus  hermanos  doctos  P — No,  no  lo  s6n. 
Are  his  brothers  learned  ? — No,  they  are  not. 

3.  With  reference  to  verbs.     Example: 
^Creenvmds.  que  estas  senoras  vengan  ?  Si,  lo  creemos. 
Do  you  think  those  ladies  will  come  ?     Yes,  we  do. 
La  is  used  with  reference  to  a  substantive  feminine 

singular,  as  : 

^Es  vm.  la  miigtr  de  Pedro  ? — Si,  la  soy. 

Are  you  Peter's  wife  ? — Yes,  I  am. 

If  the  adjectives  were  substantively  used,  la  should  be 
used  for  the  feminine  singular,  and  las  for  the  plural,  as ; 

fi,Esvm.  la  enferma  para  la  qual se  ha  mandddo  d llamdr 
el  medico? — Si,  \2iSoy. 

Are  you  the  patient  whom  the  physician  was  sent  for  ? 
— Yes,  I  am. 

^Sefioras,  son  vmds.  las  parienias  delsefior  Donrjuilotes  ? 
— Si,  las  somas. 

Ladies,  are  you  the  relations  of  Mr.  Donquilotes  ? — 
Yes,  we  are. 

*  We  can  also  answer,  si,  senor  ;  si,  senura  j  &c.  without  rc« 
peating  the  verb  the  question  is  asked  by. 


SYNTAX  OF  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS.  1  73 

Lo,  indeclinable,  is  also  used  with  reference  to  adjeC' 
tives  or  verbs  for  the  words  it  or  soy  sometimes  expressed 
ill  English,  but  generally  understood.     Example  : 

Vm.  es  dichoso,  e  yo  no  lo  soy. 

You  are  happy,  and  I  am  not  so. 

Yo  lo  deciay  pero  no  queria  vm.  creerlo. 

1  said  so,  but  you  would  not  believe  it. 

SECTION  III. 

Ilule  5 1 .     The  right  place  of  personal  pronouns. 

The  personal  pronouns  yo,  tit,  el,  masc.  fZ/a,  fem  ; 
nosotros,vosotros,  ellos,  masc.plur.  elliis,  fem.  pi ur. usually 
precede  the  verb  of  which  they  are  the  nominative  case. 
Example  :    Yo  lea,  I  read  j  tu  canta^,  thou  singest,  &c. 

They  can  be  separated  from  it  by  the  particle  no  and 
the  governed  pronouns,  if  there  be  any,  but  never  by 
any  adverb.     Example  : 

*  El  no  los  ha  visto.     He  has  not  seen  them, 

Yo  no  les  hahlare,     I  will  not  speak  to  them, 

Vm.  dice  kianpre  la  verddcl,  Ella  hablafreqdentemente 
de  vm. 

You  always  speak  the  truth.  She  often  speaks  of  you. 

The  personal  pronouns  yo,  tu,  el.  masc.  ella,  fem.  nos' 
otros,  vosotros,  ellos,  masc.  plur.  ellas,  fem.  plur.,  are 
placed  immediately  after  the  verb  or  its  auxiUary  in 
three  cases. 

1.  In  an  interrogative  sentence.     Example  : 

(^Aprende  (el)  la  lengua  Espahola  9 
Does  he  learn  the  Spanish  language  ? 


•  The  scholar  must  observe,  that  it  is  more  elegant  to  make 
use  of  the  word  usted,  whose  contraction  is  vmd.  than  of  the  per- 
sonal pronoun,  when  speaking  to  one  person,  and  ustcdes,  vvhea 
speaking  to  several. 

a  3 


174  SYNTAX  OF  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 

^Quanta  tiempo  ha  que  (el)  aprende  ? 
How  long  has  he  been  learning  it  ? 
^  Pronuncio  (yo)  lien  ?  Do  I  pronounce  well  ?  Bella- 
mente.     Extremely  well. 

2.  When  they  are  the  nominative  .case  to  the  verbs, 
decir,  to  say  j  rcsponder,  to  answer  ;  coidinuar,  to  con- 
tinue J  prosegmr,  to  pursue  ;  &c.  as  in  a  sentence  by 
parenthesis.     Example : 

Ved  (dixo  el)  la  situacidn  d  que  estoy  reducido. 

See  {said  he)  the  condition  to  which  I  am  reduced. 

Porque  (le  respond!  yo)  ^no  me  hd  hablado  vm. 
antes  ? 

Why  (/  answered  him)  have  you  not  spoken  to  me  be- 
fore? 

3.  Most  frequently  when  the  verb  is  preceded  by  the 
conjunctions  a  lo  menos,  tamhien,  asi  apenas,  a  caso,  va- 
fiamente,  and  some  others,  &c.     Example  : 

Apenas  se  fue  (el)  ayer  por  la  manaiia  quando  su  her^ 
mano  entro. 

He  was  hardly  gone  yesterday  morning  when  his  bro- 
ther came  in.  • 

Rule  52,    Pronouns  placed  after  the  verb. 

"When  the  verb  is  in  the  imperative  affirmative,  the 
governed  pronouns  are  put  after  it  in  Spanish,  as  in  Eng- 
lish.    Example  : 

Halldles.  Respondenos.         Fela. 

Speak  to  them.        Answer  us.  See  her. 

Olservations. 

Though  we  have  already  given  an  idea  of  reflective  or 
reciprocal  pronouns,  page  30,  we  think  proper  to  repeat 
ihem  here,  and  illustrate  them  with  some  examples;  in 
order  to  facilitate  the  learning  of  the  scholar. 


SYNTAX  OF  CONJUNCTIVE  PRONOUNS. 


V5 


Declension  of  the  reflective  or  reciprocal  pronoun. 
Singular. — ^^Masculine. 
(It  has  no  Nominative.) 
Genitive.         de  si  vnsmo,         of  himself. 
Dative.  a  si  mismo,  to  himself. 

Accusative,     se,  a  si  mismo,     himself. 
Ablative.         de  si  viismoy         by  himself. 


Genitive. 
Dative. 

Accusative. 
Ablative. 


Genitive. 
Dative. 
Accusative. 
Ablative. 


Plural. — Masculine. 

de  si  misvios,  of  themselves. 

a  si  mismos,  to  themselves. 

se,  a  si  mismos,  themselves. 

de  si  misvios,  by  themselves. 

Singular. — Feminine. 

de  si  misma,  of  herself. 

a  si  misma,  to  herself. 

se,  a  si  misma,  herself. 

de  si  misvia,  by  herself. 

Plural. — Feminine. 


Genitive.  de  si  mismas,  of  themselves. 

Dative.      •  d  si  mismas,  to  themselves. 

Accusative,  se,  a  si  mismas,  themselves. 

Ablative.  de  si  mismas,  by  themselves. 

The  pronouns  conjunctive,  mi,  ti,  si,  when  preceded 
by  the  preposition  con,  are  changed  in  Spanish  into  migo, 
tigo,  sigo,  and  make  with  it  one  word.  Thus  we  say 
comnigo,  with  me  3  contigo,  with  thee  3  consigo,  with 
him.  From  thence  one  may  perceive,  tliat  mismo  and 
misma  can  be  added  to  the  nominative  of  a  verb,  taking 
care  to  make  it  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  it. 

The  pronouns  of  the  third  person  are  equally  used 
with  reference  to  persons  or  things. 


176      SYXTAX  OF  CONJUNCTIVE  PRONOUNS. 

Talle  of  the  pronouns  conjunctive. 
jMasculine  and  feminine. 

1.  jMc,        VUQy    I. 

2.  llOSy  VJQ. 

0.  te,     thee. 

4.  vos,  OS,     yon. 

n.  /<?,  lo,  se,     him.     ^ing.  mascul.  f/a^.  and  accusat, 

(3.  la,  le,  se,     her.     Sing,  feniin.  r/a/.  and  flca/^a^ 

7.  /t'>9,  /o5,  5e,     them.     Mascul.  plur.  dat.  and  accus, 

8.  /a.?,  /^v,  5t',     them.     Fern,  plnr,  dat.  and  accusat. 

9.  iS','^     himself,  herself     Dat.  inK\  accusat.  of  bolh 

genders  and  nnmbers. 

Rule  53.     Construction  of  these  pronouns. 

Every  lime  the  verb  is  either  in  the  infinitive  or  the 
imperative  mood,  the  conjunctive  pronouns  come  after. 
In  all  other  cases  the  general  rule  will  have  them  before 
it.      E J  ample  : 

No  querre  darlo,  I  will  not  give  it ;  dah,  give  it. 

Dando/o,  in  giving  it  -,   lo  hare,  I  will  do  it. 

Le  escrihiid,  he  will  write  to  him  j  /€  digo,  I  tell  thee, 

Sucedeme  muchas  veces ;  it  happens  to  me  very  often. 

Rule  54.  How  to  place  the  personal  pronoujis  conjunctive. 

The  personal  conjunctive  pronouns  being  followed  by 
one  of  the  relsrtive  of  things,  lo,  la,  los,  las\  preserve 
between  them  the  sameoi-der  as  above. 

1 .  When  the  latter  are  preceded  by  him,  them,  or  se. 

2.  When  the  verb  commands  j  for  in  this  case  the 
pronoun,  which  is  in  the  dative  case  in  English,  is  always 
put  in  Spanish  before  the  one  which  is  in  the  accusative. 
Example  : 

Selo  dire,  I  will  tell  it  him  ;  decidmeloj  tell  it  me. 


SYNTAX  or  PRONOUNS.  l"/^ 

SECTION    IV. 

JFhen   the  pronouns  are  or  are  .not  to  he  repeated  in 
Spanish. 

Rule  55.  The  personal  pronouns  yo,  tu,  el,  &c.  repeated. 

The  personal  pronouns  of  the  first  and  second  persons, 
such  as  yo,  tu,  nosotro<;,  vosotros,  are  usually  repeated, 
or  rather  understood  in  Spanish,  before  every  verb'  of 
which  they  are  the  nominative  case.     Example  : 

Amards  a  Dios  de  todo  in  cor  axon  ;  .{tu)  perdonards  d 
ius  euemigos,  y  {tu)  rogards  por  tus  perseguidores. 

You  shall  love  God  with  all  your  heart  j  you  shall  for* 
gite  your  enemies,  and  pray  {or  those  that  persecute  you. 

The  pronouns  of  the  third  person  are  also  repeated. 
Example :  ^ 

Ellas  son  amahlesya  que  (ellas)  legustan  dvm. 

They  are  lovely  since  they  please  you. 

In  other  circumstances  the  same  pronouns  are  not  re- 
peated. 

El  tomo-ciudades,  conquistS  provinciaSj  y  sojuzgd  na- 
ciones. 

He  took  cities,  conquered  provinces^  and  subdued  na- 
tions. 

Rule  50.     The  governed  pronouns  not  always  repeated. 

The  pronouns  relative  to  persons  are  always  repeated 
in  Spanish  before  every  verb  they  are  governed  by,  whe- 
ther they  are  repeated  or  not.     Example  : 

Un  hijo  bien  criado  no  se  rebela  contra  su  padre;  el  lo 
quiere,  lo  honra,  y  lo  respeta. 

A  son  well  educated  never  rebels  against  his  father ; 
he  loves,  honours,  and  respects  him. 

Amo  lo,  y  lo  amare  siempre,  sise  porta  bien, 

I  love,  and  shall  always  love  him,  if  he  behave  well. 


^7^  SYNTAX   OF  rRONTOUN'i^ 


SECTION    V. 

T)ist'niction  between  el,  el  la,  and  si. 

Uule  5y.     Himself,    herself,    itself,,   expressed  by  si,  m 
mismo^  si  misma ;  si  mismos,  si  mismas. 

The  compound  pronouns  himself,  herself ,  themselves, 
Veined  to  a  verb,  are  generally  expressed  by  se,  if  it.  is  re- 
flected ;  but  if  not,  iiimsi'l/'is  expressed  by  el  or  cl  mismo^ 
and  herself  by  ella  misma  ;  themselves,  by  ellos  or  ellos 
mismos,  masculine  j  by  elks  or  ellas  mismns,  for  the  fe- 
minine.     Exainpie  .* 

Ml se  somete  /t  las ordknes  devm,  perd no ^$ki satUficho* 
He  submits  himsdi;  to  your  ertkrs^  but  h@  ii  not  mtii« 

Ella  halla  siempre  de  si  misma,  y  nunca  de  otros. 

She  speaks  always  of  herself  and  never  of  others, 

FJlos  h.an  venido  por  si  mismos  al  campo. 

They  are.  come  of  their  own  accord  into  the  country. 

The  compound  pronouns  himself  and  herself  are  ex- 
pressed by  si,  speaking  of  persons  in  general,  and  atter 
the  indeterminate  pronouns  se,  cada  uno,  al^unoy  al^unai 
ijualquiera,  este,  or  es:a  cjuieii.     Example  : 

El  homlre  que  solo  se  amd  a  si  mismo,  no  cs  propio  para 
la  socieddd. 

The  man  who  loves  nobody  but  himself  is  not  fit  foe 
society. 

Qualf/t/iera  que  de  si  solo  piensa,  es  indigno  de  vivir. 

Whoever  tliinks  only  of  himself,  is  unwortny  to  live. 

Hide  58.     Itself  is  rendered  by  si  or  si  mismo. 

llie  impersonal  pronoun  itself  is  expressed  by  si,  and 
not  bv  e!\  when  it  has  reference  to  the  word  esto  or  esor 


SYNTAX  OF  PRONOUNS.  l/C) 

'  to  a  substantive  singular  and  masculine,  which  repre- 
'lits  an  animate  object.     Example: 

Elima?i  atrae  a  si  el  hierro. 

The  loadstone  attracts  iron  to  itself. 

La  tierra  esfertil  de  si  mistna.  v 

Karlh  is  fruitful  of  itself. 


Chapter  V. 

OF  POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS. 

Rule  5Q.     The  possessive  pronouns  my,  thy,  his,  her,  are 
rendered  in  Spanish  hy  mi,  tii,  su.    , 

The  possessive  pronouns  are  only  three  in  number,  mi^ 
my ;  tiiy  thy  j  su,  his  or  her  ;  and  make  their  plural  by 
the  addition  of  an  .f.     Example  : 

Mi  padre,  mi  madre,  y  mis  hermdnos  estan  en  el  campOi 

My  father,  my  mother,  and  brothers  are  in  the  country. 

Til  primo  y  su  hermana  cstdn  paseando  juntos. 

Thy  cousin  and  his  sister  are  walking  together. 

Su  padre  ha  vendido  su  cahalh  d  su  sotrina,  y  ella  lo 
reuendio  a  su  prima. 

His  father  has  sold  his  horse  to  his  niece,  and  she  sold 
it  again  to  her  cousin. 

Rule  Go.     Our,  expressed  by  nueslro  and  nuestra. 

The  possessive  pronoun,  nueslro  and  nuestra,  ought  to 
agree  in  number  with  the  substantive  they  have  a  refe- 
!    rence  to,  and  not  with  the  possessor.     Example: 

Nuestra  casa  tiene  una  perspectiva  may  agradable,  y 
nuestro  jardin  estd  adornado  de  beUishnas  Jlores, 

Our  house  has  a  very  fine  prospect,  and  our  garden  is 
adorned  with  the  finest  flowers. 


180  SYNTAX  OF  POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS. 

Mis  criados  son  muy  perezosos. 
My  servants  are  very  lazy. 
Sus  hermanas  son  muy  I'ludas^ 
His  sisters  are  very  pretty. 

Rule  61.     The  possessive  relative  pronouns. 

The  pronouns  possessive  relative  are  sometimes  fol- 
lowed by  a  substantive,  especially  in  exclamations 5  then 
the  substantive  comes  before,  and  the  pronoun  takes  no 
article.     Example : 

iDios  mio  1  my  God  !     /Madre  mia  !  my  mother ! 

Rule  62.     Possessive  relative,  mine,  thine. 

The  possessive  pronouns  mine,  thine,  his,  hers,  Szc. 
agree  in  Spanish  bolh  in  gender  and  number  with  the  an- 
tecedent substantive  to  which  they  refer,  and  are  always 
preceded  by  the  definite  article  el,  lo,  la,  los,  las.  Ex" 
ample  : 

Los  enemigos  han  destruido  muchas  casas :  la  mia  y  la 
vuestra  futrofi  ahrasadas ;  pero  la  suya  no  ha  recihido  daiio 
alguno. 

The  enemies  have  destroyed  many  houses :  yours  and 
mine  have  been  burnt  j  but  his  has  not  suffered. 

Rule  63,    Mine,  sometimes  expressed  hy  mis. 

When  the  relative  possessives  mine,  thhie,  his',  hers, 
Src.  are  preceded  by  of,  they  are  expressed  in  Spanish  by 
mis,  tus,  sus,  8cc.     Example  : 

El  senor  A — d,  uno  de  mis  discipulos,  ha  aprendido  la 
lengua  Espanola  en  dosmeses. 

Mr.  A — d,  a  scliolar  of  mine,  has  learnt  the  Spanish 
language  in  two  months. 
Rule  64.     Mine,  thine,  eicpressed  hy  mlo,  tUyo,  suyo. 

When  the  verb  to  he  is  used  in  the  sense  of  lelonging 
to,  followed  by  one  of  the  personal  pronouns  to  me,  to 
thee,  &c.  those  pronouns  are  rendered  in  Spanish  by  one  of 
the  possessive  relatives,  whose  article  is  left  out.  Example.*  ^ 


SYISTAX  OF  DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS,  181 

Este  lihroes  mio.     This  is  my  book. 

■Creo  que  no  es  suyo.     I  do  not  think  it  is  yours. 

Esto  casa  es  suya.     That  house  rs  his. 

Rule  65.    Mine,  thine,  expressed  by  a  suhstantwe  in  the 
genitive  case. 

If  a  substantive  or  a  relative  pronoun  comes  after  the 
verb  to  he,  signifying  to  belong  to,  they  are  both  put  in 
the  genitive  case  in  Spanish,  as  well  as  in  English,  as : 

Este  caballo  es  de  mi  hermano. 

This  horse  is  my  brother's. 
^Cuya  or  de  cjuien  es  esta  casa  ?   Whose  house  is  that  ? 


Chapter  VI. 

OP  DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

iiule66,  Este,masc,  esia,  fern,  esio,  neut,  thisj  ese, 
viasc.  esa,  fem.  eso,  Jieut.  that  ;  estos,  masc.  plur. 
estas, fern. plur.  these  ;  a^zriaquel,  masc.  sing.  that. 

There  are  three  distinct  sorts  of  pronouns  : 

1.  Este  shows  the  thing  or  person  that  is  just  near  or 
by  us. 

2.  Ese  shows  the  thing  that  is  a  little  further  from  th# 
person  to  whom  one  speaks. 

3.  Aquel  shows  what  is  very  distant  from  the  person 
^vho  speaks,  as  well  as  from  him  who  is  spokea  to. — 
These  pronouns  are  generally  used  before  substantives  in 
-the  Spanisli  language.     Example  : 

Este  hombre  es  dodo.     This  man  is  learned. 

Esta  nifia  es  maliciosa.     This  little  girl  is  malicious. 

E^tejardin  esta  hien  cultivado. 

This  garden  is  in  good  order. 

Ese  pays  es  muyfcriil.  That  country  i$  very  fruitful* 


182  SYNTAX  or  DEMONSTRATIVE  PKONOUNS. 

j^quel  reyno  es  muy  pohlado. 
That  kingdom  is  very  well  peopled. 
The  demonstrative  pronouns  are  repeated  before  e^  ery 
substantive,  and  agree  vi^ith  each  in  gender  and  number, 
Exaviple: 

Este  huertOf  cslos  arholes,  esta  casa,  y  todas  estas  ta- 
Has  no  valen  quinientas  guineas. 

This  garden,  these  trees,  this  house,  and  all  these  plank3> 
are  not  worth  five  hundred  guineas. 

Este  homlre  es  unpicaro.     This  man  is  a  rogue. 

Estas  plumas  no  valen  nada. 

These  pens  are  good  for  nothing. 

Esq  es  lueno  de  comer.     This  is  good  to  eat. 

^Porque  ha  hecho  vmd.  eso  sin  mi  licencia? 

Why  did  you  do  that  without  my  leave  ? 

Bule  6/.    Qual,  or  loque^  what,  or  that  which. 

The  pronouns  that  which  or  what,  signifying  that 
thing,  are  expressed  in  Spanish  by  qual,  or  h  quaL,  al- 
ways singular  masculine  j  as  : 

Lo  que  es  agradalle  al  gusto,  es  muchas  veces  contrario 
a  la  salud. 

What  is  agreeable  to  the  taste  is  often  hurtful  to  the 
health. 

Lo  que  mns  deht'mos  temer,  es  la  calumnia. 
What  we  ought  to  fear  most  is  calumny. 
Lo  que  mas  deseo  es  que  se  haga  la  pd%. 
What  1  wish  most  is,  that  peace  may  be  made. 

Rule  68.     Eso,  esa,  this  or  that. 

When  the  demonstrative  pronouns  have  reference  to 
several  substantives,  this  and  these  refer  to  the  nearest 
object  or  last  spoken  of,  and  are  expressed  by  eso  and 
esa-j  and  those  that  have  reference  to  the  most  distant 


SYNTAX  OF  RELATIVE  PRONOUNS.  183 

I 

objects  are  expressed  by  aquel,  niasc.  j  aquella,  fem.  j 
aquello,  neut.     Eiample  : 

Elcuerpo  perJce,  el  alma  es  inniortal ;  sin  embargo  nos 
descuiddmos  de  esa,  para  sacrificarlo  tndo  a  aquel. 

The  body  perishes,  the  soul  is  immortal ;  however  we 
neglect  this,  in  order  to  sacrifice  every  thing  to  that. 

Aqui  hay  Lutnos  Ubros  j  (^  quales  qidere  vmd.  mas,  esos 
Q.  aquellos  ? 

Here  are  good  books ;  which  do  you  like  best,  these 
or  those  ? 

Rule  6g.     He  who  is  expressed  in  Spanish  by  el  que. 

When  the  personal  pronouns  he,  she,  they,  or  those, 
are  the  antecedent  of  who,  that,  or  which,  they  are  not  ex- 
pressed by  el  ox  ella,  as  before,  but  by  he  who,  rendered 
by  el  que  j'^she  who,  by  la  que ;  they  who,  by  los  que  or 
las  que ;  as  : 

El  que  no  puedeguardar  un  secreto  es  incapaz  de  golemar. 

He  who  cannot  keep  a  secret  is  incapable  of  govern- 
ing. 


Chapter  VII. 

OF  FxELATIVE  PRONOUNS. 
Rule  70.     Que,  quien,  qual,  who,  that,  or  which. 

The  relative  pronouns  who,  that,  or  which,  are  ex- 
pressed in  Spanish  by  que,  for  all  sorts  of  objects,  either 
with  or  without  a  nominative  case  between  them  and  the 
verb.     Example  : 

El  hombre  que  kabla.     The  man  who  speaks. 

El  libra  que  tengo.     The  book  which  I  have, 

L2  casa  qu"  he  visto  esta  Men  labrdda. 

The  house  that  I  have  seen  is  well  built. 
r2 


1B4  SYNTAX  OF  RELATIVE  PRONOUNS* 

Rule'^l.     Pel  qual,  cuyo,  de  quien  j  of  whom,  whose^ 
or  which. 

The  relative  pronouns  whose,  of  whom,  of  ivhich,  are 
usually  expressed  in  Spanish  by  cuyo,  m,  cuy^a,  f.  making^ 
their  plviral  cuym,  cuyas ;  de  (/uien,  hy  which,  piur» 
^uienes ;  qual\  ly  wh)m,  whose,  ^IwxdW'i  quales,  serving 
for  all  sorts  of  objects.     Example: 

ijfe  vis  to  al  hambre  de  quien  vmd.  halla. 

I  have  seen  the  man  of  wfiom  you  speak. 

Es  una  indispodcion  de  la  qual  el  cirujano  no  conoce  la 
causa. 

It  is  ao  illness  the  CtUise  of  which  is  unknown  to  the 
surgeon. 

If  the  antecedent  be  not  in  the  nominative  or  accusa- 
tive case,  whose  or  whom  are  expressed  by  cuyo,  cwja, 
according  to  the  gender  to  which  they  refer.     Example : 

Pedro,  cuyo  libro  teng/).     Peter,  whose  book  I  have* 

Es  un  homlre  cuya  diserecion  no  niego. 

He  is  a  man  whose  discretion  I  do  not  deny. 

N.  B.  The  relative  pronoun ^om  whom,  which  an- 
swers to  the  Latin  ablative,  is  always  expressed  by  de 
quien.     Example  : 

El  homlre  de  quien  he  reciUdo  una  carta  ayer,  estd  en- 
fermo. 

Themanyrow  whom  I  received  a  letter  yesterday,  is  ill. 

Rule  72.     Quien  or  el  qual,  la  qual ;  tuhom,  which. 

When  the  relative  pronouns  are  in  the  dative  case,  or 
after  any  preposition,  they  are  usually  expressed  by 
quien,  speaking  of  persons,  and  always  by  el  qual,  nu 
la  qual,  f ,  and  /o  qual,  n.  losquales,  and  las  quales,  pi., 
speaking  of  animals  or  things.     Example  : 

Su  padre  devmd.  es  un  howlre'dqu'\er\  debeohedech,^ 
Your  father  is  a  man  whom, you  ought  to  oUey , 


SYNTAX  OF  INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS.  185 

La  gloria  a  la  qual  los  heroes  pretenden  es  una  gloria 
falsa.  ^ 

The  glory  to  which  heroes  aspire  is  a  false  ^ory. 
Es  una  raznn  a  la  qual  no  hay  que  replicar. 
It  is  a  reason  to  which  there  is  no  reply. 
Evite  las  culpas  en  las  quales  he  caido. 
Avoid  the  faults  into  which  i  have  fallen. 

Rule  73.     Place  and  concord  of  the^relative  pronouns. 

The  relative  pronouns  are  placed  in  Spanish  imme- 
diately after  the  nouns  or  pronouns  to  which  they  refer, 
and  agree  with  them  in  gender  and  number,  as  : 
Los  lihros  d  los  qnales  hJ  subscrito  son  may  huenos. 
The  books  to  which  I  have  subscribed  are  very  good. 


Chapter  VIIT. 

OF  INTERROGAIiVE  PRONOUNS. 

The  interrogative  pronouns  are  in  English  these  three  : 
who,  tvhich,  and  what ;  they  are  expressed  in  Spanish  as 
follow ; 

Rule  74.     Que,  el  qual,  la  qual  j  who,  which,  what. 

When  the  word  which  is  interrogatively  used,  it  is  al- 
ways expressed  in  Spanish  by  que  or  qual  for  the  singu- 
lar, and  que  and  qunles  for  the  plural.     Example  : 

(J  Qual  de  csos  caballosvie  aconseja  vm.  de  comprar  ? 

Which  of  these  horses  do  you  advise  me  to  buy  r 

<jCon  qual  de  mis  hermanas  quiere  vmd.  casarse? 

JVhich  of  my  sisters  do  you  wish  to  marry  } 

^•Quales  de  esios  homhres  iiustres  estima  vni.  mas  ? 

Which  of  those  illustrious  men  do  you  esteem  best  ? 
r3 


I8d^  SYNTAX  OP  INTER ROG ATI OSr^i 

A  quellos  que  han  sido  menos  harlaros. 
Those  who  have  been  less  barbarous. 

Rule  75.     Que?     What? 

When  the  interrogative  pronoun  what  sigrifies  what 
thing,  it  is  expressed  in  Spanish  by  que.     Example  : 
^Que  le  ha  sucedido  ?    What  has  happened  to  you  ? 
^  Que  censura  vm.  en  esta  olra  ? 
What  do  you  blame  in  this  wxjrk  ? 


Chapter  IX. 

OF  THE  DIFFERENT  SORTS  OF  INTERROGA^ 
TIONS. 

Rule  yQ.  Interrogations  made  with  donde,  adonde,  como. 

Besides  the  interrogative  pronouns  of  which  we  have, 
treated  before,  a  question  may  be  asked  with  the  follow- 
ing adverbs :  quanta  9  how  much  ?  how  many  ?  como  ? 
how  ?  porque?  for-what  ?  or,  what  for  ?  donde 9  where  ? 
dedonde?  from  whence  ?  &c.     Example: 

lOxudLUio^  cah alios  iiene  vm  9 

How  many  horses  have  you  got  ? 

5  Como  estd  su  pddre  hoy  ? 

How  does  your  father  do  to-day. 

jPorque  no  me  responde  vm9  Why  do  you  not  answer  me? 

^Forque  me  kab la  vm.  Jrigles9 

Why  do  you  speak  English  to  me  ? 

^Quando  ahandonard  vm.  su  perexa  9 

When  will  you  forsake  your  laziness? 

^Quanta  tiempo?     How  long  ? 

Buleyy.     The  pronouns  yo,  tu,  el,  nosotros,  vosotros^ 
and  ellos,  ^c.  go  after  the  verb  in  an  interrogation. 
When  the  following  pronouns,  yoytUj  e/,.&c.  are  the- 


SYNTAX  OF  INTERROGATIONS.  18/ 

nominative  case  of  a  verb  interrogatively  used,  they  are 
placed  immediately  after  it  or  its  auxiliary  ;  but  in  the 
Spanish  language,  the  common  way  of  speaking  among 
polite  people  is  to  speak  by  the  third  person  singular  in- 
stead of  the  second  person  plural,  as  the  following  ex- 
ample will  show  : 

fiHa  estddovm.indispuesto  hoy  ? 
Have  you  been  ill  to-day  ? 
^Ha  aprendido  vm.  la  Lengua  Italiana  ? 
Have  you  learnt  the  Italian  language  ? 

Rule  78.     In  an  interrogatioji  the  substantive  always  fol- 
lows the  verb  in  Spanish. 

When  a  substantive  or  any  of  the  following  pronouns 
— este,  ra.  esta^  f.  eslo,  n.  this  j  ese,  m.  esa,  f.  eso,  n. 
that  J  ninguno,  ra.  ninguna,  f.  nddie,  nobody ;  alguien, 
algun,vn.  alguna,i.  somebody  j  or  nuda,  noihing — are 
the  nominative  case  to  a  verb  interrogatively  used,  these 
words  generally  follow  the  verb.     Eaantple  : 

^Es  eso  bii^/io  de  comer 9    Is  thit  good  to  eat  ? 

^Ha  preguntddo  alguien  por  mi? 

Did  a?iy  body  ask.  for  me  ? 

Eule  79.     Es  >     Is  thai  ?    No  es  ?    Is  not  that  ? 

In  English  the  demonstrative  pronouns  this  or  that 
for  the  singular,  and  these  or  those  tor  the  plural,  are  put 
before  the  possessive  pronouns  viy,  his,  your,  their^  when 
questioning  to  whom  such  or  such  thing  belongs.  Those 
sorts  of  iuterrogations  are  expressed  in  Spanish  by  es  j  or, 
if  the  sentence  is  negative,  by  no  es.     Example  : 

^Es  ese  su  sombrero  ?     Is  that  your  hat  ? 

^No  es  esa  su  casa  ?     Is  not  that  your  howse  ? 

^No  son  i  stas  smoritas  muy  lindas  ? 

Are  not  those  ladies  very  pretty  ? 


18S         SYNTAX  OF  INTER KOGATTONS. 

^Hdn  producido  lien  la^  vinas  9 
Have  the  vines  borne  a  good  crop  ? 
^  No  hay  abimdancia  defrulas  ? 
Is  there  not  abundance  of  fruit  ? 


Chapter  X. 

Different  sorts  of  que. 

There  are  in  the  Spanish  language  six  sorts  of  que, 
called,  1.  que,  relative  j  2.  que,  interrogative;  3.  que, 
admirative  ;  4.  que,  conditional ;  5.  que,  conjunctive  ; 
6.  que,  comparative. 

Having  spoken  at  large  of  the  two  first  in  the  seventh 
and  eighth  chapters,  we  will  now  treat  of  the  remaining 
four. 

Rule  80.     Quo  !   {admirative)  how  !  or  how  much  I 

The  que  admirative  expresses  wonder  or  surprise  ;  it 
answers  to  the  En^^lish  words  how  !  tvhai  J  how  much  ! 
how  many  I     Example  : 

[  Que  huen  aijre  tiene  vm. !     How  well  you  look  ! 

;  Que  visla  tan  hermosa  !     What  a  fine  prospect ! 

/  Que  honita  !  Parece  tan  Iiermosa  como  un  angel. 
How  pretty  !  She  looks  as  beautiful  as  an  angel. 

Observe,  1.  That  the  adjective  which  follows  how  ia 
English  is  always  put  after  the  verb  in  Spanish  : 

/  Que  soy  inftliz  I    How  unhappy  I  am  ! 

/  Que  trabdjo  wdd  vm,  por  mi  ! 
How  much  trouble  you  take  for  me  ! 

2.  Uhow  maity  were  preceded  by  the  preposition  to,  oj\ 
or  any  other,  it  should  be  expressed  by  quanios  or  quan.' 
tas.     Example : 


SYNTAX  OF  INTERROGATIONS.  3  89 

/  A  quantos  pdlgros  no  esti'we  yo  expuesto  en  Francia  ! 
To  how  many  dangers  have  I  not  been   exposed  in 
France  ! 

Rule  81.     Que  (conditional),  whether  or  if. 

The  conditional  (pie  is  used  in  the  beginning  of  a  sen- 
tence for  the  word  whether,  and  in  the  middle  to  avoid 
the  repetition  of  si  j  in  both  cases  it  governs  the  sub- 
junctive mood.     Example : 

Que  lo  haga  6  no,  no  me  dd  cuidddo. 

"Whether  he  does  it  or  not,  I  do  not  care. 

Si  el  Setior  B.  vinitse  y  no  estuviese  en  casa,  que  me 
aguarde. 

If  Mr.  B.  comes  and  I  am  out,  let  him  wait  for  me. 

Ride  82.     Que  used  with  several  conjunctions. 

The  que  conjunctive  may  be  used  with  many  conjunc- 
tions, and  particularly  with  the  twelve  following  : 

1.  j^n  que,  that.  7.  Desde  que,  since. 

2.  A  mcTios  que,  unless.         8.  Hasta  que,  till. 

3.  Antes  que,  before.  9.   Quando  que,  when, 

4.  Aun  que,  yet.  10.  Par  que,  because. 

5.  For  terndr  que,  for  fear.    11.  Luego  que,  as  soon  as. 

6.  Es  menester  que,  it  must,  12.   Que  (coraparat,),  than. 

Examples. 

1 .  Fenga  aqui  quele  hahle  a  vm. 

Come  here,  that  I  may  speak  to  you. 

2.  No  ire  a  verle  a  menos  que  me  convide. 

I  will  not  go  and  see  him,  unless  he  invites  roe. 

3.  No  ird  vm.  antes  que  e/  sol  saiga. 

You  shall  not  go  out  before  the  sun  rises. 

4.  Aun  que  tubiera  todo  el  oro  del  mundo,  no  estaria  sa^ 

tisfecho. 
Though  he  should  have  all  the  gold  in  the  w^orld,  yet 
he  would  not  be  satisfied, 


IQO     SYNTAX  OF  INDETERMINATE  PRONOUNS* 

5.  Fay  use,  por  temor  que  el  amo  venga. 
Go,  fur  fear  the  master  should  come. 

6.  Es  menester  que  vm.  se  vnya  inmediatamente. 
Ytiu  must  go  immediately. 

7.  Estd  sienipre  /u?iguido  desde  que  estd  enfermo. 
He  is  always  lingering  since  he  has  been  ill. 

8.  Quedese  vm.  hasta  que  pdse  la  lluvia. 
Stay  here  till  the  rain  be  over. 

9.  Yo  estdba  en  Madrid  quando  viurio. 
1  was  in  Madrid  mhcn  he  died. 

10.  No  quierejuntarse  con  nosotros,  por  que  no  tiene  dinero. 
He  will  not  join  with  us,  because  he  has  no  money. 
W,  Le  volvere  a  vm.  su  libro  luego  que  mi  padre  lo  hdya 
leido. 
I  will  return  you  your  book  as  soon  as  my  father  has 
read  it. 
•12.  Su  padre  es  mas  viejo  que  el  mio. 
Your  father  is. older  than  mine. 
Note.  The  conjunction  que  is  also  placed  between  two 
verbs,  and  serves  to  particularize  the  sense  of  the  first  j  as : 
Creo  que  ninguno puede  serf ellz  sin  practicur  la  virtM, 
I  think  no  one  can  be  happy  without  practising  virtue. 

ChapteRjXL 
OF  INDETERMINATE  PRONOUNS. 

Rule  S3.     Use  of  the  particle  su  J  one. 

All  vague  and  general  reports  expressed  in  English  by 
they  say,  people  say,  one  says,  it  is  said,  it  is  reported, 
and  such  like,  are  rendered  in  Spanish  by  se;  with  the 
verb  in  the  third  person  singular  of  die  active  voice  ;  as 

Se  dice,  se  cree,  se  ratijica  de  todas  partes  que  la  cosa 
es  asi. 

People  say,  it  is  thought,  they  ^maintain  every  where 
that  it  is  so. 


SYNTAX  OF  INDETERMINATE  PRON'OUNS.  iQl 

Se  cree  que  la  pdz  se  hara  este  ano. 
It  is  believ.ed  that  peace  will  be  made  this  year. 
^Se  han  recihido  cartas  de  Espaita  hoy  ? 
Have  letters  been  received  from  Spain  to-day  ? 
Se  ha  despachado  hoy  una  pasta  d  Jlemdn'ia. 
A  courier  has  been  sent  to-day  to  Germany. 
Se  must  be  repeated  before  every  verb  of  which  it  is 
the  nominative  case  -,  as  : 

Se  ceUhra,  se  culpa,  se  amendxa,  se  castiga,  ^c. 
They  praise,  they  blame,  they  threaten,  they  punish. 

Rule  84.  Different  significations  of  raismo,  misraa. 

The  word  the  same  is  expressed  in  Spanish  by  el  mis' 
mo,  ra,  la  misvia,  f.  for  the  singular ;  los  mismos,  m.  las 
viismas,  f.  for  the  plural,  whether  it  be  joined  or  rela- 
tive to  a  substantive  ;  as  : 

La  misraa  cosa  iio  gusta  a  todos. 

The  same  thing  does  not  please  every  body. 

Las  costumhres  no  son  las  mismas  en  todos  ^los  paises. 

Customs  are  not  the  same  in  every  country. 

The  words  mismo  and  misma  are  sometimes  used  in 
Spanish  to  give  more  energy  to  the  speech;  then  they 
come  after  a  substantive  or  a  pronoun,  and  answer  to  the 
English  expression  himself,  herself,  itself     Example  : 

El  rey  mismo  no  lo  quiere.  The  king  himself  op^poses  it. 

La  religion  misma  lo  ha  prohilido. 

Religion  itself  has  forbidden  it. 

The  words  mismo  and  tamhien  are  sometimes  used  like 
an  adverbial  particle ;  then  they  answer  to  the  English 
words  a/50  and  even. 

Rule  85,     Muchos,  muchas  j  many  or  several. 

The  words  many  and  several  are  expressed  by  muchos, 
ra.  pi.  and  muchas,  f.  pi.     Example: 


192    SYNTAX  OF  INDETERMINATE  PRONOUNS, 

Muchos  sc  eiiganan  queriendo  enganar  d  otros. 
Many  deceive  themselves  when  they  want  to  deceive 
others. 

No  se  aplique  vm  a  muchas  cosas  d  la  par. 
Do  not  apply  yourself  to  several  things  at  once. 

jRide  86.     Otro,  otra,  pronoun  and  adjective^  another. 

The  indeterminate  pronoun  other,  another,  is  ex- 
pressed by  otro,  m.  otra,  f.  otros,  pi.  m.  otras,  pi.  f. 
These  words  are  either  pronouns  or  adjectives  :  when 
pronouns,  they  are  always  masculine  3  and  when  adjec- 
tives they  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the  substan- 
tive to  which  they  refer.     Example : 

Otro  no  le  hubiera  perdonado  a  vm.  tanfacilmente  conio 
yo  he  hecho. 

Another  would  not  have  forgiven  you  so  easily  as  I  did. 

No  haUe  vm.  mat  de  los  otros  si  quiere  que  los  otros  ko 
kahlen  de  el. 

Do  not  speak  ill  of  others,  if  you  will  not  that  others 
speak  ill  of  you. 

N.  B.  When  the  word  others  is  in  the  genitive  or  da- 
tive case,  it  is  most  commonly  expressed  in  Spanish  by 
proximo ;  as  : 

No  debemos  desear  la  hacienda  de  nuestro  proximo. 

W^e  must  not  covet  other  men's  goods. 

No  haga  vm.  a  su  proximo  lo  que  no  quisiera  que  h 
hiciese. 

Do  not  do  to  others  what  you  would  not  they  ^ould 
do  to  you. 

Jlule  87.  Cada  uno,  cada  una  3   every  one,  every  body. 

The  indeterminate  pronouns  ev€ry  one,  every  body,  are 
generally  expressed  by  cada  uno,  m.  cada  una,  f.  and  are 
always  singular.     Example: 

Dios  prevtiard  a  cada  uno  styunsus  ohras. 

God  will  reward  €ve7y  body  according  to  his  merits. 


SYNTAX    OF    INDETERMlNrAT*    PROKOUXS  IQS 

Cada  uno  ohra  a  su  manor  a. 

Every  one  acts  after  his  own  way. 

The  word  every  before  a  substantive  is  expressed  bjr 
cada,  adjective.     Example  : 

Cada  ciencia  tiene  sus  principios. 

Every  science  has  its  principles,  t 

Cada  pais  tiene  sus  costumbres. 

Every  country  ha?  its  customs. 
The  word  each  is  also  expressed  by  cada  uno ;  as  ; 

Ponga  vm.  esos  Ubros  cada  uno  en  su  lugar. 

Put  these  books  each  in  its  place. 

Los  quadros  de  los  grdndes  maestros  tienen  £ada.  uno  su 
merito. 

The  pictures  of  great  painters  have  each  their  merit. 

Rule  SS.     Alguno,  alguiw,  awrfalgun,  somebody. 

The  indeterminate  pronouns  somebody,  any  body,  are 
expressed  by  alguno,  masc.  alguna,  fern,  singular.  Ex- 
ample : 

Alguno  veridrd  hoy  a  comer  con  nosotros. 

Somebody  will  come  to  dine  with  us  to-day. 

fiHa  alguno  dudado  jamas  de  la  existencia  de  Dios  ? 

Has  ever  any  body  doubted  the  existence  of  God  ? 

When  some  or  any  are  substantively  used,  they  are  ex- 
pressed by  unos  or  unas,  or  algunos  or  algunaSy  always  in 
the  plural.     Example : 

Me  servire  de  algunos  de  sus  Ubros. 

1  will  make  use  of  some  of  your  books. 

^Condce  vm.  algunas  de  a(fuellas  senoras  ? 

Do  you  know  any  of  those  ladies  ? 

Tengo  naranjas,  ^  quiire  vm.  algunas  ? 

I  have  some  oranges^  will  you  have  any  ? 


19*1   SYNTAX  OF  INDETERMINATE  PRONQUNS. 

Of  TOD o,  and  its  various,  constructions. 
The  word  todo  admits  of  a  great  diversity  in  the  Spa- 
njsl^  langiw^c^  beixig  either  a  substantive,  an  adjective,  a 
pronoun,  and  even  an  adverb,  according  to  the  following 
explanation. 

Rule  89.     El  todo,  sul)stanilve,  masc.  sing,  the  whole. 

When  the  English  wor4  the  whole  is  not  placed  before 
a  noun,  it  is  a  subs^tantive,  and  expressed  in  Spanish  by 
el  todo,  always  sii-igalar  masculine.     Example  : 

El  todo  cs  mas  grande  que  su  parte. 

The  whole-  is  greater  than  its  part, 

Tomare'el  todo.     I  will  take  the  tvhole. 

The  word  all  or  every  thing  followed  by  a  verb  is  also 
a  substantive,  and  expressed  by  todo  without  an  article  j 
as  : 

Todo  es  vafiiddd  en  este  viundo. 

All  is  vanity  in  this  world. 

Rique%as,  dignidades,  honras,  todo  desapartce  e?i  la 
muerte. 

Fortune,  dignities,  honours,  every  //ziw^  disappear  when 
we  die. 

Rule  90.     Todo  el,  toda  la,  adject,  all,  or  the  whole. 

When  the  word  all  or  the  whole  comes  before  a  sub- 
stantive it  is  an  adjective,  and  expressed  by  todo  el,  m. 
toda  la,  f.  for  the  singular,  and  by  todos  los,  m.  todas 
las,  f.  for  the  plural.     Example: 

Soy  con  todo  tl  respecto  posible  su  humilde  servidor,  ^c. 
-    I  am  with  all  possible  respect  your  humble  servant,  &:c. 

Note.  When  todo  stands  for  the  word  every  placed  be- 
fore a  substantive,  it  takes  an  article  in  the  plural,  and 
not  in  the  singular.     Example: 

Todo  muchacho  dele  oledecer  d  sus  superiores. 

Every  child  ought  to  obey  his  superiors. 


SYNTAX  OF  iNnETEHMlNATE  PROKOUN'S.     195 

Todos  los  homlres  dmdn  sus  plac&es. 
Every  man  is  protie  to  pleasures. 

Rilegi,     Todo  lo  que,  all  that,  even/  thing  thai*  , 

The  Bnglish  word  nil  thaty  evirry  thing  that,  an^  ^Iso 
whatever  signifies  «// /Aof,  are' pronouns,  and  expre^se  I 
in  Spanish  by  todo  lo  yr/e,  always  singular  i^ p.. 1  masculine* 
Eramfile  • 

Todo  lo  que  dice  vm.  es  vcrdad* 

Jtl  that  you  say  is  trae._^ 

f{No  havhilo  vm.  todo  lo  qne^aHa  que  ver  ? 

liave  yon  not  seen  every  thing  \\\2iX.  was  to  be  seen  ? 

*  ■     .......... 

Rule  Q2.     Todo,  decVinnVfe  and'tadccnnaile,  anslvcrhttr 

to  the  Evgliih  word  quite. 

When  the  word  todo  stands  f9r  the  adverb  ^7/ j/^^^.eTi- 

iireiy,  in  a  sentence,  it  is  always  indeclinaWe.  befo|:e^ 

noun  masculine,  singjular  «i- piuraL     Example:         , 
Su  padre  es  todQ  podefoso  ,ea  estahia.  . , 
Your  tather  is  quite  pmv^rfTd  Inr  tbiti.  bTjuJ. 
La  Semra  M.fuc  todo  sorpresa  aloir  estas  notfciat. 
Madam  M.  w  as  'quite  surprised  at  that  news. 
Sus  hermdna3  todas  opulentas  y  todas  hermusas  que 

scan  no  se  casa?i. 

Your  sisters,  a*  rich  ^d  handsoline  as  they  are,  do  not 

marry. 

Rule  93.     Qualquiera,  however,  whatever,  isfc,     . 

The  English  word  whatever ,  followed  by  a  substantirfe-' 
and  any  other  verb  than  to  be,  is  an  adjective,  and  ex- 
pressed by  qualquiera  before  a  noun  singular,  as  well  as 
(before  a  plural  number. 

The  construction  is,  I .  qualquiera  ;  2.  the  substan- 
tive 3  3.  que;  4.  the  verb  in  the  subjunctive  5 — the  rest- 
as  in  English  ;  as  : 

s  2 


IC}6         SYNTAX    OF  INDETERMINATE  tBONOUNSS. 

Qlualqwerafalta  que  haya  cometido,  le  perdoriard. 

Whatever  fault  he  has  committed,  1  will  forgive  him. 

Qualquiera  riqutza  que  ter/ga  vm.  nunca  estd  satis- 
fecho. 

Whatever  riches  you  may  have,  you  are  never  satisfied. 

Qualquiera  cosa  que  hiciere  para  mi  le  preiniare  d  ym, 
por  el  la. 

Whatever  you  do  for  me,  I  will  reward  you  for  it. 

Rule  94.  Qualquiera,  qutenquiera  j  whoever,  whosoever. 

The  indrterminate  pronoun^^  whoever,  whosoever',  are 
most  ccmmonly  exj;re8sed  in  Spuijinlj  by  quulqukra  or 
quleiiquiera,  when  thty  are  tho  nominative  or  accusative 
case.     Example: 

Dlos  castigard  quienqiiiera  hahrd  traspasado  ms  ler/es, 
God  will  puiush  whosoever  hhall  have  transgressed  his 
laws. 

De  quienquiera  que  tu  hdl'les  evita  la  calumnia. 
Of  whomsoever  you  speak,  avoid  slander. 

Rule  95.    Uno  y  otro,  one  another f 

The  indeterminate  pronouns  one  another  and  each 
other,  are  expressed  in  Spanish  by  otro,  m.  otra,  f.  for 
tlie  singular ;  oiros,  m.  pi.  otras,  f.  pi. 

The  first  of  these  pronouns  is  always  in  the  nomi- 
native in  Spanish  :  thus,  if  they  are  preceded  by  a  prepo- 
sition in  P^nglish,  that  preposition  must  be  put  between 
them  in  Spanish  j  as : 

Mi  hermano  y  su  hermana  hahlan  siempre  uno  c^eotro  j 
piensan  uno  en  otro  ;  han  nacido  uno  para  otro  5  iio  puc- 
den  vivir  uno  sin  otro. 

My  brother  and  your  sister  speak  always  of  ow^  another  j 
they  think  of  owe  another ;  they  are  made  for  one  another-, 
they  cannot  live  without  one  another. 


SYNTAX    O F  I X  D E T« I.  W I N-A^'fi-  FHO X O U  N  S .  lt)f 

Pcule  gd.     AmloSj     uno  u  olro,     lu  uno  ni  olro. 
Both  J       either;  neither. 

These  pronouns  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  th:; 
noun  to  which  they  have  a  reference  j  if  they  are  pre- 
ceded by  a  preposition  in  English,  that  preposition  must 
be  repeated  in  Spanish  before  uno  and  before  otro.  Ex- 
ample  : 

Lo  hare  por  vno  y  por  otro.  I  will  do  '\iJor  them  both.. 

Lo  hare  por  uno  6  por  otro.   I  will.do  it.  for  either. 

No  lo  hare  ni  por  uno  ni  por  otro. 

I  Vv'ill  do  ityb?-  neither  of  ihfni. 

Me  sirvo  de  ambas  manos.     I  use  loth  han.ds. 

Rule  gy.     NingUTta  persona,  nadiCj  nobody. 

The  indeterminate  pronoun  nobo'ly  is  expressed  by 
nivguna  persona,  masculine  and  singular.     Example: 

Ninguna  persona  conoce  sus  sentimientos. 

Nobody  knows  his  sentiments. 

J  ningima  persona  gusta  vm.     You  please  nobody. 

Persona  is  masculine  as  a  pronoun,  and  feminine  as  a 
substantive. 

A  ninguna  persona  conozco  ta?t  erudiia  como  vm, 

I  know  nobody  so  learned  as  you. 

Conozco  una  persona  tan  docta  r'omo  vm,     (Fern.) 

I  know  a  person  as  learned  as  you  :ire. 

Rule  93.     Ninguno,  ninguna,  none,  Tiot  one. 

None  at^d  not  one  are  expressed  in  Spai1i«?h  by  nlnguno 
and  ninguna,  both  used  adjectively.     Exampl 

Tenia   muchos  cimigos  ;  pero   ninguno  de  t.a..^ //ic  : 
asistido. 

I  h:!d  many  friends  -,  yet  not  one  of  tbemb^  reli€ved;^mc 
-l:smg\in2i  de  estas  mugcres  estdba  prtsente, 
iyp/ie  of  those  women  were  present. 
s,.3. 


IPB  SYNTAX    OF    NEGATIOKS. 

Rule  99.     Nada^  nothing. 
The  word  nothing  is  expressed  by  nada.     Example : 
Nada  hay  mas  daTioso  a  la  reputacion  que  la  calumnia. 
Nothing  is  tnore  hurtful  to  reputation  than  slander. 
Nada  he  vis  to  mas  ogiadalle. 
1  have  seen  nothing  more  agreeable. 


Chapter  XII. 

SEVERAL  MODES  OF  NEGATION. 

This  chapter  is  divided  into  two  sections  :  the^ri^  ex- 
plains how  to  express  in  Spanish  the  English  negations  j 
the  5eco72c?  shows  the  several  circumstances  in  which  a  ne- 
gative expression  is  required  in  Spanish^  though  there 
may  be  none  in  English. 

SECTION    I. 

How  to  express  in  Spanish  the  English  negations. 

The  English  negations  are  eight :  1 .  nolody ;  2.  noney 
or  720^;  3.  nothing;  4.  neither',  5,  never ^  (},  ly  no 
means;  7.  no;  8.  7iot.  We  have  spoken  in  the  pre- 
ceding rules  of  the  three  first,  therefore  we  wilU  only 
treat  here  of  the  five  others, 

Rule  ICO.     No,  ni ;  neither,  or  r^pr. 

The  word  neither,  besides  its  being  an  indeterminate 
pronoun  (as  has  been  said  before,  rule  96),  is  also  a  ne- 
gative ccnj unction  when  followed  by  nor.  "When  neither 
and  nor  come  before  two  nouns,  or  two  verbs  in  the  in- 
finitive moody  they  are  both  exp  essed  by  ni  before  the 
verb  which  is  in  the  indicative  mood.    Example : 


SYNTAX  OF  NEGATIONS.  IQQ 

Ni  supUcas,  ni  amenaxas  le  pudieron  enternectr. 
Neither  prayers  jior  threats  could  move  him. 
El  no  sale  ni  leer  ni  estrihir. 
He  knows  neither  how  to  read  nor  write. 

Rule  101.  No  and  nunca,  Tzeuer;  de  nmguna  ma- 
nera,  by  no  means, 

De  ninguna  manera  requires  no  before  the  verb.  JSr- 
ample  : 

Nunca  he  vista  la  reyna  de  Inglaterra. 

I  have  never  seen  the  queen  of  England. 

No  apruelo  de  ninguna  manera  su  conducta,  - 

I  by  no  means  approve  of  his  conduct. 

Rule  102.     Ninguno,  niguno,  wo,  no. 
The  negative  expression  no,  before  a  substantive,  is  ex- 
pressed in  Spanish  by  alguno  or  ningi/no,  masc.  sing,  al- 
guna  or  ninguna,  fem.  sing,  algunas,  f.  pi.     Example  : 
No  iieuc  vm.  algunas  buenas  calidddes: 
You  have  no  good  qualities. 
El  no  toma  ningun  cnidado  de  sus  negocios. 
He  takes  no  care  of  his  business. 
When  no  is  used  in  an  answer  to  a  question,  it  is  ex- 
pressed by  no  J  as  \ 
^Havm.  vis  to  al  rey  ? — No,  Senor. 
Have  you  seen  the  king. — No,  Sir. 
^Aprende  vm.  la  lengua  Italiana  ? — No,  Senorita, 
Do  you  learn  the  Italian  language? — No,  Miss. 

Rule  103.     No,  not;  no  que,  not  that. 

The  negative  not  is  usually  expressed  by  no  before  the 
verb  or  its  auxiliary,  and  no  que  after.     Example  : 

Lo  hare;  no  que  s6a  obligddo  a  ello,  pero  para  tenet 
la  paz. 

I  will  do  it ',  not  that  I  am  obliged,  but  to  have  peace. 


200  '  SYNTA  X  OF  NEGATIONS, 

Nofe.  The  words,  tzo  more,  or  not  any  more,  are  ex- 
pressed by  mas  de,  without  comparison  ;  and  mas  que 
niinca,  or  jamas,  when  more  is  followed  by  than  compa- 
rn lively  used.     Example: 

No  teugo  rnas  de  quarcnta  y  c'lnco  anns. 

1  am  no  more  than  forty-iive  years  old. 

No  hay  m?s  de  vna  semdna  que  he  vUto  d  su  liermano  : 
vm.  no  le  vera  nunc^i  or  jjimas. 

It  is  no  more  than  a  week  since  I  saw  your  brother  : 
you  will  see  him  no  more. 

SECIION    II. 

Negative  expressed  in  Spanish  and  not  in  English. 

Rule  104.     Negative  used  in  Spanish  and  not  in  English, 

The  particle  no  is  used  in  Spanish  afier  the  following- 
words  J  mas,  more ;  mejor,  better ;    ?nenos,  less  ;  pear, 
worse  ;  mas  presto,  sooner  ;  de  otro  modo,  otherwise.    In 
all  these  cases  there  is  no  negative  expressed  in  English.. 
Example  : 

Su  hermano  cs  masjoven.que  nb  pensaha. 

Your  brother  is  younger  than  I  thought. 

Vm.  ha  venido  mas  prt'sto  que  noestnva  eiperado, 

You  are  come  sooner  than  yon  were  expected. 

Le  impedire  que  no  le  agrdvie, 

1  will  hinder  him  from  injuring  you. 

Piulc  105.     Negation  used  in  Spanish  and  not  in  English. 

The  following  conjunctions — amenos  que,  unless  ;  per 
temor  que,  for  fear  ;  para  que,  lest ;  si,  used  for  unless  ^ 
que,  for  before  or  until — require  the  particle  ?zo  before 
tlie  next  verb.     Example :,  '  . 

No  ire  alii  amenos  que  vm.  no  venga  coitwigo. 

I  i^'ill  not  go  there,  unhss  you  come  with  m^ 


\ 

SYNTAX    OF    VERBS.  201 

Ftulc  lOti.    No  before  the  verb,  and  que  after,  but  or  only. 
When  the  words  but  or  only  come  after  a  verb,  with- 
out any  stop  between  them,  they  are  expressed  by  n(^  be- 
fore and  que  after.     Example :  ' 
No  tengo  mas  que  veiute  guineas. 
I  have  /?«/  twenty  guineas. 

The  word  only  after  a  verb  is  expressed  by  solo ;  if  be- 
fore it,  there  is  a  conditional  expression.     Example  : 
Si  vni.  tuvic.se  solo  dos  amigos  mas,  saldrici  bien  con  tndf>* 
If  you  had  only  two  friends  more,  you  woujM  succeed. 
When  but  begins  the  second  part  of  a  sentence,  it  » 
usually  expressed  by  pero.     Emm  pie  .• 
De  seo  mucho  vinjar,  pero  no  tengo  dlnero, 
I  wish  much  to  travel,  hut  1  have  no  money. 


SYNTAX  OF  VERBS. 

Thi  verb  is  a  part  of  speech  the  most  extensive,  the 
most  essential,  and  altogether  the  most  ditBcult,  cither 
to  teach  or  to  learn  ;  therefore  close  attention  must  be 
given  to  the  following  pages,  in  which  the  construction 
of  verbs  is  fully  explained,  and  the  different  genius  of 
the  two  languages  is  pointed  out  with  accuracy  and 
precision. 

Chapter  XIU. 

OF  THE  GOVERNMENT  OF  VERBS. 

Rule  107,     Verbs  which  govern  the  genitive  case  in 
Spanish. 

I.  Most  of  the  reflected  verbs  not  mentioned  in  the 
next  rule  govern  the  genitive  case  in  Spanish,  whatever 
case  they  govern  in  English. 


202  SYNTAX  OF  VEKB3. 

Juft'irsede  a!gu?jacosa,  to  boast  0/ any  thing. 
MaraviUarse  de  algo,  to  wonder  at  any  thing. 
Mofarse  (XQ-algimo,  to  make  game  of  any  one. 
Quilarse  de  chimeras,     to  free  oneself  Jrom  chimeras. 

2.  The  following-— fener  laslima,  to  pity;  gozar,  to 
enjoy;  mor'tr,  to  die,  &c.  — govern  the  genitive  case  iii 
the  c'panish  language.     Thus  we  say  : 

Tener  lastima  de  los  pohres,     to  pity  the  poor. 

Gozdr  de  nna  luena  salud,  to  enjoy  a  good  health. 

Morir  de  7^7?a  evfermeddd,  to  die  o/'  an  illness. 
And  so  on  for  others. 

3.  The  verbs  passive  followed  in  Engiish  by  the  pre- 
position/rom  or  wiih,  also  govern  th-s  genitive  in  Spanish. 
Example : 

Estd  cargado  de  botin,     he  is  loaded  wiih  spoils. 
E'te  libro  estd  traducido  del  Ingles. 
This  book  is  translated  jro?/?  the  English. 

4.  The  word  ly^  which  comes  sometimes  after  a  verb- 
passive,  is  u^^nitUy  es|3r<j^sed  by  d&  wh^H  the  verb  dot*« 
jiot  express  any  action  of  the  body,  and  by  for  when  it 
does.     Thus  we  say  : 

Su  hermanofue  miierto  por  dos  ladrones. 

Your  brother  was  killed  by  two  thieves. 

Su  hermdna  es  ahorrecida  de  todos. 

Your  sister  is  hated  ly  every  body, 

Su  olra  de  vm.  sera  censurdda  de  un  modo  sevcro  por  los 

criticos. 
Your  work  will  be  severely  censured  hy  the  critics. 

Rule  lOS.     Verbs  which  govern  ins  dative  case  in 
Spanish. 

\.  The  twenty  following  reflected  verbs  govern  the 
dative  cnse,  as  ; 


SYNTAX   OF  VERBS.  203 


4handonarse  a,     to  abandon  one's  self  to, 
'  "h'se  a,     to  open  one's  self  to. 

umlrarse  a,     to  accustom  one's  self /o. 

r'lrse  a,     to  adhere  to. 

juarse  a,     to  be  fond  of.  \ 

rarse  a,     to  hasten  to. 
'    anarse  a,     to  submit  to. 
Amanarse  a,     to  be  clever  in. 

'arsei, '  to  be  much  taken  with  a  thing. 

crtirsc  a,     to  he  converted  to. 

e.  a,     to  give  one's  self  to. 

'arse  a,     to  accuse  one's  sftif  to. 

itirse  a,     to  divert  one's  self  with, 
aminarse -d,     to  travel /o.     . 
jiiillaYse  (i,     to  humble  one's  s?lf  to. 

arse  a,     to  kiil  one's  self  with. 

■larse  a,     to  direct  one's  self  ly. 

nerse  a,     to  oppose  to. 

uadirse  a,     to  be  persuaded  of. " 

dirse  a,     to  yield  to. 


.iLundone'se  vm.  z  la  Providencia. 
Abandon  yourself  to  Providence. 

Me  aplico  al  estudio  de  Las  lenguas. 

^  "pply  myself  to  the  study  of  languages. 

1.  The  following  verbs  govern  the  dative  in  Spanish, 
latever  case  they  govern  in  English. 

•sentir,  to  consent,  Ohtdecer,  to  obey. 

ribuirf  to  contribute.  Feri^mar,  to  forgive. 

'ilacer,  to  displease.  Pensar,  to  think. 

'tar,  to  hurt.  Placer,  to  please. 

Desobedecer,  to  disobey.  Quebrantarj  to  infringe. 

Ganar,  to  obtain.  Kenuncijr,  to  renounce. 


204-  SYNTAX  OF  VERBS. 

Remediar,  to  remedy.  Suceder,  to  succeed. 

Resistir,  to  resist,  Sobrevenir,  to  happen 

Re/lectir,  to  reflect.  Sotrevivir,  to  outlive. 

Socorrer,  to  help.  Asemejarj  to  resemble^, 

Eiamples. 
Desplacer  a  su  amo,     to  displease  one's  master. 
No  desohedescas  a  tus  padres,    do  not  disobey  thy  parents. 
Perdono  a  viis  cojitrarios,  .  I  forgive  my  enemies. 
Consentir  a  perder  el  todo,     to  consent  to  lose  all. 
And  so  on  for  all  the  others  above  mentioned. 
3.  The  following — alahar,  to  applaud  j    insultar,  to 
insult;  persuadir,  to  persuade  ;  reww/zdar/ to  renounce  j 
Sfmar,  to  dream  j   trahajar,  to  work  j — sometimes  go- 
vern the  accusative  case,  but  most  frequently  the  dative. 

Daliie. 

Vm.  insiiUa  a  todos ;     you  insult  every  body. 

j4ccusatlve. 
Fm.  insulta  mi  calamidod -,     you  insult  ray  misfortune. 

Rule  1 09.     Ferh  ufkich  govern  the  accusative  in  Spanish. 

All  verbs  which  can  be  turned  by  the  passive  voice 
govern  the  accusative  in  Spanish.  Thus  aijmr,  estimar, 
castigar,  premiar,  Szc.  govern  tl^  accusative,  because  we 
can  say :  Es  amado,  he  is  loved  3  cs  castigado,  he  is 
punished. 

By  the  same  reason  the  following  verbs  govern  the 
same  case; 

Aceptar,  to  accept.  Conicntar,  to  comment. 

j4latir,  to  pull  down.      »         Desorraigar,  to  root  out. 
j4provechar,  to  make  progress.  Exavimar,  to  exainioe. 
jiprobar,  to  approve  of.  Extrahar,  to  wonaer  at. 

Buscar,  to  look  for.  Injuriar,  to  rail  at. 

Cavilar,  to  cavil  at.  Juxgar,  to  judge. 


SYNTAX  OF  VEBB3.  205 

Llenar,  to  fill  up.  Pedir,  to  ask. 

M'lrar,  to  look  at.  Romper,  to  tear  off. 

Ohservar,  to  observe. 

And  some  others,  which  are  attended  by  a  preposition  ia 
English,  govern  the  accusative  case  in  Spanish,  because 
they  can  be  turned  by  the  passive  voice,  a«d  one  may 
say  : 

Su  ofertafue  aceplada  5     your  ofJ^r  was  accepted. 
Este  arloljue  alatido  j       this  tree  was  pulled  down. 
Su  conducta  hasido  aproldda. 
Your  conduct  has  been  approved. 

i    And  so  on  for  the  others. 

Rule  1 10.  Verl's  which  govern  the  accusative  andgetd* 
five  case. 
When  the  following  verbs  govern  two  nouns  or  pro- 
nouns not  joined  by  a  preposition,  the  first  rs  put  iu  the 
accusative,  and  the  second  in  the  genitive  case,  in  Spa- 
nish, as  : 

J'jsolver,  to  absolve.  Echaty  to  drive  out. 

ylceptar,  to  accept.  Glorijicar,  to  praise. 

Jcusar,  to  accuse.  Librar,  to  free. 

Jmenazar,  to  threaten.         Jnformar,  to  inform. 
Jvisar,  to  warn.  Llenar ^  to  till. 

Corregir,  to  correct.  Obtener,  to  obtain. 

Culpary  to  blame.  Privar,  to  deprive. 

Des terror f  to  banish.  R^cilnr,  to  receive. 

Desganar,  to  disgust.  Sosegar,  to  calm. 

Desviar,  to  divert.  Sospechar,  to  suspect. 

Ercluir,  to  exclude.  Suplkar,  to  implore. . 

Expeler,  to  turn  oot. 

Examples : 

Oargar  d  un  enemigo  de  injtirias. 
To  load  aB  enemy  with  injuries. 


200  SYNTAX  OF  VERBS. 

Jceptar  las  oferfas  de  uv  ariiigo. 
To  accept  the  offer  of  a  friend. 
Criticar  la  conducta  d"  algu/io. 
To  blame  any  body's  con.luct 
Excluir  a  un  ewhustero  de  la  sociedad. 
To  exclude  a  liar  from  society. 

Eule  112.     Fcrls  which  govern  the  accusative  and  the 
dative  cases. 

When  the  following  verbs  govern  two  nouns  or  two 
pronouns,  that  which  has  reference  to  persons  is  to  be 
put  in  the  dative  in  Spanish,  and  the  other  in  the  accu- 
sative. If  they  have  both  reference  to  persons,  that  be- 
fore which  the  preposition  to  is,  or  could  be,  prefixed,  is 
put  in  the  dative,  and  the  other  in  the  accusative  case,  in 
Spanish. 

Anunciart  to  announce.  Preferir,  to  prefer. 

u^tribuir,  to  attribute.  Prestar,  to  lend. 
Comunicar,  to  communicate. ProcM?ar,  to  procure. 

Confesar,  to  confess.  Prometer,  to  promise. 

Cofifiar,  to  trust.  Pedir,  to  ask, 

Consejar,  to  advise.  Quitar,  to  take  away. 

Conceder,  to  grant.  Rehusar,  to  deny. 

Dar,  to  give.  Relatar,  to  relate. 

Deter,  to  owe.  Repetir,  to  repeat. 

Decir,  to  say.  Rcspondrr,  to  answer. 

Declarar,  to  declare.  Reponer,  to  rej)lace. 

Despachar^  to  dispatch.  Retorhar,  to  return. 

Despedir,  to  send  back.  Retozar,  to  tickle. 

Explicar,  to  explain.  Rezar,  to  pray. 

Escribir,  to  write.  Revelar,  to  reveal. 

Ensenar,  to  teach.  Fender,  to  sell. 

Perdonar,  to  forgive.  Findicar,  to  revenge. 

Predecir,  to  foretel.  Fblver  a  iraher,  to  bring  back. 


SYNTAX  OF  VEKFS  207' 

Concede  le  a  el  esta  gracia  j     grant  him  that  favour. 
Pedir  el  permiso  at  maestro  j     to  beg  the  master's  leave. 
Atrihulr  unacui^ad.ali^uno;  toattrlbuteafault  toany  one. 

Observations. 

Some  verbs  are  followed  in   Spanish  by  a  prepositioB 
diiTerent  from  that  used  in  English.     Such  are  : 
Arrojdr  sobre  alguno  ;  to  tling  at  one. 
Hacerfu  go  sobre  el  enemigo;  to  fire  at  the  efiemy. 
ConttndiT  con  la  muerte  3  to  struggle  unih  death. 
EntTCTTtetdTse  con  los  negodos  de  los  otros  ; 
To  ititermedcile  ivith  people's  business. 
Tlrar  sobre  una  liebre  j  to  shoot  at  a  hare. 


Chapter  XIV. 

OF  THE  INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

As  there  are  three  tenses  in  the  infinitive  mood,  called 
present,  germid,  and  participhj  this  chapter  is  naturally 
divided  into  tliree  sections  : 

The  Jirst  describes  the  circumstances  in  which  a  verb 
is  put  in  the  infinitive  mood,  without  being  preceded  by 
any  preposition  :  it  also  explains  the  cases  in  which  it  is 
preceded  by  de,  a,  and  para. 

The  second  teaches  that  a  gerund  is  always  indecli- 
nable in  Spani-^h,  and"  giv^s  an  easy  method  to  distinguish 
it  from  a  verbal  noun,  which  is  always  declinable. 

The  third  establishes  two  general  rules,  which  ex- 
plain v^'hen  a  partictple  is  declinable  or  indeclinable. 


t2 


208  SYNTAX  OP  VERB 3. 

SUCTION  I. 

Of  the  infinitive  present. 
The  iaftnitive   present  is  sometimes  in  Spnnisli  used 
without  any  preposition  before  it,  and  sometimes  pre- 
ceded by  de,  a,  and  para,    according  to  the  following 
rules  : 

Rule  113.     hifinitive  without  a  preposition.  *» 

A  verb  in  the  infinitive  mood,  or  present,  has  no  pre- 
position  before  it  :      1.  When  it  is  substantively  used, 
and  is  the  nominative  case  to  another  verb.     Example : 
Hablar  mucho  es  dauoso;  to  speak  much  is  dangerous. 
Ayudar  d  hs  pobres  es  una  acdon  dig7ia  de  ulahanxa. 
To  relieve  the  poor  is  a  praise- worthy  action. 

2.   When  it  is  governed  in  the  infinitive  by  any  of  the 
follovt^ing  verbs  : 

A^tetteer,  to  wish.  Mantener,  to  maintain. 

Deber,  to  owe.  Negar,  to  deny, 

Declarar,  to  declare.  Osar,  to  dare, 

Desear,  to  wish.  Parecer,  to  appear. 

Dexar,  to  leave  off.  Pretender,  to  pretend. 

Dignarse,  to  deign.  Poder,  to  be  able. 

Creej',  to  believe.  Querer,  to  be  willing. 

Entender,  to  hear.  Saber,  to  know. 

Ertvifiry  to  send.  Semejar,  to  appear. 

Esperar,  to  hope.  Venhr,  to  come. 

Hacer,  to  do.  Vtr,  to  see. 

Iniportar,  to  be  requisite.      Folver,  to  return. 
Examples. 

Cree  vm.  tener  razon  ? 

Do  you  believe  you  are  in  the  right  ? 

Jyel-emos  esperar  en  la  misericqrdia  de  Dies. 

We  ought  to  hope  in  God's  mercy. 

Sea  vm.  lo  que  desea  parecer  y  no  enganard  d  nadie. 

Be  v\  hat  you  wish  to  appear,  and  you  will  deceive  no- 
body. 


SYNTAX  OF  VERBS.  20^ 

Rule  114.    De  lefore  the  irifinitive. 

We  put  the  preposition  de  before  a  verb  ia  the  infiiu- 
tlve  mood : 

1.  Most  commonly  when  it  is  preceded  by  a  sulf* 
stantiue  which  governs  it.     Example  .- 

Ei  tieinpo  de  ir.     It  is  time  to  go. 

No  iiene  vm.  razon  de  quejarse  de  mi.  ' 

You  have  no  reason  to  complain  of  me. 

2.  Most  commonly  when  it  is  preceded  by  the  verb 
?er,  and  any  other  adjective  than  those  mentioned  in  the 
next  rule.     Example  r 

Es  glorioso  de  perdonar  a  sus  contrarlos^ 
It  is  glorious  to  forgive  one's  enemies. 
Es  peligroso  de  confiarse  a  cada  uno. 
It  .s  dangerous  to  trust  in  every  body. 

3-.  Most  commonly  when  it  is  governed  by  any  other 
reflected  verbs  than  those  mentioned  in  Rule  112;  as : 
Ale  arrepietito  cie  haber  hablada,  ya  que  eso  le  desplace  a  vm, 
1  am  sorry  to  have  spoken,  siuce  it  aispieases  you. 

4.  When  it  is  governed  in  t lie  in&nitive  by  one  of  the 
following  verbs : 

yiconsejuT  de,  to  advise  of.    Dicir  de,  to  teli  of, 
Acusar  tie,  to  a.  case  if        Excusar  de,  Lo  excuse yrow. 
Ajectar  de,  to  affect.  Persuadir  de,  to  persuade  of 

Avisar  de,  to  warn  of  Proiiihir  de,  to  forbid. 

Cesar  de,  to  cai:xsq  from,        Ofrecer  de,  to  otfer. 
Comijadecerdt,to.havei^\\.yof.Ordenarde,  to  order. 
Culpar  de,  to  biame /or.       Olt'idar  ('o^  to  lor^t. 
Desanimardef{ode^rfro?n.  Had.ar  ie,  to  speaK  q/l 
Descuidnr  cie,  to  neglect."      Ttnitr  de,  to  fear. 
hijerir  ae,  lo differy ro/rt.     Prescri'ir  de,  to  pi -scribfr; 
Mandar  de,  to  comuiand.     Ser  digno  de,  t<^  deserve  qfi^ 
PermiUr  de,  to  permit.         i^siiititar  de,  to  urge.  . 
t3      * 


210  SYNTAX  OF  VERBS. 

Omitlr  de,  to  omit.  Jcabar  de,  to  finish, 

SupUcar  de,  to  entreat.         Amenazar  de,  to  threaten. 
Sup  Hear  de,  to  pray /or.       Proponer  de,  to  propose. 
Promcterde,  to  promise  to.  Re Jiusar  de,  to  refuse. 
Disuadirde.  to  dissmde from. Jgradecer  de,  to  thankyor. 
Escribir  de,  to  write  of.        Decidir  de,  to  resolve  to, 
Impedir  de,  to  hinder ^row.  C'ltai'  de,  to  summon. 
Gozar  de,  to  enjoy.  Sospechar  de,  to  suspect  of. 

Emprender  de,  to  undertake.  Rogar  de,  to  beg  of. 
Experimenlar  de,  to  try.       llmtar  de,  to  endeavour  to. 
Fmgir  de,  to  feign.  Calumniar  de,  to  slander. 

Examples. 
Le  a  co7?sfjo  a  vm.  de  quedarse  at/ui  ; 
1  advise  you  to  stay  here. 

No  ceiutie  lamcntarse ;  he  does  not  cease  to  complain. 
Le  ruego  dc  pcrdonar  aeste  hombre. 
I  beg  you  to  forgive  this  man. 

Rule  115.     A  before  ike  hifimtlve  and  gerund. 
The  preposition  a  is  roost  commonly  put  before  the 
infinitive.     1.  After  trie  adjectives  which  denote  incli- 
nation, aptness,  fitness,^  unfitness,  or   repugnancy  3  and 
particularly  after  the  following  : 
Jgradablc  a,  agreeable  to.    Flexible  a,  flexible  to. 
jigrio  i,  souf /a.  Curiosovi,  curious  in. 

jiplicado  k,  assiduous  m.       Inclinadoi,  inclined /o, 
DispubstO:  a,  dRsposed  {(f.       Prdctico  a,  skilful  in. 
Exdcto  £,  <53iact  in.  Propio  a,  fit/or. 

HabU  a,  dexterous  in.  Terrible  a,  dreadful  to. 

Dihgente  '-,  quick  in.  Pronto  il,  ready  to. 

Fucil  a,  easy  to.  Tar  do  a,  slow  i/i. 

Exu'mples. 
Es  dil^enie  it  trabajar ;  he  is  quick  at  work. 
Ella  estddispHPsta  ^  casttrse  con  ei, 
%hQ  is  disigosed  to  marry  him. 


SYKTAS  OP  VESBS.  2H 

The  following  verbs  also  govern  the  infinitive  with  a  .• 

Amar  a,  to  like  to.  DUponer    ,  lo  dispose  /o. 

Animar  i,  to  encourage  ^J.  Exciiar  a,  to  excite /o.        ^ 
Apr^nder  a,  to  Itani  Iq.        Erhortar  1,  to  exhort  to, 
Atraer  a,  to  engage  to.         Inducir  a,  to  induce  to. 
Autorizar^,  to  authorize  in.Persistir  i,  to  persist  to. 
Condenar  a,   to  conden:in  to.Trahajar  a,  to  work  of, 
Convidar  a,  to  invite  to.        Faluar  a,  to  value  at. 
Dar  a,  to  give  to. 

Exa7nples, 

Estoy  dlspuesto  a  sathfacer  a  su  suplica. 
I  am  disposed  to  satisfy  your  request. 
El  aprende  a  baylar ;  he  learns  d.  nciiig. 
E/la  ama  .i  cantar  j  she  likes  to  sing. 

3.  The  reflected  verbs  abandonarse,  acosiumhrarse, 
darse,  may  also  govern  an  inhnitive  with  the  preposition 
a  or  al  before  it  j  as  ; 

Abandonarse  a  jugar ;  to  abandon  oneself  to  game. 
Acostumbrarse  a  trabcyar;  to  accustom  oneself /o  work. 
Darse  a  eitudiur ;  to  apply  oneself  to  study. 

^Se  dispone  vtn.  a.  responderme  ? 
Are  you  disposed  to  answer  me  ? 

Rule  116.     Infinitive  with  de  and  a. 

The  verb  Jaltar  generally  governs  the  infinitive  with 
de  when  negatively  used^  and  with  d  when  affirmatively. 
Example  : 

No  Jnltar4  de  castigar  d  vin.  si  fe  dcscuida  d  hacer  su 
traducion. 

I  will  not  fell  to  punish  you,  if  you  ijeglect  to  do  your 
exercise. 

The  following — empexar,  cojUinuor,  conslreilir^  attt^ 


212  SYNTAX  OF  VERBS. 

er,  exhortar^  ohligar,  es/orzarse,    &c. — may  govern-  an 
infiiiltive  either  with  .e  or  a,  according  as  it  sounds  best. 

Rule  117.     Para  and  por  bifure  an  infinitive. 

The  prepositions  para  and  por  :;overn  an  infinitive  to 
express  the  end,  the  dmigyt,  or  cause,  for  which  a  thing 
is  done,  and  in  general  every  time  the  sentence  can  be 
turned  without  altering  the  sense  of  it.     Example  : 
Estar  pATsi  partir  ;  to  be  ready  to  set  out. 
Estar  algo  por  suceder  ;  to  expect  something  to  happen. 

Olservations. 

If  the  preposition  para  was  followed  by  any  substan- 
tive whatever,  it  would  be  put  in  the  dative  case  ;  a<J : 

Eso  estd  wm^opaia  el  rcy  ;  this  is  written  for  the  king. 
Por,  on  the  contrary,  governs  the  ablative  case  ;  as  ; 

Eso  fu^  hecho  por  elrey  ;  this  has  been  done  by  the  king. 
In  which  example  you  see  the  ditference  of  the  two  cases. 

Los  homhres  han  nacido  para  vivir  en  la  sociedad. 

Men  are  born  to  live  in  society. 

E<f  lastantemente  alto  para  ser  soldado,  pero  es  demasicL" 
damente  cobarde  para  alistarse. 

He  is  tall  enough  to  be  a  soldier,  but  he  is  too  great  a 
coward  to  enlist. 

^  Quanto  pide  vm.  para  hacerme  un  vestido  ? 
How  much  do  you  ask'/o  make  me  a  suit  of  clothes? 

Rule  118.     Sin  before  an  infinitive. 

An  English  gerund,  precedea  by  the  preposition  with- 
out, is  rendered  m  Spanish  by  the  infinitive  present  with 
sin.     Example: 

Ninguno  puede  hablar  conira  la  verdad  sin  hacerse  cul- 
pable. 
No  one  can  speak  against  the  truth  without  being  guilty* 


SYNTAX  OF  VERBS.  213 

No  debemos  meternos  en  ningun  asunto  sin  kaler  consultada 

a  Dios,  c  implurado  su  divina  asisLencia. 
We  should  never  undertake  any  ihing  without  having 

consulted  God,  and  implored  his  divine  assistaQce. 

SECTION  II. 

Of  the  gerund. 

There  are  only  two  sorts  of  gerunds  in  the  Spanish 
language  for  the  three  conjugations  :  tiiose  of  the  first 
conjugation  end  always  in  ando,  though  the  verb  be 
either  regular ^  rejiecUve,  or  irregular.  The  gerunds  of 
the  second  and  third  conjugations  end  always  in  iende, 
and  are  indeclinable.  There  are  many  adjectives  de- 
rived from  verbs :  those  of  the  first  conjugation  end  ge- 
nerally in  ante,  as  obligante,  from  ohiigar,  to  oblige. 
Those  derived  from  the  second  conjugation  end  generally 
in  ente,  as  convincente,  from  convencer,  to  convince. 
Those  of  the  third  regular  conjugation  end  in  iente,  as 
sufriente  from  sufrir,  to  suffer.  These  adjectives  serve 
for  both  genders. 

Rule  1 19.     The  gerund  is  alu^i^s  indeclinable  in  Spanish^ 

A  word  ending  in  English  in  ing,  and  in  Spanish  in 
ante,  is  an  adjective  when  it  precedes  the  substantive  in 
English,  and  a  gerund  when  it  comes  after  j  in  the  first 
case  it  agrees  in  Spanish  with  the  substantive  to  which  it 
is  joined,  it  is  always  indeclinable  in  the  second.     As ; 

(Declinable.) 
Una  seiiora  obligante ;  an  obliguig  lady. 
Una  prueha  convincente ;  a  convincing  prooC 
Ovtjas  balantes ;  bleating  sheep. 

(Indeclinable.) 
Una  sehora  obligando  d  sus  amigoi. 
A  iady  obliging  to  her  friends. 


214  SYNTAX  OF  VERBS. 

Una  pruela  convenciendo  a  cnda  nno. 

A  proof  coTivim  ing  every  body. 

You  may  ob.sen  e  from  the  preceding  examj^les,  that  a 
word  ending  in  ante  in  Spanish,  is  an  adjective  vvh -n  it 
qualifies  the  substantive  to  which  ii  is  joined  j  and  a  ge- 
rund when  it  governs  a  substantive  after  it. 

Hide  1 20.  When  the  English  girund  is  rendered  by  the 
indicative  in  Spanish. 

"When  the  English  gerund  has  reference  to  a  substan- 
tive which  is  not  in  the  nominative  case,  it  is  rendered  in 
Spanish  by  a  verb  in  the  indicative  mood.     Example: 

Alexandw  pregunto  a  los  medicos  que  estaban  en  pie  a 
su  lado  si  vioriria  de  su  enfermedad. 

Alexander  a^^ec/  the  physicians  standing  by  him,  li  hts 
should  die  of  his  iUncss. 

Rule  121.     Gerund  rendered  hy  a  substantive. 

Note.    An  English  gerund  preceded  by  the  definite 

article  the,  is  rendered  by  a  substantive  in  Spanish,  or  by 

an  infinitive  in  prefixing  to  it  the  definite  article  el,  as  : 

El  estudio  de,  (or)  el  estudiar  las,  lenguas  es  muy  dijicil, 

.    The  learning  of  languages  is  very  difficult. 

SECTION  III. 

Of  the  participle. 

Rule  122.     JVhen  the  participle  is  declinahle  in  Spanish. 

A  participle  passive  is  always  declinable  hi  Spanish  likti 
an  adjective. 

1.  When  it  is  joined  to  a  substantive,  as : 
Vn  lihro  hen  escrito;  a  book  well  written. 
Una  carta  bien  escrita  ;    a  letter  well- written. 

2.  Aftt-r  any  otheiJ  verb  tha.i  hater.  Example: 
Mi  hermano  es  cusauo  ;  my  brother  is  married 
Mis  hermanas  son  casadas ;  my  sisters  are  married. 


SYNTAX    OP    VERBS.  215 

Su  padre  parece  ajiigido  ;  his  father  appears  afflicted. 
Su  tia  parece  aji'/gida ;  his  aunt  a})peais  afllicted. 

Cbservation. 

The  above  examples  show  the  real  cond.t'on  in  which 
the  ptrrsons  are  ;  whereas  if  their  acrurJ  c</i,(titions  were 
acc-clental  ones,  tiien  the  verb  eslar  should  be  used  in- 
stead of  ^er.     Eiair,p(es: 

Mi  hennnno  estd  cansado  ;  my  b''ofher  is  lired. 

Mi  madrc  esta  cansuda  ;  my  motht  i  ia  tired. 

Rule  1 23 .      PFfit?!  the  participle  is  indeclinable. 

The  participle  is  indeclinable  after  the  verb  Aa^tr  in 
three  cases. 

1 .  When  the  noun  or  pronoun  antecedent  is  not  go- 
verned by  the  participle,  but  b}-  the  verb  following, 
which  is  known  by  giving  another  turn  to  ihc  sentence, 
the  noun  antecedent  comes  after  the  infinitive,  and  not 
after  the  particijple.     Examples  : 

La  casa  que  le  he  aconsejado  comprar  es  nueca. 

The  house  which  I  have  advised  you  to  buy  is  a  new 
one. 

Las  reglas  que  he  empezado  a  esplicdr  son  faciles. 

The  rules  which  T  have  legun  to  explain  are  easy. 

The  participles  aconstjado  and  empezado  are  indecli- 
nnble,  becau<ie  we  can  say  compear  una  casa,  to  buy  a 
house  ;  and  not  aconsejar  una  casa 

2.  When  it  governs  a  noun  or  pronoun  after.  Ex- 
ample  • 

Su  madre  ha  hablado  al  rey  {not  ha  hablada). 

His  mother  has  spoken  to  the  king. 

Sns  hermnnns  ham^rend'ido  el  Italiano  (not  aprendidas)* 

His  sisters  have  learnt  the  Italian.  , 

3.  When  there  is  no  other  noun  or  pronoun  oiHece- 
deat  than  the  uotninativei  of  the  vorb..   Example  : 


216 


SYNTAX    Ol-    VERBS. 


Ha  estudlado  ;  lie  has  studied. 

Ella  ha  catUado  ;  she  has  suvg. 

Ellas  han  escuchado  ;  they  have  listened. 


I 


Concord  of  the  verb  with  its  nominative,   ■ 
Rule  124.     The  verb  agrees  with  its  nondnative. 

All  the  personal  verbs  agree  in   number  and  perso.. 
\j\ih  their  nominative  case.     Example : 
Yo  doy,  I  give  J  vosotros  dauws,  we  give. 
Mi  padre  es  muerto  ;  my  father  is  dead. 
Mis  hermanos  son  muertos,  my  brothers  are  dead. 

Rule  125.     The  verb  agrees  with  the  most  worthy  perso 

When  a  verb  has  several  nominatives  of  different  per- 
sons or  genders,  it  is  put  in  the  plural  of  the  most  worlhy 
person.     The  first  person  is  more  worthy  than  the  seco?i 
and  the  second  more  wort!iy  than  the  third. 

The  verb  then  takes  for  its  nominative  case  the  pc 
sonal  pronoun  of  the  most  worthy  person,  besides  the 
used  in  Knglish.     Example  : 

Mi  tio  y  yo  ircmos  manana  alcampa. 

My  uncle  and  I  will  go  to-morrow  into  the  country. 

Vin.  y  su  hermana  se  quedaran  en  casa. 

You  and  your  sister  will  stay  at  home. 

A  verb  is  pirt  in  t+Kj  third  person  plural  in  both  lan- 
guages when  it  has  for  its  nominative  case  two  substiin- 
tives  singular  joined  by  a  copuliitive  ccHijunction.  Ej" 
ample  : 

M(yn^eroy  VirgUio  sod  /os  principes  de  tos  poeias. 

Homer  and  Virgil  are  the  princes  ai  poetB. 

£i  papel  -y  Ui  iinta  no  v.ik;n  nada. 

The  paper  -and  ink  upe  good  for  nathing. 


SYNTAX  OP  VERBS.  21^ 

Rule  126.     The  verb  agrees,  tsfc.  que,  tvho. 

The  pronoun  que  requires  the  verb  following  in  the 
same  number  and  person  as  the  substantive  or  pronoun 
antecedent.     Example : 

Es  el  que  lo  ha  hecho ;  it  is  he  who  has  done  it. 

Es  vm.  que  lia  kablado  de  el. 

It  is  you  who  have  spoken  of  it, 
SoneUos  los  que  lo  han  tornado;  it  is  Xheywho  have  taken  it. 

Observathm. 

When  the  English  pray  to  God,  they  put  the  pronoiln 
and  verb  in  the  singular  j  almost  all  other  nations  do  the 
same,  and  follow  in  that  respect  the  true  intention  of 
Jesus  Christ  in  instructing  his  disciples,  and  say  nu^«  13"'3« 
tD^Dti;^.     Thus  tlie  Spaniards  say  : 

Padre  nuestro  que  estd^  en  los  cielos,  isfc. 

Our  Father,  who  art  in  heaven,  &:c. 
Some  will  say,  and  chiefly  the  French,  that  this  way  of 
praying  is  not  polite :  to  which  one  may  answer,  that 
Jesus  Christ  has  neither  looked  for  politeness  nor  ele- 
gance of  style  j  his  aim  was,  that  we  should  pray  from 
the  bottom  of  our  heart. — The  Lord's  Pray«r  and  Creed 
will  be  included  at  the  end  of  this  work. 

2.  In  some  instances,  the  pronoun,  the  verb,  and  the 
adjective  are  in  the  singular  in  Spanish,  when,  on  the 
contrary,  they  are  in  the  plural  in' English.     Examples 

.  Fm.  es  muy  cortis ;  Sir,  you  are  veiy  obliging. 

3,  The  third  person  singular  is  more  elegantly  used  in 
Spanish  than  the  second  plural,  which  is  seldom  made 
use  of.     Thus,  in  speaking  politely,  one  may  say  : 

^ Quiere  vm.  sc/lvra  venir  al  Parque  9  (and  not  quereis). 
Madam,  will  you  come  to  the  Park  ? 
Let  this  be  well  observed  by  the  beginner  even  in  his 
exercises,  in  which  I  have  endeavoured  to  speak  by  the 
u 


218  SYNTAX    OF  VERBS. 

third  person  singular,  that  should  be  go  to  Spain  among 
polite  people,  he  mny  know  how  to  speak. 


Chapter  XV. 

Rule  127.     IFhm  the  present  of  the  wdicative  is  used. 

The  present  of  the  indicative^  as  hollo,  I  speak  j 
hago,  I  do  ;  doy,  I  give,  &c.  is  used  in  Spanish :  1 .  To 
express  an  action  or  thing  present  at  the  time  in  which 
Vie  are  speaking.     Exaniple  : 

Llueve,  it  rains ;  estoy  mdlo,  I  am  ill. 

2.  To  express  a  thing  we  do  habitually,  though  not  at 
the  moment  we  are  speaking,  as  : 

Estiidio  la  lengua  Griega  ;  I  learn  the  Greek. 
I^m.  ixi  Jrcquentcmeiite  a  la  comedia. 
You  go  very  often  to  the  play. 

3.  To  express  a  thing  of  eternal  trath.     Example: 
Dios  es  misencordioso  ;  God  is  mt  rciful. 

Los  hcmdres  son  wortales  ;  n:ien  are  mortial. 

4.  To  express  in  a  more  lively  and  emphatical  manner 
a  thing  happened  in  a  time  quite  past. 

5.  To  express  a  future  time  not  distant,  when  there  is 
in  the  sentence  a  word  v^  hich  denotes  futurity.  Eaample  * 

Salgo  esta  tardepara  Londres  (for  parliie). 

I  shall  sei  out  to-night  for  London. 

Estoy  pronto  en  un  womento  ;  I  sm  ready  in  a  n^oment. 

Bide  128.   IVhtn  the  inipeifect  of  the  indicative  is  used. 

The  imperfect  of  the  indicative,  as  hub  I  aha,  I  did 
speak  J  re4;ibia.i  I  did  receive,  &;c.  is  used  in  Spanish  : 

1.  To  express  a  thing  which  is  past  with  regard  to  the 
time  in  which  we  are  speaking,  but  which  uas  present 
wl;en  another  thing  me;ilionjed  in  the  same  sentence 


SYNTAX  OF  VERBS.  21^ 

happened.  The  verb  which  is,  or  could  be,  rendered  in 
Knglish  by  the  gerund,  with  ira^  or  were,  is  invariably 
put  in  tlie  imperfect  in  Spanish,  and  the  other  most  com- 
monly in  the  preterite  j  as  : 

Im  escribia  una  carta  a  vin  quando  recili  la  suya, 

I  was  writing  yuu  a  letter  when  1  received  yours. 

Estabamos  comiendo  quando  recibimos  esa  J'unesta  no- 
ticia. 

IVe  were  dining  when  "u-e  received  that  sad  news. 

2.  To  express  the  inclination,  habits,  customs,  man- 
ners, profession,  titles,  good  and  bad  qualities  of  the  na- 
tions, or  of  the  particular  individuals  we  are  speaking  of, 
when  they  are  dead,  and  there  is  no  specification  of  time 
in  the  sentence  3  an  t 

Los  Romanos  cultivaban  las  artes,  aninoaban  las  den- 
das,  y  premiaban  la  virtud. 

The  Romans  cultivated  the  arts,  encouraged  sciences, 
and  rewarded  virtue. 

f^uesiros  aluelos  Ibana  caxar  todos  los  dias,  y  vivlan  de 
sus  presas. 

Our  ancestors  went  a-hunting  every  day,  and  lived 
upon  their  preys. 

Cesar  era  un  gran  general;  Caesar  was  a  great  general. 
Luis  di'cimo  sexto  era  un  rey  Lenifico, 
Louis  the  Sixteenth  was  a  beneficent  king.  • 

3.  If  the  persons  are  living,  we  use  the  imperfect 
when  the  time  is  determined,  and  the  compound  of  the 
present  when  it  is  not  ;  as  : 

Sit  madre  de  vmd.  era  hermosa  antes  dc  casttrsc. 
Your  mother  was  handsome  before  she  married. 
Su  padre  devm.h^  c  >rrido  muckos  peligros. 
Your  faiiher  has  run  many  dangers, 
OM3«/oera  Joven  freqlviuaba  la  camedia. 
'   When  /  was  young  I  frequented  the  playhoo^e.  • 

U2 


220  SYNTAX   OF  VERBS. 

Rule  1 2g.     IVhen  the  preterite  indicative  is  to  he  used. 

The  preterite  indicative,  as,  hable,  I  spoke  -,  hice,  I 
did  ',  vendif  I  sold,  &c.  n  used  in  Spanish  to  express  a 
partrcular  fact  or  event  which  has  happened  but  once  or 
very  seldom,  and  in  a  time  quite  past.    Example  : 

Los  Romanos  desterraron  a  Tarifuino  de  Rema, 

The  Romans  expelled  Tarquin  from  Rome. 

Cesar  fue  muerto  en  el  senddo. 

Caesar  was  killed  in  the  senate. 

Ciceron  tubo  la  cabeza  cortada, 

Cicero  had  his  head  cut  off 

Cante  ayer  en  la  asamhlea. 

I  sung  yesterday  in  the  assembly-room. 

Rule  130.     When  the  compound  of  the  present  is  used. 

Tlie  compound  of  the  present,  as  he  hahlddo,  I  have 
spoken  3  /^e  ffca^aofo,  I  have  finished  j  he  recihido ,  Ih^MG 
received,  &c.  is  used  in  Spanish  to  express  a  thing  past, 
but  in  a  time  not  quite  elapsed.  A  time  is  not  elapsed 
when  the  pronoun  this  or  our  are  or  could  be  prefixed  t« 
the  words  age,  year,  month,  week,  or  day,  mentioned 
in  a  sentence ;  as : 

Nuestro  sigh  lia  producido  homhres  ilustres. 

Our  age  has  produced  illustrious  men. 

Hemos  recibido  mucha  compAHia  este  invierno. 

We  had  much  company  this  winter. 

Observations. 

From  the  three  preceding  rules  it  appears,  that  a  verb 
which  is  in  the  imperfect  tense  in  English,  may  some- 
times be  put  in  three  ditferent  tenses  in  Spanish. 

1.  In  the  imperfect,  when  it  expresses  an  habitual 
thing,  or  which  was  present  when  another  thing  hap- 
pened 3  as : 


fftNTAX  OF  TEB8S,  221 

Quando  e-itaba  en  el  campo,  me  paseaba  todos  hs  dias. 
When  /  was  in  the  co  inrry,  I  walk^ed  every  day. 
Est  aba  muy  malo  quanda  vm.  vino. 
1  was  very  ill  when  you  came. 

2.  In  the  preterite,  when  it  denotes  a  particular  fact 
which  happened  in  a  time  quite  past.  A  time  is  quite 
past  when  the  pronoun  this  or  our  cannot  be  prefixe.l  to 
it ;  as : 

Examine  ayer  los  papeles  de  su  pleyto. 

I  examined  yesterday  the  writings  of  your  law-suit. 

Estuve  nidlo  la  semdna  pasdda.     I  was  ill  last  Week. 

3 .  fn  the  compound  tense  of  the  preienty  when  the 
time  is  not  quite  past.     Ecample  : 

Me  he  paseado  esta  manana  durante  una  hora,. 
I  have  walked  this  morning  for  one  hour. 

Oiservation. 
These  exaniplies  have  been  repeated,  in  order  to  render 
more  obvious  the  distinction  between  the  imperfect,  the 
preterite,  and  the  compound' of  the  present. 

Mule  131.  IVheJitJw  future  of  the  indicative  is- to  he  iLsed: 

The  future  of  the  indicative,  as  hnblare',  I  shall  or 
will  speak  J  hare,  I  will  do^;  rmdire,  I  shall  receive^. 
&:c.  is  used  in  ^^panish,.  as  well  as  in  English,  to  express 
a  future  time.     ExampU: 

Nuestros  cuerpos  resucitariin  el  ultimo  dia. 

Our  bodies  will  rise  agaim  on  ihe  last  day. 


Ghapteh  XVf . 

Of  the  use  of  the  suh^ujictwe  mmd^ 

This  chapter  is  divided  into  three  sections.     The  first 
enumerates  the  adjective*^  prom>Qns,  verbs,  and  conjnnc* 
u3 


iJ22  SYNTAX  OF  VERBS. 

tions  which  always  govern  the  subjunctive  niood.  The 
second^  the  verbs  and  conjunctions  which  govern  the 
following  verb,  sometimes  in  the  indicative  and  some- 
times in  the  subjunctive,  and  points  out  in  what  circum- 
stances each  mood  must  be  used.  The  third  explains 
when  the  verbs  governed  in  the  subjunctive  must  be  put 
in  the  present^  when  in  the  preterite,  and  when  in  the 
compound  tenses  ;  with  some  observations  on  the  imper- 
fect and  future  of  the  said  mood. 

SECTION  I. 

Words  which  always  govern  the  suljunctive  mood. 
Rule  132.     The  subjunctive  is  used  after  a  superlative. 

1 .  A  verb  preceded  by  que  is  put  in  the  subjunctive ;  as  : 
La  Tpgor  guardia  que  un  rey  put'de  iener  es  el  coxazon 

ie  sus  vasal  I  OS. 

I  he  best  guard  a  king  can  have,  is  the  heart  of  his 
subjects. 

Pm.  es  el  mas  dodo  que  conozca  esta  ciuddd. 

You  are  the  most  learned  man  /  know  in  this  city. 

2.  After  these  three  words — m?iguno,  u/idie,  riada — 
as*we  ha^^e  said  before  in  speaking  ot  indeterminate  pro- 
nouns J  as  : 

No  conoxco  d  ninguno  que  sea  tan  dichoso  como  vm. 

I  knijw  nobody,  who  is  so  happy  as  you. 

No  he  visto  nada  que  pueda  ser  reprehendido  en  su  con- 
ducta. 

I  have  seen  nothing  that  can  be  blamed  in  his  conduct. 

3-  After  the  ordinal  numbers,  as  eZj&nmeVo,  the  first; 
el  segundo,  the  second,  &c.,  as  ; 

F".  es  el  pri  ner  amigo  que  haya  encoritrado  en  Londres, 

You  are  the  first  friend  I  have  met  with  in  London. 

Rule  1 33.     lae  subjunctive  is  used  after  the  verbs  of  fear 

or  doubt. 

A  vepb  preceded  by  que  is  always  put  in  the  saojunctiv© 


SYNTAX    OF    VERBS.  223 

after  the  verbs  which  express  any  doubt,  wish,  command, 
order,  fear,  ignorance,  or  any  affection  of  the  mind  5 
and  particularly  after  the  following  : 

MnndaTy  to  command.  Dudar,  to  doubt, 

Temer,  to  fear.  Refusar,  to  deny. 

Prohibit,  to  forbid.  Estdr  a/egre,  to  be  glad. 

Jgnorar,  to  be  ignorant.  Suplicar,  to  pray. 

Desear,  to  wish.  QuereTj  to  be  willing. 

Examples. 
Temo  que  mi  padre  haya  muerto. 
I  fear  my  father  ie  (or  is)  dead. 
Deseo  que  vm,  pueda  acertar.    1  wish  you  may  succeed* 
Dudo  que  haya  llegado.     I  doubt  that  he  is  arrived. 
DesM  que  se  haga  la  paz. 
I  wish  they  would  make  peace. 

Rule  134.     The  suljunctive  is  used  after  the  following 
conjunctions, 

A  verb  is  always  put  in  the  subjunctive  after  the  fol- 
lowing conjunctions  : 

A  menos  que,  unless.  Sin  embargo  que-,  for  all  that. 

Antes  que,  before  that.  A'o  que,  not  that. 

Aun  que,  though.  Supnesio  que,  suppose  that. 

Por  temor  que,  lest.  Con  tal  que,  provided  that. 

Pot  ?niedo  que,  for  fear.  Por  que,  tliat 

En  caso  que,  in  case  that.  Bien  que,  though. 

Como  que,  though.  Sin  que,  without. 

Hasta  que,  till.  Sea  que,  whether. 

JVo  obstante  que,  for  all  that.  Pue.^to  que,  because. 

Examples. 
A  menos  que  vm.  venga  conmigo  no  saldre. 
Unless  you  came  with  me,  I  will  uot  go  out. 


224  SYNTAX    OP   VERBS, 

Aunque  sea  perezoso,  adelanta  mucho. 

Though  he  is  lazy,  yet  lie  improves  much. 

Estare  pronto  avtes  que  vengan 

I  will  be  ready  before  they  are  come. 

N.  B.  The  subjunctive  is  always  used  in  the  beginning 
of  a  sentence  to  express  surprise,  and  imprecation,  or  aa 
ardent  desire  j  as  : 

Pudiese  vm.  ser  dichoso  !     Might  you  be  happy  ! 

Que  mut'ra  si  no  me  vengo  J 

May  I  rather  die,  than  not  revenge  I 

SECTION   II. 

Fcris  and  conjunctions  zvhich  govern  sometimes  the  indi" 
cat'we,  and  sometimes  the  subjunctive  mood. 

Rule  135.     Verbs  which  govern  the  indicative  and  sub-- 

junctive  mood. 

AJirmar,  to  affirm.  Percibir,  to  perceive. 

Asegmar,  to  assure.  Confesar,  to  confess. 

Concluir,  to  conclude.  Predecir,  to  foretel. 

Convenir,  to  agree.  Preveer,  to  foresee. 

Creer,  to  believe.  Prometer,  to  promise. 

Declarar,  to  declare.  Publicar,  to  publish. 

Decir,  to  say.  Pen^ar,  to  think. 

Espeiar,  to  hope.  Rejlexionar,  to  reflect 

Juzgar,  to  judge.  Mantener,  to  maintain. 

Jurar,  to  swear.     '  Suponer,  to  suppose; 

Sostener,  to  maintain.  Ver,  to  see. 

Oividar,  to  forget.  Saber,  to  know. 

And  in  general  alt  those  which  express  the  intelfecttoal 
faculties  of  the  mind  govern  the  indicative,  when  t\}ej 
are  affirmatively  used  j  and  most  commonly  the  subjunc- 
tive, when  they  are  used  negatively,  or  preceded  by  the 
conjunction  5i. 5  as; 


SYNTAX    OF    VERBS,  225 

Creo  que  tiene  raxon.     (Indicative.) 

I  believe  he  is  in  the  right.. 
^Cree  vm.  que  el  tenga  raxon  ?     (Subjunctive.) 

Do  you  believe  he  is  in  the  right  ? 

No  creo  que  tenga  razon.     (SubjuRctive.) 

I  do  not  beheve  he  is  in  the  right. 

Espero  que  vendrci.     (Indicative.) 

I  hope  he  will  conie. 
^Espera  vm.  que  su  hermdna  venga?  (Subjunctive.) 

Do  you  hope  your  sister  will  come  ? 

Jlule  136.  The  subjunctive  is  used  after  some  impersonal 
verbs. 

A  verb  preceded  by  que  is  always  put  in  the  subjunc- 
tive after  the  impersonal  verbs,  espreciso  que,  it  must  j 
es  triste,  it  is  sad ;  es  justo  que^  it  is  right :  es  injusto 
que,  it  is  unjust  j  conviene,  it  becomes ;  importa,  the 
matter  is,  &c.  j  as  : 

Es  necesario  que  haya  un  Dios,  Criador  del  universe. 

It  is  necessary  that  there  should  be  a  God,  Creator  of 
the  universe. 

Es  menester  que  vdya  d  la  ciuddd.    I  must  go  to  town, 

A  menus  que  vm.  venga  u  que  me  escriba  no  lo  hard. 

Unless  you  come  or  write  to  me,  I  will  not  do  it, 

SECTION    III, 

IVhich  tense  of  the  subjunctive  must  be  used. 

Rule  137.     Which  tense  of  the  subjunctive  must  be  ustd. 

A  verb  required  to  be  in  the  subjunctive  mood  by  any 
of  the  preceding  rules,  is  usually  put  in  the'  present 
when  the  first  verb  is  in  the  present  indicative  or  future. 
Example  : 

Temo  que  vm.  se  man'e. 

I  fear  you  may  be  sick  upon  tjie  sea«  - 


226'  SYNTAX    OF    VERBS. 

Sera  necesario  fjue  vvi.  haga  esta  'jbra. 
J I  wilj  be  iiectssaiy  that  you  do  this  work. 

Rule  138.  When  the  imperfect  of  the  suljunctive  must 
he  used. 

The  imperfect  of  the  subjunctive  reijuires  the  first  verb 
in  the  present  indicative.     Example  : 

Sii  pri/no  de  vm.  mc  dice  que  se  alegraria  mucho  de  irse 
(i  Madrid. 

Your  cousin  tells  me  he  would  he  very  glad  to  go  to 
Madrid. 

Vm.  picrde  su  tiempo  en  tonterias  ;  haria  mejor  4e  em^ 
plearlo  eu  el  cstudio. 

You  spend  your  time  in  trifling  things  j  t^ou  would  do 
better  to  employ  it  in  study. 

Rule  139.     Preterite  of  the  suhjunctive. 

Though  the  first  verb  be  in  the  present  or  future,  the 
second  is  put  in  the  preterite  subjunctive  when  it  is  fol- 
lowed by  the  conjunction  si,  or  a  conditional  expression. 
Sample  : 

Si  tuviese  dintro,  compraria  un  sombrero  nuevo. 

If  I  had  some  money,  I  would  buy  a  new  hat. 

Rule  140.  Compound  tenses  of  the  suljunctivt. 
A  verb  required  to  be  in  the  subjunctive  mood  is 
usually  put  in  the  compound  of  the  present  in  Spanish, 
when  it  is  in  English  in  the  compound  of  the  present  or 
of  the  fi^iture  j  but  it  is  put  in  the  compound  of  the 
preterite  in  Spanish,  when  it  is  in  any  other  compound 
tense  in  English ;  as  : 

Temo  (juevm.  se  hay  a  q^iejddo  de  mi. . 

I  fear  you  have  complained  of  Uic. — That  is^  You  ma) 
have.  &c. 

JVb  creo  que  haya  aprendido  la  gengrqfia. 

I  do  not  believe  he  has  learnt  geography. 


SYNTAX    OP    [RHEGULAR    VERBS.  Hj 

No  creia  que  hubicse  aprendido  la  geografia, 
I  did  not  believe  he  had  learnt  geography. 

Observation  on  the  future  subjunctive. 

The  scholar  must  observe,  there  is  a  great  difference 
between  the  future  subjunctive  in  Spanish  and  the  future 
indicative  :  the  former  is  always  preceded  by  the  con- 
junction  r/uaudo,  and  cannot  be  inditferently   used,  as 
some  pretend,  for  the  latter.     Example : 
Quando  hubiere  cumidu,  saldre  para  fiabldr  con  el. 
As  soon  as  I  have  dined,  I  will  go  to  speak  wfth  him. 
Finds,  juganin  quando  hubieren  escrito  sus  traducciones . 
You  will  play  when  you  shall  have  written  your  exercises. 


Chapter  XVII. 

0/  the  irregular  verbs  would,  c«uld,  should,  and  might. 

The  words  would,  could,  should,  and  might,  which 
have  been  considered  only  as  the  distinctive  marks  of 
tenses,  and  with  which  we  have  conjugated  all  verbs, 
regular  and  irregular,  are  also  sometimes  verbs  them- 
selves, and  expressed  in  Spanish  by  querer,  puder.  or  de- 
her,  as  will  be  seen  in  the  f)! lowing  rules : 

Rule  141 .     1.*  Hoiv  to  express  will  and  would. 

When  the  words  will  and  would  are  not  joined  to  any 
verb,  they  are  verbs  themselves,  and  must  be  expressed 
by  the  same  tense  of  querer,  as  should  be  the  verb  to  be 
willing,  if  it  was  used.     Thus  we  may  say  : 

(^.Porque  no  escribe  vm.  su  traduccion  ? 

Why  do  you  not  write  your  exercise  ? 

Porque  no  quiero. 

Because  /  will  not  -,  or,  I  am  not  willing. 


228  SYNTAX   OF    IRREGULAR    VERDS. 

Si  no  soy  casado,  es  porque  no  he  querido. 

If  I  am  not  married,  it  is  because  /  would  not,  or  I 
have  not  been  willing. 

The  words  will  and  would,  thougli  followed  by  another 
verb,  are  also  expressed  by  the  verb  querer  when  they 
imply  a  command  or  order.     Evample : 

Quiero  ser  ohedecido,     I  will  be  obeyed. 

Queria  que  le  pidiese  per  don. 

He  would  have  me  beg  his  pardon. 

2.  Should. 

The  word  should  is  a  verb,  and  must  be  expressed  in 
Spanish  by  some  tense  of  the  verb  deler,  when  it  denotes 
necessity  or  duty.     Example  : 

Puesque  la  religion  lo  prohile,  vm.  no  debe  hacerlo. 

You  should  not  do  it,  since  religion  forbids  it. 

3.  Could  or  might. 

The  words  could  or  might  are  verbs  when  they  denote 
possibility ;  they  are  both  expressed  in  Spanish  by  the 
sartie  tense  of  the  verb  podcr,  as  should  be  the  verb  to 
le  able,  if  it  was  used.     Example  : 

Si  pudicrcL  ohligar  d  vm.  lo  hiciera  con  todo  mi  corazon. 

If  I  could  oblige  you,  /  would  do  it  with  all  my  heart. 

Fm.  hubiera  podido  hacer  su  traduccion  si  lo  hubiese 
querido. 

You  could  have  doue  your  exercise,  if  you  had  been 
■willing  to  do  it. 

The  words  may  and  can  are  also  verbs,  and  expressed 
in  Spanish  by  the  present  tense  of  the  verb  poder.  Ex- 
ample : 

rm.  puede  escribir  su  carta  antes  de  comer. 
You  can  write  your  letter  before  dinner. 

Rule  142.  In  which  tense  would  and  could  are  to  be  put 

in  Spanish. 
■    When  the  irregular  would,  could,  should,  or  might,  are 


SYNTAX  OF  IHREGULAR  VERBS.         22^ 

not  followed  by  any  verb,  or  are  by  one  only,  they  can 
be  expressed  by  the  imperfect,  the  preterite  of  the  indi- 
cative, oV  the  imperfect  or  the  preterite  of  the  subjunc- 
tive, according  as  the  sense  requires  it.  Thus,  /  would 
can  be  rendered  by  either  querta,  {/uisicse  or  querria,  qui- 
sitra  or  quisiese ;  1  should,  by  debia,  deli,  or  dehicra^  de* 
beria,  or  debiese ;  and  could,  by  podia^  pude,  or  pudiera, 
podria  or  pud'iese.     Example  : 

Podia  haler  hccho  eso  ayer. 

I  could  have  done  that  yesterday. 

Lo  pudiera  hacer  si  quisiese.     I  could  do  it  if  I  would. 

No  creo  que  pudiese  vm.     I  do  not  think  you  could. 

Rule  143.     Would  and  could  followed  by  two  verbs. 

When  the  irregular  would,  could,  should,  or  might  are 
followed  by  a  verb  and  a  participle,  they  are  rendered  in 
Spanish  as  follow : 

Fm.  hubicra  podido  escrlblrme  una  carta,  ya  que  sabia 
mi  paradtro. 

You  might  have  written  a  letter  to  n:e,  since  you 
knew  my  direction. 

Vm.  podria  haber  estado  engahddo. 

You  might  have  been  deceived. 

N.  B.  If  you  are  at  a  loss  in  which  tense  to  put  the 
irregular,  would,  could,  should,  or  mighty  change  it\>uld 
inio  the  verb  to  be  zinlling-,  should  into  to  be  obliged; 
could  into  to  be  able  ;  and  then  put  the  verbs  poder, 
qucrer,  debcr,  into  the  same  tense  in  Spanish  as  the  verb 
to  be  is  in  Spanish,  and  you  will  never  be  mistaken. 


Chapter  XVJIL 

OF  THE  IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 

The  impersonal  verbs  in  Spanish,  as  well  as  other  laur 
guages,  are  only  used  in  the  third  person  either  singular 

X 


230  SYNTAX  OF  IMPERSONAL  VEUBS. 

or  plural,  and  are  generally  construed  as  in  English,  ex- 
cept the  following — es  menester,  hay^  es — which  require 
a  particular  attention. 

Rule  144.  Use  of  the  impersonal  verb  es  menester,  ii 
must. 

The  impersonal  it  must,  is  always  expressed  by  es  me- 
nester  for  the  present,  and  by  sera  menester  for  the  fu- 
ture. 

The  noun  or  pronoun,  which  in  English  is  the  nomi^ 
native  of  the  impersonal  verb  must,  becomes  in  Spanish 
the  nominative  of  the  next  verb,  which  is  put  in  the 
subjunctive.     Example  : 

Es  menester  que  vaya.     1  must  go. 

Es  menester  que  vm.  venga  manana. 

You  must  come  to-morrow. 

Sera  menester  que  su  hermano  de  vm,  le  escriha. 

Your  brother  must  write  to  him. 

The  verb  have,  which  comes  often  after  the  impersonal 
it  must,  is  sometimes  put  in  the  subjunctive  j  as :  . 

Es  menester  que  tenga  una  casaca.    1  must  have  a  coat. 

Es  menester  que  su  hermano  de  vm.  tenga  un  sombrero. 

Your  brother  must  have  a  hat. 

Rule  145.     Use  of  the  impersonal  hay,  there  is. 

The  verb  to  be  preceded  by  the  adverb  there  becomes 
impersonal,  and  is  expressed  by  the  third  person  of  the 
verb  haber,  thus  : 

Indicative  present. 

Hay  or  no  hay  j  there  is  or  there  is  not,  there  are  or 

there  are  not. 

Imperfect. 
Hab/a  or  no  habia ;     there  was  or  there  was  not,  there 
were  or  there  were  not. 


SYNTAX  OF  IMPERSONAL  VERBS.        231 

Preterite. 
Hiibo,  or  no  hulo  ;  there  was,  or  there  was  not>  &c. 

Preterpluperfect. 
Ha  habido,  or  no  ha  hahido  ,•  there  haS  been,  or  there  has 

not  been,  &c. 
Second  Preterpluperfect. 
Halia  hahidd,  no  hahla  habido,     there  had  been,  there 

had  not  been,  &c. 
Future. 

Habrd,  no  Itabrd ;  there  shall  be,  there  shall  not  be,  &c. 

Imperative. 
Haya,  or  no  haya;  let  it  be,  or  let  it  i^ot  be,  Sec. 

Subjunctive  mood. 
Que  haya,  or  no  haya  j  that  there  may,  or  there  may  not,  be. 

Imperfect. 
Hubicra,  habria,  no  hubitra,  no  habrla ;  there  should,  or 

there  should  not,  be. 
Preterite. 
Que  hubihet  or  no  hubiese}  that  there  might,  or  there 

might  not,  be,  &c. 
Compound  of  the  present. 
Que  haya  habido,  or  no  haya,  tsfc. ;  that  there  may,  or 

may  not,  have  been. 
Compound  of  the  preterite. 
Que  hubihe  Jiabido,  or  no  hubihe ;  that  there  might,  or 

might  not,  have  been. 
Future. 
Quando  hubicre,  or  no  hubiere ;  when  there  shall,  or  shall 

not,  be. 
Compound  of  the  future. 
Quando  hubiire  habido  or  (wo)  ,•    when   there  shall,  or 

shall  not,  have  been. 
x2 


232  SYNTAX   01  IMPERSONAL  VEKUS, 

Let  us  illustrate  this  by  gome  examples : 

Hay  muchas  dl/icultades  en  sus  negocios. 

There  are  many  difficulties  in  your  afiairs. 

Ko  hay  lalento  mcts  hrillante  que  el  de  la  palahra. 

There  is  no  talent  rrtore  shining  than  that  of  speaking. 

The  verb  /o  be,  preceded  by  the  word  so7ne  or  many,  is 
also  often  expressed  by  the  impersonal  hay,  habia,  hubo, 
&c.,  as  if  it  was  there  are  some.     Example  : 

Hay  algunos  Chris tianos  indignos  deesie  nombre. 

Some  Christians  are  unworthy  of  that  name. 

Hay  mmhosfalsos  aminos.     Many  friends  are  false. 

The  impersonal  hay,  habia,  &c.  is  also  used  in  Spanish 
in  three  circumstances  in  vvhich  the7-e  is  is  not  used  in 
English. 

1.  lb  ask  the  distance  from  one  place  to  another:  then 
it  answers  to  the  words  I^owfar  ?     Example  : 

{Quantas  leguas  hay  de  Bristol  d  Londres  ? 
How  many  leagues  are  there  from  London  to  Bristol  ? 
or  How  far  ?  &c. 

2.  To  ask  the  number  of  such  and  such  things :  then 
it  ansvvers  to  the  words  Hoiu  many  ?  as  : 

^Qaantos  hahitadores  hay  en  Inglaterra  ? 
Hoiv  many  inhabitants  are  there  in  England  ? 

3.  To  aik  how  long  it  is  since  such  and  such  a  thing 
happened  :  this  question  is  not  made  by  quatito,  but  by 
desde  quando      Example  : 

jDesde  quando  estd  vm.  malo  ? 
How  long  have  you  been  ill  ? 
The  answer  may  be  this  :  Desde  an6che  ;  since  last  night. 

Rule  146.  Es,  it  is. 
The  irat>ersonal  it  is,  itivas,  it  will  be,  &c.  is  expressed 
in  Spanisli  by  the  verb  ser,  used  impersonally,  as  es,  era, 
sera,  son,  eran,  serdn,  &c.  when  it  is  followed  by  an  ad- 
jective without  a  substantive,  or  by  a  substantive  of  time. 
Example : 


SYNTAX  OF  ADVERBS.  233 

Son  cerca  de  las  seis ;  es  tiempo  de  salir. 

It  is  near  six  o'clock  j  it  is  time  to  set  out. 

Es  dijicil  de  agradar  d  todos. 

It  is  difficult  to  please  every  body. 

N.  B.  When  a  Spaniard  asks  another.  What  o'clock  is 
?/  P — d  Que  hora  es?  if  the  hour  has  struck,  the  answer  is, 
Acahan  de  dar  laS  seis,  or  las  doce,  Sic. ;  it  just  now 
struck  six,  or  twelve,  o'clock.  If  there  was  almost  a 
quarter,  the  answer  would  be,  Han  dado  las  seis,  &:c. 

Dar,  in  that  sense,  answers  to  it  is,  or  it  is  past,  &c. 

It  is  not,  it  was  7iot,  is  generally  rendered  by  ?io  es,  no 
era,  &c.,  when  it  is  followed  by  a  substantive  which  has 
no  reference  to  time,  by  a  pronoun  or  a  verb  in  the  infi- 
nitive ;  as  : 

Ko  es  elvro  ni  la  plata  lo  que  nos  liace  dlchososj  esla  virtud. 
It  is  not  gold  or  silver  which  renders  us  happy  3  it  is  virtue, 
Es  vm.  quien  lo  ha  visto.     It  is  you  who  have  seen  it. 
Es  dar  authoridad  cl  vkio,  wo  castigar  a  los  malos. 
Not  to  punish  the  wicked,  is  authorising  vice. 


Chapter  XIX. 

OF  ADVERBS. 

Rule  147»     U^ere  the  adverbs  are  to  be  placed. 

Adverbs  are  generally  placed  after  the  verb  in  a 
simple  sentence,  and  between  the  auxiliary  and  the  par- 
ticiple in  a  compound  one.     Example: 

AT)  hablo  nunca  mal  de  ninguno, 

I  never  speak  ill  of  any  body. 

Rule  148.     Adverbs  after  the  participle, 

'I'he  adverbs  which  govern  a  noun  are  always  placed 
x3 


234  SYNTAX  OF  PREPOSITIONS. 

in  Spanish  after  the  participle  in  a  compound  sentence. 
Example : 

Su  hermano  dc  vm.  ha  ohrddo  segun  sus  prhicipios. 
Your  brother  has  acted  agreeably  to  his  principles. 

Advei-bs  of  time,  and  those  composed  of  two  or  three 
words,  are  usually  placed  after  the  participle  in  a  com- 
pound tense.     Example : 

Ha  hecho  hiien  tiempo  hoy. 

It  has  been  fair  weather  to-day. 

Note  1 .  Many  adverbs  may  begin  a  sentence  in  Spa- 
nish, or  a  member  of  it.  Such  are  adema's,  moreover  j 
todavia,  nevertheless  j  por  esto,  or  por  esta  razSn,  for  this 
reason  j  como  ?  how  ?  quanto  ?  how  much  ?  (juando  ? 
when  ?  dondcy  and  adonde?  where?     Example  : 

^  Quando  ira  vm  a  Francia  9  ? 

When  will  you  go  to  France  ? 

Niite  2  The  adverb  can,  almost,  always  goes  befoi-e 
siempre,  always,  and  d  mehudo,  often  ;  and  these  two  go 
before  all  others,'  when  several  meet  together.  Example  .• 

El  rey  estd  can  siempre  mnlo. 

The  king  is  scarcely  ever  well. 

Su  hermano  de  vm.  y  elmio  estdn  siempre  juntos. 

Your  brother  and  mine  are  always  together. 


Chapter  XX. 

SYNTAX  OF  PREPOSITIONS. 

Rule  149.  Prepositions  ere  placed  lefore  the  word  which 
they  govern. 

Prepositions  are  placed  in  Spanish  before  the  word 
they  govern;  in  English  they  are  sometimes  placed 
after ;  as  : 

^Con  quien  hahla  vm  9     Whom  do  you  speak  to  ? 


SYNTAX  OF  PREPOSITIONS.  235 

^De  que  se  qtieja  vm  ?     What  do  yon  complain  of  9 

Para  escrilir  lien,  es  mejiester  t.-ner  luen  papel,  Luena 
t'mta,  y  luenas pluvias. 

To  write  well,  one  must  have  good  paper,  good  in'.:, 
and  good  pens. 

When  the  prepositions  de,  a,  para,  por,  despues,  iin, 
govern  an  infinitive  mood,  they  may  be  separated  from 
it  by  the  negative;  and  the  pronouns  governed  by  the 
verb,  if  there  is  any.     Example: 

tiicnto  inucho  de  no  halerse  lo  dicho  a  vm.  antes. 

I  am  ver)'  sorry  I  did  not  tell  it  you  before. 

Ha  vendido  su  casa,  sin  advertirnos  de  su  intencion. 

He  has  sold  his  house,  without  giving  us  notice  of  it. 

Rule  1 50.     De,  a,  and  en,  expressed  hy  to  and  from. 

The  prepositions  de,  d,  or  en,  used  to  express  the  di- 
stance or  going  from  one  town  to  another  specified,  are 
lendered.,  de,  hy  from  j  o,  by  to  ;  and  en,  hy  in  ;  as  : 

Foy  en  un  dia  de  Bristol  a  Jf^ells. 

I  go  in  one  day  from  Briatol  to  Wells. 

They  are  also  rendered,  f/om  by  de,  and  to  by  en,  in 
all  other  circumstances,  when  they  are  used  to  express  a 
distance,  or  going  from  one  place  to  another.     Example  : 

He  caminddo  de  colle  en  calle,  de  ciuddd  en  ciuddd,  de 
provincia  en  provincia,  sin  poder  halldr  la  Fortuna. 

I  have  travelled  from  street  to  street,  from  town  to 
town,  from  province  to  province,  without  being  able  to 
meet  Fortune. 

When  the  preposition  to  signifies  so  far  as,  it  is  gene- 
rally exjjressed  by  ha^ia.     Example  : 

He  Itlido  la copa  hasla  la  hez. 

I  have  drunk  the  cup  to  the  dregs, 

Lo  proseguire  hasta  al  caho. 

1  will  prosecute  it  to  tlie  end. 


236  SYNTAX  OF  PREPOSITIONS. 

Rule  151.     Prepositions  expressed  ly  several  luays. 
The  English  preposition  clout  has  three  different  ways 
of  being  expressed  in   Spanish,  as  may  be  seen  by  the 
following  examples  ? 

1.  He  venido  para  hahldr  dvm.  acerca  de  nucstro  negicio. 
lam  come  to  speak  to  you  about  our  business. 

2.  Ire  a  ver  a  vm.  hacia  el  Jin  de  la  semdna  que  viene. 
I  will  go  and  see  you  alout  the  end  of  next  week. 

3.  Estd  para  venir  de  Irlanda. 

He  is  about  to  come  from  Ireland. 

Rule  152.     When  the  prepositions  are  to  be  repeated. 

The  prepositions  de  and  a  are  usually  repeated  before 
every  noun,  pronoun,  or  verb  -,  or  others,  such  as  con, 
contra,  sin,  &c.  are  repeated  before  nouns  or  verbs  of 
different  significations,  whether  they  are  or  are  not  re- 
peated in  English.     Example: 

El  Hijo  de  Dios  vino  a  este  mundo  para  redimir  a  los 
hombres,  y  para  destruir  elimperio  del  diablo. 

I'he  Son  of  God  came  into  this  world  to  redeem  men, 
and  to  destroy  the  power  of  the  devil. 

They  are  not  usually  repeated  before  words  which  have 
nearly  the  same  signification.     Example: 

El  Hijo  de  Dios  vino  a  la  tierra  para  redimir  a  los 
hombres  y  libraries  delpecado. 

The  Son  of  God  came  on  earth  to  redeem  men,  aud- 
io free  them  from  sin. 

Nuestra  ley  nojuzga  a  ninguno  sin  haberle  oido,  y  ex- 
dminado. 

Our  law  judges  nobody  without  having  heard  and  ex- 
amined him. 


OF  CONJUNCTIONS  AND  INTERJECTIONS. 
Having  spoken  at  large  of  the  conjunctions^  page  141 


SYNTAX    or    SPANISH    IDIOMS.  237 

and  following,  their  use  and  construction  have  been  fully 
explained  in  the  Syntax  in  the  rules  85,  130,  and  139  } 
what  we  could  add  here  on  this  subject  would  be  a  te- 
dious repetition  of  what  is  before  explained  under  dif- 
ferent heads  as  occasion  required  it. 

The  different  species  of  interjections  have  been  treated 
of,  page  143  j  their  construction  is  the  same  in  Spanish 
as  in  English,  therefore  they  require  no  explanation. 


Chapter  XXI. 
OF  SPANISH  IDIOMS. 

Idioms  are  a  mode  or  way  of  speaking  peculiar  lo  a 
language,  and  cannot  be  literally  translated  into  another. 

This  chapter  of  idioms  is  divided  inio  two  sections  : 
the  first  explains  the  idiomatical  expressions  of  the  auxi- 
liary verbs  lo  have  and  to  he  ;  the  second  shows  the  idio- 
matical signification  in  which  the  verbs  ir  or  andar,  lener, 
venir,  dar,  hacer,  and  viorir,  may  be  taken. 

SECTION    I. 

Idiomatical  expressions  of  tht  verbs  to  have  flwrf  to  be. 

Rule  153.     Cases  in  which  the  verb  to  be  is  expressed  by 
the  verb  tener. 
The  verb  to  le  is  expressed  in  Spanish  by  the  same 
tense  of  the  verb  lejier  in  several  cases. 

1.  When  it  is  followed  by  a  word  of  number,  such  as 
one,  two,  three,  &c.     Example: 

Nuestra  casa  tiene  vciiite  pies  de  ancho. 

Our  house  is  twenty  feet  broad. 

Tengo  treiiitay  cinco  anos.    I  am  thirty-five  years  old. 

2.  When  it  is  used  to  ask  the  age  of  a  person  or  an 
animal.     Example: 

(I Que  cddd  tiene  usted  ?     How  old  are  you  ? 


238  SYNTAX    OF    SPANISH    IDIOMS. 

d  Que  edad  tiene  su  gato  9     How  old  u  your  cat  ? 

3.  When  it  is  followed  by  the  words  hungry,  dry,  or 
thirsty.     Example : 

^;Tienes  hambre,  hija  mia?  Are  you  hungry,  daughter? 

Si,  madr€f  tengo  mucha  hamhre. 

Yes,  mother,  /  am  very  hungry. 
(Tiene  vm.  sed  ?    Are  you  dry  ? 

No,  no  tengo  sed  nhora.     No,  /  am  not  dry. 

4.  When  it  is  followed  by. the  words  hot,  warm,  or 
coldf  the  part  of  the  body  which  is  cold  or  hot  js  pre- 
ceded in  Spanish  by  en  for  the  masculine,  en  la  for  the 
feminine,  en  los  for  the  masculine  plural ;  en  las  for  the 
feminine  plural  ,•  instead  of  the  possessive  pronouns  my, 
thy,  his,  her,  our,  your,  their,  used  in  English.  £r- 
ampLe : 

Tengo  frio  en  los  pies.     My  feet  are  cold. 
(Tiene  vm.  calor  en  las  manos  ?  Are  your  hands  warm  ? 
Acirquese  a  la  lumhre  si  vm.  tiene /rio. 
Draw  near  the  fire  if  you  are  cold. 
Estoy  lien  uqui,  no  ieugofrio. 
I  am  well  here,  I  am  not  cold. 

5.  When  it  is  or  could  be  followed  by  the'  adverb 
there,  without  altering  the  sense  of  the  sentence  y  as  : 

Hay  muchos  ladrones  en  Francia. 
There  are  many  robbers  in  PVance. 

6.  When  it  is  followed  by  the  words  in  the  right,  in 
the  wrong,  or  afraid,  as  ; 

Tenia  vm.  ra%6n,  y  yo  haUa  err  ado. 
You  were  in  the  right,  and  I  was^  in  the  wrong. 
^Vorfjue  tiene  vm.  miedo  ?     Why  are  you  afraid  ? 

Rule  154.     To  be,  expressed  by  hacer. 
The  verb  to  be  is  expressed^  by  hacer,  in  speaking  of 


SYNTAX    OF    SPANISH    IDIOMS.  239 

the  weather  j  and  with  the  words  dia,  the  day  5  noche, 
the  night  J  sol,  the  sun  ;  viento,  the  wind.     Example: 

Hace  buen  tiempo  hoy.     It  is  fine  weather  to-day. 

Hacia  mucho  calor  ayer.    It  was  very  warm  yesterday. 

Hace  viucho  calor  en  Espana,     It  is  very  hot  in  Spain. 

But  if  the  word  weather  is  the  nominative  of  the  verb 
to  he,  then  it  ought  to  be  expressed  by  estar,  and  not  by 
hacer.     Example  : 

El  tiempo  estd  secO,  humedo,  UuviosOy  tempestuoso,  ^c» 

It  is  dry,  wet,  rainy,  stormy  weather,  &:c. 

El  ayre  estdfrio.     The  air  is  cold. 

Rule  155.     The  verb  to  be,  expressed  hy  estar. 
Tiie  verbs  to  he  and  to  do,  used  in  English  to  inqr.ire  or 
to  speak  of  the  health  of  somebody,  are  both  expressed 
in  Spanish  by  the  verb  estar.     Example : 
^Como  estd,  vm  ?     How  do  you  do.  Sir  ? 
Estoy  muy  lueno,  para  servir  d  vm. 
I  am  very  well,  at  your  service.     Or, 
Estoy  muy  lueno,  gracias  d  Dios. 
I  am  very  well,  thank  God. 
^Como  estd  su  seuor  hermano  ? 
Hovir  does  your  brother  do  ? 
Estdla  lueno  la  ultima  vez  que  le  vi. 
He  was  well  the  last  time  I  saw  him. 

^ule  156.  The  verb  to  have,  expressed  by  the  verbs  haber 
or  ser. 
The  verb  to  have  is  expressed  by  the  verb  ser,  but 
most   commonly  by  the  verb    haber  in  the   compound 
tenses  of  reflected  verbs,  in  Spanish.     Example  : 
Me  he  levantado  esta  manana  d  las  seis. 
I  got  up  this  morning  at  six  o'clock. 
^Aque  hora  se  acosto  vm  ? 
At  what  o'clock  did  you  go  to  bed  ? 


240  OP   THE    SPANISH    IDIOMS. 

Levanlese  v?n.  presto.     Get  up  immediately. 

Le  ha  parecido  a  vm.  que  este  homlre  estdba  lorrac 
pero  se  ha  enganddo. 

It  did  seem  to  you  that  this  man  was  drunk,  but  jm: 
have  been  mistaken. 

Rule  157.     Doler,  speaking  of  an  illness. 

The  Spaniards  make  use  of  the  verb  doler  when  tl 
feel  a  pain  in  any  part  of  their  body.     Exawple : 

Me  duele  la  cabeza,  el  pecho,  y  el  estomago. 

I  have  a  pain  in  my  head,  in  my  breast,  and  in  my 
stomach. 

Me  duehn  los  njos.     My  eyes  are  sore. 
f^Le  duelen  a  vm.  las  muelas?  Have  you  the  tooth-acl . 

No,  pero  me  duele  el  pescuezo. 

No,  but  I  have  a  pain  in  my  neck. 


Chapter  XXII. 

SFXTION    I. 

This  chapter  will  contain  a  list  of   several  Spai 
verbs,  with  the  difterent  significations  in  which  theyj 
used  J  and  should  it  be  committed  to  memory,  it 
be  found  very  useful  towards  acquiring  the  idiom? 
phraseology,  which  constitutes  one  of  the  beauties  of 
Sj)anish  language. 


go. 


Of  the  different  slgvificatiovs  of  andar,  to 
Andary  to  go,  to  vv'^nk,  to  travel. 
Andar  con  Dios,  to  go  in  peace. 
Andar  en  hora  buena,  to  be  preserved  from  danger." 
fAndar  a  caza  de  gangas,  to  waste  one's  time  in  friiil 
pursuits. 


OF  THE  SPANISH  I]>ieMS. 


241 


Andar  d  degas,  to  go  groping  along, 

Andar  adelante,  to  go  -before. 

Anddr  a  gatas,  to  walk  upon  hands  and  (t^. 

Andar  a  grillos,  to  lose  one's  time  in  doing  something. 

Andar  a  la  Jlor  del  berro,  to  stroll  and  wander  about. 

Andar  a  la  sopa,  to  go  a-begging. 

Andar  en  vue/ias,  to  shuffle. 

Andar  a  la  ventura  de  dios,  to  abandon  oneself  to  one's 

bad  or  good  fortune. 
Andar  al  paso  del  buey,  to  be  slow  or  lazy  at  work, 
Andar  al  rededor,  to  go  round  about. 
Aiidar  al  -uso,  to  conlbrni  to  the  times, 
Andar  a  monte,  to  skulk. 
Andar  a  palos,  to  fight  one  another  with  stlck-s. 
Andar  a  porfin,  to  be  stubborn. 
Andar  arrastrado,  to  live  in  indigence. 
Andar  a  sombra  de  iejado,  to  be  at  hide  and  seek. 
Andar  a  sas  anchurqs,  to  live  splendidly  with  profusion. 
Andar  a  tientas,  to  gi'ope  in  the  dark. 
Andar  iebiendo  los  vientos,  to  make  all  diligence  possible 

to  obtain  any  thing. 
Andar  xcdle  arriba  y  calle  abaxo,  to  spend  one's  time  in 

walking  up  and  dotvn. 
Andar  con  el  tiempo,  to  praise  to-day  what  will  be  blamed 

to-morrow.  /■ 

Andar  con  mosca,  to  be  angry,  to  breathe -for  revctige. 
Andar  con  pics  de  plomo,  to  act  with  reflection  in  otie's 

dealing. 
Andar  con  reserva,  to  be  reserved  or  prudent. 
Andar  con  segundas,  to  go  with  a  design  to  deceive  some- 
body. 
Andar  de  gorra,  to  go  to  dine  at  the  expense  of  another, 
Andar  detecho,  to  go  straight,  to  be  just. . 
Yo  ie  hare  andar  dcrecho,  I  will  make  you  honest, 
Andar  en  buenos  pasos,  to  act  right,  to  be  virtuous. 
Andar  en  cuenios,  to  f«ll  to  loggerheads. 

Y 


S42  OF  THE  SPANISH  IDIOMS. 

^  Andaren  cueros ,  to' be  naked. 
Andar  -en  dimes  y  diretes,  to  deal  in  ifs  and  ands. 
AndarachacosOy  to  be  sickly. 

Andar^en  la  maroma,  to  engage  in  a  perilous  undertaking, 
Andar^en  malos  pasas,  to  be  abandoned. 
Andar  en  zelos,  to  be  jealous. 
Andar  errado,  to  err,  to  be  under  an  error. 
Andar  homlro  con  hombro,  to  go  cheek  by  jowl. 
Andar  a  uno  en  los  alcanxes,    to  be  at  one's  heels,  to 

watch  him. 
Andar  pie  con  lola,  to  lead  an  oeconomical  life. 
Andar  por  tierra^  to  be  despised. 
Andar  sobre  aviso,  to  be  on  one's  gtiard. 
No  andar  bueno,  to  be  ill. 
En  el  andar  se  parccea  Pedro,  by  his  gait  one  would  say 

it  is  Peter. 
Andar  en  cuerpo,  to  go  abroad  without  a  cloak. 

SECTION   II. 

The  different  significations  of  the  verb  dar. 
Dar,  to  give,  to  present. 
Dar,  to  beat,  to  strike. 
Dar,  to  administer  a  remedy. 
Dar,  to  confer. 
Dar,  to  give  as  a  fact. 

Dar,  to  persist  obstinately  in  doing  a  thing. 
Dar,  to  deliberate. 

Dar  que  reir,  to  give  cause  of  laughing. 
Dar  que  Uorar,  to  make  one  cry. 
Dar  a  correr,  to  make  one  run. 
Dar  por  libre,  to  free  any  one. 
Dar  por  esclavo,  to  keep  in  slavery. 
Dar  por  traidor,  to  condemn  one  as  a  traitor^ 
Dar  de  vestir,  to  clothe  one. 
Dar  recado  de  escribir,  to  furnish  what  is  necessary  to 

write. 
Dar  que  sentir,  to  give  trouble. 


OF  THE  SPANISH  IDIOMS.  243 

Dar  gustOi  to  give  pleasure; 

Dar  trisieza,  to  pimse  sadness* 

Dune,  to  give  up  oneseif. 

Darse  almxdf  t©  fall  down: 

Dar  abrazoSy  to  embrace  one  another. 

Dnr  ajiada,  to  trust. 

Dar  a  entender^  to  give  to  understand. 

Dar  agua  vianos,  togive\vater  to  wash  one's  handB, 

Dar  a  la  estampa,  to  cause  any  thing  to  be  printed. 

Dar  d  la  mano,  to  put  in  hand, 

Dar  el  alma,  to  die. 

Dar  de  traste,  to  run  a-ground. 

Dar  a  lux^  to  bring  to  light. 

Dar  asalto,  to  give  assault. 

Dar  asuKto,  to  give  cause  to  speak. 

Dar  aud'tencia,  to  give  audience, 

Dar  laroto,  to  sell  cheap. 

Dar  barro  d  la  manot  to  furnish  materials, 

Dar  ^a^a,  to  jest  atone. 

Dar  hregQy  to  piny  a  trick. 

Dar  buena  vejez,  to  con^fort  old  age. 

Dar  mala  vejez,  to  vex  old  age. 

Dar  luenas  palabras,  to  give  fair  word*, 

Dar  calla,  to  heat  the  iron. 

Dar  calle,  to  clear  the  way. 

Dar  carta  de  pago,  to  give  a  receipt. 

Dar  con  algjina  persona  en  tierra,  to  throw  one  on  th« 

ground. 

Dar  con  la  puerta  en  las  ojos,  to  shut  the  door  upon  one. 

Dar  consigo  en  el  suelo,  to  fall  upon  one's  nose. 

Dar  con  unoy  to  meet  witli  the  person  one  looks  for, 

Dar  credito,  to  beheve  what  is  said. 

Dar  cuerpo,  to  give  a  substance  to  any  thing. 

Dar  cuerpOy  to  exaggerate. 

Dar  de  cogote,  to  fall  upon  one's  back. 

Dar  de  comer  al  d'mblo,  to  act  contrary  to  religion. 
y2 


244  eP  THE  SPANISH   IDIOMS, 

Dar  ^an,  y  palos,  to  provide  for  the  subsistence  of  others, 

and  to  act  severely  with  them. 
Dar  de  si,  to  stretch  oneself 
Bar  diente  con  diente,  to  be  starved  with  cold. 
Dar  el  hgar,  to  leave  the  place. 
Dar  el  pcsmne,  to  give  compliments  of  condolence. 
Dar  el  si,  to  consent  to  any  thing. 
Dar  el  voto,  to  vote  for  any  one. 
Dar  encomiendas,  to  give  orders. 
Dar  en  el  bianco,  to  guess  right . 

Dar  en  el  punto,  to  hit  the  mark.  ^ 

Dar  en  rostro,  to  reproach  one  v/ith  any  thing. 
Dor  entrada,  to  give  entrance. 
Dar  esiado,  to  alter  one's  condition. 
Dar  exercicios,  to  instruct  children. 
Dar  expediente,  to  conclude  a  business. 
Darjavor,  to  protect. 
Darfianxa,  to  caution  one. 
Dar  forma,  to  form  or  dispose. 
Darfruto,  to  produce  fruit. 
Darfuego,  to  unload  a  firelock. 
Dar  gana,  to  give  courage. 
Dar  garrote,  to  strangle. 
Dar  guerra,  to  vex  one. 
Dar  /ado,  to  favourize. 

Dar  la  enhorahuena,  to  compliment  or  congratulate. 
Dar  la  muerte,  to  kill. 

.  Dar  la  obedienHa,  to  reverence,  to  bow  before  one. 
Dar  la  piel,  to  die. 

Dar  las  pasquas',  to  wish  a  good  Christmas  to  one, 
Dar  la  ultima  mano,  to  fmish  or  end  any  work. 
Dar  la  vlda,  to  die. 
Dar  licencia,  to  give  leave. 
Dar  lugar,  to  make  room. 
Dar  Imnbre,  to  make  fire. 
Dar  lu%,  to  give  light  to  a  room, 


OF  THE  SPANISH  IDIOMS,  245 

I>ar  lux,  to  light  a  person  to  go  out. 
Dar  mala  espina,  to  torment  one. 
Bar  malrato,  to  molest  one. 
Dar  tnano,  to  consent  to  every  thing. 
Bar  muestras,  to  show  one's  good  or  bad  qualities, 
Dar  viusica,  to  give  a  concert. 
Dar  nomhre,  to  baptize. 
Bar  oidus,  to  listen  attentively. 
Bar  or  den,  to  command. 
Bar  ordenesy  to  confer  the  ecclesiastical  orders* 
Bar  orejas,  to  pay  attention  to  what  is  said. 
Bar  pan  de  perro,  to  cudgel  one  soundly. 
Bar  parte,  to  share  with  another. 
Bar  perro  por  gato,  to  deceive  by  fair  words. 
Bar  picon,  to  excite  one  to  do  something. 
Bar  plie^o,  to  give  a  sheet  of  paper. 
Bar  paso,  to  clear  the  way. 
Bar  puvto,  to  begin  the  holidays. 

Barpuntos  en  la  boca,  to  be  discreet,  to  hold  one's  tongue. 
Bar  quartet,  to  give  quarter. . 
Bar  quejas,  to  complain. 

Bar  querella,  to  bring  a  bill  in  justice  against  one. 
Bar  setial,  to  give  earnest- money. 
Bar  sehal,  to  nod  to  one  to  come  nearer. 
Bar  una  panzada,  to  give  an  abundant  meal  to  some- 
body. 
Barse  una  vuelta,  to  look  at  oneself  with  attention. 
Bar  sohresaltos,  to  fright  one  suddenly. 
Bar  sabre  uno,  to  assault  one. 
Bar  soga,  to  put  one  to  despair. 
Bar  su  espiritu,  to  give  up  die  ghost. 
Bar  su  merecido,  to  chastise  according  to  the  fault. 
Bar  su  recado,  to  beat  one  unmercifully,        | 
Bar  termino,  to  grant  a  delay. 
Bar  testimonio,  to  be  a  witness,  to  testify. 
Dar  tiempo  at  tlempo,  to  wait  tor  aa  opportunity, 
X  3 


246  OF  THE  SPANISH  IDIOMS. 

Dur  tormento,  to  torture  one. 

Dar  tras  unOy  to  follow  one,  to  go  behind. 

Dar  una  vista,  to  look  at  any  one. 

Dar  una  zamlmllida,  to  fall  into  the  water. 

Dar  un  hatacazo,  to  get  a  fall. 

Dar  un  estallido,  to  make  a  noise. 

Dar  un  impetu,  to  do  something  with  precipitation. 

Dar  un  tapahoca,  to  give  a  blow  on  the  mouth. 

Dar  un  xalon,  to  scold  one. 

Dar  voces,  to  brawl.  » 

Dios  te  dc  huena  ventura,  God  give  you  a  happy  success. 

No  se  me  da  nada,  this  is  nothing  to  me. 

No  te  de  cuidado,  fear  not. 

SECTION  III. 

Different  significations  of  tfie  v^rl  estar, 

Estdr,  to  be  present. 

Estdr,  to  comprehend. 

Estoy  en  lo  que  vm.  me  dice »  I  comprehend  what  you  say, 

Estoy  a  eso,  I  answer  for  that. 

Estar,  to  be. 

Estar  leyendoy  to  read. 

Estar  escrilienda,  to  write^ 

Esiar  trisbe,  to  be  sad. 

Estar  sordo,  to  be  deaf, 

Estar  a  exdmen,  to  be  examined. 

Estar  de  priesa,  to  be  in  haste. 

Estar  en  misa,  to  be  preser>t  at  mass.     ^ 

Estarse,  to  stop,  to  stand. 

Estarse  muriendo,  to  be  on  the  point  of  death, 

Estarse  cayendo,  to  be  ready  to  fall. 

Estar  d  la  mduQ,  to  be  at  hand. 

Estar  d  la  trinca,  to  wait  for  the  wind. 

Estar  a  punto,  to  be  ready  for. 

Esiar  a  ray  a,  to  refrai»  oneself. 


OF  THE  SPANISH  IDIOMS.  24^ 

Estar  de  huen  humor y  to  be  in  a  good  humour. 

Estar  de  wal  humor,  to  be  cross  or  in  a  passion. 

Estar  degorja,  to  be  merry. 

Estar  en  si,  to  reflect  within  oneself. 

Estar  en  sujuicio,  to  have  a  sound  un(]erstandi ng. 

Estar  lejos,  to  be  far  off. 

Estar  muy  sohre  si,  to  be  vain. 

Estarse  mano  sohre  mano,  to  be  idle. 

Estarse  en  sus  trece,  to  be  very  stubborn. 

Estar  en  lodo,  to  know  every  thing. 

SECTION  IV. 

Different  signijications  of  the  verh  hablar. 

Hallar,  to  speak. 

Hallar,  to  harangue. 

Elalogado  habl6  muy  Hen,  that  advocate  spoke  very  welU 

Hallar,  to  speak  in  behalf  of  somebody. 

Hablar,  to  inform,  to  warn. 

Hablar  a  borboiones,  to  speak  quickly,  to  stammer. 

Hablar  abulto,  to  talk  at  random, 

Hablar  al  alvia,  to  speak  sincerely. 

Hablar  al  caso,  to  speak  seasonably,  in  due  tinae* 

Hablar  al  gusto,  to  speak  politely. 

Hdblar  alto,  to  talk  loudly. 

Hablar  a  tontas,  to  speak  foolishly. 

Hablar  bien,  to  speak  elegantly. 

Hablar  con  Dios,  to  pray  to  God. 

Hablar  con  lengua  deplata,  to  solicit  any  thing  with  money* 

Hablar  con  el  diablo,  to  be  cunning. 

Hablar  con  los  ojos,  to  look  sweetly  upon  one. 

Hablar  de  burla  6  chanza,  to  jest  at  one,  to  mock  him, 

Hablar  de  hilvan,  to  speak  unintelligibly. 

Hallar  de  la  mdr,  to  speak  of  things  that  can  neither  b* 

understood  nor  executed. 
JIallar  de  mem^ia,  to  speak  at  random. 


248  OF  THE   SPANISH  IDIOMS. 

Hablar  de  talanquera,  to  slander  people  that  are  in  dag- 
ger or  distress. 
Hablar  de  veras,  to  speak  true. 
Hablar  en  comun,  to  speak  in  general. 
Hablar  en  griego,  to  speak  confusedly. 
Hablar  en  publico,  to  speak  publicly. 
Hablar  entre  dientes,  to  mutter. 
Hablar  consigo,  to  speak  within  oneself. 
Hablar  gordo,  to  speak  in  a  passion. 
Hablar  paso,  to  speak  discreetly. 

Hablar  par  detras  6  a  las  espaldas,  to  speak  ill  of  a  per- 
son absent. 
Hablar  por  hablar,  to  speak  for  pleasure'  sake. 
Hablar  por  la  mano,  to  speak  with  one's  fingers. 
Hablar  por  /a?  narices,  to  speak  through  one's  nose. 
Hablar  por  senas,  to  speak  by  jests,  as  mimics  do. 
Hablar  reclo,  to  speak  violently  or  in  a  passion. 
Hablarse  alguna  cosa,  to  publish,  to  divulge. 
De  la  alundancia  del  corazon  habla  la  boea,  the  tongue 
speaks  from  the  influence  of  the  heart, 
Es  hablar  por  demds,  it  is  to  speak  in  vain. 
Hacer  hablar,  to  make  one  speak. 
Mire  corno  haila,  consider  how  he  speaks. 
No  hablarse,  not  to  speak  to  each  other,  to  be  at  variance* 

SECTION  V. 

Different  signi/ieations  of  the  verb  hacer; 

The  several  significations  of  the  verb  hacer  being  no - 
less  interesting  than  t':;oseof  the  preceding  verbs,  the 
scholar  will  do  well  to  learn  them  with  as  much  atten^ 
tion  as  lies  in  his  power, 

Hacer,  to  do,   to  foiiii. 
Hacer  un  detito,  to  commit  a  crime.- 
Hacer  conccpto  de  alguna  cosa,  lo  form  to  oneself  an  idea" 

ot  something. 


OF  THE  SPAfflSH  IDIOMS.  24Q 

Iloy  hace  tantos  ahos  que  sucedio  tal  cosa,  there  are  to- 
day so  many  years  since  such  a  thing  happened. 
Hacerse  el  vino,  the  grapes  grow  ripe. 
Los  semhrados  se  kacen,  the  grain  grows  ripe. 
Hacer,  to  give  or  grant. 

j4L  convento  de  Florencia  hizo  limosmas  rtmy  grctndes,  he 
gave  great  alms  to  the  convent  of  Florence. 
Hacer,  to  contain. 

Estejiasco  hace  tantas  axumlres,  this  bottle  holds,  or  con- 
tains, so  many  pints. 
Hacer,  to  cause,  to  put. 

Ilacergaslos,  to  put  to,  or  cause  any  one,  expense. 
HaceVy  to  resolve,  to  dettrmine. 
Dios  lo  hi%o,  God  determined  it. 
Los  jueces  In  hicieron,  the  judges  resolved  it  so. 
Hacer,  to  dress  or  prepare. 
Hacer  la  coviida,  to  prepare  the  dinner. 
Hacer  la  olla,  to  make  the  meat  boil, 
Hacer t  to  bring  to  perfection.  * 

Estapipa  hace  huen  vino,  this  cask  makes  the  wine  good, 
Esta  coxa  hace  huen  iabaco,  this  snuif-box  renders  tbd 

snufF  good. 
Hacer,  to  correjjpord,  tp  fit. 
Esq  hace  lien  acjui,  this  fits  very  well  here. 
Esq  no  hace  con  aquello,  this  don't  correspond  with  that. 
Hacer,  to  join,  toassemble, 
Hacer  genie,  to  raise  soldiers. 
Hacer  audiiorio,  to  assemble  an  auditory. 
Hacer,  to  use,  to  accustom. 

Hacer  un  cahallo  alfuego,  to  accustom  a  horse  to  the  fire. 
Hacersf  alfrio,  to  accustom  oneself  to  the  cold. 
Hacerse  a  todo,  to  use  oneself  to  every  tiling. 
Hacerse  atras,  to  draw  back. 
Hacerse  d  un  lado,  to  draw  oneself  on  one  side. 
Hacer  agua,  to  take  a  provision  of  water  in  a  ship, 
Hacer  alarde,  to  boa^t  of. 


250  OF  THE  SPANISH  IDIOMS. 

Ilacer  a  pluma  y  a  pelo,  to  be  disposed  for  every  thing. 
Hacer  no  nay  que  hacer  ascos,  there  is  not  so  much  to 

despise. 
Hacer  luena  la  venta;  to  warrant  a  sale  to  be  good. 
Hacer  las  cosas  por  su  cabeza,  to  act  according  to  one's 

own  fancy. 
Hacer  cama,  to  keep  one's  bed,  to  be  ill. 
Hacer  cara^  to  put  on  a  biazen  countenance. 
Hacer  correrias,  to  make  incnrfsions. 
Hacer  coscjuiUas,  to  tickle,  to  please. 
Hacer  corteslas,  to  compliment. 
Hacer  costilla,  to  bear  with  paitence. 
Hacer  de  las  suyas,  to  do  one's  frolics. 
Hacer  del  cuerpo,  to  ease  oneself. 
Hacer  el  pko,  to  give  a  dinner  to  somebody. 
Hacer  espaldas,  to  defend  one,  to  protect  him, 
Hacsr  exemplar,  to  be  a  pattern  for  oihera. 
Hacer  Jiesta,  to  make  a  holiday  of  a  working-day. 
Hocer  honraSf  to  do  honours,  to  assist  at  a  funewl, 
Hacer  huvw,  to  stay  long  in  a  place, 
No  hacer  humot  not  to  stay  long  in  a  place, 
Hacer  justiciar  to  do  justice  to  every  body. 
Hacer  la  larha,  to  render  a  piece  of  service  to  one. 

Tal  cosa  hixo  la  harla  a  fulano,  such  thing  did  good  to 

such  an  one. 

Hncer  la  viamona,  to  jest  at  one,  to  mock  him. 
'^  Hacer  merced,  to  grant  a  favour. 

Hacer  la  olla  gorda,  to  procure  to  one  the  means  to  be- 
come rich. 

Hacer  la  ra%on,  to  drink  to  the  health  of  another. 

Hacer  Id  rosea  del  galgo,  to  sleep  in  any  place  without 

undressing  oneself. 

Hacer  las  partes,  to  divide. 

Hacer  la  vista  larga,  to  feign  not  to  see. 

Hacer  niericion,  to.  meutipn  any  thing  to  another. 

Hacer  mysterio,  to  make  a  mystery  of  a  little  thi-ng. 


OF  THE   SPANISH  IDIOMS.  251 

Hacer  noche,  to  stay  in  an  inn  to  sleep. 

Hacer  novedad,  to  invent  any  thing. 

Hacerse  noche,  it  is  lost  or  stolen. 

Hacer  orejas  de  mercader,  to  feign  to  be  deaf,  not  to  be 

'A  iiling  to  hear. 
Hacer Jigura,  to  have  a  sort  of  authority  over  others. 
Hacer  Jiguras,  to  play  the  mimic. 
Hacer  papel,  to  act  a  character. 
Hacer  pic,  to  intrude  oneself  in  any  business. 
Hacer  pinitos,  to  endeavour  to  walk  after  a  long  illness. 
Hacer  pompa,  to  make  a  show. 
Hacer  par  hacer,  to  do  something  for  pleasure'  sake. 
Hacer  prenda,  to  take  in  pawn  for  wiiat  is  lent. 
Hacer  pucheros,  to  feign  crying  like  a  child. 
Hacer  punta,  to  excell. 
Hacer  ray  a,  to  excell,  to  surpass. 

Hacerse  a  la  vela,  to  sail. 

Hacer  cargo,  to  make  one  pay  his  share. 

Hacerse  cargo  de  una  cosa,  to  take  care  of  a  thing. 

Hacerse  chiquito,  to  ftiign  to  be  ignorant. 

Hacerse  de  algo,  to  buy  what  is  necessary. 

Hacerse  de  miel,  to  be  too  indulgent  to  others. 

Si  710S  haccmos  de  miel,  nos  comeran  las  moscas,  if  yoQ 
be  too  indulgent,  you  will  be  trodden  under  foot. 

Hacerse  lenguas,  to  praise  exceedingly. 

Hacerse  tortilla,  to  tall  down  flat. 

Hacerse  en  agua,  to  perspire. 

Hacer  sombra,  to  shelter,  to  protect,  to  favourize. 

Hacer  su  hecho,  to  come  to  the  desired  point. 

SECTION     VT. 

Different  significatio7is  of  the  verb  \r,  to  go, 

Ir,  to  go,  to  walk. 
/r,  to  lay  a  wager. 

Fayan  cien  doblones  a  que  es  cierto  eso,  I  lay  one  hundred 

pounds  it  is  so. 


252  OF  THE  SPANISH  IDIOMS.. 

Ir,  to  consist. 

£71  eso  vd  la  vida,  in  this  depends  the  life. 

Jr,  to  be  distinguished. 

2r,  to  lead  or  conduct. 

Estecamino  vd  a  tal  parte,  this  road  leads  to  such  a  place. 

Ir  lien  ptiesto,  to  be  well  dressed. 

Jr  vendido,  to  be  sold. 

Ir  atenido,  to  be  pursued. 

Ir  a  cabal lo,  to  go  on  horseback. 

irie,  to  go  away. 

Irse,  to  be  dying. 

Irse,  to  escape. 

Irse,  to  let  oneself  fall  thr6ugh  weakness. 

Irse,  to  evaporate. 

Irse,  to  be  rotten,  (in  speaking  of  fruit) 

Irse,  to  rent. 

Ir  adelante,  to  pursue  a  business  closely. 

Ir  con  alguno,  to  be  of  the  same  opinion  with  another 

Ir  bien  6  mal,  to  be  well  or  ill. 

Ir  con  dios,  to  go  peaceably. 

Irse  de  la  viano,  to  let  any  thing  fall  out  of  one's  hand 

Irse  de  la  viemoria,  to  forget  something. 

Irse  de  boca,  to  speak  impertinently. 

Irse  los  ojos,  to  look  attentively  at  the  thing  we  wish  f 

Irse  por  pies,  to  run  away,  to  escape. 

Ir  y  venir,  to  go  up  and  down,  to  spend  one's  time 

walking. 
^Quien  vd  a  la  puerta  ?  who  is  at  the  door  ? 
Vdyase,  go  about  your  business. 

SECTION    VII. 

Different  significations  of  the  verb  venir^  to  come. 


^  Venivy  to  come,  to  happen,  to  arrive. 
^  Venir,  to  appear  before  a  judge. 


I 


OF  THE  SPAJJISH  IDIOMS.  253 

Veniry  to  agree  with  another. 

Venirt  to  draw  one's  origin  from. 

p^enir,  to  have  recourse  to. 

Venir,  to  resolve,  to  determine. 

Venuy  to  grant  a  favour. 

VeniTj  to  come  in  company. 

Venir,  mover se,  to  come,  to  move. 

VeniTy  to  become  quite  reformed, 

Venhj  to  amount  to. 

Fenirse  a  casa,  to  return  home. 

Venirse  a  partido,  to  yield  to  reason* 

Venirse,  to  perfect  oneself, 

Venirse  el  vino,  to  ferment. 

Venirse  el  pan,  to  rise,  (in  speaking  of  dough). 

Fenir,  pasarse  de  un  lugar  a  otro,  to  go  from  one  place 

to  another. 
Las  inspiraciones  vienen  dd  cielo,  inspirations  come  from 

heaven. 

Jesu  Christo  vino  al  mundo  para  redimirnuSy  Jesws  Christ 

came  into  the  world  to  redeem  us. 

Nuestro  vino  va  menguando ;  ya  no  sale  mas  que  gotapor 

gota,  our  wine  diminishes,  it  only  comes  drop  by  drop. 

Esta  guarnicion  viene  Men  con  estc  pafio,  this  trimming 

fits  this  cloth  very  well. 
Llegar  a  las  manos,  pelearse,  to  come  to  hands^  to  fight. 
Venir  al  socorro,  to  come  to  help. 


254 

PART  IV. 

A  VOCABULARY  OF  WORDS 

NECESSARY  TO  BE  KNOWN. 


Del  cielOf  y  de  los  elementos. 
Of  heaven,  and  the  elements. 


J^/OS,  God. 
Jcsu  Christo,  Jesus  Christ. 
ElEspiritu  Santo,  the  Holy 
Ghost. 
la  Trinidad f  the  Trinity. 
los  angelesy  the  angels, 
un  profeta,  a  prophet. 
elcielo,  heaven. 
el  paraiso,  paradise. 
eliiifierno,  hell. 
el  mundo,  the  world. 
los  diablos,  the  devils, 
elfuego,  the  fire. 
el  ayre,  the  air. 
la  tierra,  the  earth. 
el  mar,  the  sea. 
clsolj  the  sun. 
la  luna,  the  moon. 

Del  tiempoyde  las  estacions.- 
el  dia,  the  day. 
lu  noche,  the  night. 
elmediodia^  noon. 


las  estrellas,  the  stars. 

los  ray  OS,  the  rays. 

las  nuhes,  the  clouds. 

elviento,  the  wind. 

la  lluvia,  the  rain. 

el  trueno,  the  thunder. 

el  reldmpago,  the  lightning. 

el  granizOt  the  hail. 

el  rayo,  the  thunderbolt. 

la  nieve,  the  snow. 

helada,  the  frost. 

el  yelo,  the  ice. 

la  escarcha,  the  glazed  frost. 

el  rodo,  the  dew. 

la  nieila,  a  fog. 

el  diluvio,  a  deluge. 

el  caloTy  the  heat. 

elfriOf  the  cold. 

-Of  the  weather  and  seasons. 
media  noche,  midnight. 
la  manana,  the  morning. 
la  tarde,  the  evening. 


A  VOCABULARY  OP  WORDS. 


255 


una  hora,  an  hour. 
un  quarto  dehora,  a  quarter 
of  an  hour. 
media  hora,  half  an  hour. 
ires  (juartos  de  hora,  three 
quarters  oi  an  hour. 
hoy,  to-day. 
oyer,  yesterday. 
el  dia  antes  de  ayer,  the  Jay 
before  yesterday. 
el  dia  despues  de  man  ana, 
the  day  after  to-morrow. 
esta  tarde,  this  evening. 
esta  mnnanay  this  morning. 
despues  de  coiner,  after  din- 
ner. 

Los  dias  dda  semana,- 

Lunes,  Monday, 
Maries,  Tuesday. 
hiier coles,  Wednesday. 
Jueves,  Thursday. 


despues  de  cewflr,aftersuppe>. 
una  semdna,  a  week. 
un  mes,  a  month. 
un  aho,  a  year. 
un  momento,  a  moment. 
la  primauera,  the  spring, 
el  verano,  the  summer. 
el  otafio,  autumn. 
elinvierno,  the  winter. 
dia  de  fiesta,  a  holiday. 
diadetrabajo,A  working-day. 
la  salida  del  sol,  the  sua- 

rising. 
el  ponerse  del  sol,  the  sun- 
setting. 
la  aurora,  the  dawn. 

-The  days  of  the  week. 

Viernes,  Friday. 
Sabado,  Saturday. 
Domingo,  Sunday. 


Los  meses. — The  months. 


Enero,  January. 
Felrero,  February. 
Marzo,  March. 
Airil,  April. 
Mayo,  May. 
Junio,  June. 


Julio,  July. 
Jgosto,  August* 
Septiemhre,  September. 
Cktubre,  October, 
Noviembre,  November. 
Diciembfe,  December. 


Dias  dejiesta  del  ana. — The  holidays  of  the  year, 

el  primer    Dia  del  Am, 

New-year's-day. 
Din  de  Reye9,  Twelfth-day 
la  Quaresma,  Lent. 


las  ^atrotemporas,  the  Em». 
ber  weeks. 
Domingo  de  Ramos,   Palm 
Sunday. 
z2 


25^ 


A  VOCABULARY  OF  WORDS. 


Viernes  Santo,  Good  Friday.     Pascua  de  naviddd,  Christ- 
Pascua  de  resurreccion ,  Ea-  mas. 

ster-day.     la  Figilia,  the  Eve. 
Pascua  del  EspirUu  Santo,     la  cosecha   de  Granos,  the 
Whitsunday.  Harvesl; 

Dia  deD'ifuntos,  AH  Sonls'- 
da3^ 

De  las  dignidades  ecclesiasticas . 
Of  ecdesiastlcal  dignities. 

el  papa,  the  pope.  un  canon/gn,  a  canon. 

un  cardrnal,  a  cardinaJ.  un  sacerdoie,  a  priest. 

un  arzohispo,  an  archbishop,  un  capdlan,  a  chaplain, 

nn  obispOj  a  bisiiop.  un  limosntro,  an  aimoner. 

un  nu7icio,  a  nuncio.  teuicnte  de  cura,  a  curate. 

un  prelado,  a  prelate.  vn  predicadorj  a  preacher, 

un  cura,  a  rector.  enter  radar,  a  sexton. 

un  vicario,  a  vicar,  un    sacristan,    a    vestry- 
un  vicarif)  general,  a  vicar  keeper. 

general  nninusico,  a  musician, 

un  dean,  a  dean.  un  perliguero,  a  beadle. 

Admires  de  las  cosas  que  se  coinen  comimmente. 
Names  of  things  most  usually  eaten. 
/5G«,  bread.  unarcOanadadepan,  asWcQ 

agiia,  water.  of  bread. 

vijw,  wine.  una  sopa,  a  feonp. 

came,  meat.  -  un  caldo,  a  brotli. 

pe%,  fisli.  una  ensalada,  A  salad. 

el  cocido,  boiled  meat.  una  salsa,  a  sauce. 

cl  asado,  toast  meat.  un  estofado,  a  stew. 

un  hocado  de  pan,  a  mouth-     un  guisado,  a  nigout. 

ful  of  bread.     Insjrutas,  fruits. 
un  pastel,  a  pie.  el  tjueso,  cheese. 

El  aparato  de  la  mesa. — Tlie  covering  of  the  table. 
lamgsa,  the  table.  el  mantel,  the  tablecloth » 


A  VOCABULARY  OF  WORDS. 


257 


una  silla,  a  chair. 
un  cuchilto,  a  knife. 
nn  tenedor,  a  fork. 
un,  plato,  a  plate. 
plalo  grande,  a  dish. 
un  salero,  a  saltseller. 
viaagrera,  a  vinegar-bottle. 
axiuqueroy  a  sugar- box, 
una  vela,  a  candle. 
un  candelero,  a  candlestick. 
las^despabiladeras,  the  snuf- 
fers. 
el  braserito,  a  chafingdish. 
palangana,  a  bason. 
Gopa,  a  glass. 


una  servilleta,  a- napkin, 
unjiasco,  a  flask. 
una  xicara,  a  cup. 
una  salsera,  a  saucer. 
una  toalla,  a-  towel. 
un  servicioy  a  service. 
una  canasta,  a  basket. 
un  galon,  a  gallon. 
WW  medio  galon,  a  half  gal- 
lon. 
una  pinta,  a  pint. 
una  media  pinta,  a  half  pint, 
unjarro,  a  jug. 
2^7m  lotella,  a  bottle. 


Loque  se  come  en  la  mesa  cocidoi. 
What  is  eaten  at  table  boiled. 
Ui  vaea,  beef.  el  cordero,  lamb. 

el  carneroy  mutton..  una  gallina,  a  fowl. 

la  ternera:,  veal.. 

Phra  el  primer  sewicio. — For  the  first  course. 


un  guisadOi  a.  ragout. 
unafricasi,  a  fricasee. 
estofadoy  stewed  meat. 
lechecillaSy  sweetbreadw 
una  torta,  a.  tart. 
pastelillos,  petty  patiies. 
jarnon,  some  ham. 


salchichns,  sausages. 
salchiihade  Bolona,  a  Bo- 
logna sausage.. 
morciUa,  black- pudding. 
higadd,  liver. 
ruhanos,  radishes, 
melon,  a  melon. 


Loque  es  asddo. — What  is  roasted. 


un  capon,  a;  capon. 
polios,  pullets. 
pichdnes,  pigeons. 
gallineias,  woodcocks* 
pe^dicos,  partridges. 


tordos,  thrushes. 
alondrasy  larks. 
codornices,  quails. 
Jaymnes,  pheasanlat 
un  pQVQj  a  cock  turkey.:, 
Z  3; 


:?5S 


A  VOCABULARY  OF  WOllDS. 


un  g'  nso,  a  goose. 
gan  0  pequeno,  a  go-Jing. 
un  pato,  a  duck. 
tola  iieb/'e,  a  hare. 
vn  conejo,  a  rabbit. 
un  cerdo.,  a  hog. 
lechoncillo,  a  roasting-pig 
unjdbali,  a  wild  boar. 
u?i  ciervo,  a  stag. 

Para  sazonar  la  came. — To  season  meat  with. 


pierna  de  carnero,  a  leg  of 
mutton 
lomo  de  ternera,  a  loin  of 
veal. 
Irazuelo  de  carneroy  a  shoul- 
der of  mutton. 
torrezno,  a  slice  of  bacon. 
ca%a,  game. 


saly  salt. 

pimientay  pepper. 
cceyte,  oil. 
v'magre,  vinegar. 
agraz,  verjuice. 
Viostaza,  mustard. 
chvos-y  cloves. 
canela,  cinnamon. 
alcaparraSy  capers. 
laurely  laurel. 
perifoUo,  chervil. 


setas,  mushrooms, 
criadillasy  tvuflies. 
cebollas,  onions. 
escalonas,  eschalots. 
ajos,  garlic. 
tocinOy  bacon. 
naranjas,  oranges.       -    • 
I'unojieSy  lemons. 
perexiL,  parsley. 
I  cehoUeias,  young  onionsi 
htitvos,  eggs. 


Para  una  ensalada.—Vov  a  salad. 
yerltty  herbs.  perifoUo,  chervil. 

endihiaSy  endives.  Uchitga    Romana, 

lechuga,  lettuce. 

chicorea,  succory.  beiro,  cresses. 

apioy  celery. 

Para  im  dias  de  ayuntt. — For  fast' days. 


Roman 
lettvice. 


manteca,  butter. 

iechey  milk. 

huevos  cocidos.,  eggs  in  tJbe 

shell. 
huevos  esir^llados,  poached 
eggs. 


toriiUa  de  huwoSy  an  omelet* 
cangr^jo     de     agua    dulce^ 
crawiish. 
un  lucioy  a  pike. 
una  carpa,  a  carp. 
una  trucha^  a  trout. 


A  VOCABULARY  OF  WORBS. 


25^ 


knguado,  a  sole. 
angu'da,  an  eel. 
^ienca,  a -tench. 
esturion,  a  sturgeon. 
arenquey  a  herring. 
ostras,  oysters. 
salmon,  salmon. 
ahadejo,  codfish. 
guisantes,  peas. 
habas,  beans. 

Para  las  poslrcs.- 
manzanaSy  apples. 
per  as  y  pears. 
melocoiones,  peaches. 
albaricoqueSy  apricots. 
cerezas,  cherries. 
crespas,  gooseberries. 
higosy  figs. 
ciruelaSy  plums, 
frambuesas,  raspberries. 
uvas,  grapes. 
tajadaSy  fritters. 
tarla,  a  tart. 
confiies,  sugarplums. 

Grados  de  parentesco.- 
el  padre,  the  father. 
la  madre,  the  mother. 
el  al'uelo,  the  grandfather. 
la  abuela,  tlie  grandmother. 
el  bisabueloy  the  greatgrand- 
father. 
la  bhahuela,  the  great  grand- 
mother. 
el  hijo,  the  son. 
la  kyUf  the  slaughter. 


espinacas,  spinage. 
clcachojas,  artichokes. 
esparragos.  asparagus. 
berzas,  cabbages. 
basfagos,  sprouts. 
col'ijiores,  cauliflowers. 
hinojo,  fennel. 
escombro,  a  njackarel. 
langosta,  a  lobster. 

-For  the  dessert. 
dulces  sccos,  sweetmeats. 
nueces,  nuts. 
avellanas,  filberts. 
castanaSy  chesnuts. 
almendras,  nlmonds. 
nisperos,  medlars. 
zarzas,  blackberries. 
vitmbrillos,  quinces. 
grajiadaSy  pomegranates. 
naranjaSy  Portugal  oranges,' 
aceUunaSy  olives. 
woraSy  mulberries. 
grosellas,  currants. 

-Degrees  of  kindi'ed. 
el  hermano,  the  brother. 
la  Itermana,  the  sister. 
el  primogenito,    the  eldest 

son. 
el  hijo  ^gundo,  the  second 

son. 
el  tio,  the  uncle. 
la  tia,  the  aunt. 
el  sohrino,  the  nephew, 
la  sobrina,  tfce  niece.. 


260 


A    VOCABULARY    OF    WORDS, 


el  hijo  del  sobriw»  the  ne- 
phew's son. 
la  hija  de  la  sobrina,    the 
niece's  daughter. 
el  primo,  the  ecus  n. 
la  prima,  the  female  cousin. 
el  cunudo,  the  brother-in- 
law. 
la  cunada,  the  sister-in-law. 
el  suegro,  the  fatiier-in-law. 
la  suegra,    the  mother- in- 
law. 
el  yerno,  the  son>ii>law. 
la  nuera,  the  daughter-in-- 
law. 
el  nieiOy  the  grandsort. 
la  ?iieta,  the  granddaughter. 
los  padres,  the  fathers  and 

mothers. 
si  esposo,  the  spouse.  Mas^ 
la  esposa,  the  spouse.  Fern, 
nn.  consorte,  a  consort. 
mellizos,  twin  brothers. 
meUixas,  twin  sisters. 
un  bastardo,  a  bastard. 


el  compadrey  a  he-gossipv. 
la  coinaxlre,  a  she- gossip. 
el  padrino,  a  godfather. 
la  mudrina,  a  godmother, 
el  aiiijado,  a  godson. 
la  ahijada,  a  goddaughter. 
muger  parida,    a  lying-in- 

womanv 
ama  de  criar,  the  narse. 
la  partera,  a  midwife. 
un  parientOj  a  relation. 
una  parienta,  a  female  relac 

tion, 
el  am'igOy  a  friend. 
la  amiga,  a  female  friend*. 
el  eneinigo,  an  enemy.  Mas*, 
la  enemigayiin  enemy.  Fern,, 
un  viudo,  a  widower. 
una  viuda,  a  widow.. 
el  herederOi  an,  heir. 
la  heredera,  an  heiiess. 
unpupiloi  a  pupiL.    Masc. 
zma  pupila,  a  pupiL     Fern,, 
un  casamientOy  a  marriage. 
las  budas,  a  wedding. 


JOe  los  est  ados  del  hombre  y  de  la  muger. 
Of  the  conditions  of  man  and  woman* 


un  homlTe,  a  man. 
una  muger,  a  woman. 
unviejo,  an  aged  man. ' 
una  vitja,  an  aged  woman-. 
hombre  anciano,  an  old  man. 
muger.  anciana,  an  old  wo-- 

man. 
unjoven,  a  young  man. 


una  moza,  a  young  girl; 
pedmetre,  a  spark. 
una  sefiura,  a.lady.. 
el  marido,  a  husband* 
la  muger,  a  wife. 
un  infante,  an  infant.. 
un  hijo,  a  boy.. 
un  muckacho,  a  little  boyo 


A    VOCABtrtARY    OF    WOHD«. 


26t 


una  muchacka,  sl  little  girl. 
una  doncella,  a  maid. 
wia  virjren,  a  virgin. 
el  amo,  a  master.    • 
el  avia,  a  mistress. 
un  criadOf  a  man  servant. 
una  criada,?i  female  servant. 
un  ciudadano,  a  citizen. 


un  paisGTU),  a  countryman. 

vn  ezhangeroj  a  stranger, 

un  bribon,  a  rogae. 

un  estafudor.  a  siiarper. 

un  engaiiador,  a  cheat. 

un  ladron,  a  thief. 

un  ratcroj  a  pickpocket. 


De  lo  que  es  wenester  para  vestirse. 

Of  what  is  necessary  for  dressing  oneself. 

un  veslido,  a  suit  of  clothes,     calceias,  under  stockings. 


un  somhrtroy  a  hat. 

los  hordes,  the  brims. 

cordon  de  sombrero,  a  hat- 
band, 

una  peluca,  a  wig. 

una  corvata,  a  cravat. 

lasaca,  a  coat. 

casaca  d  lafrancesa,  a  close 
coat. 

los  calzones,  small  clotlies. 

las  medias,  stockings. 

medias  dt  seda,  silk  stock- 


escarpines,  socks. 
los  zapatos,  the  shoes, 
las  chinelas,  the  slippers, 
una  camisay  a  shirt, 
una  nlmiila,  an  under  waist* 

coat. 
una  chupa,  a  vest. 
las  mangus,  the  sleeves, 
las  vueltas,  the  ruffles. 
un  gorro,  a  cap. 
W/va  lata,  a  night-gown, 
e/  bolsillo,  a  fob. 
lafaliruiutra,  the  pocket. 


(7ow  /o5  vesiides  es  menestei'  tener. 
With  clothes  one  must  have. 


cinta  de  seda,  ribbons. 
encaxe,  lace. 
botones,  buttons. 
ojales,  button- holes. 
Jranja,  fringe. 
guantes,  gloves. 
viltoncs,  mittens. 


reloxdefaltriquera,  a  watch, 

un  panuelo,  a  handkerchief, 

un  manguitOy  a  muff. 

las  kebillas,  buckles. 

liga'Sy  garters. 

anilhy  a  ring. 

peyne,  a  comb,   ^  > 


262 


A    VOCABULARY    OF   WOSDJ^. 


Para  aquellos  que  van  a  cahallo. 
For  those  that  ride  on   horseback. 

Los  espuelas,  the  spurs. 

la  campana  de  la  lota,  the 

top  of  the  boot. 
la  estrella  de  espuela,   the 
rowel  of  the  spur, 
la  pierna,  the  leg. 
el  talon,  the  heel. 
la  sucla  de  la  hot  a,  the  sole. 


la  espada,  a  sword. 
el  cinto,  a  girdle. 
las  pistolasy  the  pistols. 
elfreno,  the  bridle. 
la  silla,  the  saddle. 
los  estribos,  the  stirrups, 
el  latigo,  the  whip. 
las  betas,  the  boots. 


Para  las  mugeres. 
el  tocado,  a  cap. 
'una  camisa,  a  sfiift. 
una  suya,  an  under  petticoat. 
la  cotiila,  the  stays. 
un  guardapk's,    an   upper 
petticoat. 
ropa  de  levantar,  a  morn- 
,     ing  gown, 
medlas,  stockings. 
ligas,  garters. 
las  chinelas,  the  slippers. 
el  delantalf  an  apron. 
un  peyne,  a  comb. 
el   peinador,    a    combing- 

cloth. 
el  tocador,  the  toilet. 
el  espejo,  a  looking-glass. 
polvos,  powder, 
lapomada,  pomatum. 
aguas  deoloT,  sweet" waters. 
los  alfileres,  pins. 
el  acerico,  a  pincushion. 
una  mascara,  a  mask. 
una  es(;Qjia,  a  head-dress. 


— For  the  ladies. 
un  bonetCy  a  bonnet. 
un  sombrero,  a  hat. 
un  velo,  a  veil. 
los  pingajos,  bobs, 
los  rl%os,  the  curb,  • 
la  pasta,  pasteboard. 
d  alanico,  a  fan. 
una  palatim,  a  tippet. 
un  mangiiito,  a  muff, 
losguantes,  gloves, 
las  tablillast  tables. 
lotellita  de  oler,  a  smelling- 
bottle, 
una  capa,  a  cloak. 
una  mantilla,  a  mantle. 
una  casacona,  a  pelisse. 
el  dedal,  a  thimble. 
la  aguja,  a  needle. 
el  hilo,  thread. 
el  lienzn,,  linen.. 
el    espejo    de   faWiquera, 
a  pocket  looking- glas.s, 
una  bata,  a  gown. 
la  gargantilla,  a  necklace^ 


A    rOCJlBULART    OF    WORDS. 


263 


jeydSy  jewels. 
piedras  preciosas,  precious 
stones. 
unjoya,  a  jewel. 
un  diamante^  a  diamond. 
7/7m  esmeralda,  an  emerald. 
un  ruH,  a  ruby. 
una  per  la,  a  pearl. 
medias  de  seda,  silk  stock- 
ings. 
medias  de  algodon,    cotton 
stockings. 
zapatoSf  shoes. 


galochas.  pattens. 
el  encrespador,  the  curling- 
irons. 
el  para  agua,  an  umbrella. 
el  quita  sol,  a  parasol. 
an  Ttlax  de  faltriquera,   a 
watch. 
una  casacona,  a  great  coat. 
un  pahuelo,  a  pocket  hand- 
kerchief. 
los  an'iUos,  rings. 
los  xarcillosy  earrings. 
los  brazaletts,  bracelets. 


De  las  partes  del  cuerpo  humano. 
Of   the  parts  of   the  human  body. 


la  caleza,  the  head. 
la  cara,  the  face. 
lafrente,  the  forehead. 
los  ojos,  the  eyes. 
las  cejas,  the  eyebrows. 
los  parpados,  the  eyelids. 
la  niiia  del  ojo,  the  eyeball. 
las  orejaSy  the  ears. 
el  pelo,  the  hair. 
las  sienes,  the  temples. 
el  hueco  de  la  oreja,  the  hol- 
low of  the  ear. 

el  timpano  del  oido,  the  drum 
of  the  ear. 

las  pestanas,  the  eyelashes. 

las  mexiltas,  the  cheeks. 

la  nariz,  the  nose. 

Uls  ventanas  de  la  nariz,  the 
nostrils. 


la  loca,  the  mouth. 

la  lengua,  the  tongue. 

los  dientes,  the  teeth. 

las  encias,  the  gums. 

los  colmillosy  the  eye-teeth. 

las  muelas,  the  grinders. 

los  laCios,  the  lips. 

elpaladar,  the  palate. 

los  hlgotes,  the  whiskers. 

la  tarl'a,  the  chin. 

las  barlas,  the  beard. 

el  cuelloy  the  neck. 

la  gargarita,  the  throat. 

el  seno,  the  bosom. 

el  pecho,  the  breast. 

el  estomago,  the  stomach. 

los  hombros,  the  shoulders. 

los  brazos,  the  arms. 

el  codo,  the  elbow. 


264 


A.  VOCABULARY  OF  WORDS. 


h  miineca^  the  wrist. 
las  rmnoSf  the  hauds. 
elpulgar,  the  thumb. 
el  deda  hidice, » he  tqr,-  ^ager. 
el  cledo  del  corazon,  ri:,^  iw.d- 
■dk-  liriger. 
el  deda  dnular,  the  fourth 

finger. 
el  dedo  meniquey  tl:e  little 

finger. 
la  yema  de  los  dedos,  the 
brawn  of  the  tingers. 
las  uiiaSy  the  naiis. 
la  harriga^  the  belly. 
las  costiUos,  the  ribs. 
el  omWigOj  the  navel. 
las  ingles,  the  groins. 
los  muslos,  the  thighs. 
las  rodillas,  the  knees. 
las  piernas,  the  legs. 
la  pantqrrilla,  the   calf  of 
the  leg. 
hueso  del  tolillo,  the  ancle- 
bone. 
la  garganta  delpU^  the  in- 
step. 
el  pic,  the  foot. 
el  talon,  the  heel. 
la  plant  a  del  piHy  t|ie  sole 
of  _the  foot. 
el  semllante,  tke  mien. 

Los  ciiico  sentidas,' 

la  vista,  the  sip^ht. 
el  oiJo,  the  hearing, 
el  olfato,  the  s«iielL 


la  complexion,     the   co 
plexif 
el  ayre,  the  air. 
el  pnrte,  the  demeanour. 
la  gnrdura,  the  fatness. 
la  magrura,  the  leanness 
los  costados,  the  sides. 
la  eslatura,  the  stature. 
el  paso,  the  gait. 
elgesto,  the  gesture. 
el  cclehro,  the  braiii. 
la  sangrc,  the  blood. 
las  venas,  the  veins. 
las  arterias,  the  arteries. 
hs  nervios,  the  nerves. 
los  musculos,  the  muscles 
el  cutis,  the  skin. 
el  cor  axon,  the  heart, 
e/  higado,  the  liver. 
Zo^  pulmones,  the  lungs, 
/a  vexiga,  the  bladder, 
/a  AieZ,  the  gall. 
la  saliva,  the  spittle. 
e/  sudor y  the  sweat. 
WW  resfriado,  the  rheum, 
/a  ^z,  a  cough. 
la  respiracion,  the  breath 
la  vo%,  the  voice. 
lapalahra,  the  speech. 
el  suspiro,  a  sigh. 

-The  five  senses. 

el  gusto,  the  taste. 
el  tacio,  the  feeling. 


A    VOCABUIAKY   OF    W0RD5. 


2(55 


De  las  edades. — Of  ages. 

7d  ninez,  childhood. 
infancia,  infancy, 
puericia,  boyishness. 
<idolescefKia,  adolescence. 


lajuvevtud,  youth. 
la  viriliddd^  manhood. 
la  senectud,  old  age. 
la  vejez,  old  age. 


Calidades  del  cuerpo. — Qualities  of  the  body. 


la  salucL,  health. 
iajuerza,  strength. 
la  debiUddd,  weakness. 
2a  hermosura,  beauty. 


lafealddd,  ugliness.    , 
el  garl-e,  good  presence. 
el  trio,  sprightliness. 
rico  lalle,  fine  stature. 


Defectos  del  cuerpo  humano. 
Defects  of  the  human  body. 


lafealddd,  deformity. 
las  arrugas,  urinkles. 
las  pecas,  freckles. 
las  lagahas^  blear  eyes. 
uy(a  verruga,  a  wart. 
el  Lunnr,  a  mole. 
la  tmbe  en  el  ojo,  a  pearl  in 
the  eye. 
las  cosfj'iullas,  tickling, 
la  cataraia,  cataract. 
la  ctgueud'ly  blindness. 
el  ciego,  blind. 
ei  tuertOy  «ne-eyed. 
el  mudo,  dumb. 

Para  estudlar.- 

in  alacena,  the  closet. 
un  libroy  a  book. 
el  papel,  the  paper. 
un  pliego  de  papel,  a  leaf. 
unapaginOf  a  page. 


la  magrura,  leanness. 

el  coxo,  lame. 

la  coxera,  lameness. 

eltartamiido,  the  stammerer. 

la  cor  GOV  a,  crix)kedness. 

el  culvo,  bald. 

^l  romo,  flat- nosed. 

^'l  estropeado,  crippled. 

elluUido,  lame  of  the  limbs. 

e/  ihro,  squinting. 

el  manco,  lame  ot  a  hand. 

el  sordOy  deaf, 

el  zurdo,  left-handed. 


-For  studying. 

la  cuhierta  del  Ulro,  the  co- 
ver of  a  book, 
una  pluma,  a  pen, 
la  iinta,  the  ink, 
el  tintero,  the  inkstand, 


2  A 


266 


A  VOCABULARY  OF   WORDS, 


el  corta  plumas,  a  penknife. 
el  lacre,  the  sealing-wax. 
el  sello,  a  seal. 
una  carta,  a  letter. 
1171  hillele,  a  note. 
la  escrituray  the  writing. 
lihrito    de    memorias,     the 
pocket-book. 

Instrumentos  de  musica 

vn  violin,  a  violin. 
violon,  a  bass  viol. 
unajiauta.  a  flute. 
un  caramUlo,  a  flageolet. 
una  §ayta,  a  bagpipe. 
un  oboe,  a  hautboy. 
una  guitarra,  a  guitar. 


pcrgamino,  piKchment. 

el  labiz,  the  pencil. 

una  leccion,  a  lesson. 

una  traduccion,  a  transla- 
tion. 

una  cscrilania,  a  writing- 
desk. 


, — Instruments  of  music. 

unclauicord}o,a  harpsichord, 

una  espineta,  a  spinet. 

laud,  a  lute. 

una  harpa,  a  harp. 

un  dig  mo,  an  organ. 

una  hovipda,  a  trumpet. 

un  tanibor,  a  drum. 


De  las  partes  de  una  casa.~ 

la  casa,  the  houss. 
la  puerta,  the  gate. 
el  estrado,  the  drawing-room 
la  escalera,  the  staircase. 
los  estalones,  the  stairs. 
la  cdmara,  the  chamber. 
la     anlecdmara,    the  anti- 
chamber. 
el  estudio,  the  study, 
las  ventanas,  the  windows. 
los  vidrlos,  the  glasses. 
la  cocina,  the  kitchen. 
el  patio,  the  yard. 
el  poxo,  the  well. 
la  cahallerha,  the  stable. 
la  bodega,  the  cellar. 
el  huerto,  the  garden. 


-Of  the  parts  of  a  house. 

lafucnte,  the  fountain. 
hi  dtspt.'nsa,  the  pantry. 
ei  primer {j/lo,ihe  tirst  story. 
el  segundo  alto,  the  second 

sn^ry. 
el  zaquizami,  the  garret. 
la  azotea,  the  terrace. 
el  tcjado,  the  roof 
/ffv  tejas,  the  tiles.* 
/a5  goteras,  the  gutters. 
/«  chimnu'a,  the  chimney, 
/oy  ladrillos,  the  bricks. 
elpauhnento,  the  floor, 
/a coc7ze/a,  the  coach-house. 
6'/  homo,  the  oven, 
/as  i;i^a5,  the  beams. 
/a5  viguetas,  the  joists. 


A  VOCaBULARV  Ol-  WORDS. 


26; 


los^tab lories,  the  piiUiks. 
la  senal,  the  sign. 
el  ytso,  the  plastering. 
la  cal,  the  liR}e. 
d  mannol,  the  marble. 
las  pU'dias,  the  stotirs, 
ti   pulomdr,     the    p.gton- 
hoiise. 


el     ^aliintrOf      the     hen- 
house. 
ei  corral  de  aves,  the  pouU 
try-yard» 
la  zahurt'a,  the  hogsty. 
las  paretics,  the  walls. 
elakiuUerdecusa,  the  house- 
rent. 


Muehles  de  una  casa. — ^The  furniture  of  a  house, 


la  tapiceria,  the  hangings. 
fl  espejo,  a  looking-glass. 
la  cama,  the  bed. 
las  sdhanas,  the  sheets. 
elcolchon,  the  mattress. 
cokhoii  de  pluvias ,  the  fea- 
ther-bed. 
la  almohada,  the  bolster, 
las  almohadas,  the  pillows. 
el  cielo  de  la  cama,  the  te- 
ster of  the  bed. 
las  coTttnas,  the  curtains. 
las  cortinitas,  the  head-cur- 
tains. 
la  colcha,  the  counterpane. 
Ins  vergas,  the  curtain- rods. 
espacio  de  la  cama  a  la  pared, 

the  bed-sides. 
calentador    de    cama,     the 

warming-pan. 
las  pihtUras,  the  pictures. 


el  quadro,  the  frame. 
lassiUaSy  the  chairs. 
sillon,  an  arm-chair. 
la  mesa,  the  table. 
la  estera,  the  carpet. 
hujetey  a  cupboard, 
el  liumC'O,  a  screen. 
una  caxa,  a  box. 
un  cofre,  a  trunk. 
cofrecito,  a  little  trunk. 
el  lordado,  embroidery. 
la  pintura,  the  painting. 
el  dorado,  the  gilding. 
la  escuttura,  the  carving. 
unajigura,  a  figure. 
un  pedestal,  a  pedestal. 
una  vasija,  a  vessel. 
una  j aula,  a  cage, 
i//?  pdxaro,  a  bird. 
M/i  retruto,  a  portrait* 


Z.0  <7z/e  ie  //«//</  cerca  de  la  chimenea, 
Vv'hat  is  fou  n  about  the   chimney. 

la  pnrrclitna,  the  chiuaware.    un  vnso,  a  vase. 
una  Vasija,  an  urn.  la  candcla^  the  fire. 

2a  2 


2^8 


A  VOCABULARY  OF  WORDS. 


el  carbon,  the  coals, 
las  cenizas,  the  ashes. 
el  hogar,  the  hearth. 
un  tizon,  a  firebrand. 
losfuelles,  a  pair  of  bellows. 
el  guarda  fuego,  the  fender. 
cl  biombo,  a  standing  screen. 
el  badilf  the  shovel. 
las  tenaza&y  the  tongs. 


el  ntizador,  the  poker. 
elhiomhito,  a  hand-screen. 
la  llama,  the  flame. 
el  kumOy  the  smoke. 
el  koUin,  the  soot. 
las  pqjuelas,  the  matches. 
el  eslabon,  the  steel. 
el  pedernal,  the  flint. 
la  yescUf  the  tinder. 


Lo  (/U8  se  halla  en  la  coc'ma. 
What  is  found  in  the  kitchen. 


d  asador,  the  spit. 

el  torno  del  asador,  the  jack. 

una  caldera,  a  kettle. 

la  sarttn,  a  frying-pan. 

eJ  tripodef  a  trivet. 

las  parrillas,  a  gridiron. 

un  cantaro,  a  pitcher, 

2in  ctdoj  a  pail. 

una  cuerda,  a  rope. 

iinapolea,  a  pulley. 

unaca%uela,&n  earthen  pan. 

unamafmiia,  a  great  pot. 

In  olla,  a  pot.. 

nfi'a  cuchara,  a  spoon. 

un  cutharon,  a  ladle. 

el  escalfador,  a  chafing-dish. 

ungofrabalo,  a  hook. 

las  Uares,  the  pot-hanger. 

el  ratio,  a  grater. 

la  tortera,  a  pudding  pan. 

el  mortero,  a  mortar. 

la  mano  del  morlero,  a  pestle. 

ft  sumidero,  the  sink. 

la  escoba,  a  broom. 


nn  trapo,  a  rag. 

una  rodilla,  a  dishclout. 

la  cacerola,  a  saucepan. 

una  caceta,  a  little  pan. 

la  espumadera,  a  skimmer. 

la  coladera,  a  strainer. 

la  mechonera,  a  rolling-pin, 

la  alcuxa,  an  oil -pot. 

la  vinagrera,  a  cruet. 

ima  redonia,  a  vial. 

nna  cuba,  a  tub. 

la  lexia,  ley. 

elxabon,  soap. 

«n  /7apo,  a  coarse  cloth. 

la  harlna,  the  flour. 

el  salvado,  the  bran. 

/^  arttsa,  a  tray. 

los  jRnnteles,  a  table-cloth. 

/a5  seYvilletos,  napkins. 

<?/  agnamanll,  an  ewer. 

la  jo^'aiina,  a  bason. 

/a  toalla,  a  towel. 

/o.>'  platos,  plates. 

/ojf  cuckilloSy  ki\ives» 


A  VOCABULAUy  OP  WORDS; 


2{>9 


los  tenedores,  forks. 
los  saltros,  saltcellars. 
la  escudiUay  a  porringer. 
los  platos,  dishes. 
las  cucharas,,  spoons. 


ei  jarrOy  a  mug. 
una  tasa,  a  cup. 
gran  platOy  a  bason. 
la  pala  del  homo,  the  peel 
of  the  oven. 


^/^q;WoVj a  chopping- block,    lalena,  some  wood, 
Los  criados  de  una  casa,— The  servants  of  a  house. 


el  mayordomo,  the  steward. 
el  limosnero,  an  almoner. 
el  capellan,  a  chaplain. 
el  secretario,  the  secretary. 


"el  despensero 
el  camarero, 


the  purveyor. 

the  chamber- 
lain. 
el  page,  a  page. 
d  lacayo,  a  toot  man. 
el  cocker 0,  a  coachman. 
el  mozo  de caballos,  a  groom. 
el  cahallerixo,  the  master  of 
the  horse*. 
el  copero,  the  cupbearer. 
el  bodtguero,  a  butler. 


elhulconero,  a  falconer, 
el  cocinero,  the  cook. 
la  codnera,  a  woman  cook  - 
el  galopin,  the  scullion, 
la  criddd,  the  maid  servant. 
donctlla  de  la  sefiora,  the 
chambermaids 
done  el  la    de    cdmara,    the 
waiting-woman. 
el  trinchantey  the  carver. 
el  jardinerOy  the  gardener. 
el  porter 0,  the  porter. 
el  amo  de  la  casa,  the  master 
of  the  house. 


Ijo  que  hallamos  en  la  lodega. 
VVhat  we  find  in  the  cellar. 


u.na  lota,  a  butt. 
un  Imrril,  a  barrel. 
el  sitio  de  la  huta,  a  stand  for 
a  butt. 
el  emludo,  a  funnel. 
algunos  cercos,  some  hoops.. 
la  hex,  the  dregs. 
el  vino,  wine. 
vino  anejo,  old  wine. 


vino  nu^'o,  new  wmev  . 
vino  tinto,  red  wine. 
vino  blancoy  white  wine. 
vino  claretey  claret. 
vino  agrioy  sour  wine.  . 
vino  duke,  sweet  wine. 
cervexa,  beer. 
cerveza  pef/ueiia,  ^mall  been 
sidra,  cider. 


2a  3 


nyo 


A    VOCABULARY    OF    WORDS, 


vinagre,  vinegar. 

el  martillo,  a  liamnier. 

la  linterna,  a  lantern. 


dec  eniar  unh  aril  ^  to  tap  a 
butt. 
sacar  vino,  to  draw  wine. 


Lo  que  se  halla  cerca  de  la  puerta. 
What  is  found  about  the  s;ate. 


la  Have,  the  key. 
In  cerradura,  the  lock. 
si  picaporte,  the  latch. 
cl  cerrojo,  the  bolt. 
la  campanula,  the  belT. 
el  aldaho7i,  the  knocke^r. 


los  guardas  de  la  cerradura, 
the  wards  of  a  lock, 
la  ira?7C»,  the  bar. 
el  umhrali  the  threshold. 
los  go%neSy  the  hinges. 


Lo  qu^  se  halla  en.  la  cahallerixa. 
What  is  fotind  in  the  stable. 


d  keno,  the  hay, 

la  auenay  some  oats. 

la  paja^  .some  stiaw. 

el  enrtjado,  a  rack. 

el  p€sebre,  a  manger. 

el  salvado,  the  bran. 

el  pei/ne,  the  comb. 

el  ahuohaza,  the  eurryeomb 

el  tamix,  a  sieved 

dfreno,  a  bridle. 


la  sill  a,  a  saddle. 
el  petral,  the  breast plate^ 
las  cinchas,  the  girths. 
las  cerneja^  the  fetlocks. 
algunos  flfwos,  some  nailiv 
el  arxofi,  the  saddle-bow. 
lu  cuerda,  a  halter. 
elesial'iero,  the- groom, 
/o.f  cal^allos,  the  horses. 
«r^  carro,  a  cart. 


JLo  ^tte  .fe  Aa//fl  fn  eljardln  ;  Jiores,  urholeSy   tsfc. 
What  is  found  in  the  garden  ;  flowers,  trees,  &c 

kilera  de  drholes,  a  row  of    violeias,  violets. 

trees. 
el  emparrado,  an  arbour. 


una  rosa,  a  rose. 
unjazmin,  a  jessanmin* 
daveles,  pinks. 
tulipanes,  tulips, 
linos,  liliesr. 


alhelies,  gilliflowers. 
junqui/los,  jonquils. 
amapolaSf  poppies. 
inan%an0y  an  apple-tree. 
naranjo,  an  orange- tree. 
la  espina,  the  gooseberrjf- 
bush. 


A  VOCABULARY  OF  WORDS. 


271 


el  rosal,  a  rose-bush. 

la  vidy  ihe  vine. 

la  yedra,  the  ivy. 

un  ramo,  a  branch. 

el  almeridroy  an  almond-tree. 

calle  de  arholeSy  an  alley. 

un  bosquecitOy  a  little  wood. 

la  sombray  the  shade. 

el  fresco  y  the  cool. 

un  p^aly  a  pear-tree. 

nn  cerexo,  a  cherry-tree. 

un  ciruelo,  a  plum-tree. 

un  albaricoquey  an  apricoJ- 
tree. 

vn  moral,  a  ranlberry-tree. 

un  alberchigOy  a  peach-tree. 

una  higueray  a  fig-tree. 


U7i  olivoy  an  olive-tree. 
el  boXy  the  box-tree. 
el  laurely  a  iaurel-tree. 
el  abetOy  a  fir-tree. 
elrobk,  an  oak. 
e/  o^«o,  the  elm. 
la  haya,  the  beech-tree. 
elplantely  the  nursery. 
Ijfuente,  the  fountain. 
/o.y  eitanque^y  the  canals, 
WW  arbustOy  a  bush, 
e/  mirlo,  a  myrtle-tree. 
/a  mejoranay  .  sweet   mar- 
joram, 
e/  tomllloy  thyme. 
la  veidura,  verdure. 
u  n  ra  m  illete,  a  nosegay . 


Dignidadcs  temporales. — Temporal  dignities. 


el  chancillery  the  chancellor. 
d  guarda  selloSy  the  keeper 
of  the  seals. 
el  secretario  del  estado,  the 
secretary  of  state. 
el  superintendente,  the  sur- 
veyor. 
el  tesorero,  the  treasurer. 
el  presidentCy  the  president. 
el  co7isi'jerOy  tiie  coun.sellor. 
d  maestro  de  las  suplicasy 
the  master  of  requests. 
el  maestro  de  cuentas,    the 
master  of  accounts. 
eljuez,  the  judge. 
el  consul,  the  consul. 


el  magistrado  civlly  the  civil 
magistrate, 

el  correg'ulor,  the  mayor. 

el  alcalde   de   barrio,    the 
alderman. 

el  abogado,  the  advocate. 

el  procurador  general,  the 
attorney-generaU 
vn  escrihano,  an  attorney. 
un  diputadoy  a  deputy. 
un  notarioy  a  notary. 
un  secretario,  a  secretary, 
un  procurador y  a  solicitor, 
un  escribiente,  a  clerk, 
un  escriiory  a  writer. 
el  portero,  the  door-keeper. 


272 


A  VOCABULARY  OF  WOllDS. 


el  alguacil,  the  Serjeant. 
el  carcelero,  a  gaoler. 
un  litigantey  a  pleader. 

Oficiales  de  guerra. 

el  general,  the  general. 
el  almirante,  the  admiraK 
el  teniente  general,  the  lieu- 
tenant-general. 
el  mariscal  de  campo,  a  field- 
marshal. 
el  brigadier,  a  brigadier. 
el  coronel,  the  colonel. 
el  sargento  mayor,  the  major. 
el  ayudante  mayor,  the  ad- 
jutant. 
el  capitan,  the  captain. 
el  teniente,  the  lieutenant. 
el  corneta,  the  cornet. 
el  alfcrez,  the  ensign. 
ei  sargento,  the  serjeant. 
el  ca/io    de    escuadra,    the 
corporal. 
el    hal'ilitddo,    a    quarter- 
master. 
el  coinisario,  a  commissary. 
el  precursor,  a  harbinger. 

Del  exerc'Uo.- 
un  exercilo,  a  land  army. 
una  armada,,  a  fleet. 
el  cuerpo  del  exercito,  the 
main  body. 
lavanguardia,  the  vanguard. 
ki  retaguardia,.   the    rear- 
guard. 


un  preso,  a  prisoner. 
el  corchete,  a  bumbailhl:^ 


—Officers  of  war. 

soldado  de  d  caballo,  a  horse- 
man. 
la  infanteria,  the  infantry. 
un  dragon,  a  dragoon. 
un  mosquetero,  a   rausque- 

teer. 
el  trompetero,  a  trumpeter. 
un  tambor,  a  drummer. 
el  pifano,  the  fifer. 
la  centinela,  the  sentiner. 
la  ronda,  the  round. 
la  patruUa,  the  patrolc 
una  espia,  a  spy. 
wi  gastador,  a  pioneer. 
el  artillero,  a  cannoneer; 
un  minero,  a  miner. 
un  voluntario,  a  volunteer: 
/oj  voluntarios,  the  volun>- 

teers. 
soldados  perdidos,  the   for- 
lorn hope-. 

■Of  the  army. 
el'  cuerpo  de  reserva,  the 
body  of  reserve; 
el  campo  volante,  a  flying 
camp.. 
kt  cahalleria,  the  horse. 
la  infanteria,  the  foot.. 


A  vocabulahy  or  wokds. 


,273 


un  es(/uadron,  a  squadron. 
un  batallon,  a  battalion. 
la  pritnera  Jila,    the   tirst 

rank. 
la  segundaJHa,  the  second 

rank. 
el  Lagage,  the  baggage. 

De  las  fort'i/icaciories. — Of  the  fortifications. 


la  artllUria,  the  artilleiy. 
las  tlenrlas,  the  tents. 
el  pahellon,  the  pavilion. 
un  regimiento,  a  regiment. 
una  comfjahia,  a  company. 
la  guarjiicion,  a  garrison. 


una  ciudud,  2l  city. 

una  ciudadela,  the  citadel. 

unfuerte,  a  fort. 

una  forialeza,  a  fortress. 

un  Castillo,  a  castle. 

las  murallaSy  the  walls. 

elfoso,  the  ditch. 

la  palizada,  a  palissado. 

ia  coriina,  the  curtain. 


una  contra  mina,  a  counter 
mine. 

una  torre,  a  tower. 

el  parapeto,  a  parapet. 

terraplen,  the  rampart. 

un  bastion,  a  bastion. 

los  viveres,  provisions. 

las  municiones,  ammuni- 
tion. 


la  media  luna,  the  halt  moon.  elsUio,  a  siege. 

estrada  cubiertOf  the  covered  las  capitulaciones,  the  capi- 
way.  tulations. 

un  reducto,  a  redoubt.  un  socdrro,  succours. 

las  trincheras,  the  trenches,  una  salida,  a  sally. 

U7ia  mina,  a  mine.  un  asalto,  a  storm. 

De  las  profisioncs  y  negocios. — Professions  and  trades. 


un  medico,  a  physician. 
un  cirujnno,  a  surgeon. 
un  boticario,  an  apothecary. 
un  grabador,  an  engraver. 
7tn  plalei'o,  a  goldsmith. 
un  reloiero,  a  watclimaker. 
tin  mercadar,  a  merchant. 
wercadtr  de  sedas,  a  mercer. 
tcndero  de  cint:is,  a   iuiber- 
dasher. 
?/^i"orf/o£/or,  anembroiderer. 


w;?a/(7«i7ri£ior,anupholsterer, 
un  chamarillero,    a  pawn- 
broker, 
un  pasielero,  a  pastrycook. 
un  carnicco,  a  bu^clier. 
un  mesonero,  an  innkeeper. 
un  sonibrerero,  a  hatmaker. 
un  sastre,  a  tailor. 
un  zapatero,  a  shoemaker, 
un  imprcsor,  a  printer. 
un  /ihero,  a  bookseller. 


274 


A    VOCABULAftY   OP   WORD; 


un  panadero,  a  baker.  iin  vidriero,  a  glazier, 

un  remeridon,  a  cooler.  un  herrudor,,  a  farrier. 

un  dlleroy  a  sacller  un  comedhnUe,  a  player. 

un  hnrlero,  a  b.irber.  un  musico,  a  musician. 

un  larpinlero  de  obrajina,  a  un  piiitor,  a  painter. 

joiner 
un  carpiniero,  a  carpenter. 


un  alb  ami,  a  mason. 
un  serrngero,  a  locksmith. 
\m  vwitnero,  a  miller. 
icn  guanlero,  a  glover. 
una   lavandera,  a  washer- 
woman. 


mercadir  de  vino,  a  wine- 
merchauL 
un  espadero,  a  sword  cutler. 
un  enrjuadcrnadur,  a  book- 
binder. 
una  modista,  a  milliner, 
una  hatera,  a  mantuamaker. 
un  inierprete,  a  linguist. 


Calidades,  defectos,  e  mperfeciones  de  un  kombre. 
Qualities,  defects,  and  imperfections  of  a  man. 

un  tuerto,  a  one-eyed  man.  un  enano,  a  dwarf. 

un  ciego,  a  blind  man.  un  iadron,  a  thief. 

w«Joroiacio,  a  hunch-backed  un  belitre^  a  rascal. 

man.  el  verdugo,  the  executioner. 

un  estropeado,  a  cripple.  un  ratero,  a  pickpocket. 

un  viancOf  a  cripple.  un  picaro,  a  rogue. 

z^«  2;w?afo,  a  left-handed  man.  un  alcahuete,  a  pimp. 
un    manco. 


a   one-handed 
man. 
un  .sordo,  a  deaf  man. 
un^.mudo,  a  dumb  man. 
un  tartamudo,  a  stammerer, 
un  calvOf  a  bald  man. 


un  magico,  a  magician, 
im  hechicem,  a  sorcerer. 
una  bruxa,  a  witch. 
un  malvado,  a  wicked  fel- 
low. 
un  pobreie,  a  sad  wretch. 

Buenas  calidades  del  hombre,  y  las  enfcrmedadts  a  las 
quales  eiid  txpucsto. 

Good  qualities  of  a  man,  and  the  illnesses  to  which  he 

is  subject. 
hombre   de   lucva  cara,    a     hombre  de7nala  cara,  a  b^d- 
,  good-locking  man.  looking  Uiau. 


A   VOCABULARY  OF  \vr»RDS. 


275 


hovilre  rico,  a  rich  man. 
desgracia,  a  misfortune. 
un  enfe-rmo,  a  person  ill 
una  enjh-meddd,  an  illness. 
Unas  caleniurns,  a  fever. 
calentura  quotidiana,-A  quo- 
tidian ague. 
las  tercianaSj  a  tertian  ague. 
las    qiLor tanas,    a  quartan 

ague. 
elparasismo  defrio,  the  cold 

lit. 
una  herida,  a  wound. 
una  contusion,  a  contusion. 
la  gotay  the  gout. 
un  dolor  coiico,  the  colic. 
las  viruelas,  the  small-[»ox. 
cl  sarampiony  the  measles. 
un  catarro,  the  rheum. 
unajiuxiou,  a  cold  in  the 

head. 
ia  to%,  the  cough. 
ioz  convuls'wo,  the  hooping- 
cou^h. 


la  sarna,  the  itch. 

la  (omezony  the  itching. 

un  apostema,  an  impost- 
hume. 

la  corrupcion,  the  corrup- 
tion. 

la  piedra,  the  stone. 

las  arenillas,  the  gravel. 

M«  nudo,  a  bunch. 

z/«  aranOy  a  scratch. 

wwa  cai<fa,  a  fall. 

iin  ahorto,  a  miscarriage. 

un  papirote,  a  fillip. 

z/72a  bojetada,  a  slap  on  the 
face. 

un  puhttazo,  a  cuff. 

un  puntapii,  a  kick. 

un  tiro  de  pistola,  a  pistol- 
shot. 

una  estotada,  a  thrust  with 
a  sword. 

el  desfnayo,  swooning. 

el  sudor  J'rioy  a  cold  sweat*. 

Id  mucrte,  death. 


De  las  aves. — Of  birds. 


un  dguila,  an  eagle. 
una  auc,  a  bird. 
un  paxaritoy.  a  httle  bird.  ' 
un  xi/guero,  a  g.  Idtinch. 
una  pardilla,  a  linnet. 
un  Canario,  a  Canary-bird. 
un   oropendala,    a  yellow- 
hammer. 
el  ruysenoTy  a  nightingale. 


una  alondra,  a  lark. 
un  verderon,  a  green -bird. 
un  zorzal,  a  thrush. 
un  francoUn,  a  godwit. 
una  perdizy  a  i)artridge. 
unpitlroxo,  a  redbreast. 
un  chirloy  a  woodpecker. 
una  codorniz,  a  quail. 
un  tordOf  a  starling. 


276 


A   VOC48ULAKY  OF  WOKDS. 


vnpinxon,  a  chaffinch. 
un  gorrioTif  a  sparrow. 
un  papagayo,  a  parrot. 
un mirlo,  a  blackbird. 
una  urraea,  a  magpie. 
un  grajo,  a  jay. 
un  pichon,  a  pigeon. 
una  paloma,  a  dove. 


una  cnrneja,  a  rook. 
el  a^uzanievef  a  wagtail. 
elreyezuelo,  a  plover. 
un  ortolano,  an  ortolan. 
una  go/ondrina,  a  swallow, 
el  puaverde,  a  green-beak. 
un  cuclillOf  a  cuckoo. 


uijiimales  anjihios. — Amphibious  creatures. 
un  castor,  a  beaver.  un  galdpago,    a  land   tc 

una  nutria,  an  otter.  toise^ 

un  hippopotamo,  a  sea-horse,    unafocat  a  sea-calf. 


Dc  los  quadrupedos, — 
un  perro,  a  dog. 
un  perrito,  a  littie  dog. 
una  gata^  a  she- cat. 
una  perriUa^  a  little  bitch. 
goto  de  algalin,  a  civet-cat. 
una  rata,  a  rat. 
un  raion,  a  mouse. 
un  mono,  an  ape. 
una  oveja,  a  sheep. 
unpuerco,  a  hog. 
una  puerca,  a  sow. 


Of  four-footed  animals. 
u?ia  zorra,  a  fox. 
un  loho,  a  wolf. 
un  toro,  a  bull, 
un  mulo,  a  mule. 
un  camello,  a  camel. 
una  calra,  a  she- goat, 
un  elej'ante,  an  elephant, 
U7i  lean,  a  lion. 
un  leopardo,  a  leopard. 
un  tigre,  a  tiger. 
un  cahallo,  a  horse. 


De  los  reptiles  ef«Aec/o5.— Of  reptiles  and  insects. 


un  sapo,  a  toad. 
una  rana,  a  frog. 
un  lagarto,  a  lizard. 
un  caracal,  a  snail. 
un  escarulajo,  a  beetle. 
un  escorpion,  a  .scorpion. 
una  arafia,  a  spider^ 


una  serpicnte,  a  serpent. 
una  maripo&a,  abutteifi) 
una  mosca,  a  fly. 
un  mosf/uilo,  a  gnat. 
una  oruga,  a  caterpillar,. 
un  giisano,  a  worm. 
«<«  piojo,  a  louse. 


A    YOCABULAKY    OF    WORDS. 


277 


Ttjia  pulga,  a  flea. 
una  chinche,  a  bug. 
U7ia  liendre,  a  nit. 

Lo  que  se  ve  en  el  campo.- 

el  camino,  the  road. 

cdmino  real,  the  highway, 

una  llajiada,  a  plain. 

un  valle,  a  valley. 

una  montaiia,  a  mountain. 

una  colina,  a  little  hill. 

un  losfjue,  a  wood. 

una  selva,  a  forest. 

un  seto,  a  hedge. 

un  arbusto,  a  bush, 

un  arbol,  a  tree. 

un  ramo,  a  branch. 

el  grano,  the  corn. 

el  trigo,  the  wheat. 

la  cebada^  barley. 

la  avena,  the  oats. 

la  vid,  the  vine. 


una  kormiga,  an  ant. 
una  cocodrilo,  a  crocodile. 
un  aspid,  an  asp. 

■What  is  seen  in  the  country. 
unjardin  6  kuerto,  a  garden, 
calle  de  ar boles,  an  alley. 
un  Castillo,  a  castle. 
un  campandrio,  a  steeple. 
una  praderia,  a  meadow, 
un  lago,  a  lake. 
estanque  de  agua,  a  pond, 
una  roca,  a  rock. 
una  zanja,  a  ditch. 
un  arroyo,  a  rivulet, 
un  rio,  a  river. 
un  puenle,  a  bridge, 
un  barco,  a  bark. 
un  pdntano,  a  marsh. 
un  cenagdl,  a  slough. 
una  aldea,  a  village. 
una  plaza,  a  fortified  town. 


Lo  que  v^inos  en  una  ciudad. — What  we  see  in  a  city. 


las  puertas,  the  gates. 
la  iglesia,  the  church. 
un  palacio,  a  palace. 
una  casa,  a  house. 
un  hospital,  an  hospital. 
la  aduana,  the  customhouse. 
la  loiija,  the  exchange. 
plaza  de  annas,  the  place 
of  arms. 
casa  de  ayuntamento,    the 
town-house. 


la  casa  del  corrco,  the  post- 
office. 
el  banco,  a  banking-house. 
una  calle,  a  street. 
laferia,  the  fair. 
la  plaza,  ilie  market. 
unafuente,  a  fountain. 
elpuente,  the  bridge. 
una  tienda,  a  shop. 
la  carrel,  a  prison. 
callejuela,  a  lane. 
una  posada,  an  ina, 

2£ 


2;8 


A    VOCABULAUY    OF    WORDS. 


De  los  color es.- 
el  bianco,  white. 
et  negro,  black. 
el  roxo,  red. 
el  verde,  green. 
el  arnarillo,  yellow. 
el  o%ul,  blue. 
elpardo,  gray. 
color  de  violeta,  violet  colour. 
color  de^ucgo,  fire  colour. 
color  de  ccre'z.a, cherry  colour. 
el  morado,  purple. 


-  Of  colours. 

color  de  aceitunas,  olive  co- 
lour. 

color  de  ladrillo,  britk  co- 
lour. 

pnj'ix.o,  straw  colour. 

carmrsi,  crimson. ■ 

hruno,  dun  colour, 

anorarijado,  orauge  colour. 

colinrilino,  dove  colour. 

ceniciento,  ash  colour. 


De  los  metales. — Of  metals. 


el  ofo,  gold. 

In  plata,  silver. 

el  ocero,  steel. 

el  h'lerro,  iron. 

el  phnio,  lead. 

*/  cohre,  cast  copper. 

el  hronce,  b'ass. 

colre  amarlllo,  yellow  bra  s. 

Voces  wercontiles.— 
un  aharcador,  an  engrosser. 
abonary  to  credit. 
el  porte,  the  carriage. 
hilo  acarreto,  packthread. 
aceptar  una  Ictra,    to   ac- 
cept a  bill. 
accion,  stock. 
acreedor,  creditor. 
Idpotecario,  mortgagee. 
el  que  da  la  hipoteca,  mort- 
gager. 
nduana,  customhouse. 
ejuste,  a  bargain. 


el  pellre,  pewter, 
el  e<taTwy  tin. 
el  ozogue,  quicksilver. 
piedra  Imdn,  loadstone. 
el  azf/fre,  brimstone. 
arcro  j'urtd'd.0,   cnst  si  eel, 
el  cardenillo,  vertiisirise. 
el  Lulrio,  glass. 

Commercial  terms. 
ajustc  de  cuentas,  a   settle- 
ment. 
a  In  vucHa,  carried  over, 
un  alniacen    a  warehouse. 
ahnoneda,  sale  by  auction. 
aUpU'ar,  to  hire. 
armbio,  exch  ange. 
bieries,  goods. 
propios,'  property. 
osegurar,  to  insure. 
dine.ro    de    contado,    ready 
money. 


A    VOCABULARY    OF    WORDS. 


V9 


^'ienes  habidos,  y  por  hater, 
goods  which  1  have,  or 
may  have. 
ioiisumu,  consumption. 
caudal,  slock; 
fondo,  fund. 
caxtro,  caoh-kee^wr. 
mxa,  cash. 

libro  de  coxa,  cash-book. 
un  ctTii/iaido,  a  ctriificate. 
el  cobrador,  the  receiver. 
dtrechos  d^  muelle,   wharf- 
age, ^;c. 
u?i  companero,  a  partner. 
compauia,  company. 
compahia,  parinersiilp. 
una  comision,  a  commission. 
c'lento,  cent,  or  per  100. 
dos  0  Ires  por  clento,   two 
or  three  per  cent. 
una  compra,  a  purchase. 
un  comprador,  a  purchaser. 
un  conocimiehtOy   a  bill  of 
hiding. 
una  cuenta,  a  bill. 
suniar  una  cuenta,  to  cast 
up  a  bill. 
ped'ir  cuenta,  to  call  to  an 
account. 
pagar  a  cuenta,  to  pay  a  part 
of  an  account. 
cons'ignacion,  consignment. 
derechus  de  entrada,  duty  of 
importation. 
derechos  de  salida,  duty   of 
exportation. 
2 


dticargar,  to  unlade. 
dtst  uenlo  por  dinero  de  con" 
tado,  discount  for  ready 
money. 
dcstniioiso,  disbursement. 
dervckus  munlcipales,  town's 
duties, 
un  duplicado,  a  duplicate. 
libro    de    tienda,    a    shop- 
book. 
el  borrador,  the  waste- book. 
el    borrador  cilia,    a    small 
note-book. 
el  diario,  a  journal. 
libro  mayor,  a  ledger. 
libro   de   coxa,    the   cash- 
book. 
copiador  de  cartas,  a  letter- 
book. 
viercader  por  ffi  ay  or  ,c{\\ho\e- 
sale  dealer. 
Jhlta  de  pago,  nonpayment. 
unpogart,a  [promissory  note*. 
para  costn  d';  ptrdidas,   for 
the  cost  of  losses. 
peso  bruto,  gross  weight. 
peso  de  rey,  neat  weight. 
p6li%a  de  scguras,  policy  of 
insurance. 
surgir,  to  come  to  anchor. 
tara,  tare  or  trett. 
la  tara,  a  set  rate. 
toneleria,  cooperage. 
tratar,  to  deal. 
negocio,  business. 
vendedor,  seller. 
B  2 


280 


A    VOCABULARY    OF    WORDS. 


vent  a,  sale. 

la  amarraj  a  cable. 

la  sonda,  the  sounding-lead. 

un  piioto,  a  pilot. 

el  guardian,  the  boatswain. 

un  marinero,  a  sailor. 

un  armador,  a  privateer. 


camarote,  a  cabin. 
la  camara,  the  great  cabin, 
una  tormenta,  a  tempest. 
vna  lorrasca,  a  storm. 
bonanza,  fair  weather. 
calma,  the  calm.- 


A  COLLECTION  OF  VERBS, 


VERY  NECESSARY  TO  BE  L<AR.NT  BY  HEARl* 


Para  estud'mr.- 
er.tudiar,  to  study. 
QprendeTf  to  learn. 
aprender   de    memoria,    to 

learn  by  heart, 
leeTi  to  read. 
escribirj  to  write. 
sertnlar,  to  mark. 
dollar,  to  fold  up. 
sellar,  to  seal. 
sobrescrihir ,  to  put  the  di- 
rection. 
corregir,  to  co^ect. 


■For  studying. 
borrar,  to  blot  out. 
traducir,  to  translate. 
empexaf,  to  begin. 
coniinuar,  to  go  on. 
acalar,  to  end. 
repetir,  to  repeat. 
hacer,  to. do. 
jc/Z'£?7-,  to  know. 
poder,  to  be  able. 
f/uerer,  to  be  willing. 
acordarse,  to  remember. 
olvidar,  to  forget. 


Parft  hallar. — To  speak. 
pronurciar,  to  pronounce.       a^r/r  /a  Zfoca,  to  open  th« 


acentuar,  to  accent. 
proferir,  to  utter. 
</ccir,  to  say. 
choriaVy  to  prattle. 
hablar,  to  chat, 
exclamar,  to  cry  out. 


mouth 
cerrar  /a  boca,  to  shut  the 

mouth 
callar,  to  be  silent. 
llamar,  to  call. 
responder,  to  answer. 


Jt    VOCABULARY    OP    WORDS. 


291 


Para  leher  y  comer. — ^To  eat  and  drink, 
to  chew.  comer y  to  dine. 


tomar  el  te,  to  drink  tea. 
cenar,  to  sm^. 
emlorracharsef    to    fuddle 
oneself. 
saiiarse,  to  fill  oneself. 
te7ier  hamlre,  to  be  hungry. 
teiwr  sed,  to  be  dry. 


roncar,  to  snore. 
(lespertar,  to  wake. 
levaniorse,  to  rise. 
rogar  d  Dios,  to  pray  God. 


tragar,  to  swallovy. 
cortar,  to  cut. 
guslar^  to  taste. 
iimpiar,  to  rince, 
be^er,  to  drink. 
comer,  to  eat. 
ayunaTj  to  fast. 
ahuorzar,  to  breakfast. 

Para  ir  d  dormir. — To  go  to  sleep. 
meterse  en  la  carna,  to  get     sonar,  to  dream. 

into  bed. 
dormir,  to  sleep. 
velar,  to  watch. 
descansar,  to  rest. 
adormecerse,  to  fall  asleep. 

Veslirse. — To  dress  oneself. 

vestirse,  to  dress  oneself.  empolvarse,  to  powder  one's 

desnudarse,  to  undress  one-  head. 

self,  ponerse  el  sombrero,  to  put 

ponerse  las  zapatos,  to  put  on  one's  hat. 

on  one's  shoes,  estarcubierto,  lobe  covered, 

quitarse  los  zapatios,  to  pull  abotonarse,  to  button  one- 

otf  one's  shoes.  self. 

peynarse,    to    comb    one's  ponerse  las  med'ias,  to  put 

head.  on  one's  stockings; 

Wxarse  e//)6/o,  to  dress  one's  acordonarse   la   cotilla,    to 

head.  lace  oneself^ 

afcitarse,  to  shave  oneself. 

Acetones  ordinarias  a  los  hombres. 
Ordinary  actions  of  men. 
reiif,  to  laugh.  susphar,  to  sigh, 

llorar,  to  weep.  eslornudar,  to  sneeze. 

2b3 


282  A  VOCABULARY  OF  WORDS. 

hoste%ar,  to  yawn.  sudaty  to  sweat. 

soplar,  to  blow.  limpiar,  to  clean. 

sonarse  las  narices,  to  blow  temLlar,  to  tremble. 

one's  nose,  hinchar,  to  swell, 

sillar,  to  whistle.  toser,  to  cough. 

oir,  to  hear.  mirar,  to  look. 

oler,  to  smell.  pellizcar,  to  pinch. 

escupir,  to  spit,  rascar,  to  scratch. 

echar  sangre  por  las  narkes,  cosquillar,  to  tickle. 
to  bleed  at  the  nose. 

Acetones  de  amor  y  de  odio. — Actions  of  love  and  hatred. 

amar,  or  (juerer,  to  love.  dar,  to  give. 

alhagar,  to  caress.  negar,  to  deny. 

lisonjeary  to  flatter.  prohibir,  to  forbid. 

mostrar     henevolencia,     to  maltratar,  to  use  ill. 

show  a  kindness,  apalear,  to  beat..       ' 

ahrazar,  to  embrace.  dettstar,  to  hate. 

besar,  to  kiss,  impeler,  to  drive. 

saludar,  to  salute.  perdonar,  to  pardon. 

ensmar,  to  teach.  disputar,  to  dispute. 

nutrir,  to  nourish.  controveriir,  to  argue. 

corregir,  to  correct.  alegar,  to  plead. 

moriificart  to  punish.  proieger,  to  protect. 

cestigar,  to  chastise.  ahandonar,  to  forsake. 

azotar,  to  whip.  maldecir,  to  curse. 

(tlabar,  to  praise.  Imdecir,  to  bless. 
culpaVy  to  blame. 

Pflra  /g5  diversiones. — For  diversions,  or  exercises, 

cantor,  to  sing. .  ifocar  /a  Jiauta,  to  play  on 
haylar,  to  dance.  the  flute. 

saltar,  to  leap.  esgrimir,  to  fence. 

jugar,  to  play.  cabalgar,  to  ride, 

/ofcr  /a  guiiarra,  to  play  on  Jiw^ar  a/  wg/Zo^  to  play  at 
the  guitar.  mall. 


A    VOCABULARY    OP    WORDS, 


28a 


jugar  d  la  pelotay  to  plav  at 

tennis 

jugar  a  los  naypes,  to  play 

at  cards. 

jugar  d  los  cienios,  to  play 

at  piquet. 

jugar  at  homhrey  to  [)lay  at 

ombre. 

jugar  a  la  baceta,  to  play  at 

bnsset 

jugar  al  alxedrezj  to  play  at 

chess. 
ganar,  to  win. 
perder,  to  lose. 
apostar,  to  lay  a  wager. 
mventurar,  to  venture. 


estnr  en  pat.,  to  be  quits, 

de^C'.rtar,  to  lay  out. 

barajar  iasncifpes,  toshutBe. 

alTMr  los  nnypes,  to  cut 

ejitretenerse,  to  divert  one- 
self. 

chancear,  to  joke. 

rtine  de  uno,  to  laugh  at 
one. 

hacer  reir  d  una,  to  make 
one  laugiu 

estar  en  pie,  to  stand  up. 

inclinatsey  to  stoop  down- 
wards. 

volt  ear,  to  turn. 

parar,  to  stop. 


Para  las  en^ermedades, — For  illnesses; 

temar  el  pulso,  ta  feel  the     hacer  una  incision,  to  make 

pulse.  an  incUion. 

dar  una  medecina,  to  give  a     vendar  una  herida,  to  bind 

medicine.  up  a  wound. 

iomar  una  medecina,  to  take     tentar,  to  probe. 

a  medicine.    po?iersemejor,  to  grow  bet- 
estar  main,  to  be  sick. 
poneise peor,  to  grow  worse. 
purgaty  to  purge. 
sangrar,  to  let  blood. 


ter. 
corlar,  to  cut. 
sanir,  to  cure. 
mejorar,  to  recover. 


Para  comprar. — For  buying. 

pedir  el  prccio,  to  ask  the  regaiear,  to  haggle, 

price.  med'r-,  to  measure.. 

quantQ  vale  mo .^  how  much  comprar,  to  buy. 

is  this  worth  ?  pagQr,  to  pay. 

^ue  cuesta  ?    what  dees  it  o/i-ecer,  to  bid. 

cost?  exfgir,  to  exact 


284 


A   VOCABULARY  OF  WORDS. 


vender  car 0,  to  sell  dear..       desern penary  to  t.^ke  out  of 
vender  larato^  to  sell  cheap.  pawu, 

j>rtstar,  to  lend.  dar,  to  give, 

■pedlr  prestad%,  to  borrow.       engafiar,  to  cheat, 
empenar,  to  pawn. 

Para  la  iglesia. — For  the  church, 

ir  d  la    iglesia,    to  go  to     bautizar,  to  baptize, 
church,     corifinnar,  to  conhrm. 

rogar  a  Dios,  to  ipniy  God.       repicar    las  cam  partus 

oir  el  sermon,  to  hear  the 
sermon. 

prcdicar,  to  preach. 

comulgar,  to  receive  the  sa- 
crament. 

adornar,  to  adorn. 


fo 

ring  the  belis. 
sepultar,  to  bury. 
can  tar,  to  sing. 
enterrar,  to  inter. 
arrodiUarse,  to  kneel. 
levantarse,  to  rise. 


jicciones  y  movimientos  de  los  homlres. 
Actions  and  motions  of  men. 


andar,  or  ir,  to  go. 
(juedar,  to  stay. 
habitar,  to  dwell. 
vcnir,  to  come. 
■pas ear,  to  walk. 
correr,  to  run 
seguify  to  follow. 
escapar,  to  escape. 
partir,  to  depart. 
adelantar,  to  advance, 
e.v^ar  deltas,  to  stand  back, 
t'^/ar  /<?/05^  to  be  distant. 
ucercarse,  to  come  near. 
volver,  to  return. 


resbalar,  to  slide. 
hacerse  daiio,  to  hurt  one- 
self. 
arrlhar,  to  arrive. 
ir  a  recilir,  to  go  to  meet. 
entrar,  to  come  in. 
irse,  ox  salir,  to  go  out. 
subir,  \o  go  up. 
descender,  to  go  down. 
cstar  ocioso,  to  stand  idlev 
sent  arse,  to  sit  down. 
pasear,  to  walk. 
irdpasear,  to  go  a- walking. 
estar    de  priesa,    to  be  in. 
haste. 


caerse  abaxo,  to  fall  down. 

Acciones  manuales. — Manual  actions. 
trabajar,  to  work.  tocar,  to  touch  or  feeL 


k  VOCABULARY  OF  WOKDS. 


2B§ 


palpar,  to  handle. 
anudar,  to  tie. 
desatar,  to  untie. 
soltar,  to  let  loose. 
Ik  oar,  to  take  away. 
toviar,  to  take. 
hf/rtar,  to  steal  away. 
coger,  to  gather. 
despedazar,  to  tear  cfT. 
presenlar,  to  present. 
recibir,  to  receive. 
€onipTimiry  to  squeeze, 
/e/zer,  to  hold  or  to  have. 


romper,  to  break. 
esconder,  to  hide. 
cuhrir,  to  cover. 
descubrir,  to  discover. 
emporcar,  to  dirty. 
Umpiary  to  clean, 
roxar,  to  rub. 
sentir,  to  feel. 
viostrar,  to  point  out. 
pellizcar,  to  pinch. 
cosquiliar,  to  tickle. 
aranar,  to  scratch. 


j4cciones  de  la  mem'r^ria  y  de  la  imaginaclon, 
Actions  of  memory  and  imagination. 


acnrdarse,  to  remember. 
olvidar,  to  forget. 
pensar,  to  think, 
creer,  to  believe. 
dudar,  to  doubt. 
sospechar,  to  suspect, 
olservar,  to  observe, 
^ewer  cuidado,  to  take  <;are. 
5fl^'er,  to  know. 
imaginar,  to  imagine. 
desear,  to  wish. 
esperar,  to  hope. 
temer,  to  fear. 
asegurar,  to  assure. 
adjudicar,  to  adjudge. 


concluir,  to  conclude. 
rcsoLuer,  to  resolve, 
^w^'ir,  to  feign. 
estarpagado  desi,  to  be  con- 
ceited, 
e5/ar  ohstinado,  to  be  obsti- 

nnte. 
flrc^  en  col  era,  to  fly  into 
a  passion. 
aplacarse,  to  l>e  appeased, 
crrar,  to  mistake. 
emhrollarse,  to  embroil  one- 
self, 
w/ar  ct>/7o,  to  be  certain. 
e5/t/r  zeloso,  to  be  jealous. 


Para  /as  ar/e^  y  negocios. — For  arts  and  trades. 
pintar,  to  paint.  delinear,  to  draw  a  sketch* 


gravar,  to  engrave. 


Ijordarp  to  embroider. 


2S6 


A  VOCAi^ULARY    OF  WORDS. 


esmaltafy  to  enamel. 
dorar,  to  gild. 
platear,  to  silver  over. 
ataractary  to  inlay. 

Para  el  exercUo.- 

tevaniar  gente,  to  raise  sol- 
diers, 
tocar  el  tamlor,  to  beat  the 

drum. 
tocar  el  clarin,  to  sound  the 

trumpet. 
viarchar,  to  march. 
arampar,  to  encamp. 
ahjar,  to  lodge. 
opearse  del  cal:  alio,  toaliglit. 
dar  batnlla,  to  give  battle. 
gaiiar   la  victoria,   to  gain 
the  victoiy. 
poner  en  desorden,  U)  put  in 
disorder. 
destruir,  to  rout. 
hurtar,  to  rob. 
saqueaTy  to  sack. 
pillar,  to  plunder. 
bloquear,  to  block  up. 


imprlwlr^  to  print. 
t/itjnadtrnnr,  to  bind  a  bocill. 
iial)ujar,  to  labour. 


—For  the  army. 

sitiar,  to  besiege. 
asaltar,  to  storm. 
tomar  de  asalto,  to  take  by 

storm. 
saltar  la  mina,  to  spring  a 

mine. 
eTicender,  to  fire. 
capitulary  to  capitulate. 
rcndirsH,  to  surrender.  ' 
sacar  la  espada,  to  draw  thtJ 

sword. 
vwiar,  to  kill. 
dai  quartely  to  give  quarter. 
herir^  to  wound. 
ahrir  la  irmchiraj  to  open 
the  trenches. 
tocar  a  la  retirada,  to  sound 
the  retreat. 
perseguir  alenemigOy  to  pur- 
sue the  enemy. 


END  OF  THE  VOCABULARY. 


287 


rAMILlAR  DIALOGUES, 


DIALOGO  L 

Acerca  de  saludar  e  infi)r- 
marse  de  la  salud  de 
una  persona. 

BUENOS  dias,  tenga^  vmd. 
Buenos  nnches,  icnga  vmd. 
f^Cnrnn  estd,  umd?* 
Bneno^  no  muy  huuno  ;  asi, 

asi. 
Muy  hue7i(ypara  servir/e. 
A I  seriicio  de  vm. 
I'll  a  vm.  mudios  ancs. 
Lc  diiy  las  gracias. 
^^Coino  esUi  su   scilor  her- 

•mano  ? 
K'ita  lueno. 

Se  alegrard  de  vcr  a  vmd. 
No  iengo  tiempo    de   verle 

futy. 
SieiUese  vmd.  un  rafo. 
Dd  una  si/la  al  schor. 

No  es  necesarlo. 

JE?  vienester  que  vdya  d  hac^r 

una  v'mla  en  la  vecinddd. 
Estd  vm.  de  priesa. 
Folvere  luego, 
Adios,  senor. 


DIALOGUE  I. 

About  saluting  and  'uiqui" 
ring  after  ttie  health 
of  a  pet  son. 

GOOD  morning,  sir. 
Good  night,  sir. 
How  do  you  d(),  sir  ? 
Well,  not  very  well}  so,  so. 

Very  well  to  serve  you. 

At  your  service. 

J  am  obliged  to  you. 

]  thank  you- 

Mow  does  your  brother  do? 

He  is  well. 

He  will  be  i;lad  to  see  you. 

I  shall  liave  no  time  to  see 

him  <o-day. 
Fc  })leased  to  sit  down. 
Give  a  chair  to  the  genW- 

man. 
There  is  no  occasion. 
I  mast  go  to  pay  a  visit  in 

the  neighboiirhood. 
You  are  in  haste. 
I  will  be  back  presently. 
Farewell,  sir. 


288 


DIALOGUKS. 


Me  alegro  de  verle  con  salud.   I  am  glad    to  see  you   in 

good  health. 


Beso  las  vianos  de  vnid. 
Servidor  devm, 
Su  kumilde  servidor, 
Serv'idoradevnt,     . 
Su  humilde  servidora. 


I  kiss  your  hands, 

I  am  your  servant. 

Your  most  humble  servant. 

Your  servant,  sir. 

Your  most  humble  servant. 


DIALOGO  IL 

Para  hacer  una  visita  por 
la  manana. 

^Adonde  estd  tu  amo  ? 
^Duerme  aun?  or  ^aim  du- 

erme? 
No,  senor^  estd  desplerto. 
^  Esta  levantado  ? 
No,  sehor,   aun  estd  en  la 

cama. 
iQue  vergiienza!    estar  en 

la  cama  a  esta  hora. 

Me  acostc  tan  tarde  anoche, 

que  no  hepodido  levantar' 

vie  temprano. 
^Que   hizo  vm.  despues  de 

cenar  ? 
BaylamoSj '  cajitdmos,    rei- 

mos,  jugdmos. 
^Aquejuego? 
Jugdmos  a  los  cientos  con  su 

sehor  la  el  cabal  lero  de — . 
^  Que  hicUron  los  otros  ? 
Juguron  el  axedrez. 
Siento  muchishno,   no  ha- 

herlo  sabido  I 


DIALOGUE  XL 

To  pay  a  visit  in  the  morn* 

Where  is  your  master  ? 
Is  ire  asleep  still  ? 

No,  sir,  he  is  awake.     .   * 

Is  he  up  ? 

No,  sir,  he  is  still  a-bed. 

What  a  shame  it  is  to  be. 

a-bed  at  this  time  of  the 

day! 
I  went  to  bed  so  late  last 

night,  I  could  not  rise 

early  this  morning. 
What  did  you  after  supper  ? 

W«  danced,  we  sung,  we 
laughed,  we  played. 

At  what  game  ? 

We  played  at  piquet  with 
the  knight  of . 

What  did  the  rest  do  ? 

They  played  at  chess. 

How  grieved  am  I^  I  did 
not  know  it ! 


DIALOGUES.  28.0 

!     ^:Quien gano!*  ^quien  fjerdio?  Who  wow  ?  who  lost  ? 

I     He  ganndo  die-x,  dohlones.  I  won  ten  pistoles. 

(••  Ha  jugado  vm  hasta  muy  Till  what  hour  did  you  play  ? 

tarde  P 

Hasfa  las  dos  de  la  mafiana.  Till  two  in  the  morning. 

f^J  que  Jmra  se  ha  acostado  At  what  o'clock  did  you  go 

vvi  ?  to  bed  ? 

y^  las  tres,  a  las  tres  y  me-  At  three,  half  an  hour  after 

dia.  three. 

No  extrano  que  vm,  se  le-  I  don't    wonder    at   your 

vante  tan  tarde'.  rising  so  late. 

<<  Que  hora  es  P  What  is  it  o'clock  ? 

<5  Que  hora  cree  vm.  que  sea  ?  What  o'clock  do  you  think 

it  is  ? 

y  Oreo    que  so7i   apcnas   las  Scarce  eight,  I  believe,  yet. 
>T    ocho. 

U  Como^  las  ocho !  han  dada^  How,  eight !  it  has  struck 

las  diez.  .  ten. 

■  Es  mcnester  que  me  levante  Xlien  I  must  rise  with  all 

X     pronto.  speed. 

f  DIALOGO  HI  ,  DIALOGUE  HI. 

,"  Para  veslir-e.  To  dress  oneself. 

^  ^;Quien  es? or ^,f/u'ien eslaahiP   Who  is  there  ? 
[  ^:Que  gustavvidP  What    will    you  pleasfe  to 

have,  sir? 
Presto,  haz  caf.dela,  y  ven     Be  quick,  make  a  fire,  and 

a  vestirtTte.  dress  me. 

Lstd  la  candcia  cncemUda,     Ihere  is  a  tire,  sir. 

sehor. 
JJdme  mi  carnisa.  Give  me  my  shirt. 

No  esta  caliente,  cstdftia.       It  is  not  warm,    it  is  qv.i's 

cold. 
calmtare  si  vm  gusta.         If  you  plense,  I  will  warm  ir. 
,  no  ',  traeiue  mis  medias     No,  no  ;  bdng  me  my  silk 
de  scila,  stocking?. 

2  c 


.4290 


DIALOGUES. 


Tien  en  punfos. 
Remiindalas  un  poco. 

Lds  he  dado  a  la  remend6na 

de  media  a. 
Has  hecho  hien.     ^Adonde 

estan  nris  chine/as  ? 
^Adjande  esta  mi  bala  ? 
.  Peyname. 
Tomn  otro  peyne. 
Dame  mi  pauuelo. 
Jlqui  csld  itno  limpio,  sefior. 
Dame  el  que  estd  en  mi  fat- 

trig  Iter  a. 
Lo  di  a  la  lavandvra;  estaha 

sudo. 
filJa  Iraida  ella-mi  ropaP 
.Si,  senor,  no  falta  iiada. 

^ Que vestido llevardvm.  hoy, 

smor  ? 
El  ffUe  Ueve  ayer. 
El  saslre    dde  traer  iiiego 

su  reolido  nuevo  de  vm 
Alguno  lia^:a  d  la  puerta  ; 

■ve  cfuiun  e^. 
^ Qifien  is  ? 
Es  el  sastre,  smor. 
Dile  que  entre. 

DJALOGQ  IV. 

El  hidalgo  y  el  sastre. 

l^Me  trae  vm.  mi  vest'ido  9 
Sij,  senor ;  cqui  estd. 


They  are  torn. 

Stiich  [hem  a  little  ;   mend 

them. 
I  liave  given  them  to  the 

stocking- mender. 
You  have  Joi  le  right.  Where 

are  my  slipj)ers  ? 
Where  is  my  ni;^ht  gown  ? 
Comb  my  bead. 
Take  another  comb. 
Give  me  my  handkerchief. 
There  is  a  clean  one,  sir. 
Give  m.e  that  which  is  in 

my  pocket. 
I  gave  it  to  the  washerw'o- 

man  ;,  it  was  foul. 
Has  she  brought  my  linen  ? 
Yes,  sir ;  there  wants  no- 
thing. 
What  clothes  will  you  "wear 

to-day,  sir  ? 
These  I  had  yesterday. 
The  tailor  will  bring  your 

suit  of  clothes  presently. 
Somebody  knocks  j  see  who 

it  is. 
Who  is  it  ? 
It  is  the  tailor,  sir. 
Let  him  come  rn^ 

D'ALOGUE  rv. 

The   gentleman  and   the 

tailor. 

Do  you   bring  me  my  suit 

of  clothes  ? 
Yes,  sir  j  here  it  is. 


DIALOGUES. 


291 


Vmd.  me  hace  esperar  largo 

tien,po. 
No  pniia  venir  inas  pronto  ; 

no  tstaba  acabudo. 
El  forro  no  estaia  cosido. 
^Quiere  um.  prohar  la  ca- 

saca  9 
Vvdmos  si  estd  bien  hecha. 

Espero   que    le   gustard   a 

Me  parece  bien  larga. 

Sc  usan  largns  ahora. 
Aiotonane  vm 
Mc  aprieta  demasia  h. 
Para  estnr   lien   kecka,   es 

predso  que  ajusle  bien. 
^No  son  las  mangas  detna- 

siado  anchas  ? 
No,  senor :  van  wuy  lien. 
Este  veMdo  le  vd  muy  bien 

d  vm. 
Esta  demasiado  corto,  l^rgo, 

grande,  pequem. 
Perdone  vm  ,  le  va  muy  bien, 
Adonde  estd  el  resto  de  mi 

pano. 
No  hay  siquira  un  resto. 
^Ha  vm.  heclio  su  cuenta  ? 
SenoTy    no ;  no    he   tenido 

tiempo. 
Tray  gala  manana,  quelepa- 

gare. 


You  make  me  wait  a  great 

while. 
I  could  not  come  s^ner  j 

it  was  not  finished. 
The  liaing  was  not  sewed. 
Will  you  be  p  eased  to  try 

the  close  coat  on  ? 
Let  us  s-e  whether  it  be 

well  made. 
I  believe  it  will  please  you. 

It  seems  to  me  to  be  very 

long. 
They  wear  them  long  now. 
Button  me. 
It  is  too  close. 
T(j  tit  properly,  it  ought  to 

be  close. 
Are    not    the    sieves    too 

wide  ? 
No,  sir  ^  they  fit  very  well. 
This     suit     becomes    you 

mighty  well. 
It  is  too  short,    too  long, 

too  big,  too  little. 
Pardon  me,  it  fits  very  well, 
"Where  is  the  rest  of  my 

dull  ? 
There  is  not  a  bit  lefl. 
Have  you  made  your  bill  ? 
No,  sir  J  I  had  not  time. 

Bring  it  to-morrow  j  I  will 
pay  you. 


2  C2 


292 


DIALOGUI 


Dl/iLOGO  V, 

Para  alrro)  zar, 
Tr-n/g(Uios     a/guna      cosa, 

para  almorxur. 
Si,  sehor ;  ahi  iienen  salchi- 

chas  y  pasteUUos. 
^.Gustan  vms.jamon  ? 

Si,  trdelo  ,*  que  coriaremos 

una  tajada. 
Poll  los  manteks. 
J)d?ios  plaioSy  cudnlhs,    y 

tenedvres, 
l.ava  hs  vasos, 
i)d  una  silla  al  smor. 
Sienlese  vm.  junto  a  la  can- 

dela, 
Esioy  lien  aqui }  no  tengo 

frio. 
Vedmos  si  el  vino  es  bueno. 

Dame  esa  lotella  y  un  vaso. 

Pritelc  vm.  estevino,  seuor. 
Coma  le  halla  ?  que  le  pa^ 

rece  ? 
No  es.malo  j  es  may  bueno. 

ulh'i    estdn   las  salchichas ; 

fjuita  este  plaio. 
Coma  Unas  salchichas. 
He    comldo    almuias  ;    son 

muy  biienas. 
Deme  V7?i   algo  de  bcber. 
Caballero  a  la  salad  de  vm. 


DIALOGUE  V. 

To  go  to  breakfast. 
Bring    us     something    for 

breakfast. 
Yes    sir;    there    are  sau- 
sages antl  petty-})atties. 
Do  you  ehoose  the  gammon 

of  bacon  S 
Yes,  bring  it  j  we  will  cut 

a  slice  of  it. 
Lay  the  table-cloth. 
Give  us  plates,  knives,  and 

forks. 
Rinse  the  glasses, 
Give  the  gentleman  a  chair. 
Sit.  down,  sir  j    sit  by  the 

fire. 
I  am  very  well  here }  I  ^m 

not  cold. 
Let  us  see  if  the  wine  is 

good. 
Give  me  that  bottle  and  a 

glass. 
Taste  that  wine,  pray. 
Kow  do  you  like  it  ?  What 

do  you  say  to  it  ? 
It  is  not  bad  ;    it    is  very 

good. 
Here    are     the    sausages  ; 

take  away  this  plate. 
Eat  some  saiu sages. 
I  have  seen  some ;  they  are 

very  good. 
Give  me  some  drink. 
Y;our  health,  sir. 


DIALOGUES. 


293 


JLe  doy  las  gracias. 
Dei  de  Leber  al  sehor. 

j4calo  de  beher. 

Los   pn^leliUos    eran    muy 

buenos. 
Solo  estalan  demasiado  co- 

cidos. 
No  come  vm. 
Tanlo    he   comido,    que  no 

tendre  ganas  d  medio  dia. 

Vm.  se  burla;  no  ha  comido 

casi  nada. 
He  comido  de  buena  gana 

las  morcillaSf  las  saUhi- 

chasj  y  eljamon, 

DJALOGO  VI. 

Para  liablar  Espauol. 

^Como  vdmos  con  el  Espauol? 
^Ha  hecho  vm.  viuchos  pro- 
gresos  ahora  ?  %*  • 

No  mucho  i  no  se  casi  nada. 

Die  en,  no  obstante,  quevm, 

lo  habla  muy  bien. 
I  Oxoldfuera  verdad  ■ 
.  Los  que  Lo  dicen  se  enganan 

muc'iu. 
Le  aseguro  d  vm.  que  me  lo 

han  dicho. 
Puedo  decir  algunas  pala- 

bras  que  he  aprendido  de 

memoria. 

2c 


Sir,  I  thank  you. 

Give  the  gen;leman  some- 
thing to  drink. 

I  drank  but  just  now. 

The  petty-patties  were  very 
good . 

They  were  baked  a  littl® 
too  much. 

You  do  not  eat. 

I  have  eaten  somuch,  I  shall 
not  be  able  to  eat  my  din- 
ner. 

You  only  jest  j  you  have 
eaten  nothing  at  all, 

I  have  eaten  very  heartily 
black -pudding,  sausages, 
and  ham. 

DIALOGUE  VI. 

To  speak  Spanish. 

How  goes  on  your  Spanish  ? 
Are  you  much  improved  in 

it  now. 
Not  much  J  1  know  scarcely 

any  thing. 
It   is   said,   however,    you 

speak  it  verj'  well. 
Would  to  God  it  w  ere  true ! 
Those  that  say  so  are  much 

mistaken. 
I  assure  you,  I  was  told  so. 

I  can  say  a  few  word$ 
which  i  have  leaint  by 
heart* 

3 


294 


DIALOGUES. 


Yes  quanta  lasta  para  em- 

pezar  a  hablar. 
El  prbuilno  no  cs  el  todo ; 

es  preciso  ocular. 
Halle  vm.  siempre,  6  lien  6 

vial. 
Ttmo  decir  disparates. 

No  hay  vadr  que  terner ;  la 
lengua  Espanula  no  es  di- 
ffil. 

Lo  v^;  y  que  ticne  t.mMen 
alundancia  de  ^racuis. 

La  apiicacion  es  el  solo 
m'do  de  nprenderla. 

^Quanto  tenipohd,  <{uevm. 
la  tslu  aprendieado  ? 

Api^nas  dos  mtses. 

^No  did  su  maestro  de  vm. 
que  es  menester  hallar  si- 
empre E^pafiol  ? 

Si,  sefior,  we  lo  dice  &  me- 
nu'.lo. 

^Pnrque  no  halla  vm  9 

^Con  quien  ki^de  hallar^ 

Con  todos  los  que  le  hallen 

a  vm. 
Quisiera  hallar j  pero  no  ms 

atrevo, 
Vm.  no  dele  tcner  miedo. 
Es  menesler  ser  atrevido. 


And  it  is  as  much  as  it  is  ne- 
cessary to  begin  to  speaK, 

The  beginning  is  not  all ; 
you  must  make  an  end. 

Be  always  speaking,  either 
well  or  ill. 

I  am  afraid  of  committing 
blunders. 

Never  tear  J  the  Spanish 
language  is  not  hard. 

I  know  it ;  and   that  it  has 

abundance  of  graces. 
Application  is  the  only  way 

of  learning  it. 
How  long   have  you  been 

.  learning? 
Scarcely  two  months. 
Dees  not  your  master  tell 

you,    you    must  always 

speak  Spanish? 
Yes,  he  often  tells  me  so.  "* 

Why  don't  you  talk,  then  ? 
Whom   will  you  have  me 

,  talk  with  ? 
With  those  tliat  talk  to  you. 

I  would  fain    talk,    but  I 

dare  not. 
You  must  not  be  afraid. 
You  must  be  bold. 


DlALOGUfci. 


205 


DIALOGO  Vll. 

DeJ  tiempo. 

jjQwf'  tiempo  kace  '? 
Have  huen  tienipa. 
Have  mal  tientpo. 
^Hace  fi'io  ?  ^h  ice  color? 
No  liacefrio  ;  no  ivice  calur. 
<j  Uueve  ?  ^110  Uutve  ? 

No-Zo  creo. 
S-'  rnudo  el  viento. 
Tendremos  Uuvia. 
No  liovera  hoy. 
Llueve  d  chaparrones. 
Nieva. 
Truena. 
Gratiixa. 
JRelampaguea. 
Hace  gran  i  alor. 
.  ^Ha  helacio  la  noche  pasada  ? 
J\o,  sehor-j  pero  hiela  abora. 
Mc  parece  liaiC  un   tiempo 

neluloso. 
V'n.  lidue  razon  ,•  es  verdud. 

Vm.  pills  un  gran*  catarro. 

Ya  kace  quince  dias  que  lo 

tengo. 
^Que  hnra  es  9 
Es  temprano  ;  no  es  tarde. 
^Es  tittnpo  dedesaijunarse  ? 
LtLego  ierd  tiempo  de  comer. 


DIALOGUE  VI  r. 

Oy  the  weather. 

What  sort  of  weathej:  is  it  ? 

It  is  fine  weatr.cr. 

It  is  bad  Wiidther. 

Is  it  cold  r  is  it  hot? 

It  IS  not  cold  ;  it  is  not  hot. 

Does  it  rain  ?    does  it  not 

rain  ? 
1  do  not  ibink  it  does. 
The  wind  is  changed. 
We  shall  have  rain. 
It  will  not  rain  to-day. 
It  rains  ;  it  pours. 
It  snows 
It  thunders. 
It  hails. 
It  lightens. 
it  is  very  hot. 
Has  it  frozen  to-night  ? 
Na,  sir  J  but  it  freezes  now. 
It  appe:irs  to  me  lo  be  a 

great  fog. 
Yau  are  not  mistaken  3  it  is 

true. 
You  have  caught  a  violent 

cold. 
I  have  had  it  this  fortnight. 

What  is  it  o'clock  ?  ^ 
It  is  early.;  it  is  not  late. 
Is  it  breakfast-time  ?     ' 
It  Will  be  dianer-limc  im- 
mediately^ 


2gd 


DIALOGUES. 


Que    haremos     depues     de 

comer  ? 
Iremos  a  pasear. 
Vamos  ahora. 
No  deCemos  salir  con  este 

tiempo. 


What   shall   we    do    after 

dinner  ? 
We  will  take  a  walk. 
Let  us  take  a  turn  now. 
We   nmst  not    go    abroad 

this  weather. 


DIALOGO  Fill. 
Para  escriblr. 

Deme  vm.  un  pUego  de  pa- 
pel,  una  plmria,  y  un  poco 
de  tinta. 

Entrc  vm.  en  mi  galinet€y 
y  haltard  sohre  la  mesa, 
recado  de  escribir. 

No  hay  plumas. 

yjhi  estdn  en  el  tintero. 

Nada  valen. 

Alii  hay  otras. 

No  estan  cortddas, 

f^/^donde  estd  su  cortaplu- 
mas  ? 

^,Sabe  vm.  cor  tar  plumas  ? 

Las  cor  to  d  mi  moda. 

Esta  no  es  main. 

Mientras  acabo  esta,  carta, 
ha^ame  vm.  el  favor  de 
hacer  unpliego  dtl  resto. 

^Que  sello  quierevm.  que  le 
ptmga  ? 

Selldlo  vm.  con  la  cifra,  o 
con  mis  armas, 

^  Que  lucre  le  he  deponer  ? 

Ponga  vni:  roxo  u  negro,  no 
importa. 


DIALOGUE  Vlir, 

To  write. 

Give  me  a  sheet  of  paper, 
a  pen,  and  a  little  ink. 

Step  into  ray  closet' 5  you 
will  find  on  the  table 
whatever  you  want. 

There  are  no  pens. 

There  are  in  the  stand-dishr. 

They  are  good  for  nothing. 

There  are  some  others. 

They  are  not  made. 

Where  is  your  penknife  ? 

Can  you  make  pens  ? 

I  make  tnem  my  own  way. 

This  is  not  bad. 

While  I  finish  this  letter, 

do  me  the  favour  to  make 

a  packet  of  the  rest. 
What    sea!  will  you    have 

me  put  to  it  ? 
Seal  it  with  my  cypher,   or 

coat  of  arms. 
What  wax  shall  I  put  to  it.^ 
Put  either  red  or  black,  na 

matter  which. 


DIALOGUES. 


297 


^Ha  puesto  vm.  lafccha  ? 
Ctco  que  si ;  pero  no  hejir- 

mado. 
c^A  quanta  esidn  -s  del  vies? 

A  (Kho,  a  die%,  a  veinte. 

Ponga  vvi.  el  sohrescrito. 
^Adonde  estd  la  areniUa  ? 
Fm.  no  liene  nimca  arenilla. 

Hay  alguna  en  la  salvadera. 

Apn  estd  SU  criado  ;  square 

vm,  qm  tUuc  tJiias  cartas 

al  correo  ? 
Lleva  las  cartas  del  senor  al 

correo,  y  no  se  te  olvide 

de  pagar  el  parte. 

No  tengo  dinero, 
Ahi  lo  ticnes  i  vete  pronto, 
y  vudve  luego. 


Have  you  put  the  date  ? 

I  believe  I  have ;  but  I 
have  not  signed  it. 

What  day  of  the  month  is 
this  ? 

The  eighth,  the  tenth,  the 
tweniieth. 

Put  the  superscription. 

Where  is  the  powder  ? 

You  never  have  eitlier  pow- 
der or  sand. 

There  is  some  in  the  sand- 
box. 

Tl.ere  is  your  servant  j  will 
you  let  him  carry  tha 
Ictteri  to  the  post-house  ? 

Carry  my  letters  to  the 
post-office  J  and  don't 
forget  to  pny  the  poaU 
age. 

I  have  no  money. 

There  is  some  j  go  quich*, 
make  bastQ  to  come 
back. 


DIALOGO  IX, 

Para  comprar, 

j^  Que  manda  vm   senor  ? 
^  Que  desea  vm  ? 

Necenlo  pano  lueno  y  ker- 
viosoy  para  hacerme  un 
vcstido. 

Hdganie  vm.  el  favor  de  en^ 


DIALOGUE  IX. 

To  huy. 

What  do  you-  want,  sir  ?   . 
What  wpiild  you  please  to 

have  ? 
I  want  a  good  fine  cloth, 

to   make  me   a   suit   of 

clothes. 
Be  pleased  lo  walk  in,  sir, 


298 


DIALOGUES. 


trar,  lesacarc  ehntjor  que 

hay  en  Londrts. 
Ens^neme  vm.  el  viejor  que 

tenga. 
Ahi  tiene  vm.  uno  muyjiiio^ 

y  Lomo  se  estila  uhora. 

Es  bueno,  pero  el  color  no 

me  parece  tal. 
Aqui  hay  otra  piexa  de  un 

color  mas  baxo,  • 
Ale  gusta  este    color ;  pero 

el  pafio  es  viuy  d  Igado, 

no  tiene  bastante  cuerpo. 
Mire  vm.  este  pah'>t  seJior, 

no  hallara  otra  semejante 

en  ninguna  parte. 
^A  quauto  la  vara  f 

Sin  pedir  demasiado,  vale 
veinte  schelines. 

Wo  estoy  acostumlrddo  a  re- 
gatear;ruegodvm.  queme 
diga  el  ultimo  precio. 

He  dicho  a  vm.  quanta  vale. 

Es  demnsiado  caro ;  le  dare 

diex-y  -ocho  schelines. 
No  puedo  rebaxar  un  quarto. 
No  dare  d  vm,  lo  que  pide. 

Prn.  me  preguntS  el  ultimo 
precio f  y  se  lo  he  dicho. 

yjmos,  corte  vm.  dos  varas  y 
media. 


you  will  see  the  finest  ib 
London. 
Show  me  the  best  you  have. 

There  is  a  very  fine  one, 

and  what  is  worn  at  pre- 
sent. 
It  is  a  good  cloth  j   but  I 

don't  like  the  colour. 
There    is    another   lighter 

piece. 
I  like  ^ hat  colour  well  j  but 

the  cloth  is  not  strong, 

is  too  thin.  * 

Look  3t  this  piece,  sir;  you 

will  not  find  the  like  any 

where  else* 
What  do  yoa  ask  for  it  a 

yard  ? 
Without   exacting,    it    U 

worth  twenty  shillings. 
Sir,  I  am  not  used  to  stand 

haggling ;   pray  tell  me 

your  lowest  price. 
I  have  told  it  you,  sir  j  it  is 

worth  that. 
It  is  too  dear  ;  I  will  give 

you  eighteen  shillings. 
I  cannot  abate  a  farthing. 
You  shall  not  have  what 

you  ask. 
You  asked  me  the  lowest 

price,  and  I  have  told  it 

to  you. 
Come,  come,  cut  off  twa^ 

yards  and  a  half  of  it. 


DIALOGUES. 


299 


Ase^uro dvm  laxopalnha de 
honfl'redt  Lien,  quenoga- 
no  fin  CO  schtlines  ton  vm. 

Atjul  hay  trei  guineas,  dJme 
vm.  tambi'i, 

Uagame  vm.  el  favor  de 
darme  vtra  guinea;  a  esta 
le  filta  oro. 

Aqui  half  otra. 

AdiOi  i  sen6r,  serviddr  de  vm. 


I  protect,  on  the  word  of 
an  honest  mnn,  I  du  not 
get  a  crown  by  you. 
There  a-"e  tliree    guineas; 
give  ine  my  change. 

Be  plea-ieJ,  sir,  t<>  give  me 
anotherguinea;  this  is  too 
light,  it  wants  weight. 

H-re  is  another. 

Farewell ;  sir,  your  servant^ 


DULOGO  X. 


DIALOGUE  X. 


•  De  las  noticias. 

^'Que  se  dice,  de  niiei^o  ? 
^Sabe  vm.  alguna  cosa  ? 
Ao  he  oidp  decir  nada. 
^  Que  se  dice  en  la  ciudad  ? 

No  se  haila  de  r.ada. 

^ No  ha  oido  vm.  hablar  de  la 

gtiena  ? 
Ko  se  dice  nada  de  ella 
Un  sugeto  me  dixo  esta  ma- 

nana  que  el  sen-.-r  S  ha 

quebroilo ;  ^tlene  urn    cor- 

respondencia  ion  el? 
A'o,  seu'jr,  gracias  a  Dios. 
Tanto  m^'jor. 
Verdaderam^nte  vm  me  sor- 

prehe  de. 
Querida  amigo,  no  hay  nada 

que  eitrahar  en  todas  las 

quiebras  ahora. 


To  inquire  after  news. 

What  news  is  stirring  ? 
Do  you  know  any  ? 
I  have  heard  none. 
What  is  ■  the    talk   of   the 

town  ? 
There   is   no  talk  of  any 

thing. 
Have  you  heard  no  talk  of 

war  ? 
I  heaid  nothing  of  it. 
A    p-^ison     told    me    this 
morning,  that  P^. .  S.  is  a 
bafikrupt  j  have  you  any 
connexion  ujth  him  ? 
No,  tiiank  God. 
So  mi'ch  the  better. 
Indeed  y^u  surprise  me. 

My  dear  friend,  there  is  no 
wonder  in  all  the  bank- 
ruptcies now. 


300 


DIALOGUES. 


^V  or  que  9 

Porque  la  mayor  parte  de 
los  tender  OS  quieren  pa- 
recer  mas  de  lo  que  son 
realmente. 

^A  quanta  llega  su  quiehra  P 

Entre  veinte  y  cinco  6  veinte 
y  seis  mil  libras  esterlinas. 

iTantoi  vm.  me sorprckefide. 
Quatro  anas  hd  t'stdha 
de  caxero  en  la  tienda  del 
senor  M.  ^Co7no  ha  po- 
dido  tener  ta?ito  credito  ? 

No  se,  era  rico  quando  al 
principio  alrio  su  tienda. 


He  oido,  tres  mil  Vihras, 

Muy  lien  ;  si  tenia  ires  mil 
lihras  y  ahora  esta  bisol- 
vente,  hay  ciertmjiente  ma- 
la conducta  en  el. 

Lo  supc^^o;  he  oido  que- 
ticne  casa  de  campo  mvy 
soherhiamente  adornada, 
una  calesa,  dos  o'  ires 
criados,  sin  hahlar  de  sus 
mozos  de  tienda :  con  lo- 
das  estas  eosas  st;  gasia  la 
mayor  parte  de  la  ganan- 
day  ademds  de  la  ccraedia 
y  de  los  convites. 


Why  so  ? 

Because  the  greatest  par; 
shopkeepers  will  apj. 
more    than    they    reaii 
are. 
What  is  the  amount  of  hi 

banki-uptcy  ? 
Between    twenty-five    an 

twenty- six  thousand. 
So  much  as  that !  you  si; 
prise  me.  Four  years  ago 
he  was  but  a  shopman  at 
Mr.  M's.     How  has  he 
been  able  to  be  trus*- 
so  much  ? 
I    don't    know  5    he    v> 
worth   something  whci- 
he  tirst  began  to  open  his 
shop, 
I    heard,    three     thousand 

pounds. 
Well  J    if  he    was    worth 
three  thousand   and  re- 
duced to  be  a  bankrupt 
nov.',  there  must  be  some 
misconduct  in  that. 
I  suppose  so,-  I  have  heard 
he  has  a  country-house ;; 
mofit     handsomely    fur-f< 
nislied,    a   horse-chaise,^^^ 
,two   or    three   servants,! 
W'iihout  speaking  of  his,^ 
shopmen:  all  that  takes ^ 
a  great  part  of  the  profit,! 
besides    frequent    enter- 1 
tainuients  and  the  play.    } 


DIALOGUES, 


301 


5  Si  no  fuira  oira  cosa    que 
eso,  seria  hagaiela. 

^Fm.  llama  eso  lagatela  P 

Si,  sipuede  sosiener  se  me- 
jantes  gastos 'j  mas  si  los 
nay  pes  son  su  mas  grande 
ocupacion,  y  pierde  en  un 
ins  tan  te  el  trahajo  de  sus 
moxos  y  su  ganancia,  no 
hay  que  extranar  que  sea 
y     insolvente. 

"  No  puedo  comprehender  como 
un  hombre  dejuicio  puede 
Sir  tan  inconsiderado  que 
•arruine  a  otros  y  a  si 
misnio. 

He oido que  tieneabundancia 
de  lodas  suertes  de  genet os. 

Si  tiene  tantos  generos,  y  no 
paga  los,  ^No  seria  mejor 
volver  lo  que  no  puede  ven- 
der, que  hacer  gala  de  lo 
que  no  es  suyo  ? 


If  there  was  nothing  but 
that,  it  would  be  but  a 
trifle. 

Do  you  call  that  a  trifle  ? 

Yes,  if  he  can  afford  it; 
but  if  cards  are  his  great- 
est occupation,  and  he 
loses  in  an  instant  the 
labour  of  his  men  and 
his  own,  I  do  not  won- 
der at  his  being  a  bank- 
rupt. 

I  cannot  comprehend  how 
a  man  of  sense  can  riin 
headlong  to  the  ruin  of 
others  and  his  own. 

I  have  beard  he  is  over- 
stocked with  e\'«ry  thing. 

If  he  is  overstocked,  and 
does  not  pay  for  it, 
would  it  not  be  better  to 
send  back  what  he  can- 
not sell/  than  to  make  a 
show  of  what  is  not  his 


/;;.  no  considera,  que  la 
gente  va  generalmente  a- 
donde  hay  mas  en  que  es- 
coger. 
Lo  concedo ;  pero  hay  un 
medio  en  cada  cosa. 

,  quando  la  prudencia  es 

la  rtgla  de  nuesiras  ac- 

Clones  i  mas  quando  que- 

2 


But  you  do  not  reflect, 
that  people  generally  go 
where  there  is  a  greater 
choice. 

I  grant  it :  however,  there 
is  a  medium  in  every 
thing. 

Yes,  when  prudence  dic- 
tates our  actions  j  but 
when    we    will    appear 


302 


DIALOGUES. 


remosparecer  lo  que  no  so- 
mos,  otros  sufren  por  ello. 

Vm.  tiene  razon. 

^  Quandose  ha  de  presentar  ? 


La  gazeia  no  lo  dice. 


Pronto  Jo  salremos. 

Hace  veinte  y  sets  auos  des- 
de  que  abri  mi  tienda  :  mi 
muger  y  yo  no  tenidmos 
seiscientas  lihras  esterli- 
nas :  hemos  educddo  doce 
hijos,  y  vivido  dichosos, 
sin  verme  insolvente. 

Puedo  cast  decir  lo  mismo  ; 
mi  fortuna  verdadera- 
mente  no  era  tan  conside- 
rable: pero  con  economia 
he  vencido  las  dificultades 
de  la  vida. 

(i^Era  vm.  casado  quando 
abrio  su  tienda  ? 

No  ;  tenia  tienda  die%  anos 
antes  de  casarme,  y  tuve 
la  dicha  de  hallar  una 
muger  de  mi  modo  de  pen- 
sar. 
Somas  umbos  anciaiios,  y 
hemos  escogido  el  mejor 
tiempo  para  nuestros  ne- 
gocios. 
'Realmente,  es  asi;  porque, 
si  vm.  obserutti  pagamos 
ahora  mas  caros,  lus  gC' 


what  we  are  not,  others 
suffer  for  it. 

You  say  right. 

How  soon  will  he  present 
himself? 

The  newspaper  does  not 
say. 

It  will  be  soon  l^nown. 

It  is  twenty-«ix  years  ago 
since  I  opened  my  shop  > 
we  were  not  worth,  ray 
wife  and  I,  six  hundred 
pounds  :  I  have  bred  up 
twelve  children,  and  liv- 
ed comfortably,  without 
having  been  a  bankrupt. 

I  can  say  almost  the  same  j 
for  my  fortune  was  not 
so  considerable  by  a  great 
deal  :  yet  by  frugality  I 
have  overcome  all  the 
difficulties  of  life. 

Were  you  married  when 
first  you  began  business  ? 

No ;  I  kept  shop  ten  years 
before  I  married,  and  was 
fortunate  enough  to  find 
a  wife  after  my  own  sen- 
timents. 
We  are  both  old,  and  have 
chosen  the  best  time  for 
OUT  business. 

Truly,  it  is  so  j  for^  if  you 
observe,  now  we  pay 
dearer  for  every  article. 


DIALOGUES. 


30S 


neros,  y  no  son  tan  lu- 

enos  como  lo  eran  anti- 

guamente 
Es  verdad;  pero  los  vende- 

mos    cast  La    mitad   mas 

caro  de  lo  que  se  vendian 

diez  anos  huce. 
Lo  concedo ;   pero  no  tene- 

mos  tanta  ganancia  como 

teniamos. 


and  not  so  good  as  they 
were  formerly. 

It  is  true ;  bnt  we  sell  them 
nearly  the  half  dearer 
than  what  they  did  sdl 
ten  years  ago. 

I  grant  it  j  but  we  have  not 
so  much  profit  as  we^ 
had. 


DIALOGO  XL 


DIALOGUE  XL 


Para  informarse  de  alguna.      To  inquire' after  any  one. 


^Quien  es  ese  calmllero  que 
hallaha  d  vsted  algun 
tiempo  ha  ? 

Es  un  /ileman. 

Le  creia  Ingles, 

Viene  de  Saxonia. 
Hdbla  Frances  muy  lien. 
Los  Espnnoles  le  creen   Es- 
panol^y  los  Ingleses  Ingles. 

Es  dificil  ha  Liar  tantas  len- 
guas  diferentes. 

Hd  estddo  largo  tiempo  en 

esos  paises. 
^Hdce  largo  tiempo  que  vm. 

le  conoce  ? 
Cerca  de  dos  anos. 
Tiene  luena  presencia,  y  el 

aspecto  noble* 

2 


Who  is  that  gentleman  that 
spoke  to  you  a  little 
while  ago  ? 

He  is  a  German. 

I  took  him  for  an  English- 
man. 

He  comes  from  Saxony. 

He  speaks  French  very  well. 

The  Spaniards  take  him  foe 
a  Spaniard,  and  the  Eng- 
lish for  an  Englishman. 

It  is  ditiicult  to  be  conver- 
sant in  so  many  different 
languages. 

He  has  been  a  long  \Wiile 
in  those  countries. 

Have  you  known  him  far 
any  time  ? 

About  two  years. 

He  has  a  noble  air  >  he  ha^ 
a  good  mien. 

D2 


304 


DIALOGUES. 


E  s  lien  parecido. 
No  es  demasiado  alto,  ni  de- 

mhsiado  haxo. 
B$  hermoso ;  es  hien  hecho. 

Toca  el  laud,  la  guitarra,  y 

otros  muchos  inslrumen- 

tos. 
Gustaria    mucho    de  cono- 

eerie. 
Propordonari  a  ustedsu  con- 

ocimienio. 
^  Adonde  vive  ? 
Vive  d  la  orillg,  del  no, 
f^Quandoquierevm.  quevay' 

dnws  a  visitarle  ? 
Quando  vm,  guste,  porque 

es  mi  amigo  intimo. 
Sera  quando  vm.  este  des- 

ocupado. 
Iremos  manana  por  la  ma" 


Se  to  ngradccere  mucho. 


He  is  a  genteel  person. 
He  is  neither  too  tall,  nor 

too  little. 
He   is  handsome  3    he    is 

well  shaped. 
He  plays  upon  the  lute,  the 

guitar,  and  several  other 

instruments. 
I  s!iould  be  glad  to  know 

him. 
I  will  bring  you  acquainted 

with  him. 
Where  does  he  live  ? 
He  lives  by  the  river  side. 
When  will  you  have  us  go 

and  wait  on  him  ? 
Whenever  you  please,  for 

he  is  my  intimate  friend. 
It  shall  be  when  you  are 

not  engaged. 
We    will    go    to-morrow 

morning. 
I  shall  be  obliged  to  you. 


DIALOGO  XIL 


DIALOGUE  Xn. 


De  un  viage. 

^  Quantas  leguas  hay  de  aqul 

a  N.  ? 
Hay  ocho  leguas. 
No  podremos  llegar  alia  hoy, 

es  itiuy  tarde. 
No  han  dado  las  doce,  tiene 

vm.  bastante  tiempo. 


For  a  journey. 

How  many  leagues  is  it 
from  this  place  to  N.  ? 

It  is  eight  leagues. 

We  shall  not  be  able  to  get 
there  to-day,  it  is  too  late. 

It  is  not  twelve  o'clock^  you 
have  time  enough  yet. 


dialogues; 


305^ 


^  Es  un  luen  camino  9 

Asi  asi'y  tiene  vm.  losques 

y  t'ios  que  atrauesar. 
^  Hoy  peligro  en  el  camino 

real? 
No  se  dice  nada  de  eso  ;  es 

un  camino  en  que  se  en- 
.    cu'entra  gente  d  cada  mO" 

men  to. 
^  No  se  dice  que  hay  ladrones 

en  los  bosques  ? 
No  hay  nada  que  temer  de 

dia  ni  de  noche. 
^  Que  camino  he  de  tomar  9 
Quando  estt*  cerca  del  monte, 

tomard  vm.  a  mano  dere- 

cha. 
^  Hay  necesidad  de  suhir 

el  monte  ? 
No,    sehor  i     no    hay    otro 

monte  que  un  declive  in^ 

sensible  en  el  hosque. 
^  Es  el  camino  enredado  en 

el  bosque  ?  * 

Vm.  no  puede  eMraviatse. 
Luego    que  este  fuera  d^ 

bosque,   acucrdese  vm.  de 

tomar  d  la  izquierda. 
Muchas  gracias :  lo  agra- 

dezco  mucho. 
Vamos,  cahallerost  dcaballo. 

^  Adonde  estd  el  marques  ? 
Sefuieldelante, 


Is  the  road  good? 

So  so  3  there  are  woods- 
and  rivers  to  pass. 

Is  there  any  danger  upon 
the  highway  ? 

There  is  no  talk  of  it ;  it  is" 
a  highway  where  you 
meet  people  every  mo- 
ment. 

Do  not  they  say  there  are 
robbers  in  the  woods  ? 

There  is  nothing  to  be  fear- 
ed either  by  day  or  night. 

Which  way  must  one  take  ? 

When  you  come  near  the 
hill,  you  must  take  to  the 
right-hand. 

Is  it  not  necessary  to 
ascend  the  hill  then  ? 

No,  sir  -J  there  is  no  other 
hill  but  a  little  declivity 
in  the  wood. 

Is  the  way  difficult  through" 

.   the  wood  ? 

You  cannot  lose  your  way. 

As  soon  as  you  are  out  of 
the  wood,  remember  to 
keep  to  the  left-hand, 

I  thank  you,  sir,  and  anv 
much  obliged  to  you. 

Come,  come,  gentlemen, 
let  us  tike  horse. 

Where  is  the  marquis  > 

He  is  gone  before. 

d3 


306 


DIALOGUES. 


Esperard  a  vms.  fuera  de 

la  ciudad. 
<5  Que  esperdmos  ahora  ?  Va- 

mos. 
AdiQs,  senores. 
Dios  les  d(i    d  vms.    huen 

viage. 
Viva  vm.  muchps  afios.      * 

DIALOGO  XIIL 

Para  la  cena  y  el  alojamento. 

Apeemonos,  senares. 
Toma  los  cahallos  de  estos 
senores  J  y  cuidalos  lien. 

Veamos  ahora  que  nos  dard 

vm.  decenar. 
Un  capon,  media  dozcna  de 

pickdnes,    una   ensalada, 

seis  codornices,  y  una  do- 

zena  de  alondras. 
^No  quieren  vms.  otra  cosaP 
No,  esio  lasta;  pero  dcnos 

huen  vino  y  postres. 

Jbexenme  vms.  les  aseguro 

que  les  dare  gusto. 
MuTfibra  d  los  senores. 
Denos  vm.  de  cendr  quanta 

antes. 
Antes  que  se  kayan  quitado 

vms.  las  iotas,  estard  la 

cena  en  la  mesa. 


He  will  wait  for  you  just 

out  of  town. 
What  do  we  stay  for  now  ? 

Let  us  be  gone. 
Farewell,  gentlemen. 
I  wish  you  a  good  journey. 

Thank  you. 

DIALOGUE  XIIL 

For  supper  and  lodgings. 

Let  us  alight;  gentlemen. 
Take     these     gentlemen's 

horses,  and  take  care  of 

them. 
Now,  let  us  see  what  you 

will  give  us  for  supper. 
A  capon,    half-a-dozen  of 

pigeons,     a    salad,     six 

quails,    and   a  dozen  of 

larks. 
Will  you  have  nothing  else  ? 
^Tii.4t  is  enough ;  but  give 

u^  some  good  wine,  and 
**  some  dessert. 
Let  me  alone,  I  will  please 

you,  I  warrant  ye. 
Light  the  gentlemen. 
Let  us  have  our  supper  as 

soon  as  possible. 
Before  you  have  pulled  off 

your  boots,  supper  will 

be  upon  the  table. 


DIALOGUES. 


307 


Vengan  nuestras  maletas  y 

p'utolas  al  quarto. 
Quit  a  mis  lotas,  y  ve  a  ver 

si  han  dado  heno  d  los 

calallos. 


Let  our  portmanteaus  and 
pistols  be  carried  upstairs. 

Pull  otF   my  boots  j    and 
then  ,you  shall  go  and  see 

»    whether  they  have  given 
the  horses  any  hay. 
Llevalos  al  rio,  y  cuida  que    You  shall  conduct  them  to 


les  den  avena. 


Tendre    cuenta    con 
Descuide  vm. 


todo : 


Seiiorts,  la  cena  estdpronta-, 

estd  en  la  mesa. 
Vamos  luego, 
Vavios,    seuores,    a    cenar, 

para     poder     acos  tamos 

tempTuno. 
Dinos  agua  para  lavarn. 

Sentemonos  a  la  mesa,  se» 

fiores. 
Denos  de  Leber. 
A  su  salud,  sefiores. 
^Es  clvina  bueno? 
No  es  malo. 
El  capon  no  esta   lastantc 

asado. 
Denos  algunas  naranjas. 
Porque    no    come   vm.  pi- 

chone.^  ? 
Me  he  comido  un  pichon,  y 

ires  alondias. 
Vaya  por  un  escalfad6r. 


the  river  j  and  take  care 
they  give  them  some 
oats. 
I  will  take  care  of  every 
thing;  don't  trouble  vour- 
self. 
Gentlemen,  supper  is  rea- 
dy ;  it  is  upon  the  table, 

AYe  will  come  presently. 

Let  us  go  to  supper,  gen- 
tlemen, that  we  may  go 
to  bed  in  good  time. 

Give  us  water  to  wash  our 
hands. 

Let  us  sit  down  at  table, 
gentlemen. 

Give  us  some  drink. 

To  your  health,  gentlemen. 

Is  the  wine  gooti  ? 

It  is  not  bad. 

The  capon  is  not  done 
enotigh. 

Give  us  some  oranges. 

Why  don't  you  eat  of  these 
pigeons  ? 

I  have  eaten  one  pigeon 
and  three  larks. 

Go,  call  for  a  chafing-dish. 


108 


DIALOGUE?, 


Di  at  posadero  que  venga  d    Tell  the  landlord  we  want 
kavlarnoS'  to  speak  with  hhn. 


DIALOGO  XIV. 

» 

Para  ajustar  cnentas  con  el 
mesonero.  *  • 

Buenax  noches,  senores. 
^Les  gtista  a  vms.  la  cena  ? 

SI,  senor ;  pero  es  menester 

pagar. 
^/.Quanto  hemos  gastado  ? 
El  escote  no  sule  a  mucho. 
Vea  vm.  (pianto  le  debemos, 

par  nosotros,  nuesiros  cri- 

ados,  y  cahatlos. 
Ilogan   vms.    la  cuenta,   y 

haUaran  quetodo  importa 

d\e%  pesos. 
Me  parece  que  es  deniasiado. 
Al  contrario,  es  muy  harato. 

^  Quanto  ?ios  hace  vm.  pagar 
por  el  vino  ? 

Veinte  sueldos  la  hotella. 

Trayganos  otra  hotella,  y 
majiana  por  la  manana 
le  pagar emosdiezpesos  in- 
cluyendo  el  almuefzo. 

Me  parece  que  este  seiior  estd 

vialo. 
Estoy  hueno,  pero  estoy  mo^ 

lido  y  cansado. 


DIALOGUE  XIV. 
To  reckon  with  the  landlord. 

Good  evenings  gentlemen. 
Are  you  satisfied  with  your 

supper  ? 
We  are  ;  but  we  must  sa- 
tisfy you  too. 
"What  is  the  reckoning  ? 
The  reckoning  is  not  great. 
See  what  you  must  have  for 

us,    our   men,  and  our 

horses. 
Reel; on  yourselves,  and  you* 

will  find  it  comes  to  ten 

crowns. 
Methinks  you  ask  too  much. 
On  the  contrary,  I  am  very 

reasonable. 
How  much  do  you  make  us 

pay  for  the  wine  ? 
Twenty-pence  a  bottle. 
Bring   us   another    bottle, 

and  to-morrow  morning  , 

we    will    pay    you    ten 

crowns    with    breakfast 

included. 
Methinks  the  gentleman  is 

not  well. 
I  am  very  well,  but  I  am 

weary  and  fatigued. 


DIALOGUES. 


3CK> 


Es  menester  tomar  atiimo. 
Estaria  mejor  en  la  cama, 

que  en  la  mesa. 
Maude  vm.  calentar  su   ca^ 

majyvaya  vm.uacostarse. 
DI  a  mi  criado,  que  venga 

a  desnudanne. 
Esta  esperando  avm.  en  su 

aposento. 
Buenas  noches,  senores, 
Le  falta  avm.  algo  ? 
Nada  quiero  sino  descanso. 
Manda  que  nos  den  sdbanas 

limpias. 
Las  sdbanas  que  les  envio 

son  muy  buenas. 
Despierlanos  manana  tern" 

prano. 
Lo  hard  sin  falta.     Buenas 

fioches    tengan  vms.  se^ 

nores. 


You  must  take  courage. 
It  would  be  better  for  me 

to  be  in  bed  than  at  table. 
Get  your  bed  warmed,  and 

go  to  bed. 
Bid  my  man  to  come  and 

undress  me. 
He  waits  for  you  in  your 

chamber. 
Good  night,  gentlemen. 
Do  you  want  any  thing  ? 
Nothing  but  rest. 
Order  them  to  give  us  cleaa 

sheets. 
The  sheets  you  are  going 

to  have  are  very  clean. 
Let   us   be  called   to-mor- 

rov/  morning  very  early, 
J  will  not  fail,  gentlemen^^ 

Good  niffht. 


310 


CARTAS^DE  COMERCia 


CARTA  PRIMERA. 

Lion,  2  de  Julio,  de  1802; 
A  los  senores  N.,  y  M.,  y  €"*"'  Londres, 
Muy  senores  nuestros, 

NUESTRO  priiner  deseo  es  reconocer  su  reputacion 
dando  parte  a  vms. de  nuestro estaUecimiento  en  estaciudad, 
lajo  la  casa  de  comercio  de  B.  y  D.  cuyas  Jirmas  hallardn 
at  pie  de  esia  ;  y  de  las  quales  se  servirdn  vms.  tomdr 
7iQta, 

Los  caudales  consideralles  que  el  senor  B.  acdla  de  ad- 
quirir  por  elfallecimiento  de  su  padre,  y  los  del  senor  D. 
juntos  a  su  larga  experiencia  respectiva,  son  los  fundament 
tos  de  nuestro  commercio  ;  que  esperamos  con  la  asistencia 
de  Vios,  y  la  conjlanza  de  nros  amigos,  estahlecer  sohrc 
un  luen  pie.  Nada  contrihuira  mas  en  ello,  senores,  que 
ver  nuestros  servicios  admltidos.  Siendo  nuestro  intenta 
relativa  d  los  negocios  de  vms.,  nos  proponemos  estcnder 
los  nuestros  lo  que  la  prudencia  perrnitiere,  sea  en  giro 
de  letras  sohre  las  principales  plazas  de  Europa,  coma 
en  cargamentos  para  el  Levante  y  las  Indias  Occi- 
dentales,  comis'iones  en  pahos,  sedas,  generos  de  seda, 
mercanciasy  especias,  drogas,  aguardiente,  plomo,  es^ 
tauos,  ^c. 

Deseamos  con  ardor  que  vms.  hallen  en  esos  diversos 

^  generos    algun    ohjeto  de  especulacion  que  les  empcJie  d 

hacer  un  cnsayo  con  nosotros,  por   el  qual  procuraremos 

proharles  nuestro  %elo,  y  el  cuidado,  que  tenemos  de  los. 

intereses  que  nos  cor\fian  nuestros  amigos.  Interin  quedamos 


su 


COMMERCIAL  LETTERS. 

LETTER  THE  FIRST. 

Lion,  July  2d,  1 802. 

Messrs.  N.,  M.,  and  Co.,  London. 
Messrs. 

OUR  first  desire  being  the  acknowledgment  of  your 
reputation,  we  give  you  advice  ot  our  esiablisiiment  in 
this  city  under  the  firm  of  B.  and  D.  3  of  whom  at  the 
bottom  of  this  letter  you  will  tVnd  in  conformity  their 
signatures,  of  which  you  will  take  due  notice. 

The  considerable  fortune  Mr.  B.  has  just  now  inherited 
by  the  death  of  his  father,  added  to  that  of  Mr.  D.,  and 
tlieir  long  experience  in  tlie  mercantile  line,  are  the 
foimdations  of  our  commerce  ;  which  we  hope,  with  the 
blessing  of  God  and  the  confidence  of  our  fi*iends,  to 
establish  on  a  good  order.  Nothing  can  contribute  more 
to  it.  Sirs,  than  the  honour  of  your  commands  for  the 
offer  of  our  services.  Our  design  being  relative  to 
your  commerce,  w^e  purpose  to  extend  ours  as  far  as  pru- 
dence will  permit  us,  either  in  bank  upon  the  principal 
places  of  Europe,  or  in  embarkation  for  the  Levant  and 
the  "West  Indies,  in  commissions  for  woollen-drapery, 
silk,  silk-stufF,  commodities,  spices,  drugs,  brandies, 
leads,  pewters,  &c. 

We  wish  ardently  you  could  find  among  these  divers 
sorts  of  goods  some  objects  of  speculation  which  might 
engage  you  to  make  an  essay  with  us,  in  which  we 
would  endeavour  to  prove  our  zeal  to  you,  and  the  care 
we  take  of  the  interests  of  our  friends  that  confide  in  us. 


312  COMMERCIAL  LETTERS.  ' 

con  el  was  verdadero  aftclo,  con  el  que  rogdmos  a  Dios 
'que  guarde  sus  vidas  /nuchas  anas, 

»  B.  L,  Ms.  de  vms. 

Firm  a  de  su  hum?/de  servidor,  B, 

Firma  de  su  humilde  servidor,  D. 

Firma  de  su  humilde  servidoTj  L. 


CARTA  SEGUNDA. 

Bristol,  A  de  Mayo,  tZe  1802. 
Al  senor  N.  Valencia. 
Muy  senor  mio, 
EN  respuesta  a  la  de  vm.  de  5  del  corriente  digo,  que 
tengo  acceplada  la  letrn  de  5C0/.  esterlinas  que  ha  lihrado 
contra  mi  a  la  orden  de  los  senores  P.  R,  y  Compajiia,  que 
pagare  a  su  cunriplimienio,  y  en  consequencia  la  he  cargado 
a  su  cuenla  de  vvi.  abonandole  su  iwporte. 

La  adjunta  se  servird  vjn.  entregar  al  oviigo  M.  que  es 
■quanta  ocut re  y  quedo  a  su  disposicion,  Piditndo  a  Dios 
-que  guarde  su  vida  m".  a\ 

B.L.M'.  ^c. 


^   CARTA  TERCERA, 

Londres,  8  de  Fehrero,  de  1804. 

Al  Senor  Don  Carlos  Sabio,  Londres. 

Muy  senor  mio, 

Conio  la  dicha  que  ten  go  de  conocer  d  vms.  procede  so- 

2am  en  te  del  renomire  de  su  casa  la  qua  I  tiene  correspondent 

cia  con  muchas  en  esta  y  constandome  al  mismo  tiempo 


COMMERCTAL  LETTERS.  315 

i  a  the  interim  we  remain,  with  the  most  sincere  affec- 
tion. 

Messieurs, 
Your  most  humble  servants, 

B.  D.  L. 

The  firm  of  your  humble  servant,  F.  B, 
The  firm  of  your  humble  servant,  J.  D. 
The  firm  of  your  humble  servant,  P.  L. 


LETTER  THE  SECOND. 

Bristol,  May  4th,  1802. 

Mr.  N.  Valence. 
Sir, 

IN  answer  to  your  fiivour  of  the  5th  instant,  I  have 
the  honour  to  acquaint  you  1  accepted  the  bill  of  ex- 
change for  500/.  sterling  you  have  drawn  on  me,  to  the 
order  of  iVIr.  P.  R.  and  Company,  which  I  shall  pay  at 
its  expiration  j  and  in  consequence  of  which  I  have 
placed  it  to  your  account  and  settled  it. 

I  beg  you  to  deliver  this  letter  to  our  friend  Mr.  M., 
which  is  all  I  can  tell  you  for  the  present.  Praying  God 
to  presene  your  life  for  many  years, 

Sir,  yours,  &c. 


LETTER  THE  THIRD. 

London,  February  8th,   1804. 
Mr.  Charles  Sabio,  London. 
,      Sir, 

AS  the  pleasure  of  my  knowing  you  proceeds  entirely 
from   the  reputation  of  your  house,  which  corresponds 
2  s 


314  COMMERCIAL  LETTERS. 

f/ue  los  generos  en  que  vm.  trata  tienen  su  destino  al  Mar 
del  SuT  : 

Pido  a  vm.  me  haga  la  grncia  de  enviarme,  una  lista 
de  ellos  la  qual  vie  servird  de  norte  para  encargorle  dvm. 
to  que  mas  salida  ienga  en  Indias.  Siendo  todo  lo  que 
al  presente  se  me  ofrece,  quedo  aguardando  el  honor  de  su 
respuesta  y  ruego  d  Dios  le  guarde  muchos  auos  como 
desea 

S.A'^'-S.  Q.S.M.B. 

DIEGO  LALUZ. 


CARTA  QUJRTJ. 

Londres,  2  de  Fclrero,  de  1804. 
Sftr.  Don  Diego  LaluXy  Cadiz. 
Mny  sefior  mio, 
CON  la  llegada  de  este  correo  me  hallo  favor ccido  con 
su  mui  estimadajt'cha  de  1  del  proximo  pasado,  y  en  respu- 
esta de  la  misma  hallard  vm.  adjunta  como  desea  la  lista 
de  los  generos  que  son  vtndihlcs  en  las  Indias  de  Espana, 
y  para  que  le  sirva  degoMerno,  los  precios  correspondientes a 
su  ca/idad ;  vjn  puede  qucdar  persuadido  que  pondre  toda 
la  dehida  atencion  y  conato  en  la  execucion  de  sus  ordenes  d 

Jin  que  quede  tan  satifecho  de  mi  conducta  como  los  demus 
amigos  que  me  favor  ecen,  d  los  quales  me  rcferopara  que  se 
informedel  modo  con  que  los  sirvo.  Y  con  toda  estimacion 
quedo  al  servicio  de  vm.  d  quien  Dios  guarde  muchos  y 

f elites  anos  y  I  ha  sus  manos, 

Su  servidor, 

CARLOS  SABIO. 


COMMERCIAL  LETTERS.  315 

whh  many  persons  here,  and  perceiving  at  the  same  time 
that  the  goods  you  deal  in  are  proper  for  the  vSouth  Sea  : 
Therefore  desire  you  will  do  me  the  favour  to  send 
me  a  memorandum  of  the  above  sort  of  goods,  that  they 
may  serve  me  as  instructions  to  commission  you  for  sucU 
as  m  ly  be  fit  for  the  Indies.  This  being  all  that  now 
offers,  I  wait  the  honour  of  your  answer,  "and  pray  God 
preserve  you  many  years.  Kissing  your  hands,  I  remain. 
Your  humble  servant, 

JAMES  LALUZ. 


LETTER  THE  FOURTH, 

I^ndon,  2d  February,  1804, 
Mr.  James  Laluz,  of  Cadiz, 
Sir, 
ON  the  arrival  of  this  post  I  am  favoured  with  your 
much  esteemed  of  the  1st  ultimo  ;  and  in  answer  thereto 
you  will  find  inclosed  a  minute  of  the  goods  proper  for 
the  Spanish  Indies,  with  the  prices  thereof  according  to 
their  quality  for  your  government  5  you  may  be  well  as^ 
sured  I  shall  pay  due  attention  and  regard  to  the  execu- 
tion of  your  orders,  that  you  may  be  satisfied  with  my 
conduct,  as  my  other  friends  are  to  .whom  I  refer  you, 
that  you  may  inquire  of  the  manner  how  I  use  them, 
Mean  time  I  am,  with  much  esteem,  at  the  service  of 
yon,  whom  God  preserve  many  and  happy  years,  and 
kissing  your  bands  I  remain 

Your  humble  servant, 

CHARLES  SABIO; 


2e 


316  COMMERCIAL  LETTEKS. 

CARTA  qUINTA. 

Cadiz,  3  de  Marzo  de  1804. 
Senor  Doji  Carlos,  Sahio,  Londres. 
Muy  senor  mio, 
AC  ABO  de  rccilir  su  mui  estimada  del  2°  proximo  pa- 
sado,  con  liva  nota  de  los  ghieros  vendibles  enlndias;  lo 
que  ahora  se  me  qjrece  decirle  es,  que  lajlota  lui  de  par- 
tir  parajines  de  Noviembre,  para  cuyo  efecto  estdn  apare- 
jando  los  galeones  con  todapriesa,  en  cvya  conformidad  se 
strvirdvni.  mandarme  por  el  primer  navio  veintepiezas  de 
pahos,  mitad  azules  y  mitad  obscuros,  de  J,  todosde  veinie 
chelines  la  vara,  bien  a  cofidicionados,  y  marcados  LL 
No.  1  d  20,  lo  que  cargard  vm,  en  derechura  para  Bilbao,  d 
la  co?isignacio?i  de  los  senores  Bonitos  y  hijos,  con  orden  que 
a  la  llegada  de  dicho  navio  los  dlchos  senores  despachen  los 
dos  fardos  con  toda  brevedadj  hacienda  el  seguro  por  mi 
cuenta,  y  lihrando  letra  de  cambio  d  dos  usos  por  el  importe 
de  sufactura,  la  que  aguardo  de  vm,,  a  quien  Dios  guards 
muthos  felices  anos,  y  besa  sus  manos, 

Su  Servidor, 

DIEGO  LALUZ. 


CARTA  SBXTA, 

Londres,  4  de  Alril  de  1804, 

Smor  Don  Diego  Laluz,  Cadlx.^ 
Muy  seilor  mio, 
TEN  GO  el  honor  de  su  viui  estimada  del  3  de  Mar%o 
fr6xinw  pasado,  referiendome  d  la  mia  del  2  de  Febrero,  con 
ncta  de  los  generos  vendibles  £7i  Jndias,  y  aviso  del  tiempo 
de  la  salida  de  lafiota,  con  orden  al  wisjim  tiempo  de  enviar* 
ie  veinte  piezas  do  pauosi  ^n  conseqiipuia  de  lo  qua  I  acalo 


COMMERCIAL  LETTERS.  31/ 

LETTER  THE  FIFTH. 

Cadiz,  3d  Marciv  1804, 
Mr.  Charles  Sabio,  of  London. 
Dear  Sir, 
I  HAVE  just  received  your  much  esteemed  of  the  2d 
of  last  month,  with  a  memorandum  of  goods  for  the 
Indies :  what  I  would  now  inform  you  is,  that  the  fleet 
will  depan  at  the  latter  end  of  November,  for  which 
purpose  they  are  getting  ready  the  galleons  with  all  expe- 
dition, so  that  you  may  send  me  by  the  first  ship  twenty 
pieces  of  cloth,  half  blue  and  half  dark  colour,  of  J,  all 
of  twenty  shillings  a-yard,  in  good  condition,  and 
marked  LL  No.  1  to  20,  which  you  will  load  directly 
for  Bilboa,  consigned  to  Messrs.  Bonitos  and  sons,  with 
orders  on  the  said  ship's  arrival  for  those  genilemen  to- 
send  away  the  two  bales  with  all  speed.  You  will  make 
the  insurance  for  my  account,  and  draw  a  bill  of  ex- 
change at  two  usances  for  the  amount  according  to  in- 
voice, which  I  wait  for  from  you,  whom  God  preserve 
many  years  :  kissing  your  hands,  am 

Your  humble  servant, 

JAMES  LALUZ. 


LETTEK  THE  SIXTH. 

London,  4th  April,  1804.. 
Mr.  James  Laluz,  of  Cadiz. 
Dear  Sir, 
I  HAVE  the  honour  of  your  much  esteemed  of  the 
3d  of  March  last,  referring  me  to  mine  of  the  2d  Feb., 
with  a  note  of  goods  for  the  Indies,  and  advising  me  of 
the  time  of  the  fleet's  departure,  with  an  order  from  you 
at  the  same  time  for  twenty  pieces  of  cloth  3  in  conse^ 
'  2E3 


318  COMMERCIAL  LETTERS. 

de  cargar  por  su  cuenta  dichas  veinte  piezas  marcadas  LL. 
No.  1  d  20,  alordo  el  hergantin  Fanny,  su  capitan  Diego 
Burletto,  destinado  para  Bilbao,  a  la  coTisignacion  de  lo^ 
senores  Bonitos,  todos  las  quales  gcneros  he  asegurado,  y  al 
tiempo  mismo  por  su  cuenta  y  erden  he  lihrado  contra  vm, 
una  letra  de  camhio  d  dos  usos  de  6\Q\.  10s.  esterlmas, 
siendo  el  importe  de  dichos  generos,  segun  factura  y  cono' 
cimiento  inclusos,  la  qual  honrard  con  su  aceptacion  y 
pago  en  debido  tievipo.  Es  iodo  lo  que  se  ofrece  ;  y  quedo 
a  la  obediencia  de  vm.  a  quien  Dies  guarde  vmchos  f dices 
anoSj  y  besa  st4s  manos, 

Su  mas  kumilde  servidor, 

CARLOS  SABIO. 


CARTA  SEPTIMA. 

Cadiz,  5  de  Mayo  de  1804. 
SenorDon  Carlos  Salio,  Londres. 
Muy  sennrinio, 
H JiL  LOME  favor  ecido  con  la  de  vm.  de  4  del  prdximo 
pasado,  con  factura  y  conocimiento  de  los  referidos  dos  far* 
dos  de  mi  cuenta,  los  quales  he  recti ido  aviso  de  los  senores 
Bonitos yde  Bilbao,  haber  llegddo  con  el  bcrgantin  Fanny ; 
y  al  mi^mo  tiempo  abonado  su  cuenta  de  vm.  segun  factura 
6lOjl.  105.  yd  la  presentacion  de  su  letra  Iiare  honor  con  la 
aceptacion,  y  se  pagard  el  debido  tiem.po  con  toda  pujitJiO' 
liddd,  esperando  quevm.  me  haya  servido  como  amigo,  tanto 
en  la  calidaJ  como  en  los  predos ;  lo  que  no  dexard  de  ani- 
marme  a  durle  may  ores  or  denes,  siendo  cstas  20  piexas  por 
muesira.  Mientras  quedo  con  todo  el  debido  afecto  al  ser- 
vido devm.  a  quien  Dios  guarde  mucliosfelices  anos,  y  be- 
su  sus  manos,  s 

S.  H.  Servidor, 

DIEGO  LALUZ. 


COMT.IERCIAL  LETTER!?,  319 

qiience  whereof  I  now  load  for  your  account  the  said 
twenty  pieces,  marked  LL.  N.  1  to  20,  on  board  the 
Fanny  brig,  captain  Tames  Burletto,  bound  t6  Bilboa, 
and  consigned  to  Messrs.  Bonitos,  all  which  goods  I 
have  insured,  and  at  the  same  time  have  this  day  drawn 
a  bill  on  you  for  your  account  and  order,  at  two  usances, 
for  QUjL  lOv.  being  the  amount  of  the  said  goods,  ac- 
cording to  the  inclosed  invoice  and  bill  of  lading,  which 
you  will  honour  with  your  acceptance  and  payment  when 
due  J  this  is  all  that  offers.  I  remain  at  yotir  command, 
God  preserve  you  many  years,  kissing  your  hands,  I  am 
Your  most  humble  servant, 

CHARLES  SABIO. 


LETTER  THE  SEVENTH. 

Cadiz,  5th  May,  1804. 
Mr.  Charles  Sabio,  of  London. 
Dear  Sir, 
I  AM  favoured  with  yours  of  the  4th  of  last  month, 
with  the  invoice  and  bill  of  lading  of  two  bales  for  my 
account,  of  which  I  have  had  advice  from  Messrs.  Boni- 
tos, of  Bilboa,  of  their  arrival  there  in  the  Fanny  brig  j 
at  the  sam9  sime  have  credited  your  account  the  sum  of 
6\gl.  10s.  as  per  invoice,  and  on  presentation  of  your 
bill  shall  honour  the  same  with  my  acceptance,  and 
make  punctual  payment  when  due,  hoping  you  have 
used  me  like  a  friend,  as  well  in  the  sort  as  in  the  lowest 
prices,  which  will  not  fail  to  encourage  me  to  give  you 
larger  orders,  these  20  pieces  beitig  only  for  s{>eculation. 
Mean  time,  with  all  due  regard  and  service  to  you, 
whom  God  preserve  many  happy  years,  kissing  your 
hands,  I  remain 

Your  humble  servant, 

JAMES  LALUZ. 


320  COMMERCIAL    LETTEi;.?. 

CARTA  OCTAFJ. 

Londres,  6  de  Junio  de  1804. 
May  senor  mio, 
CON  la  llegdda  de  este  correo  me  hallo  favorecido  con  su 
mid  estimdda  del  5  proximo  pasado,  referiendome  a  lafac- 
tura  y  cojiocirniento  de  los  fardns  de  panos  de  su  cuenta,  y 
€11  conformidad  de  lo  qual  he  librado  contra  vni.  dos  leiras 
de  cambio,  una  de  3001.  y  otra  de  3  I9I.  10s  siendo  el  im- 
porte  de  toda  su  cuenta,  a  dos  usosy  cada  una  pagadera  d 
nuesiros  d'tchos  amigos  los  senores  Bonitos,  en  Bilbao,  y  no 
dudo  de  su  honor  en  la  debida  acceptacion,  y  pago  de  ellas 
d  su  vencimiento ;  y  vm.puede  quedar  persuadido  que  le 
serviri  siempre  con  una  buena  caliddd  segun  su  genera, 
asegurandoleque  el  precio  es  mui  equitatim,  lo  que  hago 
para  fonservar  su  amistad  y  correspondencia^  y  animarle 
a  dor  me  viayores  comislones  en  adelante :  espero  que  lo  ha- 
Ird  hallado  todo  d  su  gusto  y  en  buen  ordeny  satisfaccion  }. 
en  atencion  d  lo  qual  quedo  el  servicio  de  vm.  ^c^ 


CARTA  NONA. 

Cadiz,  7  de  Julio  de  1804.. 
Muy  senor  mio, 

CON  la  debida  atencion  respondo  d  la  suya  del  6  del 
proximo  pasado,  con  aviso  de  haber  vm  gira'o  ami  cargo 
dos  letras  de  cambio  orden  de  los  senores  Bonitos,  de  Bilr- 
bao,  las  que  accepte  ayer,  yasu  vcncimiento  las  pagare  con 
todo  el  honor  acostumbrado^  Le  dire  a  vm.  que  ayer  recilri 
los  dos  far  dos  que  los  senores  Bonitos  me  despackaron  de 
Bilbao,  todo  parece  bien  acondicionado ;  pero  exdminand-o 
elfardo  No.  1,  hallo  una  pieza  defectuosa  y  cuyo  color  azul 
time  dos  maticeSj  la  qual  quedapor  su  cuenta,  visto  que  de 


COMMERCIAL  LETTERS.  321 

LETTER  THE  EIGHTH. 

London^  Gth  June,  1805. 
Sir, 
BY  the  arrival  of  this  day's  post  I  am  favoured  with 
your  much  esteemed  of  the  5\h  of  last  month,  referring 
me  to  the  ipvoice  and  bill  of  lading  of  the  bales  of  cloih 
for  your  account,  and  in  consequence  thereof  I  have 
drawn  upon  you  two  bills  of  exchange,  one  for  300/. 
and  another  for  3 1 9/.  lOs,  being  the  amount  of  the 
whole  of  your  account,  at  two  usances,  each  payable  to 
our  said  friends  Messrs.  Bonitos,  at  Bilboa,  and  doubt 
not  your  honour  in  accepting  them,  and  paying  the  same 
when  due  ;  you  may  always  depend  on  ray  serving  you 
with  a  good  sort  according  to  their  quality,  assuring  you 
the  price  now  is  very  easy,  which  I  do  to  preserve  your 
friendship  and  correspondence,  and  to  encourage  you  to 
furriish  me  with  larger  commissions  hereafter  :  hope  you 
have  found  every  thing  in  good  order  and  to  your  satis- 
faction J  in  due  regard  to  which  I  remain  always  at  your 
service,  &c. 


LETTER  THE  NINTH. 

Cadiz,  7th  July,  1804, 
Sir, 
WITH  all  due  regard  I  answer  yours  of  the  6th  of 
last  mouth,  advising  me  that  you  had  drawn  two  bills  of 
exchange  on  rrie  in  favour  of  Messrs.  Bonitos  of  Bilboa, 
which  I  accepted  yesterday,  and  shall  pay  the  same  when 
due  with  honour  as  usual.  I  must  here  inform  you,  that 
yesterday  I  received  two  b?les  which  Messrs.  Bonitos 
sent  me  from  Bilboa,  and  all  seemed  in  good  order  and 
condition  J  but  on  examining  the  bale  No.  I,  I  find  one 
piece  defective  and  of  two  blue  colours,  which  remains 


322  COMMERCIAL  LETTERS. 

la  mantra  que  eslu  es  invendille ;  las  demas.  piezas  quedan 
perfcctas,  como  esiaii  las  diez  piezas  ohcuras  del  se^undo 
Jardo.     Sie?ido  lo  que  se  me  ojrece,  quedo,  isfc. 


CARTA  DECIMA, 

LondreSj  8  de  Jgosto  de  1804. 
Muy  senor  wlo^ 
EN respuesta  a  la  de  vm.  recibida  el  correo  pasado, 
mucho  me  adtniro  de  oir  que  eosdminando  el  fard»  No.  I, 
hailo  una  pieza  defectuosa  y  matizada  de  dos  colores  azul, 
lo  quepuede  haher  ajoontecido  por  no  estdr  esta  pieza  lien 
doblada  6  por  haver  estado  expuesta  at  aire,  lo  que  hace 
fnudar  el  color  ;  pero  sea  como  fucre,  noes  menester  que 
vm.  se  quede  con  ella,  porque  tal  no  es  mi  intento,  y  le 
tengo  acreditado  por  el  importe  de  dicka,  que  espero  no  al- 
terard  nuestra  correspondencia  ;  y  teniendo  vm.  ocasion  de 
venderla,  lo  hard  como  y  quando  lien  le  pareciere,  de  lo 
que  le  quedare  muy  agradecido  teniendome  asi  mas  cuenla 
que  el  mandarmela  otra  vex.  Me  alegro  mucho  de  oir  qiw 
las  demds  piezas  esimi  perfectas  y  de  su  gusto :  no  dudo  que 
vm,  pueda  vender  las  d  un  precio  ventajoso,  lo  que  desearJ 
que  haga  y  quedo,  d^c, 


CARTJ  UNDECIMA. 

Cadis,  gde  Sctlemhede  IQ04, 

Muy  senor  mlo, 

CON  la  mui  estlmada  devm.  me  hallo  favorecido,  su 

fecka  del  8  de  proximo  pasado,  y  veo  que  me  dene  atonadn 

el  importe  de  dicha  pieza  defectuosa  ;  con  todo  verede  ven- 

dersela  lo  viejor  que  sea  possible  :  las  demos  las  hallo  a  mi 

saiisfaccion,  y  dentro  depoco  k  mandare  mis  ordenes.   Fui, 


Commercial  LETTF.Re.  323 

for'  your  account,  because  in  the  present  manner  it  is 
quite  unsaleable  :  the  other  pieces  are  god,  as  are  also 
the  ten  dark  ones  of  the  second  bale.  Being  all  that 
offers^  I  remain,  &c. 


LETTER  THE  TENTH.  ^ 

London,  8th  of  August,  1804. 


IN  answer  to  yours  received  last  post,  I  am  surpri<red 
to  hear  that  on  examining  the  bale  No.  1,  you  fonnd  a 
piece  defective  and  of  two  colours  in  blue,  whicii  per- 
liaps  might  happen  on  account  of  its  not  being  well 
folded  up,  or  its  being  exposed  to- the  open  air,  which 
will  make  an  alteration  in  its  colour  j  but,  be  it  as  it 
will,  it  is  not  fit  you  should  be  saddled  with  it, — no,  that 
is  not  my  design, — therefore  I  give  you  credit  for  the 
amount  thereof,  and  hope  it  will  be  no  discouragement 
to  our  correspondence  ;  if,  however,  you  shall  see  an  op- 
portunity of  selling  it,  you  may  do  it  when  and  how  you 
please,  and  shall  be  much  obliged  to  you,  as  I  think  it 
much  better  to  do  so  than  to  send  it  me  back  again.  I 
am  glad  to  hear  the  other  pieces  are  perfect  and  to  your 
lik  ng:  not  doubting  but  you  will  be  able  to  sell  them  at 
a  good  price,  which  I  ardently  wish  you  may  do,  I  re- 
main, &c. 


LETTER  THE  ELEVENTH. 

Cadiz,  9th  September,  1804, 
Sir, 
I  AM  favoured  with  yours  of  the  5th  of  last  month, 
and  find  you  have  credited  me  for  the  amount  of  the  de- 
fective piece  J  however,  shall  try  to  dispose  of  it  in  the 
best  manner  possible ;  the  others  I  find  to  my  liking, 
concerning  which  in  a  few  days  shall  send  you  roy  orders. 


324  COMMERCIAL   LETTERS. 

me  hard  el  favor  de  ver  si  me  pi/ede  comprar  un  navio,  de 
330  d  400  lontLadas,  para  el  trqfico  de  la  Gran  Bretana  y 
Bhcaya,  y  que  no  importe  nyas  de  14,000  pesos ^  con  todos 
sus  aparejos  de  velas,  anclas  de  reserva,  y  otras  cosas  nc- 
cesarias.     Siendo,  loque  se  ofrece,  quedo,  iS^c.  * 


CARTA  DUODECIMA. 

Londres,  d  10  de  Octulre  de  1 804. 
Muy  senor  mio, 
TENGO  present e  la  mui  favor ecida  devm.y  estimo  el 
saber  que  vm.  hallo  las  denias  piezas  a  su  gusto.  En  quanta 
al  encargo  con  que  vm.  vie  ha  honrado  en  su  otra  carta  de 
procurarle  un  navio  por  su  cuenta,  he  vista  uno  de  300  d 
400  toneladas,  siendo  cowpleto,  estanco  en  las  quillas, 
costados,  y  cubierta,  y  con  todos  sus  pertrechoSt  velas, 
cuerdas,  vergas,  ar boles,  anclas,  y  aparejos  perteneci- 
eutes;  su  precio  es   10,000  pesos.     Y  siendo   este  de  su 

.  agrado,  oguardare  sus  ordenes  para  comprarlo ;  y  en  el 
interin  le  dot  aviso  que  tengo  un  buen  surtido  de  bvllos 
colores  de  pauos  para  las  Indias ;  y  quando  vm.  me  mande 
su  comision  por  algunos  de  dichos,  la  cumplirS  con  ioda 
puntualidad.  Le  hago  saber  que  es  mui  dificultoso  pro- 
curar  marineros  para  el  Baltico,  pero  hare  todo  In  que  me 

fuere  posible  para  servirle  mientras  tanta,  quedo,,  ^c. 


CARTA  DECIMATERCIA. 

Londres,  24  de  Noviembre  de  1804. 

Muy  sehor  min, 

EL  correopasado  recillsum)iie$timada,  can  aviso  quevm, 

acceptd  mis proposiciones  deljiete  en  cerablanca,  y  mandare 

la  cuenta  del  peso  segun  deseo  de  vm.    Hoy  se  ha  carguado 

por  cuenta  de  vm,  a  bordo  el  navio  la  Amistdd,  su  capitan 


COMMERCIAL  LETTERS.  325 

You  will  be  so  obliging  to  try  if  yon  can  purchase  me  a 
ship,  from  300  to  400  tons,  for  the  British  and  Biscay 
trade,  that  will  come  to  no  more  than  14,000  dollars, 
with  all  her  furniture  of  sails,  spare-anchors,  and  other 
necessary  appurtenances,  being  all  that  offers,  I  re- 
main, &:c. 


LETTER  THE  TWELFTH. 

London,  10th  October,  1804. 
Sir, 
I  HAVE  the  favour  of  your  much  esteemed  letter 
now  before  me,  and  am  glad  to  hear  you  found  the  other 
pieces  to  your  liking.  In  obedience  to  the  commission 
^  you  honoured  me  with  in  your  letter  for  procuring  a  ship 
for  your  account,  I  have  seen  one  from  300  to  400  tons, 
complete,  staunch  in  keel,  sides,  and  deck,  and  furnished 
with  all  her  apparel,  sails,  ropes,  masts,  yards,  anchors, 
and  appurtenances  ;  her  price  is  10,000  dollars.  If  this 
suits  you,  shall  wait  your  orders  to  purchase  it  ',  mean 
time  must  inform  you,  that  I  have  a  fine  assortment  of 
very  beautiful  coloured  cloths  for  the  Indies,  and  when* 
ever  you  giand  me  a  commission  for  any,  shall  fulfil  it 
with  the  utmost  punctuality.  I  likewise  inform  you, 
that  it  is  very  difficult  to  get  mariners  for  the  Baltic,  but 
shall  do  whatever  I  possibly  can  to  serve  you,  meanwhile 
remain,  &c. 


LETTER  THE  THIRTEENTH. 

London,  24  th  Nov.  1804. 

Sir, 

LAST  post  I   received  your  much  esteemed  favour, 

advising   me  that  you  have  accepted  my  proposals  of 

freight  in  white  wax,  and  I  now  send  you  the  weight  as 

you  desired.     I  have  this  day  loaded  for  your  account, 

2f 


326  COMMERCIAL   LETTERS. 

Pedro  Pierro,  que  vd  directamente  a  Sevilla,  diezfar'dos 
depafios,  marcados  y  numerados  LL>  No.  1  d  10,  segunsa 
orden,  lo  mismo  en  colores  y^calidades  que  los  antecedentes^ 
como  parecen  por  lafacturay  ctienia  inclusas,  cuyosfardos 
cargue  d  bordo  de  dicho  navio  destinado  para  Sevilla,  d  la 
consignacion  de  sus  amigos  los  senores  PeritoS}  y  he  libra' 
do  contra  vm.  por  el  importe  del,  el  qual  tojnare  en  casa 
de  los  dichos  senores  en  su  debido  tienipo,  quedando  siem- 
pre  al  servicio  de  vvi,  i^c. 


CJRTJ  DECIMA  qUARTA. 

Cadiz,  a' 31  de  Diciemhre,  1804. 
Muy  senormio, 
TENGO  en  mi  poder  cl  honor  de  la  suya,  en  la  qual 
hallo  que  vm.  ha  cargado  por  mi  cuenta  y  riesgo  diezfardos 
de  panos,  a  bordo  del  navio  nembrado  la  Amistad ;  su  ca- 
piian  PierrOy  destinado  para  Sevilla,  d  la  consignacion  de 
mis  amigos  los  senores  Peritos  ;  y  tocante  d  la  Ictra  de  cam' 
lio  que  vm.  me  dice  habia  librado  contra  mi  por  el  importe 
de  los  dichos,  puede  recibirla  en  casa  de  los  dichos  senores  d 
su  vencimiento,  como  me  dice  quefue  su  intenlo.  Espero 
que  todos  los  gineros  vendran  bien  acondicionados,  asi  como 
ioshepedido^  y  aguardando  la  llegada  del  dicho  navio 
quedo  con  sentimientos  de  gratitud  y  de  veneracion,  k^c. 


CARTA  DECIMA  QUINTA, 

Barcelona,  2  Febrero,  1805. 
Sefior  Bon  Bartolome  Barber,  en  Bourdeaux, 
Muy  Sefior  mio, 
TUVE  la  dicha  de  recibir  su  mas  estimada  del  4  del 
prSximo  pasado,  en  la  qual  me  hallo  honrado  con  una 


COMMERCIAL  LETTERS.  32^ 

on  board  the  ship  Friendship,  captain  Peter  Pierro, 
bound  directly  for  Seville,  ten  bales  of  cloth,  marked 
LL.  No.  1  to  10,  the  colour  and  quality  like  the  former 
you  ordered,  as  appear  by  the  inclosed  invoice  and  ac- 
count thereof,  which  bales  so  loaded  on  board  the  said 
ship  bound  for  Seville,  are  consigned  to  your  friends 
Messrs.  Peritos  j  and  I  have  drawn  on  you  for  the  amount 
thereof,  which  I  shall  take  up  at  the  house  of  tlie  said 
gentlemen  in  due  time,  remaiuing  always  at  your  sei^ 
vice,  &c. 


LETTER  THE  FOURTEENTH. 

Cadiz,  3 1  st  December,  1 804. 
Sir, 
I  AM  now  honoured  with  yours,  wherein  I  find  you' 
have  loaded  for  my  account  and  risk  ten  bales  of  cloth, 
on  board  the  Friendship,  captain  Pierro,  bound  to  Se- 
ville, and  consigned  to  my  friends  Messrs.  Peritos  ;  and 
as  to  the  bill  of  exchange,  which  you  say  you  have 
drawn  on  me  for  the  amount  thereof,  you  may  receive  it 
at  their  house  when  due,  as  you  say  was  your  design.  I 
hope  all  the  goods  will  come  in  good  cx)ndilion,  and  as  I 
ordered  them  ;  and  thereupon  waiting  the  said  ship's  safe 
arrival,  remain  with  the  highest  sentiments  of  gratitude 
and  veneration,  your,  kc. 


LETTER  THE  FIFTEENTH. 

Barcelona,  2d  February,  1805^ 
Mr.  Bartholomew  Barber,  of  Bourdeaux. 
Sir, 
I  HAD  the  pleasure  to  receive  your  most  esteemed 
letter  of  the  4th  of  last  month,  wherein  I  find  you  have 
2p  2 


328  '  COMMERCIAL  LETTERS. 

cqmiswn  para  comprar  por  su  cuenta  312  sncosf  tie  cochi- 
rMla-aL  precio  nias  ventajoso  que  pucda.  No  dado  (lue 
esie  enterddo  que  el  precio'^de  este  genero  ha  suhldo  mas  de 
lo  acostunihrado;  con  todo  eso  yd  hecompradopor  su  cueitia 
IdOsacos,  d3].conl2s.porsacQ,  queleemblurecon  elprimer 
7iavio  que  saiga  de  aqui  para  esa ;  deseo  que  vm.  we  diga 
si  csmencster  queprosiga  kasta  elimporte  de  su  comision ; 
he  dadoordenes  tocanted  susletras  de  cambio  lilradas  con- 
tra Masero  y  Cavallo,  y  de  la  acceptacion  y  pago  de  ellas 
a  su  vcncimievto.  Si  vm,  t'lene  mas  ordenes,  las  curnplire 
C071  toda  precisioti  y  proniitudj  asegurundole  que  siempre 
quedarc  a  su  servicio.  Dios  guarde  d  K  muchos  y  felices 
anas. 

S.  5.  Servidor  Q.  S.  M,  B. 

BENITO  BONELLL 


IFin  de  esta  cfirrespondencia.'] 


COMMBRCIAL  LETTEIS.  32g 

honoured  me  with  a  commission  to  buy  for  your  account 
312  bags  of  cochineal  at  the  lowest  price  I  can  for  your 
advantage.     I  doubt  not  but  you  well  know  these  sort  of 
goods  have  risen  to  a  higher  price  than  usual ;  neverthe- 
less have  already  purchased  for  your  account  150  bags,  at 
3/.  12s.  per  bag,  which  shall  send  by  the  first  ship  that 
goes  from  hence  to  your  place.     Desire  you  will  inform 
me  if  it  be  necessary  to  proceed  to  the  whole  amount  of 
your  commission  ;  I  have  given  orders  about  the  accept- 
ance  of  your    bill    drawn    on    IMasero   and   Cavallo, 
and  the  payment  thereof  when  due.     If  you  have  any 
further  commands,  I  will  fulfil  them  with  all  exactness 
and  dispatch,  assuring  you  that  I  shall  always  remain. 
Sir, 
Your  very  humble  servant, 

BENEDICT  BONELLT. 


^Here  ends  this  correspondence.} 


2f3 


330  BILL  OF  LADING. 

CONOCmiENTO. 


YO  Pedro  Galvez,  maestre  que  soy  del  navio,  quk  Dlos 
salve,  nombrado  el  Principe  de  la  Paz,  del 
porte  de  docientas  toneladas,  que  al  presente 
estd  surto  y  anclado,  en  el  puerto  de  Cadiz, 
para  con  el  favor  de  Dios,  seguir  este 
presente  viage  al  puerto  de  Londres,  co- 
nozco  haher  recihido,  y  tengo  cargado  dentro 
del  dicho  mi  navio  dehnxo  de  cuhierta  de  vos 
L.  A.  senores  Lopez  y  Compafiia,  quatro  caxones 
C.  de  libros  Espanoles,    enjutos  y   lien  aeon- 

No.  1  a  4.  dicionadosy  y  marcados  con  la  warca  defy  era, 
con  lus  quales  prometo,  y  me  ohligo,  llevan- 
dome  Dios  en  huen  salvamento  con  el  dicho 
mi  navio,  al  dicho  puerlo,  a  acudir  por 
vos  y  en  vuestro  nombre  a  los  senores  Lack- 
ington,  Allen,  y  Compania,  pagandome  el 
Jlele,  a  razon  de  dos  libras  esterlinas  por 
cada  caxon,  y  sus  averias  acostumbrada^, 
y  para  lo  qual  asi  tener  y  guardar,  obligo 
a  mi  pernor  a  y  bienes,  y  el  dicho  mi  na- 
vio, Jletes,  y  aparejos,  y  lo  mejor  par  ado 
de  el.  En  fe  de  lo  qual,  os  di  tres  cono- 
cimientos  de  un  tenor,  Jirmados  de  mi  nom.' 
Ire  por  mi,  o  por  mi  escrivano,  el  uno  cum- 
plido,  los  otros  no  valgan.  Fecha  en  Cadiz, 
a  1°  de  Diciembre  de  1806. 

PEDRO  GALVEZ. 


BILL  OF  LAPIXG.  ^31 


BILL  OF  LADING, 


SHIPPED,  by  the  grace  of  God,  in  good  order  and 
well -conditioned,  by  Messrs.  Lopez  and 
Company,  in  and  upon  the  good  ship  called 
the  Prifice  of  Peaces  whereof  is  master, 
under  God,  for  this  present  voyage,  Peter 
Galue%,  and  now  riding  at  anchor  in  the 
port  of  Cadiz,  and,  by  God's  grace,  bound 
L.  A.  for  London,  to  say,  four  chests  of  Spanish 
C.  looks,    being   marked  and  numbered  as  in 

No.  1  to  4.  the  margin,  and  are  to  be  delivered  in  the 
like  good  order  and  well  conditioned,  at  the 
aforesaid  port  of  London  ^the  act  of  God, 
the  king's  enemies,  fire,  and  all  and  every 
other  dangers  and  accidents  of  the  seas,  ri- 
vers, and  navigation,  of  whatever  nature 
and  kind  eoever,  excepted)  unto  Messrs. 
Lackington,  Allen,  and  Company,  or  to 
iheir  assigns,  he  or  they  paying  freight  for 
tlie  said  goods  after  the  rate  of  two  pounds 
sterling  for  each  chest,  with  primage  and 
average  -accustomed.  In  wiaiess  whereof, 
J  the  said  master  (or  purser)  of  the  said 
ship  have  affirmed  to  three  bills  of  lading, 
all  of  this  tenor  and  date  ;  the  one  of  which 
three  bills  being  accomplished,  the  other 
tivo  to  stana  void. .  And  so  God  send  the 
good  ship  to  her  desired  port  in  safety. 
Amen.  Dated  in  Cadiz,  December  1st, 
1800. 

PETER  GALVEZ. 


J32  INVOICE. 


FACTURA. 


FACTURA  de  quatro  caxones  de  lihros  Espanoles,  que 
con  la  marca  y  numero  delmargen,  van  embarcados  en 
el  imvlo  nomhrado  El  Principe  de  la  Paz,  su  capitan 
Pedro  Galvez,  por  los  sehores  Lopez  y  Compania, 
y  a  cuenta  y  vies  go  de  los  smores  L/ac  king  ion,  Allen, 
y  Campania.     A  saver, 

Libras. 
L.A.  No.  i .  30  Folumenes,  14    0    0 


C.              —  2.  24  Dichos, 

No.  1  o4.        —3.16  Dichosy 

—  4.  40  Dichos, 

8     8     0 
6     6    0 

18     7     6 

Derechos  y  gastos 

14     4 

61     5     c^ 
Comision,  a  2  pr.  ciento        -  14    6 

i.  62  10    3 


INVOICE.  S33 


INVOICE. 


INVOICE  of  four  chests  of  Spanish  books,  marked  and 
numbered  as  per  margin,  shipped  by  lilessrs.  Lopez 
and  Company,  on  board' Tlie  Prince  of  Pence,  Peter 
Galvez  nnister,  for  the  account  ami  risk  of  Messrs. 
LackhjgLon,  Allen,  and  Compary.    To  say, 

£.  s.  d.     £.    J.  d. 

L.J.    No.  1 .  30 Volumes,    14  0  0 

C.  -—2.  24  Ditto,  8  8  0 

No,  I  to  4.  —3.  16  Ditto,  6  6  0 

—  4.  40  Ditto,         18     7    6 

47     1     6 

Duties  and  charges        -         -      14    4    3 

6i     5    9 

Commission,  nt  2  per  cent.     •        1     4    (> 

£.62  10  3 


334  BILLS  OF  EXCHANGE* 


LETRAS  DE  CAMBlO. 


Cadiz,  y  V  de  Diciemhre  de  I8O6. 

Por  Lii\  62     10     3- 

A  dos  usoSf  mand&rdn  vms,  pagar  por  esia  primka  de 
camMo,  sesenta  y  dns  libras  ester Imas,  dh%  chelines  y  ires 
penif/ues}  a  la  orden  de  los  sthores  Taylor  y  Compania, 
valor  recibida,  que  cargardn  vmi.  en  cuenta  segun  avU9 
d9  S.  S.  S 

LOPEZ  y  Compania^ 
A  los  Sertores  Laclingtorit  Aliens  y  Comp. 
Londres, 


Cadix,  yX'^de  Die,  de  ISOG, 
A  los  Settores  LacUngtov ,  Allen j  y  Companiaj 

Londres, 
Muy  Senores  nuestros, 
HEMOS  lihrddo  contra  vms.  hoy,  una  letra  de  camh'w 
por  libs.  62  10     3  ;  a  favor  de  los   senores   Taylor  y 
CompaTna,  la  que  cslimaremos  que  vms.  honrcny  carguen.- 
a  cuenta,  segun  aviso  de 

s  s.  s, 

Q.  S.  M.  B. 

LOPEZ  y  Companla, 


BILLS    OP    EXCHANGE.  335 


BILLS  OF  EXCHANGE. 


•Cadiz,  December  1,   1805. 

Vot£.62  10s.  3d, 
AT  two  usances,  pay  my  first  of  exchange  to  the  or- 
der of  Messrs.  Taylor  and  Company,  sixty-two  pounds 
ten  shillings  and  threepence,  value  received,  and  place 
"^o  account  as  per  advice. 

LOPEZ  and  Company. 
Messrs.  Lackington,  Allen,  and  Co. 
London. 


Cadiz,  Dec.  l,  1806. 
Messrs.  Lackington,  Allen,  and  Co. 
London. 
Gentlemen, 
WE  have  this  day  drawn  upon  you,  at  two  usances, 
the  sum  of  £.  62  10s.  3d.  in  favour  of  Messrs.  Taylor 
and  Company  j  which  I  beg  you  to  honour,  and  place 
to  account  as  per  advice  of 

Your  obedient  servants, 

LOPEZ  and  Company. 


330 


EXTRACTS, 


CAPITULO  viir. 

Del  bum  suceso  que  el  valcroso  D.  Quixote  tuvo  en  la  c- 
pantahley  jamas  imagimkla  aveiitura  de  los  Mol'mos  a 
vienio,  con  otros  sucesos  dignos  defelice  recordacion. 

EN  esto  desciibrieron  treinta  6  quarenta  Molinos  ^ 
viento  que  hay  en  aqnel  campo ;  y  asi  como  D.  Quixote 
los  vio,  dixo  a  su  escudero  :  la  ventura  va  guiando  nues- 
tras  cosas  mejnr  de  lo  que  acertaramos  a  desear :  porque 
ves  alii,  araigo  Sancho  Panza,  donde  se  descubren  treinta 
6  pocos  mas  desaforados  gigantes,  con  quien  pienso  hacer 
batalla,  y  quitarles  a  todos  las  vidas,  con  cuyos  despojos 
comenzaremos  d  enriquecer  :  que  esta  es  buena  guerra,  y 
es  gran  servicio  de  Dios  quitar  tan  mala  simiente  de  sobre 
la  faz  de  la  tierra.  (  Que  gigantes  ?  dixo  Sancho  Panza. 
Aquellos  que  alii  ves,  respondio  su  amo  de  los  brazos  lar- 
gos, que  los  suelen  tener  algunos  de  casi  dos  leguas.  • 
Mire  vucstra  merced,  respondio  SarK:ho,  que  aquellos 
que  alii  se  parecen  no  son  gigantes,  sino  Molinos  de 
viento;  y  lo  que  en  ellos  parecen  brazos,  son  las  aspas 
que  volteadas  del  viento,  hacen  andar  la  piedra  del  Mo- 
lino.  Bien  parece,  respondio  D.  Quixote,  que  no  estas 
cursado  en  esto  tie  las  aventuras  :  ellos  sen  gigantes  ;  y 
si  tienas  miedo,  quitate  de  ahi,  y  ponte  en  oracion  en  el 
espacio  que  yo  voy  a  entrar  con  ellos.  en  fiera,  y  desi- 
gual  batalla :  y  diciendo  esto;-  dio  de  espuelas  a  su  ca- 
ballo  Rocinante,  sin  ateuder  a  las  voces  que  su  escudero" 
Sancho  le  daba,  advirtiendole,  que  sin  duda  alguna  eran 
Molinos  de  viento,  y  no  gigantes  aquellos  que  iba  a  aco- 
meter  :  pero  el  iba  tan  puesto  en  que  eran  gigantes,  qr  ■ 


EXTRACTS.  337 

ni  oia  las  voces  de  su  escudero  Sancho,  ni  echaba  de  ver, 
aanque  estaba  ya  bien  cerca  lo  que  eran,  antes  iba  dici- 
endo  en  voces  altas  :  non  fuyades,  cobardes  y  viles  cria- 

^  turas,  que  un  solo  caballero  es  el  que  os  acomete.  Le- 
vantose  en  esto  un  poco  de  viento,  y  las  grandes  aspas 

.  comenzaron  a  moverse  j  lo  qual  visto  por  D.  Quixote, 

'  dixo  :  pues  aunque  movais  mas  brazos  que  los  del  gigante 
Briareo,  me  lo  habeis  de  pagar.  Y  en  diciendo  esto,  y 
encomendandose  de  todo  corazon  a  su  senora  Dulcinea, 

'.pidiendola  que  en  tal  trance  le  socorriese,  bien  cubieito 
de  su  rodela,  con  la  lanza  en  el  ristre,  arremetio  a  todo 
el  galope  de  Rocinante,  y  envistio  con  el  primer  Molino 
que  estaba  delante  ;  y  dandole  una  lanzada  en  el  aspa,  la 
volvio  el  viento  con  tanta  furia,  que  hizo  la  lanza  peda- 
zos,  llevandose  tras  si  al  caballo,  y  al  caballero  que  fue 
,rodando  muy  mal  trecho  por  el  campo.  Acudio  Sancho 
Panza  a  socorrerle  a  todo  el  correr  de  su  asno  j  y  quando 
llego,  hallo  que  no  se  podia  menear.  Tal  fue  el  golpe 
que  dio  con  el  Rocinante.  Valgame  Dios  !  dixo  Sancho: 
;io  le  dixeyo  a  vrad.  que  mirase  bien  lo  quebacia,  que 
no  eran  sino  Molinos  de  viento,  y  no  lo  podia  ignorar, 
sino  quien  llevase  otros  tales  en  la  cabeza  ?  Calla,  amigo 
Sancho,  respondio  D.  Quixote,  que  las  cosas  de  la 
guerra,  mas  que  otras,  estan  sujetas  a  continua  mu- 
danza  :  quanto  mas,  que  yo  pienso,  y  asi  es  verdad,  que 
aquel  sabio  Freston  que  me  robo  el  aposento,  y  los  libros, 
ha  vuelto  estos  gigantes  en  Molinos,  por  quitarme  la  glo- 
ria de  su  vencimiento  :  tal  es  la  enemistad  que  me  tiene  : 
mas  al  cabo,  al  cabo  ban  de  poder  poco  sus  raalas  artes 
contra  la  bondad  de  mi  espada.  Dios  lo  haga  como 
puede,  respondio  Sancho  Panza,  y  ayudandole  a  levan- 
iir,  torno  a  subir  sobre  Rocinante,  que  medio  despaldado 
estaba,  y  liablando  en  la  pasada  aventura,  siguieron  el 
camino  del  Puerto  Lapice,  porque  alii  decia  D.  Quixote, 
que  no  era  posible  dexar  de  hallarse  muchas  y  diversas 
(uituras,  por  ser  lugar  muy  pasagero,  sine  que  ibs  muy 
2  G 


338 


EXTRACTS. 


pesaroso  por  haberle  faltado  la  lanza  :  y  dicleiidoselo  a 
su  escudero,  le  dixo  :  yo   me  acuerdo  haber  leido,  que 
im  caballero  Espanol,  llamado  Diego   Perez  de  Vargas, 
liabiendosele  en  una  batalla  roto  la  espada,  desgajo  de 
una  encina  un  pesado  ramo  6  tronco,  y  con  el  hizo  tales 
cosas  aquel  dia,  y  machaco  tantos  Moros,  que  le  quedo 
por  sobrenonnbre  Machuca  :  y  asi  el  como  sus  descen- 
dientes  se  llamaron  desde  aquel  dia  en  adelante  Vargas  y 
Machuca.     Hete  dicho  esto,  porque  de  la  primera  en- 
cina, 6  roble  que  se  me  depare  pienso  desgajar  otro  tronco 
tal,  y  tan  bueno  como  aquel,  que  me  imagino,  y  pienso 
hacer  con  el  tales  hazaiaas,  que   tu  te  tengas  por  bien 
afortunado  de  haber  merecido  venir  a  verlas,  y  a  ser  tes- 
tigo  de  cosas  que  apenas  podran  ser  crei  las.     A  la  mano 
de  Dios,  dixo  Sancho,  yo  lo  creo  asi  comovuesira  merced 
lo  dice  J  pero  enderezese  un  poco,  que  parece  que  va  de 
medio  lado,  y  debe  ser  del  molimiento  de  la  caida.     Asi 
es  la  veidad,  respondio  D.  Quixote  :  y  si   no  me  quejo 
del  dolor,  es  porque  no  es  dado  a  los  Caballeros  Andantes  . 
quejarse  de.herida  alguna,  aunqne  le  salgan  las  tripas  por 
clla.     Si  eso  es  asi,  no  tengo  yo  que  replicar,  respondio 
Sancho:  pero  sabe   Dios  si  yo  me  holgara  que  vuestra 
merced  se  quejara  quando  alguna  cosa  le  doliera^.     De  mi 
se  decir,  que  me  he  de   quejar  del   mas  pequeuo  dolor 
que  tenga,  si  ya  no  se  entitnde  tambien  con  los  escude- 
ros  de  los  Caballeros  Andantes  eso  del  no  quejarse.     No 
se  dexo  de  reir  D.  Quixote  de  la  simplicidad  de  su  escu- 
dero ;  y  asi  le  declaro  que  podia  muy  bien  quejarse,  como 
y  quando  quisie»c,  sin  gana  6  con  ella,  que  hasta  enton- 
ces  no  habia  leido  cosa  en  contrario  en  la  Orden  de  Ca- 
balleria.     Dixole  Sancho  que  mirase   que  era  hora  de 
comer.     Respoiidiole  su  amo,  que  por  entonces  no  le 
hacia  menester,  que  comiese  el  quando  se  le  antojase. 
Con  esta  licencia  se  acomodo  Sancho  lo  mejor  que  pudo 
sobre  su  jumento  ;  y  sacando  de  las  aUorjas  lo  que  en 
ellas  habia  puesto,  iba  camiuando  y  comiendo  detras  de 


EXTRACTS.  339 

su  arao  muy  despaclo^  y  de  quando  en  quando  empinaba 
la  bota  con  tanto  gusto,  que  le  pudiera  envidiar  el  mas 
regalado  bodegonero  de  Malaga,  y  en  tanto  que  el  iba  de 
aquella  manera  menudeando  tragos,  no  se  le  acordaba  de 
ninguna  promesa  que  su  Amo  le  hubiese  hecho,  ni  tenia 
por  ningtin  trabajo,  si  no  por  nuicho  descanso,  andar  bus- 
cando  las  aventuras,  por  peligrosas  que  fuesen.  En  re- 
sol  ucion,  aquella  noche  la  pasaron  entre  unos  arboles  j  y 
del  uno  de  ellos  desgajo  D.  Quixote  un  ramo  seco,  que 
casi  le  podia'  servir  de  lanza,  y  puso  en  el  el  hierro  que 
qui  to  de  la  que  se  le  liabia  quebrado. 


CAPITULO  XLII. 

De  los  consejos  que  did  D.  Quixote  d  Sancho  Panza  antes 
que  fuese  a  gobernar  la  Insula,  con  otras  coias  lien 
consideradas. 

CON  el  felice  y  gracioso  suceso  de  la  aventura  de 
la  Dolorida,  quedaron  tan  contentos  los  Duques,  que 
determinaron  pasar  con  las  burlas  adelante,  viendo  ei 
acomodado  sugeto  que  tenian  para  que  se  tuviesen  por 
veras,  y  asi  habiendo  dado  la  traza  y  ordenes  que 
sus  criados  y  sus  vasallos  habian  de  guardar  con  San- 
cho en  el  Gobierno  de  la  Insula  prometida,  otro  dia,  que 
fue  el  que  sucedio  al  vuelo  de  Clavileao,  dixo  ei  Duque 
a  Sancho,  que  se  adeliaase  y  compusiese  para  ir  a  ser 
Gobernador,  que  ya  sus  insulanos  Je  estaban  ei>perando 
como  efagua  de  Mayo.  Sancho  se  le  huntiillo  y  le  dixo  : 
despues  que  baxe  del  cielo,  y  despues  que  desde  su  alta 
cumbre  mirela  tierra,  y  la  vi  tan  pequena,  se  teniplo  en 
parte  en  mi  la  gana  que  tenia  tan  grande  de  ser  Goberna- 
dor J  porque  que  grandeza  es  niandar  en  un  grano  de 
mostazd  i*  6  qua  Dignidad  6  Imperio  el  gobernar  a  me- 
4ia  docena  de  hombres  tamaaos  como  avellanas,  que  a 
mi  parecer  no  habia  mas  en  toda  la  tierra  ?  6i  vuestra  se- 
2  g2 


340  E5tTRACTS. 

noria  fuese  servido  de  dvirme  una  tanlica  parte  del  c'elo, 
aunque  no  fuese  mas  de  media  legua,  la  tomaria  de  me- 
jor  gana  que  la  mayor  Insula  del  mundo,     Mirad,  amigo 
Sanchoj  respoiidio  el  Duque,  yo  no  puedo  dar  parte  del 
cielo  a  nadie,  auiique  no  sea  mayor  que  una  una,  que  a 
solo  Dios  estan  reservadas  esas  mercedes  y  gracias  :  lo 
que  puedo  dar  os   doy,  que  es  una  Insula  hecha  y  dere- 
cha,  redonda  y  bien  proporcionada,  y  sobremanera  fertil 
y  abundosa,  donde  si  vos  os  sabeis  dar  maria  podeis  con 
las  riquezas  de  la  tierra  grangear  las  del  ciek>.     Ahora 
bien,  respondio  Sancho,  venga  esa  Insula,  que  yo  piig- 
nare  por  ser  tal  Gobernador,  que  a  pesar  de  bellacos  me 
vaya  al  cielo  ;  y  esto  no  es  por  codicia  que  yo  tenga  de 
salir  de  mis  casillas,  ni   de  levantarme  a  mayores,  sino 
por  el  deseo  que  tengo  de  probar  a  que  sabe  el  ser  Gober- 
nador.    Si  una  vez  lo  probais,  Sancho,  dixo  el  Duque, 
comeros  habeis  las  manos  tras  el  Gobierno,  por  sex  dulci- 
eiuia  GGsS  ct  tnnV.dzv  J  ^Cr  P^^decidp.  A  bueii  se^uro,  que 
quando  vuestro  dueno  llegue  a  ser  Emperador,  que  lo 
sera  sin  duda,,segun  van  encaminadas  sus  cosas,  que  no 
se  lo  arranquen  como  quiera,  y  que  le  due!::  y  le  pese  en 
la  mitnd  del  alma  del  tiempo  que  hubiere  dexado  de  ser- 
lo.     SeHor,  replico   Sancho  Panza,  yo   imagine  que  es 
bueno  mandar,  aunque  sea  a  un  hato  de  ganado.     Con 
vos  me  entierren,  Sancho,  que  sabeis  de  todo,  respondio 
el  Duque  ;  yo  espero   que  sereis  tal  Gobernador  como 
vuestro  juicio  promete,  y  qucdese  esto  aqui,  y  advertid 
que  manana  en  ese  mesmo  dia  habeis  de  ir  al  Gobierno 
de  la  Insula,  y  esta  tarde  os  acomodarin  del  trage  conve- 
niente  que  habeis  de  llevar,  y  de  todas  las  cosas  necesa- 
rias  a  vuestra   partida.     Vistanme,  dixo  Sancho,  como 
quisieren,  que  de   qualquiera  manera  que   vaya  vestido 
sere  Sancho  Panza.     Asi  es   verdad,    dixo  el   Duque; 
pero  los  trages  se  han  de  acoraodar  con  el  oficio  p  digni- 
dad  que  se  profesa,  que  no  seria  bien  que  un  jurisperito 
se  vistiese  como  soldado,  ni  un  soldado  como  un  sacer- 
dote.     Vos,  Sancho,  ireis  vestido  parte  de   Letrado,  y 


I 

EXTRACTS.  341 


parte  de  Capitan  j  porqne  en  la  Insula  que  os  doy,  tanto 
son  menester  las  armas  como  las  letras,  y  las  letras  conio 
las  armas.  Letras,  respondio  Sancho,  pocas  tengo,  por- 
que  aun  no  se  el  A.  B.  C.  ^  pero  bastame  tener  el  Chris- 
tus  en  la  memoria  para  ser  buen  Gobernador.  De  las 
armas  manejare  las  que  me  dieren  hasta  caer,  y  Dios 
adelante.  Con  tan  buena  memoria,  dixo  el  Duque,  no 
podra  Sancho  errar  en  nada.  En  esto  llego  D.  Quixote, 
y  sabiendo  lo  que  pasaba,  y  la  celeridad  con  que  Sancho 
se  habia  de  partir  a  su  Gobierno,  con  licencia  del  Duque 
le  tomo  por  la  mano,  y  se  fue  con  el  a  su  estancia  j  con 
intencion  de  aconsejarle  como  se  habia  ,de  haber  en  su  ofi- 
cio.  Entrados  pues  en  su  aposento,  cerro  tras  si  la  puerta, 
y  hizo  casi  por  fuerza  que  Sancho  se  sentase  junto  a  el,  y 
con  reposada  voz  le  dixo  : 

Ipfinitas  gracias  doy  al  Cielo,  Sancho  amigo,  de  que 
antes  y  primero  que  yo  haya  encontrado  con  alguna 
buena  dicha,  te  haya  salido  a  ti  a  recibir  y  a  encontrar  la 
buena  ventura  :  yo  que  en  mi  baena  suerte  te  tenia  li- 
brada  la  paga  de  tus  servicios,  me  veo  en  los  principios  de 
aventajarme,  y  tu  antes  de  tiempo,  contra  la  ley  del  ra- 
zonable  discurso,  te  ves  premiado  de  tus  deseos.  Olros 
cohechan,  importunan,  solicitan,  madrngan,  ruegan,  por- 
fian  y  no  alcanzan  lo  que  pretenden  j  y  llega  otro,  y  sin 
saber  como  ni  como  no,  se  halla  con  el  cargo  y  oficio 
que  otros  mucbos  pretendieron  :  y  aqui  entra  y  encaxa 
bien  el  decir  que  hay  buena  y  mala  fortuna  en  las  preten- 
siones,  Tii,  que  para  mi  sin  duda  alguna  eres  un  porro, 
sin  madrugar  ni  trasnochar,  y  sin  liacer  diligencia  alguna 
con  solo  el  aliento  que  te  ha  tocado  de  la  Andante  Ca- 
balleria,  sin  mas  ni  mas  te  ves  Gobernador  de  una 
Insula,  como  quien  no  dice  nada.  Todo  esto  digo,  6 
Sancho,  para  que  no  atribuyas  ^  tus  merecimientos  la 
merced  recibida,  sino  que  des  gracias  al  Cielo  que  dis- 
pone suavemente  las  cosas,  y  despues  las  daras  a  la  gran- 
deza  que  en  si  encierra  la  profesion  de  la  Caballeria  An- 
2  G  3 


342  EXTRACTS. 

dante.  Dispuesto  pues  el  corazon  a  creer  lo  que  te  he 
dicho,  esta,  6  hijo,  atento  a  este  tu  Caton  que  quiere 
aconsejarte,  y  ser  norte  y  guia  que  te  encamine  y  saque 
a  seguro  puerto  de  este  mar  proceloso  donde  vas  a  engol- 
farte,  que  los  oficios  y  graiides  cargos  no  son  otra  cosa 
fiinoun  golfo  profundo  de  confusiones. 

Prin  eraniente,  6  hijo,  has  de  teraer,  a  Dios,  porque 
en  el  temeiie  esta  la  sabiduria,  y  siendo  sabio,  no  podras 
errar  en  nada. 

Lo  segundo,  has  de  poner  los  ojos  en  quien  eres,  pro- 
curando  conocerte  a  ti  mismo,  que  es  el  mas  dificil  cono- 
cimiento  que  puede  imaginarse  :  del  conocerte  saldra  el 
■  no  hincharte  como  la  rana,  que  quiso  igualarse  con  el 
buey  J  que  si  esto  haces,  vendr.'i  a  ser  feos  pies  de  la  rue- 
da  de  tu  locura  la  consideracion  de  haber  guardado  puer- 
cos  en  tu  tierra.  A  si  es  la  verdad,  respondio  Sancho, 
pero  fue  quando  muchacho ;  pero  despues  algo  hombre- 
cillo,  gansos  fueron  los  que  guarde,  que  no  puercos  j 
pero  esto  pareceme  a  mi  que  no  hace  al  caso,  que  no  to- 
dos  los  que  gobiernan  vienen  de  casta  de  Reyes.  Asi  es 
verdad,  replico  D.  Quixote,  por  lo  qual  los  no  de  prin- 
cipios  nobles  deben  acompariar  la  gravedad  del  cargo  que 
exercitan  con  una  blanda  suavidad,  que  guiada  por  la  pru- 
dencia,  los  libre  de  la  murmuracion  maliciosa  de  quien 
no  hay  estado  que  se  escape. 

Haz  gala,  Sancho,  de  la  humildad  de  tu  linage,  y  no 
te  desprecies  de  decir  que  vienes  de  labradores  ;  porque 
viendo  que  no  te  corres,  ninguno  se  pondra  a  correrte  : 
y  preciate  mas  de  ser  humilde  virtuoso,  que  pecador  so- 
berbio.  Innumerables  son  aquellos  que  de  baxa  estirpe 
nacidos,  han  subido  a  la  suraa  Dignidad  Pontificia  e  Im- 
peratoria  j  y  de  esta  verdad  te  pudiera  traer  tantos  exem- 
plos,  que  te  cansaran. 

Mira,  Sancho,  si  tomas  por  medio  a  la  virtud,  y  te 
precias  de  hacei  heclios  virtuosos,  no  hay  para  que  tener 
envidia'a  losquelos  tienen  Principes  y  Senores,  porque 


LXTBACTS.  3i3 

la  sangre  se  hereda  y  la  virtue!  se  aquista^  y  la  virtud  vale 
por  si  sola,  lo  que  la  sangre  no  vale. 

Siendo  esto  asi,  conio  lo  es,  si  acaso  viniere  a  verte 
quando  estes  en  tu  Insula  alguno  de  tus  parlentes,  no  le 
deseches  ni  le  afrentes,  antes  le  has  de  acoger,  agasajar  j 
regalar,  que  con  esto  satisfaras  al  cielo,  que  gusta  que 
nadie  se  desprecie  de  lo  que  el  hizo,  y  corresponderas  a 
lo  que  debes  a  la  naturaleza  bien  concertada. 

Si  truxeres  a  tu  muger  contigo  (porque  no  es  bien  que 
los  que  asisten  a  Gobiernos  de  mucho  tiempo  esten  sin 
las  propias)  ensenala,  doctrinala  y  debastala  de  su  natural 
rudeza  j  porque  todo  lo  que  suele  adquirir  un  Goberna- 
dor  discreto,  suele  perder  y  derramar  una  muger  rustica 
y  tonta. 

Si  acaso  enviudares,  (cosa  que  puede  suceder)  y  con  el 
cargo  mejorares  de  consorte,  no  la  toaies  tal  que  te  sirva 
de  anzuelo  y  de  cana  de  pescar,  y  del  no  quiero  de  tu  ca- 
pilla  J  porque  en  verdad  te  digo,  que  de  todo  aquello 
que  la  muger  del  Juez  recibiere  ha  de  dar  cuenta  el  ma- 
rido  en  la  residencia  universal,  donde  pagara,  con  el  qua- 
tro  tanto  en  la  muerte  las  pariidas  de  que  no  se  hubiere 
hecho  cargo  en  la  vida. 

Nunca  te  guies  por  la  ley  del  encaxe,  que  suele  tener 
mucha  cabida  con  los  ignorautes  que  presumen  de  agui- 
dos. 

Hallen  en  ti  mas  compasion  las  lagrimas  del  pobre^ 
pero  no  mas  justicia  que  las  informaciones  del  rico. 

Procura  descubrir  la  verdad  por  entre  las  promesas  y 
dadivas  del  rico,  como  por  entre  los  sollozos  e  importu- 
nidades  del  pobre. 

Quando  pudiere  y  debiere  tener  lugar  la  equidad,  no 
cargues  todo  el  rigor  de  la  ley  al  delinqtiente,  que  no  es 
mejor  la  fama  del  Juez  riguroso  que  Ja  del  compasivo. 

Si  acaso  doblares  la  vara  de  la  justicia,  no  sea  con  el 
peso  de  la  dadiva,  sino  con  el  de  la  misericordia. 

Quando  te  sucediere  juzgar  alguu  pley to  de  algun  tu 


344  EXTRACTS. 

enemigo,  aparta  las  mientes  de  tu  injuria,  y  ponlas  en  la 
verdad  del  caso. 

No  te  ciegue  la  pasion  propia  en  la  causa  agena,  que 
los  yerros  que  en  ella  hicieres,  las  mas  veces  seran  sin  re- 
medio  j  y  si  le  tuvieren,  sera  acosta  de  tu  credito  y  aun 
de  tu  hacienda. 

Si  alguna  muger  hermosa  viniere  a  pedirte  justicia, 
(juita  los  ojos  de  sus  lagrimas,  y  tus  oidos  de  sus  gemidos, 
y  considera  despacio  la  substancia  de  lo  que  pide,  si  no 
quieres  que  se  anegue  tu  corazon  en  su  llanto,  y  tu  bon- 
dad  en  sus  suspiros. 

Al  que  has  de  castigar  con  obras,  no  trales  mal  con 
palabras,  pues  le  basta  al  desdichado  la  pena  del  suplicio 
sin  la  anadidura  de  las  malas  razones. 

Al  culpado  que  cayere  debaxo  de  tu  jurisdiccion,  con- 
siderale  hombre  miserable,  sujeto  a  las  condiciones  de  la 
depravada  naturaleza  nuestra,  y  en  todo  quanto  fuere  de 
lu  parte,  sin  hacer  agravio  a  la  contraria,  muestratele  pia- 
doso  y  clemente  j  porque  aunque  los  atributos  de  Dios 
todos  son  iguales,  mas  resplaiidece  y  campea  a  nuestro 
ver  el  de  la  misericordia,  que  el  de  la  justicia. 

Si  estos  preceptos  y  estas  reglas  sigues,  Sancho,  seran 
luengos  tus  dias,  tu  fama  sera  eterna,  tus  premios  col- 
mados,  tu  felicidad  indecible,  casaras  tus  hijos  como  qui- 
sieres,  titulos  tendran  ellos  y  tus  nietos,  viviras  en  paz  y 
beneplacito  de  las  gentes,  y  en  los  ultimos  pasos  de  la 
vida  te  alcanzara  el  de  la  muerte  en  vejez  suave  y  ma- 
dura,  y  cerraran  tus  ojos  las  tiernas  y  delicadas  manos  de 
tus  terceros  netezuelos.  Esto  que  hasta  aqui  te  be  dicho 
son  documentos  que  ban  de  adornar  tu  alma  ;  escucha 
aliora  los  que  ban  de  servir  para  adorno  del  cuerpo. 


Carta  del  Padre  Is  la  a  su  Herniana. 
HIJA,  hermana,  y  senora  mia  :  Acabo  de  recibir  tu 
carta  de  20  del  pasado  :  Dios  sabe  quanto  me  consolo,  y 


EXTKACTS.  345 

el  alivlo  que  experimento  en  todos  mis  rnolestos,  y  ha- 
bituales  trabajos,  siempre  que  la  Providencia  del  Seuor, 
y  tu  fraternal  amor  me  proporcioiian  este  indecible  con- 
sueJo.  Si  tal  vez  me  he  quejado  con  alguna  amargura  de 
que  me  le  hagas  desear  tan  to,  no  es  cierto  porque  dude 
de  tu  fineza,  sino  porque  un  amor  vehemente  es  poco 
sufrido  j  sus  quejas,  quanto  mas  injustas,  son  mas  esti- 
mables,  no  por  lo  que  suenan,  sino  por  lo  que  signitican. 
Perdoname  y  amame,  bien  persuadida  a  que,  no  pocas 
veces  las  que  parecen  ofensas  del  oido,  son  lisonjas  del 
corazon.  Las  personas  que  aqui  me  tratan  con  alguna 
conlianza  saben,  como  ya  te  lo  di  a  entender,  que  mis 
incomodidadcs  se  aumentan,  6  se  disminuyen,  segun  la 
mayor  6  menor  freqiiencia  de  tus  cartas,  tanto  que  me 
tienen  prevenido  las  avise  prontamente,  siempre  que  las 
recibo.  Bastaesto  para  que  intieras  quanto  las  deseo, 
quanto  las  aprecio  y  el  mucho  bien  que  me  hacen.  Por 
fin  no  puedo  menos  de  decirte,  que  estoy  muy  poco  agra- 
decido  a  los  que  me  acortan  mi  conversacion,  quando  yo 
no  les  estorbo  las  suyas  j  y  si  en  las  antesalas  de  Espana 
se  €stilf»ran  suizcs  con  sable  en  mano,  como  en  las  de 
Francia,  los  dias  de  correo  pondria  yo  un  par  de  ellos  en 
la  tuya,  para  que  a  nadie  dicsen  entrada,  hasta  que  hu- 
bieras  reparlido  mi  racion. 

Como  quiera  pues,  siempre  que  me  escribas  poco,  por 
divertirte  mucho,  lo  llevare  con  resignacion,  porque 
eso  de  llevarlo  con  alegria,  seria  demasiada  perfecciou 
para  quien  tanto  te  quiere.  Adios  hija  mia  j  di  en  casa 
lo  que  quisieres,  manda  lo  que  gustares,  y  vive  tanto, 
como  lo  desea — I'u  hermano. 


Carta  del  tnismo  a  un  Aviigo  suyo, 

QUERIDO  amigo  :  Que  sobre-humana  fuerza  es 
esLi !  Que  alma  ha  jamas  sido  capaz  de  tan  heroycas  ac- 
cioiies !    lemes,  te  persuades  que  estoy   necesitado  y 


346  EXTRACTS. 

quieres  partir  conmjgo  lo  poco  que  te  queda  !  Mereces 
que  te  erijan  estatuas  :  y  si  fuera  este  el  liempo  de  la 
gentilidad,  te  adorarian  como  a  Dios  de  la  amistad.  Yo 
no  puedo  explicarte  mi  reconociniiento  a  la  picdad  que 
usas  conmigo  Es  cosa  deplorable  el  verse  en  estado  de 
necesitarla  :  pero,  ;quan  dulce  y  cousolante  es  encontrar 
almas  taa  tiernas,  y  tan  grandes,  como  la  tuya,  que  lo 
compadezcan  !  Todos  mis  infortunios,  todos  mis  males 
son  nada,  en  comparaqion  de  la  salisfaccion  que  me  causa 
tu  humanidad,  y  afecto.  Y  quieres  condenar  mi  gratitud 
al  silencio !  Ya  se,  amigo,  si^  ya  se  que  tu  corazon 
exercita  su  beneficencia,  no  para  recibir  el  lisonjero  tributo 
del  reconocimiento,  sino  para  satisfacer  su  noble  inclina- 
cion.  Pero,  ^como  quieres  que  dexe  de  ser  reconocido 
a,  tan  singulares  beneficios^  como  recibo  de  tu  generosa 
amistad  ?  Eso  no  puede  ser,  amigo  j  conque  permitlras 
que,  obedeciendo  a  la  voz  imperiosa  de  mi  corazon,  te 
diga  que  mi  gratitud  sera  indeleble,  y  que  mi  afecto  para 
ti  tendra  un  siempre  por  termino  de  su  duracion. 

Enviame  solo  la  mitad  de  lo  que  me  ofreces,  y  sobrara 
para  hacer  de  muy  pobre,  muy  rico  a — 

— Tu  fino  amigo. 


347 


FABULAS  UTERARIAS. 


FABULA  I. 

I 

El  Muchaco  y  la  Fortuna, 

A  la  orilla  de  un  pozo, 
Sobre  h  fresca  yerba 
Un  incauto  muchacho 
Dormia  a  pierna  suelta. 
Gritcle  la  Fortuna  ; 
Insensato,  desp'erta 
No  ves  que  ahogarte  puedes 
A  poco  que  te  muevas  ? 
Por  ti,  y  por  otros  canal  las 
A  veces  me  motejan 
Los  unos  de  inconsiante 
Y  los  otros  de  adversa. 
Reveses  de  Fortuna 
Llamais  X  las  miserias: 
Porque,  si  son  reveses 
De  la  conducta  necia  ? 


FABULA  II. 

El  Amor  y  la  Locura, 

Habiendo  la  Locura 
Con  el  Amor  reuido, 
Dexo  ciego  de  un  golpe 
Al  miserable  nifio. 


348  FABLES. 


Venganza  pide  al  cielo 
Venus,  mas  con  que  gritos  ! 
Era  madre  y  esposa. 
Con  csto  queda  dicho 
Querellase  a  los  dioses 
Presentando  a  su  hijo  : 
De  que  sirven  las  fiechas. 
De  que  el  arco  a  Cupido 
Faltandole  la  vista 
Para  asestar  sus  tiros  ? 
Quitensele  las  alas, 

Y  aquel  ardiente  cirio. 

Si  a  su  luz  ser  no  pueden 
Siis  vuelos  dirigidos. 
Atendiendo  a  que  el  ciego 
Siguiese  su  exercicio, 

Y  a  que  la  delinqiiente 
Tuviese  su  castigo, 
Jupiter,  presidente 
Dela  asemblea,  dixo  : 
Ordeno  a  la  Locura 
Desde  este  instante  mismo. 
Que  elernamente  sea 

De  Araorei  lazarillo. 


PABULA  III. 

Los  Gatos  escrupulosos. 

A  las  once,  y  aun  mas  de  la  man  ana 

La  cocinera  Juana 
Con  pretexlo  de  hablar  a  la  vecina 
Se  sale,  cierra,  y  dexa  en  la  cocina 
A  Miujufy  Zapiron  hambrientos 
Al  punto  (pnes  no  gastan  cumplientos 

Gatos  enhambrecidos)^ 


i 


r  ABU  LAS.  34g 

Se  avanzan  a  probar  de  los  cocidos 
"  Fu,"  dixo  Zapiron,  "  maldita  olla  ! 
^  Como  abrasa  !  veanios  esa  polla. 

Que  estaen  el  asador  lejos  del  fiiego, 
Yo  tambien,  escaldado,  desde  luego 
Se  arrima  Mic'ifuf,  y  en  uii  instante 

Muestra  cada  trinchante 
Que  en  el  arte  cisoria  sin  gran  pena, 
Pudiera  darlecciones  a  Villena. 

Concluido  el  asunto. 
El  senor  Micifuf  toco  este  punto: 
Ulrum  si  se  podia  6  no  en  conciencia 
Comer  el  asador  ?  O  que  deraencia  ! 
(Exclamo  Zapiron  en  .altos  gritos), 
Cometer  el  mayor  de  los  delitos ! 
No  sabes  que  el  herrero 
Hallevado  por  el,  mucho  dinero 
Y  que  si  bien  la  cosa  se  exaraina  j 

Entre  la  bateria  de  cocina 
No  hay  un  mueble  tan  serio  y  respetable  ? 

Tu  pasion  te  ha  engaoado  miserable. 
Mic'ifuf  en  efecto 
Abandono  el  proyecto  3 
Pues  eran  los  dos  gatos 
De  suerte  timoratos 
Que  si  el  diablo,  tentando  sus  pasiones  . 
Les  pusiese  asadores  a  millones, 
(No  hablo  yo  de  las  pollas)  6  me  engafio. 
O  no  comieran  uno  en  todo  el  aiio. 


FABULA  IV. 


El  Zapaiero  Medico. 

Un  habil  y  hambriento  zapatero 
En  la  corte  por  medico  corria  ; 
2h 


350  FABULAS. 

Con  un  contraveneno  que  fingia 

Gano  fama  y  dinero. 
Estaba  el  rey  postrado  en  una  cama 

De  una  grave  dolenciaj: 

Para  hacer  experiencii 
Del  talento  del  medico,  le  llama. 
El  antidote  pide,  y  en  un  vaso 
Finge  el  rey  que  le  mezcla  con  veneno  : 
8e  lo  manda  beber  :  el  tal  Galeno 
Teme  morir  :  confiesa  todo  el  caso 
Y  dice  que  sin  ciencia 
Logro  hacerse  doctor  de  grande  precio 
Por  la  credulidad  del  vulgo  necio 
Convoca  el  rey  al  pueblo  :  Que  demencia 
Os  persuadio,  les  dice,  a  haber  fiado 

La  salud  francamente 
De  un  hombre,  a  quien  la  gente 
Ni  aim  queria  liarle  tu  calzado. 

Moral. 

Esto  para  los  credulos  se  cuenta 

En  quienep.  tiene  el  Charlatan  su  renta. 


FABULA  V. 

Los  dos  Amigos  y  el  Oso. 

A.  dos  amigos  se  aparece  un  oso  : 

El  uno  muy  medroso 
En  las  ramas  de  un  arbol  se  asegura  : 
El  otro  abandonado  a  la  ventr.ra 

Se  linge  muerto  repentinamente. 

El  oso  se  le  acerca  lentaraente ; 
Mas  como  este  animal,  segun  se  cuen^a^ 
De  cadaveres  nunca  se  alimenta 


FABULAS. 

Sin  ofenderle,  le  registra  y  toca> 
Huelele  las  narices,  y  la  boca  j 
No  le  siente  el  alien  to 
Ni  el  me  nor  movimiento, 
Y  asi  se  fue  diciendo  sin  rezelo 
Este  tan  muerto,  esta  como  raii  abuelo 

Entonces  el  cobarde 
De  su  grande  amistad  haciendo  alarde, 
Del  arbol  se  desprende  muy  ligero 
Corre,  llega,  y  abraza  alcompauero 

Pondera  la  Fortuna, 
De  haberle  hallado  sin  lesion  alguna : 
Y  al  tin  le  dice :  sepas  que  he  notado 
Que  el  oso  te  decia  algun  recado. 
Que  pudo  ser  ?  direte  lo  que  ha  side, 

Estas  dos  palabritas  al  oido, 
Aparta  tu  amistad  de  la  persona. 
Que  si  te  ve  en  el  riesgo  te  abandona. 


351 


FABULA  VI. 

El  Leon  con  su  Eiircito. 

El  Leon  rey  de  los  bosques  poderoso 
Quiso  armar  un  exercito  famoso. 
Junto  sus  animales  al  instante  : 

Empezo  por  cargar  el  elefante 
Un  Castillo  con  utiles ;  y  encima 
Rabiosos  lobos,  que  pusiesen  grima. 
Al  oso  le  encargo  de  los  asaltos 

Al  mono,  por  los  altos 
Mando  que  al  enemigo  entretuviesej 

A  la  zorra  que  diese 
Ingeniosos  ardides  al  intento. 
Uno  grit6  :  la  liebre,  y  el  jumento, 
Este  por  tardo  aquella  por  medrosa, 
De  estorbo  servirian  no  de  otra  cosa. 
2  H 


352 


JPOESIAS, 


De  estorbo  ?  dixo  el  rey,  jo  no  lo  creo. 
En  la  liebre  tendrenios  un  correo, 
Y  en  el  asno  mis  tropas  an  tmmpeta: 
Asi  quedo  la  armada  bien  completa. 


Testamento  de  Don  Quixote, 

ROMANCE. 

De  un  raolimiento  de  huesos, 
A  puros  palos  y  piedras. 
Don  Quixote  de  la  Mancha, 
Yace  doliente,  y  sin  fuerzas. 

Tendido  sobre  un  paves^ 
Cubierto  con  su  rodela. 
Sacando  como  Tortuga, 
De  entre  concha  la  cabeza : 

Con  voz  roida,  y  chillando 
Viendo  el  escrivano  cerca 
Ansi_,  por  falta  de  dientes 
Hablo  con  el  entre  muelas. 

Escribid  buen  cabal lero, 
Que  Dios  en  quietud  mantenga 
El  testamento  que  hago, 
Por  voluntad  postrimera. 

Y  en  lo  de  su  entero  juicio 
Que  poneis  a  usanza  vuea, 
Basta  poner  de  zentado, 
Quando  entero  no  le-tenga. 

A  la  tierra  mando  el  cuerpo^ 
Coma  mi  cuerpo  la  tierra, 


POEsiAS.  353 


Que  segun  esta  de  flaco. 
Hay  para  un  bocado  apenas. 

En  la  vaina  de  mi  espada, 
Mando  que  llevado  sea 
Mi  cuerpo,  que  es  ataud, 
Capaz  para  su  flaqueza^ 

Que  embalsamado  me  lleven 
A  reposar  a  la  iglesia ; 
Y  que  sobre  mi  sepulcro 
Esciivan  esto  en  la  piedra. 

Aqui  yace  Don  Cluixote 
El  que  en  provincias  div^rsass 
Los  tuertos  vengo,  y  los  vicios 
A  puro  vivir  a  ciegas. 

A  Sancho  mando  las  islas 
Que  gan6  con  tanta  guerra  : 
Con  que,  sino  queda  rico 
Aislado  a  lo  menos  queda. 

Item  al  buen  Rozinante, 
Dexo  los  prados,  y  selvas, 
Que  crio  el  seuor  del  cielo. 
Para  alimentar  las  bestias. 

Mandole  mala  ventura, 

Y  mala  vejez  con  elia  ', 

Y  duelos,  en  que  pensar 
En  vez  depiensos  y  yerba. 

Mando  que  el  moro  encantado. 
Que  me  maltrato  en  la  venta, 
Los  punetes  que  me  dio, 
Al  momentb  se  le  vuelvan. 

Mando  a  los  mozos  de  mulas^ 
Volver  las  coces  sobervias. 


354  poi'SiAS. 

Que  me  dieron,  por  descarga, 
De  espaldas  y  de  conciencia. 

De  los  palos  que  me  han  dado^ 
A  mi  linda  Dulcinea, 
Para  que  gaste  el  invierno, 
Mando  cien  cargas  de  lena. 

Mi  espada  mando  a  una  escarpia 
Pero  desnuda  la  tenga. 
Sin  que  a  vestirla  otro  alguno. 
Si  no  es  el  orin,  se  atreva. 

Mi  lan^a  mando  A  una  escoba 
Para  que  puedan  con  elia 
Echar  aranas  de  el  techo, 
Qual  si  de  San  Jorge  fuera. 

Peto,  gola,  y  espaldar, 
Manopla,  y  media  visera 
Lo  vinculo  en  Quixotico 
Mayorazgo  de  mi  hazienda, 

Y  lo  demas  de  los  bienes. 
Que  en  este  mundo  se  quedan, 
Lo  dexo  para  obras  pias 
De  rescate  de  prineesas. 

Mando  que  en  lugar  de  misas, 
Justas,  batallas,  y  guerras. 
Me  digan,  pues  saben  todos. 
Que  son  mis  misas  aquestas. 

Dexo  por  testamentarios 

A  don  Belianis  de  Grecia  j     ' 

Al  caballero  del  Febo, 

A  Esplandian  el  de  las  Xergas. 

AHi  sabio  Sancho-Pan^a, 
Bien  oireis  lo  que  dixera 


POESIAS.  355 


Con  tono  duro,  y  de  espacio, 

Y  la  voz  de  quatro  suelas. 

No  es  razon,  buea  seAor  mio. 
Que  quaiido  vais  a  dar  ci.euia 
Al  sQ^or  que  vos  crio 
Dig.'.is  sandezestan  fieras. 

Sancho,  es  senor,  quien  vos  habla 
Que  estaa  vuesa  cabecera, 
Llorando  a  cantaros  triste 
Un  turbioii  de  lluvia,  y  piedra. 

Dexad  por  testamentarios 
Al  cura  (jue  vos  confiesa 
Al  regidor  Per  Anton 

Y  al  cabrero  Gil-Pancheca. 

Y  dexaos  de  Esplandiones 

Pues  tanta  inquietud  nos  cuestanj 

Y  Hamad  a  un  religioso 
Que  OS  ayude  en  esta  brega. 

Bien  dices,  le  respondio 
Don  Quixote,  con  voz  tierna  5 
Ve  a  la  pen  a  pobre,  y  dile 
A  Beltenebros  que  venga. 

En  csto  la  extrema  uncion 
Asomo  ya  por  la  puerta  : 
Pero  el  que  vio  al  sacerdote 
Con  sobrepellis  y  vela, 

Dixo  que  era  el  sabio  propio 
De  el  encanto  de  niguea  j 

Y  levanto  el  buen  hidalgo 
Por  hablarle  la  cabeza. 

Mas  viendo  que  ya  le  faltan 
Juicio,  vida,  vista,  ylengua. 
El  escrivano  se  fue, 

Y  el  cura  se  sal  16  a  fuera. 


356 


LA  ORACION  DOMINICAL, 

PADRE  nuestro  que  estds  en  los  cielos,  santificado  se& 
el  tu  nombre,  venga  a  nos  el  tu  reyno,  hagase  tu  voluntai 
asi  en  la  t'lerra  como  en  el  cielo ;  el  pan  nuestro  de  cada  dw 
danosle  hoy,y  perdonanos  nuestras  deudas  asi  como  nosotro, 
perdonamos  d  nuestros  deudores  -,  y  no  nos  dexescaer  en  la 
teniacionj  mas  libranos  denial.     Amen. 


EL  CREDO, 

CREO  en  Dm  Padre' Todo-poderoso ,  criador  del  del 
y  de  la  t'lerra,:  y  en  Jesu  Christo  su  unico  liijo  nuestr 
SeTior,  quefue  concehido  por  olra  del  Espiriiu  Santo ; 
ciu  de  Maria  Virgen  ;  padecio  dehaxo  delpoder  de  Pond 
Pilato,fue  crucificado,  muerto,  y  sepultado ;  descendio 
los  irifiernos ;  al  tercer  dia  resuscito,  de  entre  los  muertos 
suhid  a  los  cielos:  est  a  sentado  a  la  diestra  de  Dios  Padr 
Todo-poderoso  :  de  donde  vendra  a  juzgar  a  los  vivos  y 
los  muertos. 

Oreo  en  el  Espiritu  Santo,  la  santa  iglesia  catolica ;  L 
comuniqn  de  los  santos ;  el  perdon  de  los  pecados  5  /a* 
surreccion  de  la  came,  y  la  vida  perduralle.     Amen. 


FINIS. 


Richard  Taylor  and  Co.,  Printers^  Shoe-Lane,  London. 


August  1,  18l2 

J-iSTABLISHED  SCHOOL  BOOKS, 


J,  PRINTED   FOR 


LONGMAN,  HURST,  REES,  ORME,  and  BROWN, 

PATERNOSTER  ROW. 


ISTORICAL  and  MISCELLANEOUS    QUESTIONS  for  the 

Use  of  Young  People  ;  with  a  Selection  of  British  and  General  Biography,  &c 
RICHMAL  MANGNAL.    The  Niiiili  Edition,  in  12mo.    Price  5*.   bound. 

V  New  TREATISE  on  the  USE  of  the  GLOBES  ;  or,  a  Pliiloso- 

:al  View  of  the  Earth  aiid  Heavens ;  comprehending  an  Account  of  the  Figure, 
^nitude,  and  Motion  of  the  Earth  ;  with  the  natural  Changes  of  its  Surface,  caused 
Floods,  Earthquakes,  &c.  designed  for  the  Instruction  of  Youth.  By  THOMAS 
ITH.  In  I  vol.  l2mo.  with  Plates.  1  bird  Edition.  Price  6>.  boards. 
This  volume  comprehends  a  great  quantity  of  valuable  matter  in  a  small  compass,  and  we 
•  'k  it  cannot  fail  to  answer  the  purposes  for  wliich  it  is  designed."  Brit.  Cril.  "  This  wort 
jly  execuied."    Gen.  Rev. 

I  FAMILIAR  INTRODUCTION  to  the  ARTS  and  SCIENCES, 

the    Use  of  Schools  and  Young  Persons:    containing  a  General  Explication  of 

:  indamental  Principles  and  Facts  of  the  Sciences;  divided  into  Lessons,  with 

,uns  subjoined  to  each,  for  the  Examination  of  Kipils.    By  the  Rev.  J.  JOYCE, 

■i  1  of  Scientific  Dialogues,  &c.     In  1  vol.  12mo.     Price  6s.  boards,  illustrated  with 

per-plates  by  Lowry,  and  wood-cuts  by  Braiiston. 

Ti.c  method  adopt  d  i!>  to  lay  down  tht  principles  of  the  different  tcieticet  in  a  series  of 
-t  proposit.ons,  which  are  to  be  committed  to  memory,  and  arc  divided  into  lessons  of  ap- 
)riatf  length.  We  deem  ourselves  fully  justihed  in  rtcommendin|  the  volurr.e  to  parents  aiul 
•iictors,  as  containing  much  useful  u  atter  io  a  Cheap  and  Convenient  form,"    Monthly  Rev, 

\n  INTRODUCTION  to  the  GEOGRAPHY  of  the  NEW  TEsI 

<  iMENT;  comprising  a  Summary  Chronological  and  Geographical  View  of  the 
•■    onts  recorded  respecting  the  Ministry  of  our  Saviour  ;  with  Questions  for  Examina- 

1,  and  an  accented  Index  ;  principally  designed  for  the  Use  of  Young  Persons,  and 
the  ."Sunday  Employment  of  Schools.     By  LANT  CARPENTER,  LL.  D.     In  1  vol. 

10.  with  maps.    Tliird  Edition.     Price  lys.  boards. 

'We  recommend  this  book  to  all  such  as  are  anxious  to  obtain  accuracy  and  creciiion  iq 
'V  i.r  geographical  and  chronological  knowledge,  as  far  as  relates  to  the  liittory  of  the  events 
ui.'jjrded  in  the  writings  of  the  New  Testament.    Lit.  Jour. 

The  NEW  PANTHEON ;   or,  an  IntrodHCtron  to  the  Mythology 

'  r  the  Ancients,  in  Question  and  Answer.  Compiled  principally  for  the  Use  of 
}• 'males.    By  W.  JILLARD  HORT.   The  Third  Editioo.  With  Plates.   Price  5*.  boards. 

Tie  Nc*  Vantheon  is  scrupulously  dtlicate  ;  it  is  aliO  »eU  arranged,  and  well  uritten." 
:.  Rev.  "  It  would  be  unjust  not  to  i^commend  this  work  at  an  elegant  and  useful  com- 
on  to  young  pers<jns  of  both  sexes.''    Cent,  Mag. 

An  INTRODUCTION  to  the  STUDY  of  CHRONOLOGY  and 

rXIVER.SAL  HISTORY.  By  WILLIAM  JILLARD  HORT.  In  1  vol.  royal  l8mo. 
•"-:oe4«.  boards. 

An  EXPLANATORY  PRONOUNCING  DICTIONARY  of  the 

^  'ENCH  LANGUAGE,  in  French  and  English  ;  wherein  the  exact  Sound  and  Articu- 
on  of  every  Syllable  are  distinctly  marked  (according  to  the  Metliod  adopted  by 

-  .  Walker  in  his  Pronouncing  Dictionary);  to  which  are  pretixed  the  Principles  of 
French  Pronunciation,  Prefatory  Directions  for  using  the  Spelling  Representative 
evt  ry  Sound,  and  the  Conjugation  of  the  Verbs,  regular,  irregular,  and  defective, 

II  their  true  Pronunciation.  By  L'ABBE  TARDY,  late  Master  of  Arts  in  the  Uni- 
sity  of  Paris.    A  new  Edition,  revised,  iu  12nio.    Price  7i.  bound. 

An    ABRIDGMENT    of  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY.    Adapted 

..  the  Use  of  Families  and  Schools,  with  appropriate  Questions  at  the  End  of  each 
tion.    By  the  Rev.  H.  I.  KNAPP,  A.  M.    In  1  vol.  12mo.    The  Second  Edition. 

ce  4j.  6d.  bound. 

J  his  abridgment  is  execuied  with  much  judgment,  knowledge,  and  propriety  ;— a  due  sense  of 
portion  it  observed;  liic  details  expand  as  the  e»ents  bi  come  important,  and  a  moraljtv  re'i- 
tsly  tolerant  and  politically  passive  pervades  the  reflections."    M.  Hev.    Nov.  l!jiu. 

UNIVERSAL  STENOGRAPHY;   or  a  Complete  and  PracHcal 

M  of  SHORI-HAND.    By  WILLIAM  MAYOR,  LL.D     The  Eighth  Edition,  u 
t'rice  7s.  6d,  board? 


jBoo/cs  printed  for  J^ngman  and  Co. 

THE  ENGLISH  SPELLING-BOOK,  accompanied  by  a  progre?< 

give  Series  of  easy  and  familiar  Lessons,  adapted  to  the  Capacities  of  Children,  anS 
embellished  with  a  Variety  of  Engravings;  the  whole  intended  to  furnish,  for  the  Use 
of  Schools,  an  improved  introductory  Book  to  the  tirst  Elements  of  the  English  Lan- 
guage. By  WILLIAM  MAYOR,  LL.D.  Rector  of  Stonesfield,  Vicat  of  Hurley,  Chap. 
Iain  to  the  Earl  of  Moira,  &c.    The  Hundred  and  Fortieth  Edition.     Price  Is.  6d. 

Tlie  unprecedented  sale  of  Six  Hundred  l  housand  Copies  of  t)r.  Mavor's  New  Sl'Er.LING  BOOK, 
in  less  than  five  years,  and  its  adoption  by  intelligent  Teacliers,  in  all  the  respectable  Srl\ool3  in 
the  three  Kingdoms,  render  it  almost  unnecessary  for  the  Tublisiiers  to  make  any  remark  on  its 
claim  10  universal  preference. 

As  an  introductory  book  to  a  vernacular  tongue,  for  the  use  of  Children,  Dr.  Mavor's  Spelling 
Book  is  entirely  composed  of  plain  and  easy  examples,  leaJing  tlie  infantile  pupil,  step  by  step, 
by  the  most  simple  and  obvious  gradations,  from  the  (.eiters  of  Hie  Alphabet,  thiougli  syllable* 
and  words  of  two  andtiuee  letters,  on  to  asi-ries  of  amusing,  fjmiliar,  and  instructive  lessons,  oi» 
the  admired  plan  of  Barbauld  and  I'rimmer's  Lesson--. 

The  Work  is  printed  on  good  paper,  with  an  unusually  large  and  clear  tvpe.  The  Examples 
and  Lessons  are  displayed  in  a  disiinct  manner,  and  the  book  ihroughnit  is  rendered  attractiv* 
to  the  early  age  for  which  it  is  intended.  In  a  word,  the  convenience  of  the  teacher  «nd  the 
ease  and  pleasure  of  the  Pupil,  have  been  sedulously,  and,  it  is  believed,  successfully  consulted. 

CLASSICAL  ENGLISH  POETRY,  consisting  of  from  Three  to 

Four  Hundred  of  the  best  short  Pieces  in  the  Languaf.'e,  selected  for  the  Use  of.^hools 
and  young  Persons,  from  the  Works  of  the  British  Potts,  with  some  Original  Pieces. 
By  Dr.  MAYOR  and  Mr.  PRATT;  with  a  Preface,  indicating  the  several  Species  of 
Poetry,  and  their  best  Modes  of  Recitation.  Closely  printed  in  Duodecimo.  Price  6s. 
bound. 

THE  BRITISH  NEPOS,  consistinp  of  Select  Lives  of  the  illus- 
trious Britons  who  have  been  the  most  distinguished  for  their  Virtties,  Talents,  or  re- 
markable Advancement  in  Life,  interspersed  with  practical  Reflections;  written  ptir- 
|>osely  for  the  Use  of  young  Persons,  on  the  obvious  an^  important  Principle— tfeffi 
/•xample  is  niorepowerfuL  and  more  seductive  than  precept.  By  WILLIAM  MAYOR, 
LL.D.  The  Tenth  Edition.  Price  5^.  bound;  containing  Accounts  of  the  undermen- 
tioned distinguished  Personages 


Alfred 

Walsin?{ham 

Ilarvey 

Venn 

Lytilefon 

Bacon 

Crichtoii 

Blake 

Addison 

Chatham 

Wickiiff 

Drake 

Clarendon 

Marlborough 

Carnck 

Chaucer 

Burleigh 

Milton 

Newton 

Cook 

AVolsey 

Shakspcare 

Marvel 

WalDoJe 

Blacksfone 

Moore 

Haleigh 

Sydney 

Siaii^ 

Johnson 

tssex 

Bacon 

Tillotson 

Stoane 

Lowth 

r.atimrt 

Andrews 

Locke 

Wolfe 

Howard 

Cabot 

Coke 

Holt 

AnM>n 

Mansfield 

Jewell 

etratford 

Burnet 

Barnard 

Reynolds 

Gresham 

Jiampden 

A  SELECTION  of  the  LIVES  of  PLUTARCH,  abridged  for  the 

Use  of  Schools.  By  WILLIAM  MAYOR,  Li..D.  &c.  Price  55.  bound,  and  containing 
Accounts  of  the  undermentioned  Personages,  the  most  illustrious  and  estimable  Ciia- 
racters  of  Antiquity : 

Romulus 


■'iheinistocles 

Timoieon 

Eumenes 

nemosthenes 

Cam  ill  us 

Aristides 

Pompcy 

Cicero 

Perides 

cato  the  Censor 

Alexander 

Sic.  Ac. 

AlcibLiJdes 

Pyrriius 

Julius  CKsar 

Lycurgus 

Solon 

Numa 

THE  ELEMENTS  of  NATURAL  HISTORY,   for  the  Use  of 

Schools.  Pounded  oh  the  Linnaean  Arrangement  of  Animals,  with  popular  Descrip- 
tions- in  the  Manner  of  Goldsmith  and  Buffon.  By  WILLIAM  MAYOR,  LL.  D.  The 
Sixth  Edition.  Price  Os.  bound,  illustrated  by  Fifty  Engravings,  representing  Two 
Hundred  of  the  most  curious  objects.  ,  .         -   .      ,        ,      ,^ 

"  Natural  History  is  a  siudy  particularly  suited  to  children  ;  it  cultivates  flieir  talents  for  obsd  - 
Tation,  a!^pli2s  to  obiects  within  their  reach,  and  to  objects  winch  are  every  day  interesting  to 
them."    Edgewcrth  on  Practical  Kducathn.  ,  ._,.,•     j    ■■.,-.     ., 

"  It  is  to  be  regretied  that  Buffon,  with  all  his  excellencies,  is  absolutely  inadmissible  into  the 
library  of  a  young  lady,  both  on  account  of  his  immodesty  and  i^npiety.  Goldsmith's  History  of 
Anunated  Nature  has  m^ny  references  tj  a  divine  Author  ;  and  it  is  to  be  wished  that  some  person 
would  publish  a  new  edition  of  this  work,  purified  from  Uie  indelicate  and  offensive  parts.-'— 
fljisi  More'i  Strictures  on  Ftmalt  Education. 

SCRIPTURE  BIOGRAPHY,  or  the  Lives  and  Chai^cters  of  the 

nrincipal  Personages  recorded  in  the  Sacred  Writings,  practically  adapted  to  the  In- 
struction and  Improvement  of  Youth.  By  the  Rev.  JOHN  WATKINS,  LL.  D.  In  1 
vol.  12mo.  price  7s.  bound.  ,....„ 

This  important  work,  which  teaches  and  applie<!  the  principles  ef  religion  under  the  agreeable 
nrm  of  biosraohical  narratives,  contains  accounts  ot  the  following  scripture  diaracters. 
Adam  Abraham  Moses  David  Ester 

Cain  Isaac  Balaam  Soiomon  Mardecai 

Abel  Ja«ob  Joshua  Elijah  St.  )olin 

Enoch  Joseph  Ruth  Elisha  Jesus  Christ 

ffoah  Job  Samuel  Daniel 

'Itrrgt  mnd  beautiful  edition  of  this  work,  printed  on  a  large  tiipe,for  the  ?<-« 
*  qffamilie'i,  price  Vis-    ound  and  lettered. 


Books  printed  for  Longman  and  Co.  3* 

THE  CLASS-BOOK ;  or  THREE  HUNDRED  and  SIXTY-FIVE 

READING  LESSONS  for  SCHOOLS  of  either  SEX:  combining  the  Elements  of  all 
Knowledge,  with  a  greater  Number  of  Reading  Exercises,  from  the  best  Authors,  thaa 
are  lo  be  found  in  any  other  Work  of  the  same  Deso.iiption ;  every  Lesson  having  a 
clearly  defined  Object,  and  teaching  some  Principle  of  Science  or  M»)rality,  nv  some 
important  Truth.  By  the  Rev.  DAVID  BLAIR.  A  new  Edition,  printed  on  good 
Paper,  and  in  a  clear  Type.     Price  5s.  6d.  bound. 

Ihe  Author  has  been  siimuUied  to  cjinplete  these  Exetcists^  hi  rendine,  by  tlie  ob'crtatlon 
that,  although  there  at  present  exist  sererai  e.xccilent  books  for  teaching,  reading,  and  elocution, 
the  object  o(  them  does  not  extend  beyond  the  mere  combination  of  words  :  and  t)iey  consist 
almost  entirely  of  passages  selected  with  reference  to  beauty  of  composition  oniy.  in  tlie  present 
Work,  e  rgance  has  been  united  with  utilitv  ;  sound  and  sen«e  have  been  studiously  combined  , 
iiiid  eloquence  ha«  always  been  adapted  to  tiie  purposes  of  instruction.  In  short,  every  one  of 
the  lessons  in  this  Class  Book,  is  calculated  to  make  the  young  reader  both  v^iser  and  belter. 
His  own  experience  as  a  teacher  suagested  to  the  Author  the  diviiion  of  his  book  inio  three  hun- 
dred and  sixtv-five  lessons,  or  one  for  every  df\y  in  ihe  ye^r  ;  in  each  of  which  Uie  subject  matter 
is  generally  (inijhed  wiihiu  the  suitable  length  of  a  lesson.  This  division,  it  is  obvious,  will  be 
attended  with  an  equal  degree  of  conTcnience  to  the  tutor  and  pupil  in  the  actual  bu$4ne$s  ot  a 
public  sc'iiinary. 

READING  EXERCISES  for  SCHOOLS,  on  a  New  and  very  po 

pular  Plan,  being  a  Sequel  to  MAVOR's  SPELLING,  and  an  Introduction  to  the  Cla^ 
Book,  similar  in  Arrangement  to  Brown's  Testament.     By   the  Rev.   D.AVID  BLAli-. 
Price  2s.  6d.  bound. 

This  Work  recommends  itself  to  general  adoption  in  all  Seminaries,  by  the  following  peculiar 
features : 

1.  It  is  printed  in  a  large  clear  Type. 

2.  It  is  rendered  interesting  by  numerous  Embellishments. 

3.  The  subject  matter  is  adapted  to  the  capacity  of  Children,  and  is  at  once  entertaining:, 
moral  and  instructue. 

4.  All  the  diJTicalt  and  long  words  are  selectei^  divided,  and  printed  at  the  head  of  each 
Lesson,  in  the  .manner  of  Brown's  Testament. 

POETRY  for  CHILDREN ;  consisting  of  Selections  of  easy  and 
interesting  Pieces  from  the  best  Poets,  interspersed  with  Original  Pieces;  adapted  U> 
Children  between  the  Age  of  Six  and  Twelve.    By  Miss  AIKIN.    Price  2s. 

It  is  the  least  praise  of  the  two  after-mentioned  E!emenlary  Works  of  Geography  to  s;<y,  that  t  iiey 
are  bttitr  adapted  than  any  other,  as  a  means  of  teaching  that  useful  science,  the  f^ct  being,  ili-i 
they  form  the  only  elTeciive  System  thate%cr  wiis  contrived,  by  whi.li  persons  of  all  ages  may 
(peedilv  and  certainly  attain  a  clear  and  accurate  knowledge  of  Geography,  while  at  the  same 
time  they  claim  a  decisive  prt-eminence,  as  the  only  practical  course  by  which  Geography  can 
be  successfully  and  easily  taught  in  large  Seminarie'.. 

,  An  EASY  GRAMMAR  of  GF:0GRAPHY,  being  an  Introduction 

and  Companion  to  the  larger  Work  of  the  same  Author,  published  under  the  Title  of 
"  Geography  on.  a  Popular  Plan,  "  and  esteemed  the  most  practical  Work  of  this  Ittnd 
extant.  By  the  Rev,  J.  GOLDSMITH.  The  Fortieth  Edition.  Illustrated  with  a  Va 
riety  of  Maps,  &c.    Price  3;.  6d.  boui^  in  red. 

GEOGRAPHY  on  a  POPULAR  PLAN,  for  the  Use  of  SCHOOLS 

and  YOUNG  PERSONS,  containing  all  the  interesting  and  amusmg  Features  of  Geo- 
graphical Knowledge,  and  calculated  to  convey  Instruction  by  Means  of  the  striking 
and  pleasing  Associations  produced  by  the  peculiar  Manners, Customs, and  Characters  of 
an  Nations  and  Countries.  By  the  Rev.  J.  GOLDSMITH.  A  new  Edition,  consider- 
ably enlarged  and  improved,  illustrated  with  upwards  of  Sixty  beautiful  Engravings, 
representii:g  the  Dresacs,  Customs,  and  Habitations  of  all  Nations,  with  numerous 
.Maps,  ice.    Price  14j.  twund  and  lettered. 

In-.teaJ  oi  .iry  lietails  relanve  to  lihjecis  not  adapted  to  the  taste  and  curiosity  of  youth,  thTs 
*ork  IS  soiely  occupie  I  with  such  ane;do:i's  of  people  and  countries  as  are  calculated  to  rivet 
attention,  and  maintain  ihat  fascinating  character  for  which  the  science  of  ge.<graphy  has  higher 
clnims  tlun  any  oti  er  branch  of  knowledge.  The  contents  of  this  volume  are  consequently  inoi« 
iuteiesling  than  are,  perhaps,  U\ose  of  any  other  work  of  equal  size  in  the  tnglish  language,  and 
the  effect  on  the  minds  of  young  persons  is  rendered  coinp'eie  by  the  numerous  plates  which  illus- 
trate every  part,  suiijuined  if  the  only  treatise  exisiiiig  on  the  subject  of  Onstructing  Mapi  ,•  a 
practice  thus  rendered  familiar,  and  by  means  of  which  tiie  mechanical  part  of  Ceograpliy  may 
be  taught  in  a  iuurth  part  of  the  usual  time. 

THE  ARITHMETIC  of  REAL  LIFE  and  BUSINESS,  adapted 

to  the  practical  Use  of  Schools,  including  a  complete  Refonnation  of  all  the  Tables  of 
Weights  and  Measures;  the  Calculation  of  Annuities,  Leases,  Estates,  Lives,  Stocks, 
Exchanges,  arc;  and  more  numerous  Examples  under  every  Rule  than  are  to  be  found 
in  any  other  Book  of  this  Kind.  By  tlie  Rev.  J.  JOYCE.  Closely  printed.  Price  3f.  tid. 
bound. 

Every  man  of  business  must  recollect  how  much  he  had  to  unlearn  in  the  practice  of  Arithmetic, 
when  h»ving  left  school  he  first  entered  into  the  commeice  ot  life,  and  also  how  little  he  had  leinu 
which  was  strictly  applicable  to  real  transactions.  The  present  System  of  Anihmeiic,  disregarding 
the  tetters  ot  its  predecessors,  has  consulted  alone  the  actual  and  prevailing  occasions  tor  the 
exercise  of  this  usetul  art.  Every  branch  of  trade  and  manutacture  has  been  sedulou^lv  consulted 
in  the  new  exemplification  of  the  various  Weights  and  Measures;  every  thing  obsoltteur  useies« 
in  other  books  of  Anihnietic  has  been  expunged ;  and  every  thing  has  been  introduced  Hut  » 
CUtntiall^  necessary. 


Books  printed  for  Longman  and  Co. 

The  following  are  the  peculiar  and  superior  features  of  this  Arithmetic . 

i.  The  Tables  of  Weights  and  Mcnsures,  corrected  throughout,  and  adapted  to  modeiih  usage. 

'I.  Obsolete  and  useless  Riles  expunged,  and  a  much  larger  portion  applied  to  Stock"!,  Estate" 
Annuities,  Discounts,  Reversions,  Tontines,  Banking,  Irsurancies,  Brokerage,  Chances  Exchang' 
*e.  arc.  as  practised  by  the  Brokers  and  comnvrcia!  Companies  of  the  City  of  London. 

3.  More  Examples  under  eacli  R  !e  than  ire  to  be  found  in  anv  other  Work. 

4.  LogarithBU  applied  to  calculations  of  Annuities,  Compound  interest,  &c. 

A  KEY  to  DITTO,  for  the  Use  of  Teachers ;  to  which  is  subjoined^ 

A  System  of  Mental  Arithmetic.     Price  35.  6d. 

In  the  KEY  to  JOYCE'S  ARTTHMEl'IC,  is  siven  a  new  and  verv  useful  discovery,  bv  means  ol 
which,  an  Sums  In  the  First  Rules  of  Arithmetic,  simple  or  compound,  may  be  rxainineU  at  a 
glance  of  the  eye. 

THE  ELEMENTS  of  LAND-SURVEYING,  in  all  its  Branches, 

practically  adapted  for  the  Use  of  Schools  and  Students  j  and  including  Practical  Geo- 
metry, Trigonontetry,  Land  Measuring  by  the  Chain,  Plane,  Table,  Theodolite,  and 
•ther  Instruments;  the  entire  Practice  of  Hilly  Ground  ;  the  Division  of  Land  ;  Plot- 
ting and  Mapping;  illustrated  by  highly-finished  Engravings,  plain  and  coloured; 
complete  Tables  of  Sines  and  Tangents,  Logarithms,  &c.  &c.  &c.  By  AHRAHAM 
CROCKER,  Land  Surveyor,  of  Frome,  in  Somersetshire.  Illustrated  wrth  a  greater 
Variety  of  Copper-plates  than  any  other  Work  of  the  Kind ;  also  with  upwards  of 
One  Hundred  Wood-cuts.     Price  7s.  6d.  bound. 

The  object  of  the  Author  of  this  Work  has  been  to  produce  a  practical  System  of  r.and  Sur- 
veying, c-irresponding  in  scientific  arrangement  and  perspicuity  wi'h  Mr.  Bonnvcasde's  well-known 
systPin  of  Mensuration.  Kyery  rule  and  case  !■<  illustrafi-d  with  numerous  Examples  and  Exer- 
'■ises  for  the  use  of  Teachers  and  Students;  and  an  unusual  expence  has  been  incurred  to  pro- 
duce such  Engravings,  plain  and  coloured,  as  should  completely  instruct  the  young  Sur/eyor  iit 
ihc  important  art  of  correct  and  elegant  Drawings. 

THE  ELEMENTS  of  BOOK-KEEPING,  by  SINGLE  and 
POUBLE  EN'CRY;  comprising  several  Sets  of  Books,  arrangci  according  to  present 
Practice,  and  designed  for  the  Use  of  Schools.  To  whicli  is  annexed,  an  Introduction 
•n  Merchants'  Accounts,  with  engraved  Specimens.  By  JAMES  MORRISON,  Account- 
ant; Master  of  the  Mercantile  Academy  at  Glasgow,     in  8vo.  price  Is.  half  bound. 

The  above  Work  divests  the  art  of  Book-keeping  ot  if«  pedantry  and  usual  in  ricacy  ;  it  com- 
mences with  a  '•et  of  Books,  iv  the  simplest  form,  which  are  adapted  to  initiate  beginners 
to  a  Retail  Trade,  hghlv  useful  to  a  numerous  class  of  students  who  liave  been  perplexed  by 
the  complicated  Systems  of  som-  Authors.  O'her  Sets  of  Books  follow,  which  are  adapted  to. 
the  most  extensive  Wliolesale  Concerns.  The  whole  are  illustrated  by  ftuestioiw  tor  Exercise, 
and  by  engrared  I'orms  of  the  various  Documents  used  in  Business. 

An  UNIVERSAL  FRENCH  GRAMMAR,  bein«  an  accurate 
System  of  French  Accidence  and  Syntax,  on  an  improved  Plan.  By  NICHOLAS 
ITAMEL.    Fjftli  Editi'jn.    JPrice  4«.  bound. 

"  Of  the  raanv  excellent  French  Grammars  now  In  use,  this  is  ainong  the  best."—"  It  is  both 
comprehensive  and  concise,  and  is  as  well  adapted  as  most  Grammars  for  the  use  of  schools." 
~"  He  has  composed  his  work  on  sound  principles  and  ex«c;  defir.iUons."— "  His  book  dCffiiuaj 
our  commendation." 

GRAMMATICAL  EXERCISES  upon  the  FRENCH  LANGUAGE, 

compared  with  the  English.  By  NICHOLAS  HAMEL.  Seventh  Edition,  with  great 
Improvements.    Price  4*'  bound. 

THE  WORLD  in  MINIATURE;  containing  a  curious  and  faith- 
ful Account  of  the  Situation,  Extent,  Productions,  Government,  Population,  Dress, 
Manners,  CuriorJties,  &c.  &c.  of  the  different:  Countries  of  the  World  :  compiled  from 
the  best  Authorities;  with  proper  References  to  the  most  essential  Rules  of  the  French 
Language  prefixed  to  the  Work,  and  the  Translation  of  the  difficult  Words  and  idio- 
matical  Expressions :  a  Bjook  particularly  useful  to  Stuients  in  Geography,  History, 
and  of  the  French  Language.  By  NICHOLAS  HAMEL.  1  bird  Edition.  In  1  voL 
12mo.    Price  4s.  6rf.  bound. 

THE  SCHOLAR'S  SPELLING  ASSISTANT.     Intended  for  tlie 

Use  of  Schools  and  private  Tuition.  By  THOMAS  CARPENTER,  Master  of  the  Aca- 
demy, llford,  Essex.  Tenth  Edition,  corrected  and  improved.     Price  Is.  3d.  bound. 

THE  NEW  ORTHOGRAPHICAL  ASSISTANT,  or  English 
Exercise  Book.  Written  on  an  impu-oved  Plan,  for  the  more  speedy  Instruction  of 
young  Persons  in  the  Art  of  Spelling  and  Pronunciation;  intended  for  the  Use  of 
Schools.   By  THOMAS  CARPENTER.    Price  2s.  bound. 

THE  YOUTHS  GUIDE  to  BUSINESS ;    containing  an  easy  and 

familiar  Introduction  to  Book-keeping  by  Single  Entry,  t5ills  of  Parcels,  &c.   Tables  of 
Money,  Weights,  and  Measures,   methodized  and  arranged  on  an  improved  Plan  ;  ami 
,-i  Variety  of  Arithmetical  Questions  for  occasional  Exercise  and  Itnprovemf  ni.     !)• 
signed  for  the  U^e  of  Schools.    By  THOMAS  CARPENTER.    Price  2«.  6d.  bou^(l. 


Books  printed  Jar  Longman  and  Co.  Sk 

GREEK    EXERCISES,   in    Syntax,    Ellipses,   Dialects,   Prosody* 

and  Metaphrases,  (after  the  Manner  of  "  Clarke's  and  Mair's  Introduction  to  the  mak- 
ing of  Latin,")  adapted  to  the  Grammars  of  Eton,  VVettenhall,  Moore,  Bell,  and  Holmes. 
T.)  which  is  prefixed,  a  concise  but  comprehensive  Syntax.  By  the  Rev.  VVIILIAM 
NEIL.SON,  D.  D.  Minister  of  Dnndalk,  Ireland.  The  Third  Edition.  In  I  vol.  8vo. 
Price  5s.  in  Beards,  and  with  the  Kev,  Price  8s. 

"  This  work  slricily  fu'l(i!l3  die  prolessjons  of  the  title-page." 

GREEK  IDIOMS,  exhibited  in  select  Passages  from  the  best  Au- 

thors,  with  English  Notes  and  a  parsing  Index.  To  which  are  added,  Observations  on 
some  Idioms  of  the  Greek  Language.  By  the  Rev.  W.  NEILSON,  D.D.  M.  R.  L  A.  In 
8vo.  Price  5s.  bound. 

A  KEY  to  the  GREEK  EXERCISES.     By  the  Rev.  WILLIAM 

NEILSON,  D.D.  M.R.I  A.     In  8vo.  Price  3*.  in  Boards. 

An  ALPHABETIC  KEY  to  PROPRIA  QUyE  IVIARIBUS,  QV/t 

GENUS,  and  AS  IN  PRitSENTL  containing  all  the  Examples  declined  and  traaslated 
with  the  Rules  quoted  under  each,  and  numerical  References  to  the  context.  By  J. 
CAREY,  LL.  D.     In  1  vol.  12mQ.     Price  '2s.  6d.  bound. 

SCANNING   EXERCISES  for  YOUNG  PROSODIANS,   con- 

taining  the  first  Two  Epistles  from  the  Electa;  ex  Ovidio,  scanned  and  pn)ved  by  the 
Rules  of  the  Eton  Grammar,  and  interspersed  with  occasional  Remarkf.  By  J.  CAREY, 
LL.  D.     Price  4$.  in  Boards. 

"  This  ctle  »\ork  consists  oi  a  very  minutp  critical  aoalysij  of  two  epistles  of  Ovid,  Deianira 
llercuH  and  Medea  Ja9()ni.  From  the  known  characier  of  the  auttior,  it  is  nce<Uess  to  observe  that 
it  is  peMbrmed  with  accuracy.    An.  Riv. 

LATIN   PROSODY  MADE  EASY.     By  J.  CAREY,    LL.  D. 

private  TYacher  of  the  Classics,  French  Language,  and  Short  Hand.  Besides  othfr 
material  Improvements  iti  almost  every  Page,  this  Edition  contains  a  minute  Account 
of  about  Fifty  dilferent  Species  of  Verse— Further  .Notices  of  ancient  Pronunciation— a 
Dissertation  on  the  Power  of  the  Initial  S.— Metrical  Key  to  Horace's  Odes— Synopsib 
of  his  Metres — A  copious  Index,  &c.  &c.  In  8vo.  A  new  Edition,  considerably  enlarged 
and  improved.     Pi  ice  iOs.  6d.  in  Boards. 

"  I  his  work  appears  to  u';  iikely  t«i  prove  a  very  useful  publication.  The  rulei  are  given  in 
Latin  veise,  and  -jfierwards  explained  and  elucidated  in  Lnglish.  The  autlior  seerm  to  tlioroiiRhly 
iindei-stand  the  principles  of  his  subject ;  and  he  hds  treated  it  fully,  accurately,  and  ingeniously." 
.M.  Rev. 

An  ABRIDGMENT  of  the  LATIN  PROSODY  MADE  EASY, 

for  the  Use  of  Schools^  containing  as  much  of  the  information  given  on  each  subject  in 
the  larger  work,  as  appeared  suited  to  the  Ube  and  capacity  of  young  Prosodians.  lu 
l2mo.  Price  3<.  6rf.  bound. 

"  Or.  Cai  y  has  rendered  an  acceptable  service  to  young  students  by  this  abridtiinent  of  his  useful 
work  on  Prosody,  and  we  cordially  i-ecuniinend  it  to  inc  notice  of  teachers. '  Ann.  Rev.  1808. 

A  KEY  to  CHAMBAUD'S  EXERCISES  ,  being  a  correct  Trans- 
lation of  the  various  Exercises  contained  in  that  Book.  By  E.  J.  VOISIN.  Second 
Edition.    Price  4s- hound. 

THE  ARITHMETICIAN'S    GUIDE;     or,  a  Complete  Exercise 

Book,  for  the  Use  of  public  Schools  and  private  Teachers.  By  WILLIAM  TAYLOR, 
Teacher  of  the  Mathematics,  &c    The  Sixth  Edition.  17mo.  3s.  bound. 

THE  CHILD'S  MONITOR;  or,  Parental  Instruction.      In  Five 

Parts,  contaming  a  great  Variety  of  Progressive  Lessons,  adapted  to  the  Comprehension 
of  Children  ;  calculated  to  instruct  them  in  Reading,  in  the  Use  of  Stops,  in  Spelling, 
and  in  divirWg  Words  into  proper  Syllables  ;  and  at  the  f-ameTime  to  give  them  some 
Knowledge  of  Natural  Historv,  of  the  Scriptures,  and  of  several  other  sublime  and  im- 
portant Subjects.     By  JOHN  HORNBY.    Third  Edition.  Price  4j.  bound. 

"  This  is  one  '.>!  the  best  conceived  ar<l  iposi  .raciicall/  useful  publicatious  for  children  that 
we  have  seen,  the  title  page  «iifficienily  expUins  li.c  inielligent  author's  plan  and  design,  and  v^e 
can  safely  assure  o<it  readers  thai  lie  hassxecutcd  them  wth equal  'kill  and  fide.ify."   .inti-jac. 

THE   BOOK  of  MONOSYLLABLES;    or,    an  Introduction  to 

the  Child's  Moivtcr,  adapted  to  the  Capacities  of  young  Children.  In  two  Parts,  calcu- 
lated to  irstruct  by  familiar  Gra  ations  in  the  first  Principles  of  Education  and  Mora- 
Mty.    By  JOHN  HORNSEY,  1?  6d. 

"  The  oliviuuj  u'liHv  of  thi-  p  an  is  such  as  'o  require  no  corameof.  Mr.  Ho  nrev  has  executed 
U  in  a  ip-nnt-r  highly  ciedifaWe  to  his  mgtnuiiy  ami  indjstry  :  for  he  has  contrived  not  only  to 


6  Books  printed  for  Longman  and  Co. 

A  SHORT  GRAMMAR  of  the   ENGLISH  LANGUAGE,  sim- 

pMed  to  the  Capacities  of  ChiUlren.  In  Four  Parts.  1.  Orthography.  2.  Analogy. 
3.  Proeody.  4.  Syntax.  With  Remarks  and  appropriate  Questions.— Also,  an  Appendix, 
in  Three  Parts.  1.  Grammatical  Resolutions,  &c.  '2.  False  Syntax,  &c.  3.  Rules  and 
Observations  for  assisting  young  Persons  to  speak  and  write  with  Perspicuity  and  Ac- 
ruracy  By  JOHN  HORNSEY,  A  new  Edition,  c«rrected  and  greatly  improved.  Price 
'Zs.  bound. 

THE  PRONOUNCING  EXPOSITOR;  or,  A  NEW  SPELLING 

BOOK.    In  Three  Parts.    By  JOHN  HORNSEY.    In  12mo,  Price  is.  Bound. 

THE  NEW  YOUNG    MAN'S    COMPANION,    01    the   Ywith's 

Guide  to  General  Knowledge,  designed  chiefly  "for  the  Benefit  of  private  Persons  of 
both  Sexes,  and  adapted  to  the  Capacities  of  Beginners.  In  Three  Parts.  By  JOHN 
HORNSEY.  In  1  vol.  12mo.  Price  4*.  bound,  embellished  with  4  Copper-plates,  and 
28  Wood  cuts. 

RUDIMENTS  of  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR,  for  the  Use  of  Schools. 

By  the  Rev.  HENRY  ST.  JOHN  BULLEN,  M.A.  Of  Trinttv  College,  Cambridge, 
and  Head  Master  of  the  Grammar  School,  Leicester..    The  Third  Edit.     Price  2s.  6rf.  Bd. 

A  GEOGRAPHICAL  and  HISTORICAL  VIEW  of  the  WORLD  ; 

exhibiting  a  complete  Delineation  of  the  natural  and  artificial  Features  of  eaclv 
Country  ;  and  a  succinct  Narrative  of  the  Origin  of  the  ditferent  Nations,  their 
Political  Revolutions,  and  progress  in  Arts,  Sciences,  Literature,  Commerce,  &c.^ 
The  whole  comprising  all  that  is  important  m  the  Geography  of  the  Globe  and  the 
History  of  Mankind.  By  JOHN  BIGLAND.  Author  of  "Letters  on  Ancient  and 
Modern  History,"  &c.     In  Five  large  Volumes,  Svo.     Price  3^.  135.  6rf.  Boards. 

"  In  these  volurnes  Mr.  Bii;lan(l  exhibi's  a  very  pleasing  picture  ol  llie  past  and  the  present 
stale  of  mankind,  o(  their  proi^ress  in  civilization  and  »r's,  with  portions  tii  tiieir  topographical, 
tlieir  civil  and  military  history,  so  judiciously  combined,  as  to  constitute  a  very  editvinp  Kp.d 
amusing  work-.  It  mav  be  peruSL"!  with  great  advantage  by  jjvenile  studtms  who  wish  tor  a 
general  view  of  ;lic  present  and  the  past  state  of  man  in  ail  parts  ot  the  world,  before  they  enter 
on  the  detailed  investigation  of  particular  portions  of  the  globe  ;  r.or  will  it  h-.  unacceptable  to 
those  who  ai(  more  advanced  in  life,  and  who  wish  to  renew  their  foi'mer  recollections,  and  to 
retrace  th.e  historical  path  which  they  have  before  trod,"— Crit.  Hev» 

LETTERS  on  the  STUDY  and  USE  of  ANCIENT  and  MO- 
DERN HISTORY;  containing  Observations  and  Reflections  on  the  Causes  and 
Consequences  of  th.>.s«  Events  which  have  produced  any  conspicuous  Change  in  the 
Aspect  of  the  World,  and  the  general  State  of  Human  Attairs.  by  JOHN  BIGLANO. 
The  Third  Edition.  In  1  vol.  demy  8vo.  embellished  with  an  elegantly  engraved 
Head  of  the  Author.    Price  10*.  6d.   or  1  vol.  I2mo.    Price  &.  in  Boards. 

"  Mr  BigUnd  displays  In  this  volume  a  well  cultivied  and  comprehensive  mind.  His  style  »» 
generally  correct;  his  information  is  extensive;  and  the  many  pertinent  remarks  and  inference.? 
with  which  he  has  enriched  this  suininaiy  01  gtncral  history,  meet  our  cordial  approbation." 
AT.  HfV. 

LET  I'ERS  on  NATURAL  HISTORY ;  exhibiting?  a  View  of  the 
Power,  the  Wisdom,  and  Goodness  of  the  Deity.  So  eminently  displayed  in  the 
Formation  of  the  Universe,  and  the  varii/us  Relations  of  Utility  which  inferior 
Being,  have  to  the  Human  Species.  Calculated  particularly  for  the  Use  of  Schools 
and  Young  Persons  m  general  of  both  Sexes  :  in  order  to  impress  their  Minds  with 
a  jus'.  Knowledge  of  the  Creation,  and  with  exalted  Ideas  of  its  Great  Author. 
Illustrated  by  upwards  of  One  Hundred  engraved  Subjects,  applicable  to  the  Work. 
By  JOHN  BI(;LAND.  The  Second  Edition,  in  One  Volume  l2mo.  Illustrated  by 
Plates,  7«  6d. 

"  We  recomm'  nd  oi;r  young  readers  to  peruse  the  present  work  as  a  compilation  of  very  useful 
and  entcrtaiiini.'  information,  tree  from  indecorous  aUusions,  and  interspersed  with  useful  reflcc 
lions."    Ecltc.  Rev. 

NEW    BRITISH   ENCYCLOPEDIA;   or,    DICTIONARY    of 

ARTS  AND  SCIENCES,  comprising  an  accurate  and  popular  View  of  the  present 
improved  State  of  Human' Knowledge.  By  "WILLIAM  NICHOLSON,  Author  and 
Proprietor  of  the  Philosophical  Journal,  and  various  other  Chemical,  Philosophical 
and  Mathematical  Works.  Illustrated  with  156  elegant  Engravings,  bv  Fx)wry  and 
Scott.    Neatly  printed  by  IV flitting  ham.    In  6  vols.  »vo.    Price  61.  6s.  in  Boards. 

LIVES  OF  ANCIENT  PHILOSOPHERS,  translated   from  tlie 

French  of  FENELON,  with  Notes,  and  a  Life  of  the  Auihor-  By  the  Rev.  J.  COIi- 
MACK,  M.  A.  In  2  vols,  foolscap  8vo.  The  Second  Edition,  printed  by  Ballantyn*. 
Price  I2s.  in  Boards. 

CONVERSATIONS  on  CHEMISTKY.     In  wliith  the  Element* 


Books  printedfor  Longman  and  Co.  7 

"  This  work  may  bf'Stroni'ly  rccoRimendecl  lo  young  students  of  boili  sexes.  The  perspiciiiry 
of  the  style,  the  rrgular  disposition  ol"  the  subject,  tlie  judiciinis  selection  o\  illustrative  experi- 
ments, and  the  elegance  of  the  plates,  are  so  well  adayted  to  the  capaci'y  ol  beginneis,  and 
especiallv  of  tho<<c  who  do  not  wish  to  dive  deep  into  the  science,  that  a  more  appropriate 
publication  can  hardly  be  desired."    Brtt,  Crit. 

LECTURES    on    BELLES    LEITRES    and    LOGIC.      By    the 

late  WILLIAM  BARRON.  F  A.  S.E.  aad  Hrnfessor  of  Belles  Lettres  and  Logic' iii  the 
the  Universits  of  St.  Andrews.     In  '2  vols.  8vo.  Price  Que  Guinea  Boards. 

"  riiis  work  is  well  calculated  for  the  in;  lation  ot"  the  youns  into  tne  iirts  uC  ciiticism  and 
rhetoric.  The  s'yle  is  remarkably  per8pici:oiis,  ;,nd  at  the  same  time  inimated ;  while  tlic  neat- 
ncss  and  distinctness  ol  the  arrangement  merit  every  praise."    Lit.  Jow. 

PITY'S  GIFT;  a  Collection  of  interesting  Tales  from  the   Works 

of  Mr.  Pratt.     In  1  vol.  12mo.  embellisiied  with  Wood  Cuts.    Third  Edit   Price 3*.  b<i. 

THE  PATERNAL   PRESENT;  being  a  SEQUEL  to  Pity's  Gift; 

chiefly  selected  from  the  Writings  of  Mr.  Pralt,    2d  Edit,  with  11  Wood  Cuts,  3s.  bd. 

THE  HISTORY  of  ENGLAND,  related  in  P^amiJiar  Conversa- 
tions, by  a  Father  to  his  Children.  Interspersed  with  moral  and  instructive  Re- 
marks and  Observations  on  tlie  most  leadint?  and  interesting  Subjects.  Designed  for 
the  Perusal  of  Youth.  By  ELIZABETH  HELME.  Third  Edition.  lB2voh.  12mo. 
8s.  boimd,  with  Frontispieces. 

"The  presort  perlormance  seems  exceedingly  well  adanted  to  the  proposed  purpose,  and  it 
is  worUjy  ol  a  respectable  place  in  the  Juvenile  Library."    Brii.  Crit. 

INSTRUCTIVE   RAiMBLES  through    London  and    its   Environs. 

By  Mrs.  HELME.     Fourth  Edition,  complete  rn  1  vol.     Price  4s-  ^-  bound. 

"  Muc  I  topographical  and  historical  knowledge  is  contained  in  this  voiume,  mingled  with 
pertinent  rttitctfons."    Crit,  Rn; 

MATERNAL    INSTRUCTION  ;     or.     Family    Conversations    on 

iHoral  and  interesting  Subjects,  interupersed  with  History,  Biographv,  and  ori^nal 
Stories.  Designed  for  the  Perusal  of  Youth.  By  ELIZABETH  HELME.  Third  JEdit. 
In  12mo.     Price  4?.  6d.  in  Boards. 

"  Tnere  is  sometliing  in  the  plan  ol'  the  present  little  work  particularly  ,ileasing.  u  is  with 
great  pleasure  that  we  recommend  a  work,  the  design  of  which  is  to  sensible,  and  the  execution 
so  saiistactory."    Brtt.Crit, 

THE  PANORAMA  of  YOUTH.  2d  Edit.  In  2  vols.  Price  9*.  Boards. 

LETTERS  from  Mrs.  PALMERSTONE  to  her  Daughter,  incul- 
cating Morality  by  entertaining  Narratives.  By  Mrs.  HUNTKR,  of  Norwich.  The 
Second  Edition,  in  3  vols.  1  .'mo.     Price  15s.  in  Boards 

"  rlie.sf  Letters  justly  claim  a  distmguisheU  rank  .fmot)*  the  literary  productions  of  the  present 
day,  ior  young  persons  of  the  It-male  sex,  in  genteel  life."  Guard,  i^  Educ. 

LETTERS  addressed   to   a   YOUNG  LADY,  wherein    the    Duties 

and  Characters  of  Women  are  considered  chieflv  with  a  Reference  to  prevailing 
Opinions.     By  Mrs.  WEST.     The  Fouriii  Edition,    in  3  vols.  12mo.    Price  U.  Is    Bds. 

"  We  do  not  venture  Aitiiout  mature  deliberation  lo  sssert,  that  not  merel'.  as  nitics.  but 
as  parents,  liU3band<i,  and  brothers,  we  can  recommend  to  the  ladies  of  Britain,  '  The  Letters 
of  Mrs.  West."    crit.  Rtv. 

LETTERS  addressed   to  a  YOUNG  MAN,    on   his  tirst    Entrance 

into  Life  ;  and  adapted  to  the  peculiar  CircumsUnces  of  the  present  Timea,  By  Mrs. 
WEST.    The  Fifth  Edition.     In  3  vols.  12mo.     Price  21s.  Boards. 

"  rim  work  appears  to  us  higl  ly  valuable.  I'he  doctrine*  which  it  teaches  are  orthodov,  tem- 
peraif,  unitorin,  and  liberal,  ami  the  m.inners  whicli  it  recommends  are  what  every  judicious 
parent  would  wish  his  son  to  adopt  "  Brit.  Cri'.  "  We  con-sider  these  letters  as  truly  valu- 
able, and  would  strongly  rt-conimend  tlu'Ri  to  the  attention  of  our  younger  friends."  Crtt.  Hev. 
••  We  cannot  withhold^  our  tribute  of  praise  which  a  work  ol  such  superklive  merit  demands.", 
Cuord.  0/  Ei. 

An  IN  TRGDUCTION  to  the  STUDY  of  BOTANY.     By  J.  E. 

SMITH,  M.D.  F.  R.S.  P.  L.S.  The  Second  Edition.  In  I  vol.  8vo.  with  Fifteen  Plates. 
Price  14s.  Boards. 

•»*  A  few  Copies  are  coloured,  Price  I/.  8j.  Boards. 
The  Plan  of  this  Work  is  to  render  the  Science  of  botanical  Arrangement  as  well 
as  the   general    Structure   and  Anatomy  of  Plants  accessible,  and    in  every    point 
eligioie  for  young  Persons  of  eiti.er  Sex,  who  may  be  desirous  of  making  this  elegaut 
and  useful  Science  a  Part  of  their  Education  or  Amusement. 

MENTORIAN  LECIUKES  on  .SACRED    and   MORAL  SUB- 

JECTS;  adapted  to  the  Comprehension  of  Juvenile  Readers.  To  which  are  added, 
.some  i»riginat  Miscelianeyws  Poems  By  .ANN  MUKKY,  Author  of  "  Meutoria." 
Inscribed,  bv  Permission    to    Her  Royal    Highness  me   Princess  Charlotte  of  Wales, 


8  Books  printed  for  Longman  an-d  Co. 

THE  BRITISH   CICERO:   or,  a  Selection    of  the  most  admired 

Specclics  in  the  English  Language,  arranged  under  Three  distinct  Heads  of  Po- 
pulsr,  Parliamentary,  and  Judicial  Oratory,  witli  Historical  Illustraticns  To  which 
is  prefixed,  an  Introduction  to  the  Study  and  Practice  of  Eloquence.  By  THOMAS 
BROWN,  LL.D  Author  of  the  "  Union  Dictionary,"  &c.  &c.  In  3  vols.  8vo.  Price 
U.  lis.  6(1  Boards. 

"  We  cannot  take  our  Iravc  of  thij  puWication  without  expressine  our  high  approbation  of  it> 
dpsisn  I!!'  'xecutiiin,  and  of  recommend  ng  it  to  the  perusal  and  study  of  all  who  wish  to  torm 
a  ju^t  estimate  of  the  or«'orical  talents  of  tht-  eminent  nn  n,  whose  speeches  it  exhibits,  or 
10  iaiprove  themselves  in  Hue  noble  art  of  eloquence."    Ann,  Rev. 

ADVICE  to   YOUNG    LADIES    on   the   IMPROVEMENT  of 

the  MIND,  and  the  CONDUCT  of  HFR.  By  TftOMAS  BROADHURST.  Tht  Second 
Edition,  greatly  improved.    Price  5s.  Boards. 

♦Mtis  inipoasibieto  read  these  pages  without  leeling  a  respect  for  the  aiitlior,  who  has  addressed 
bis  pupils  in  such  a  strain  of  calm  good  sense,  and  witli  so  warm  and  atleciionaie  a  solicitude  for 
their  welfare  Mere  are  no  tricks  of  composition,  to  flatter  the  ear  and  deceive  the  understand- 
ing, but  chaste  principles  are  iticulcated  in  chaste  unaffected  language.  Advi<  e  on  the  variou». 
«jbj!cts  of  litcratuie,  science,  and  moral  conduct  is  rarely  given  in  a  more  enjaging  manner." 
An.  Htv. 

MORAL    TALES   for    YOUNG    PEOPLE.      By    Mrs.    IVES 

HURRY.     In  l2mo.  Price  4*.  Boards. 

"  Agrecablv  to  the  intention  of  the  author,  these  Tales  are  calculated  for  the  use  of  juvenile 
readers,  ihc  different  eifects  *hicli  rbllow  cither  a  judicious  and  praiseworthy,  or  iin  impropei* 
and  wicked  conduct  in  young  persons,  are  forcibly  pourLrayed,  and  t  bus  are  many  good  lessons 
for  a  proper  demeanor  pleasingly  taught."    um.  Riv. 

An  INTRODUCTION  to  the  THEORY  and  PRACTICE  of 
PLAIN  and  SPHERICAL  TRIGONOMETRY,  and  the  Stereographic  Projection  of  the 
Sphere:  including  the  Theory  of  Navigation ;  comprehending  a  Variety  of  Rules, 
Formulae,  &c.  with  their  practical  Applications  to  the  Mensuration  of  Heights  and 
Distances,  to  determining  the  Latituoe  by  two  Altitudes  of  the  Sun,  the  Longitude  by 
the  Lunar  Observations,  an-i  to  other  important  Problem^-  on  the  Sphere,  and  on  Nau' 
tical  Astrotwmy.  By  THOMAS  KEITH,  Private  Teacher  of  Mathematics.  In  3vo. 
Price  12y.  Boards.    The  Second  Edition,  corre'  ted  and  improved. 

An  INTRODUCTION  to  the  KNOWLEDGE  of  rare  and  valu- 
able Editiotis  of  th-e  GREEK  and  LATIN  CLASSICS,  including  an  Account  of  Polyglot 
Bibles;  the  best  Gietk,  and  Greek  and  Latin  Editions  of  the  Sepluagint  and  New 
Testament,  the  Scriptores  de  Re  Rustica,  Greek  Romances,  and  Lexicons,  and  Gram  • 
mars.  By  the  Rev.  T.  FROGNALL  DIBDIN,  F.  S.  A.  In  2  vols,  crown:  8vo.  The 
Third  Edition,  with  additional  Authors,  anid  Biographical  Notices  (chiefly  of  English 
Authors.)  Pi-Ice  iSs.  in  Boards. 

•'  We  are  deciuti)!i  of  op'niin  liiat  np  bibliographical  collection  can  be  compUte  without 
Mr.  Dibdin's  volumes,  which  ;ire,  ind-  p'-wlent  of  the  solid  information  they  contain,  frequfntiy 
en!iv<ne'1  by  literary  anecdotes,  and  r< ndered  generallj  interesting  by  great  var+ety  of  obser- 
vation and  acuteness  of  remark."     rrir  crit. 

An  ABRIDGMENT  of  Mr  PINKERTON'S  MODERN  GEO- 
GRAPHY i  and  Professor  VINCE'S  ASTRONOMICAL  INTRODUCTION.  In  I  large 
vol.  8vo.  with  a  Selection  of  tht  most  useful  Maps,  accurately  copied  from  those  m 
the  larger  Work,  all  .vhich  wer^  drawn  under  tne  Direction  and  with  the  latest  Im- 
provements of  ArrowsmJth.    Thud  Edition.  Price  18s.  bound. 

An  INTRODITCTICN  to  Mr.  PINKERTON'S  ABRIDGMENT 

of  his  MODERN'  GEOGRAPHY,  for  the  Use  of  Schools,  accompanied  with  Twenty 
outline  Maps,  adapted  to  this  lutrjducjon,  and  suited  to  other  Geographical  Works, 
forming  a  complete  Juvenile  Atbs.  By  JOHN  WILLIAMS.  In  I  vol.  12mo.  Price 
4?.  bound;  and  with  the  Atlas,  consisting  of  Twenty  Maps,  8s.  Od.  The  Atlas  sepa- 
rate, 45-  6d- 

"Mr.  Williams  has  executed  hi-?  undertaking  with  (rre*t  judgment  and  ability;  and  we  cor- 
diriU-  rtco  '-nieod  his  work  ah  one  oi  the  ben  ?dapted  to  its  ohj.Ci  of  any  that  have  coine  under 
our  inspection.  The  outline  map,  Utsigntd  (o  accompany  this  introduction,  will  be  io\x\i(i  of 
great  service."    Ann.  Rfv. 

PINKERTON'S  SCHOOL  ATLAS,  ccufainini?  21  Maps  neatPy 

coloured.    Price  l'.?.*;.  half  bound. 

A  GRAMM  'R    of  the   GREEK  L.^NGUAGE,    on  a  new   and 

improved  Plan,  in  English  and  Greik.  By  JOHN  JOnES,  Member  of  the  Philolofjical 
Society  at  Manchester.     Neatly  printed  in  12mo.    The  Second  E  lit.  Price  6  .  in  BJs. 

"  1  IS  wuik  ib  in  reality  what  in  the  ti  le-pa;:;  it  ;,>-,,f,<!sts  tc  bf.  ;'.  (Jreei*  Orainnur  upon  an 
imfroved,  .is  well  as  a  riftv  .ilan.  W.-  c  nnot  h.ic  egard  Mr.  Jones's  uicsk  f.rainmar  as  a  book 
thai  will  be  peculiarly  sciviceiible  to  those  who  stuoy  m  teach  the  »>re''k  language."  I-i.f. 
Rev.  "  It  cxliibits  -nany  proofs  of  ingcriiity  and  ex!cnsive"researc!i,  ot  a  mind  acu:e  and 
vigorous,  and  habitually,  £.nd  oflinsucceSifully,'  employed  ir,  philosoiihical  inrcsligationi."    Am. 


Books  printed  for  Longjnan  and  Co.  9^ 

INSTITUTES  OF  LATIN  GRAMMAR.    By  JOHN  GRANT, 

A.  M.    In  8vo.     Price  1()5.  6d.  in  Boards. 

This  Work  is  chiefly  designed  for  Schools,  and  is  intended  not  to  supersede  the 
Use  of  our  common  Grammars,  but  to  supply  their  Defects.  Its  primary  Object  is  to 
furnish  the  Senior  Scholar  with  a  complete  Digest  of  the  Rules  and  Principles  of  the 
Latin  Language,  and  to  aftbrd  the  Teacher  a  uselfnl  Book  of  occasional  Reference. 

"These  instiiu'es  display  considerable  abilitv,  great  diligence,  and  pbllosophicai  insight,  into 
the  structure  of  language."    M.  Rm 

A  VOCABULARY;  Enelish  and  Greek,  anan^ed  systematically, 

to  advance  the  Learner  in  scientific  as  well  as  vtrbal  Knowledge.  Designed  for  the  Use 
of  «chools.     By  NATHANIEL  HOWARD.  Price  '3s. 

"  The  Greek  laneuage  is  3o  copious  that  few  pt-rsons  ever  master  the  vocabulary.-  The  present 
work  is  well  calculated  to  expedite  the  kno  vledtfc  ol  those  terms  of  natural  history,  of  art,  and 
sctence,  which  &k  commonly  the  last  learned,  and  the  first  lorgotun." 

A  CONCISE  VIEW  of  the  CONSTITUTION  of  ENGLAND. 

By  GEORGE  CUSTANCE,  Third  Edition,  improved  and  enlarged,  bvow  Price  \0s.  bd. 
Boards,  and  in  12mo.  Price  7s.  Boards. 

"  We  most  8incer»4v  congratulate  the  Public  on  the  appearance  of  a  work,  which  we  can  safeir 
recommend  as  well  fitted  to  su  ply  a  chasm  in  our  system  of  public  instruction.  Of  the  merits 
of  tiie  work,  the  Public  may  form  some  judgment,  when  we  inform  them  that  it  contains  whatever 
IS  mo^l  interesting  to  the  general  resder  m  Blackstone,  together  with  much  useful  inforraation 
derived  Irom  Hrofesjor  Clirisiian,  I)e  Lolme,  and  various  other  eminent  ajthors."    Eclectic  Rev. 

An    INTRODUCTION    to    PRACTICAL    ARITHMETIC,    in 

Two  Parts,  with  various  Notes  and  occasional  Directions  for  the  Use  of  Learners. 
By  THOMAS  MOLINEAUX,  many  years  Teacher  of  Accounts,  Short-hand,  and  the 
Mathematics,  at  the  Free  School  in  Maccleshekl.  The  Eighth  Edition,  in  12mo.  Part  1. 
Price  2s.  6d.  bound. 

An    INTRODUCTION    to    PRACTICAL    ARITHMETIC,  in 

Two  Parts,  with  various  Notes,  and  occasional  Directions  for  the  Use  of  Learners, 
By  THOMAS  MOLINEUX,  many  years  Teacher  of  Accounts,  Short-hand,  and  the 
Mathematics,  at  the  Free  Grammar  School  in  Macclestield.  The  Third  Edition. 
Part  II.    Price  2j,  bd, 

THE  UNION  DICTIONARY;  containing  all  that  is  truly  tiseful 

iH  the  Dictionaries  of  Johnson,  Sheridan,  and  Walker  :  the  Orthography  and  expla- 
natory Matter  selected  from  Dr,  Johnsoii,  trie  Pronunciation  adjusted  according  to 
Mr.  Walker,  with  the  Addition  of  Mr,  Sheridan's  Pronunciation  of  those  Words 
wherein  these  two  eminent  Orthoepisis  differ. 

The  whole  designed  to  present  to  the  Reader,  at  one  View,  the  Orthography,  Expla- 
nation, PronunciatioJlj  and  Accentnation  of  all  the  purest  and  most  approved  Terms 
m  the  English  Language.  With  about  two  Thousand  additional  Words,  deduceo 
from  the  best  modern  Authorities.  By  THOMAS  BROWNE,  LL.  D  Author  of  a 
"  New  Classical  Dictionary,"  Viridarium  Poeticum,"  &c.  In  1  vol.  crown  8vo. 
Price  10s.  6d.  bound,  the  Third  Edition,  with  numerous  Additions  and  Improvements. 

EXERCISES   to   the   ACCIDENCE   and   GRAMMAR     or,   aa 

Exemplification  of  the  several  Moods  and  Tenses,  and  of  the  principal  Rules  of  Con- 
struction ;  consisting  chiefly  of  Moral  Sentences,  collected  out  of  the  best  Roman 
Authors,  and  translated  into  English,  to  be  rendered  back  into  Latin,  the  Latin 
Words  being  set  in  the  opposite  Column,  with  References  to  the  Latm  Syntax;  and 
Notes.  By  WILLIAM  TURNER,  M-  A.  late  Master  of  the  Free  School  at  Colchester. 
The  Twentieth  Edition.    Price  2s.  M.  bound. 

TERMINATIONES    et    EXEMPLA    DECLINATIONUM    et 

CONJUGATIONUM  ITEMUUE  PROPRIA  QU^  MARiBUS,  Q.\]m.  GENUS  et  AS  IN 
PRiESENri,  Englisned  and  explained,  for  the  Use  of  young  Grammarians.  Opera  et 
studio  CAROLI  HOOLE,  M.  A.  E.  Col.  e  Oxon  Scholarchae  olim  Rotheramiensis  egro 
Ebor.     la  iBnio.     Price  U.  tict.  bound. 

An  ABRIDGMENT,  of  AINSWORTH'S  DICTIONARY,  En^tlish 

and  Latin,  designed  for  the  Use  of  Schoids.  By  THOMAS  MORRELL,  D.  D.  Rector 
of  Buckland,  in  Hertfordshire,  and  F.S.  S.  R.  and  A.  In  bvo.  Price  15s.  bound.  The 
Eighth  Edition. 

RULES  for   ENGLISH    COMPOSIITON,   and    particularly  for 

Theines.  Designed  for  the  Use  of  Schools,  and  in  .Aid  of  Self-Instruction.  By  .JOHN 
RiPPINGHAM,  Private  Tutor  at  Westminster  School.     In  1  vol.  12mo.  price  2>s.  6d. 

A  GREEK  GRAMMAR, an<l  Greek  and  En<,dish  Scripture  Lexicon, 

containing  all  the  Words  which  occur  in  the  Septuagint  and  Apocrypha,  as  well  as  iu 
tiie  New  Testament.  By  GREVILLE  EWING,  Minister  of  the  Gospel,  Glasgow.  TUu 
Hecoud  Edition,  greatly  enlarged,  royal  Octavo,  Price  15«.  Boards. 


iO  Books  printed  for  Longman  and  Co. 

A    GAZETTEER   of  the  BRITISH    ISLANDS;    or  a  TOFO- 

GRAPHICAL  DICTIONARY  of  the  UNITED  KINGDOM,  containing  full  modern  De- 
scriptions from  the  best  Authorities,  of  every  County,  City,  Borough,  Town,  Village 
Parish,  Township,  Hamlet,  Castle,  and  Nobleman's  Seat,  in  Great  Britain  and  Ireland. 
By  BENJAMIN  PITTS  CAPPER,  Esq.  of  the  Secretary  of  State's  Office;  Editor  of  the 
Imperial  C^ilendar,  of  the  Population  Returns,  &c.  &c.  Illustrated  with  Forty-six  New 
County  Maps.  Price  1/.  6s.  bound  and  lettered,  or  ii.  Us.  (5d.  elegantly  bound,  and 
the  Maps  coloured. 

This  volume  furnis  a  library  of  itself, 'or  part  of  the  library  of  every  Englishman  ;  and  dtservej, 
by  its  great  interest  and  indispensable  utility,  to  be  found  in  every  house  in  the  Empire,  it  is  not 
an  ephemeral  production,  but  a  work  of  vast  labour,  research  wid  expense,  ami  a  standing  autho- 
rity on  all  the  points  ol  which  it  treats. 

A  COMMERCIAL  DRTTIONARY;   or,  COUNTING-HOUSE 

LIBRARY,  containing  full  and  accurate  Information  relative  to  all  the  Details  6f  the 
Trade,  Commerce,  Pro.iuctions  and  Manufactures  of  the  wh -le  World.;  with  the  Com- 
mercial Laws  of  England,  and  ttt'e  Names  of  all  Commodities,  in  Ten  Modern  Lan- 
guages. By  THOMAS  MORTIMER,  Ef.q.  formerly  Vice-consul  at  Ostend.  Price 
1/.  &s.  bound  and  lettered,  or  1/.  7«.  elegantly  bound. 

THE    UNIVERSAL    BIOGRAPHICAL,   HISTORICAL,    and 

CHRONOLOGICAL  DICTIONARY,  including  thirteen  thousand  Lives  of  eminent  Per- 
sons of  all  Ages  and  Nations,  the  succession  of  Sovereign  Princes,  and  above  twenty- 
live  thousand  Dates,  revised,  enlarged,  and  brought  down  to  the  present  Time.  By 
JOHN  WATKINS,  L  L.  D,    Price  19a-.  bound  and  lettered,  or  U.  elegantly  bound. 


WORKS  BY  LINBLEY  MUKRAV. 
An  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR,  comprehending  the  PRINCIPLES 

and  RULES  of  the  LANGUAGE,  illustrated  by  appropriate  Exercises,  and  a  Key  to 
the  Exercises.  By  LINDLEY  MURRAY.  In  y  vols.  3vo.  The  Second  Edition.  Price 
U.ls.  in  boards. 

"  We  are  of  opinion,  that  fhisedition  of  Mr.  Murray's  work  on  English  Gtammar  deserves  a  place 
in  libraries,  and  will  not  fail  to  obtain  it."    Brit  Crit. 

An  ENGLISH  SPELLING  BOOK;  with  Reading  Lessons  adapted 

to  the  Capacities  of  Children :  in  Three  Parts,  calculated  to  advance  the  Learners  by 
natural  and  easy  Gradations  j  and  to  teach  Orthography  and  Pronunciation  together. 
By  LINDLEY  MURRAY.     Iti  demy  l8mo.    Twelfth  Edition.     Price  U.  6d.  bound. 

"  We  recommend  to  the  Public  this  most  important  little  volume,  as  the  only  work  with  which 
we  arc  acquainted,  in  the  English  Language,  for  teaching  cliildren  to  read,  wri.len  by  a  pin- 
losopher  and  a  man  o»  taste."  Ltt.  J  ^um.  "  We  can  recommend  it  as  the  bist  work  ot  t  le  Kmi 
which  has  lately  fallen  under  our  inspection."  Ami  jfac.  •■  in  this  book  are  several  useful  lungs 
not  commonly  found  in  such  works."  Hrit  crit.  "  This  little  book  is  singulaily  weil  adapted 
to  answer  the  purpose  for  which  it  is  int.nded."  M.  Rtrt.  "Mi.  Ifurray  has  comppsed  one 
of  the  best  elementary  b<  oks  for  children  in  th^  English  language."  Crit  «*v.  "  Ihis  is  a  very 
neat  and  useful  elementary  book."    Chr.  '>/> 

FIRST  BOOK  FOR  CHILDREN. 

By  LINDLEY  MURRAY.    Sixth  Edition.     Price  6d.  sewed. 
"   This  very  improved  frinier  is  iniended    to  prepare  the   leari;er  tor   ilic   above-menlionid 
Spelling  Book,  and  is  particularly  intended  by  the  author  to  assist  mothers  in  the   instruction 
of  their  young  children."    M.  Hiv. 

ENGLISH  GRAMMAR,  adapted  to  the  different  Classes  of  Learn- 
ers. With  an  Appendix,  containing  Rules  and  Observations  for  assisting  the  mor« 
advanced  Students  to  write  with  Perspicuity  and  Accuracy.  By  LINDLEY  MURRAY, 
Twenty-tirst  Edition.    Price  4$.  bound. 

An  ABRIDGMENT  of  MURRAY'S  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR 

With  an  Appendix,  containing  Exercises  in  Parsing,  in  Orthography,  in  Syntax,  anc 
in  Punctuation,  Designed  for  the  younger  Claises  of  Learners.  Thirty-second  Eaition 
Price  Is.  bound. 

ENGLISH  EXERCISES,   adapted   to   MURRAY'S   ENGLISH 

GRAMMAR;  consisting  of  Exemplifications  of  the' Parts  ot  Speech,  Instances  of  fals( 
Orthography,  Violations  of  the  Rules  of  Syntax,  Defects  in  Punctuation,  and  Violation 
ol'  the  Rules  respecting  Perspicuitv  and  Accvtracy.  Designed  fo;  the  Benefit  of  privali 
Learners,  as  well  *s  foi  lUe  Uit  of  Schools.    Fifteenth  EdUioa.    Price  2s.  6ct, 


Books  printed  Jor  Longman  and  Co.  1 1 

A  KEY  to  the   ENGLISH   EXERCISES  ;    calculated  to  enable 

prjvata  Learners  to  become  their  own  Instructors  in  Grammar  and  Composition. 
Eleventh  Edition.  Price  2i.  6d,  bound.  The  Exercises  and  Key  may  be  had  together, 
I»rice  4y.  6d.  f 

'•  Mr.  Mirray's  English  Grammar,  English  Exercises,  and  Abrt^Bment  of"  the  Grammar, 
Cl.nm  our  aixniioa  on  accooDl  of  tlieir  being  composed  on  the  principle  we  liarc  so  frequently 
r*r<mmendtd,  ot  conibining  rfliRiou"!  and  moral  improvement  wiih  the  elements  of  scientific 
knuwiedijc.  Tlie  late  learred  Dr.  BUir  gave  his  opinion  of  it  in  the  following  terms: — '  Mr.  Lindley 
Mu(  ray's  Grammar,  with  the  Exercises  and  the  Key,  in  a  separate  volume,  I  esteem  as  a  most  ex- 
cellent perfoniince,  I  think  it  superior  to  any  work  of  that  nature  we  have  yet  had;  and  am 
persuaded  that  1' i<,  by  much,  the  bf  at  Grammar  <4  the  EnglisU  language  extant,  nn  Syntax  in 
par'tcuUr,  ):••  has  shown  a  wonderful  degree  of  acutepess  and  precision,  in  asceriaining  the 
proprietv  i;f  lanfMagc.  and  in  rectifyins:  the  n  Jmherless  errors  which  writers  are  apt  to  commit. 
Most  useful  these  bor  ks  must  certainly  be  toali  who  are  applying  themselves  to  the  arts  of  comp»- 
•itton  "    Gua'd.  of  Eiuc. 

INTRODUCTION  to  the  ENGLISH  READER :  or,  a  Selection 

of  PiecP3,  in  Prpse  and  Poetry,  See.  By  LINDLEY  MURRAY.  Ninth  Edition.  Price 
3s.  bound. 

"  Tni'i  Introduction  may  he  safely  rccononended,  and  put  into  the  hands  of  youth:  and  the 
rules  and  observations  for  assisti'ig  them  to  read  with  propriety,  form  to  it  a  very  sjitaWe  Intro- 
doction."     M.  Rev. 

THE  ENGLISH   READER;   or,  Pieces  in  Prose   and   Poetry. 

■selected  from  the  best  Writers.  Designed  to- assist  young  Persons  to  read  with  Propriety 
and  Effect;  to  improve  th'-ir  Language  and  Sentiments;  and  to  inculcate  some  of  the 
most  important  Principles  of  Piety  and  Virtue.  With  a  few  prehrainary  Observations 
on  the  Principles  of  good  Reading.  By  LINDLEY  MURRAY.  Tenth  Edition.  Price 
4?-  Gd.  bound. 

"  'liie  selections  are  made  witti  good  ta-tc,  and  with  a  view  to  moral  and  religious  impr»Tcmenf, 
as  well  as  mere  entertainment." 

SEQUEL  to  the  ENGLISH  READER  ;  or,  Elegant  Selections  in 

Prose  and  Poetry.     Designed  to  improve  the  higher  Class  of  Learners  in  Reading;  to 
Establish  a  Taste  for  just  and  accurate  Composition;  and  to  promote  the  Interests  of 
Piety  »id  Virtue.     By  LINDLEY  MURRAY.     Third  Edition.     Price  4-$.  6d.  bound. 
"  We  have  no  hesitation  in  recommending  this  Selection  as  the  best  of  its  kind-"    Crit.  Rirt. 

LECTEUR  FRANCOIS;  ou,  Recueilde Pieces, en  Prose  et en  Verse, 

tirees  des  Meilleurs  Ecrivains,  pour  servir  a  perfectionner  les  jeunes  Gens  dans  la 
■iecture;  a  etendre  leur  Connoissance  de  la  Langue  Francois;  et  a  leur  inculquer 
des  Principes  de  Vertu  et  de  Piete.  Par  LINDLEY  MURRAY.  Second  Edition.  Price 
4*.  6d.  bound. 

•'  Especial  care  has  been  taken  to  render  the  study  of  eloquence  subseiTient  to  virtue,  and  to 
introduce  oii!>  sucii  pieces  as  shall  answer  the  d  >ub!e  purpose  of  promoting  pool  principlca, 
and  a  correcj  and  elegant  taste.  Tins  will,  no  doubt,  be  found  a  very  useful  scbool  book," 
M.  R^  "  iTie  snideni  will  find  his  advantage  in  maki/ig  use  of  this  work,  as  he  will  be  sure 
^o  form  his  tastt  after  the  mast  correct  models."    '>'f   Rtv 

INTRODUCTION  AU    LECTEUR  FRANCOIS:    on,  Recucil 

de  Pieces  choises  ;  avec  I'F.xplication  des  Idiotismes  et  des  Phrases  difficiles,  qui 
s'y  trouvent.    Par  LINDLEY  MURRAY.     In  12mo.  Price  3s.  6d.  boards. 

*•  Mr.  Murray  has  exercise<l  bis  usual  cautio*  and  judgment  in  these  selections."  Anti-Jac. 
"  Not  a  sentiment  has  been  admitttd  which  can  hurt  the  most  delicate  mind  ;  and  in  many  of 
the  pieces  piety  and  virtue  arc  placed  in  the  most  amiable  and  a'lractive  points  of  new."    Gent. 

A  SELECTION    from   BISHOP    HORNE'S    COMMENTARY 

on  the  PSALMS.  By  LINDLEY  MURRAY,  Author  of  an  English  Grammar,  &c.  la 
1  vol.  l2mo.    Price  5s.  boards. 

♦«*  This  Selection  is  adapted  to  readers  who  wish  to  cultivate  a  serious  and  pious  temper 
of  mind  ;  and  is  particularly  calculated  to  cherish,  in  the  minds  of  youth,  sentiments  of  love 
and  gr"itude  towards  the  Author  of  iheir  being,  for  person'  who  have  not  much  leisure  for 
reading,  and  tor  the  higher  classes  in  schools  occasionally,  the  work  is  especially  designed: 
and  for  this  purpose,  it  is  further  recommended  by  tlie  purity  and  elegance  of  its  language,  ihe 
^correctness  an;i  excellence  of  its  composition. 

THE  POWER  of  RELIGION  on  the  MIND,   in  Retirement, 

Affliction,  and  at  the  Approach  of  Death;  exemplified  in  the  Testimonies  and  Expe- 
rience of  Persons  distioguished  by  their  Greatness,  Learning,  or  Virtue.  By  LIND- 
LEY MURRAY,  Author  of  English  Grammar,  &c.  In  One  Volume  8vo.  Price  12*. 
boards.    The  Fifteenth  Edition. 

The  Octava  edition  of  this  Work  is  printed  with  a  fine  Pica  letter,  on  superfine 
paper,  and  in  an  open  and  attractive  form.  The  proprietors  flatter  themselves,  that 
thi.s  neat  and  elegant  edition  of  the  virork  will  be  acceptable  to  many  readers,  and  be 
found  well  adapted  to  public,  as  well  as  to  private  libraries. 

"  I'he  examples  «.liich  Mr  Murray  has  here  selected,  and  the  judicious  reflections  which  accom- 
pany tiiera.are  such  as  can  scarceiy  fail  to  make  the  best  impressions,  and  to  produce  the  best 
effects,  on  all  who  read  them  wi'ii  attention."    Anfi-yac.  Rev. 

"  Mr.  Murray  hat  iurnished  an  intere.-^ting  collection  of  testimonies ;  and  we  wonder  not,  that 
a  work  so  instructive  and  amusing„as  well  as  impressive,  should  have  been  generally  p»troni^d. 
K  is  a  book  which  may  be  read  with  profit,  by  pei'sons  in  all  situations."    Mirt!^,  R"^'. 


1'2  Books  printed  for  Longman  and  Co. 

GRAMMATICAL   QUESTIONS,    adapted  to   the   Grammar  oi 

LTNDLEY  MURRAY,  with  Notes.  By  C.  BRADLEY,  A.M.  Price  2s.  6d.  bound. 
Tlie  2d  Eilition,  considerably  improved. 

"  We  iiave  no  iicsicaiion  in  fecoinitiending  these  Questions  to  all  those  who  use  Murray's  Crair  - 
mar  ,  ilie  notes,  wljiih  discover  consiiWrable  reading  and  discnniination,  are  panicularly  worinv 
ot  aitenfioii."    Ami  Jac, 

FIRST  LESSONS  in  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR,  adapted  to  the 

Oapacitus  of  Children,  from  six  to  ten  Years  old.  Designed  as  an  Introduction  to  tfie 
Abridgment  ot  Murray's  Grammaj-.     Price  9rf.  sewed. 

PUNCTUATION  ;  or,  an  Attempt  to  facilitate  the  Art  of  poinfing 

a  written  Composition,  on  the  Principles  of  Grammar  and  Reason.  For  the  Use  of 
Schools,  and  the  Assistance  of  general  Readers.    By  S.  ROUSSEAU.     l2mo. 

LESSONS  for  YOUNG  PERSONS  in  HUMBLE  LIFE,  caUu- 

lated  to  promote  their  Improvement  in  the  Art  of  Reading,  in  Virtue  and  Piety,  and 
particularly  in  the  Knowledge  of  the  Duties  peculiar  to  their  Stations.  Tlie  Third 
Edition.     Price  3«.  6d.  boards.  •    "  .' 

'  Very  neally  prinifcd,  and  well  selected,  containing  a  fjrrat  store  of  instruction  in  a  Smalf 
compass."  ^rit  Crit.  "  In  appearance,  ciieapnes.s,  and  niorxl  tendency,  tlils  conijiilation  re- 
sembles iliose  of  the  excellcn!  LinUley  Murray.  It  incultaes  the  most  useful  sentiments  in  a 
very  suiiable   tonn,    and  well  deserves  patronage."    Eclectic  Rev. 

TRUE  STORIES ;    or,  Interesfing  Anecdotes  of  Young  Persons, 

desia;ned,  through  the  medium  of  example,  to  inculcate  Principles  of  Virtue  andj  Piety. 
By  the  Author  of  '' Lessons  for  young  Persons  in  humble  Life,"  &c.  in  12mo.  Price 
4v.  (ni.  boards. 

TRUE  STORIES:  or,  Interesting  Anecdotes  of  Children,  designed, 

through  the  medium  of  example,  to  inculcate  Principles  of  Virtue  and  Piety.  PrHre 
2s.  fid.  in  boards,  embellished  with  an  emblematical  Frontispiece.  ••  • 

A  FRIENDLY  GIFT  for    SERVANTS  and  APPRENTICES; 

containing  the  Character  of  a  good  and  faithful  Servant,  Adwce  to-Servants  of  every 
Denomination,  Letter  from  an  Uncle  to  his  Nephew,  on  taking  him  Apprentice;  and 
Anecdotes  of  good  and  faithful  Servants.  By  the  Author  of  "Lessons  for  young 
Persons  in  humble  Life."— Price  9d. 

ROSE  AND   EMILY;    or,   Sketches   of  Youth.     By  Mrs.  RO- 

BERTS,  Author  of  Mental  Telescope.     I2mo. 


Shortly  will  be  published^ 
THE  HISTORY  of  ENGLAND.  By  J.  BIGLAND.  In  2  vols.  8vo. 

THE   ELEMENTS  of   PLANE  GEOMETRY,  comprehending 

the  First  Six  Books  of  Euclid,  from  the  Text  of  Dr.  Simson,  with  Notes,  Critical  and 
Explanat<jry.  To  which  is  added,  Book  VII.  containing  several  important  Propositions 
which  are  not  in  Euclid,  and  Book  Vlll.  consisting  of  Practical  Geometry.  The  whole 
explained  in  an  easy  aud  familiar  Manner,  for  the  lastruction  of  Young  Students.  By 
THOMAS  KEITH,  Private  Teacher  of  Mathematics. 

An    INTRODUCTION  to  a  SYSTEMATIC  EDUCATION^  ii 

the  various  Departments  of  POLITE  LITERATURE  and  SCIENCE:  with  Practical 
Rules  for  the  best  Methods  of  .'studying  each  Branch  cfI'  Useful  Knowledge,  and  Direc- 
tions to   the  most  approved  Auth'oTS.      Illustrated  with  Plates,  by  Lowry.     Tn  T" 
Volumes,  Octavo.     By  the  Rev.  WILLIAM  SHEPHERD,  Author  of  the  Life  of  I'o^. 
Br^cehiolJnj  arid  the  Rev.  J.  JOYCE,  Author  of  Scientific  Dialogues. 


I 


14  DAY  USE 

RETURN  TO  DESK  FROM  WHICH  BORROWED 

LOAN  DEPT. 

This  book  is  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below,  or 
on  the  date  to  which  renewed. 
B  Renewed  books  are  subject  to  immediate  recall. 


^iOct'euh 


^^'' 


■-f^ 


^ 


EB8   'SOlftW 


8reb'6^L'iy 


REC'P  tP 


3^)HTr^ 


-2^ 


6«^ 


20Api'65BG 


ta  oj.,ci,  ^y 


RCC'P  LP 


ftPH'20'65-UftM 


/•111 


2^iVg^^^ 


PHOTC  copy  APR  1    '87 


REC'P  LP 


JIH 


30'e4-ipw 


LD  21A-50m-12,'60 
(B6221sl0)476B 


General  Library 
University  of  California 


VB  387(5